1991 ServiceManual Mitsubishi 3000GT

Volume lm
I k ,6
I I
Engine, Chassis & Body
GROUP INDEX
General .............................................
MOOAA- -A
Engine .............................................. BackupServiceManual L Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3OOOG-r
Cooling ............................................. Intake and Exhaust ..........................
1991: Volume 1
FOREWORD
This Service Manual has been prepared with the latest service information available at the time of publication. It is subdivided into various group categories and each section contains diagnosis, disassembly, repair, and installation procedures along with complete specifications and tightening references. Use of this manual will aid in properly performing any servicing necessary to maintain or restore the high levels of performance and reliability designed into these outstanding vehicles.
Emission Control ............................. Clutch ................................................ Manual Transaxle ............................ Automatic Transaxle ....................... Propeller Shaft ................................. Front Axle ......................................... Rear Axle .......................................... Wheel and Tire ................................. Power Plant Mount .......................... Front Suspension ............................ Electronic Control Suspension ....... Rear Suspension .............................. Service Brakes ................................. Parking Brakes .................................
WE SUPPORT VOLUNTARY TECHNICIAN CERTIFICATION THROUGH

National ,nwtute or
I/
II
/I
Steering ............................................ 4-Wheel Steering System (4WS) Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..*.............................
AUTOMOTIVE SERVICE EXCELLSNCE
MITSUBISHI
/
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..*..........**............. Interior ..*............*......*....................... Su;$emental Restraint System ....
MOTOR SALES OF AMERICA. Inc.

Mitsubishi Motors Corporation reserves the right to make changes in design or to make addltlons to or tmprovements in Its products without Imposing any obligations upon Itself to install them on its products previously manufactured.
@ 1990 Mitsubishi Motors Corporation
li
Heater, Air Conditioner *......*........... and Ventilation
Rqwinted in USA
I
I
NOTE: For Electrical, refer to Volume-2 Electrical I I
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)

(1) A Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), which uses a driver-side air bag, has been installed in the 3000GT. (2) The SRS includes the following components: impact sensors, SRS diagnosis unit; SRS warning light, dir J bag module, clock spring, interconnecting wiring. Other SRS-related components (that may have to be removed/installed in connection with SRS service or maintenance) are indicated in the table of contents by an asterisk (*). The Supplemental Restraint System (SRSI-related components are shown in the following MASTER TABLE OF CONTENTS. Be sure to carefully read and understand the WARNING below before proceeding.
Group number FUEL 22.23 32 MANUALTRANSAXLE. AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE POWER PLANT MOUNT ELECTRONIC CONTROL SUSPENSION 36 PARKING BRAKES STEERING Group name SRS-related components CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM TRANSAXLE CONTROL RIGHT MEMBER, LEFT MEMBER AND CROSSMEMBER STEERING ANGULAR VELOCITY SENSOR PARKING BRAKE LEVER AND PARKiNG BRAKE CABLE / POWER STEERING GEAR BOX / STEERING WHEEL AND SHAFT 42 52A BODY INTERIOR FENDER FLOOR CONSOLE FRONT SEAT INSTRUMENT PANEL SEAT BELT CHASSIS ELECTRICAL COLUMN SWITCH HORN SWITCH IGNITION SWITCH RADIO REMOTE-CONTROL HEATER, AIR CONDITIONER AND VENTILATION AIR-CONDITIONER CONTROL PANEL AIR-CONDITIONER CONTROL UNIT / DAMPER CONTROL MOTOR ASSEMBLY / HEATER CONTROL ASSEMBLY HEATER UNIT. VENTILATORS (INSTRUMENT PANEL) 1 P.55-18 1 P.55-22 P.55-36 / P.52A-11 P52A-18 P.52A-8 P.52A-25 P.54-73 P.54-78 1 P.54-6 / P.54.110 P.55-56 I I P.32-6 P.33B-19 / P.36~5 / P.37A-17 j P.37A-13 I / P.13-185
WARNING! (1) Improper service or maintenance of any component of the SRS, or any SRSrelated component, can lead to personal injury or death to service personnel (from inadvertent firing of the air bag) or to the driver (from rendering the SRS inoperative). (2) If it is possible that the SRS components are subjected to heat over 93C (260F) in baking or in drying after painting, remove the SRS components (air bag module, SRS diagnosis unit, front impact sensors) beforehand. (3) Service or maintenance of any SRS component or SRS-related component must be perfarmed only at an authorized MITSUBISHI dealer. (4) MITSUBISHI dealer personnel must thoroughly review this manual, and especially its GROUP 52B - Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), before beginning any service or maintenance of any component of the SRS or any SRS-related component.
1 TSB Revision
00-I
GENERAL
CONTENTS
GENERAL DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . 21 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Definition of Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Explanation of Circuit Diagrams . . . . . .._........... Explanation of Manual Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Explanation of the Troubleshooting Guide . . Model Indications Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Transaxle . . . . . . . . . .._........................_....... Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._..._.._..____.._....... Timing Belt
MOOOA-
36 39 43
3
3 7 4 6 3 3 3
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._............... 37 ........................................................ 37 24
MASTER TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRECAUTIONS BEFORE SERVICE ................
, b
............................................
Scope of Maintenance, Repair and Servicing Explanations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . .._.......................................
15
32 35
RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND LUBRICANT CAPACITIES TABLE . . . . . . .._........ SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE TABLE . . . . . . . _. SPECIAL HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS FOR AWD MODELS . . . . . . . . . . . . .._...._........................ TIGHTENING TORQUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..__..................... TOWING AND HOISTING ................................
LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE
. . . . . . _. .
31
MAIN SEALANT AND ADHESIVE TABLE MAINTENANCE SERVICE

Air Cleaner Element
. . . 44
36 37
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _. . . _. . .__
20 23 16 8
. . . . . . .._......._......_................
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..._......._..... 40 Ball Joint and Steering Linkage Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Brake Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._......._.._...._......._.. Disc Brake Pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drive Shaft Boots Engine Coolant 42 42
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _. . .
Drive Belt (For Alternator) . . . . . . . . .._.........._.......... 38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 . . . . . . . . . . . . ..__.._............................. 41 Engine Oil .._....__._................................................. 38 Engine Oil Filter . . . . .._._.......__.................. . . . . . . . . . . . 39 43 Exhaust System _....._......._.....__._............,...........
Chassis Number . .._............................................ 10 Engine Model Stamping .._..........................._...._ 11 Theft Protection . . . . .._......................................... Vehicle Identification Code Chart Plate Vehicle Identification Number List Vehicle Identification Number Location .._..... . . . .._ .._._....._..._. 11 8 9 8 10 10
Vehicle Information Code Plate . . . . .._._......_....... Vehicle Safety Certification Label . . . ..I . . . . .._..._...
Fuel Hoses ..__......__............................................ 36
c.
GENERAL - How to Use This Manual
00-3
MOOBAAF
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL c;

SCOPE OF MAINTENANCE, REPAIR AND SERVICING EXPLANATIONS
This manual provides explanations, etc. concerning procedures for the inspection, maintenance, repair and servicing of the subject model. Unless otherwise specified, each service procedure covers all models. Procedures covering specific models are identified by the model codes, or similar designation (engine type, transaxle type, etc.). A description of these designations is covered in this unit under VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION.
DEFINITION OF TERMS
STANDARD VALUE
Indicates the value used as the standard for judging the quality of a part or assembly on inspection or the value to which the part or assembly is corrected and adjusted. It is given by tolerance.
LIMIT
Shows the standard for judging the quality of a part or assembly on inspection and means the maximum or minimum value within which the part or assembly must be kept functionally or in strength. It is a value established outside the range of standard value.
SERVICE ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES

Service Adjustment Procedures are procedures for performing inspections and adjustments of particularly important locations with regard to the construction and for maintenance and servicing, but other inspections (for looseness, play, cracking, damage, etc.) must also be performed.
REFERENCE VALUE
Indicates the adjustment value prior to starting the work (presented in order to facilitate assembly and adjustment procedures, and so they can be completed in a shorter time).
SERVICE PROCEDURES
The service steps are arranged in numerical order and attentions to be paid in performing vehicle service are described in detail in SERVICE POINTS.
CAUTION
Indicates the presentation of information particularly vital to the worker during the performance of maintenance and servicing procedures in order to avoid the possibility of injury to the worker; or damage to component .parts, or a reduction of component or vehicle function or performance, etc.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Troubleshootings are classified into master troubleshooting and group troubleshooting and located as follows: The master troubleshooting is prepared when the trouble symptom relates to two or more groups and given in MASTER TROUBLESHOOTING. The group troubleshooting guide is prepared for causes of problems related to that individual group only; a troubleshooting guide is prepared for each appropriate group.
INDICATION OF TIGHTENING TORQUE

The tightening torque shown in this manual is a basic value with a tolerance of +lO% except the following cases when the upper and lower limits of tightening torque are given. (1) The tolerance for the basic value is within +Ino/I iv,. (2) Special bolts or the like are in use. (3) Special tightening methods are used.
MODEL INDICATIONS
The following abbreviations are used in this manual for classification of model types. M/T: Indicates the manual transaxle, or models equipped with the manual transaxle. A/T: Indicates the automatic transaxle, or models equipped with the automatic transaxle. MPI: Indicates the multi-point injection, or engines equipped with the multi-point injection. Turbo: Indicates an engine with turbocharger, or a model equipped with such an engine. Non-Turbo: Indicates an engine without turbocharger, or a model equipped with such an engine. FWD: Indicates the front wheel drive vehicles. AWD; Indicates the all wheel drive vehicles. ABS: Indicates the anti-lock braking system or models equipped with the anti-lock braking system. ECS: Indicates the electronic control suspension or models equipped with the electronic control suspension. 4WS: Indicates the 4-wheel steering system or models .equipped with the 4-wheel steering system.
TSB Revision
GENERAL - How to Use This Manual EXPLANATION OF MANUAL CONTENTS
Indicates procedures to be performed before the work in that section is started, and procedures to be performed after the work in that section is finished.
Maintenance and Servicing Procedures
0 Removal steps: The part designation number corresponds to the (1) A diagram of the component parts is provided number in the illustration to indicate removal near the front of each section in order to give the steps. reader a better understanding of the installed l Disassembly steps: condition of component parts. The part designation number corresponds to the (2) The numbers provided within the diagram indicate number in the illustration to indicate disassembly the sequence for maintenance and servicing procedures; the symbol m indicates a non- . ln~~~~iion steps: reusable part; the tightening torque is provided Specified in case installation is impossible in where applicable. reverse order of removal steps. Omitted if installation is,possible in reverse order of removal steps. l Reassembly steps: Specified in case reassembly is impossible in reverse order of disassembly steps. Omitted if reassembly is possible in reverse order of disassembly steps.
Classifications of Major Maintenance/Service Points

When thereare major points relative to maintenance and servicing procedures (such as essential maintenance and service points, maintenance and service standard values, informatton regarding the use of special toois, etc.), these are arranged together as major maintenance and service points and explained in detail. **:lndicates that there are essential points for removal or disassembly. *+: Indicates that there are essential points for installation or reassembly.
Indicates (by symbols) where lubrication is necessary. In this example,
Symbols for Lubrication, Sealants and Adhesives

Information concerning the locations for lubrication and for application of sealants and adhesives is provided, by using symbols, in the diagram of component parts or on the page following the component parts page, and explained. G&: Grease (Multipurpose grease unless there is a brand or type specified) 4: Sealant or adhesive Brake fluid, automatic transmission fluid or a conditioner compressor oil Engine oil or gear oil Adhesive tape or butyl rubber tape
TSB Revision

Indicates the page number. \ -.37A-28
STEERING - Power Steering Gear Box
00-5
Denotes tightenrng
POWER STEERING GEAR BOX

REMOVAL AND INSTAUATION
1!3-20
Plm
Denotes non-reusable part.
-7
-Renloval steps 1 .Jrnyt assembly and gear box connecting 2. Connection for return tube 3.Connection for press.ure hose 4. cotter pm 5.T1erod end and knuckle connecting
3. maI,% ,v*, ,tu&w.,. *.-._ 10. Center member rear mourha WR 11, Front exhaust pipe 0 w 12. Gear box assembly 13. Mountmg rubber
SERVICE POINTS OF REMOVALJ6. Ol6CONN6CTtON OF TIE-ROD END
Y\
Operating procedures, cautions, etc. on removal, installation, disassembly and reassembly are described.
* Using the special tool, disconnect the tie rod from the
1.60sumtotie6lec?rdofthaspecialwJdtotheneflrbY 2 . ~thsmItbutdonDt-vsit.
12.
REMOVAL OF GEAR 60X ASSEMBLY
This number corresponds to the number appearing in Removal steps, Disassembly steps, installation steps or Reassembly steps \
37A-24
STEERING - Manual
Steering Gwr Box
The title of the page (following the page on which the diagram of component parts is presented) indicating the locations of lubrication and sealing procedures.
TSB Revision
00-6
EXPLANATION OF THE TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
3. Cheddng the psssenger compartment-tempwsturs sensor, o&de-sir sensor, sirthwtmctat CMSO~ and refrigerant-tempcmture sensor circuits
lndrcates connectors terminal number. t
I . Provides the necessary description of circuit operation for - Opsrstion dnctiption A negatkcharactensw fhemwor IS employed basic understanding. I temperature of rhe SBSOf pan to ,es,s,ance.
for each sensor nn order 10 convert the smbnen,
The sensor power-supply l2.W) of the air-condaioner control unit 1s applied to each sensor. and the voltages of terminals 1161. 1151. I171 and 15) are divtded by the rwstance values of each sensor. and resislance R.
I
I I
Indicates the circuit diagram for checking (including the interface of the air conditioner control unit).
Indicates the connector number. Numbers are used in the operation descriptions only as necessary, and these numbers correspond to the numbers used in harness and component layout diagrams.
I I
Provides hints (ineluding standards for judgement) when troubleshooting proare folcedures lowed.
- - Tmublnkooting
Dtagnosls
hff NO 1, The _ DilFW+P, concnr s,ga, ,s ,,e,d ,o -____ .=_ Pmilm~l.l~m~~=,,,,~ __ .~_. .._... ._...r_._._._ -..--. .., 25C 17rF). No 12: The outside-w sensor mput srgnal is he. la to ---,,C IWFI. No 13: The awthwmos,a, sensor ~npu, signal is held 10 4% IWF) ^ WIIWOS ye pan ,emperatwe 25C l77W Al as ,mlles *ensor Sensor WR temperawe 25-Z 17PFI when aar condwmer 1s OFF Bo n :gol pm mnperatre 25C i77FI 1 Sensor pan ,empelatre 25C ,777, I_ l.c-1.6v 2 45-2.55v 015 1 a.1 6
,w,pt
-Air conditiuw ccnlml unit ta-.--* -.. l?mlMI obuge 1 Terminal NO ) SWA OUlYdedlr semor
Indicates the check to be made. t
sensor wwsr SUPPI Relngeran,.,emwrature
Passenger Compa*me,-tempera. lyre sensor 1 17 j Air-thermostat sensor
Indicates the specification to be used for judgement of the check results. If there is no particular mention of conditions in the Conditions column, the column shows the specification under normal conditions.
1 TSB Revision
GENERAL - How to Use This Manual EXPLANATION OF CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS

/ t The symbols used in circuit diagrams are used as described below.
00-7
NOTE For detailed information concerning the reading of circuit diagrams, refer to Volume 2 - Circuit Diagrams.
The input/output (direction of current flow) relative to the electronic control unit is indicated by symbols (A. 0). The (A) symbol indicates that current flows in the upward direction. output indicates a connector. A : female T : male Input \ Input/output
The broken (----I line indicates the same connector.
mc
1
lea\43 05B -.
The connector symbol indicates the device side connector (for an intermediate connector, the male side connector) as seen from the terminal front (the connectors connection face).
1L
MOTOR
01
1
I
SWITCH
TSB Revision
00-8
GENERAL - Vehicle Identification
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
MOOCA-
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER LOCATION

The vehicle identification number (V.I.N.) is located on a plate 1J attached to the left top s3e of the instrument panel.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION CODE CHART PLATE

MOOCB- .
All vehicle identification numbers contain 17 digits. The vehicle number is a code which tells country, make, vehicle type, etc.
JJapan
AMitsubishi
3Passenger Car
XDriver Air Bag, Fa;;;;ger Seat Belt
D3000GT FWD E3000GT AWD
sPremium 6 Special 7Ultimate
43-door Hatchback
B3.0 liters (181.4 win.)
1 z
M1991 Year
Yl%ya
000001 99iJF389
L:oHC-MPl 3.0 liters 1 (181.4 cu.in.1 [DOHC-MPITurbo]
NOTE l Check digit means a srigle number or letter X used to verify the accuracy of transcription of vehicle identification number,
TSB Revision
GENERAL - Vehicle Identification VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER LIST

VEHICLES FOR FEDERAL
1 V.I.N. (except sequence number) JA3XD54BOMY JA3XD64BOMY I JA3XE74COMY Mitsubishi 3000GT <AWD> 3.0 liters (181.4 cu.in.) [DOHC-MPI-Turbo] Z15AMNGFL2M ZlGAMNGFL2M 1 Brand Mitsubishi 3000GT <FWD> / Engine displacement 3.0 liters (181.4 cu.in.) [DOHC-MPI] 1 Models code
do-9
MOOCC-
VEHICLES FOR CALIFORNIA

( V.I.N. (except sequence number) JA3XD54BClMY 1 JA3XD64BlJMY JA3XE74CClMY I Mitsubishi 3000GT <AWD> t 1 Brand Mitsubishi 3000GT <FWD> Engine displacement 3.0 liters (181.4 cu.in.1 [DOHC-MPI] Models code Zl lAMNXML7M Zl lAMRXML7M Zl lAMNPML7M Zl lAMRPML7M I
NOTE AWD marked with * can also be sold in Federal States. *
3.0 liters (181.4 cu.in.1 [DOHC-MPI-Turbo]
Z15AMNGFL7M ZIGAMNGFUM
c
TSB Revision
00-10
GENERAL - Vehicle Identification VEHICLE INFORMATION CODE PLATE

MOOCD- . I
Vehicle information code plate is riveted onto the bulkhead in : the engine compartment. The place shows model code, engine model, transaxle model, i3' and body color code. 1. MODEL
'
ZllAMNXMLZM L2iie zze[
0060046
2. ENGINE 3. EXT 4. TRANSAXLE 5. COLOR, INT
6672 / E n g i n e m o d e l
C A 6
Y Exterior code
F5M33
-Transaxle model
R2587VQ3V -p=~izgTj+Ly~de
OPT
CHASSIS NUMBER
STAMPING. LOCATION
MOOCE- -
The chassis number is stamped on the top center of the firewall located in the engine compartment.
CHASSIS NUMBER CODE CHART ZlOA MY[7000~10

Refer to 10th thru 17th digits
.*: @I @+!j grS,.$ .,: .S?b, <I 1 0 t / ~~~nf k

OOFDO&
Y cd:at!s t:beOGT-series.
VEHICLE SAFETY CERTIFICATION LABEL

1.
MOOCF-
The vehicle safety certification label is attached to the face of left door pillar. 2. This label indicates the month and year of manufacture, Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (G.V.W.R.), Gross Axle Weight Rating (G.A.W.R.) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification Number (V.I.N.).
TSB Revision
GENERAL - Vehicle Identification ENGINE MODEL STAMPING
00-I 1
MOOCG-
I, The engine model number is stamped at the front side on the top edge of the cylinder block as shown in the following: Engine model 6672 Engine displacement 3.0 liters (181.4 cu.in.1
2. The engine serial number is stamped near the engine model number, and the serial number cycles, as shown below Engine serial number AA0201 to YY9999 Number cycling AA0201--- - -+ AA9999 L ABOOOI-- - - ---f AY9999 L BAOOOI - - - - + YY9999
Theft protection label
THEFT PROTECTION.
MOOCIAC
For original parts
In order to protect against theft, a Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is stamped in, or attached as a label to, the following major parts of the engine and transaxle, as well as main outer panels: Engine cylinder block, Transaxle housing, Fender, Door, Quarter panel, Hood, Liftgate, Bumpers In addition, a theft-protection label is attached to replacement parts for the body outer panel main components, and the same data are stamped into replacement parts for the engine and the transaxle.
OOK619
For replacement parts
[i]
001621
Cautions regarding panel repairs 1. When repainting original parts, do so after first masking the theft-protection label, and, after painting, be sure to peel off the masking tape. 2. The theft-protection label for replacement parts is covered by masking tape, so such parts can be painted as is. The masking tape should be removed after painting is finished. 3. The theft-protection label should not be removed from original parts or replacement parts.
c
1 TSB Revision
00-12
LOCATIONS
Automatic transaxle
<W5MGl> <F4A33>
31FOO70
The illustration indicates left hand side, outer. Right hand side is symmetrically opposite. TSS Revision
31FOO71
The illustration indicates right hand side, outer. Left hand side is symmetrically opposite.
31FOO72
The illustration indicates left hand side, outer. Right hand side is symmetrically opposite.
31FOO73
TSB Revision
00-14
Part Liftgate

: for original equipment parts vmd : for replacement parts
Target area
31FOO74
Front bummer
OOFO013
3ear bumper
OOFO047
TSB Revision
GENERAL - Precautions before Service
0045
MOOOAAO
PRECAUTIONS BEFORE SERWCE

SERVICING ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
1. Note the following before proceeding with work on the electrical system. Note that the following must never be done: Unauthorized modifications of any electrical device or wiring, because such modifications might lead to a vehicle malfunction, over-capacity or short-circuit that could result in a fire in the vehicle. 2. When servicing the electrical system, disconnect the negative cable terminal from the battery.
Caution 1. Before connecting or disconnecting the negative cable, be sure to turn off the ignition switch and the lighting switch. (If this is not done, there is the possibility of semiconductor parts being damaged.) 2. After completion of the work steps [when the batterys negative (-) terminal is connected], warm up the engine and allow it to idle for approximately five minutes under the conditions described below, in order to stabilize the engine control conditions, and then check to be sure that the idling is satisfactory. Engine coolant temperature: 80 - 95C (176 - 203F) Lights, electric fans, accessories: OFF Transaxle: neutral position (A/T models: N or P) Steering wheel: neutral (center) position
VEHICLE WASHING
If high-pressure car-washing equipment or steam car-washing equipment is used to wash the vehicle, be sure to maintain the spray nozzle at a distance of at least 300 mm (12 in.) from any plastic parts and all opening parts (doors, luggage compartment, etc.).
mm (in.)
so005
c
TSB Revision
00-16
Sling type
GENERAL - Towina and Hoistina
TOWING AND HOISTING

WRECKER TOWING RECOMMENDATION
MOOGAAC
\i
Wheel lift type
d <FWD> FRONT TOWING PICKUP Caution This vehicle cannot be towed by a wrecker using sling-type equipment to prevent the bumper from deformation. If this vehicle is towed, use wheel lift or flat bed equipment.
The vehicle may be towed on its rear wheels for extended distances provided the parking brake is released. It is recommended that vehicles be towed using the front pickup whenever possible.
Flat bed type
Sling type
REAR TOWING PICKUP Caution This vehicle cannot be towed by a wrecker using sling-type equipment to prevent the bumper from deformation. \ If this vehicle is towed, use wheel lift or flat bed equipment. L*3
Manual transaxle vehicles may be towed on the front wheels, provided the transaxle is in neutral and the drive-line has not been damaged. The steering wheel must be clamped in the straight-ahead position with a steering wheel clamping device designed for towing service use.
Wheel lift type
Caution Do not use steering column lock to secure front wheel position for towing.
Flat bed type
Automatic transaxle vehicle may be towed on the front wheels at speeds not to exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) for a distances not to exceed 30 km (18 miles).
Caution If these limits cannot be met, the front wheels must be placed on a tow dolly.
TOWING WHEN KEYS ARE NOT AVAILABLE

When a locked vehicle must be towed and keys are not available, the vehicle may be lifted and towed from the front, provided the parking brake is released. If not released, the rear wheels should be placed on a tow dolly.
TSB Revision
GENERAL - Towing and Hoisting

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
The following precautions should be taken when towing the vehicle. 1. DO NOT LIFT OR TOW THE VEHICLE BY ATTACHING TO OR WRAPPING AROUND THE BUMPER. 2. Any loose or protruding parts of damaged vehicle such as hoods, doors, fenders, trim, etc., should be secured prior to moving the vehicle. 3. Operator should refrain from going under a vehicle while it is lifted by the towing equipment, unless the vehicle is adequately supported by safety stands. 4. Never allow passengers to ride in a towed vehicle. 5. State and local rules and regulations must be followed when towing a vehicle.
Sling type
<AWD>
Caution 1. If only the front wheels or only the rear wheels are lifted for towing, the bumper will be damaged. In addition, lifting of the rear wheels causes the oil to flow forward, and may result in heat damage to the rear bushing of the transfer, and so should never be done. 2. The vehicle must not be towed by placing only its front wheels or only the rear wheels on a rolling dolly, because to do so will result in deterioration of the viscous coupling and result in the viscous coupling causing the vehicle to jump forward suddenly. 3. If this vehicle is towed, use flat bed equipment.
Nheel lift type
3at bed type
TSB Revision
00-18
Frame contact

support location
HOISTING
POST TYPE
Special care should be taken when raising the vehicle on a \ frame contact type hoist. The hoist must be equipped with the L) proper adapters in order to support the vehicle at the proper locations.
<FWD>: 1,070 mm (42.0 in.) <AwD>: 1,130 mm (44.0 in.) Front <Vehicles without active-aero svstem)
OOFOO3'
Caution When service procedures require removing rear suspension, fuel tank, spare tire and liftgate, place additional weight on rear end of vehicle or anchor vehicle to hoist to prevent tipping of center of gravity changes. FLOOR JACK
The usual type of floor jack is used at the following locations. Front: Under the mid point of No. 1 crossmember NOTE On vehicles with active-aero system, the front jacking point can be accessed by removing the center cover panel from the under cover. Be sure to reinstall the center cover panel after jack-up operation. Rear: <FWD> Under the jack up bracket of crossmember <AWD> Under the rear differential
<Vehicles with active aero svstem>
OOFO046
Caution 1. When lifting the No. 1 crossmember, do not allow jack lifting plate to contact under cover. 2. In order to prevent scarring the crossmember, place a piece of cloth on the jacks contact surface (to prevent corrosion caused by damage to the coating). d 3. A floor jack must never be used on any part of the underbody. 4. Do not attempt to raise one entire side of the vehicle by placing a jack midway between front and rear wheels. This practice may result in permanent damage to the body.
TSB Revision

LIFTING, JACKING SUPPORT LOCATION
00-19
<FWD>
OOFOO20
<AWD>
OOFO019
@ Floor lack locations
Approximate center of gravrty
@ Frame contact hoist. twin posthoist or scissors lack (emergency) locatlons
EMERGENCY JACKING
Jack receptacles are located at the body sills to accept the scissors jack supplied with the vehicle for emergency road service. Always block opposite wheels and jack on level surface.
TSB Revision
00-20
GENERAL - Special Handling Instructions for AWD Models
SPECIAL HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS FOR AWD MODELS

BRAKE TEST
MOOUAAC
In order to stabilize the viscous couplings dragging force, the brake test should always be conducted after the speedometer test.
FRONT WHEEL MEASUREMENTS

14A019fI
1. Place the front wheels on the brake tester. 2. Perform the brake test.
Caution The rear wheels should remain on the ground.

3. If the brake dragging force exceeds the specified value, jack up the vehicle and manually rotate each wheel to check the rotation condition of each wheel. NOTE If the brake dragging force exceeds the specified value, the cause may be the effect of the viscous couplings dragging force, so jack up the front wheels and check the rotation condition of the wheels in this state for no effect by the viscous couplings dragging force.
OOPOO38
REAR WHEEL MEASUREMENTS

After placing the rear wheels on the brake tester, follow the same procedures as for the front wheel measurements.
WHEEL BALANCE
FRONT WHEEL MEASUREMENTS
1. Jack up the rear wheels, and place an axle stand at the designated part of the side sill. 2. Jack up the front wheels and set a pick-up stand and balancing machine in place.
Caution 1. Set so that the front and rear of the vehicle are at the same height. 2. Release the parking brake. 3. Rotate each wheel manually and check to be sure that there is no dragging.
3. Use the engine to drive the tires, and then make the measurements.
Balancing machine
OOA0046
Caution 1. If an error is indicated in the state of engine drive, motor drive can be used concurrently. 2. Do not operate the clutch suddenly, or increase or reduce speed suddenly during the work. REAR WHEEL MEASUREMENTS
1. Jack up the front wheels, and place an axle stand at the designated part of the side sill. 2. Jack up the rear wheels, and then, after setting a pick-up stand and balancing machine in place; follow the same procedure as for front wheel measurements.
\ \L)
Pick-up stand
OOA0024
TSB Revision
GENERAL - General Data and Specifications
00-21
MOOHA- -
GENERAL DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
c-i----J---i!--8
+64
OOFO015
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
3000GT <DOHC> (Non-Turbo) Vehicle dimensions Overall length Overall width Overall height Wheelbase Tread mm (in.) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 4,545 1,840 1,285 2,470 1,560 1,580 1,025 1,050 (178.9) (72.4) (50.6) (97.2) (61.4) (62.2) (40.4) (41.3) 4,545 1,840 1,285 2,470 1,560 1,580 1,025 1,050 (178.9) (72.4) (50.6) (97.2) (61.4) (62.2) (40.4) (41.3) 4,545 1,840 1,285 2,470 1,560 1,580 1,025 1,050 (I 78.9) (72.4) (50.6) (97.2) (61.4) (62.2) (40.4) (41.3) 3000GT SL <DOHC> (Non-Turbo) 3000GT VR-4 <DOHC> (Turbo)
Front Rear Overhang Front Rear Minimum running ground clearance Angle of approach degrees Angle of departure degrees
145 (5.7) 12.2 16.9
145 (5.7) 12.2 16.9
145 (5.7) 12.2 16.9
Vehicle weight kg (tbs.) Curb weights MIT AI-T Gross vehicle weight rating Gross axle weight rating Front Rear Seating capacity Engine Model No. Piston displacement NOTE I : <4ws>
1,455 (3,208) 1,495 (3,296) 1,925 (4,244) 1,100 (2,425) 850 (1.874) 4 6G72-(DOHC) 2,972 (181.4)
1,520 (3,351) 1,560 (3,439) 1,925 (4.244) 1,100 (2,425) 850 (1,874) 4 6G72-(DOHC) 2,972 (181.4)
1,710 (3.770) 1,720 (3,792) 2,050 (4.519) 1,110 (2,447) 940 (2,072) 4 6G72-(DOHC) 2,972 (181.4)
cm (cu.in.)
1 TSB Revision
00-22
GENERAL - General Data and Specifications

3000GT <DOHC> (Non-Turbo) 3000GT SL <DOHC> (Non-Turbo) 3000GT VR-4 <DOHC> (Turbo)
Transaxle Model No. -Type Manual transaxle Automatic transaxle Fuel system Fuel supply system
F5M33 5speed manual F4A33 - 4-speed automatic Electronic control multi-point injection
F5M33 5-speed manual F4A33 - 4-speed automatic Electronic control multi-point injection
W5MGl 5-speed manual -
Electronic control multi-point injection
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
Items 6672 Non-Turbo V60 DOHC Front Transverse 6 91 .I (3.59) 76.0 (2.99) 2,972 (181.4) 10 1-2-3-4-5-6 6672 Turbo V60 DOHC Front Transverse 6 91 .I (3.59) 76.0 (2.99) 2,972 (181.4) 8.0 1-2-3-4-5-6
Type
Number of cylinders mm (in.) Bore mm (in.) Stroke Piston displacement Compression ratio Firing order
cm3 (cu.in.)
TRANSAXLE SPECIFICATIONS
Items Type Gear ratio 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th Reverse Transaxle Transfer
F5M33 5-speed M/T 3.090 1.833 1.217 0.888 0.741 3.166 4.153 L
W5MGl 5-speed MIT 3.071 1.739 1.103 0.823 0.659 3.076 3.972 0.814
F4A33 4-speed AlT 2.551 1.488 1 .ooo 0.685 2.176 3.958 i
Final reduction ratio
1 TSB Revision
GENERAL - Tightening Torque
00-23
MOOJA- -
TIGHTENING TORQUE
Each torque value in the table is a standard value for tightening under the following conditions. (1) Bolts, nuts and washers are all mode of steel and plated with zinc. (2) The threads and bearing surface of bolts and nuts are all in dry condition. The values in the table are not applicable: (1) (2) (3) (4) If If If If toothed washers are inserted. plastic parts are fastened. bolts are tightened to plastic or die-cast inserted nuts. self-tapping screws or self-locking nuts are used.
Standard bolt and nut tightening torque

Bolt nominal diameter (mm) M5 M6 M8 Pitch b-m-n) 0.8 1.0 1.25 Torque Nm (ft.lbs.) Head mark @ 2.5 (1.8) 5.0 (3.6) 12 (8.7) Head mark @ 5.0 (3.6) 9.0 (6.5) 22 (16) Head mark @ 6.0 (4.3) 10 (7.2) 25 (18)
M24
1.5
400 (289)
750 (542)
870 (629)
Flange bolt and nut tightening torque
Ml2
1.75
43 (31)
83 (60)
98 (71)
Taper thread tightening torque

Torque Nm (ft.lbs.1 Thread size NPTF 116 PT 118 I Female thread material: Light alloy 7.0 (5.1) 10 (7.2) 25 (181 48 (35) I Female thread material: Steel 10 (7.2) 18 (13) 40 (29) 68 (49) I
/I id
PT 114, NPTF 114 PT 318
NOTE: NPTF is dry seat pipe thread, whrle PT IS pipe thread.
TSB Revision
00-24
ENGINE OVERHEATS
GENERAL - Master Troubleshooting

MOOWW
MASTER TROUBLESHOOTING
Symptom Engine overheats Probable cause Cooling system faulty , incorrect ignition timing Reference page 14-3 11-13
v.
ENGINE WILL NOT CRANK OR CRANKS SLOWLY

Symptom Engine will not crank or cranks slowly Probable cause Starting system faulty Reference page 16-15
ENGINE WILL NOT START OR HARD TO START (CRANKS OK)

1 Symptom Engine will not start or hard to start (Cranks OK) Probable cause No fuel supply to injector injection system problems Ignition system problems Vacuum leaks l Purge control valve hose l Vacuum hoses l Intake manifold l Air intake plenum l Throttle body l EGR valve Compression too low Reference page 16-25 17-3
11-15
1 TSB Revision
GENERAL - Master Troubleshooting ROUGH IDLE OR ENGINE STALLS
Symptom Rough idle or engine stalls
Probable cause Vacuum leaks l Purge control valve hose l Vacuum hoses l Intake manifold l Air intake plenum l Throttle body l EGR valve Ignition system problems Idle speed set too low Idle mixture too lean or too rich Fuel injection system problems Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system problems Engine overheats Compression too low
Reference page or remedy
16-25 Check idle speed control system 17-11 114-3 Ill-15
ENGINE HESITATES OR POOR ACCELERATION
Symptom Engine hesitates or poor acceleration
Probable cause Ignition system problem Vacuum leaks l Purge control valve hose l Vacuum hoses l Intake manifold l Air intake plenum l Throttle body l EGR valve Air cleaner clogged Fuel line clogged Fuel injection system problem Emission control system problem l EGR system always on Engine overheats Compression too low
Reference page 11-13 17-3
15-9 -
17-11 14-3
TSB Revision
00-26
ENGINE DIESELING
Symptom Engine dieseling (runs after ignition switch is turned off)
Probable cause Incorrect ignition timing
Reference page 11-13
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION
I Symptom
Excessive oil consumption
Probable cause Oil leak Positive crankcase ventilation line clogged Valve stem seal worn or damaged Valve stem worn I---I Piston ring worn or damaged
( Reference page or remedy Repair as necessary 17-5 11-34 11-34 11-44
I I
POOR FUEL MILEAGE
NOISE
Symptom Noise Probable cause Loose bolts and nuts Engine noise Reference page or remedy Retighten as necessary il-10
) TSB Revision
GENERAL - Master Troubleshootina HARD STEERING
00-27
Symptom Hard steering
Probable cause Loose power steering oil pump belt Low fluid level Air in power steering system Low tire pressure Excessive turning resistance of lower arm ball joint Excessively tightened steering gear box rack support cover Improper front wheel alignment Excessive turning resistance of tie-rod ball joint
Reference page or remedy 37A-8 Replenish 37A-10 313 33A-9 37A-19 33A-4 37A-6 37A-30 37A-19
1
Symptom
Sticky flow control valve Bent rack in steering gear box
POOR RETURN OF STEERING WHEEL TO CENTER

Probable cause Improper front wheel alignment Improper tire pressure Excessive tightened rack support cover Damaged front wheel bearing Reference page 33A-4 31-3 37A-19 26-10
Poor return of steering wheel to center
TSB Revision
00-28
POOR RIDING
34-5. 13.23, 33
Broken or worn
ABNORMAL TIRE WEAR

Symptom Abnormal tire wear Probable cause lmorooer , , front or rear wheel alignment Improper tire pressure lmbalanced wheels Loose wheel bearings Malfunctioning shock absorber 34-6 33A-5 34-l 3.33 LJ Reference page 33Ad 34-5,23 313
ROAD WANDER
Symptom Road wander Probable cause Improper front or rear wheel alignment Excessive play of steering wheel Poor turning resistance of lower arm ball joint Improper tire pressure
I
Reference page 33A& 34-5.23 37A-5 33A-9 313

I
Loose or worn lower arm bushing Loose or worn wheel bearings Loose rack support cover in steering gear box
33A-8
I
37A-19
TSB Revision
GENERAL - Master Troubleshootinn VEHICLE PULLS TO ONE SIDE

Symptom Vehicle pulls to one side Probable cause Improper front or rear wheel alignment lmbalanced or worn tires Uneven tire pressure Excessive turning resistance of lower arm ball Wheel beanng serzure I--_ Broken or worn coil spring I--lower arm 33A-9 Replace 33A-5 126-11 1 33A-8 I I I Reference page or remedy 33A-4 34-5,23 31-3
front or rear axle drive shaft rBent ~~~~~~ Deformed I-
STEERING WHEEL SHIMMY

Symptom Steering wheel shimmy Probable cause Improper front or rear wheel alignment Improper tire pressure lmbalanced wheels Poor turning resistance of lower arm ball joint Excessive play of steering wheel Broken or weak front stabilizer Worn lower arm bushing Malfunctioning shock absorber Broken or weak coil spring Wear, play, or seizure of wheel bearing Wear, play, or seizure of drive shaft ball joint Replace 26-l 1 27-l 8 Reference page or remedy 33A-4 34-5,23 31-3 Replace 33A-9 37A-5 33A-10 33A-8 33A-5 34-l 3,33
Boll-OMING
Symptom Bottoming Probable cause Overloaded vehicle Broken or weak coil spring Malfunctioning shock absorber Reference page or remedy Correct 33A-5 34-l 3.33 I
1 TSB Revision
00-30
WHEEL BEARING TROUBLESHOOTING

Trouble Symptom Pitting occurs because of uneven rotation of race and bearing surfaces The surface peels because of uneven rotation of the race and bearing surfaces Chipping or cracking of cage or roller edges Probable cause Excessive bearing preload Excessive load End of bearing life Improper bearing assembly Impact when bearing was installed (such as being hit with a hammer) Excessive bearing preload Excessive load Vibration when bearings are not used, such as during shipment on freight cars, transport trucks, etc. Insufficient grease Excessive bearing preload Excessive load Faulty oil seal Excessive variation of loads on bearings Use of grease other than that specified Insufficient grease Use of grease other than that specified Faulty oil seal Presence of water or moisture Insufficient grease Foreign matter Rust or corrosion due to moisture Use of grease other than that specified Faulty oil seal Use of grease other than that specified Faulty oil seal Excessive bearing preload Excessive load
1 Pitting
Flaking Cracking
Flat spotting
When large load is applied, race and roller contact surfaces compress, forming indentations
Nicks
Instead of rolling along race surface, rollers slide, thus damaging surface
Smearing
Damage or wear caused by minute particles adhering to surfaces results in rough movement and such high temperatures that parts of surface melt Appears on various areas of the bearing
Rust, corrosion
Wear
Wear of surface areas caused by friction
Discoloration
Grease discoloration results from grease deterioration which causes particles of pigment contained in grease to adhere to surfaces Heat discoloration will appear as a deep brown or purple
TSB Revision
GENERAL - Lubrication and Maintenance
00-31
LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

ii
engine protection. Both the SAE grade and the API designation can be found on the container.
MOOPA- -
Maintenance and lubrication service recommendations have been compiled to provide maximum protection for the vehicle owners investment against all reasonable types of driving conditions. Since these conditions vary with the individual vehicle owners driving habits, the area in which the vehicle is operated and the type of driving to which the vehicle is subjected, it is necessary to prescribe lubrication and maintenance service on a time frequency as well as mileage interval basis. Oils, lubricants and greases are classified and graded according to standards recommended by the Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE), the American Petroleum Institute (API) and the National Lubricating Grease Institute (NLGI).
Caution Test results submitted to EPA have shown that laboratory animals develop skin cancer after prolonged contact with used engine oil. Accordingly, the potential exists for humans to develop a number of skin disorders, including cancer, from such exposure to used engine oil. Care should be taken, therefore, when changing engine oil, to minimize the amount and length of exposure time to used engine oil on your skin. Protective clothing and gloves, that cannot be penetrated by oil, should be worn. The skin should be thoroughly washed with soap and water, or use waterless hand cleaner, to remove any used engine oil. Do not use gasoline, thinners, or solvents.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Information for service maintenance is provided under SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE TABLE. Three schedules are provided; one for Required Maintenance, one for General Maintenance and one for Severe Usage Service. Item numbers in the SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE TABLE correspond to the item numbers in the MAINTENANCE SERVICE section. L
GEAR LUEiRlCANTS
The SAE grade number also indicates the viscosity of Multi-Purpose Gear Lubricants. The API classification system defines gear lubricants in terms of usage. Typically gear lubricants conforming to API GL-4 or GL-5 with a viscosity of SAE 75W-85W are recommended for manual transaxle.
LUBRICANTS - GREASES SEVERE SERVICE

Vehicles operating under severe service conditions will require more frequent service. Component service information is included in appropriate units for vehicles operating under one or more of the following conditions: 1. Police, taxi, or commercial type operation 2. Operation of Vehicle (1) Short-trip operation at freezing temperature (engine not thoroughly warmed up) (2) More than 50% operation in heavy city traffic during hot weather above 32C (90F) (3) Extensive idling (4) Driving in sandy areas (5) Driving in salty areas (6) Driving in dusty conditions Semi-solid lubricants, bear the NLGI designation and are further classified as grades 0, 1, 2, 3 etc. Whenever Chassis Lubricant is specified, MultiPurpose Grease, NLGI grade 2, should be used.
FUEL USAGE STATEMENT

Use premium unleaded gasoline having a minimum octane rating of 91, (R + M)/2. However, it is also possible to use unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87. Unleaded gasolines only must be used in vehicles equipped with catalyst emission control systems. All vehicles, so equipped, have labels located on the instrument panel and on the back of fuel filler lid that state, UNLEADED GASOLINE ONLY. These vehicles also have fuel filler tubes especially designed to accept the smaller diameter unleaded gasoline dispensing nozzles only.
ENGINE OIL
The SAE grade number indicates the viscosity of engine oils, for example, SAE 30, which is a single grade oil. Engine oils are also identified by a dual number, for example, SAE 1 OW-30, which indicates a multigrade oil. The API classification system defines oil performance in terms of engine usage. Only engine oil designed For Service SG or For Service SGXD, when available, should be used. These oils contain sufficient chemical additives to provide maximum
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL

Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and varnish removal may contain highly active solvents or similar ingredients that can be harmful to gasket and diaphragm materials used in fuel system component parts.
1 TSB Revision
00-32 GENERAL - Recommended Lubricants and Lubricant Capacities Table
RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND LUBRICANT CAPACITIES TABLE MOORA-
RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS
\L/
DIA-QUEEN LONG-LIFE COOLANT (Part No. 0103044) or
LUBRICANT CAPACITIES TABLE

Description Engine oil Crankcase (excluding oil filter and oil cooler) Oil filter Oil cooler (Turbo) Cooling system (including heater and coolant reserve system) Manual transaxle <FWD> <AWD> Transfer Automatic transaxle Rear axle <AWD> Power steering <2ws> <4ws> Fuel tank Metric measure 4.0 liters 0.3 liter 0.21 liter 8.0 liters U.S. measure 4.2 qts. 1/2qt. s 112 qt. 8.5 qts.
2.3 liters 2.4 liters 0.27 liter 7.5 liters 1 .I liters 0.9 liter 1.5 liters 75 liters
2.4 qts. 2.5 qts. .29 qt. 7.9 qts. 1.16qts. .95 qt. 1.59 qts. 19.8 gals.
TSB Revision
GENERAL - Recommended Lubricants and Lubricant Capacities Table 00-33 SELECTION OF LUBRICANTS
ENGINE OIL
Engine oil should be used which conform to the requirements of the API classification For Service SG or For Service SGKD, and have the proper SAE grade number for the expected temperature range.
40
104
27 16
10
80 60 50 32 14 5 -4
-10
Caution Nondetergent or straight mineral oil must never be used. Energy Conserving Oil
In order to improve fuel economy and conserve energy new, lower friction engine oils have been developed. These oils are readily available and can be identified by such labels as Energy Conserving II, Energy Saving, Improved Fuel Economy, etc.
0 -10 -15 -20 -23 -29
-20
6 SAE 5W-20 Not recommended for sustained high speed vehicle operation. ** SAE 5W-30 may be used for operation in very cold weather areas where the lowest atmospheric temperature is below -23C (-10F).
Oil Identification Symbol

A standard symbol appears on the top of oil containers and has three district areas for identifying various aspects of the oil. The top portion will indicate the quality of the oil. The center portion will show the SAE viscosity grade, such as SAE IOW-30. Energy Conserving II shown in the lower portion, indicates that the oil has fuel-saving capabilities.
72AOO.34
REAR AXLE
Lubricant 1 Anticipated temperature range 1 Above -23C k-1 0F) -23C to -34C (-10F to -30F) Below -34C (-30F) TSB Revision API classification GL-5 or higher 1 Viscosity range SAE 90 SAE 85W-90 SAE 8OW-90 SAE 80W. SAE 8OW-90 SAE 75W
00-34 GENERAL - Recommended Lubricants and Lubricant Capacities Table SELECTION OF COOLANT
COOLANT Relation between Antifreeze Concentration and Specific Gravity \ d
I
I
Example The safe operating temperature is -15C (5F) when the measured specific gravity is 1.058 at the coolant temperature of 20C (68F).
Caution 1. If the concentration of the coolant is below 30%, the anti-corrosion property will be adversely affected. In addition, if the concentration is above 60%, both the anti-freeze and engine cooling properties will decrease, affecting the engine adversely. For these reasons, be sure to maintain the concentration level within the specified range. 2. Do not use a mixture of different brands of anti-freeze.
. -/
1 TSB Revision
GENERAL - Scheduled Maintenance Table
00-35
MOOOA-
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE TABLE
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICES FOR EMISSION CONTROL AND PROPER L VEHICLE PERFORMANCE
Inspection and services should be performed any time a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain receipts for all vehicle emission services to protect your emission warranty.
No, Emission Control System Maintenance 1 2 3 4 Service Intervals KilometersinThousands Mileage in 24 15 48 30 72 45 80 50 x X X X X X 96 60
Thousands or or at at
Check Fuel System (Tank. Line and Connections and Fuel Filler Cap) for Leaks Every 5 Years Check Fuel Hoses for Leaks or Damage Every 2 Years Replace Air Cleaner Element Replace Spark Plugs
GENERAL MAINTENANCE SERVICE FOR PROPER VEHICLE PERFORMANCE

10. -
General Maintenance
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Exhaust System (Connection Portion of Muffler, Pipings and Converter Heat Shields) Check and Service as Required Every 2 Years or X X Automatic Transaxle Fluid
NOTE LSD: Limited-slip differential
TSB Revision
00-36
GENERAL - Scheduled Maintenance Table / Maintenance Service
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS

The maintenance items should be performed according to the following table:
Mileage Intervals Kilometers in Thousands (Miles in Thousands) 24 36 48 60 72 80 84 96 A (6 (15) (22.5) (30) (37.5) (45) (50) (52.5) (60) More Frequently X X X X x x X X X x x x x X x x X X X B Severe Usage Conditions C D E X F G
Maintenance item
Service to be Performed
Air Cleaner Element Spark Plugs Engine Oil Engine Oil Filter Disc Brake Pads Severe usage conditions ABCD-
Replace Replace Change Every Or 3 Months Replace Every or 6 Months Inspect for Wear
Every 4,800 Km (3,000 Miles) Every 9,600 Km (6.000 Miles) More Frequently
Driving in dusty conditions Police, taxi, or commercial type operation Extensive idling Short trip operation at freezing temperatures (engine not thoroughly warmed up)
EFG-
Driving in sandy areas Driving in salty areas More than 50% operation in heavy city traffic during hot weather above 32C (90F)
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
1. FUEL SYSTEM (TANK, LINES, CONNECTIONS AND FUEL FILLER CAP) (Check for leaks) / 2. FUEL HOSES (Check for leaks or damage)
MWShGC
1. Check for damage or leakage in the fuel lines and connections and looseness of the fuel filler cap. 2. Inspect the surface of fuel hoses for heat and mechanical damage. Hard and brittle rubber, cracking, checking, tears, cuts, abrasions and excessive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber. 3. If the fabric casing of the rubber hose is exposed by cracks and abrasions in the fuel system, the hoses should be changed.
TSB Revision
GENERAL - Maintenance Service 3. AIR CLEANER ELEMENT (Replace)
00-37
MOOSAKH
The air cleaner element will become dirty and loaded with dust during use, and the filtering effect will be substantially reduced. Replace it with a new one.
<Non-Turbo>
(1) (2) (3) (4) Disconnect the air-flow sensor connector. Remove the air intake hose from the air-flow sensor. Unclamp the air cleaner cover. Remove the air cleaner cover and air-flow sensor.
Caution Remove the air cleaner cover with care not to give shock to the air-flow sensor.
(5) Take out the air cleaner element.
<Turbo>
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Remove the clutch booster vacuum pipe mounting bolt. Disconnect the air-flow sensor connector. Remove air intake hose A from the air-flow sensor. Unclamp the air cleaner cover. Remove the air cleaner cover and air-flow sensor.
Caution Remove the air cleaner cover with care not to give shock to the air-flow sensor.
(6) Take out the air cleaner element.
4. SPARK PLUGS (Replace)
MOOSAOI
The spark plugs must fire properly to assure proper engine performance and emission-control. Therefore, they should be replaced periodically with new ones.
Spark plug
NGK NIPPON DENS0 PFRGJ-1 1 PK20PR-PI 1
Spark plug gap: 1.0 - 1.1 mm LO39 - -043 in.)

NOTE For the platinum plug, use care not to damage the platinum tip.
Specified torque: 25 Nm (15 ft.lbs.1
5. TIMING BELT (Replace)
MOOSBAD
Replace the belt with a new one periodically to assure proper engine performance. For removal and installation procedures, refer to GROUP 11 Timing Belt.
1 TSB Revision
00-38
<Vehicles without air conditioner>
GENERAL - Maintenance Service 6. DRIVE BELT (For Alternator) (Inspect tension)
MOOS88(1
(1) Measure the deflection with a force of 100 N (22 Ibs.) applied to belt mid-point between pulleys shown in the illustration. If the standard value is not obtained, make adjustment.
Standard value: 4.0 - 5.5 mm (.157 - 216 in.)

00F0006
:Vehicles with air conditioner>
(2) On vehicles without air conditioner, set a tension gauge at a position marked with r3 in the illustration to measure the belt tension.
OOFOO07
A: Crankshaft pulley B: Tension pulley C: Alternator pulley D: Idler pulley E: ,Air conditioner compressor pulley
7. ENGINE OIL
(Inspect oil level)

(I) Check to see that the engine oil level is within the range indicated on the oil level gauge. (2) Make sure that engine oil is not very dirty or is free from coolant or gasoline and has an appropriate viscosity grade.
OlLO183
(Change)
MOOSAAH
Always use lubricants which conform to the requirements of the API classification For Service SG or For Service SGKD when available, and have the proper SAE grade number for the expected temperature range. Never use nondetergent or straight mineral oil. (1) (2) (3) (4) After warming up the engine, remove the oil filler cap. Remove the drain plug and drain the engine oil. Tighten the drain plug to 40 Nm (29 ft.lbs.). Pour new engine oil through the oil filler.
Caution 1. Cover the alternator with waste cloth or the like before pouring engine oil to make sure that even if oil is spilt, it may not drop on the alternator. 2. Use an oil mug or a funnel to pour oil. 4.0 liters (4.2 qts.) Engine oil total capacity: [excluding oil filter 0.3 liter (l/2 qt.) and oil cooler 0.21 liter (l/2 qt.)]
(5) Check to ensure that the engine oil level is within the level range indicated on the oil dip stick.
OlLO18:
TSB Revision
GENERAL - Maintenance Service 8. ENGINE OIL FILTER (Change)
00-39
MOOEAEJ
The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. Genuine oil filters require that the filter be capable of withstanding a pressure of 256 psi are high quality filters and are recommended as follows:
Oil Filter Part No. MITSUBISHI Genuine Parts: MD136790 ENGINE OIL FILTER SELECTION
This vehicle is equipped with a full-flow, throw-away oil filter. The same type of replacement filter is recommended as a replacement filter for this vehicle. It is possible, particularly in cold weather, that this vehicle may develop high oil pressure for a short duration. You should be sure that any replacement filter used on this vehicle is a high-quality filter and is capable of withstanding a pressure of 256 psi (1,765 kpa) (manufacturers specifications) to avoid filter and engine damage. The following is a highquality filter and is strongly recommended for use on this vehicle: Mitsubishi Engine Oil Filter P/N MD136790.
Any replacement oil filter should be installed in accordance with the oil filter manufacturers installation instructions. (1) Remove the engine oil filter by using the oil filter wrench. (2) Clean the oil filter mounting surface of the oil filter bracket. (3) Coat engine oil to the O-ring of new oil filter. (4) Turn the oil filter by hand and install to the filter bracket. NOTE The oil filter tightening torque is 14 Nm (11 ft.lbs.1. (5) Start and run engine and check for engine oil leaks. (6) After stopping engine, check oil level and refill as necessary.
9. MANUAL TRANSAXLE (Inspect oil level)

MOOSBCG
Inspect each component for evidence of leakage, and check the oil level by remaining the filler plug. If the oil is contaminated, it is necessary to replace it with new oil. (1) With the vehicle parked at a level place, remove the filler plug.
ogPOO26
-Revision
00-40
GENERAL - Maintenance Service

(2) Check that the transaxle oil level is at the lower portion of the filler plug hole. For AWD-vehicles, check that the transfer oil level is at the portion shown in the illustration. (3) Check to be sure that the transmission oil is not noticeably d dirty, and that it has a suitable viscosity.
10. AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (Inspect fluid level)

1. 2. 3.
MOOSEDL
4.
5.
6.
Drive until the fluid temperature reaches the usual temperat u r e [70 - 8 0 C (160 - 18OF)I. Place vehicle on level floor. Move selector lever sequentially to every position to fill torque converter and hydraulic circuit with fluid, then place lever in N Neutral position. This operation is necessary to be sure that fluid level check is accurate. Before removing dipstick, wipe all dirt from area around dipstick. Then take out the dipstick and check the condition of the fluid. The transaxle should be overhauled under the following conditions. l If there is a burning odor. l If the fluid color has become noticeably blacker. l If there is a noticeably great amount of metal particles in the fluid. Check to see if fluid level is in HOT range on dipstick. If fluid level is low, add ATF until level reaches HOT range. Low fluid level can cause a variety of conditions because it allows pump to take in air along with fluid. Air trapped in hydraulic circuit forms bubbles which make fluid spongy. Therefore, pressures will be erratic. Improper filling can also raise fluid level too high. When transaxle has too much fluid, gears churn up foam and cause same conditions which occur with low fluid level, resulting in accelerated deterioration of ATF transmission fluid. In either case, air bubbles can cause overheating, fluid oxidation, which can interfere with normal valve, clutch, and servo operation. Foaming can also result in fluid escaping from transaxle vent where it may be mistaken for a leak. Be sure to examine fluid on dipstick closely.
L/
(Change fluid)
Drain the fluid and check whether there is any evidence of contamination. Replenish with new fluid after the cause of any contamination has been corrected. (1) Remove drain plug at transaxle case bottom to let fluid drain. (2) Place a drain container with large opening under the transaxle oil pan. (3) Loosen oil pan bolts and tap pan at one corner to break it loose allowing fluid to drain, then remove oil pan. TSB Revision
00-41
(4) Check the oil filter for clogging and damage and replace if necessary. (5) Clean drain plug and tighten drain plug with gasket to 30 35 Nm (22 - 25 ft.lbs.). (6) Clean both gasket surfaces of transaxle case and oil pan. (7) Install oil pan with new gasket and tighten oil pan bolts to 10 - 12 Nm (7.5 - 8.5 ft.lbs.).
Good t-l
(8) Pour 4.5 liters (4.8 qts.) of specified ATF into case through dipstick hole. [Total quantity of ATF required is approx. 7.5 liters (7.9 qts.). Actually however, approx. 4.5 liters (4.8 qts.) of fluid can be replaced because rest of fluid remains in torque converter.]
Specified fluid: Dia ATF SP or MITSUBISHI PLUS ATF or equivalent

(9) Start engine and allow to idle for at least two minutes. Then, with parking brake on, move selector lever momentarily to each position, ending in N Neutral position. (lO)Add sufficient ATF to bring fluid level to lower mark. Recheck fluid level after transaxle is at normal operating temperature. Fluid level should be between upper and lower marks of HOT range. Insert dipstick fully to prevent dirt from entering transaxle.
VA0283
11. ENGINE COOLANT (Change)
MOOSBEH
Check the cooling system parts, such as radiator, heater, and oil cooler hoses, thermostat and connections for leakage and damage.
CHANGING COOLANT <Non-Turbo>

1. 2. Remove te heat protectors (front and rear) from the exhaust manifold. Loosen the radiator drain plug, remove two drain plugs from the engine block (one for each bank) and remove the radiator cap to discharge coolant. Remove the reservoir tank and discharge coolant. When coolant has been discharged, pour water through the filler port to flush coolant passage. Coat the threads of the engine drain plugs with the specified sealant and tighten the plugs to specification.
3. 4.
04FOOOd
5.
Specified sealant: 3M Nut Locking Part No. 4171 or equivalent Tightening torque: 40 Nm (29 ftlbs.)
6. Fit the radiator drain plug securely. 7. Mount the reserve tank. 8. Slowly pour coolant into the radiator to the brim and also into the reserve tank up to the FULL line.
1 TSB Revision
00-42

9. Install the radiator cap securely. 10. Startthe engine and warm up until the thermostat opens. , 11. Race the engine up to around 3,000 rpm several times, then stop the engine. L/ 12. When the enkine has cooled down, remove the radiator cap and add coolant up to the brim. Add coolant to the reserve tank up to the FULL line.
<Turbo>
1. Lift up the vehicle. 2. Loosen the radiator drain plug, remove the drain plug from the rear bank of the engine and remove the radiator cap to discharge coolant. 3. Follow the same steps 3 to 12 above.
12. DISC BRAKE PADS (Inspect for wear)
MOOSBFD
Check for fluid contamination and wear. Replace complete set of pads if defective.
Caution The pads for the right and left wheels should be replaced at I the same time. Never split or intermix brake pad sets. All U four pads must be replaced as a complete set. Thickness of lining (A): Limit 2.0 mm (.08 in.)
14UOO72
13. BRAKE HOSES (Check for deterioration or MOOSBHB leaks)

Inspection of brake hoses and tubing should be included in all brake service operations. The hoses should be checked for: 1. Correct length, severe surface cracking, pulling, scuffing or worn spots. (If the fabric casing of the hoses is exposed by cracks or abrasion in the rubber hose cover, the hoses should be replaced. Eventual deterioration of the hose may occur with possible bursting failure.) 2. Faulty installation, casing twisting or interference with wheel, tire or chassis.
14. BALL JOINT AND STEERING LINKAGE SEALS MOOSglC (Inspect for grease leaks and damage)
1. These components, which are permanently lubricated at the factory, do not require periodic lubrication. Damaged seals and boots should be replaced to prevent leakage or contamination of the grease. 2. Inspect the dust cover and boots for proper sealing, leakage Id and damage. Replace them if defective.
TSB Revision
00-43
15. DRIVE SHAFT BOOTS (Inspect for grease MOOSBJD leaks and damage)
1. These components, which are permanently lubricated at the factory, do not require periodic lubrication. Damaged boots should be replaced to prevent leakage or contamination of the, grease. 2. Inspect the boots for proper sealing, leakage and damage. Replace it if defective.
16. REAR AXLE (CONVENTIONAL DIFFERENMOOSBPD TIAL) (Inspect oil level) - AWD
Remove the filler plug and inspect the oil level at bottom of filler hole. If the oil level is slightly below the filler hole, it is in satisfactory condition.
16. REAR AXLE (LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL) MOOSBQE (Oil change) - AWD

Before changing the rear axle oil, check to make sure that there is no oil leakage from the rear axle housing. Remove the drain plug and drain out of the oil. Put the oil plug ,back in place, and then pour new oil in through the filler hole.
17. EXHAUST SYSTEM (CONNECTION PORTION OF MUFFLER, PIPINGS AND CONVERTER HEAT SHIELDS) (Check and service as reMOOSBLB quired)
1. Check for holes and gas leaks due to damage, corrosion, etc. 2. Check the joints and connections for looseness and gas leaks. 3. Check the hanger rubber and brackets for damage.
TSB Revision
00-44
GENERAL - Main Sealant and Adhesive Table

MWZA-
MAIN SEALANT AND ADHESIVE TABLE

Application Recommended brand Application 4. Adhesives for interior trim (1) Adhesion of polyvinylchloride sheet (2) Adhesion of door weatherstrip to body
Recommended brand 3M Part No. EC-l 368 or equivalent 3M ATD Part No. 8001 or 3M ATD Part No. 8011 or equivalent 3M ATD Part No.851 3 or equivalent 3M Part-No. EC-l 368 or 3M ATD Part No. 8080 or equivalent 3M ATD Part No. 8531 or 3M ATD Part No.8646 or equivalent
1. Sealants for engine accessories (I 1 Sealing between rocker 3M ATD cover and camshaft Part No. 8660 bearing cap or equivalent (4G6 DOHC and 6G7 engines only) (2)
l
Sealing between semicircular packing and rocker cover and between semi-circular packing and cylinder head Oil pressure switch (except 4Gl and 6G7 engines)
3M ATD Part No. 8660 or equivalent
(3) Sealing between grommet or packing and metal seal 3M Nut Locking Part No. 4171 or equivalent (4)
l
(3) Engine coolant temperature switch, Engine coolant temperature sensor, Therm0 valve, Therm0 switch, Joints, Engine coolant temperature gauge unit (large size) (4) Engine coolant temperature gauge unit (;.s;il size, MD091 056 (5) Oil pan (except 4G5 engine)
Adhesion of headlining and other interior trim materials Adhesion of fuel tank to pad
3M ATD Part No. 8660 or equivalent MITSUBISHI GENUINE Part No. MD9971 10 or equivalent
5. Body sealant l Sealing of sheet metal, drip rail, floor, body side panel, trunk, front panel and the like joints l Sealing of tailgate hinges 6. Chassis sealant (I 1 l Sealing of flange surfaces and threaded portions l Fuel gauge unit packing (2)Sealing of flange surfaces, threaded portions, packing and dust cover l Differential carrier packing l Dust covers for ball joint and linkage l Steering gear box packing and shims l Steering gear housing rack support cover and top cover l Mating surface of knuckle arm flange (3)Sealing between accelerator arm bracket and toeboard (4)Sealant for drum brake shoe hold-down pin and wheel cylinder
3M ATD Part No. 8659 or equivalent 3M ATD Part No.8663 or equivalent
2. Sealing between glass and weatherstrip (I 1 l Sealing between tempered glass and weatherstrip
l
3M ATD Part No. 8513 or equivalent 3M ATD Part No. 8509 or equivalent 3M ATD Part No. 8509 or equivalent 3M ATD Part No. 8625 or equivalent
Sealing between body flange and weatherstrip
(2) Sealing between laminated glass and weatherstrip 3. Adhesion with ribbon sealer l Waterproof film for door l Fender panel l Splash shield l Mudguard l Rear combination lamp
Drying sealant 3M ATD Part No.851 3 or equivalent
TSB Revision
GENERAL - Main Sealant and Adhesive Table

Recommended brand
Application
I,i
7. Fast bonding adhesive Adhesion of all materials 3M ATD except polyethylene, polyPart No. 8155 propylene, fluorocarbon resin or equivalent or other materials with highly absorbent surface 8. Anaerobic fast bonding adhesives (I) Fixing of bolts and screws l Tightening of drive gear to differential case l Bolts for coupling tilt steering upper column with lower column (2) Fixing of bearing, fan, pulley and gear connections (3) Sealing of small recess or flange surface (4)Steering angle stopper bolt (jeep) 9. Undercoat
3M Stud locking Part No. 4170 or equivalent
3M Nut locking Part No. 4171 or equivalent 3M ATD Part No. 8864 or equivalent
TSB Revision
11-I
ENGINE
CONTENTS CAMSHAFT OIL SEALS .................................... CRANKSHAFT, FLYWHEEL AND DRIVE PLATE ........................................................ CYLINDER BLOCK ................................................ CYLINDER HEAD AND VALVE ........................ CYLINDER HEAD GASKET ................................ ENGINE ASSEMBLY ............................................ ENGINE OIL COOLER ........................................ GENERAL INFORMATION ................................
lb Lubrication System ............................................ Sectional View .................................................... 20
I
MllAA--
49
53 34 23 17 55 2 3 2 40 22
PISTON AND CONNECTING ROD .................... 44 ROCKER ARM AND CAMSHAFT .................... 31 SERVICE ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES ........ 11
Compression Pressure Check ........................ Curb Idle Speed Inspection ............................ Drive Belts Tension Adjustment .................... Ignition Timing Adjustment ............................ Lash Adjusters Check ........................................ Manifold Vacuum Inspection ............................. 15 14 11 13 16 16 8 4 4 8 4 26 10
SPECIAL TOOLS .................................................... SPECIFICATIONS ................................................

General Specifications .................................... Sealants ....................................... . .................... Service Specifications ....................................
OIL PAN AND OIL PUMP .................................... OIL PAN AND OIL SCREEN ................................
TIMING BELT ........................................................ TROUBLESHOOTING ........................................
II-2
SECTIONAL VIEW
E N G I N E - General Information
MllBAEC
GENERAL INFORMATION
7EN0335
ii
7EN0334
TSB Revision
ENGINE - General Information .UBRICATION SYSTEM
II-3
7LUOO25
TSB Revision
II-4 SPECIFICATIONS
Items Type Number of cylinders Bore mm (in.) Stroke mm (in.) Piston displacement Compression ratio Firing order Valve timing Intake valve Opens (BTDC) Closes (ABDC) Exhaust valve Opens (BBDC) Closes (ATDC)
ENGINE - Specifications
MllCA--
Non-Turbo V-type, DOHC 6 91 .I (3.587) 76.0 (2.992) 2,972 (181.4) 10.0 1-2-3-4-5-6
, d
Turbo V-type, DOHC 6 91 .I (3.587) 76.0 (2.992) 2,972 (181.4) 8.0 1-2-3-4-5-6
cc (win.)
16 55 48 15
16 55 50 17
SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS
Items kPa (psi)/rpm Compression pressure Non-Turbo Turbo Compression pressure difference of all cylinder kPa (psi) Manifold vacuum mmHg (in.Hg.) Non-Turbo Turbo Bas2Tig;ition timing at curb idle speed Act;ir-&yition timing at curb idle speed Curb idle speed rpm Standard value Limit
MllCE -
min. 980 (139)/250 - 400 min. 810(115)/250-400 max. 100 (14)
520 (20) 495 (19) 5 f 2 Approx. 15 700 ZII 100
1 TSB Revision
Items Standard value 132 (5.20) Max. 0.03 l.0012) Limit -0.2 (-,008) 0.2 (.008)
11-5
Cylinder head Overall height mm (in.) Flatness of gasket surface mm (in.) Oversize rework dimension of valve seat hole mm (in.) Intake 0.3 f.012) O.S. 0.6 l.024) O.S. Exhaust 0.3 l.012) O.S. 0.6 (.024) O.S. Oversize rework dimension of valve seat hole depth mm (in.) Intake 0.3 l.012) O.S. 0.6 t.024) O.S. Exhaust 0.3 t.012) O.S. 0.6 (.024) O.S. Oversize rework of valve guide hole (both intake and exhaust) mm (in.) 0.05 f.002) 0,s. 0.25 (.OlO) O.S. 0.50 (.020) 0,s. Samshaft Cam height mm (in.) Intake Exhaust Journal O.D. mm (in.) Bearing oil clearance mm (in.) Jalve Valve length mm (in.) Intake Exhaust Stem O.D. mm (in.) Intake Exhaust Face angle Thick;;ss,yf valve head (Margin) Intake Exhaust Clearance (Valve stem to guide) Intake Exhaust
36.300 - 36.325 (1.4291 - 1.4301) 36.600 - 36.625 (1.4409 - 1.4419) 33.300 - 33.325 (1.31 IO - 1.3120) 33.600 - 33.625 (1.3228 - 1.3238)
7.5 - 7.7 (.295 - ,303) 7.8 - 8.0 (.307 - ,315) 7.9-8.1 (.311 - ,319) 8.2 - 8.4 (.323 - .331)
13.050- 13.068(.5138-.5145) 13.250- 13.268 (.5217- .5224) 13.500 - 13.518 (.5315 - .5322)
35.49 (I .3972) 35.20 (1.3858) 26 (1.02) 0.05 - 0.09 f.0020 - .0035)
34.99 (1.3776) 34.70 (1.3661)
106.3 (4.185) 105.4 (4.150) 6.6 (.260) 6.6 i.260) 45 - 45.5
1 .o (.039) 1.5 (.059) mm (in.) 0.02 - 0.05 (.0008 - .0020) 0.05 - 0.09 l.0020 - .0035)
0.5 (.019) 1 .o (.039) 0.10 l.0039) 0.12 i.0047)
* Limit must be -0.2 mm (--.008 in.) combined with amount of grinding of cylinder block gasket surface.
TSB Revision
11-6
Items Valve guide Length mm (in.) Intake Exhaust Service size mm (in.) Valve seat Width of seat contact Seat angle
Standard value Limit
45.5 50.5 0.05 0.50 mm (in.)
(1.791) (1.988) f.002). 0.25 (.OlO), f.020) Oversize
0.9 - 1.3 (.035 - ,051) 44 - 44.5 46.9 (1.846) 280 (62) at installed height 37.9 (1.492) 1Less than 2 91 .I0 (3.5866) Less than 0.02 i.0008) Less than 0.05 t.0020) 91 .I0 (3.5866) 0.03 - 0.05 (.0012 - .0020) 1.2 (.047) 1.5 f.059) 3.0 (.I 18) 0.25 LO1 0),0.50 (.020), 0.75 (.030), 1 .oo l.039) Oversize 0.10 (.0039) 45.9 (1.807) 38.9 (1.531) 4
Valve spring Free length mm (in.) Load N (Ibs.) Installed height mm (in.) Squareness Cylinder block Cylinder bore mm (in.) Out-of-roundness and taper of cylinder mm (in.) bore Flatness of gasket surface mm (in.) Piston 0.D mm (in.) Clearance (Piston to cylinder) mm (in.) Ring groove width No. 1 No. 2 Oil Service size mm (in.)
mm (in.)
Piston ring Side clearance mm (in.) No. 1 No. 2 End gap mm (in.) No. 1 No. 2 Oil ring side rail mm (in.) Service size mm (in.)
0.03 - 0.07 (.0012 - .0028) 0.02 - 0.06 l.0008 - .0024) 0.30 - 0.45 (.0118 - .0177) 0.45 - 0.60 (.0177 - .0236) 0.20 - 0.60 (.0079 - .0236) 0.25 (.OlO), 0.50 (.020), 0.75 (.030), 1 .oo (.039) Oversize 0.05 i.0020) or less 0.1 (0.004) or less 0.10 - 0.25 (.0039 - .0098) 7,500 - 17,500 (1,686 - 3,934)
0.1 (.004) 0.1 (.004) 0.8 i.031) 0.8 l.031) 1 .o (.039)
Connecting rod m m ( i n . ) Bend Twist mm (in.) Big end to thrust clearance mm (in.) Piston pin press-in load N (Ibs.)
0.4 l.016)
1 TSB Revision
Items Connecting rod bearing Oil clearance mm (in.) Crankshaft main bearing Oil clearance mm (in.) Crankshaft Pin O.D. mm (in.) Journal O.D. mm (in.) Out-of-roundness of journal and pin mm (in.) Taper of journal and pin mm (in.) End play mm (in.) Oil pressure at curb idle speed kPa (psi) [Conditions: oil temperature is 75 to 90C (167 to 194F)l Oil pump Side clearance mm (in.) Body clearance Side clearance Relief spring Free length mm (in.) Load 137 N (8.3 Ibs.)] mm (in.) Standard value 0.016- 0.046 (.0006- .0018) 0.019 - 0.044 (.0007 - .0017) 49.9 (I ,965) 59.9 (2.358) Less than 0.003 (.00012) Less than 0.005 (0002) 0.05 - 0.25 (0020 - .0098) 80 (I 1.4) or more Limit 0.1 (.004) 0.1 (.004)
/ L
0.3 (.012)
0.100-0.181 (.0039-.0071) 0.040 - 0.095 (.0016 - .0037) 43.8 (1.724) 40.1 (1.579)
L/
Drive belt For alternator (Vehicle without air conditioner) Deflection mm (in.) Inspection New belt Used belt Tension N (Ibs.) Inspection New belt Used belt For alternator and air conditioner compressor Deflection mm (in.) Inspection New belt Used belt For power steering pump Deflection mm (in.) Timing belt Amount of projection of auto tensioner mm (in.) rod (distance between the tensioner arm and auto tensioner body)
4.0-5.5(.157-,216) 3.5-4.0(.138-,157) 4.0-5.0 (.157- ,197) 350 - 600 (77 - 132) 650 - 850 (143 - 187) 450 - 600 (99 - 132)
4.0-5.5(.157-,216) 3.5-4.0 (1388.157) 4.0-5.0(.157-,197) 9.0 - 11 .o (354 - ,433) 3.8-4.5(.149-,177)
1 TSB Revision
11-8
SEALANTS
Items Oil pan Oil seal case Oil pressure switch Oil pressure gauge unit Rocker cover
ENGINE - Specifications / Special Tools

MIKE- -
Specified sealant MITSUBISHI GENUINE Part No. MD9971 10 or equivalent
3M ATD Part No.8660 or equivalent
SPECIAL TOOLS
MIlDA--
MD998051-01
Loosening and tightening of cylinder head bol
seal installer
compressor
Camshaft oil seal
Installation of camshaft oil seal
1 TSB Revision
ENGINE - Special Tools
II-9
Use with MD998765
Removal and installation of piston pin Use with MD998764
Supporting the cran crankshaft bolt and pulley are removed or reinstalled. Use together with MB990767-01
Tensioner pulley socket wrench
Adjustment of timing belt
TSB Revision
II-IO
ENGINE - Troubleshooting
miwm
TROUBLESHOOTING
Symptom Compression too low Probable cause I ) Cylinder head gasket blown Piston ring worn or damage Piston or cylinder worn Valve seat worn or damage 3il pressure drop Engine oil level too low Oil pressure switch faulty Oil filter clogged Oil pump gears or cover worn Thin or diluted engine oil 1 Oil relief valve stuck (opened) Excessive bearing clearance I Oil pressure too high Noisy valves Oil relief valve stuck (closed) Incorrect lash adjuster Thin or diluted engine oil (low oil pressure) Valve stem or valve guide worn or damage Connecting rod noise/ nain bearing noise Insufficient oil supply Thin or diluted engine oil Excessive bearing clearance Timing belt noise Incorrect belt tension b Repair relief valve Replace lash adjuster Change engine oil Replace valve and/or guide Check engine oil level Change engine oil Replace bearings Adjust belt tension Remedy , 1 Replace gasket Replace rings
aJ I
Repair or replace piston and/or cylinder block Repair or replace valve and/or seat ring Check engine oil level Replace oil pressure switch Install new filter Replace gears and/or cover Change engine oil to correct viscosity ) Repair relief valve Replace bearings
TSB Revision
ENGINE - Service Adjustment Procedures
II-II
MllFMBG

DRIVE BELTS TENSION ADJUSTMENT
(1) Check that the belts are not damaged and are properly fit ,into the pulley grooves.
Caution 1. When installing the V-ribbed belt, check that the V-ribs are properly fit without misalignment. 2. If creaking or slippage is observed, check the belt for wear, damage, or breakage on the pulley contact surface, check the pulley for scoring, in addition to sag inspection. 3. Check that the V-ribbed belt is not resting on the tension pulley or idler pulley flange.
<Vehicle without air conditioner>

Alternator I Tension pulley /
(2) Apply 100 N (22 Ibs.) force to the belt back midway between the pulleys as shown in the illustration, measure the deflection or by using a belt-tension gauge, check the belts tension.
Idler pulley
Standard value: <Vehicle without air conditioner>
Tension pulley
Crankshaft pulley
Tension N (Ibs.)
OlFOOO
350 - 600 (77 - 132)
650 - 850 (143 - 187)
450 - 600 (99 - 132)
For P/S pump
<Vehicle with air conditioner>

Tenston pulley
<Vehicle with air conditioner>

Adjustment value Items Check value New belt Used belt
Air conditioner compressor pulley
Crankshaft pulley
OlFOO8
TSB Revision
II-12
Alternator wllev
ENGINE - Service Adjustment ProceduresTENSION ADJUSTMENT OF THE ALTERNATOR DRIVE BELT <Vehicle without air conditioner>
haft
AdJl bolt
Fixing nut
OlFOOO8
(1) Remove front under cover panel <Vehicle with active \\3 aero> (Refer to GROUP 51 - Aero Parts.). (2) Remove under covers (front L.H., side L.H.). (3) Loosen tension pulley fixing nut. (4) Adjust belt deflection with adjusting bolt. (5) Tighten fixing bolt. (6) Run the engine one time or more. (7) Check the belt tension. Readjust, if necessary. (8) Install under covers.
Alternator pulley Adjusting bolt / Crankshaft pulley
DEFLECTION ADJUSTMENT OF THE ALTERNATOR AND AIR CONDITIONER COMPRESSOR DRIVE BELT <Vehicle with air conditioner>
(1) Use straight handle box wrench to loosen tension pulley fixing nut. (2) Adjust belt deflection with adjusting bolt. (3) Use straight handle box wrench to tighten fixing nut. (4) Run the engine one time or more. (5) Check the belt deflection. Readjust, if necessary.
Air con tioner compressor pulley
w Tension pulley Flxtng nut
OlN007.
DEFLECTION ADJUSTMENT OF POWER STEERING PUMP DRIVE BELT

(1) Insert an extension bar (insertion depth 12.7 mm), etc. into the opening at the end of the tension pulley bracket. (2) Loosen the tension pulley fixing bolts in the order of B and (3) iove the extension bar installed to the tension pulley in the direction of arrow to adjust the belt tension. (4) Tighten the tension pulley fixing bolts in the order of A and 8. LJ
Tightening torque: 35 - 50 Nm (25 - 36 ftlbs,)

(5) Give the crankshaft two turns in normal direction (clockwise) to run in the belt. (6) Check the belt deflection. Readjust, if necessary.
Crankshaft pulley
OlN007
1 TSB Revision
ENGINE - Service Adiustment Procedures IGNITION TIMING ADJUSTMENT
II-13
MllFLAF
(1) The vehicle should be prepared as follows before the inspection and adjustment.
l l l l
Engine coolant temperature: 80 - 95C (176 - 205F) Lights, electric cooling fan and accessories: OFF Transaxle: neutral (P for A/T) Steering wheel: neutral position
(2) Insert a paper clip to the connector, and connect a tachometer to the paper clip. NOTE Do not use the Multi-use tester. If tested with the Multi-use tester connected to the diagnosis connector, the ignition timing will not be the basic timing but be ordinary timing. (3) Set the timing light. (4) Start the engine and run at idle. (5) Check curb idle speed.
Curb idle speed: 700 f 100 rpm

NOTE The engine speed indicated is a third of actual speed. In other words, the reading of the tachometer times 3 is actual speed. (6) Turn OFF the ignition switch.
(7) Using a jumper wire, ground the ignition timing adjusting terminal. NOTE Grounding this terminal sets the engine to the basic ignition timing. \ (8) Start the engine and run at idle. (9) Check basic ignition timing.
!H Connector for I I _ ianltion tlmina I gdpstment 6rown)
Basic ignition timing: 5 BTDC k 2 4tll II 7FUO9371
(10)lf not within the standard value range, loosen the crank angle sensor mounting nut and adjust by turning the crank angle sensor. Turning it to the counterclockwise retards timing, and to the clockwise advances it. (1 l)After adjustment, tighten mounting nut taking care not to move the crank angle sensor. (12)Turn OFF the ignition switch. (13)Disconnect the jumper wire connected at step (7). (14)Start and run the engine at curb idle speed.
1 TSB Revision
11-14
ENGINE - Service Adjustment Procedures

(15)Check to be sure that the idling ignition timing is the correct timing.
Actual ignition timing: Approx. 15 BTDC

:d NOTE (1) Ignition timing is variable even under normal operation. (2) And it is automatically advanced at higher altitudes.
CURB IDLE SPEED INSPECTION
MllFMAB
(1) The vehicle should be prepared as follows before the inspection.

l l l l
Engine coolant temperature: 80 - 95C (176 - 205F) Lights, electric cooling fan and accessories: OFF Transaxle: neutral (P for A/T) Steering wheel: neutral position
(2) Connect a tachometer. (Refer to P.l l-1 3.) (3) Set a timing light. (4) Using a jumper wire, ground the ignition timing adjusting terminal. (5) Start the engine and let it idle. (6) Check whether or not the ignition timing is the standard value; if not, adjust.
Standard value: 5 BTDC + 2

NOTE Check the ignition timing with the Multi-use tester not connected to the diagnosis connector. (7) Remove the jumper wire from the ignition timing adjusting terminal. (8) When using the Multi-use tester, turn OFF the ignition switch and connect the tester to the diagnosis connector. (9) Idle the engine for two minutes. (10)Check the idle speed.
Curb idle speed: 700 + 100 rpm

NOTE (1) The idling speed is automatically regulated by the idle-speed control system. (2) The engine speed indicated is a third of actual speed. In other words, the reading of the tachometer times 3 is actual speed. (1l)lf not within the standard value range, refer to GROUP 13 Service Adjustment Procedures.
1 TSB Revision
ENGINE - Service Adjustment Procedures COMPRESSION PRESSURE CHECK
11-15
MllFFAK
(1) Before checking compression, ensure that engine oil, the starter motor, and battery are all in normal operating condition. (2) Start the engine and wait until engine coolant temperature has risen to 80 - 95C (176 - 205F). (3) Remove the all spark plugs.
(4) Crank the engine to remove any foreign objects in the cylinders.
Caution Cover the spark plug holes with shop towel, etc., in order to keep expelled foreign objects from flying out, and keep away from the holes. When measuring compression with water, oil, or fuel having entered the cylinder through a crack, etc., these will come flying out of the spark plug hole hot and fast, so be sure to take the proper precautions.
(5) Set the compression gauge to the spark plug hole. (6) Holding the throttle valve full open, crank the engine and measure compression.
Limit: <Non-Turbo> <Turbo>
min. 980 kPa (139 psi) min. 810 kPa (115 psi)
(7) Perform (5) and (6) above for all the cylinders, ensuring that compression pressure differential for each of the cylinders is within the specified limit.
Limit: max. 100 kPa (14 psi)

(8) If a cylinders compression or pressure differential exceeds the limit, add a small amount of oil through the spark plug hole and repeat steps (5) - (7). @ If the addition of oil brings compression up, it is possible that there is harmf,uI friction between the piston ring and cylinder wall. @ If not compression up, valve seizure, poor valve seating, or a compression leak from the gasket are all possible.
TSB Revision
11-16
ENGINE - Service Adjustment Procedures MANIFOLD VACUUM INSPECTION

MllFNAR
(1) The vehicle should be repaired as follows before the inspection.

l l l l
Engine coolant temperature: 80 - 95C (176 - 205F) d Lights, electric cooling fan, and accessories: OFF Transaxle: Neutral (P for A/T) Steering wheel: neutral position
(2) Connect a tachometer. (Refer to P.l l-l 3.) (3) Disconnect the vacuum hose from the nipple for taking off fuel pressure regulator vacuum from the air intake plenum. (4) Conncet a three-way joint between the removed vacuum hose and the nipple and connect a vacuum gauge to the joint. (5) Start the engine and check that idle speed is within the standard value range. (6) Check the manifold vacuum.
Standard value: <Non-Turbo> <Turbo>
Approx. 520 mmHg (20 in.Hg) Approx. 495 mmHg (19 in.Hg)
LASH ADJUSTERS CHECK
Ml 1 FEAF
If an abnormal noise is heard from the lash adjusters, check as follows. (1) After warming up the engine, stop it. (2) While installed to the cylinder head, press the part where the rocker arm contacts the lash adjuster at the very top. If d the adjuster is normal, the part pressed will feel very hard. (3) If it easily moves all the way downward when pressed, there is a malfunction of the lash adjuster and it should be replaced with a new one. (4) If it feels spongy or elastic, probably oil with air mixed in it has entered the lash adjuster. Check whether the amount of oil is too much or is not enough and the cause of air becoming mixed into the oil is a damaged oil screen or oil screen gasket. (5) After repairing the cause of the air leak, warm up the engine and then drive the vehicle at low speed for a while. Stop the engine and leave it off for a few minutes; then restart the engine and drive at low speed. Repeat this procedure several times during the course of about one hour so as to remove the air from the oil.
TSB Revision
ENGINE - Engine Assembly
II-17
MllSA-B
ENGINE ASSEMBLY /
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Pre-removal Operation l Release of Residual Pressure from High Pressure Fuel Hose (Refer to GROUP 13 -Service Adjustment Procedures,) l Removal of Cruise Control Pump and Link Assembly (Refer to GROUP 13 - Cruise Control.) l Removal of Hood (RefertoGROUP42A-Hood.) l Removal of Air Hose and Air Pipe <Turbo> (Refer to GROUP 15 - Inter Cooler.) l Removal of Front Exhaust Pipe (Refer to GROUP 15 - Exhaust Pipe and Main Muffler. l Removal of Transaxle Assembly (Refer to GROUP 22, 23 -Transaxle Assembly.) l Removal of Radiator (Refer to GROUP 14-Radiator.)
Post-installation Operation l Installation of Radiator (Refer to GROUP 14 - Radiator.) l Installation of Cruise Control Pump and Link Assembly (Refer to GROUP 13 -Cruise Control.) l Installation of Transaxle Assembly (Refer to GROUP 22,23 -Transaxle Assembly.) l lnstallatron of Front Exhaust Pipe (Refer to GROUP 15 - Exhaust Pipe and Main Muffler.) l Installation of Air Hose and Air Pipe <Turbo> (Refer to GROUP 14 - Inter Cooler.) l Installation of Hood (Refer to GROUP 42A- Hood.) l Supplying of Engine Oil (Refer to GROUP 00 - Maintenance Service.) l Adjustment of the Accelerator Cable (Refer to GROUP 13 - Engine Control.)
4 ft.lbs.
40-45 Nm 29 - 33 fklbs.
Removal steps 1. Connection of accelerator cable 2. Connection of brake booster vacuum hose 3. Connection of booster vacuum hose <Turbo> 4. Connection of fuel return hose 5. Connection of fuel high pressure hose 6. Connection of ground cable 7. Solenoid valve assembly 8. Connection of vapor hose 9. Connection of heater hose 10. EGR temperature sensor connector <Vehicles for California> TSB Revision
l *
4w
11. Drive belt (Alternator and air conditioner) (Refer to P.l l-l 1.) 12. Drive belt (Power steering) (Referto P.l l-l I.) 13. Connection of alternator harness 14. Oxygen sensor connector <Turbo> 15. Air conditioner compressor 16. Power steering oil pump 17. Oil pressure switch connector (Power steering) 18. Connection of oil cooler pipes <Turbo>
OlFOO43
II-18
ENGINE - Engine Assembly
19. ISC servo connector 20. TPS connector 21. Oil pressure switch and oil pressure gauge unit connector 22. Fuel injector harness connector 23. Knock sensor connector 24. Crankshaft angle sensor connector 25. Engine coolant temperature switch connector (Air conditioner) 26. Engine coolant temperature sensor connector 27. Engine coolant temperature gauge unit connector 28. Condenser connector 29. Ignition coil connector 30. Power transistor connector 31. Fuel injector connector 32. Variable induction motor connector <Non-Turbo> 33. Oxygen sensor connector <Turbo>
28 29 30
lOO- 120 Nm 72 - 87 ft.lbs.
70 Nm ,51 ftlbs
35 Nm 25 ft.lbs.
?I,---
50-60 Nm
36 - 43 ftlbs.
OlFOO19
** l * 34. Engine mounting bracket 35. Rear roll stopper bracket and engine connection bolt 36. Front roll stopper bracket and engine connection bolt ** l a 37. Engine assembly TSB Revision
ENGINE - Enaine Assemblv
II-19
SERVICE POINTS OF REMOVAL MllSBEH 15. DISCONNECTION OF Ail? CONDITIONER COMPRESSOR / 16. POWER STEERING OIL PUMP
Disconnect air conditioner compressor and power steering oil pump (with the hose). NOTE The removed air conditioner compressor and power steering oil pump should be fastened (by using rope, etc.) in .a position that will not interfere with the removal/installation of the engine assembly.
34. REMOVAL OF ENGINE MOUNT BRACKET

Before removing the engine mount bracket installation bolt, use a chain block or similar arrangement to suspend the engine assembly (to the extent that there is no looseness of the chain).
37. REMOVAL OF ENGINE ASSEMBLY

After checking that the cables, hoses, harness connectors, etc. are all removed, slowly raise the chain block to lift the engine assembly upward out of the engine compartment.
SERVICE POINTS OF INSTALLATION 37. INSTALLATION OF ENGINE ASSEMBLY
Ml 1SDBC
When mounting the engine, check to be sure that the cables, hoses, harness connectors, etc. are all in the correct position.
34. INSTALLATION OF ENGINE MOUNT BRACKET

Attach the engine mounting bracket so that the arrow mark on the mounting stopper is in the direction as shown in the illustration.
Engine mount bracket
TSB Revision
II-20 CAMSHAFT OIL SEALS
ENGINE - Camshaft Oil Seals

MllZA-B
RElVjOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation l Removal and Installation of Timing Belt (Refer to P.l l-26.) l Removal and Installation of Intake Manifold (Refer to GROUP 15 - Intake Manifold.) 3Nm 2.2 ftlbs.
$1
(Refer to GROUP 13 - Engine Control.)
3Nm 3Nm 2.2 ftlbs.
90 Nm 65 ft.lbs.
io
Removal steps 1. Center cover (front bank) 2. Connection for spark plug cables 3. Connection for breather hose 4. Connection for PCV hose l * 5. Rocker cover ** l * 6. Camshaft sprocket a* I)* 7. Camshaft oil seals
01 NO040
1.4 in.) 4
(.4 in.)
OlA0047
01 NO042
Sealant: 3M ATD Part No. 8660 or equivalent
1 TSB Revision
ENGINE - Camshaft Oil Seals
II-21
MllZBAG
SERVICE POINTS OF REMOVAL 6. REMOVAL OF CAMSHAFT SPROCKET
Using a wrench at the hexagonal part of the camshaft (to prevent the crankshaft from turning), loosen the camshaft sprocket bolt.
Caution Do not hold the camshaft sprocket with a tool, or a damaged sprocket could result.
7. REMOVAL OF CAMSHAFT OIL SEAL

(1) Cut out a portion in the camshaft oil seal lip. \ (2) Cover the tip of a screwdriver with a cloth and apply it to the cutout in the oil seal to pry off the oil seal.
Caution Use care not to damage the camshaft and cylinder head.
Camshaft
OlM0032
SERVICE POINTS OF INSTALLATION 7. INSTALLATION OF CAMSHAFT OIL SEAL
MllZDAI
(1) Apply a small amount of engine oil to the oil seal lip. (2) Using the special tool, insert the oil seal.
6. INSTALLATION OF CAMSHAFT SPROCKET

Using a wrench at the hexagonal part of the camshaft (to prevent the crankshaft from turning), tighten the camshaft sprocket bolt.
Caution Do not hold the camshaft sprocket with a tool, or a damaged sprocket could result. 5. INSTALLATION OF ROCKER COVER
Tighten the rocker cover bolts in the order shown in the illustration.
Rear bank
6 OlL105C
NOTE (1) Only No. 5 bolt in the rear-bank differs from other bolts in length. Rear bank No. 5 bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 mm (.79 in.) Except rear bank No. 5 bolt _................... 10 mm (.39 in.) (2) Bolts are color-coded for the front and rear banks as follows: Front bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._....___.._______....__.._..._..... I......... Black Rear bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Green (3) When the rocker cover gasket has been replaced, tighten bolts in this order and then, retighten bolts 1 to 6 to 4 Nm (2.9 ft.lbs.).
1 TSB Revision
II-22
ENGINE - Oil Pan and Oil Screen

MllHA--
OIL PAN AND OIL SCREEN

Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation Draining and Refilling l Engine Oil (Refer to GROUP 00 -Maintenance Service.) Removal and Installation l Front Air Dam <Active Aero> (Refer to GROUP 51 - Aero Parts.) l Under Cover , (Refer to GROUP 22, 23 -Transfer Assembly.)
w
No. MD9971 10 or equivalent
OlLO156
Sealant: MITSUBISHI GENUINE Part
13 Nm PI, ll.r
,9Nm 7 ft.lbs.
26 ft.lbs.
9Nm - . . .. 6Nm 4ft.lbs.
7 lt.lbS.
Removal steps
1. Left member
7 Ctclrtny
60-70Nm 43 - 51 ft.lbs.
3. 4. 5. 6.
60-70 Nm _ . 43 - 51 ftms.
Transaxle stay (front) Transaxle stay (rear) <FWD> Bell housing cover Connection of oil return pipes <Turbo> 7. Oil pan 8. Oil screen
^.L^^ 1 wu06
TSB Revision
ENGINE - Winder Head Gasket
11-23
MllJA-6
CYLINDER HEAD GASKET

Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation Draining and Supplying l Engine Coolant (Refer to GROUP 00 -Maintenance Service.) Removal-and Installation l Air Intake Manifold (Refer to GROUP 15 -Air intake Manifold.) l Turbocharger <Turbo> (Refer to GROUP 15 -Turbocharger.) l Exhaust Manifold (Refer to GROUP 15 - Exhaust Manifold.) l Timing Belt (Referto P.l I-26.)
~~
(Refer to GROUP 13 - Engrne Control.)
12
0-nng
10 Nm 7 ft.lbs. \ 3Nm 2.2 klbs. P
10 Nm 7 ft.lbs.
3,
; ;;
Water
%
01 LO21 7
Rocker cover
IOmm 4 (.4 in.)
1.4 in.)
10mm
OlA004;
Sealant: 3M ATD Part No. 8660 or equivalent <Cold engine> i2o-IjONm 87 - 94 ft.lbs. 76 - 83 ft.lbs.
Y
.- .-... /A- Q/-s+: 11 ft.lbs. rt.lDS. <Cold engine> fl (Turbo) i20-130 Nm 87 - 94 ftlbs. (Non-turbo) 105-115Nm 76 - 83 ft.lbs.
Removal steps
90 Nm
I 7.----A/ /
OlFOO21
I. Pipe assembly 2. Blow-by hose 3. Center cover (Front bank) 4. Spark plug cable HI 5. Rocker cover 4* l a 6. Intake camshaft sprocket 7. Timing belt rear cover (Cent .er) 8. Ignition coil 9. Connection of heater hose 10. Connection of water hoses tl-urbo> 11. Connection of radiator hose 12. Thermostat housing 13. Connection of water inlet pipe (Front bank) ** l + 14. Cylinder head assembly ** 15. Cylinder head gasket
TSB Revision
11-24
ENGINE - Cylinder Head Gasket SERVICE POINTS OF REMOVAL

6. REMOVAL OF INTAKE CAMSHAFT SPROCKET
(1) Using a wrench, hold the camshaft at its hexagon and remove the camshaft sprocket bolt.
MllJBBF
Caution Locking the camshaft sprocket with a tool damages the sprocket.
(2) Remove the camshaft sprockets.
14. REMOVAL CYLINDER HEAD ASSEMBLY

Using the special tool, remove the cylinder head assembly.
SERVICE POINTS OF INSTALLATION

ldentlfrcatlon mark
MllJDEJ
15. INSTALLATION OF CYLINDER HEAD GASKET

(1) Make sure that the gasket has the proper identification mark for the engine. (2) Lay the cylinder head gasket on the cylinder block with the identification mark at the front top.
01 N009i 5
14. INSTALLATION OF CYLINDER HEAD ASSEMBLY

(1) Use a scraper to clean the gasket surface of the cylinder head assembly.
Caution Take care that no foreign material gets into the cylinder, coolant passages or oil passages.
(2) Using the special tool and a torque wrench, tighten the bolts to the specified torque in the order shown in the illustration. (in two or three cycles)
OlL0472
J I
0111044
j:: 1: :: ::p:i
c
07 Q8 493 04 02 01
Caution Install the head bolt washers with shear droop upward as shown in the illustration.
(3) Back off the bolts once and tighten them to the specified torque as shown in step (2). <Turbo>
1
96 Q5 c Front bank
OlL105j
TSB Revision
ENGINE - Cylinder Head Gasket
11-25
6. INSTALLATION OF INTAKE CAMSHAFT SPROCKET

Using a wrench, hold the camshaft at its hexagon and tighten the bolt to specification.
Caution Locking the camshaft sprocket with a tool damages the sprocket.
Rear bank
5. INSTALLATION OF ROCKER COVER

Tighten the rocker cover bolts in the order shown in the illustration.
011
010
09
Front bank 6
OlL105C
NOTE (1) Only No. 5 bolt in the rear bank differs from other bolts in length. Rear bank No. 5 bolt ._.._.._........._._____.__.._.. 20 mm (.79 in.) Except rear bank No. 5 bolt .._._............... 10 mm (.39 in.) (2) Bolts are color-coded for the front and rear banks as follows: Front bank __.._................_.......................................... Black Rear bank . . . . . . . . . . ..___..................................._._._.............Green (3) When the rocker cover gasket has been replaced, tighten bolts in this order, and then retighten bolts 1 to 6 to 4 Nm (2.9 ft.lbs.).
TSB Revision
11-26 TIMING BELT
ENGINE - Timing Belt

MllKA-B I

Pre-removal Operation
l l
l l
Removal of the Under Cover (Front L.H., side L.H.) Removal of Front Under Cover Panel <Vehicle with Active Aero> (Refer to GROUP 51 -Aero Parts,) Removal of Cruise Control Pump and Link Assembly <Vehicle with Cruise Control> (Refer to GROUP 13 -Cruise Control.) Removal of Alternator Assembly (Referto GROUP 16-Alternator.) Raise and Suspend the Engine to the Extent Force is not Applied to the Engine Mount
i L
lo-12Nm 7 - 9 ft.lbs.
IO-12Nm
Turbocharger
OSFOO03
IOO- 120 Nm 72 - 87 ft.lbs. 35 Nm 25 ft.l$. B;p 49ftJbs.
11 3 1 ftlbs. \
Removal steps 180- 190 Nm 130 - 137 ft.lbs. 1. Air hose 2. Air pipe N m --@ 3. Tensioner assembly .gft.lbs. 4 4. Drive belt (power steering) (RefertoP.ll-11.) Post-installation Operation ** I)* 5. Crankshaft pulley l Installation of Alternator Assembly 6. Brake fluid level sensor (Refer to GROUP 16 -Alternator.) 7. Timing belt upper cover l Installation of the Under Cover 8. Engine mount bracket (Front L.H., Side L.H.) 9. Idler pulley (alternator / air conditioner) l Installation of Front Under Cover Panel <Vehicle with Active Aero> +* l * 10. Engine support bracket l Installation of Cruise Control Actuator l * 11. Timing belt lower cover <Vehicle with Cruise Control> l *l Adjustment of timing belt tension (Refer to GROUP 13 - Cruise Control.) l * l a 12. Timing belt l Adjustment of the Engine (Refer to P.l l-1 1.) l * 13. Auto tensioner M D998754 n
n7 m-m
SERVICE POINTS OF REMOVAL

5. REMOVAL OF CRANKSHAFT PULLEY ,
MllKBEF
Using special tools, remove the crankshaft pulley from the crankshaft.
Caution Use only the specified special tools, or a damaged pulley damper could result.
, LJ
TSB Revision
ENGINE - Timinn Belt

10. REMOVAL OF ENGINE SUPPORT BRACKET
r bol
11-27
Remove sequence Spraying indicated
the engine support bracket in the numbered shown in the illustration. lubricant, slowly remove the bolt (reamer bolt) by the arrow.
Caution Keep in mind that the reamer bolt is sometimes heat seized on the engine support bracket. I
01 NO07
12. REMOVAL OF TIMING BELT

(1) Align the timing marks.
Timing mark mshaft 01 N009: rocket
(2) Make a mark on the back of the timing belt indicating the direction of rotation so it may be reassembled in the same direction if it is to be reused. (3) Loosen the center bolt on the tensioner pulley to remove the timing belt.
Caution Water or oil on the belt shorten its life drastically, so the removed timing belt, sprocket, and tensioner must be free from oil and water. These parts should not be washed. Replace parts if seriously contaminated. If there is oil or water on each part check. the front case oil seals, camshaft oil seal and water pump for leaks.

13. INSTALLATION OF AUTO TENSIONER
MllKDDB
(I) If the auto tensioner rod is in its fully extended position, reset it as follows. @ Keep the auto tensioner level and: in that position, clamp it in the vise with soft jaws. @ Push in the rod little by little with the vise until the set hole @ in the rod is aligned with that @ in the cylinder.
OlL104E
d Soft jaw
Soft jaw
Set hole n
Caution Push in the rod slowly to prevent the push rod from being damaged.
@ Insert a wire [I .4 mm (.055 in.) in diameter] into the set ho&. @ Unclamp the auto tensioner from the vise. (2) Install the auto tensioner.
Caution Leave the wire installed in the auto tensioner.
1 TSB Revision
11-28
ENGINE - Timing Belt 12. INSTALLATION OF TIMING BELT

(1) Align the timing marks on the respective sprockets. In case of the camshaft sprockets in the front bank, I proceed as follows: @ Install the crankshaft pulley. Shift the timing mark on the crankshaft sprocket by three teeth to lower the piston in No. 1 cylinder slightly from the top dead center on compression stroke.
Tlmlng mark 01 N009E
A : :y,y;i; ,$yi * &:;.~:;>
* *
* -1" (
Caution Turning the camshaft sprocket with the piston in No. 1 cylinder located at TDC on compression stroke may cause the valves to interfere with the piston.
@ Make sure that the timing marks on the camshaft sprockets for intake and exhaust valves are not within the range A in the illustration at left. If the timing mark is within range A, turn the camshaft sprocket to move the timing mark to the area closest to the range A.
Exhaust valve side

120"
1zv w* *
.^^^
/ c; 7J
Intake valve side Front bank * : Approx. 35 o1 N0, og
* Y 6
Rockercoverslde
Exhaust valve side
Caution In range A, the cam lobe on the camshaft lifts the valve through the rocker arm and the camshaft sprocket is apt to rotate by reaction force of the valve spring. Therefore, be careful not to have the finger pinched between the sprockets.
@ Turn the camshaft sprocket for either the intake or exhaust valve to locate the timing mark as shown in \ the illustration at left. Then turn the other crankshaft to locate the timing mark-as shown in the illustration at left.
Front bank
t~mng mark OlNOlO
Caution If the intake and exhaust valves of the same cylinder lift simultaneously, interference with each other may result. Therefore, turn the intake valve camshaft sprocket and the exhaust valve camshaft alternately.
@ Turn the camshaft sprocket clockwise to align the timing marks. If the camshaft sprocket has been turned excessively, turn it counterclockwise to align the timing marks.
. @ Align the timing mark of the crankshaft sprocket. NOTE Shift the timing mark of the crankshaft sprocket one teeth in counterclockwise direction to facilitate belt installation.
TSB Revision
E N G I N E - Timing Belt
11-29
(2) Using paper clips, install the timing belt in the following order with care not to allow the belt to slack. @ Exhaust camshaft sprocket (front bank side) + @ Intake camshaft sprocket (front bank side) -+ @Water pump pulley + @ Intake camshaft sprocket (rear bank side) + @ Exhaust camshaft sprocket + @ Idler pulley -+ @ Crankshaft sprocket + @ Tensioner pulley NOTE Since the camshaft sprockets turn easily, secure them with box wrenches to install the timing belt.
OlN004t
Caution 1. Be careful, the camshaft is turned by the reaction of valve spring. 2. If the timing belt is reused, install it so that the arrow marks made at removal are in the direction of rotation.
(3) Turn the tensioner pulley so that its pin holes are located above the center bolt. Then, press the tensioner pulley against the timing belt and, at the same time, temporarily tighten the center bolt. (4) Check that the timing marks on all sprockets are aligned properly. (5) Remove the four clips.
& Pin hole
. ADJUSTMENT OF TIMING BELT TENSION

(1) Rotate the crankshaft 114 turn counterclockwise, then rotate it clockwise until the timing marks are aligned. (2) Loosen the center bolt on the tensioner pulley. Using the special tool and torque wrench, apply tensioning torque to the timing belt and, at the same time, tighten the center bolt to specification.
Specified torque: 10 Nm (7 ftlbs.) [Timing belt tensioning torque] Caution When tightening the center bolt, make sure that the tensioner pulley is not rotated together.
(3) Remove the set pin from the auto tensioner. At this time, make sure that the set pin can be easily removed. (4) Rotate the crankshaft two turns clockwise and leave it as is for five minutes or more. Then, check again that the set pin can be easily removed from, and installed to, the auto tensioner. NOTE Even if the set pin cannot be easily inserted, the auto tensioner is normal if its rod protrusion is within specification.
Standard value (A): 3.8 - 4.5 mm (.I49 - .I77 in.)

If the protrusion is out of specification, repeat steps (1) to (4). (5) Check again that timing marks on all sprockets are aligned properly.
nilnq
TSB Revision
II-30
hread diameter x length mm (In.)
ENGINE - Timing Belt 11. INSTALLATION OF TIMING BELT FRONT COVER (LOWER)
Since the mounting bolts of timing cover are different in size depending on location, insert them with care. .\J
6x20 1.23 x ,781 1 Thread diameter x Length mm (in.)
fllllO4F
10. INSTALLATION OF ENGINE SUPPORT BRACKET

Since the mounting bolts of engine support bracket are different in size depending on location, insert them in numbered sequence.
Caution When installing the reamer bolt, tighten it, slowly spraying lubricant on the reamer area.
2
(39 x 1.06) l.47 x 2.50)
OlN0072
,,fjd99p54\/
5. INSTALLATION OF CRANKSHAFT PULLEY

I I
Using the special tool, attach the crankshaft pulley to the crankshaft.
Caution Use only the specified special tools, otherwise a damaged pulley damper could result.
: d
1 TSB Revision
ENGINE - Rocker Arm and Camshaft
11-31
MllZA-0
ROCKER ARM AND CAMSHAFT

11 Nm 8 ftlbs.
7EN0244
Removal steps I. Crank angle sensor adaptor 2. Bearing cap front 3. Oil seal 4. Bearing cap rear 5. Circular packing 6. Bearing cap No. 2 7. Bearing cap No. 4 8. Bearing cap No. 3 9. Camshaft 10. Rocker arm 11. Lash adjuster
Installation steps 11. Lash adjuster 10. Rocker arm l * 9. Camshaft *a 8. Bearing cap No. 3 l * 7. Bearing cap No. 4 l * 6. Bearing cap No. 2 ** 4. Bearing cap rear I)* 2. Bearing cap front *+ 5. Circular packing l 4 3. Oil seal I. Crank angle sensor adaptor
TSB Revision
11-32
ENGINE - Rocker Arm and Camshaft INSPECTION

CAMSHAFT
Measure cam height (longer diameter of the cam). If it exceeds the limit, replace the camshaft.
MllZCAB
7EN024E
Standard value: Intake side Exhaust side Limit: Intake side Exhaust side
35.49 mm (1.3972 in.) 35.20 mm (1.3858 in.) 34.99 mm (1.3776 in.)

34.70 mm (1.3661 in.)
MllZDAK
r I

11. INSTALLATION OF LASH ADJUSTER
Small wire
(1) Immerse the lash adjuster in clean diesel fuel. (2) Using a small wire, move the plunger up and down 4 or 5 times while pushing down lightly in the check ball in order to bleed out the air. (3) Install the lash adjuster to the cylinder head.
8ENOO58
9. INSTALLATION OF CAMSHAFT
(1) Turn the crankshaft to bring No.1 cylinder to the top dead center. (2) Check that the rocker arm is installed correctly on the lash adjuster and valve. (3) Install the camshaft noting the identification mark (stamped on the hexagon sectioned).
Identification mark (stamped on hexagon section)
V Identification mark: Intake side Exhaust side C

7EN0249
(4) Install the camshafts with their dowel pins positioned as shown in the illustration.
Rear side ,
Front side
Pl
0 M
Front m&k
Approx. 100
8. 7. 6. 4. 2. INSTALLATION OF BEARING CAPS

Cap No /
(1) Install noting the identification mark and cap No. No.2, 3 and 4 bearing caps bear the front mark. Install these caps with the mark lined up with the front mark on the cylinder head.
Identification mark: Intake side I Exhaust side E

Identification mark 7EN0316
TSB Revision
ENGINE - Rocker Arm and Camshaft
11-33
(2) Tighten gradually in two or three steps and finally tighten to specified torque.
(3) Measure the camshaft end play. Replace if the limit is exceeded.
Standard value: 0.1 - 0.2 mm (.004 - .008 in.) Limit: 0.4 mm (.016 in.)
NOTE If the bearing cap is installed with the cylinder cap removed, the valve will protrude. Install, therefore, with the cylinder head lifted by about 10 mm (.39 in.).
About 10 mm C.39 In.1

7ENO248
5. INSTALLATION OF CIRCULAR PACKING

Using the special tool, insert the circular packing.
3. INSTALLATION OF OIL SEAL

Using the special tool, insert the oil seal.
i , TSB Revision
II-34
ENGINE - Cylinder Head and Valve
CYLINDER HEAD AND VALVE

104 e------1510 11 -A
16-----P
<Cold engine> 125 Nm 90 ftlbs.
Removal steps l * l + I. Cylinder head bolt 2. Washer 3. Cylinder head assembly l + 4. Cylinder head gasket ** l * 5. Retainer lock 6. Valve spring retainer l * 7. Valve spring 8. Intake valve l * l * 9. Retainer lock 10. Valve spring retainer
7E NO254
* 11. Valve spring 12. Exhaust valve l 4 13. Valve stem seal 14. Valve spring sheet I)* 15. Valve stem seal 16. Valve spring sheet 17. Intake valve guide 18. Exhaust valve guide 19. Intake valve sheet 20. Exhaust valve sheet
l
TSB Revision
ENGINE - Cvlinder Head and Valve SERVICE POINTS OF REMOVAL

1. REMOVAL OF CYLINDER HEAD BOLT
II-35
MllOBAC
Using the special tool, remove the cylinder head bolts.
5. 9. REMOVAL OF RETAINER LOCK

u 1 \+-MD998735 1
Using the special tool, remove the retainer lock.
INSPECTION
CYLINDER HEAD
MllOCAO
(1) Using a straight edge and feeler gauge, measure the flatness of the cylinder head gasket surface.
Standard value: 0.03 mm (0012 in.) or less Limit: 0.2 mm (008 in.)
(2) If the measured flatness exceeds the limit, grind and repair the surface to gain the flatness of standard value or less.
Grinding Limit: 0.2 mm (.008 in.) Caution When the cylinder block is assembled, 0.2 mm (.008 in.) or less of grinding is permissible.
VALVES
Replace the valve if the margin (thickness of the valve head) exceeds the limit.
Standard value: Intake side Exhaust side Limit: Intake side Exhaust side
6EN02
1.0 mm (039 in.) 1.5 mm (.059 in.)

0.5 mm (019 in.)
1 .O mm (.039 in.)
TSB Revision
11-36
Squarenss

VALVE SPRINGS
(1) Check free length of each valve spring and replace if necessary.
Standard value: 46.9 mm (1.846 in.) Limit: 45.9 mm (1.807 in.)

Free length ! 1 EN035
bJ
(2) Using a square, test squareness of each valve spring. If spring is excessively out of square, replace it.
Standard value: Less than 2 Limit: 4 VALVE GUIDES

Check the valve stem-to-guide clearance. If the clearance exceeds the service limit, replace the valve guide with new oversize part.
1 EN29E
Standard value: Intake Exhaust Limit: Intake Exhaust
0.02 - 0.05 mm (0008 - .0020 in.) 0.05 - 0.09 mm (.0020 - .0035 in.) 0.10 mm (0039 in.) 0.12 mm (0047 in.)
VALVE SEAT RECONDITIONING PROCEDURES

(I 1 Before valve seat reconditioning, check valve stem to guide clearance. (2) Recondition the valve seat with a seat grinder or cutter. The valve seat width should be the specified value at the center of the valve face. LJ Inspect the valve seat with prussian blue to determine where the valve contacts the seat. To do this, coat valve seat lightly with prussian blue, and then set valve in place. Rotate the valve with light pressure. If the blue is transferred to the center of valve face, contact is satisfactory. If the blue is transferred to top edge of the valve face, lower valve seat with a 30 degrees stone or cutter. If the blue is transferred to the bottom edge of valve face, raise valve seat with a 65 degrees stone or cutter.
6EN043 1
Valve seat diameter: Intake 34 mm (I .34 in.) Exhaust 29.5 mm (1.16 in.) Seat width: 0.9 - 1.3 mm (035 - .051 in.)
(3) The valve and valve seat should be lapped with a lapping compound.
VALVE SEAT REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

(1) Grind the valve seat to be replaced from the inside to thin the wall thickness. Then, remove the valve seat.
1 ENOE 18
TSB Revision

(2) Rebore the valve seat hole in cylinder head to a selected oversize valve seat diameter.
Oversize I.D.
Valve Seat Insert Oversizes

Description Intake valve seat insert Exhaust valve seat insert Size mm (in.) 0.3 i.012) 0,s. 0.6 (.024) O.S. 0.3 l.012) 0,s. 0.6 (.024) O.S. 1 Size mark / 30 60 Seat insEt(,ke;ght H / Cylinder head I.D. mm (in.) 36.300-36.325 (1.4291-1.4301) 36.600-36.625 (1.4409-1.4419) 33.300-33.325 (1.3110-1.3120) 33.600-33.625 (1.3228-1.3238)
7.5 - 7.7 (.295 - ,303) I 7.8 - 8.0 (.307 - ,315) 7.9 - 8.1 (.311 - .319) 8.2 - 8.4 t.323 - ,331)
(3) When press-fitting the valve seat, chill the valve seat with liquid nitrogen so that the cylinder head bore is not damaged by galling. (4) Using the valve seat grinder or cutter, correct the valve seat to the specified width and angle. (5) See VALVE SEAT RECONDITIONING PROCEDURES.
VALVE GUIDE REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
MllPJDB
(1) Using suitable rod and a press, press the valve guide out of the cylinder head toward the cylinder block side. (2) Rebore the valve guide hole to the oversize valve guide outside diameter to be press-fitted.
Caution Do not use a valve guide of the same size as the one removed.
7EN02E
12.250-12.268 (.4823-.4830) 12.500-12.518 (.4921-.4928) (3) Install the valve guide until a protrusion of 17.5 mm (.689 in.) is obtained. See the illustration. NOTE 1. Press-fit the valve guide from the cylinder head top surface. 2. Note the difference in lengths of the valve guides for the intake and exhaust: intake 45.5 mm (1.791 in.) and exhaust 50.5 mm (1.988 in.). 3. After the valve guide has been installed in position, insert a new valve to ensure that it slides smoothly.
TSB Revision
11-38
ENGINE - Cylinder Head and Valve SERVICE POINTS OF INSTALLATION

15.13. INSTALLATION OF VALVE STEM SEAL
Install the spring seat, then using the special tool, install the d stem seal by lightly tapping the tool.
MllODAH
Caution 1. Incorrect installation of the seal without using the special tool will result in poor sealing and cause oil leakage down valve guide. 2. Do not reuse stem seal. 11.7. INSTALLATION OF VALVE SPRING
Enamel coated side Spring retainer
Valve springs should be installed with the enamel coated side toward the valve spring retainer.
Stem seal pring sheet

6EN024
9. 5. INSTALLATION OF RETAINER LOCK

Using the special tool, install the retainer lock
4. INSTALLATION OF CYLINDER. HEAD GASKET Identification mark: <Non-Turbo> <Turbo>
2DN 2DT
TSB Revision

1. INSTALLATION OF CYLINDER HEAD BOLT
11-39
(1) Using the special tool, tighten the bolts in two to three stages in the illustrated sequence. (2) Back off the bolts once and tighten them to the specified torque as shown in step (1).
7EN0262
, L
TSB Revision
II-40
ENGINE - Oil Pan and Oil Pump

MllRA--
OIL PAN AND OIL PUMP

,,,/jgfq/Y < /4 +Y , --;? L A

75 Nm 55 ftlbs. I
19 Nm 14 ft.lbs.
10 Nm
14
\ d
45 Nm 33 ft.lbs. 6Nrn 5 tklbs.
7EN0317
51u0010
5LUOOll
Groove 4 portion
Bolt hole portion
0110156
!sealant: MITSUBISHI GENUINE Part No. MD9971 10 or equivalen t
-I
TSB Revision
Removal steps 1. Transaxle stay (front) 2. Transaxle stay (rear) 3. Oil pressure switch 4. Oil pressure gauge unit Oil filter Z: Oil cooler by-pass valve <Turbo> Oil filter bracket stay ;: Oil filter bracket 9. Oil filter bracket gasket 10. Drain plug l + 11. Drain plug gasket l * 12. 0; y; bolt ** l * 13. I 14. Oil screen 15. Oil screen gasket
16. Relief plug 17. Relief spring 18. Relief plunger ** 19. Crankshaft front oil seal 20. Oil pump case 21. Oil pump gasket 22. Oil pump cover 23. Oil pump outer rotor 24. Oil pump inner rotor

13. REMOVAL OF OIL PAN
MllRBBB
(1) Knock the special tool in deeply between the oil pan and cylinder block. (2) Hitting the side of the special tool, slide and remove the oil pan.
INSPECTION
OIL PUMP
Side clearance
MllRKAB
Assemble the rotor on the oil pump and check the clearance with a feeler gauge.
Standard value: Body clearance Side clearance

Body clearance
O.lOO- 0.181 mm (.0039 - .0071 in.) 0.040 - 0.095 mm (.0016 - .0037 in.)
TSB Revision
II-42

OIL COOLER BY-PASS VALVE <Turbo>
(1) Make sure that the valve moves smoothly. (2) Ensure that the dimension L measures the standard value under normal temperature and humidity.
Dimension L: 34.5 mm (1.358 in.)

(3) The dimension must be the standard value when measured after the valve has been dipped in 100C (212F) oil.
Dimension L: 40 mm (1.57 in.) or more

6LUOl;
MllRDEC
19. INSTALLATION OF CRANKSHAFT FRONT OIL SEAL

Using the special tool, knock the oil seal into the oil pump case. NOTE Knock it as far as the surface.
Oil pump case
7EN0139
13. APPLICATION OF SEALANT TO OIL PAN

(1) Apply specified sealant all around the oil pan flange to a diameter of 4 mm (.I6 in.).
Specified sealant: MITSUBISHI Genuine Part No. MD9971 10 or equivalent

(2) Install the oil pan within 15 mins. after applying the liquid gasket.
Sealant coating area (Top view)
4 mm (. 16 in.) diameter Dead sealant
Groove area
Bolt hole area
7EN0305
TSB Revision
ENGINE - Oil Pan and Oil Pump 12. TIGHTENING SEQUENCE OF OIL PAN BOLT
Tlghtenlng sequence of flange bolts (bottom view)
11-43
Tighten the flange bolts in the sequence shown in the illustration.
iTiming belt side)
7EN030f
11. INSTALLATION OF DRAIN PLUG GASKET

Install the drain plug gasket in the direction shown in the illustration.
7EN030
/ i
TSB Revision
11-44
ENGINE - Piston and Connecting Rod

MllTA--
PISTON AND CONNECTING ROD

52 ihn 38 fklbs.
Removal steps 1. Nut l * I)* 2. Connecting rod cap 3. Connecting rod bearing (lower) l * 4. Piston, connecting rod assembly 1_ ._ 5. $nnec$ng. rod bearing (upper) WV WC 6. rrston ring No. 1 l * ** 7. Piston ring No. 2 I)+ 8. Qil ring l * ._ Y.- Hston - v* oin 10. Piston 11. Connecting rod 12. Bolt
7EN0266

2. REMOVAL OF CONNECTING ROD CAP
MllT6EC
Mark the large end of the connecting rod with the cylinder number for use during reassembly.
6. REMOVAL OF PISTON RING No. 1 / 7. PISTION RING

No. 2 Remove the piston rings with a piston ring expander.
6EN18!
TSB Revision
ENGINE - Piston and. Connectina Rod

9. REMOVAL OF PISTON PIN
II-45
MD998764 Front mark

lEN0113
(1) Insert the special tool, Pushrod from the front mark side of the piston top and install the guide B. (2) With the piston top facing the front mark side of the special tool, Piston Pin Setting Base and the piston front mark facing up, set the piston and connecting rod assembly.
(3) Using a press, remove the piston pin. NOTE After the piston pin is removed, store the piston, piston pin and connecting rod as grouped for each cylinder number.
lEN0114
INSPECTION
PISTON RING
MllTCEA
LJ
v
,, Push in by the piston.
5EN057
(1) Check the clearance between the piston ring and the ring groove. When it exceeds the limit, replace the rings, the piston, or both.
Standard value: No.1 No.2 Limit: No.1 No.2
0.03 - 0.07 mm (.0012 - .0028 0.02 - 0.06 mm (.OOOS - 0024 0.1 mm (.004 0.1 mm (.004
in.) in.) in.) in.)
(2) Insert the piston ring into the cylinder bore putting it against the top of the piston head and pressing it in. When it makes a right angle, measure the piston ring gap with a feeler gauge. When the gap is too large, replace the piston ring.
Standard value: No.1 No.2 Oil ring side rail

Piston ring gap
6EN037
Piston ring
0.30-0.45 mm (.0118- .0177 in.) 0.45- 0.60 mm (.0177 - .0236 in.) 0.20 - 0.60 mm (.0079 - .0236 in.) 0.8 mm (.031 in.) Limit: No.1 0.8 mm (.031 in.) No.2 1 .O mm (.039 in.) Oil ring side rail
I LJ
TSB Revision
11-46

BEARING
Measure the inner diameter of the connecting rod bearing and the outer diameter of the crankshaft pin. If the oil clearance exceeds the limit, replace the bearing, and crankshaft if necessary.
Standard value: 0.016 - 0.046 mm (.OOOS - .0018 in.) Limit: 0.1 mm (.004 in.)
7EN246 1
NOTE For the method by which the oil clearance is measured using a plastigauge, refer to the item on the crankshaft.
7EN247
MD998765 (Pus:rod)

9. INSTALLATION OF PISTON PIN
MllTDAQ
(1) Insert the special tool, Pushrod into the piston pin and install the guide A. (2) Apply engine oil to the outside of the piston pin.
7EN25;
(3) Assemble the piston and connecting rod lining up the front marks. (4) Insert the guide A end of the piston pin assembled in step (1) into the piston through the pin hole on the front mark.
(5) With the piston top facing the front mark side of the special tool, Piston Pin Setting Base and the piston front mark facing up, set the piston. (6) Using a press, install the piston pin. If the installation load is smaller than the standard value range, replace the piston pin (piston assembly) and/or the connecting rod.
Standard value: 7,500 - 17,500 N (1,686 - 3,934 Ibs.)
lENOl1 7
TSB Revision

(7) Check that the piston moves smoothly.
II-47
6EN0223 Side rail
8. INSTALLATION OF OIL RING

(1) Fit the oil ring spacer into the piston ring groove. NOTE On the side rail and the spacer, no difference exists between the upper and the lower surfaces. (2) Attach the side rail on the upper side. When attaching the side rail, engage one side of the side rail with the piston groove. If pressed with a finger, as shown in the illustration, it should enter easily. NOTE The side rail may be broken like other piston rings if the gap is opened by the ring expander. (3) In the same procedure as Step (2), position the side rail on the lower side. (4) Check that the side rail smoothly rotates in both directions.
Side rail end
7EN249 LI
7. INSTALLATION OF PISTON RING No. 2 / 6. PISTON RING No.1

(1) Using a piston ring expander, position the No.2 and No.1 piston rings.
Identification mark: No.1 No.2
T T2
7EN250
NOTE (1) Keep in mind that Nos.1 and 2 are different in shape. (2) Assemble the Nos.1 and 2 piston rings with the manufacturer and size marks stamped on the side facing upward (toward the piston top).
ldentiftcation mark embossed No. 1 7 Barrel we ldenthcation mark
Tapered we
7EN013i
TSB Revision
11-48
Side rail

No.1
4. INSTALLATION OF PISTON, CONNECTING ROD ASSEMBLY

(1) Liberally coat engine oil on the circumference of the piston, piston ring, and oil ring. d (2) Arrange the piston ring and oil ring gaps (side rail and spacer) as shown in the illustration. (3) Rotate crankshaft so that crank pin is on center of cylinder bore. (4) Use suitable thread protectors on connecting rod bolts before inserting piston and connecting rod assembly into cylinder block. Care must be taken not to nick crank pin. (5) Using a suitable piston ring compressor tool, install piston and connecting rod assembly into cylinder block.
spacer slot
rail
6ENO41
Caution Insert the pistons so that the front marks (arrows) on the piston tops point toward the front of the engine (timing belt side).
7EN0032
2. INSTALLATION OF CONNECTING ROD CAP

(1) Install the connecting rod, aligning it with the mark made or the connecting rod cap during disassembly. When the connecting rod being installed is new and has no alignment mark, install it so that the notches in the connecting rod and cap are on the same side, as d illustrated.
Cylindc numbe
Stopper notch
(2) Check the connecting rod big end thrust clearance.
Standard value: 0.10 - 0.25 mm (.0039 -.0098 in.) Limit: 0.4 mm (-016 in.)
TSB Revision
ENGINE - Crankshaft, Flywheel and Drive Plate
II-49 MIIUA- -
CRANKSHAFT, FLYWHEEL AND DRIVE PLATE

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION L
11 Nm 8 ft.lbs. I 1 75 Nm 55 ft.lbs. b
Removal steps
,12
1. Flywheel <M/T> 2. Adaptor plate <AIT> 3. Drive plate QVT> 4. Rear plate 5. Bell housing cover 6. Oil seal case 04 7. Crankshaft rear oil Seal ** 8. Bearing cap stay <Turbo> ** 9. Bearing cap *+ IO. Thrust bearing A +* 11. Thrust bearing B *a 12. Crankshaft bearing (lower) 13. Crankshaft ** 14. Thrust bearing B *+ 15. Thrust bearing A I)* 16. Crankshaft bearing (upper)
80 Nm 58 ft.lbs.
48Nm 35 ft.lbs. 7EN0318
7EN273 Sealant: 3M ATD Part No. 8660 or equivalent
/ id
TSB Revision
II-50
ENGINE - Crankshaft, FlYwheel and Drive Plate INSPECTION

FLYWHEEL (engine with a manual transaxle)
(I) Make a visual inspection of the clutch disc. If stepped wear, : \J streaking, or seizure are apparent, replace it. (2) If flywheel run out exceeds the limit, replace it.
MllUCHA
Limit: 0.13 mm t.0051 in.)
RING GEAR (engine with a manual transaxle)

When there is wear, cracks, or other damage to the ring gear teeth, replace the ring gear by the following procedure. Check the starter motor pinion. Ring gear replacement procedure: (1) Tap around the ring gear to loosen and remove it from the flywheel..
Caution The ring gear cannot be removed while it is hot.

(2) Heat the ring gear to 300C (572F) and install it into the flywheel.
CRANKSHAFT
Inspect out-of-roundness and taper of crankshaft journal and pin.
Limit: Out-of-roundness of journal and pin:

0.003 mm (.00012 in.)
LJ
Taper of journal and pin: 0.005 mm (.00020 in.)

\
7EN262
OIL CLEARANCE MEASUREMENT

(I) To check the oil clearance, measure the outside diameter of the crankshaft journal and the crank pin and the inside diameter of the bearing. The clearance can be obtained by calculating the difference between the measured outside and inside diameters.
Standard value: 0.019 - 0.044 mm i.0007 - .0017 in.) Limit: 0.1 mm (.004 in.)
7EN261
(2) If the oil clearance exceeds the limit, replace the bearing, and crankshaft if necessary.
TSB Revision
ENGINE - Crankshaft. Flvwheel and Drive Plate
11-51
MllUlAA PLASTIGAGE METHOD Plastigage may be used to measure the clearance. (1) Remove oil and grease and any other dirt from bearings and journals. (2) Cut plastigage to the same length as the width of the bearing and place it in parallel with the journal, off oil holes.
(3) Install the crankshaft, bearings and caps and tighten them to the specified torques. During this operation, do NOT turn the crankshaft. Remove the caps. Measure the width-of the plastigage at the widest part by using a scale printed on the plastigage sleeve. If the clearance exceeds the repair limit, the bearing should be replaced. Should the standard clearance not be obtained even after bearing replacement, replace the crankshaft.
MllUDAM
id
Crankshaft bearing (upper) Oil groove
16. INSTALLATION OF CRANKSHAFT BEARING (UPPER) / 15.10. THRUST BEARING A / 14.11. THRUST BEARING B / 12. CRANKSHAFT BEARING (LOWER) (1) Classify the crankshaft bearings (upper and lower) by whether there is an oil groove or not. Then, assemble as shown in the illustration. (2) Assemble the thrust bearings (A and B) on the No.3 journal area as shown in the illustration. Caution Install them with the groove side facing outward.
Thrust bearing A
Front of engine (Tlmlng belt side)
EN269
TSB Revision
11-52
ENGINE - Crankshaft, Flywheel and Drive Plate 9. INSTALLATION OF BEARING CAP (1) Attach the bearing cap on the cylinder block as shown in the illustration. (2) Tighten the bearing cap bolts to the specified torque in I J the sequence shown in the illustration. (3) Check that the crankshaft rotates smoothly.
Bearing cap \
Bearing cap bolt
Cral
Front of engine (Timing belt side)

7EN270
(4) Check the end plate. If it exceeds the limit value, replace the thrust bearing. Standard value: 0.05 - 0.25 mm (.0020 - .0098 in.) Limit: 0.3 mm (.012 in.)
-rent of engine Timing Ielt side)
LLiN03,ij
8. INSTALLATION OF BEARING CAP STAY (1) Apply engine oil to the thread and bearing surface of each bolt. (2) Temporarily tighten the bolts on the cylinder block side. (3) Tighten the bolts on the bearing cap side to specified torque. (4) Finally, tighten the bolts on the cylinder block side to specified torque. NOTE The bearing cap stays A and B differ in shape. Install correct ones on correct sides. 1 TSB Revision
ENGINE -
Crankshaft, Flywheel and Drive Plate / Cylinder Block
11-53
7. INSTALLATION OF CRANKSHAFT REAR OIL SEAL Using the special tool, press-fit a new crankshaft rear oil seal into the oil seal case.
MB990938-01
CYLINDER BLOCK
MllVA--
42 Nm ftlbs.
1. Roll stopper bracket front 2. Roll stopper bracket front (AWD only) 3. Roll stopper bracket rear 4. Detonation sensor I)* 5. Detonation sensor bracket 6. Cylinder block
7EN0319
INSPECTION
MllVCAM
CYLINDER BLOCK (1) Using a straight edge and feeler gauge, measure the flatness of the cylinder block upper surface. Standard value: 0.05 mm (-0020 in.) Limit: 0.1 mm (.004 in.) Grinding limit: 0.2 mm (.008 in.) Caution When the cylinder head is assembled, 0.2 mm (.008 in.) or less of grinding is permissible. 1 TSB Revision
11-54
I
ENGINE - Cylinder Block
$jA
,12 mm (.47 in.) I t+ : ;I 2 Center -
A@/
(2) Using a cylinder gauge, measure the inside diameter and roundness of the cylinder. If excessively worn, repair (over size) the cylinder and replace the piston and piston rings. The measurement points are shown in the illustration. )
BORING THE CYLINDER
MllVEEB
Thrust direction
point
7EN268
(1) Based on the largest cylinder bore, determine the over sized piston to be used. (2) Measure with the outside diameter of the piston as the datum measurement points. NOTE There are four sizes of oversize piston -0.25 mm (.OlO in.), 0.50 mm (.020 in.), 0.75 mm (.030 in.), 1.00 mm (.039 in.). (3) Calculate the reground bore size based on the measured. value of the outside piston diameter. NOTE Bore size = outside piston diameter + 0.03 to 0.05 mm (.0012 to .0020 in.) (gap between cylinder and piston) - 0.02 mm (0008 in.) (honing amount) (4) Hone each of the cylinders to the calculated measurement. Caution To prevent distortion resulting from the temperature d rise during reboring, bore the cylinder holes in the cylinder numbers sequence. (5) Hone the cylinders, finishing them to the proper dimension (outside piston diameter + gap with cylinder). (6) Check the gap between the piston and cylinder. Standard value: 0.03 - 0.05 mm (.0012 - .0020 in.)
SERWCE POINT OF INSTALLATION
MllVDAL
5. INSTALLATION OF DETONATION SENSOR BRACKET Check that the bracket is in intimate contact with the cylinder block boss and tighten to specified torque in the order shown.
TSB Revision
ENGINE - Engine Oil Cooler
11-55
MllMA-.
ENGINE OIL COOLER

4Nm 2.9 ft.lbs.
40-45 Nrh 29 - 33 ft.lbs.
Removal steps
l *
4*
1. Front splash shield extension 2. Engine oil feed hose 3. Engine oil return hose 4. Engine oil return tube 5. Engine oil cooler
12 Nm 9 ft.lbs.
5
02FOOOi
MllMBAC
2. REMOVAL OF ENGINE .OIL FEED HOSE / 4. ENGINE OIL RETURN TUBE Caution Be sure to hold the weld nut of the oil cooler while loosening the eye bolt.
INSPECTION
l l l l
MllMCAC
Check the engine oil cooler fins for bends, breaks or plugs. Check the engine oil cooler hoses for cracks, damage,
clogging or deterioration.
Check the gaskets for damage or deformation. Check the eye bolts for clogging or deformation.
1 TSB Revision
FUEL SYSTEM
CONTENTS
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM* ................................................ SERVICE ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES ............................ Cruise Control Cables Inspection and Adjustment ........ Cruise Control System Inspection .................................... individual Parts Inspection .................................................... SPECIAL TOOLS ........................................................................ SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................... 185 178 178 179 181 159 158 SPECIFICATIONS Service Specifications TROUBLESHOOTING ........................................................ ............................................................
M13AA- _
. . . . . . . .._._.................................................... 155 155 155
Accelerator Cable and Accelerator Pedal
........................ 155
FUEL SYSTEM
FUEL FILTER
....................................................
........................................................
3
154 153 151
DETONATION SENSOR
............................................................................
General Specifications ........................................................ 158 Service Specifications ........................................................158 TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................................ 159 Check Chart ............................................................................163 Harness and Components Layout .................................... 176 Preliminary Inspection ........................................................ 159 Self-diagnosis Checking ........................................................ 172 Troubleshooting Quick Reference Chart ............................ 159
FUEL LINE AND VAPOR LINE ................................................
FUEL PUMP AND FUEL GAUGE UNIT ASSEMBLY AND OVERFILL LIMITER (TWO-WAY VALVE) ................ 149 FUEL TANK ................................................................................. 146 GENERAL INFORMATION .................................................... 3 3 141 MPI System Diagram ............................................................ INJECTOR ................................................................................
ENGINE CONTROL
ENGINE CONTROL
............................................
155
157
ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION OF MPI COMPONENTS ........ 36 Active Exhaust Control Unit <Turbo> ............................ 130 Air Conditioner Switch and Power Relay ............................ 82 Air Flow Sensor .................................................................... 54 Anti-lock Brake Signal <Turbo> ........................................ 133 Barometric Pressure Sensor ................................................ 60
CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE
................................................................
SERVICE ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES ............................ 156 Accelerator Cable Inspection and Adjustment ................ 156 Accelerator Switch Inspection and Adjustment ................ 156
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) (1) A Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), which uses a driver-side air bag, has been installed in the 3000GT. (2) The SRS includes the following components: impact sensors, SRS diagnosis unit: SRS warning light, air bag module, clock spring, interconnecting wiring. Other SRS-related components (that may have to be removed/installed in connection with SRS service or maintenance) are indicated in the table of contents by an asterisk (*). WARNING! (I) Improper service or maintenance of any component of the SRS, or any SRS-related component, can lead to personal injury or death to service personnel (from inadvertent firing of the air bag) or to the driver (from rendering the SRS inoperative). (2) Service or maintenance of any SRS component or SRS-related component must be performed only at an authorized MITSUBISHI dealer. (3) MITSUBISHI dealer personnel must thoroughly review this manual, and especially its GROUP 528 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), before beginning any service or maintenance of any component of the SRS or any SRS-related component.
13-2
Boost Meter <Turbo> ........................................................ 128 Components Inspection Procedure .................................... 40 Components Location ........................................................ 36 Crank Angle Sensor ............................................................ 72 Detonation Sensor ................................................................ 84 EGR Control Solenoid Valve <California - Non Turbo, Turbo> ........................................ 121 EGR Temperature Sensor <California> ............................ 92 Electrical Load Switch ........................................................ 86 Engine and Transaxle Total Control Signal <A/T> ............ 135 44 Engine Control Unit Power Ground .................................... 62 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor ................................ Fuel Pressure Control Valve <Turbo> ............................ 123 Fuel Pressure Test ................................................................ 138 Fuel Pump <Non Turbo> .................................................... 45 Fuel Pump <Turbo> ............................................................ 48 Fuel Pump Operation Check ................................................ 137 53 Fuel Pump Relay No. 2 ...................... . ................................. Fuel Pump Resistor ............................................................ 53 Idle Position Switch ............................................................ 68 Idle Speed Control Servo (Stepper Motor Type) ............ 1 IO Ignition Coil and Power Transistor .................................... 115 Ignition Switch-ST and Inhibitor Switch <A/T> ................ 76 Ignition Switch-ST <M/T> ................................................ 75 Induction Control Valve Position Sensor <Non Turbo> ........................................................................ 90 Injectors <Non Turbo> ........................................................ 101 Injectors <Turbo> ................................................................ 105 Intake Air Temperature Sensor ............................................ 57 Muffler Mode Changeover Switch <Turbo> .................... 88 Oxygen Sensor <Non Turbo> ............................................ 94 Oxygen Sensor <Turbo> .................................................... 98 80 Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch ................................ 41 Power Supply and Ignition Switch-IG ................................
Purge Control Solenord Valve ............................................ 1 19 Release of Residual Pressure from High Pressure Fuel Hose ............................................................ 137 Throttle Position Sensor .................................................... 65 Top Dead Center Sensor .................................................... 70 Variable Induction Control Servo (DC Motor) <Non Turbo> ........................................................................ 131 Vehicle Speed Sensor ........................................................ 78 Waste Gate Control Solenoid Valve <Turbo> ................ 126 SERVICE ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES ............................ Adjustment of Fixed SAS .................................................... Adjustment of Idle Position Switch and Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) ............................................ Basic Idle Speed Adjustment ............................................ Throttle Body (Throttle Valve Area) Cleaning .................... SPECIAL TOOLS ........................................................................ SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................... General Specifications ........................................................ Sealant .................................................................................... Service Specifications ........................................................ 31 35 33 31 33 8 6 6 7 7
143 THROlTLE BODY .................................................................... 9 TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................................ Check Chart Classified by Problem Symptoms ................ 16 Circuit Diagram .................................................................... 18 Engine Warning Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) ........ 11 Explanation and Cautions about Harness Check ............ 10 9 Explanation of Troubleshooting Procedures .................... Fuel Tank and Fuel Line ........................................................ 30 Problem Symptoms Table (For Your Information) ............ 17 Self-diagnosis ........................................................................ 12
) I
FUEL SYSTEM - General Information
FUEL SYSTEM
L/ GENERAL INFORMATION
MPI SYSTEM DIAGRAM
<Federal - Non Turbo> 4 ,xwo3 ,elOl alxesueJl/aulfiu~ 1qt% 6uluJeMaul6u~ * ,!03 u0yJ61 I hqa dwnd ,an,
4 hew XV ONaS ,ono5 ownp! a,qe!Je/\ an,&, ~loa,os ,0~103 a6md mJaS XI
8 z EC &S
E c
TSB Revision
13-4
<California - Non Turbo>
Ln 03 0-l 0 3 LL r?
E XUT 0 S@ E ,E% .$u gg g 26; 5 ash
_I
t I : i E I -2
TSB Revision

<Turbo>
1 3 - 5
,-=c1 ,iv an,w p1oYa,os am aSeM awn ploqor ,OliOJ aE% an,en,OllOJ amrsa>* WI, ONar 3SI an,en ploapn ,Ol,rn 833
Y : 6.X iI=5
B 5: : K p ly PB I,$ L1 g E: ;I $$ I: I
i -
I
I J
III II 1
-ti .=z wf a a.5 239
TSB Revision
13-6 SPECIFICATIONS
FUEL SYSTEM - Specifications
Tank capacity liter (gal.) Return system Filter
High pressure type Electrical, in-tank type
Driven by
Throttle position sensor idle speed control servo
Variable resistor type Stepper motor type The stepper motor type by-pass air control system with the first idle air valve
Engine control unit Identification model No. <Non Turbo> Federal <Turbo> California <Non Turbo>
Barometric pressure sensor Engine coolant temperature sensor Oxygen sensor Vehicle speed sensor Detonation sensor Top dead center sensor Crank angle sensor Induction control valve position sensor <Non Turbo> EGR temperature sensor <California>
Karman vortex type Semiconductor diffusion type
Reed switch type Piezoelectric device type Photo interrupter type Photo interrupter type Variableresistor type
TSB Revision
FUEL SYSTEM - SDecifications

Items Specifications Contact switch type Electromagnetic, 6 BDH210 BDL360 Electric motor ON/OFF type solenoid valve Duty cycle solenoid valve ON/OFF type solenoid valve Duty cycle type solenoid valve 335 (47.6) 300 (43.5)
Actuators Control relay type Injector type and number Injector identification mark <Non Turbo> <Turbo> Variable induction control servo <Non Turbo> Purge control solenoid valve EGR control solenoid valve <California - Non Turbo, Turbo> Fuel pressure control solenoid valve <Turbo> Waste gate solenoid valve <Turbo> Fuel pressure regulator Regulated pressure kPa (psi) <Non Turbo> <Turbo>
terns 3asic ignition timing 3urb idle speed rpm dle speed when air conditioner is on rpm <M/T> <Al-r> 3asic idle speed rpm Throttle position sensor adjusting voltage V Throttle position sensor resistance k0 dle speed control servo (stepper motor) coil resistance ntake air temperature sensor resistance kfi Engine coolant temperature sensor resistance kQ 20C (68F) 80C (176F) %el pressure kPa (psi) Vacuum hose disconnection <Non Turbo> <Turbo> Vacuum hose connection <Non Turbo> <Tu rho> Injector coil resistance Sz <Non Turbo> <Turbo> Specifications 5 -t 2BTDC at curb idle 700 * 100 900 at neutral position 650 at D range 700 + 50 0.4- 1 .o 3.5 - 6.5 28 - 33 [at 20C (68F)I 2.7 [at 20C (68F)I 2.4 0.3 330 - 350 (47 - 50) at curb idle 295 - 315 (43 - 45) at curb idle Approx. 270 (38) at curb idle Approx. 235 (34) at curb idle 13 - 16 [at 20C (68F)] 2 - 3 [at 20C (68F)I
SEALANT
MlXE-A
I Items
/ L Engine coolant temperature sensor threaded portion Fuel tank hole cover
1 Specified sealant 3M NUT Locking Part No. 4171 or equivalent 3M ATD Part No. 8509 or equivalent
1 TSB Revision
13-8 SPECIAL TOOLS
FUEL SYSTEM - Special Tools

MlBDA-
MB991359
l l
Reading diagnosis code MPI system inspection
Detonation sensor
[TSB Revision
FUEL SYSTEM - Troubleshooting

START
13-9
MlBEBBS
TROUBLESHO.OTlNG
EXPLANATION OF TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES

Effective troubleshooting procedures for MPI system problems are given below. 1. Verification of trouble symptom l Reproduce trouble symptom and verify the characteristics of the trouble and the conditions (engine condition, driving conditions, etc.) under which it is produced. 2. Reading of self-diagnosis code l Read self-diagnosis code and if a malfunction code is output, locate and correct the trouble referring to the diagnosis chart. 3. Estimation of the causes of trouble and setting of check items l Referring to the Check Chart, verify the check items and checking order for the trouble symptom. 4. Inspection of engine control unit input/output signals l Using the multi-use tester or oscilloscope, check the engine control unit input/output signals. l If the signals are normal, judge the sensor input/ actuator control as normal and proceed to check the input/output signals of the next check item. 5. Inspection of MPI system component harness l If the engine control unit input/output signals are abnormal, check the MPI system component body harness and repair as necessary. l After repair, check the engine control unit input/output signals again. If they are normal, proceed to check the input/output signals of the next check item. 6. Inspection of individual MPI system components l If the body harness is normal but the engine control unit input/output signals are abnormal, check individual MPI system components and repair or replace as necessary. l After repair or replacement, check the engine control unit input/output signals again. If they are normal, proceed to check the input/output signals of the next check item. 7. Re-inspection and repair of trouble symptom l If the harness inspection and individual component inspection results are normal but the engine control unit input/output signals are abnormal, re-examine the causes of trouble referring to the troubleshooting hints and the checks and repairs included in other groups. 8. Verification and prevention of reoccurrence after repair l Perform tests to see if the same problems occur again and make sure that the same problems will not be repeated. l Remove the true causes of the trouble to prevent its reoccurrence.
11. Verification of trouble symptom
2. Reading of self-diagnosis code
3. Estimation of the causes of trouble and setting of check items
\1
4. Inspection of engine control unit input/ output signals
\1 LL
5. Inspection of MPI system component 6. Inspection of individual MPI system components 7. Re-inspection and repair of trouble symptom
8. Verification and prevention of reoccur-
TSB Revision
13-10
Equipment side
FUEL SYSTEM - Troubleshootinn EXPLANATION AND CAUTIONS ABOUT HARNESS CHECK

l
Ha sid
I The connector symbol shown is as viewed from the terminal end of the connector inside the vehicle. ij~ 0 SV used as the standard value in voltage check stands for system voltage.
6Fl1171f
Test harness
When checking a waterproof connector for circuit continuity, be sure to use the special tool, Test Harness. Never insert the test probe from the harness side as this causes loss of waterproof characteristics and corrosion may result. There are various test harnesses and the appropriate one for the connector being tested should be used.
Test hai (MB991
If the appropriate test harness for the particular connector is not available, the use of the Test Harness Set (MB991348) which can be connected directly between the terminals is recommended. When checking the terminal voltage with the connector disconnected, do not insert the test probe if the check d terminal is female. If the test probe is forced into the terminal, poor contact may be caused.
OlL102E
When checking an open circuit of a wire with its ends physically separated, ground one end using a jumper wire and check the continuity between the other end and ground. Repair the wire if there is no continuity.
6FU1217
<
When checking short-circuit to ground of a wire, open one end of the wire and check continuity between the other end and ground. If there is continuity, the wire is short-circuited to ground and requires repair. For checking continuity, use an analog ohmmeter (or circuit tester) as a rule.
TSB Revision

Sensor side
l
13-11
If the sensor impressed voltage is abnormal, check the wire for an open circuit or short-circuit to ground and repair as necessary. If the wire is normal, replace the engine control unit and check again. To check the voltage, use a digital voltmeter (or circuit tester) as a rule. [However, use an analog voltmeter for checking the power transistor drive voltage.]
6FU1215
Malfunction
ENGINE WARNING LIGHT (MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT)

Among the self-diagnosis items, a malfunction indicator light comes on to notify the driver of the emission control items when an irregurality is detected. However, when an irregular signal returns to normal and the engine control unit judges that it has returned to normal, the malfunction indicator light goes out. Moreover, when the ignition switch is turned off, the light goes out. Even if the ignition switch is turned on again, the light does not come on until the irregularity is detected. Here, immediately after the ignition switch is turned on, the malfunction indicator light is lit for 5 seconds to indicate that the malfunction indicator light operates normally.
ITEMS INDICATED BY THE MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT

Engine control unit Oxygen sensor Air flow sensor Intake air temperature sensor Throttle position sensor Engine coolant temperature sensor Crank angle sensor Top dead center sensor Barometric pressure sensor Detonation sensor Ignition timing adjustment signal Injector EGR system <California> Ignition coil, power transistor unit
Caution The malfunction indicator light comes on when the line of the ignition timing adjustment terminal is shorted to ground. Therefore, the light also comes on when the ignition timing adjustment terminal is grounded to adjust the ignition timing, but this does not show any abnormality. TSB Revision
13-12

MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT INSPECTION (1) Check that when the ignition switch is turned on, the light illuminates for about 5 seconds and then goes out. (2) If the light does not illuminate, check for open circuit in d harness, blown fuse and blown bulb.
SELF-DIAGNOSIS
The engine control unit monitors the input/output signals (some signals at all times and the others under specified conditions) of the engine control unit. When it is noticed that an irregularity has continued for a specified time or longer from when the irregular signal is initially monitored, passing a certain number, the engine control unit judges that an irregularity has occurred, memorizes the malfunction code, and outputs the signal to the self-diagnosis output terminal. There are 21 diagnosis items, including the normal state, and the diagnosis results can be read out with a voltmeter or multi-use tester. Moreover, since memorization of the malfunction codes is backed up directly by the battery, the diagnosis results are memorized even if the ignition key is turned off. The malfunction codes will, however, be erased when the battery terminal or the engine control unit connector is disconnected. The malfunction code can also be erased by turning on the ignition switch and sending the malfunction code erase signal from the multi-use tester to the engine control unit. Caution If the sensor connector is disconnected _ _with the ignition switch turned on, the malfunction code is memorized. In d this case, send the malfunction code erase signal from the multi-use tester to the engine control unit or disconnect the battery terminal (-) for 10 seconds or more, and the diagnosis memory will be erased. The 21 diagnosis items are provided as follows, and if plural items are activated, they are all indicated sequentially from the smallest code number. Caution The malfunction code for the ignition timing adjustment signal is output when the line of the ignition timing adjustment terminal is shorted to ground. Therefore, the malfunction code is also output when the ignition timing adjustment terminal is grounded to adjust the ignition timing, but this does not show any abnormality.
TSB Revision
FUEL SYSTEM - Troubleshootinn DIAGNOSIS CHART (FAULT TREE)
FIreference order
1
output
Diagnosis code Diagnosis item Output signal pattern Engine control unit :r12A0104
Check item (Remedy) No. Memory (Replace engine control unit) Retained Cnn
12A0104
Oxygen sensor (Turbo: Rear bank) I
Harness and connector 0 Oxygen sensor l Fuel pressure l Injectors (Replace if defective.) l Intake air leaks
l l
Air flow sensor :n

12A0104
Retained * Retained H Ln
12A0104
Harness and connector (If harness and connector are normal, replace air flow sensor assembly.) Harness and connector Intake air temperature sensor
Intake air temperature sensor
l l
I3 Retained
l l l
Throttle position sensor :n

12AO104
Harness and connector Throttle position sensor Idle position switch
I4 Retained
l
L
7
8
Coolant temperature sensor :nn

12A0107
21 Retained
Harness and connector 0 Coolant temperature sensor
Crank angle sensor :nn

12A0107
22 Retained
l
Harness and connector (If harness and connector are normal, replace crank angle sensor assembly.) Harness and connector (If harness and connector are normal. replace crank angle sensor assembly.) Harness and connector Vehicle speed sensor (reed switch)
Top dead center sensor :nn

12A0107
23 24 Retained
l l
Vehicle speed sensor (reed switch)
H L UInnnn
12A0107
10
Barometric pressure sensor
H L u I nnluln
12A0107
25
Retained
Harness and connector (If harness and connector are normal, replace barometric pressure sensor assembly.) Harness and connector (If harness and connector are normal, replace detonation sensor.)
11
Detonation sensor
31
Retained
:-r-uuuL
12A0468
LNOTE
Replace the engine control unit if a malfunction code is output although the inspection reveals that there is no problem with the check items. TSB Revision
13-14
r
output preference order 12 Diannosis item 1Ignition timing adjustment signal H L 13 Oxygen sensor (Turbo: Front bank) H

Diagnosis code I Output signal pattern
No. 36
7
Retained
l l l l l
39
12AOlO!
14
Injector :nnnn
12A0105
5 I--
Harness and connector Oxygen sensor Fuel pressure Injectors (Replace if defective) Intake air leaks Harness and connector Injector coil resistance
41
Retained
l l
EGR <California>
Retained
l l l l l
Harness and connector EGR thermo-sensor EGRvalve EGR control solenoid valve EGR valve control vacuum Harness and connector Ignition coil Power transistor unit
16
Retained
l l l
12A0105
lqnition coil, power transistor unit INO. 2-5 cylinder)
H L u Lnll
12AO105
52
18
qnition coil. Tower transistor unit NO. 3-6 cylinder)
H L n
12A0105
Retained
l l l
Harness and connector Ignition coil Power transistor unit
A cable from transaxle control unit, for transmission of torque reduction signal <A/T> Induction control valve position sensor <Non Turbo>
61 H L UUUUUI n
12A0105
Retained
Harness and connector (If harness and connector are normal, replace only transaxle control unit.) Harness and connector (If harness, connector and induction control valve are normal, replace air intake plenum assembly.) -
62
H
Retained
uutJvL
12A0105
Normal state
NOTE Replace the engine control unit if a malfunction code is output although the inspection reveals that there is no problem with the check items.
TSB Revision
13-15
READ OUT OF MALFUNCTION CODE Precautions for Operation (1) When battery voltage is low, no detection of failure is possible. Be sure to check the battery for voltage and other conditions before starting the test. (2) Diagnosis item is erased if the battery or the engine control unit connector is disconnected. Do not disconnect the battery before the diagnosis result is completely read.
Using Multi-Use Tester (I) Read and record the self-diagnosis output. (2) Referring to the diagnosis chart, repair the faulty part. (3) Turn the ignition switch OFF and then turn it ON. (4) Erase the malfunction code. (5) Recheck that a normal code is output.
7FUO999 r MPI diagnosis
Using Voltmeter (I) Connect an analog voltmeter between the self-diagnosis output terminal of the diagnosis connector and ground terminal. (2) Turn on the ignition switch. (3) Read the diagnosis output pattern from the voltmeter and record it. (4) Referring to the diagnosis chart, repair the faulty part. (5) Erase the malfunction code using the following procedure. @ Turn OFF the ignition switch. @ Disconnect the negative battery cable from the battery terminal for 10 seconds or more and then reconnect it. @ Turn ON the ignition switch and read the self-diagnosis code to check that a normal code is output. Diagnosis by DIAGNOSIS 2 MODE (1) Using the multi-use tester, changeover the diagnosis mode of the engine control unit to DIAGNOSIS 2 MODE. (2) Road test the vehicle. (3) Read the diagnosis code in the same manner as READ OUT OF MALFUNCTION CODE and repair the malfunctioning part. (4) Remove the multi-use tester. NOTE Removal of the multi-use tester .will erase all the self- diagnosis malfunction codes in the engine control unit and changeover the diagnosis mode from DIAGNOSIS 2 MODE to DIAGNOSIS 1 MODE.
L Ground
EC165(
TSB Revision
13-16
CHECK CHART CLASSIFIED BY PROBLEM SYMPTOMS
stepper motor type)
0: Warm en,gine (number inside indicates check order) Cl: Cold engine (number inside indicates check order)
<N/T>: Non Turbo CT>: Turbo
TSB Revision
FUEL SYSTEM - Troubleshootina PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (FOR YOUR INFORMATION)
13-17
I;
Items Wont start (no initial combustion) -g Starting problem 2 (i;il;i combustion, then (Starting takes a long time.) Idling instability (Rough idling) > .r E s 0 F .=e -
Symptom The starter is used to crank the engine, but there is no combustion within the cylinders, and the engine wont start. There is combustion within the cylinders, but then the engine soon stalls.
Engine wont start quickly. Engine speed doesnt remain constant; changes during idling. Usually, a judgement can be based upon the movement of the tachometer pointer, and the vibration transmitted to the steering wheel, shift lever, body, etc. This is called rough idling. The engine doesnt idle at the usual correct speed. This non-continuity of idling includes the following elements. (1) Die out . . . . . The engine stalls when the foot is taken from the accelerator pedal, regardless of whether the vehicle is moving or not. (2) Pass out . . The engine stalls when the accelerator pedal is depressed or while it is being used. Hesitation is the delay in response of the vehicle speed (engine rpm) that occurs when the accelerator pedal is depressed in order to accelerate from the speed at which the vehicle is now traveling, or a temporary drop in vehicle speed (engine rpm) during such acceleration. Serious hesitation is called sag. L x g Initial v) accelerator + pedal 2 depression 2 Hesitation Normal --\a ,r- , ** , 8 / , / / / , I . * Ii Sag &L-e** 1
Time
Incorrect idling speed ImpDr;p;ertidling continuity Pass out
Hesitation Sag
L
Poor acceleration
1 FU022:
Poor acceleration is inability to obtain an acceleration corresponding to the degree of throttle opening, even though acceleration is smooth, or the inability to reach maximum speed. Engine rpm response is delayed when the accelerator pedal is initially depressed for acceleration from the stopped condition. . Normal $ x Initial : accelerator I// 3 c pedal ,# 2 depression , , / -7 4 Stumble Idling *-- c
Time
1 FUO22L
0, Stumble .F iI n
Shock
The feeling of a comparatively large impact or vibration when the engine is accelerated or decelerated. This is repeated surging ahead during constant speed travel or during variable speed travel. A sharp sound like a hammer striking the cylinder walls during driving and which adversely affects driving.
TSB Revision
/ L/
Surge Knocking
13-18
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
<Non Turbo>
FUSIBLE LINK@
BA'I ?
STARTER
IGN 'ION :H(ST) I
J/B AF;,CATED I
10A
1
> >%-::l I4 c!i ,,l I\ -
o L20A CT
M, /T ! A/T r
F I E
,,,2
WITH THEFTALARM
WITHOUT Em3 f w
> , %
I c-29 fimzzaq
Lq '2=-
3%
INHIBITOR ,,8 SWITCH
4 D-15
fz7l9iq
P 3 \I
"9 B-26 i Y ?a
t t
j0R
7
41 a cu c
3 f
I --------_
/ $24 5 3 E cu M/T A/T I
\I "0 m 1, \/ ON'-OFF \I
ENGINE CONTROL RELAY

c-44
"6
\I ;-12
KX35-AC-R0502-NY
TSB Revision
L
@
IGNITI SWITCf 3 77\
197G1,
1231
J/B
6676 a3 %: 7 C-62
0 15A
AL \I : I 6 C-71 :; -1 a1 ; C \gI6 D-44

3 I
pYilasq A-17 [
3 I
uI
D-04 /\ 59 7i ,. c) COMBINATION METER
1121314t5161718 1 8 ( 10~11~12~13~1~1~16~17
Alhzb L%KPW CONNECTOR
4 c-30 123 456 IElI r !Y I R r --J I FE cu G

*1
9 c-34 p/iaazj
AL D-03 I
IY
J
3 ;
:NSOR ITCH)
s c-14 -1
FUEL j PUMP F-16 4 [ 2
I
5
z .G
3 >t
L.
--E ;
F-14 I 2 3456 m
106
&I
1
j6
ENGINE CONTROL UNIT w
TSB Revision
13-20
AIR FLOW SENSOR B-29 \/ v \/

6 7 5
AIR SENSOR
CRANK ANGLE AND TOP DEAD z CENTER SENSOR $j 4-j 613 B-04
\, \I \/ \I "1 2 4 l
69
Q Q
.----------.
56
ip --- --- --. Sl 64 72

4: g$ w cu d >4
----------__---------_____
:7
63
ENGINE CONTROL RELAY c

m
I I I I I
? c
? >
ENGINE CONTROL UNIT
.h 0
$ I $I
I I
i%ml c - 5
1;
L-I I I I jr I ml --1 -II > d
I
m
9
5
4
? >
~~ 5 c&m
~ THROTTLE B-05 ~~~Q~~oN p&q+
01
KX35-AC-R0502h-HY
ENGINE COOLANT $E!E$BATURE B-02 @J
Lj
1 TSB Revision
FUEL SYSTEM - Troubleshootinn

ENGINE CONTROL RELAY v .25G
13-21
IDLE SPEED s CONTROL SERVO ,x2 B-35
g h5 /\
mJ 3-13
I 12
1
l-h-h
1 m 1 H
m I is co d
a2 2 z 5 aJ m 6 d _ _---- --___
4 3 3= II: 3 L? 00 00 d d (I
----------------- LI----------------158
ri I I II II I I
53
110
-------
I I 51 I I I
I I I I I I
I I I I I I I
;-1 m 3 m Id
m/
3: II I I ch J
4 3
3 cu
1B-08 II : ~
r
EGR g[bWbEATURE A-22@&
TSB Revision
VARIABLE INDUCTION SERVO MOTOR ~~~ @J
13-22
J/B MULTI-PURPOSE ( FUSE@ >
TAIL LIGHT RELAY

5 I
iE;;FGER
ikli$IC
;;iZ;CATED
7 g
0
> J
\I 8
A-36
C-69
[1:
J/B
&I
w
7
I
* 1
T
DIODE Ire E-31 I
6 A-67
r----I
C-52
6 I
.i 1
7
J CA
t c
POWER TRANSISTOR AIR ~X$Il$T~ONER UNIT
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE .SWITCH (FOR AIR CONDITIONER)
KX35-AC-R05025-NY
TSB Revision
FUEL SYSTEM - Troubleshootina
13-23
i-
-4A/T C NTROL
4?
I 7f59 59
1E----7
, L
107
3
; ENGINE j ;#yTROL II I III
-------__-------.
----. _-- --. - - - - - - -
113 s _----.4
111-I C
L----------------- 1
104
1
CL CL
B-06 1 ?.a E&l

3 .L
B-36 1
1
-
Ia
POWER STEERIK? g;iT;;ESSURE
1 A- 18 ; ~ [ 1, jELF-DIAGNOSIS X/i;&ON IjrHECK ADJUSTMENT CONNECTOR EET Co;cToR pj&Jgq c-79 10
L
1 TSB Revision
13-24
<Turbo>
FUSIBLE LINK@
a J/B
q 1
BATTERY --T--
;ER
B;&CATED
I t
15A
IOA
l- -1
C-83 m 7 pTEiEsq& is 6 1 Efi;;l p!i!Ezq; 3 A-67
1 I0
15A
c-71 1234 567 5 s *01112* , 1616 jLEl3za
m AIR FLOW SENSOR' i

E N -
?
:
,lO
I\ ---------
3 ENGINE CONTROL -I RELAY c-44
OFF-*ON __O / \I 1
I
71 ,-----
d CL I
cte"4 % N Gl Y E N
"5 % IN c J 108
"0
3 D T
\, "7 ! c 4: 3 ? [II 52 -
5 1-;125 a +2
&18
Ea
X35-AC-R0503-NY
a
TSB Revision
13-25
IGNI SWIT
i
IN
(IGl)
1234 5676 liEI 7 C-82 J/B I : c-71 -1 5 D-44
4 E A1
FUEL PUMP RESISTOR A-51 2 @%J -2 k N s
:
3E
J
m
n
D-04
59
!I2
;
c-30
1
i J
COMBINATION
EEKPUMP CONNECTOR
D-03
A.L I i
c c
WI :D SE! ;OR -
\I
> 1 C-14 [ 3 ml 5 F-14
L.
c c
II I
j.
1 ti
36
1 TSB Revision
13-26
-e
-7
CRANK ANGLE AND TOP DEAD z CENTER SENSOR m
AIR FLOW SENSOR B-29 \/ v

7 5
~@.@JER C
+- AIR FLOW SENSOR
\/
6 -3 A
\/ 1
> CL
\/
2
\I
\,
7: rti s
4 3 % 00 c- t z-
i
I I I I I I I I
~ZL-- &i _ _ -&L-- _ _ - - - - &- - &9 4&&d vv

5v ii
I I I 1 I
2
G
E? N
G
7I
21 ) I ) I 1 ! I
= CL
4: g
E G
B ENGINE CONTROL RELAY
L-l ;r I I
II
KX35-AC-RO5tX36-NY
TSB Revision
FUEL SYSTEM - Troubleshootina

ENGINE CONTROL RELAY RES STOR Q 0.65R n RKD 1 1.25R 4,1 I T 1
e .&I
IDLE SPEED ,. /\2 CONTROL SERVO B-35
TOR
m I
A-67 ,,2-,,8--,,1-,,?_--,,lO r----1 5 c;II
I I I I I I L---w
I 4 I I I
I I
I II I I I II m n
- 3
: -I 1
l
A-Z &I
OXYGEN S;K;R(RH)
TEMPERATURE
TSB
Revision
13-28
J/B MULTI-PURPOSE ( FUSE@ >

m
TAIL LIGHT RELAY
DEF( jGER RELf
Kix CONTR
3 d
STOP LIGHT SW ITCH
C-61
ON
El
12 34
1DIODE I
f I I
L&i d _-I
'(3
C-69
if2 a3 d 0 w I
1
r--------'
c-29
--__---_-__------___------~~--- y----------------------------J \1,-71
z?124 r-----------------------------7; I I V I
t&
I -- :------_
22
----_ 10
----3
11
w
6 .---Sk------J &I 1
-r - - - - - 103
I
-.--!x I %
.---- .-----_-_-----_ 3
128 c-14 ? pER!Eq
5 cb
AIR E;;F#ONER ,t 8 A-33 > I UNIT

J v
c
Y
POWER TRANSISTOR
ABS CONTROL UNIT
ACTIVE isiii%!iT
FlffiW RELAY
KX35-AC-R0503B-NY
TSB Revision
13-29

F c - - - 1 I I I I I I I I
= 2
7
) I III II
2,( 2 o FUEL PRESSURE SOLENOID ]i#&B,D i SE VALVE If A-20
7 EGR i~XE~~OID I L ; A-21 1
WASTE GATE SOLENOID VALVE A-70
j A-72
f ENGINE j jXICI$ROL I
-------
13
s 3 .------ /\ 1 I B-OS
> J
c
s 10 1 A-18 3 #Fjhl;;ON ADJUSTMENT CONNECTOR d
ENGINE COOLANT Q&;EEATURE ,,'I /\ FOR AIR CONDITIONER )/

OFF --xOlJ
@I
POWER STEERING ;tK;BESSURE
~;~E&DIAGNOSIS CONNECTOR EF fq&@g Ef pggggg]
-_-
TSB Revision
13-30

MlJE4AB
FUEL TANK AND FUEL LINE

Symptom Engine malfunctions due to insufficient fuel supply
tank and fuel line
Evaporative emission 30ntroI system malfunctions (When tank cap is removed, pressure releasing noise is heard)
1 TSB Revision
FUEL SYSTEM - Service Adjustment Procedurks
13-31
MlBFHSU

i
BASIC IDLE SPEED ADJUSTMENT

NOTE (1) The basic idle speed has been factory-adjusted with the speed adjusting screw (SAS) and does not normally require adjustment. (2) If the adjustment is required, first check that the ignition plug, injector, ISC servo, and compression pressure are normal. (1) Before starting the inspection and adjustment procedures, set the vehicle in the following conditions: Engine coolant temperature: 80 to 95C (176 to 205F) l l Lights, electric cooling fan, accessories: OFF Transaxle: Neutral (P range on vehicles with automatic l transaxle) l Steering wheel: Straightforward position (2) When using the multi-use tester, connect it to the diagnosis connector. NOTE The connection of the multi-use tester grounds the selfdiagnosis/data transmission selector terminal. (3) When not using the multi-use tester, proceed as follows: @) Insert a paper clip into the l-pin blue connector as shown in the illustration.
@ Connect a primary-voltage-detecting tachometer to the paper clip. NOTE The tacho/neter should read l/3 of the actual engine speed. This means that the actual engine speed is the tachometer reading multiplied by 3.
TSB Revision
13-32
FUEL SYSTEM - S ervice Adjustment Procedures

@ Using a jumper wire, ground the self-diagnosis/data transmission selector terminal (terminal @) of the diagnosis connector (white). d
Self-diagnosis/ y data transmission
(4) Remove the waterproof female connector from the ignition timing adjusting connector (brawn). (5) Using a jumper wire, ground the ignition timing adjusting terminal.
(6) Start the engine and run at idle. (7) Check the basic idle speed. When using the multi-use tester, select item No. 38 and read the idle speed.
Basic idle speeci: 700 + 50 rpm

NOTE (I) The engine speed may be low by 20 to 100 rpm while the vehicle is new [distance driven approx. 500 km (300 miles) or less], but no adjustment is necessary. (2) If the engine stalls or speed is low despite a sufficient distance driven [approx. 500 km (300 miles) or more], it is probably due to deposits on the throttle valve. In this case, clean the throttle valve. (Refer to P.13-33.) (8) If the basic idle speed is out of specification, adjust by turning the speed adjusting screw (SAS). NOTE If the idle speed is higher than the standard value even with SAS fully tightened, check to see if there is evidence of the idle switch (fixed SAS) being moved. If the idle switch seems to have been moved, adjust it. If it does not seem to have been moved, there may be a leak caused by deteriorated fast idle air valve (FIAV). In such a case, replace the throttle body. (9) Turn the ignition switch OFF. (lO)When the multi-use tester has not been used, remove the jumper wire from the self-diagnosis/data transmission selector terminal. (11)Remove the jumper wire from. the ignition timing adjusting terminal and replace the connector back again. (12)Start the engine again and run at idle for 10 minutes to make sure that the engine runs at proper idle speed.
TSB Revision
FUEL SYSTEM - Service Adjustment Procedures
13-33
THROTTLE BODY (THROTrLE VALVE AREA) CLEANING M13FICS

(1) Start the engine, warm it up until engine coolant temperature rises to 80C (176F), and stop the engine. (2) Disconnect the air intake hose at the throttle body side. (3) Put a plug in the inlet of bypass passage in the throttle body. Caution Never allow cleaning agent to flow into the bypass passage. (4) Spray cleaning agent from the intake port of the throttle body to the valve and leave as it is for 5 minutes or so. (5) Start the engine and race it several times. Then, run it idle for approx. one minute. NOTE If the engine idle speed becomes unstable (and fails in the worst case) after plugging the bypass passage, run the engine with the throttle valve slightly opened. (6) If the deposit cannot be removed from the throttle valve, repeat steps (4) and (5). (7) Disconnect the plug from the inlet of the bypass passage. (8) Install the air intake hose. (9) Use a multi-use tester to erase the self-diagnosis code or disconnect the battery ground cable for more than IO seconds and then connect it again. (lO)Adjust the basic idle speed (speed adjusting screw). (Refer to P.13-31.)
ADJUSTMENT OF IDLE POSITION SWITCH AND M13FIFA THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR (TPS)
(1) Disconnect the throttle position sensor connector.
(2) Using jumper wires, connect an ohmmeter across terminal @ (idle position switch) and terminal @ (sensor ground) of the throttle position sensor.
7FUO629
TSB Revision
FUEL SYSTEM - Service Adjustment Procedures

(3) Insert a 0.65-mm-thick feeler gauge between the fixed SAS and throttle lever.
(4) Loosen the throttle position sensor mounting bolts and turn the TPS body fully counterclockwise. (5) In this condition, check that there is continuity across terminals @ and @.
(6) Slowly turn the throttle position sensor clockwise until you find a point at which there is no continuity across terminals @ and 0. Then, tighten the throttle position sensor mounting bolt securely. (7) Connect the throttle position sensor connector.
Terminal @ (sensor output)
zensor g&nd)
MB991348 1
(8) When using the multi-use tester, connect it to the diagnosis connector. (9) When not using the multi-use tester, proceed as follows: @ Disconnect the throttle position sensor connectors and connect the special tool, Test Harness Set, between the disconnected connectors. @ Connect a digital voltmeter between the throttle position sensor terminal @ (sensor output) and teminal @ (sensor ground). (lO)Turn the ignition switch ON (but do not start the engine). (IlKheck the throttle position sensor output voltage. When using the multi-use tester, select item No. 14 and read the throttle position sensor output voltage.
Standard value: 400 - 1,000 mV

(12)lf the voltage is out of specification, check the throttle position sensor and associated harnesses. (13)Remove the feeler gauge. (14)Turn the ignition switch OFF.
TSB Revision
FUEL SYSTEM - Service Adjustment Procedures ADJUSTMENT OF FIXED SAS
13-35
MlJFlDC
NOTE (1) The fixed SAS has been factory-adjusted. Never attempt to move it. (2) Should it be out of proper adjustment, adjust by following the procedure given below. (I) Sufficiently slacken the accelerator cable. (2) Loosen the lock nut on the fixed SAS. (3) Sufficiently loosen the fixed SAS by turning it counterclockwise to fully close the throttle valve. (4) Tighten the fixed SAS slowly to find a point at which it contacts the throttle lever (where the throttle valve starts opening). From that point, tighten the fixed SAS further 1 l/4 turns. (5) Holding the fixed SAS to prevent it from turning, tighten the lock nut securely. (6) Adjust the accelerator cable tension. (Refer to P.13-156.) (7) Adjust the basic idle speed. (Refer to P.13-31.) (8) Adjust the idle position switch and throttle position sensor (TPS). (Refer to P.13-33.)
1 TSB Revision
13-36
FUEL SYSTEM - 0n-vehicle Inspection of MPI Components
ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION OF MPI COMPONENTS

COMPONENTS LOCATION
EGR control solenoid valve temperature sensor <California> Engine control unit Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine warning light Fuel pressure control valve <Turbo> S B P v Self-diagnosis output terminal and self-diagnosis/ data transmission selector terminal TDC sensor and crank angle sensor Throttle position sensor (with built-in idle switch) Variable induction control servo (DC motor) (with built-in induction control valve position sensor) <Non Turbo> Vehicle speed sensor (reed switch) Waste gate solenoid valve <Turbo> R D C J
Ignition coil (power transistor) Ignition timing adjusting terminal NOTE The Name column is in alphabetical order.
M Q
F U
TSB Revision
FUEL SYSTEM d On-vehicle lnwection of MPI Components

(with built-in intake I air temperature sensor
13-37
wF~~::~:~~or anale sensor - A.
y\\ v 7Fbd942
\ Oxygen sensor,
ii
\\
7FU1004
Vehicle speed sensor (reed switch)
/ / \: /
TSB Revision
13-38
FUEL SYSTEM - Onaehicle Inspection of MPI Components
I/ariable induction control se :DC motor) (with built-in induction :ontrol valve position sensor)
7FUO8
Engine warning
1 Self-diagn,osls output terminal and self-dlagnosisi data 7 transmission selector terminal T3
h\s e >\\ 7FUO999

TSB Revision
Engiie control unit I
16FO292
FUEL SYSTEM * On-vehicle Inspection of MPI Components
13-39
/ Ylil
r--/
7FU1007
7FUlOlO
<California - N&Turbo, Turbo> i/
EGR control solenoid valve

A / / / 7FUlOll
TSB Revision
13-40
FUEL SYSTEM - On-vehicle Inspection of MPI Components COMPONENTS INSPECTION PROCEDURE

USING MULTI-USE TESTER
(1) Check by the service data and actuator test function. If any ij abnormality is found, check the body harness, components, etc. and repair as necessary. (2) After repair, check again with the multi-use tester to make sure that the input and output signals are now normal. (3) Erase the self-diagnosis trouble code in memory. (4) Disconnect the multi-use tester. (5) Start the engine and perform running test, etc. to make sure that the troubles have been corrected.
M13YBAC
TSB Revision
FUEL SYSTEM - On-vehicle Inspection of MPI Components POWER SUPPLY AND IGNITION SWITCH-IG
13-41
ml3Yuu
lcmition switch (IG) @ Harness side ccmnector Engine control unit
16FO29:
Q-i=++=
i A MPI control relay 62
Engine control unit Engine control unit connector
7FUO950
OPERATION
l l
While the ignition switch is on, battery power is supplied to the engine control unit, the injector, the air flow sensor, etc. When the ignition switch is turned on, the battery voltage is applied from the ignition switch to the engine control unit, which then turns ON the power transistor to energize the control relay coil. This turns ON the control relay switch and the power is supplied from the battery to the engine control unit through the control relay switch.
INSPECTION Using Multi-use Tester
Function
Item No.
16
Data display Engine control unit power voltage
Check condition Ignition switch: ON
I s
Standard value v
Data reading
TSB Revision
IS-42
FUEL SYSTEM - On-vehicle Inspection of MPI Components
HARNESS INSPECTION
Measure the ignition switch terminal input voltage. Engine control unit connector: l Disconnected l Ignition switch: ON Voltage (V)
01
sv
or
OlLO427
Repair the harness. (Ignition switch -@I
Measure the power supply voltage of the control relay. l Connector: Disconnected Voltage (V) sv Repair the harness. (Battery @IIN
ontrol relay connector: Discon-
Engine control unit harness side connector
Check for an open-circuit, or a shortcircuit to ground between the engine control unit and the control relay. Control relay connector: Disconl
l
Engine control unit connector: Disconnected
1 TSB Revision
13-43
CONTROL RELAY INSPECTION Caution When applying battery voltage directly, make sure that it is applied to correct terminal. Otherwise, the relay could be
OlLO521
damaged.
(1) Remove the control relay.
01 LO220
(2) Using jumper wires, connect terminal @ of control relay battery 0 terminal and terminal @ of control relay battery 0 terminal. (3) Connecting and disconnecting the jumper wire to battery terminal, measure the voltage across terminals @ and @ the control relay.
to to 0 of
(4) Using jumper wires, connect terminal @ of control relay to battery 0 terminal and terminal @ of control relay to battery 0 terminal. (5) Connecting and disconnecting the jumper wire to battery 0 terminal, check the continuity across terminals @ and @ of the control relay.
011022:
(6) Using jumper wires, connect terminal @ of control relay to battery 0 terminal and terminal @ of control relay to battery 0 terminal. (7) Connecting and disconnecting the jumper wire to battery 0 terminal, measure the voltage at terminal @ of the control relay.
(8) Replace the control relay if any defect is evident.
TSB Revision
13-44
FUEL SYSTEM - On-vehicle Inspection of MPI Components MlBYD~

Engine control unit
ENGINE CONTROL UNIT POWER GROUND
L-7-l
13 26
w Engine control d/ u n i i
16FO292
Y x
01A01@1
Engine control unit connector
7FUO653
OPERATION
Grounds the engine control unit
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS
If the ground wire of the engine control unit is not connected securely to ground, the unit will not operate correctly.
HARNESS INSPECTION
Check for continuity of the ground circuit. Engine control unit connector: l Disconnected
unit harness side connector
TSB Revision
FUEL SYSTEM - On-vehicle Inspection of MPI Components FUEL PUMP <Non Turbo>
13-45
M13YEAA2
LL--- /A& \// //@J

Fuel pump connector @ Equipment side connector
lqnition switch (IG,i
Equipment side connector @ Harness side connector
@ Harness side connector
7FUO952
7FUO653
OPERATION
l l
i L
Drives the fuel pump during cranking and engine operation. When the ignition switch is set to START, current flows from the ignition switch through the control relay coil to ground. This turns on the control relay switch and drive power is supplied from the battery through the control relay switch to the fuel pump. While the engine is running, the engine control unit keeps the power transistor on and energizes the control relay coil so that drive power is supplied to the fuel pump.
TSB Revision
13-46

Function Item No. Drive Fuel pump is driven to circulate fuel
l l
Check condition Engine cranking Forced drive of fuel pump Check is made for above two conditions
Check content Hold return hose with fingers to feel pulsation indicating fuel flow Listen to pump operating sound near fuel tank
Normal state Pulsation is felt
Actuator test 07
Operating sound is heard
HARNESS INSPECTION
Check the fuel pump. l Apply battery voltage to the checking terminal and operate the w-w
check terminal
Check for continuity of the ground circuit. l Fuel pump connector: Disconnected Repair the harness. @FJGround)
7FUO954
Check for continuity between the fuel pump and the checking terminal. l Fuel pump connector: Disconnected
4 cl
Repair the harness. @vJ-@g)
7FUO955
1 TSB Revision
FUEL SYSTEM - On-vehicle inspection of MPI Components
Measure th& power supply voltage of the control relay. l Connector: Disconnected l Ignition switch: START (when @@checked) l Ignition switch: ON (when @@ checked)
OK
6 cl
Repair the harness. (Ignition switch-[IGI - @El) (Ignition switch-[ST] t @El)
6 1
7
Q Harness side

7FUO475
Check for an open-circuit, or a shortcircuit to ground between the control relay and the engine control unit. l Control relay connector: Disconnected l Enaine control unit connector: Disconnected
Repair the harness. @El-lg
Check for continuity of the ground circuit. l Connector: Disconnected
Repair the harness.
-1
L%n~)
=7FUO476
Check for an open-circuit, or a shortcircuit to ground between the control relay and the fuel pump. l Control relay connector: Disconnected l Fuel pump connector: Disconnetted
(OK) + Ad
Repair the harness. @I@-@g)
9 Harness side connector

7FUO956 vision
13-48

CONTROL RELAY INSPECTION Refer to P.13-43.
FUEL PUMP <Turbo>
/I
,,
03FOOO
TSB Revision
13-49
Ignition switch [IG] Ignition switch [ST]
@ Equipment side connector
9 L Ll
Control reta)
@ Equipment side @I Harness side connector connector
;i.
Equipment side connector Resistor (for fuel pump)
r
M 2 7
Fuel pump
M-ii
I Enaine control unit A 8 A21 I &
Equipment side connector
-J
Y Fuel pump check terminal
7FUO959
7FUO653
id
TSB Revision
13-50
FUEL SYSTEM - 0 n-vehicle Inspection of MPI Components
OPERATION Control Relay Operation l Drives the fuel pump during cranking and engine operation. l When the ignition switch is set to START, current flows from the ignition switch through the control relay coil to ground. This turns on the control relay switch and drive power is supplied from the battery through the control relay switch to the fuel pump. l While the engine is running, the engine control unit keeps the power transistor on and energizes the control relay coil so that drive power is supplied to the fuel pump. Fuel Pump Relay No. 2 Operation l Change the fuel pump discharge in two stages by ON-OFF operation of the relay switch for fuel pump relay No. 2. l If the amount of inlet air is small (the engine load is low), the engine control unit turns on the power transistor to energize the coil of fuel pump relay No. 2, sending drive power to the fuel pump through the resistor. If the amount of inlet air is large (the engine load is high), the engine control unit turns off the power transistor to send drive power directly to the fuel pump without passing through the resistor. INSPECTION Using Multi-use Tester <Fuel Pump>
Function Actuator test Item No. 07 Operation Fuel pump is driven to circulate fuel
l l
Check condition Engine cranking Forced drive of fuel pump Check is made for above two conditions
Check item Hold return hose with fingers to feel pulsation indicating fuel flow Listen to pump operating sound near fuel tank
Normal condition Pulsation is felt
Operating sound is heard
<Fuel Pump Relay No. 2> / I

Function Actuator test 13
I
Operation Turn the fuel pump relay No. 2 from OFF to ON
Item No.
I
Check condition Ignition switch: ON Normal condition Operating sound is heard.
HARNESS INSPECTION
l
Apply battery voltage to the checking terminal and operate the
J------ 7FUO953
k
Check the ground circuit of the fuel pump. l Connector: Disconnected Repair the harness. @pJGround)
7FUO554 1 TSB Revision
@I Harness side connector L J

Check for continuity between the fuel pump and the checking terminal. l Connector: Disconnected -
13-51
I 14 Repair the harness. (@lig-@g)
@N+
@ Harness srde connector
7FUO95:
Harness side connector
Check for continuity between the checking terminal and the control relay (for fuel pump), and between the resistor (for fuel pump). 0 Control relay (for fuel pump) connector: Disconnected l Resistor (for fuel pump) connector: Disconnected l Fuel pump connector: Disconnected
OK 0
Repair the harness. (Cm- Da)

!~m-E@J) 8 8
7FUO960
Enaine control un? harness side connector
Check for an open-circuit, or a shortcircuitto ground, between the control relay (for fuel pump) and the engine control unit. 0 Control relay (for fuel pump) connector: Disconnected l Engine control unit connector: Disconnected
Repair the harness. (@J-m
Check for continuity between the control relay (for fuel pump) and the resistor (for fuel pump). 0 Control relay (for fuel pump) connectar: Disconnected l Resistor (for fuel pump) connector: Disconnected
Repair the harness. (@pJ-@iJ)
7FUO962
@I Harness side connector r
Measure the power supply voltage of the control relay. l Connector: Disconnected l Ignition switch: START (when checking @@I l Ignition switch: ON (when checking @@I Voltage (VI 8 or higher
1 7FUO47f I
TSB Revision
13-52
-i @ Harness side connector

Check for an open-circuit, or a shortcircuit to ground, between the control relay and the engine control unit. Control relay connector: Disconl nected Engine control unit connector: l Disconnected Engine control unit harness side connector
7FUO475
g / 8 Harness side connector /
zonnector
Check for continuity between the control relay and the control relay (for fuel pump). Control relay connector: Disconl nected l Control relay (for fuel pump) connector: Disconnected
7FUO96:
7FUO476
Repair the harness. @pJGround)
@I Harness sidt connector
Check for an open-circuit, or a shortcircuit to ground, between the control relay (for fuel pump) and the fuel pump. l Control relay (for fuel pump) connector: Disconnected l Fuel pump connector: Disconnected
Repair the harness. (@@-@lTJ)
7FUO964
CONTROL RELAY INSPECTION

Refer to P.13-43.
TSB Revision
FUEL SYSTEM - On-vehicle Inspection of MPI Components FUEL PUMP RELAY NO. 2
INSPECTION (1) Remove fuel pump relay No. 2.
13-53
M13RGAh
(2) Use a jumper wire to connect terminal @ of fuel pump relay No. 2 and the positive terminal of the battery and use another jumper wire to connect terminal @ and the negative terminal of the battery. (3) With the jumper wire connected to and disconnected from the negative terminal of the battery, check the continuity between terminals @ and @ of fuel pump relay No. 2 and between terminals @ and @ of fuel pump relay No. 2.
7FU104:
(4) Replace fuel pump relay No. 2 if it is faulty.
FUEL PUMP RESISTOR
MlBRHAA
INSPECTION (1) Disconnect the connectors for the fuel pump resistor.
Fuel pump / resistor
///I/
\\
7FU1041
(2) Measure the resistance between the terminals. Standard value: 0.6 - 0.9 LR (3) If the resistance deviates from the standard value, replace the fuel pump resistor.
7FU1043 I-
TSB I vision
FUEL SYSTEM - 0 n-vehicle Inspection of MPI Components AIR FLOW SENSOR

Air flow sensor J II
II
Control relay I
Air flow sensor
I\Y
7FUO941
ECU
Engine control unit connector Air flow rate (liters/second)
7FUO654
7FUO653
OPERATION
l
The air flow sensor located in the air cleaner converts the engine intake air volume into a pulse signal of frequency proportional to the air volume and inputs it to the engine control unit, which then computes the fuel injection rate, etc. based on the input signal. The air flow sensor power is supplied from the control relay to the air flow sensor and is grounded in the engine control unit. The air flow sensor generates a pulse signal as it repeatedly opens and closes between the 5 V voltage supplied from the engine control unit and ground.
Hint 1 : If the engine stalls occasionally, crank the engine and shake the air flow sensor harness. If the engine stalls, poor contact of the air flow sensor connector is suspected. Hint 2: If the air flow sensor output frequency is other than 0 when the ignition switch is turned on (but not starting the engine), faulty air flow sensor or engine control unit is suspected. Hint 3: If the engine can be run idle even though the air flow sensor output frequency is out of specification, troubles are often found in other than the air flow sensor itself. [Examples] (1) Disturbed air flow in the air flow sensor (Disconnected air duct, clogged air cleaner element) (2) Poor combustion in the cylinder (Faulty ignition plug, ignition coil, injector, incorrect compression pressure, etc.) (3) Air leaking into the intake manifold through gap of gasket, etc.
(4)
Loose EGR valve seat
TSB Revision

INSPECTION
Using Multi-use Tester <Air Flow Sensor>
Function Data reading tern No. Data display 12 Sensor air volume (frequency)
l
13-55
Check condition
Engine state
Standard value 25-50 Hz 70-IOOHz Frequency increases with racing
l l
Engine coolant tem700 rpm (Idle) perature: 80 to 95C (176 to 205F) 2,000 rpm Lights and accessories: OFF Racing Transaxle: Neutral (P range for vehicle with AIT) Steering wheel: Neutral
NOTE When the vehicle is new [within initial operation of about 500 km (300 miles)], the air flow sensor output frequency may be about 10% higher.
<Air Flow Sensor Reset Signal>

Function Data list Item No. Data display 34 Reset signal condition
l
Check conditions Engine warm up
Engine conditions 700 rpm (Idle) 2,000 rpm
Standard value ON OFF
<Volumetric Efficiency>
L;
Function Data list
Item No. Data display 37 Volumetric efficiency

l
Check condition
Engine state
Standard value 20-35% 15-30% Frequency increases with racing
700 rpm (Idle) Engine coolant temperature: 80 to 95C (176 to 205F) Lights, electric cooling 2,000 rpm fan and accessory operation: OFF Transaxle: Neutral Racing (P range for vehicle with &T) Steering wheel: Neutral
Using Oscilloscope (1) Run the engine at idle speed.

(2) Connect the probe to the oscilloscope pick-up point as shown in the circuit diagram, and check the waveform.
Regular waveform
03A0203
TSB Revision
13-56
HARNESS INSPECTION
--b
arness side connector
Measure the power supply voltage. l Connector: Disconnected l Ignition switch: ON Voltage (V) eoair the
check the control relay. Measure the terminal voltage. l Connector: Disconnected l Ignition switch: ON
*
7FUO656
connector
Repair the harness. @El - I@)

7FUO657
4 @ Harness side ? connector Engine c&l unit harness side connector
!u
h
m
1
Check for continuity between the air flow sensor and the engine control unit. l Air flow sensor connector: Disconnected l Engine control unit connector: Disconnected
f 10 L-/ . .
Rr.annir I yu
th(3
harness. @@J--I
t
4.7Fuo745
TSB Revision
FUEL SYSTEM - On-vehicle Inspection of MPI Components INTAKE ACR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Air flow sensor (with built-in intake arr -temperature sensor and barometric pressure sensor)
13-57
MXWGAAZ 1
Temperature
162458
Temperature
16ZlOOt
@ Equipment side connector 1 Air flow sensor connector @ Harness side connector r Intake air temperature sensor /
\/
5 6
temperature sensor
7FUO658
w
t
~7X6x5x4~3x2~1j
L 5ELl803
~y72
~ :
[<econ[u
7FU065b
5v
OPERATION l The intake air temperature sensor converts the engine intake air temperature into a voltage and inputs it to the engine control unit, which then corrects the fuel injection rate, etc. based on the input signal. l The 5 V power in the engine control unit is supplied via a resistor in the unit to the intake air temperature sensor. Via the sensor which is a kind of resistor, it is grounded in the engine control unit. The intake air temperature sensor resistor has such characteristic that its resistance decreases as the intake air temperature rises. l The intake air temperature sensor terminal voltage increases or decreases as the sensor resistance increases or decreases. Therefore, the intake air temperature sensor terminal voltage ch.anges with the intake air temperature, decreasing as the temperature rises. TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS The intake air temperature sensor senses the intake air temperature in the air cleaner so that it may indicate a temperature different from outside temperature depending on engine operating state.
TSB Revision
13-58
INSPECTION
Using Multi-use Tester

Function Data reading Item No. Data display 13 Sensor temperature Check condition ignition switch: ON or engine running Intake air temperature At -20C (-4F) At 0C (32F) At 20C (68F) At 40C (104F) At 80C (176F) Standard value -20C 0C 20C 40C 80C d
HARNESS INSPECTION
Repair the harness.,
(@I3 - q ,
7FUO657
connector
Measure the power supply voltage. l Connector: Disconnected l Ignition switch: ON Voltage (V) 4.5 - 4.9 Repair the harness. @@J-@)
7FUO660
SENSOR INSPECTION
(1) Disconnect the air flow sensor connectors. (2) Measure resistance between terminals @ and @.
I
I
TSB I I
7FUO661
Temperature [C (F)]
0 (32) 20 (681
I
I I
Resistance (kfl)
6.0 2.7
wision

Intake air
13-59
(3) Measure resistance while heating the sensor using a hair drier. ? Resistance (kR) Temperature 1C (F)] Higher Smaller
(4) If the value deviates from the standard value or the resistance remains unchanged, replace the air flow sensor assembly.
1 TSB Revision
13-60

M13YHAA2
BAROMETRIC PRESSURE SENSOR
@ Equipment side connecror
Air flow sensor connector @ Harness side

connector
Engine control unit A6 I
A65
A\72
7FUO66
7 Output voltage (VI 7F U0664 Engine control unit connector
7FUO653 Barometric pressure
a---l- 760
[mmHg (in.Hg)]
(30) EC1551
OPERATION
l l l
The barometric pressure sensor converts the barometric pressure into a voltage and inputs it to the engine control unit, which then corrects the fuel injection rate, etc. based on the input signal. The 5 V power in the engine control unit is supplied to the barometric pressure sensor. Through the circuit in the sensor, it is grounded in the engine control unit. The barometric pressure sensor output voltage which is proportional to the barometric pressure (absolute pressure) is supplied to the engine control unit. d
TSB Revision
13-61
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS Hint 1 : If the barometric pressure sensor is faulty, poor driveability is caused at high altitude, in particular. Hint 2: If the pressure indication of the barometric pressure sensor drops significantly during high speed driving, check the air cleaner for clogging. INSPECTION Using Multi-use Tester
Function Data reading Item No. Data display 25 Sensor pressure Check condition Ignition switch: ON Altitude At 0 m (0 ft.) At 600 m (1,969 ft.) Standard value 760 mmHg 710 mmHg 1660 mmHg 610 mmHg I
I
HARNESS INSPECTION I I
/At 1,200 m (3,937 ft.) At 1,800 m (5.906 ft.)
Repair the harness.
&@I - q ,
7FUO657
Measure the power supply voltage of the barometric pressure sensor. l Connector: Disconnected l Ignition switch: ON Voltaqe (V) 4.8 - 5.2 Repair the
harness. KgpJ-pJ,
7FUO66:
Engine contra unit harness side connects
Check for an open-circuit, or a shortcircuit to ground between the engine control unit and the barometric pressure sensor. Air flow sensor connector: Disl connected Engine control unit connector: l Disconnected
(OK) -+ kTOA
Repair the harness. --I @ig-g)
,Y---,
Jg
7FUO666
1 TSB Revision
13-62

M13Ybu2
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
il\__
Coolant temperature 162458 @ Equipment side connector 2
;I\*
Coolant temperature
i67im-m
Coolant temperature sensor
I fi Engine control unit ), 72 A63
ff3 5V
7FUO667
OPERATION The engine coolant temperature sensor converts the engine coolant temperature into a voltage and inputs l it to the engine control unit, which then controls the fuel injection rate and fast idle speed when the engine is cold based on the input signal. l The 5 V power in the engine control unit is supplied via a resistor in the unit to the engine coolant temperature sensor. Through the sensor which is a kind of resistor, it is grounded in the engine control unit. The engine coolant temperature sensor resistor has such characteristic that its resistance decreases as the coolant temperature rises. The engine coolant temperature sensor terminal voltage increases or decreases as the sensor resistance l increases or decreases. Therefore, the engine coolant temperature sensor terminal voltage changes with the coolant temperature, decreasing as the temperature rises. TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS If the fast idle speed is inadequate or the engine emits dark smoke during engine warm up operation, the engine coolant temperature sensor is often faulty.
TSB Revision

INSPECTION Using Multi-use Tester L
Function Data reading Item No. Data display 21 Sensor temperature Check condition Ignition switch: ON or engine operating Coolant temperature At -20C (-4F) At 0C (32F)
13-63
Standard value -20C 0C
L
HARNESS INSPECTION
Check for continuity of the ground circuit. l Connector: Disconnected Repair the ---+ harness. (@pj-I
7FUO668
id
@ Harness side
Measure the power supply voltage. l Connector: Disconnected l Ignition switch: ON
7FUO669
TSB Revision
13-64

SENSOR INSPECTION
(1) Remove engine coolant temperature sensor from the intake manifold. (2) With temperature sensing portion of engine coolant temperature sensor immersed in hot water, check resistance. Temperature C (F)
0 (32)
7FUO670
Resistance (kCI)
5.8 2.4 1.1 0.3
20 (68) 40 (104) 80 (176)
Apply sealant
7FUO67
(3) If the resistance deviates from the standard value greatly, replace the sensor. INSTALLATION (1) Apply sealant to threaded portion. Specified sealant: 3M NUT locking Part No. 4171 or equivalent (2) Install engine coolant temperature sensor and tighten it to specified torque.. Sensor tightening torque: 30 Nm (22 ft.lbs.) (3) Fasten harness connectors securely.
TSB Revision
FUEL SYSTEM - On-vehicle Inspection of MPI Components THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

i
@ Unleaded Equipment side connector
13-65
M13YJAC
Throttle positron sensor
I
SEL14001
Ii Engine control unit , I
7FUO672
1
Minlmum Maximum Throttle shaft turning angle
162481
7FUO653
OPERATION
l l l
The throttle position sensor converts the throttle position opening into a voltage and inputs it to the engine control unit, which then controls the fuel injection based on the input signal. The 5 V power in the engine control unit is supplied to the throttle position sensor. Through the resistor in the sensor, it is grounded in the engine control unit. As the throttle valve shaft rotates from the idle position to Wide open position, the resistance between the variable resistor terminal of the throttle position sensor and the ground terminal increases. As a result, the voltage at the throttle position sensor variable resistance terminal also increases.
Hint 1: The throttle position sensor signal is more important in the control of automatic transaxle than in the engine control. Shifting shock and other troubles will be caused if this sensor is faulty. Hint 2: If the output voltage of the throttle position sensor is out of specification, adjust the sensor and check the voltage again. If there is an evidence of disturbed idle position switch (fixed SAS) setting, adjust the idle position switch (fixed SAS).
1 TSB Revision
13-66

Function Data reading Item No. Data display
14
Check condition Ignition switch: left ON for 15 seconds or more
Throttle valve At idle position Open slowly Open widely
Standard value
300-1.000 mV
Sensor voltage
Increases with valve opening

4.500-5.500 mV
HARNESS INSPECTION
l l
Connector: Disconnected lgnrtion switch: ON
Connector: Disconnected
I Engine control unit harness side connector connector
Check for an open-circuit, or a shortcircuit to ground between the engine control unit and the throttle position sensor. Throttle position sensor connector: Disconnected Engine control unit connector: Disconnected
Repair the B-3 h a r n e s s . km-8)
-z
6FU1243
[ TSB Revision
13-67
SENSOR INSPECTION (1) Disconnect the throttle position sensor connector

(sensor side, front view
(2) Measure resistance between terminal @ (sensor ground) and terminal @ (sensor power). Standard value: 3.5 - 6.5 kR
7FU048t
7FUO67:
(3) Connect a pointer type ohmmeter between terminal @ (sensor ground) and terminal @ (sensor output). (4) Operate the throttle valve slowly from the idle position to the full open position and check that the resistance changes smoothly in proportion with the throttle valve opening angle. (5) If the resistance is out of specification, or fails to change smoothly, replace the throttle position sensor. Throttle position sensor installation torque: 2.0 Nm (1.5 ft.lbs.) For the idle position switch and throttle position sensor adjusting procedure, refer to P. 13-33.
TSB Revision
13-68

MlBYKAD
IDLE POSITION SWITCH

Throttle position se (Idle position switch Engine control unit I
@ Harness side connector ,
Idle position @ Equipment side switch connector
Throttle position sensor connector
2 / bz ----;-p
5EL1400
7FUO674
b +
i
Throttle shaft turning angle D20g2
OPERATION
l
The idle position switch senses whether the accelerator pedal is depressed or not, converts it into high/low voltage and inputs the voltage to the engine control unit, which then controls the idle speed control servo based on the input signal. The voltage in the engine control unit is applied to the idle position switch through a resistor. When the accelerator pedal is released, the idle position switch is turned on to conduct the voltage to ground. This causes the idle position switch terminal voltage to go low from high.
If the idle position switch harness and individual part check results are normal but the idle position switch output is abnormal, the following troubles are suspected. (1) Poorly adjusted accelerator cable or auto-cruise control cable (2) Poorly adjusted idle position switch (fixed SAS)
INSPECTION Using Multi-use

Function
Data
Tester
Item No. Data display 26
Check condition
Throttle valve
Normal indication
ON
reading
Switch state
Ignition switch: ON (check by operating

accelerator pedal
At idle position Open a little
repeatedly)
TSB Revision
OFF
-J
FUEL SYSTEM - On-vehicle InsDection of MPI ComDonents

HARNESS INSPECTION
arness side connector Measure the power supply voltage of the idle position switch. l Connector: Disconnected l Ignition switch: ON
13-69
7FUO675
Repair the harness. @w--~)
A
S TOP
SENSOR INSPECTION
(1) With the accelerator pedal released, check to be sure that the throttle valve lever or the fixed SAS is pushed. NOTE If it is not pushed, adjust the fixed SAS (Refer to P.13-35.) (2) Disconnect the throttle position sensor connector. (3) Check the continuity across the throttle position sensor connector terminal @ (Sensor ground) and @ (Idle position switch). Accelerator pedal Depressed Released Continuity Non-conductive (a~ KU Conductive (0 fi)
sensor tonne
7FUO676
NOTE If there is no continuity when the accelerator pedal is returned, loosen the throttle-position sensor installation screw; then, after turning all the way in the counterclockwise direction, check again. (4) Replace the throttle-position sensor (idling-position switch incorporated) if there is a malfunction. NOTE For the idle position switch and throttle position sensor adjusting procedure, refer to P.13-33.
TSB Revision
FUEL SYSTEM - 0 n-vehicle Inspection of MPI Components TOP DEAD CENTER SENSOR
Control relay 1 d
Crank angle sensor Top dead center sensor
/\3 /\
.+$ t5V z Output characteristic 2
r~,
Engtne control unit Normal waveform

6 it 0
Time 7FUO677
d
7FUO493 I
OPERATION
l
The top dead center sensor senses the top dead center on compression stroke of the No. 1, No. 3 and No. 5 cylinders, converts it into a pulse signal and inputs it to the engine control unit, which then computes the fuel injection sequence, etc. based on the input signal. Power to the top dead center sensor is supplied from the control relay and is grounded to the body. The top dead center sensor generates a pulse signal as it repeatedly connects and disconnects between 5 V voltage supplied from the engine control unit and ground.
Hint 1: If the top dead center sensor does not function correctly, correct sequential injection is not made so that the engine may stall, run irregularly at idle or fail to accelerate normally. Hint 2: If the sensor outputs a pulse signal when the ignition switch is turned ON (with the engine not running), a faulty top dead center sensor or engine control unit is suspected.
[TSB Revision

INSPECTION Using Oscilloscope
13-71
(1) Run the engine at an idle speed. (2) Connect the probe to the oscilloscope pick-up point as shown in the circuit diagram, and check the waveform. :: Normal waveform
7Fuo495 HARNESS INSPECTION
J
Measure the power supply voltage l Connector: Disconnected l Ignition switch: ON Voltage (VI
, (OK I :
ib
2 0
Repair the harness. (@m - Control relay)
sv
= 7FUO496
r
2 i @ Harness side connector
F
7FUO497
Check the voltage of the output errcuit. l Connector: Disconnected l Ignition switch: ON Voltaae (V)
4.8 - 5.2
Repair the harness. (@El-ED
~,
7FUO498
id li
TSB Revision
13-72

MllYiAC
CRANK ANGLE SENSOR

Control relay
Crank angle sensor side co.ntiector Crank angle sensor
I A3 /\
Output characteristic
=
Time
Engine control unft I
69
7FUO682
1
OPERATION
l
5v
7FUO499
The crank angle sensor senses the crank angle (piston position) of each cylinder, converts it into a pulse signal and inputs it to the engine control unit, which then computes the engine speed and controls the fuel injection timing and ignition timing based on the input signal. Power to the crank angle sensor is supplied from the control relay and is grounded to the body. The crank angle sensor generates a pulse signal as it repeatedly connects and disconnects between 5 V voltage supplied from the engine control unit and ground.
Hint 1: If unexpected shocks are felt during driving or the engine stalls suddenly during idling, shake the crank angle sensor harness. If this causes the engine to stall, poor contact of the sensor connector is suspected. Hint 2: If the crank angle sensor outputs a pulse signal when the ignition switch is turned ON (with the engine not running), a faulty crank angle sensor or engine control unit is suspected. Hint 3: If the tachometer reads 0 rpm when the engine that has failed to start is cranked, faulty crank angle sensor or broken timing belt is suspected. Hint 4: If the tachometer reads 0 rpm when the engine that has failed to start is cranked, the primary current of the ignition coil is not turned on and off. Therefore, troubles in the ignition circuit and ignition coil or faulty power transistor is suspected. Hint 5: If the engine can be run at idle even though the crank angle sensor reading is out of specification, troubles are often in other than the crank angle sensor. [Examples] (1) Faulty engine coolant temperature sensor (2) Faulty idle speed control servo (3) Poorly adjusted reference idle speed
TSB Revision

Function Data reading
Tester
13-73
Item No. Data display 22 Cranking speed

l l
Check condition
Check content
Normal state Indicated speed to agree
Engine cranking Compare cranking speed Tachometer connected and multi-use tester (check on and off of reading primary current of ignition coil by tachometer)
NOTE (1) The tachometer indicates a third of the actual engine speed. Therefore, 3 times the tachometer indication is the actual engine speed. (2) When the tachometer is set to the 2-cylinder range, it indicates actual engine speed. Function Data reading Item No. Data display
22
Check condition
l l
Coolant temperature At -20C (-4F) At 0C (32F) At 20C (68F) At 40C (104F) At 80C (176F)
Standard value 1,300 - 1,500 rpm 1,250 - 1,450 rpm 1 ,I 00 - 1,300 rpm 950-1,150rpm 600 - 800 rpm
Idle speed
Engine: Running at idle Idle position switch: ON
Using Oscilloscope
5v
-m-2,-
(1) Run the engine at idle speed. (2) Connect the probe to the oscilloscope pick-up point as shown in the circuit diagram, and check the waveform.
- l ov f -
--
Normal waveform
1 TSB Revision
13-74
HARNESS INSPECTION
J
1
Measure the power supply voltage.
sv
Repair the harness. (@I@ - Control relay)
7FUO496
2
t-
Check for continuity of the ground cbrcux. l Connector: Disconnected
3 El
Repair the harness.
1
3
!?.!!ni )
7FUO497
Check the voltage of the output circuit. l Connector: Disconnected l lgnrtion switch: ON Voltage (VI
4.8 - 5.2
L
7FUO498
TSB Revision

lgnitlon switch (ST)
IGNITION SWITCH-ST <M/T>
Enaine control unit connector Engine control unit
7FUO653
FU0638
OPERATION
l l
The ignition switch-ST inputs a high signal to the engine control unit while the engine is cranking. The engine control unit provides fuel injection control, etc., at engine startup based on this signal. When the ignition switch is set to START, the battery voltage at cranking is applied through the ignition switch to the engine control unit, which detects that the engine is cranking.
Tester

Item No. Data display
Check condition Ignition switch: ON stop Cranking
Engine
Normal indication OFF ON
18
Switch state
HARNESS INSPECTION
Measure the input voltage to the engine control unit. l Engine control unit connector: Disconnected l Ignition switch: START
L 6FU1258
1
2
Engine control side connector
Check for continuity of the ground circuit. l Engine control unit connector: Disconnected
Repair the harness. (m - Ground)
Y-
6FU1259
TSB Revision
13-76
IGNITION SWITCH-ST AND INHIBITOR SWITCH <A/T>
lqnition switch (ST) @ Harness side connector @ Equipment side connector
Starter S Control terminal relay Engine control unit

L
f, B 7FUO625
7FUO653
OPERATION
l l
The ignition switch-ST inputs a high signal to the engine control unit while the engine is cranking. The engine control unit provides fuel injection control, etc., at engine startup based on this signal. When the ignition switch is set to START, the battery voltage at cranking is applied through the ignition switch and inhibitor switch to the engine control unit, which detects that the engine is cranking. In case the selector lever is in a position other than the P/N range, the battery voltage is not applied to the engine control unit. The inhibitor switch converts the selector lever position (whether it is at the P/N range or at others) into high/low voltage and inputs it to the engine control unit, which then controls the idle speed control servo based on this signal. The battery voltage in the engine control unit is applied through a resistor to the inhibitor switch. When the selector lever is set to the P/N range, continuity is produced between the inhibitor switch terminal of the engine control unit and ground through the starter motor, thereby making the terminal voltage go low.
If the inhibitor switch harness and individual part check have resulted normal but the inhibitor switch output is abnormal, poorly adjusted control cable is suspected.
TSB Revision

INSPECTION
13-77
Using
L
Multi-use Tester
IGNITION SWITCH-ST Function Data reading Item No. Data display 18 Switch state Check condition
Ignition switch: ON stop
Engine
Normal rndrcation OFF ON
Cranking INHIBITOR SWITCH Function Data reading Item No. Data display 29 Shift position Check condition Ignition switch: ON Select lever position P or N D.2,L or R
HARNESS INSPECTION
Normal indication P or N D.2.L or R
Measure the power supply voltage of the inhibitor switch. Engine control unit connector: l Disconnected lnhibrtor switch connector: Disl connected l Ignition switch: START Voltage (V)
OlA0206
LlltXK IlIt:
power supply
circuit.
2 @ Harness srde connector
Measure the inhibitor switch terminal input voltage. Engine control unit connector: l Connected InhibItor switch connector: Disl connected l Ignition switch: ON Voltage (VI
OlA0206 L I
6a L-J
cl Repair the harness. @El - El)

I
Measure the input voltage of engine control unit. Engine control unrt connector: l Disconnected Fer;it;r switch connector: Conl
1 TSB Revision
13-78

MIBYPM
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR

Vehrcle speed sensor (reed switch\) Speedometer Engine control unit
@ Equipment side
Terminal voltage (V)
7FUO925
Vehicle speed [km/h (mph)]

162461 7FUO653
OPERATION
l
The vehicle speed sensor which is located in the speedometer converts the vehicle speed into a pulse signal and inputs it to the engine control unit, which then provides the idle speed control, etc. based on this signal. The vehicle speed sensor generates the vehicle speed signal by repeatedly opening and closing between the voltage of about 5 V applied from the engine control unit and ground using a reed switch.
If there is an open or short circuit in the vehicle speed sensor signal circuit, the engine may stall when the vehicle is decelerated to stop.
HARNESS INSPECTION
Check the vehicle speed sensor output circuit for continuity.
l l
Engine control unit connector: Disconnected Move the vehicle.
unit harness side connector
TSB Revision
FUEL SYSTEM - On-vehicle lnwection of MPI ComDonents

2 @ Harness side Measure the power supply voltage of the vehicle speed sensor. l Connector: Dlsconnected l Ignition switch: ON
8)
6FU1265
SENSOR INSPECTION Refer to GROUP 54 - Meters and Gauges.
TSB Revision
13-80

MlOYQAA
POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
B Engine control unit $ '107
Power steering oil Pressure switch
@ Harness side connector ml -
700-2.000 1.500-2.000 (100-284) (213-284)
Pressure [kPa (psi)]

0, l.oIu
7FUO536
OPERATION
l
The power steering oil pressure switch converts presence/absence of power steering load into low/high voltage and inputs it to the engine control unit, which then controls the idle speed control servo based on this signal. The battery voltage in the engine control unit is applied through a resistor to the power steering oil pressure switch. Steering operation causes the power steering oil pressure to increase, turning the switch on. As a result, continuity is produced between the battery voltage applied and ground. This causes the power steering oil pressure terminal voltage to go from high to low.
TSB Revision

Function Data reading Item No. Data display 27 Switch state Check condition Engine: Idling Steering wheel Steering wheel neutral position (wheels straight-ahead direction) Steering wheel half turn
13-81
Normal indication OFF
ON
Checking Oil Pressure

Steering wheel Straight forward Turned Oil pump delivery pressure (ref. value) 700 - 1,200 kPa (100 - 171 psi) 1,500 - 2,000 kPa (213 - 284 psi)
HARNESS INSPECTION 1 i
@ Harness side connector Measure the power supply voltage.
SENSOR INSPECTION Refer to GROUP 37 - Service Adjustment Procedures.
TSB Revision
13-82

M13YRAA2
AIR CONDITIONER SWITCH AND POWER RELAY
Air conditioner control unit
Air conditioner compressor lock controller
*I \\--
Air conditroner
Dual pressure switch
b 1
IFF
\
Engine control unit
Air conditioner compressor
7FUO966 7FUO653
OPERATION
l l
The air conditioner switch applies the battery voltage to the engine control unit when the air conditioner is turned on. When the air conditioner ON signal is input, the engine control unit drives the idle speed control servo and turns ON the power transistor. As a result, the air conditioner power relay coil is energized to turn on the relay switch, which activates the air compressor magnetic clutch.
If the air compressor magnet clutch is not activated when the air conditioner switch is turned on during idling, faulty air conditioner control system is suspected.

AIR CONDITIONER SWITCH Function 1 Item No. 1 Data display 1 Switch state Check condition ) Air conditioner switch 1 Normal indication I OFF ON \kJ
Data reading 28
Engine: Idling (air OFF compressor to be running when air conditioner ON switch is ON)
TSB Revision

AIR CONDITIONER POWER RELAY Function Data reading Item No. Data display 49 Air conditioner relay state Check condition Engine: Idling after warm-up Air conditioner switch OFF Normal indication OFF (compressor clutch non-activation) ON (compressor clutch activation)
ON
L
HARNESS INSPECTION
Measure the power supply voltage of the air conditioner circuit. l Air conditioner switch: ON l Engine control unit connector: Disconnected l Ignition switch: ON l Dual air conditioner switch: ON
Voltage (V) unit harness side connector 7FUO695 IM
Check the air conditioner circuit.
A
S TOP
AIR CONDITIONER INSPECTION

Refer to GROUP 55 - Service Adjustment Procedures.
TSB Revision
13-84
DETONATION SENSOR
Engine control unit N
/J-l
: : I I I I tL .J 531 :: 58 = 5:2 7FU1075
SEL1208j
7FUO653
OPERATION
The detonation sensor generates a voltage proportional to the magnitude of cylinder block vibration due to knocking and inputs it to the engine control unit. Based on this signal, the engine control unit provides retard control of the ignition timing.
When knocking occurs while driving under high-load conditions, the following problems are suspected in addition to the detonation sensor itself. (1) Inappropriate ignition plug heat range (2) Inappropriate gasoline (3) Incorrectly adjusted reference ignition timing
TSB Revision

HARNESS INSPECTION
13-85
Repair the harness. 7

6FU1302
id
1 TSB Revision I
13-86
ELECTRICAL LOAD SWITCH
Taillight relay
Defog. w relay
16FO29;
Engine control unit connector Engine control unit

7FUO653
tti ;* 1.
stop
light switch
7FUO688
OPERATION
l
The electrical load switch inputs ON/OFF state of the switch of equipment that consumes much power during idling, namely, equipment with a large electrical load, to the engine control unit. Based on this signal, the engine control unit controls the idle-speed control servo. When the switch of equipment with a large electrical load is turned ON, the battery voltage is applied to the engine control unit to indicate that the equipment switch is turned ON.
, LJ
-Item No. Data display

33 Switch
Check condition $;ration of equipment:
Equipment state L$ing;Atch only: -3
Normal display OFF + ON
state
1 TSB Revision

HARNESS INSPECTION
Measure the input voltage of engine control unit. l Engine control unit connector: Disconnected l Lighting switch: ON (Tail light relay ON)
7FUO689
Measure the input voltage of engine control unit. l Engine control unit connector: Disconnected l Defogger switch: ON (Defogger relay ON) Voltage (V)
side connector
7FuO689
3 cl
Check circuit related to defogger relay
sv
/ id
Measure the input voltage of engine control unit. l Engine control unit connector: Disconnected l Brake pedal: Depressed (Stop light switch ON)
P
T
Check circuit
7FUO689
TSB Revision
13-88

Engine control unit r
MUFFLER MODE CHANGEOVER SWITCH <Turbo>
3 Muffler mode OFF changeover switch 2 r

7FU1053
ON
OPERATION
l
If the operator turns the muffler mode changeover switch to ON or OFF position, this is converted to high/low voltage to be sent to the engine control unit. Receiving this signal, the engine control unit performs the dual mode (TOUR/SPORT mode) muffler control. The output terminal of the muffler mode changeover switch has battery voltage applied to it from the engine control unit through the resistor inside the unit. Place the muffler-mode changeover switch to the LJj ON posrtton, and the muffler mode changeover switch circuit will be closed to short the voltage applied output terminal to the ground.. Accordingly, the output voltage of the muffler mode changeover switch changes from high to low.

Function Data list Item No. Data display 35 Switch condition Check condition Ignition switch: ON Muffler mode changeover Normal display switch condition Turn to TOUR mode Turn to SPORT mode ON OFF
TSB Revision

HARNESS INSPECTION
Measure the power supply voltage. l Connector: Disconnected l Ignition switch: ON Voltage (V)
connector
13-89
sv i+
*
7FU1054
Repair the harness. @pJ- Ilosi)
7FU105: i
1 TSB Revision
13-90
INDUCTION CONTROL VALVE POSITION SENSOR <Non Turbo>

Vakiable induction control servo (DC motor) [Induction control valve 1
@ Equipment side connector Variable induction control se (DC motor)(with built-In induction control valve position sensor)
Variable inductlon control servo connector
7FUO968
OPERATION l The induction control valve position sensor detects the induction control valve opening degree and converts it into a pulse signal to be input into the engine control unit, which provides valve opening and closing control based on this signal. l The induction control valve position sensor is supplied with 5 V power from the engine control unit and is grounded to the engine control unit. A voltage of 5 V from the engine control unit is impressed to the two output terminals of the induction control valve position sensor. By opening and closing the circuit between the output terminal and ground, the induction control valve position sensor generates the pulse signal.
TSB Revision

HARNESS INSPECTION
Measure the power supply voltage of the air intake control valve position sensor. l Connector: Disconnected l Ignition switch: ON
13-91
@ Harness side
6FU1241
@ Ha
nnector
f---Y
7FUO824
Measure the terminal voltage. l Connector: Disconnected l Ignition switch: ON
7FUO825
Repair the harness.
TSB Revision
FUEL SYSTEM - On-vehicle Inspection of MPI Components EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR <California>
M13YZh82
@ EGR tem0erature senso

7FUlOlO
Equipment
connector
s,de EGR temperature sensor I I
Engine control unit
7FU1013
Temperature
1621008
OPERATION
l
The EGR temperature sensor converts the temperature of EGR gas downstream from the EGR valve to voltage and inputs it to the engine control unit. The engine control unit judges the condition of the EGR by this signal. If there is abnormal condition, the engine warning light is turned on to notify the driver. Five volt power supply in the engine control unit is applied to the EGR temperature sensor through the resistance in the unit. This power supply further passes through the EGR temperature sensor, which is a kind of a resistor, and is grounded at the engine control unit. The resistance of the EGR temperature sensor is characterized by a decrease in resistance with an increase of EGR temperature due to increase in quantity of EGR. EGR temperature sensor terminal voltage increases or decreases with EGR temperature sensor resistance. Therefore, EGR temperature sensor terminal voltage changes with EGR gas temperature. The higher the EGR gas temperature, the lower the EGR temperature sensor terminal voltage.
TSB Revision

INSPECTION Using Multi-Use Tester
13-93
Item No. Data display 43 Sensor temperature
Check condition Engine: Warmed up Engine is maintained in a constant state for 2 minutes or more -
Engine state 700 rpm (Idle) 3,500 rpm
Standard value 100C (212F) or less

120C (248F) or more
HARNESS INSPECTION

connector
Voltage (V)
4.3 - 4.7
(@I@ - q I
Repair the harness.
2
-..-I
Check for continuity of the ground

circuit.
l

2 1 m
Repair the harness. @@J-m,
1
SENSOR INSPECTION
Refer to GROUP 17 - Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System.
TSB Revision
FUEL SYSTEM - On-vehicle Inspection of MPI Components OXYGEN SENSOR <Non Turbo>
7FUO786
C o n t r o l r e l a y 2 dI 1:
Theoretical A/F Engine control unit
14
A/F
15
16
EClOOi
7FUO969 Engine control unit connector
7FUO653
OPERATION
l l l l
The oxygen sensor senses the oxygen concentration in exhaustgas, converts it into a voltage and inputs it to the engine control unit. The oxygen sensor outputs about 1 V when the air fuel ratio is richer than the theoretical ratio and outputs about 0 V when the ratio is leaner (higher oxygen concentration in exhaust gas). The engine control unit controls the fuel injection ratio based on this signal so that the air fuel ratio may be kept at the theoretical ratio. The battery voltage is supplied to the oxygen sensor through the control relay. Therefore, the sensor element is heated by the heater so that the oxygen sensor remains responsive even when the exhaust temperature is low.
TSB Rtkision

13-95
Hint 1: Poor cleaning of exhaust gas will result if the oxygen sensor fails. Hint 2: If the oxygen sensor check has resulted normal but the sensor output voltage is out of specification, troubles of parts related to air fuel ratio control system are suspected. [Examples] (1) Faulty injector (2) Air leaking into the intake manifold through gasket gap, etc. (3) Faulty air flow sensor, intake air temperature sensor, barometric pressure sensor, engine coolant temperature sensor

Function Data reading Item No. Data display
11
Check condition Engine: Warm-up (make the mixture lean by engine speed reduction, and rich by racing)
Engine state When sudden deceleration from 4,000 rpm When engine is suddenly raced
Standard value 200 mV or lower
Sensor voltace
600-1,000 mV 400 mV or lower ,,,5-$-$-;3
Engine: Warm-up (using the oxygen sensor signal, check the air/ fuel mixture ratio, and also check the condition of control by the engine control unit)
700 rpm (Idle) 2,000 rpm
TSB Revision
13-96
HARNESS INSPECTION r
Measure the power supply voltage of the oxygen sensor. l Connector: Disconnected l Ignition switch: ON Voltage (V) sv Repair the harness. (@m - Control relay)
7FUO827
e oxygen sensor.
Disconnected
connector
1 TSB Revision
FUEL SYSTEM - On-vehicle Inspection of MPI ComDonents

SENSOR INSPECTION
13-97
(1) Disconnect the oxygen sensor connector. (2) Check that there is continuity [approx. 20 IR at 20C (68F)j across terminals @and @of the oxygen sensor connector. (3) If there is no continuity, replace the oxygen sensor.
7FU1014
(4) Warm up the engine until the engine coolant temperature becomes 80C (176F) or higher. (5) Using jumper wires, connect terminals @ and @ of the oxygen sensor connector to battery 0 and 0 terminals respectively.
Caution Ensure that the jumper wires are connected correctly, as wrong connections result in a broken oxygen sensor.
(6) Connect a digital voltmeter across terminals @ and 0.
7FUlOl5 ,
(7) Racing the engine repeatedly and measure the output voltage of the oxygen sensor. Engine Oxygen sensor output voltage Remarks
NOTE For removal and installation of the oxygen sensor, refer to GROUP 15 - Exhaust Manifold.
TSB Revision
FUEL SYSTEM - 0 n-vehicle Inspection of MPI Components OXYGEN SENSOR <Turbo>

M13YHAA2 I
\ Oxygen sensor
li
\\
Oxygen sensor (rear) @ Equipment side Connector
Oxygen sensor (front) @ , Equipment side connector f-l -1
./
2 _ Fr;;syn m-wr 2-J

Theoretical A/F
7FU1004 Lonrrol r e l a y -Control relay
Engine control unit 56
I 14 15 PJF 16 @ Harness side Connector @ Harness side connector
I 7FU1016
EC1007
7FUO453
OPERATION TROUBLESHOOTING
Refer to OXYGEN SENSOR <Non Turbo> (P.13-94).

Function Item No.
Data reading i rL& (f fzt,
,1
Data display
Check condition Engine: Warm-up (Make the mixture lean by engine speed reduction, and rich by racing)
Engine condition
Standard value
200
Sensor detection voltage
When sudden deceleration from 4,000 rpm When engine is suddenly raced
mV or lower mV
600-1.000
Engine: Warm-up (Using the oxygen sensor signal, check the air/fuel mixture ratio, and also check the condition of control by the engine control unit)
700 rpm (Idling) 2,000 rpm
400
mV or lower
6()(f--(~jbaono9~; d
TSB Revision

HARNESS INSPECTION
13-99
l l
Connector: Disconnected Ignition switch: ON
Engine control
Check for an open-circuit, or a shortcircuit to ground, between the engine control unit and the oxygen sensor. l Oxygen sensor connector: Disconnected l Engine control unit connector: Disconnected
Repair the -+ harness.
3
- @@ Harness side
Repair the harness.
7FUO512
TSB Revision
13-100

SENSOR INSPECTION
(1) Disconnect the oxygen sensor (rear) connector and connect the special tool, Test Harness, to the oxygen sensor (rear) connector. (2) Check that there is continuity [approx. 20 R at 20C (68F)I across terminals @ and @ of the oxygen sensor (rear) connector. (3) If there is no continuity, replace the oxygen sensor (rear).
MD998464
7FUO339
(4) Warm up the engine until the engine coolant temperature becomes 80C (176F) or higher. (5) Using jumper wires, connect terminals @ (red clip of the special tool) and @ (blue clip) of the oxygen sensor connector to battery 0 and 0 terminals respectively.
Caution Ensure that the jumper wires are connected correctly, as wrong connections result in a broken oxygen sensor.
(6) Connect a digital voltmeter across terminals @ (black clip of the special tool) and @ (white clip). (7) Race the engine repeatedly and measure the output voltage of the oxygen sensor (rear). Engine When engine is raced Oxygen sensor output voltage 0.6-l.OV Remarks When the air-fuel mixture becomes richer as a result of repeated racing, the oxygen sensor should output a voltage of 0.6 - 1 .O V.
MD958464
7FUO340
(8) If the measurements are not as specified, defective oxygen sensor (rear) is suspected. (9) Check the oxygen sensor (front) in the same way by following steps (I) through (8).
INSTALLATION
(1) For removal and installation of oxygen sensor, refer to GROUP 15 - Exhaust Manifold. (2) Tighten the oxygen sensor to specified torque.
TSB Revision
FUEL SYSTEM - On-vehicle Inspection of MPI Components INJECTORS <Non Turbo>
13-101
M13YTAC2
Injector \
- 7FUO803 Connector for rear bank
7FI
Engine control unit
7FUO833
Fuel Filter Engine control unit connector
7FUO653 @ Injection
7FUO83: 2
OPERATION
l l
The injector is an injection nozzle with a solenoid valve which injects fuel according to the injection signal coming from the engine control unit. The injector has a fixed nozzle opening area and the fuel pressure against manifold inside pressure is regulated to a fixed level. Therefore, the volume of fuel injected by the injector is determined by the time during which the needle valve is open, namely, by the time during which the solenoid coil is energized. The battery voltage is applied through the control relay to this injector. When the engine control unit turns on the power transistor in the unit, the solenoid coil is energized to open the injector valve, which then injects fuel.
TSB Revision
13-102
Hint 1: If the engine is hard to start when hot, check fuel pressure and check the injector for leaks. Hint 2: If the injector does not when the engine that is hard to start is cranked, the following as well as the injector itself may be responsible. \-J (1) Faulty power supply circuit to the engine control unit, faulty ground circuit (2) Faulty control relay (3) Faulty crank angle sensor, top dead center sensor Hint 3: If there is any cylinder whose idle state remains unchanged when the fuel injection of injectors is cut one after another during idling, make following checks about such cylinder. (1) Injector and harness check (2) Ignition plug and high tension cable check (3) Compression pressure check Hint 4: If the injector harness and individual part checks have resulted normal but the injector drive time is out of specification, the following troubles are suspected. (1) Poor combustion in the cylinder (faulty ignition plug, ignition coil, compression pressure, etc.) (2) Loose EGR valve seating (3) High engine resistance I

Function Data reading Item No. Data display 41 Drive time Check condition Engine: Cranking Coolant temperature 0C (32F)*z 20C (68F) 8O"C(176"F) Function Data reading Item No. 41 Data display Drive time*3
l
Standard value Approx. 17 ms Approx. 46 ms Approx. 11 ms Standard value , 2.4-3.0 ms 2.0-2.6 ms To increase
Check condition Engine coolant temperature: 80 to 95C (176 to 205F) Lamps, electric cooling fan, accessory units: All OFF Transaxle: Neutral (P range for vehicle with A/T) Steering wheel: Neutral
Engine state 700 rpm (Idle) 2,000 rpm When sharp racing is made
.--NOTE I : The injector drive time refers to when the supply voltage is 11 V and the cranking speed is less than 250 rpm. *2: When coolant temperature is lower than 0C (32F). injection is made .--- by four-cylinders simultaneously. 3: When the vehicle is new [within initial operation of about 500 km (300 miles)], the injector drive time may be about 10% longer. Function Actuator test Item No. 01 02 03 04 05 06 Drive content No. 1 injector shut off No. 2 injector shut off No. 3 injector shut off No. 4 injector shut off No. 5 injector shut off No. 6 injector shut off Check condition Engine: Idling after warm-up (Shut off the injectors in sequence during after engine warm-up, check the idling condition) Normal state Idle state to change further (becoming less stable or stalling)
TSB Revision
FUEL SYSTEM - Ori-vehicle lnwection o f M P I ComDonents

Using Oscilloscope
13403
(1) Run the engine at idle speed. (2) Connect the probe to the oscilloscope pick-up point as shown in the circuit diagram, and check the waveform at the drive side of each injector.
+/A+ A: Injector drive time Normal waveform 03A0201
HARNESS INSPECTION
--J
1
Harness side
Measure the power supply voltage of the front bank injector. l Connector: Disconnected l Ignition switch: ON 1
Repair the harness. (mControl relay)

7FlJO669
* I
Measure the power supply voltage of the rear bank injector. l Connector: Disconnected l Ignition switch: ON Voltage (VI
sv
Repair the harness. (m - Control relay)
Check for an open-circuit, or a shortcircuit between the front bank injector and the engine control unit. l Injector connector: Disconnected l Engine control unit connector: Disconnected
JP
=
7FUO805
id
TSB Revision
13-104

Check for an open-circuit, or a shortcircuit between the rear bank injector and the engine control unit. l Connector: Disconnected Engine control unit connector: l Disconnected
-l
4
L----.[ 1Q
7FUO971
ACTUATOR INSPECTION Measurement of Resistance between Front Bank Terminals

(1) Remove the injector connector. (2) Measure the resistance between terminals.
Standard value: 13 - 16 il [at 20C (68F)]

(3) Install the injector connector.
Y-4 onnector
Measurement of Resistance between Rear Bank Terminals

for (I) Remove the injector connector. (2) Measure the resistance between terminals.
Standard value: 13 - 16 Q [at 20C (68F)]

(3) Install the injector connector. \
7FUO78C
TSB Revision
FUEL SYSTEM - On-vehicle Inspection of MPI Components INJECTORS <Turbo>

Control relay
13405
(Front bank connector) I /- 7FUO80:
-1
:1 7 Injector N o . 5 1 (osclllo)d 2 ; 3 A14
5 5 ----_ Injector
4- - - -
60 Rear bank
connector
Injector No. 1
Injector
- - - - 2 Ioscillo)<
/ L
coscliio-: Engine control unit
(OscliioJ 1
-15
4-(
B r
is+ 7FUO973
Fuel Filter 7FUO653
@ Injection
7FUO832
OPERATION TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS

Refer to INJECTOR <Non Turbo> (P.13-101).
TSB Revision
13-106

Function Data reading Item No. iRea:banki 20C (68F) (FronT7bank) 80C (176F) Function Data reading Item No. (Reaebank) (Front7banki
l
Data display Drive time*
Check condition Engine: Cranking
Coolant temperature 0C (32F)*
Standard value Approx. 53 ms Approx. 29 ms Approx. 7 ms Standard value 1.9 - 2.5 ms 1.6 - 2.2 ms To increase
L,,,J
Data display Drive time*3

l
Check condition Engine coolant temperature: 80 to 95C (176 to 205F) Lamps, electric cooling fan, accessory units: All OFF Transaxle: Neutral (P range for vehicle with A/T) Steering wheel: Neutral
Engine state 700 rpm (Idle) 2,000 rpm When sharp racing is made
NOTE I : The injector drive time refers to when the supply voltage is 11 V and the cranking speed is less than 250 rpm. 2: When coolant temperature is lower than 0C (32F). injection is made by four cylinders simultaneously. 3: When the vehicle is new [within initial operation of about 500 km (300 miles)], the injector drive time may be about 10% longer. Function Actuator test Item No. 01 02 03 04 05 06 Drive content No. 1 injector shut off No. 2 injector shut off No. 3 injector shut off No. 4 injector shut off No. 5 injector shut off No. 6 injector shut off Check condition Engine: Idling after warm-up (Shut off the injectors in sequence during after engine warm-up, check the idling condition) Normal state Idle state to change further (becoming less stable or stalling) \,i
Using Oscillqscope
(1) Run the (2) Connect shown in the drive LJ 4 AL A: Injector Normal waveform drive time
03A0209
engine at idle speed. the probe to the oscilloscope pick-up point as the circuit diagram, and check the waveform at side of each injector.
TSB
Revision
FUEL SYSTEM - On-vehicle Inspection of MPI Components HARNESS INSPECTION

Measure the power supply voltage of the resistor. l Resistor connector: Disconnected l Ignition switch: ON
13-107
I
3
7FUO976
connector
Measure the power supply voltage of the front bank injector. l Resistor connector: Connected 0 Injector connector: Disconnected l Ignition switch: ON Voltage (V)
0
OK
0
3
Repair the harness. (@g@pJControl relay) Check power supply Check resistor
7FUO669
-I
harness side connector
Rear bank
Measure the power supply voltage of the rear bank injector. l Connector: Disconnected l Ignition switch: ON
Repair the
4 0
* .------------------
7FUO97;
supply Check resistor
Check for an open-circuit, or a shortcircuit between the front bank injector and the engine control unit. f---l l Injector connector: Disconnected l Engine control unit connector: Disconnected
7FUO805
TSB Revision
13-108

Check for an open-circuit, or a shortcircuit between the rear bank injector and the engine control unit. l Connector: Disconnected Engine control unit connector: l Disconnected
OK 0
A
STOP
Repair the harness. @ilTilpt iiWF4)
ACTUATOR INSPECTION INJECTORS Measurement of Resistance between Front Bank Terminals

(1) Disconnect the injector connector. (2) Measure the resistance between terminals. iJ
Standard value: 2 - 3 R [at 20C (68F)]

(3) Reconnect the injector connector.
------+ Rear bank
Measurement of Resistance between Rear Bank Terminals

(I ) Disconnect the injector connector. (2) Measure the resistance between terminals.
connector 1

(3) Reconnect the injector connector.
1 TSB Revision

RESISTOR
13409
Measurement of Resistance between Terminals

(1) Disconnect the resistor connector.
7FUO949
(2) Measure the resistance between terminals. Measuring terminals Resistance
5.5 - 6.5 R [At 20C (68F)]
7FUO97<
1
(3) If the resistance is out of specification, replace the resistor.
TSB
Revision
13-110
IDLE SPEED CONTROL SERVO (STEPPER MOTOR TYPE)

@ Harness side connector Control relay
\
Ball beam9
7FUO64;
\/
1,
\,
\/
1 OSCIIIO
OSCIIIO
4
OSClllO
6 osclllo -
Idle speed control servo
mu
L Plntle
/(a /(IT ),!j /I,, E n g i n e c o n t r o l u n i t
BPPP 7FUO518 Engine control unit connector
7FUO653
OPERATION
l l l
The intake air volume during idling is controlled by opening or closing the servo valve provided in the air path that bypasses the throttle valve. The servo valve is opened or closed by operating the stepper motor in the speed control servo in normal or reverse direction. The battery power is supplied to the stepper motor through the control relay. As the engine control unit turns on power transistors in the unit one after another, the stepper motor coil is energized and the motor rotates in normal or reverse direction.
Hint 1: If the stepper motor step increases to 100 to 120 steps or decreases to 0 step, faulty stepper motor or open circuit in the harness is suspected. Hint 2: If the idle speed control servo harness and individual part checks have resulted normal but the stepper motor steps are out of specification, the following faults are suspected. (I) Poorly adjusted reference idle speed (2) Deposit on the throttle valve (3) Air leaking into the intake manifold through gasket gap (4) Loose EGR valve seat (5) Poor combustion in the cylinder (faulty ignition plug, ignition coil, injector, low compression pressure, etc.)
\ L.J
1 TSB Revision
FUEL SYSTEM - On-vehicle .lnspection of MPI Components

Function Data Item No. Data display 45 Stepper motor steps
l
13-111
Check condition
Load state
Standard value 2 - 12 stp 25 - 65 stp 15 - 63 stp <Non Turbo>
reading
;;rnditioner switch: Engine coolant temperature: 80 to 95C (176 to 205F) 0 Lamps, electric cooling &conditioner switch: fan, accessory units: All OFF l $irNconditioner switch: l Transaxle: Neutral (P range for vehicle 0 Selector lever: with AA> Shift to D range l Steering wheel: Neutral l Idle position switch: ON (compressor clutch to be ON if air conditioner switch is ON) l Engine: idling
NOTE When the vehicle is new [within initial operation of about 500 km (300 miles)], the stepper motor steps may be about 30 steps more than standard. Caution When the selector lever is shifted to the D range, the brakes must be used to prevent the vehicle from moving forward.
Using Oscilloscope
(1) Connect the probe to each oscilloscope pick-up point as shown in the circuit diagram. (2) Start the engine. (3) When the air conditioner switch is turned on, the idling speed increases to operate the idle speed control. Check the instantaneous waveform. NOTE Keep in mind that the waveform can be observed only when idle speed control is in operation.
03A020
1 TSB Revision
13-112
HARNESS INSPECTION
Measure the power supply voltage of idle speed control servo. l Idle speed control servo connector: Disconnected l Ignition switch: ON
Connector
OlLO395
- WI)
Engine control connector
Check for an open-circuit, or a shortcircuit to ground between the engine control unit and the idle speed control servo. l Engine control unit connector: Disconnected l Idle speed control servo connectar: Disconnected
ACTUATOR INSPECTION Checking the Operation Sound

(1) Check that the operation sound of the stepper motor can be heard after the ignition is switched ON (but without starting the motor). (2) If the operation sound cannot be heard, check the stepper motors activation circuit. If the circuit is normal, it is probable that there is a malfunction of the stepper motor or of the engine control unit.
TSB Revision

Checking the Coil Resistance
13-113
id
El a 63 ~
(1) Disconnect the idle speed control servo connector and connect the special tool (test harness). (2) Measure the resistance between terminal @ (white clip of the special tool) and either terminal @ (red clip) or terminal @ (blue clip) of the connector at the idle speed control servo side.
Standard value: 28 - 33 !2 at 20C (68F) (3) Measure the resistance between terminal @ (green clip of
the special tool) and either terminal @ (yellow clip) or terminal @ (black clip) of the connector at the idle speed control servo side.
Standard value: 28 - 33 CR at 20C (68F)
7FUOOlO
Operational Check
(1) Remove the throttle body. (2) Remove the stepper motor.
(stepper motor)
7FUO98C
(3) Connect the special tool (test harness) to the idle speed control servo connector. (4) Connect the positive 0 terminal of a power supply (approx 6 V) to the white clip and the green clip.
Idle speed
MD998463
7FUOO78
TSB Revision
13-114

(5) With the idle speed control servo as shown in the illustration, connect the negative 0 terminal of the power supply to each clip as described in the following steps, and check whether or not a vibrating feeling (a feeling of very slight vibration of the stepper motor) is generated as a result of the activation of the stepper motor. @ Connect the negative 0 terminal the red and black clip. @ Connect the negative 0 terminal the blue and black clip. @ Connect the negative 0 terminal the blue and yellow clip. @ Connect the negative 0 terminal the red and yellow clip. @ Connect the negative 0 terminal the red and black clip. @ Repeat the tests in sequence of the power supply to of the power supply to of the power supply to of the power supply to of the power supply to from @ to 0.
(J
(6) If, as a result of these tests, vibration is detected, the stepper motor can be considered to be normal.
TSB Revision
FUEL SYSTEM - On-vehicle Inspection of MPI Components IGNITION COIL AND POWER TRANSISTOR
Battery
MlBYVAB
/gnition 1 coil
Equipment side connector @ Harness side connector

No. 3 No 5 No. 6
\/
\/
\I
.,
AL
No. 2
* transistor Tachometer -1
Engine control unit
23
11
5Y
taming adjustment connectof
lgnltlon
104
w d 5V Engine control unit connector 7FU1059
7FUO453
OPERATION
l
When the power transistor unit A is turned on by the signal from the engine control unit, primary current flows to the ignition coil A. When the power transistor unit A is turned off, the primaty current is shut off and a high voltage is induced in the secondary coil A, causing the ignition plugs of No. 1 and No. 4 cylinders to spark. When the power transistor unit B is turned off, the ignition plugs of No. 2 and No. 3 cylinders spark. When the engine control unit turns off the transistor in the unit, the battery voltage in the unit is applied to the power transistor unit to turn it on. When the engine control unit turns on the transistor in the unit, the power transistor unit is turned off.
TSB Revision
13-116
INSPECTION
Using Multi-use Tester
<Spark Advance>
Function Data Item No. Data display 44 Ignition advance
l l
(d
Check condition Engine: Warming up Timing light: Set (set timing light to check actual ignition timing) Engine state 750 rpm (Idle) 2,000 rpm Standard value 7 - 23BTDC 30 - 40BTDC <Non Turbo> 28 - 35BTDC <Turbo>
reading
<Ignition Timing Adjustment Mode>

Function Data list Item No. 36 Data display Continuity present or not present between ignition timing adjustment terminal and ground
l
Check condition Engine: Idling Terminal condition Ignition timing adjustment terminal is grounded Ignition timing adjustment terminal is disconnected from ground Standard value ON
OFF
<Standard Ignition Timing>

Function Actuator test Item No. 17 Drive Set to ignition timing adjustment mode
l l
Check condition Engine: idling Timing light: set
Normal condition 5BTDC \
($Gizi)
Using Oscilloscope
1. Primary signal of ignition coil (I) Run the engine at an idle revolution speed. (2) Connect the probe to oscilloscope pick-up point 1 as shown in the circuit diagram, and check the primary signal of the ignition coil.
L \ IOV _ ovep~,. ..~_~.~ fA t---.I

Normal waveform
03AO207
(
j I / I / I / 1
2. Control signal of power transistor Connect the probe to oscilloscope pick-up point 2 as shown in the circuit diagram, and check the control signal of the power transistor.
IOV _ ov
IJ
Normal waveform
TSB
Revision
FUEL SYSTEM - On-vehicle Inspection of MPI Components HARNESS INSPECTION
13-117
connector
l l
Connector: Disconnected Ignition switch: ON
unit harness stde P connector T
control
Engine
Check for an open-circuit, or a shortcircuit to ground between the engine control unit and the power transistor. l Engine control unit connector: Disconnected l Power transistor connector: Disconnected
Repair the -+ harness.

(@@J-1101/)
6FU1251
Check for an open-circuit, or a shortcircuit to ground between the power transistor and the ignition coil. l Ignition coil connector: Disconnetted l Power transistor connector: Disconnected
Repair the
7FUO699
TSB
Revision
13-118

(1
connector
Repair the harness. @pJ Ground)

7FUO700
Measure the voltage of the control slgnal circuit of the power transistor. l Connector: Disconnected l lgnrtion switch: START Voltage (VI 0.5 - 4.0
7 q
Repair the harness.
7FUO701
f
Measure the voltage of the ignition timinq terminal. - adiustment _ l Ignition switch: ON Voltage (V) 4.0 - 5.2
ACTUATOR INSPECTION
Refer to GROUP 16 - Ignition System.
TSB Revision
FUEL SYSTEM - On-vehicle Inspection of MPI Components PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Control relay
13-119
@ Equipment side connector Q Harness side connector
unit
OlAO324
7FUO653
OPERATION
l l
The purge control solenoid valve is an ON-OFF type one which controls introduction of purge air from the canister into the intake air plenum. The battery power is supplied to the purge control solenoid valve through the control relay. When the engine control unit turns ON the power transistor in the unit, current flows to the coil, introducing purge air.

Function Actuator test Item No. 08 Drive content Solenoid valve from OFF to ON Check condition Ignition switch: ON Normal state Operating sound is heard when driven
TSB Revision
13-120
HARNESS INSPECTION
Measure the power supply voltage. l Connector: Disconnected 0 Ignition switch: ON
7FUO525
connector
7FUO526
Check for an open-circuit, or a shortcircuit to ground between the purge control solenoid valve and the engine control unit, Engine control unit connector: l Disconnected Purge control solenoid valve conl nector: Disconnected
@-+A Repair the harness. c@pJ-I
ACTUATOR INSPECTION
Refer to GROUP 17 - Evaporative Emission Control System.
1 TSB Revision
FUEL SYSTEM - On-vehicle lnwection of MPI ComDonents EGR CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE <California - Non Turbo, Turbo>
13-121
MlBYZBA
Control relav
@ Equipment side connector EGR control solenoid valve
Engine control unit
7FUO653
OPERATION
l l
The EGR control solenoid valve is a duty control type solenoid valve. It makes control by leaking EGR valve operating negative pressure to the throttle body A port. Power supply from the battery is sent through the control relay to the EGR control solenoid valve. When the engine control unit turns off the power transistor inside the unit, current no more flows through the coil and EGR valve operating negative pressure leaks.
TROUBLESHOOTING HINT
If the results of EGR control solenoid valve on-vehicle and off-vehicle inspections are normal but the self-diagnosis code for EGR system failure is displayed, check the EGR valve, vacuum hose and EGR passage for blocking.
c.
1 TSB Revision
13-122

Function Actuator test Item No. 10 Drive content Change solenoid valve from OFF to ON state Check condition Ignition switch: ON Normal state Operating sound is heard when driven
HARNESS INSPECTION
1
Measure the power supply voltage.
Control relay) Y 01105*4
Repair the -S harness. C@vJ-~)
Ls
ACTUATOR INSPECTION
Refer to GROUP 17 - Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System.
1 TSB Revision
FUEL SYSTEM - On-vehicle Inspection of MPI ComDonents FUEL PRESSURE CONTROL VALVE <Turbo>
13-123
Control relay
Equipment side connector Fuel pressure control valve
Enaine control unit connector
7FUO653
OPERATION
l l
The fuel pressure control valve is an ON-OFF type solenoid valve that switches the pressure introduced to the fuel pressure regulator between either intake manifold pressure or barometric pressure. Battery power is supplied to this valve via the control relay. When the engine control unit turns ON the internal power transistor, the coil is energized to allow barometric pressure to be introduced to the fuel pressure regulator.
TSB Revision
13-124
INSPECTION
Using Multi-use tester

Function Actuator test Item No. 09 Drive content Turn solenoid valve from OFF to ON Check condition Ignition switch: ON Normal state r%;reard when
HARNESS INSPECTION
Measure the power supply voltage. l Connector: Disconnected l Ignition switch: ON @ Harness side connector Voltage (V) SV
-*
q 2
Repair the i* harness. (@m - Control relay)
7FUO527
Check for an open-circuit, or a shortcircuit to ground, between the fuel pressure control solenoid valve and the engine control unit. l Engine controLunit connector: Disconnected l Fuel pressure control valve connector: Disconnected
TSB Revision

ACTUATOR INSPECTION Operation Check
13-125
NOTE Before disconnecting the vacuum hose, mark it to ensure reconnection at the correct position. (1) Remove the vacuum hose (blue stripe on black) from the solenoid valve. (2) Disconnect the harness connector.
(3) Apply a negative pressure to the nipple to which the black vacuum hose has been connected and check air-tightness with and without the battery voltage applied to the solenoid valve terminal. Battery voltage Not applied qj The other nipple of solenoid valve Normal state
Applied
Open
Negative pressure is held
Coil Resistance Check

(I) Measure the coil resistance with a circuit tester.
TSB Revision
13-126
WASTE GATE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE <Turbo>
Control relav Waste gate control solenoid valve
7FU1007 Q Equipment side connector
unit
0110324
Enqlne control unit connector
7FUO653
OPERATION
l l
The waste gate control solenoid valve is an ON-OFF type solenoid valve that controls the boost pressure that is introduced to the waste gate actuator. Battery power is supplied to this valve via the control relay. When the engine control unit turns ON the internal power transistor, the coil is energized to release part of the boost pressure applied to the waste gate actuator.
If the waste gate control solenoid valve harness and the unit itself are normal, but poor acceleration or other abnormalities are experienced, the follwing problems are suspected.
(1)
Faulty boost pressure control system (2) Poor connection of intake air hose (3) Faulty turbocharger or waste gate actuator (4) Clogged exhaust system
TSB Revision

INSPECTION Using Multi-use tester L
Function Actuator test Item No.
12
'13-127
Drive content Turn solenoid valve from OFF to ON
Check condition Ignition switch: ON
Normal state CliZli~,eard when
HARNESS INSPECTION
trol relay)
7FUO525
Check for an open-circuit, or a shortcircuit to ground, between the waste gate control solenoid valve and the engine control unit. l Waste gate control solenoid valve connector: Disconnected l Engine control unit connector: Disconnected
Repair the -+ harness. (@m- ml)
7FUO526
ACTUATOR INSPECTION
Refer to GROUP 15.
1 TSB Revision
13-128
BOOST METER <Turbo>

Ignition switch (IG,) @ Equipment side connector Boost meter
Engine control unit
111
i-F
TSB
Revision

HARNESS INSPECTION
Measure the power supply voltage. l Connector: Disconnected l Ignition switch: ON Voltage (V)
13-129
sv
*
Repair the harness. (@I@-- I nition coil 9IG])
7FUO986
Engine control unit harness side connect0 r
1
i
Check for an open-circuit or a shortcircuit to ground, between the engine control unit and the boost meter. Boost meter connector: Disconnected Engine control unit connector: Disconnected
ACTUATOR INSPECTION
Refer to GROUP 54.
1 TSB Revision
13-130
ACTIVE EXHAUST CONTROL UNIT <Turbo>

DCmotorfor valve drive
Active exhaust control unit
Al A
12 A
7FUO653
OPERATION
l l l l
Muffler noise is controlled by opening and closing the valve provided inside the main muffler. The valve is opened or closed by turning the DC motor in the normal or reverse direction. The DC motor is driven in the normal or reverse direction by changing the direction of power flow by the motor driving IC in the active exhaust control unit. The active exhaust control unit opens and closes the valve when it receives the signal produced by the engine control unit.
HARNESS INSPECTION
0 F
I
Measure the input voltage of engine
Engine control unit harness side connector 7FUO689 I
ACTUATOR INSPECTION
Refer to GROUP 15. TSB Revision
FUEL SYSTEM - On-vehicle lnwection of MPI ComDonents VARIABLE INDUCTION CONTROL SERVO (DC MOTOR) <Non Turbo>
Engine control unit
13-131
Variable induction control servo Y (DC motor)(with built-in induction /control valve oosition sensor) 7Fllfl807
Close @ Equipmentside connector ,\ I 1
Open , , I 2 Variable induction control servo DC motor
1 FU0646
7FUO653
OPERATION
l l
As the DC motor is driven clockwise or counterclockwise by the signal from the engine control unit, the variable induction valve opens or closes. The DC motor is driven clockwise or counterclockwise as the direction of current flow is changed by the motor drive IC in the engine control unit.
INSPECTION Using Multi-use tester

Function Actuator test Item No. 11 Drive content Drive the variable induction control (MC) servo (Open and close the variable induction valve) Check condition Ignition switch: ON Normal state
Turn the variable induction
valve shaft (Variable induction valve: FULL CLOSE
+ FULL OPEN
1 TSB Revision
13-132
HARNESS INSPECTION
Engine control unit harness side connector Check for an open-circuit or a shortcircuit to ground, between the engine control unit and the variable induction control servo connector. Variable induction control servo l connector: Disconnected Engine control unit connector: l Disconnected
Repair the harness. t
*A
7FUO84
ACTUATOR INSPECTION
Refer to GROUP 15.
1 TSB Revision
FUEL SYSTEM - On-vehicle Inspection of MPI Components ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SIGNAL <Turbo>
ABS ECU
@ ABS control unit equipment side connector
A
28 ABS HU
t
Engine control unit 114
6FU1542
7FUO653
OPERATION
l
The anti-lock brake signal is input to the engine control unit from the anti-lock brake system (ABS) control unit as a signal to indicate whether or not the motor relay is activated. Based on this signal, the engine control unit controls the idle-speed control servo to secure effective anti-lock braking. When the motor relay is activated, the ABS control unit turns ON the power transistor, short-circuiting the terminal to ground. This causes the anti-lock brake signal to go from high to low.
TSB Revision
13-134

I I

Function Data reading Item No. Data display 45 Stepper motor step Check condition Engine warmed up . Driving condition Apply fairly sharp braking at 50 km/h (4th speed) to stop vehicle Standard value To reach temporarily 70 to 100 steps
NOTE Select a place where a rear-end collision is unlikely.

I
HARNESS INSPECTION
Engine control umt harness side connecm
side connector
Check for an open-circuit or a shortcircuit to ground, between the ABS control unit and the engine control unit. l ABS control unit connector: Disconnected l Engine control unit connector: Disconnected 7
Ii I
I ~,
Repair the harness. (@m-ml)
6FU1543
I\
TSB Revision
FUEL SYSTEM - On-vehicle lnwection of MPI ComDonents ENGINE AND TRANSAXLE TOTAL CONTROL SIGNAL <A/T>
13-135
/ L/
Transaxle control unit
Engine control unit
16FO292
Engine control unit
@ Transaxle control unit connector Engine control unit connector
7FUO843
7FUO903
7FUO653
OPERATION
l l
Three communication lines are connected between the engine control unit and the transaxle control unit to send and receive the engine and transaxle total control signal. If the transistor inside the engine control unit changes from OFF to ON by the command of the engine control unit, the terminal having a voltage of 5 V applied to it from the transaxle control unit is grounded in the engine control unit. This will change the terminal voltage of the transaxle control unit from HIGH to LOW. If the transistor fitted inside the engine control unit changes from ON to OFF, the terminal, having applied to it a voltage of 5 V from the transaxle control unit and grounded in the engine control unit, is released and the terminal voltage of the transaxle control unit changes from LOW to HIGH. In this way, the terminal voltage of the transaxle control unit is controlled by ON/OFF operation of the transistor inside the engine control unit in order to send signal. On the other hand, the transaxle control unit also controls the terminal voltage of the engine control unit by the ON/OFF operation of the transistor fitted inside the transaxle control unit in order to send signal. In this way, the engine and transaxle send control signal to each other.
TSB Revision
13-136
HARNESS INSPECTION
I &;;;;;g;;g
connector .j/ \% : c.
Engine control unit harness
Check for an open-circuit, or a shortcircuit to ground between the transaxle control unit and the engine control unit, Transaxle control unit connector: l Disconnected Engine control unit connector: l Disconnected
OK c----J
Repair the harness. C@pJ- 11161)
6FU1543 Engine control unit harness
control ?ss side
Check for an open-circuit, or a shortcircuit to ground between the transaxle control unit and the engine control unit. Transaxle control unit connector: l Disconnected Engine control unit connector: l Disconnected
Repair the harness. @pJ-gj,
6FU1543
-I
3
@ Transaxle control unit harness side
Check for an open-circuit, or a shortcircuit to ground between the transaxle control unit and the engine control unit. Transaxle control unit connector: l Disconnected Engine control unit connector: l Disconnected
Repair the -+ harness. @ml -FJ)
6FU1543
1 TSB Revision
FUEL SYSTEM - Orwehicle lnwection of MPI Components.

Fuel gauge cover
13-137
RELEASE OF RESIDUAL PRESSURE FROM HIGH M13FGAI PRESSURE FUEL HOSE

Make the following operations to release the pressure remaining in fuel pipe line so that fuel will not flow out. (I) Remove the fuel gauge cover in the luggage compartment. (2) Disconnect the fuel pump harness connector. (3) Start the engine and after it stops by itself, turn the ignition switch to OFF. (4) Connect the fuel pump harness connector.
03FOOO4
(5) Apply the specified sealant to the rear floor pan.
Specified sealant: 3M ATD Part No. 8509 or equivalent

(6) Install the fuel gauge cover.
FUEL PUMP OPERATION CHECK
M13FDAI
(1) Set the ignition switch at OFF. (2) Check that when the battery voltage is directly applied to the fuel pump check terminal (black), the operating sound of the pump can be heard. NOTE Since the fuel pump is installed in the fuel .tank, its operating sound cannot be readily heard. Remove the fuel tank cap and listen to the operating sound through the filter port. (3) Hold the high pressure fuel hose between your fingers and check that the fuel pressure can be felt.
j check terminal ----T
( 04~oo1,/
TSB Revision
13438

/
I
MlJFNAT
FUEL PRESSURE TEST
(1) Reduce the internal pressure of the fuel pipes and hoses. (2) Disconnect the fuel high pressure hose at the delivery pipe side. dl
Caution Cover the hose connection with rags to prevent splash of fuel that could be caused by some residual pressure in the fuel pipe line.
(3) Set a fuel pressure gauge on the special tool, placing an adequate O-ring or gasket between the gauge end special tool prevent fuel leaks. (4) Attach the special tool set in step (3) to the delivery pipe between high pressure hose. (5) Connect the 0 battery terminal.
(6) Connect a jumper wire to the terminal for activation of the fuel pump and to the positive 0 terminal of the battery to activate the fuel pump. With fuel pressure applied, check to be sure that there is no fuel leakage from the fuel pressure gauge and the special tool connection part. (7) Disconnect the jumper wire (from the terminal for activation d of the fuel pump) to stop the fuel pump. (8) Start the engine and let it idle.
(9) Measure the fuel pressure during idling.
Standard value: <Non Turbo> <Turbo>
Approx. 270 kPa (38 psi) at curb idle Approx. 235 kPa (34 psi) at curb idle
TSB
Revision
FUEL SYSTEM - On-vehicle Inspection of Mql Components
13439
(10)Disconnect the vacuum hose from the fuel pressure regulator, and then measure the fuel pressure while using a finger to plug the end of the hose.
Standard value: <Non Turbo> 330 - 350 kPa (47 - 50 psi) at curb idle <Turbo> 295 - 315 kPa (43 - 45 psi) at curb idle
(11 )Check to be sure that the fuel pressure during idling does not decrease even after the engine is raced a few times. (12)Use a finger to gently press the fuel return hose while repeatedly racing the engine, and check to be sure that there is fuel pressure in the return hose also. NOTE There will be no fuel pressure in the return hose if there is insufficient fuel flow. (13)lf the fuel pressure measured in steps (9) to (12) deviates from the standard value range, check for the probable cause by referring to the table below, and. then make the appropriate repair.
I Condition
l l l
Probable cause
1 Remedy Replace the fuel filter.
Fuel pressure is too low. Fuel pressure drops during racing. No fuel pressure in fuel return hose.
Malfunction of the valve seat within the fuel pressure regulator, or fuel leakage to return, side caused by Fuel pump low discharge pressure.
Replace the fuel pressure regulator.
Replace the fuel pump. Replace the fuel pressure regulator. Clean or replace the hose and/or pipe. Replace the vacuum hose, or clean the nipple. Checking the fuel pressure control system <Turbo>
Fuel pressure is too high.
The valve within the fuel pressure regulator is sticking. Clogging of the fuel return hose and/ or the pipe.
Damaged vacuum hose or nipple No change of the fuel pressure when the vacuum hose is connected clogging. and when not connected. Malfunction of the fuel pressure control system <Turbo>
1 TSB Revision
13-140

(14)Stop the engine and check for a change of the value indicated by the fuel pressure gauge. The condition is , normal if there is no decrease of the indicated value within two minutes. If there is a decrease of the indicated value, monitor the :d speed of the decrease, and, referring to the table below, determine the cause of the problem and make the appropriate repair.
Condition After the engine is stopped, the fuel pressure drops gradually.
Probable cause Injector leakage. Leakage at the fuel pressure regulator valve seat.
Remedy Replace the injector. Replace the fuel pressure regulator. Replace the fuel pump.
There is a sudden sharp drop of the fuel pressure immediately after the engine is stopped.
The check valve (within the fuel pump) is not closed.
(15)Remove all remaining pressure from inside the fuel pipe. (16)Disconnect the fuel pressure gauge and the special tool from the delivery pipe.
Caution Because there will be.a slight amount of remaining pressure in the fuel pipe line, use rags to cover so that fuel doesnt splatter.
(17)Replace the O-ring at the end of the fuel high-pressure hose with a new one. (I 8)After connecting the fuel high-pressure hose to the delivery pipe, tighten the installation bolt at the specified torque.
Tightening torque: 5.0 Nm (3.6 ftlbs.)

(19)Check to be sure that there is no fuel leakage. @ Apply battery voltage to the terminal for activation of the fuel pump so as to activate the fuel pump. @ With fuel pressure applied, check for leakage of the fuel line.
TSB Revision
FUEL SYSTEM - Injector
13-141
MlBSA-A
INJECTOR L
! REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Pre-removal Operation l Draining of the Coolant (Refer to GROUP 00 - Maintenance Service.) l Removal of Air Intake Plenum (Refer to GROUP 15-Air Intake Plenum,) l Release of Residual Pressure from High Pressure Hose. (Refer to P.13-137.)
Post-installation Operation l Supplying of Coolant (Refer to GROUP 00- Maintenance Service.) l Installation of Air intake Plenum (Refer to GROUP 15 -Air Intake Plenum.) l Checking for Fuel Leakage
:m
*: -a I : .1%~X. 1 0 p$
y& ,,* A2 00A0005
5Nm 4 Wbs
03FOO17
/ L
Removal steps l * l * 1. Connection of high pressure fuel hose 2. Connection of fuel return hose 3. Connection of vacuum hose l * 4. Fuel pressure regulator 5. Connection of control harness 6. Fuel pipe 7. Delivery pipe 8. Insulator 9. Injector support *+ IO. Injector 11. Insulator 12. O-ring 13. Grommet TSB Revision
0-hng
03N0012
O-ring
03FOO18
13-142
FUEL SYSTEM - Injector SERVICE POINT OF REMOVAL

MlBSSAI
1. DISCONNECTION OF HIGH PRESSURE FUEL HOSE

Bleed the residual pressure within the fuel pipe line so as to LA; prevent the flow of fuel.
INSPECTION
INJECTORS
M13SCAC
(1) Measure resistance between terminals of injector using a circuit tester.
Standard value: 13 - 16 R [at 20C (68F)] <Non Turbo> 2 - 3 LR [at 20C (68F)l <Turbo>
(2) If the resistance is out of specification, replace the injector.

10. INSTALLATION OF INJECTOR
MlBSDAV
While turning the injector to the left and right, install it to the delivery pipe. Check to be sure that the injector turns smoothly.
Caution If it does not turn smoothly, the O-ring may be trapped. Remove the injector and then m-insert it into the delivery pipe and check once again. 4. INSTALLATION OF FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR
When connecting the fuel pressure regulator to the delivery pipe, apply light oil or petrol to the O-ring, and then insert, being careful not to damage the O-ring.
1. CONNECTION OF HIGH PRESSURE FUEL HOSE

When connecting the high pressure fuel hose to the delivery pipe, apply petrol to the hose union, and then insert, being careful not to damage the O-ring.
TSB
Revision
FUEL SYSTEM - Throttle Body
13-143
MIOSA-0
I id
THROTTLE BODY
Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation
l
Draining and Supplying of Engine Coolant (Refer to GROUP 00 -Maintenance Service.)

<DOHC (Turbo)>
<DOHC (Non Turbo) - California>
OlFOOO4
OlFOO53
NOTE The layout of vacuum hoses (No. 3) of the constr is for the DOHC (Non Turbo) - Federal. Prelection Throttle body
drawing
Removal sl :eps +* 1. Connection of accelerator cable 2. Connection of air intake hose 3. Connection of vacuum hose 4. Connection of TPS connector 5. Connection of ISC motor connec :tor 6. Connedion of water hose 7. Vacuum pipe assembly 8. Throttle body I)* 9. Gasket
MlBSDAW

9. INSTALLATION OF GASKET
Install the gasket so that the projection is where shown in the illustration.
Caution Poor idling etc. may result if the gasket is installed incorrectly. 1. ACCELERATOR CABLE ADJUSTMENT
For information concerning adjustment of the accelerator cable, refer to P.13-156. TSB Revision
13-144
FUEL SYSTEM - Throttle- Body
DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY
/
2.0 Nni 1.4ft.lbs.
Disassembly steps 1. Dash pot 2. Hose <Turbo only> 3. Vacuum valve > l * 4. Throttle position sensor (within idle position switch) 5. Idle speed control servo assembly 6. Throttle body
7FU1023
SERVICE POINT OF DISASSEMBLY
MlBSFAN
Caution 1. When loosening a Phillips screw which has been firmly tightened, use a Phillips screwdriver that is an exact fit for the screw. 2. Do not remove the throttle valve. 3. Be careful when removing the throttle position sensor and idle speed control servo mounting screws, as adhesive has been applied these screws.
INSPECTION
DASH POT INSPECTION <Turbo>
Ml3SHAt.l
(1) Check the dash pot diaphragm for damage. First, push up the rod fully and closing tightly the nipple with a finger, release the rod. The diaphragm is intact if the rod does not return to the initial position while the nipple is held closed with a finger. If the rod returns, the diaphragm is broken. Replace the dash pot. \
7FU1057 1
VACUUM VALVE INSPECTION <Turbo>

(1) Remove the filter from the vacuum valve. (2) Connect a hand vacuum pump to the black nipple of the vacuum valve. (3) With the other nipple closed by the finger, apply a negative pressure of 500 mmHg (19.7 in.Hg.) to make sure that the negative pressure is maintained. (4) Let go your finger and make sure that the negative pressure leaks out gradually.
hSB Revision
FUEL SYSTEM - Throttle Body

Orifice
13-145
(5) Disconnect the hand vacuum pump and connect it to the other nipple. (6) Make sure that the negative pressure leaks out as soon as it is applied.
Nipple (green)
3EM05i
CLEANING THROTTLE BODY PARTS

(1) Clean all throttle body parts. Do not use solvent to clean the following parts:
l l
Throttle position sensor (Idle position switch) Idle speed control servo
If these parts are immersed in solvent, their insulation will deteriorate. Wipe them with cloth only. (2) Check if the vacuum pot-t or passage is clogged. use compressed air to clean the vacuum passage.
SERVICE POINT OF REASSEMBLY
M13SGAN
4. INSTALLATION OF THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

(1) Set the throttle position sensor to the throttle body as shown in the diagram.
(2) After turning the throttle position sensor 90 in the clockwise direction to set it, tighten by turning the screw. (3) Connect the circuit tester between 1 (ground) and 3 (output), or between 3 (output) and 4 (power). Then, make sure that the resistance changes smoothly when the throttle valve is slowly moved to the fully open position. (4) Check for continuity across terminals 2 (Idle position switch) and 1 (ground) with the throttle valve both fully closed and fully open.
I
Ground Throttle positlon sensor output
Throttle valve position Fully closed Fully open
Continuity Conductive
Non-conductive
Idle-position switch
Th>ottle position sensor power 7FUO535
If there is not continuity with the throttle valve fully closed, turn the counterclockwise direction, and then check again. (5) If the above specifications are not met, replace the idle position switch. I
1 TSB Revision
13-146 FUEL TANK
FUEL SYSTEM - Fuel Tank

M13GA-

l
Draining of the Fuel 0 Release of Residual Pressure from High Pressure Hose. (Referto P.13-137.)
5-6Nm
25 ft.lbs.
12 Nm 8 ft.lbs. W
22 ftlbs.
16
;d
26 Nm 19 ft.lbs.
03FOOO7
Removal steps ** I. Fuel gauge cover 2. Fuel pump and fuel gauge unit assembly connector 3. Fuel tank cap 4. Drain plug 5. Splash shield 6. Fuel filler neck protector ** 7. Vapor hose 8. Fuel filler neck 9. Fuel filler hose
* IO. Vapor hose 11. Return hose +* * 12. High pressure fuel hose * 13. Vapor hose 14. Leveling pipe 15. Self-locking nut 16. Fuel tank ++ 17. Overfill limiter (Two-way valve) I)+ 18. Vapor hose l + 19. Fuel pump and fuel gauge unit assembly
l l l l
1 TSB Revision
FUEL SYSTEM - Fuel Tank SERVICE POINT OF REMOVAL
13-147
MlBGBAK
12. DISCONNECTION OF HIGH PRESSURE FUEL HOSE

Disconnect the hose from body main pipe first and then from fuel pump.
INSPECTION
l l l l
MlBGCAM
Check Check Check Check
the the the the
hoses and the pipes for crack or damage. fuel tank cap for malfunction. fuel tank for deformation, corrosion or crack. fuel tank for dust or foreign material.
NOTE If the inside of the fuel tank is to be cleaned, use any one of the following: (1) Kerosene (2) Trichloroethylene (3) A neutral emulsion type detergent
OVERFILL LIMITER (TWO-WAY VALVE)

Connect a clean rubber hose to the overfill limiter and check for operation. Inspection procedure Lightly blow from the inlet (fuel tank) side Rubber hose Lightly blow from the outlet (canister) side Normal condition Air passes through after a slight resistance Air passes through I
MlSGDAT
19. INSTALLATION OF FUEL PUMP AND FUEL GAUGE UNIT ASSEMBLY

Align the three positioning projections of the packing with the holes in the fuel pump and fuel gauge unit assembly.
ng
n
03FOOl 9
18.13. IO. 7. CONNECTION OF VAPOR HOSE

(1) If the pipe has a stepped part, connect the vapor hose to the pipe securely, up to the stepped part, as shown in the illustration. (2) If the pipe does not have a stepped part, connect the vapor hose to the pipe securely, so that it is the standard value.
OSFOOB
Standard value: 25 - 30 mm (1.0 - I.2 in.)

05FOO7
TSB Revision
13-148
FUEL SYSTEM - Fuel Tank

17. INSTALLATION OF OVERFILL LIMITER (TWO-WAY VALVE)
Install so that the overfill limiter is facing in the direction shown in the illustration. , ~ L.&l
Canist
ide
Do3041
12. CONNECTION OF HIGH PRESSURE FUEL HOSE

Flare nut
Temporarily tighten the flare nut by hand, and then tighten it to the specified torque, being careful that the high pressure fuel hose does not become twisted.
Caution When tightening flare nut, be careful not to bend or twist line to prevent fuel pump from damage.
Se&e side
031043
0%:008
11. CONNECTION OF RETURN HOSE

Connect the return hose to the pipe securely, up to the stepped part, as shown in the illustration.
1. INSTALLATION OF FUEL GAUGE COVER

Before installing the fuel gauge cover, apply the specified sealant to the rear floor pan.
TSB Revision
FUEL SYSTEM
Fuel Pump and Fuel Gauge Unit Assembly - and Overfill Limiter (Two-Wav Valve)
13449
FUEL PUMP AND FUEL GAUGE UNIT ASSEMBLY AND OVERFILL LIMITER (TWO-WAY VALVE)
1: REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
MIBUA- -
Removal steps l * 1. Fuel gauge cover 2. Fuel pump and fuel gauge unit assembly connector l * 3. Overfill limiter (Two-way valve) *I) I)+ 4. High pressure fuel hose connection (body side) a* I)* 5. High pressure fuel hose connection . (tuel pump side) l * 6. Fuel pump and fuel gauge unit assembly
03FOOO7
MlSUBAC
4. DISCONNECTION OF HIGH PRESSURE FUEL HOSE (BODY SIDE) Caution Cover the hose connection with rags to preventsplash of fuel that could be caused by some residual pressure in the fuel pipe line.
03FOOll ~
5. DISCONNECTION OF HIGH PRESSURE FUEL HOSE (FUEL PUMP SIDE)

NOTE Hold the pump side nut with a wrench while turning the nut on the hose side.
ILJ I
[TSB Revision I
13-150
FUEL SYSTEM
Fuel Pump and Fuel Gauge Unit Assembly - and Overfill Limiter (Two-Way Valve)
INSPECTION
MlBUCAB
Connect a clean rubber hose to the overfill limiter and check for d operation. Inspection procedure Lightly blow from the inlet (fuel tank) side
Rubber hose
Normal condition Air passes through after a slight resistance Air passes through
Lightly blow from the outlet (canister) side
M13UDAC
6. INSTALLATION OF FUEL PUMP AND FUEL GAUGE UNIT ASSEMBLY

Align the three positioning projections of the packing with the holes in the fuel pump and fuel gauge unit assembly.
5. 4. CONNECTION OF HIGH PRESSURE FUEL HOSE

Flare nut
Temporarily tighten the flare nut by hand, and then tighten it to the specified torque, being careful that the high pressure fuel hose does not become twisted.
Caution \ When tightening flare nut, be careful not to bend or [J twist line to prevent fuel pump from damage.
Secure side
03Yo43
3. INSTALLATION OF OVERFILL LIMITER (TWO-WAY VALVE)

Install so that the overfill limiter is facing in the direction shown in the illustration.
Camst ide
DO304
1. INSTALLATION OF FUEL GAUGE COVER

Before installing the fuel gauge cover, apply the specified sealant to the rear floor pan.
1 TSB Revision
I
FUEL SYSTEM - Fuel Line and Vapor Line
13451
MlBKA-~
FUEL LINE AND VAPOR LINE

i REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
30
Nm
<Turbo>
Removal
steps 1, Reserve tank 2. Battery 3. Battery tray with washer tank assembly 4. Purge control valve M 5. Fuelvapor hose 6. Canister 7. Vapor pipe assembly l + 8. Fuel return hose a* 9. Eye bolt 10. Gasket 11. High pressure fuel pipe l a 12. Fuel filter *I, 13. Eye bolt 14. Gasket l * 15. High pressure fuel hose 16. O-ring w 17. Fuel vapor hose 18. Stone protector 19. Fuel vapor pipe 20. Fuel return pipe 21. Fuel main pipe 1 TSB Revision
Deli\ rery e
i6
03N0012
13-152
FUEL SYSTEM - Fuel Line and Vapor Line SERVICE POINTS OF REMOVAL
9. 13. REMOVAL OF EYE BOLT
Remove the eye bolt while holding the fuel filter nut securely. \
MlBKBAQ
INSPECTION
l l l
MIBKCAJ
Check the hoses and pipes for cracks, bend, deformation and clogging. Check the canister for clogging. Check the fuel filter for clogging and damage.
MlSKDAU
17.5. INSTALLATION OF FUEL VAPOR HOSE / 8. FUEL RETURN HOSE

03FOO3
(1) If the fuel pipe has a stepped part, connect the fuel hose to the pipe securely, up to the stepped part, as shown in the illustration. (2) If the fuel pipe does not have a stepped part, connect the fuel hose to the pipe securely, so that it is the standard value.
Iti
05FOO7
Standard value: 25 - 30 mm (1.0 - 1.2 in.) 15. INSTALLATION OF HIGH PRESSURE FUEL HOSE
Apply engine oil to the hose union. Insert the hose, being careful not to damage the O-ring, and tighten securely.
Caution Because there is high pressure applied between the fuel pump and the injection mixer, be especially sure that there is no fuel leakage in this area.
12. INSTALLATION OF FUEL FILTER

(1) When installing the fuel filter, first temporarily install the filter to the filter bracket; then insert the main pipe at the connector part of the high pressure fuel pipe, and manually screw in the main pipes flare nut. (2) Holding the fuel filter nut, tighten the fuel main pipes flare nut and eye bolt at the specified torque. Then tighten the filter to the bracket.
35
k ._..I_.
7r; ft Ihr
Nm
,x @d
Flare nut
TSB Revision
FUEL SYSTEM - Fuel Filter
13453
M13VA-.
FUEL /
FILTER
/I
l
Removal of Residual Pressure from
Post-installation Operation l Checking for Fuel Leakage
l---
Removal steps
1. Battery 2. Battery tray with washer tank assembly 3. Eye bolt 4. Gasket 5. High pressure fuel hose 6. Connection of fuel main pipe 7. Mounting bolt l * 8. Fuel filter l * 9. Eye bolt 10. Gasket 11. High pressure fuel pipe
i&J
22 ft.lbs.
03FOO12

3. 9. REMOVAL OF EYE BOLT
MlSVBAB
Remove the eye bolt while holding the fuel filter nut securely.
SERVICE POINT OF INSTALLATION

Gasket
M13VBAB
8. INSTALLATION OF FUEL FILTER

(1) When installing the fuel filter, first temporarily install the filter to the filter bracket; then insert the main pipe at the connector part of the high pressure fuel pipe, and manually screw in the main pipes flare nut. (2) Holding the fuel filter nut, tighten the fuel main pipes flare nut and eye bolt at the specified torque. Then tighten the filter to the bracket.
L
fuel pipe
&----Eye bot 03FOO13
TSB Revision
13-154
FUEL SYSTEM - Detonation Sensor
DETONATION SENSOR
Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation l Release and Installation of the Air Intake Plenum (Refer to GROUP 15-Air Intake Plenum.) l Removal and Installation of the Intake Manifold (Refer to GROUP 15 - Intake Manifold.)
20-25Nm
l * +*
I. Detonation sensor
SERVICE POINT OF REMOVAL

1. REMOVAL OF DETONATION SENSOR

1. INSTALLATION OF DETONATION SENSOR
When the detonation sensor is installed, be sure to tighten Id it precisely to the specified torque as its installation affects the engine control.
TSB Revision
ENGINE CONTROL - Specifications / Troubleshooting
13-155
ENGINE CONTROL
i; SPECIFICATIONS
M13CEB
I Items
Standard value Accelerator cable play mm (in.) <M/T> <AA> Accelerator switch switching point
Specifications
mm (in.)
1 - 2 (.04 - .08) 3-5(.12-.20) 2 - 6 (08 - .24)
TROUBLESHOOTING
ACCELERATOR CABLE AND ACCELERATOR PEDAL
MlSEGAC
I Symptom
Throttle valve will not fully open or close
Probable cause Misadjusted accelerator cable Misadjusted automatic speed-control cable Broken return spring Throttle lever malfunction
Remedy Adjust Adjust Replace Replace Repair Repair Lubricate or replace
Accelerator pedal operation not smooth (over acceleration)
Accelerator pedal wrongly tightened Misinstalled accelerator cable Accelerator cable requires lubrication
TSB Revision
13-156
ENGINE CONTROL - Service Adjustment Procedures

M13FBCK I
ACCELERATOR CABLE INSPECTION AND a ADJUSTMENT

For models equipped with the cruise control system, refer to P. 13-l 58. (1) Turn air conditioner and lights OFF. Inspect and adjust at no load. (2) Warm engine until stabilized at idle. (3) Confirm idle speed is at prescribed rpm. (4) Stop engine (ignition switch OFF). (5) Confirm there are no sharp bends in accelerator cable. (6) Check inner cable for correct slack. (7) If there is too much slack or no slack, adjust play by the following procedures. @ Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (without starting the engine) and leave in that condition for approximately 15 seconds.
@ Loosen the adjusting bolts on the air intake plenum, and then secure the outer cable so that the free play of th,e inner cable will be the standard value.
Standard value: <M/T> <A/T>
1 - 2 mm (.04 - .08 in.) 3-5 mm (.12-.20 in.)
\J
NOTE If there is excessive play of the accelerator cable, the vehicle speed drop (undershoot) when climbing a slope will be large. If there is no play (excessive tension) of the accelerator cable, the idling speed will increase. (8) After adjusting, confirm that throttle valve fully opens and closes by operating pedal. (9) Adjust accelerator cable play and confirm throttle lever stopper touches the fixed SAS.
n ;$usting
ACCELERATOR SWITCH INSPECTION AND MlBFlBC ADJUSTMENT

Make sure that when the accelerator pedal is free, there is continuity between the terminals of the accelerator switch and that when the pedal is pressed until the indicated pedal stroke A reaches the standard value, there is no continuity between the terminals of the switch.
Standard value: Accelerator switch switching point 2 - 6 mm (.079 - .24 in.)

09FO117
\ LJ ~
If stroke A is out of specification, adjust with adjusting bolt.
TSB Revision
ENGINE CONTROL - Engine Control
13-157
Ml30A- -
ENGINE CONTROL

5Nm 4 ftlbs. Post-installation
l l
Operation
Accelerator Cable Adjustment (Refer to P. 13-156.) Accelerator Switch Adjustment <A/T; (Refer to P.13.156.)
Removal
steps I. Adjusting bolt 2. Connection of throttle body side inner cable 3. Bushing 4. Accelerator cable 5. Accelerator oedal 6. Spring 7. Connection of accelerator switch connector <A/T> 8. Accelerator arm bracket 9. Split pin 10. Accelerator arm 11. Return spring 12. Accelerator switch <A/T> 13. Accelerator arm stopper 14. Bolt <A/T> 15. Stopper
07A0031
INSPECTION
l l l l l
MlBOCAJ
/ ii
Check the Check the Check the Check the Check the Check the switching.
inner and outer cable for damage. cable for smooth movement. accelerator arm for bending. return spring for deterioration. connection of bushing to end metal fitting. accelerator pedal switch for correct ON-OFF <A/T>
TSB Revision
13-158
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM - Specifications
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM

SPECIFICATIONS
MlOCA-.
LJ
Rated load A Voltage drop V Auto-cruise control switch Rated load A SET
Stop light switch (for cruise control) Rated load A Clutch switch Rated load A
Vacuum pump Type Rated load A Control valve, release valve
Items Accelerator cable play mm (in.) <MTT> <An-> Throttle cable mm (in.) Cruise control cable mm (in.) Resistance between terminals for control valve and relief valve in vacuum pump s1 I Specifications O-l (O-.04) 2-3(.08-.12) 1-2 (.04-.08) l-2(.04-.08) 50-60
MlBCB- -
TSB Revision
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM - S Decial Tools / Troubleshootina
13-159
SPECIAL TOOLS
Tool Number MB991341 Name Multi-use tester assembly 1 Use
l
Checking of the self-diagnosis output
MB991 359
ROM pack
TROUBLESHOOTING
PRELIMINARY INSPECTION
Check the following points and repair defective points, if any, before troubleshooting.
MlSEBDW
(I) Check that the vacuum pump assembly, link assembly, actuator and all cables and vacuum hoses are properly installed and that the cables and vacuum hoses are correctly routed. (2) Check that the link assembly and all cables move smoothly. (3). Check each of the cables for excessive play or tension.
TROUBLESHOOTING QUICK REFERENCE CHART

Cruise control system is canceled when cancellation not wanted. Or, the cruise control system cannot be set after an automatic cancellation. <Check the diagnosis output. (Refer to P.13-172.) >
Based on the diagnosis output code, check the circuit and individual parts. (Refer to P.13-173.)
Can cruise control be set at the present moment?
- Refer to section on trouble symptoms, Cruise control cannot be set. (Refer to P. 13-l 60.)
< Set cruise control and perform driving test.
Does the same problem occur again? No
Check the diagnosis output. (Refer to P.13-176.) > AUTO CANCEL activated during operation on a steep slope, or a temporary loose contact in the connector
TSB Revision
13-160
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM - Troubleshooting

NOTE This chart contains troubleshooting procedures to perform when a problem cannot be detected by self diagnosis.
Cruise control system cannot be set.
Check input. (Refer to P. 13-l 73.) I Yes b Check vacuum pump assembly circuit. (Refer to P. 13-l 67.) NOTE If the results of checks on the vacuum pump assemblv circuit and actuator parts (refer to P.13-184.) indicate that they are good, replace the control unit
Is the result of input check O.K.? ! No
pen circurt In contra
eplace control switch
Defective clutch switch Even when select lever is placed in
Replace clutch switch
TSB Revision
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM - Troubleshootina

Trouble symptom
l l
13461
Probable cause Malfunction of the vehicle speed sensor circuit Malfunction of the speedometer cable or speedometer drive gear <Non turbo> Vacuum pump assembly circuit poor contact Malfunction of the vacuum pump assembly (including air leaks from negative pressure passage) Malfunction of the ECU
Check chart No. No. 4
Remedy Repair the vehicle speed sensor system, or replace the part.
The set vehicle speed varies greatly upward or downward. Hunching (repeated alternating acceleration and deceleration) occurs after setting is made.
No. 5
Repair the actuator system, or replace the part.
No. 6
Replace the ECU. Repair the harness or replace the stop light switch. Repair the harness or replace the vacuum pump assembly. Replace the ECU. Repair the harness, or repair or replace the clutch switch.
The cruise control system is not canceled when the brake pedal is depressed.
Brake switch (for cruise control) malfunction (short-circuit) Vacuum pump assembly drive circuit short-circuit Malfunction of the ECU
No. 5
If the input check code No. 26 indicates a malfunction. No. 7
The cruise control system is not canceled when the clutch pedal is depressed. <M/T> (It is canceled, however, when the brake pedal is depressed.)
Damaged or disconnected wiring of clutch switch input circuit Clutch switch improper installation (wont switch
ON)
Malfunction of the ECU The cruise control system is not canceled when the shift lever is moved to the N position. <A/T> (It is canceled, however, when the brake pedal is depressed.) Damaged or disconnected wiring of inhibitor switch input circuit Improper adjustment of inhibitor switch Malfunction of the ECU Cannot decelerate by using the SET switch. Temporary damaged or disconnected wiring of control switch input circuit Vacuum pump assembly circuit poor contact Malfunction of the vacuum pump assembly Malfunction of the ECU NOTE ECU: Electronic control unit Replace the ECU. No. 2 Replace the ECU. Repair the harness or replace the control switch If the input check code No. 26 indicates a malfunction. No. 8 Replace the ECU. Repair the harness, or repair or replace the inhibitor switch.
No. 5
Repair the harness or replace the vacuum puml: assembly.
1 TSB Revision
13-162
Trouble symptom

Probable cause Open or short circuit in RESUME switch circuit in control switch Vacuum pump assembly circuit poor contact Malfunction of the vacuum pump assembly (including air leaks from negative pressure passage) Malfunction of the ECU If the input check code No. 27 indicates a malfunction. No. 2 No. 4 Replace the ECU. Replace the control switch Check chart No. No. 2 Remedy Replace the control switch
Cannot accelerate or resume speed by using the RESUME switch.
No. 5
Repair the harness or replace the vacuum pump assembly.
Even when CANCEL switch is set to Open or short circuit in CANCEL switch ON, cruise control is not canceled circuit in control switch (Cruise control, however, is canceled when brake pedal is depressed.) Malfunction of the ECU The cruise control system can be set while traveling at a vehicle speed of less than 40 km/h (25 mph), or there is no automatic cancellation at that speed. Malfunction of the vehicle-speed sensor circuit Malfunction of the speedometer cable or the speedometer drive gear <Non turbo> Malfunction of the ECU The cruise control indicator light of the combination meter does not illuminate. (But cruise control system is normal) Damaged or disconnected bulb of indicator light Harness damaged or disconnected Malfunction of the ECU Burned-out indicator light Cruise control ON indicator light does not come on. (However, cruise bulb control is functional.) Open or short circuit in harness Malfunction of control function by ON/OFF switching of ELC 4 AA accelerator switch. (Non-operation of damper clutch, 2nd gear hold, etc.) Overdrive is not canceled during fixed speed driving <A/T> No shift to overdrive during manual driving. <A/T> Malfunction of circuit related to accelerator switch OFF function Malfunction of the ECU Malfunction of circuit related to overdrive cancellation, or malfunction of ECU
Replace the ECU Repair the vehicle speed sensor system, or replace the part.
No. 3
Replace the ECU. Repair the harness or replace the light bulb.
No. 3
Replace the ECU. Repair the harness or replace the main switch.
No. IO
Repair the harness or replace the part.
No. 11
Repair the harness or replace the part.
TSB Revision
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM - Troubleshooting CHECK CHART
13-163
it l/
Inspection of control unit power supply circuit DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION

The power is supplied through the ignition switch (IG,) and cruise control main switch to the control unit. 1. When the cruise control main switch is set to ON with the ignition switch at ON, the current from switch S, flows through relay Ry, in the switch. Accordingly, the contact of relay Ry, is closed and the power is supplied to the control unit. 2. When the main switch is released, it automatically returns to the neutral position. Since the current from switch S2 flows to relay Ry,, the contact of relay Ry, remains closed. 3. When the main switch is set to OFF, current to relay Ry, is interrupted. This opens the contact of relay Ry, to stop the power supply to the control unit. When the switch is released, it automatically returns to the neutral position, but relay Ry, stays in the OFF state. 4. When the ignition switch is set to OFF while relay Ry, in the main switch is ON, relay Ry, is forced to the OFF state just like when the main switch is set to OFF. Even if the ignition switch is set to ON again, relay Ry, stays in the OFF state until the main switch is set to ON. NOTE The numbers beside each connector correspond to those in the section (P.13-176) HARNESS AND COMPONENTS LAYOUT
SWITCH
L;
CRUISE #fi$ROL
71
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS ECU terminal voltage

Terminal No. 2 Signal name Control unit power supply Condition Main switch ON and neutral position thereafter Main switch OFF and neutral position thereafter 8, 14 16 Control unit ground Control unit back up power supply At all times At all times
Terminal voltage System voltage ov ov System voltage
,/ id
TSB Revision
13-164
2

Inspection of control switch circuit DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION
IGNITION SWITCHtACC)
The control switch is a switch in which the SET, RESUME and CANCEL switches are integrated. Therefore, different resistance values are used for the individual switches to change the outputs (voltages) to the control unit. Current flows through fuse No. @ of J/B and through the control switch to the control unit. 1. SET switch When the cruise control switch is ON, if the SET switch is set to ON while vehicle speed is within a range from about 40 to 145 km/h (25 to 90 mph), the vehicle starts cruising at the speed. If the SET switch is kept at ON during cruise operation, the vehicle coasts, and starts cruising at the speed reached when the SET switch is set to OFF.
r-
._- - - -
2. RESUME switch
Even if cruise operation is canceled, the vehicle resumes cruising at the speed set before the cancellation. Both when the main switch is set to OFF and when the vehicle speed is reduced to less than 40 km/h (25 mph) , the vehicle will not resume cruising at the previously set speed even if the RESUME switch is set to ON. If the RESUME switch is kept at ON during cruise LJ operation, the engine accelerates, and the vehicle starts cruising at the speed reached when the RESUME switch was set to OFF. (However, when the vehicle speed is raised to more than 145 km/h (90 mph), the vehicle cruises at approximately 145 km/h {90 mph).
LE- @
CONTROL UNIT
*X35-AK-R1302
3. CANCEL switch
When the CANCEL switch is set to ON during cruise operation, the cancel signal is input to the control unit which internally interrupts the power supply to the vacuum pump assembly for cancellation of cruise operation.

Signal name 18 Control switch Condition I When all switches are OFF When SET switch is ON When RESUME switch is ON When CANCEL switch is ON L TSB Revision J I I Terminal voltage ov 3v 6V d System voltage
1
I
13-165
I
Inspection of indicator light circuit

CRUl MAIN !;$ROL IGNITION SWITCH(IG1) l-
CRUISE CONTROL UNIT
XXSS-AK-RI303
b!
Trl
DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION 1. Cruise control ON (ASC ON) indicator light

Located in the combination meter, it lights as soon as the main switch is set to ON.
2. Cruise control (CRUISE) indicator light

During cruise control operation, transistor Tr, in the control unit is kept in the ON state to keep the indicator light on.

Terminal No. Signal name Condition I When cruise control is active When cruise control is inactive Terminal voltage System voltage ov
23
fr;se control (CRUISE) indicator
TSB
Revision
13466

Inspection of vehicle speed sensor circuit
<NON-TURBO>
<TURBO>
IGNITION SWITCH(IG1)
LjlI
5 El
cl! AI
CRUISE CONTROL UNIT
19 Y * $ ~E$iJ & 0 z L
g6 pl!Ezq@ zla d m ;ygmq%q ? ;i

COMBINATION METER
~ ~
\ J
xX35-AR-RI304 P
KX35-AK-Rl3Yl
a
1
DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION <Turbo>

The vehicle speed sensor, mounted in the transmission, delivers pulse signals proportional to the rotational speed of the transmission output gear (vehicle speed) to the control unit. (Four pulse signals generated per rotation of the output gear) Since the vehicle speed sensor is of the electronic type, the power is supplied through the ignition switch (IG,).
<Non Turbo>
The vehicle speed sensor is a reed switch type and is mounted in the speedometer. It sends pulse signals proportional to the rotational speed of the transmission output gear (vehicle speed) to the control unit. (Four pulse signals generated per rotation of the output gear)
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS Diagnosis No. 12 (Automatically canceled) ECU terminal voltage

1
Terminal No.
I
Signal name Vehicle speed sensor i 1 TSB Revision
Condition Slowly drive forward with SELECT lever at D or "1 st Speed
Terminal voltage 0 to 0.6V 2J &l;;:neg
19
l/j,
13-167
I
I
I
Inspection of vacuum pump assemblv drive circuit DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION

CRUISE CONTROL MAIN SWITCH 4-' a l-
The vacuum pump assembly consists of a diaphragm type negative pressure pump that is driven by a DC motor, and two solenoid valves (control valve and relief valve) and is controlled by the. control unit as shown in the following table. When the brake pedal is depressed during cruise control operation, the power supply to the vacuum pump assembly is cut off.
PUMP
1.1-111.
id
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS Diagnosis No. 11 (Automatically canceled) ECU terminal voltage
!5
26
13
12
KK33-AK-R1905
TSB Revision
13-168
,

I
II 6 II
Inspection of stop light switch circuit

FUSIBLE LINK@ I
II DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION
When the brake pedal is depressed during vehicle speed control, the cruise control (NC) contact of the stop light switch is opened to interrupt the power supply to the vacuum pump assembly for cancellation of vehicle speed control. (Refer to P. 13-I 67.) At the same time, the stop light (NO) contact is closed. As a result, a cancel signal is input to the control unit which internally interrupts the vacuum pump assembly drive circuit.
IJ i

Terminal No. 15 Signal name Stop light switch Condition When brake pedal is depressed When brake pedal is not depressed Terminal voltage System voltage OV
z h
15
El 1
xx35-AX-R1305
STOP LIGHT
Inspection of clutch switch circuit <M/T>

CRUISE c!$;ROL
DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION
When the clutch pedal is depressed during vehicle speed control, the contact of the clutch switch is closed. As a result, a cancel signal is input to the control unit which internally interrupts the power supply to the vacuum pump assembly drive circuit for cancellation of vehicle speed control.
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS ECU terminal voltage I

Terminal No. 1 Signal name Clutch switch Condition When clutch pedal is depressed
I
Terminal voltage OV
When clutch pedal System , voltage is not depressed

KK35-AK-R130TA
TSB Revision

8 Inspection of inhibitor switch circuit <A/T> DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION
13-169
>% 8 1
INHIBITOR SWITCH
The inhibitor switch is interlocked with the starter switch. When the gear selector lever is placed in the N position during vehicle speed control, a cancel signal is input to the control unit which internally interrupts the power supply to the vacuum pump assembly drive circuit for cancellation of vehicle speed.

Terminal No. 1 Signal name Inhibitor switch Condition Inhibitor switch in N or P position Terminal voltage ov System voltage
STARTER
L;
9
RX%-AK-R1907
Inspection of throttle position sensor circuit DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION

ENGINE CONTROL UNIT
:l:DOHC
The throttle position sensor (with built-in idle switch) is used for engine control as well as cruise control. The throttle position sensor sends data to the control unit, regarding the opening of the accelerator. The idle switch inputs the data to the control unit on whether or not the accelerator pedal is operated.
THROTTLE ;;f&;iON OFF*- 01 w2,3 ' / % * {ml@
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS Diagnosis No. 17 (Not automatically canceled) ECU terminal voltage
Signal name Idle switch Condition Terminal voltage
When accelerator OV pedal is depressed When accelerator 4.5 - 5.5V pedal is not depressed
KX.95~AC-R1308
CRUISE CONTROL UNIT
Throttle position During idle sensor
0.48 0.72V
When fully opened 4.0 - 5.5V
TSB Revision
13-170
10

Inspection of circuit associated with accelerator pedal switch OFF function <A/T>
IGNITlOii I sw1: KH(IG2) In d ,2 77 ?I OA -..A"2 Y . 3
The accelerator pedal switch is used to detect the operating state of the accelerator pedal. It is one of the sensors of the ELC4A/T automatic transmission. Since the accelerator pedal is not operated during vehicle speed control,.the cruise control unit forces transistor Tr, into the OFF state, creating the same state as when the accelerator pedal switch is placed in the OFF state.
\ J
"CLt-t-fi[T UNIT
E L
I\- .----------3,"
g-1: 1 r
E r
13 : DI ORi
1
H 1
$iK&ERATOR SWITCH
3 - ii
2 -I
CRUISE CONTROL UNIT

Terminal No. 3 9 Signal name Accelerator pedal switch control power supply Accelerator pedal switch Condition When ignition switch is placed at ON When accelerator pedal is depressed When accelerator pedal is not depressed TSB Revision System voltage

11
13-171
Inspection of circuits associated with overdrive cancel <A/T>

!IGNITION SW1 'TCH(IG2) il-
OVER DRIVE SWITCH
2, C
14
,lO
CRUISE tHTRO"
l-l
On a vehicle with cruise control, the OD switch ON signal is input through the cruise control unit to the ELC-4AIT control unit. When the vehicle speed control is in the overdrive mode, if the actual vehicle speed falls more than about 7 km/h (4 mph) below the set vehicle speed, the cruise control unit forces transistor Tr, into the OFF state. This cancels the overdrive mode because no OD switch ON signal is input to the ELC-4PJT control unit.

Terminal No. 3 10 Signal name OD signal control power ELC-4A/T control unit
supply
Condition When ignition switch is ON When overdrive mode is active When overdrive mode is inactive
Terminal voltage System voltage System voltage ov System voltage ov
11
OD switch
When OD switch is ON When OD switch is OFF
TSB Revision
13-172
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM - Troubleshooting SELF-DIAGNOSIS CHECKING

Self-diagnosis checking is performed when there has been an automatic cancellation without cancel switch operation. 1 LA NOTE Even when the ignition key is placed in the OFF position, all diagnosis codes are stored and retained, until the battery cable is disconnected, to make sure that the problems encountered in the past can be checked.
WITH MULTI-USE TESTER

(1) Read the self-diagnosis code. (2) Refer to the diagnosis chart and repair the defective point.
Control switch 1 RESUME itch: ON t 4 SET switch: ON

07FOO17
(3) Clear the self-diagnosis codes by the following procedure. @ Place the ignition switch in the ON position. @ With the SET switch in the ON state, set the main switch to ON. In less than 1 .O second thereafter, set the RESUME switch to ON. @ With the SET switch in the ON state again, keep the stop light switch in the ON state for more than 5 d seconds. @ Check the self-diagnosis code to verify that a normal code is output.
WITH VOLTMETER
(1) Connect an analog voltmeter across the self-diagnosis output terminal and ground terminal of the diagnosis connector. (2) Place the ignition switch and main switch in the ON position. (3) Read the self-diagnosis code on the basis of the deflection of the pointer of the voltmeter. (4) Refer to the diagnosis chart and repair the defective point. (5) Clear the self-diagnosis codes in the same way as when a multi-use tester is used.
16FO2461
TSB Revision

DIAGNOSIS DISPLAY PATTERNS AND CODES
Code No.
11
13473
Display patterns (output codes) (Use with voltmeter)
Probable cause Vacuum pump assembly drive output system out of order Vehicle speed signal system out of order
Check chart No.
-JILL The same pattern repeatedly displayed
l-l
12
In
Control switch out of order (When SET or RESUME switch is kept in ON state continuously for more than 60 seconds) Control switch out of order
Throttle position sensor or idle switch out of order
Normal code
12AOlOa
NOTE 1. When two or more problems occur simultaneously, the three latest code numbers are displayed in the order of lowest code number first. 2. Even if the problem represented by the code number marked * occurs during cruise control operation, the cruise control mode will not be canceled. 3. When the system is normal, the diagnosis code is displayed as described below. @ If a multi-use tester is used: NORMAL! ! I will be displayed. @ If a voltmeter is used: Continuous ON/OFF signals will be displayed at 0.5 second intervals. (Refer to the illustration at the left.)
INPUT CHECKING
Input checks should be made when the cruise control system cannot be set and when it is necessary to check (when a malfunction related to the cruise control system occurs) whether or not the input signals are normal. NOTE 1. If inspection of self-diagnosis is necessary, confirm diagnosis code first and conduct input check. 2. Input check can be conducted by set operations. Selfdiagnosis terminal outputs display patterns. 3. Display codes are displayed only if the circuit is normal according to the conditions shown in the table on the next paw. Perform checks using the following procedures. (1) Connect a multi-use tester or a voltmeter to the diagnosis inspection connector of the junction block. NOTE Connect a voltmeter using the same procedure as for inspection of diagnosis output. TSB Revision
13-174

(2) Calling up a code
Control switch SUME itch: ON
t 4
SET switch: ON
07FOO17 I
@ Set the ignition switch to ON. @ With the SET switch in the ON state, set the main switch to ON. In less than 1 .O second thereafter, set the I,/ RESUME switch to ON. Then the input check results can be displayed.
(3) Reading a code @ Perform the individual input operations according to the input check table and read the codes. NOTE 1. When two or more input operations are performed simultaneously, all the associated code numbers are output in ascending order. 2. If no code is output by performing any of the input operations, the control unit power supply circuit or SET and RESUME switches are probably defective. Check the check tables 1 and 2 (P.13-163, 164).
1 TSB Revision

INPUT CHECK TABLE
ode
40.
Display patterns (output codes) (use with voltmeter)
Input operation SET switch ON
Check results SET switch circuit normal
21 n 22
RESUME switch.ON
RESUME switch normal
23 nn 24
Stop light switch ON (brake pedal depressed) Vehicle speed more than approx. 40 km/h (25 mph) Vehicle speed less than approx. 40 km/h (25 mph) M/T -1 ~ Clutch switch ON ~~;~~o~~i~~~~;sed (SELECT lever placed in N position)
Stop light switch circuit normal
Vehicle speed sensor circuit normal if code Nos. 24 and 25 are displayed
25
26
Clutch switch circuit normal Inhibitor switch circuit normal
27
CANCEL switch ON
CANCEL switch circuit normal
Throttle position sensor circuit TPS output voltage 1.5 V or more (Accelerator pedal depressed more normal than half the way) Idle switch OFF (Accelerator pedal depressed) Idle switch circuit normal
@ Set main switch to OFF.
1 TSB Revision
13-176
HARNESS AND COMPONENTS LAYOUT

ENGINE COMPARTMENT
Engine front view

01 02 03 04 05 Jumper connector Vacuum pump Throttle position sensor Inhibitor switch <A/T> VeTkFo;peed sensor 03
Engine rear view
36FOOO5 16FO175
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND FLOOR CONSOLE
Combination meter Main switch

36FOO17
TSB Revision
CRUISE CONTROL .SYSTEM - Troubleshooting

DASH PANEL
13-177
Junction block
JUNCTION BLOCK
Front side
36FOO18
36FOOO2
36FOOO3
10 Clutch pedal switch <M/T> 11 Stop light switch 12 Clock spring 13 Accelerator pedal switch <A/T>
14 Over drive switch <A/T> 15 Cruise control unit 16 l 7 Front wiring harness and junction l 81 block combination 19 Adapter wiring harness and junction block combination Body wiring harness (LH) and junction block
LOCATION OF CONTROL UNIT
E%sQ I B /I.LIlll Crutse !t
control
unit
GROUND POINT
I I1 d
TSB Revision
q\ ( $$
-\ - * -G 4tT
16F02E
13-I 78
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM - Service Adjustment Procedures

MlSFTCA

CRUISE CONTROL CABLES INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
\ J
Cruise control actuator
Adjusting . nut A Adillstinn nr~+ R \ -Link A
Cruise control assembly

Link B
Cruise control cable
Adjusting nut C
Accelerator cable
Throttle valve
07N0004
(1) Set the air conditioner, lights and other switches to OFF for inspection at no load. (2) Let the engine warm up until it runs at idle. (3) Check that the idle speed is within the specified range. (4) Stop the engine and set the ignition switch to OFF. (5) Check that the accelerator cable, cruise control cable and throttle cable are routed without sharp bends. (6) Depress the accelerator pedal to check that the throttle lever moves smoothly from the fully-closed to fully-opened position. (7) Check the free travel state of the inner cables of the accelerator cable, cruise control cable and throttle cable. (8) If the inner cables are too loose or have no free travel at all, check using the following procedure. @ Remove the link protector. @ Loosen the adjusting and lock nuts of the throttle lever and intermediate links A, B and C to place the throttle lever and intermediate links A, B and C in the free state.
1 TSB Revision
13-179
@ Set the ignition switch to ON (do not start the engine). @ Rotate intermediate link C in the direction shown until it is blocked by the stopper, turn down adjusting nut C in the direction that the free travel of the inner cable is reduced, and back off adjusting nut C the specified number of turns just before intermediate link C begins to move.
Adjusting nut C
07NOOlE
Amount adjusting nut C is to be backed off: <M/T> About l/2 turn [inner cable free travel 0 - 1 mm (0 - .04 in.)] <A/T> About two turns [inner cable free travel 2 to 3 mm (.08 to .12 in.)]
@ Secure the accelerator cable with the lock nut. @ Turn down adjusting nut B in the direction that the free travel of the inner cable of the throttle cable is reduced. At the position where the lever of intermediate link B is brought into contact with intermediate. link C, back off adjusting nut B the specified number of turns.
Link B lever
Amount adjusting nut B is to be backed off: About one turn [inner cable free travel 1 to 2 mm (.04 to .08 in.)]
07N0019
@ Secure the throttle cable with the lock nut. @ Secure the adjusting bolt of the surge tank. @ Turn down adjusting nut A in the direction that the free travel of the inner cable of the cruise control cable is reduced. At the position where the lever of intermediate link A is brought into contact with intermediate link B, back off adjusting nut A the specified number of turns.
Amount adjusting nut A is to be backed off: About one turn [inner cable free travel 1 to 2 mm (.04 to .08 in.)]
Link B 07NOOlE
@ Secure the cruise control cable with the lock nut. @ After adjustment, check to see that the end of the fixed SAS is in contact with the stopper of the throttle lever.
y,jj--ww
03LO122
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM INSPECTION

CRUISE CONTROL MAIN SWITCH CHECK
MlBFlDA
(1) Turn the ignition key to ON. (2) Check to be sure that the CRUISE CONTROL ON indicator light within the combination meter illuminates when the main switch is switched ON.
\\
18FO2.2'
TSB Revision
13-180

CRUISE CONTROL SETTING CHECK
4
ET: ON 07FOOl; Control switch \ E: ON t
(1) Switch ON the main switch. (2) Drive at the desired speed within the range of approximately 40 - 145 km/h (25 - 90 mph). (3) Operate the control switch downward. (SET switch: ON) (4) Check to be sure that the speed is the desired constant speed when the switch is released, and also check to be sure that the CRUISE indicator light (within the combination meter) illuminates. NOTE If the vehicle speed decreases to approximately 15 km/h (9 mph) below the set speed, because of climbing a hill for example, the cruise control will be cancelled.
SPEED-INCREASE SETTING CHECK

(1) Set to the desired (2) Operate the control (3) Check to be sure switch is hold, and speed at the time driving speed. speed. switch upward. (RESUME switch: ON) that acceleration continues while the that when it is released the constant. when it was released becomes the
07FOOli
NOTE Even if, during acceleration, the vehicle speed reaches or exceeds the high limit [approximately 145 km/h (90 mph)], acceleration will continue, however, when the switch is released, the set speed (memorized speed) will become the high limit of the vehicle speed.
SPEED REDUCTION SETTING CHECK

Control switch \
(1) Set to the desired speed. (2) Operate the control switch downward. (SET switch: ON) (3) Check to be sure that deceleration continues while the switch is held, and that when it is released the constant speed at the time when it was released becomes the driving speed. NOTE When the vehicle speed reaches the low limit [approximately 40 km/h (25 mph)] during deceleration, the cruise control will be cancelled.
SET: ON 07FOOl
CRUISE CONTROL CANCELLATION AND SET SPEED RESUME CHECK

Control switch \
(1) Set cruise control. (2) In the cruising condition of the cruise control mode, check that when any of the following operations are performed, the normal drive mode is restored and ,the vehicle coasts smoothly. @ Move the control switch toward you. (CANCEL switch: @ Depress the brake pedal. @ Depress the clutch pedal. <M/T> @ Place the gear selector lever in the N range. <A/T>
07FOOl
TSB Revision

Control switch
13-181
(3) With the vehicle at a speed of more than about 40 km/h (25 mph), check that when the control switch is moved upward (RESUME switch: ON), the vehicle resumes cruising at the speed held before cancellation of the cruise control mode. (4) In the cruise control mode, check that when the main switch is set to OFF, the normal drive mode is restored and the vehicle coasts smoothly.
07FOO17
INDIVIDUAL PARTS INSPECTION

CRUISE CONTROL MAIN SWITCH INSPECTION
M13FEA
(I) Remove the main switch together with the switch garnish. (2) Remove the main switch from the switch garnish.
\\
18FO22;
(3) Operate the main switch and check for continuity across the individual terminals.
ILL Press OFF. Neutral position

Press ON.
0 0 A
0 0
07FOOlO
NOTE (I 1 O-O denotes continuity across the terminals.
(2) ILL: Illumination light (4) Connect a positive lead from the battery to terminal @ and a negative lead from the battery to terminal @ and check that battery voltage is available across terminal @ and the ground during the period the ON side of the main switch is pressed and during the period before the OFF side is pressed thereafter. Check that when the OFF side of the main switch is pressed thereafter, the battery voltage available across terminal @ and the ground is reduced to 0 V.
4
07FOO13
ILL: Illumination light
07FOOll
TSB Revision
13-182

CRUISE CONTROL SWITCH INSPECTION
(1) Remove the air bag module using the following procedure. @ Remove the negative terminal of the battery and wait d for more than 30 seconds.
I I
Caution The capacitor in the SRS diagnosis unit retains enough voltage to deploy the air bag for a given period even after disconnection of the battery. If an operation is performed during that given period, unintended deployment of the air bag could result and cause serious injury.
@ Remove the air bag module. To remove the clock spring connector (squib connector) from the air bag module, force the lock outward and pry it with a plain screwdriver as shown at left so that no undue force will be exerted on the connector when it is removed. @ The removed air bag module should be stored in a clean, dry, flat place with the pad side up.
(2) Disconnect the connector of the control switch and operate the control switch to measure the resistance between the individual terminals. If the readings are as shown below, the control switch may be considered good. Switch operation When switch is not operated
07FOO12
Resistance between terminals No continuity Approx. 0 1R Approx. 820 1R Approx. 2,700 fi
-iJ
When switch is operated toward you (CANCEL switch: ON) When switch is operated upward (RESUME switch: ON) When switch is operated downward (SET switch: ON)
07NOOl
TSB Revision
13-183
STOP LIGHT SWITCH/BRAKE SWITCH INSPECTION

(1) Disconnect the connector. (2) Check for continuity between the terminals of the switch. O-O: Continuity Brake switch
1 onoo5J 16LO285
Stop light switch 2 0 3 0
When brake pedal depressed. When brake pedal not depressed. 0 0
CLUTCH SWITCH INSPECTION <M/T>

(I) Disconnect the connector. (2) Check that there is continuity between the terminals when the clutch pedal is depressed, and that there is no continuity when the pedal is released.
141014;
INHIBITOR SWITCH (N POSITION) INSPECTION <A/T>

(1) Disconnect the connector. (2) Check to be sure that there is continuity between connector terminals @and @when the shift lever is moved to the N range.
TFA0359
VEHICLES SPEED SENSOR INSPECTION <Non Turbo>

Use circuit tester to check circuit repeats off/on between terminals when speedometer shaft turned several times.
16FO13L
<Turbo>
(1) Remove the vehicles speed sensor and connect as shown in the illustration, using a 3 - 10 kQ resistance. (2) Use a voltmeter to check for voltage at terminals @ and @ when the pulse generator shaft is turning. (One revolution is four pulses.)
Resistance 3--1Okl2
16R0273
TSB Revision
13-184

THROlTLE POSITION SENSOR INSPECTION
For inspection, refer to P.13-65.
IDLE POSITION SWITCH INSPECTION

For inspection, refer to P.13-68.
VACUUM PUMP INSPECTION Inspection of Solenoid Valves (Control and Relief Valves)
(1) Disconnect the connector of the vacuum pump assembly. (2) Measure the resistance values across terminals @ and @ and across terminals @ and 0.
Standard value: 50 - 60 R
(3) Check that when the battery voltage is applied across terminals @ and @ and across terminals @ and 0, the operating sounds of the solenoid valves are heard. (4) If the solenoid valves are defective, replace the vacuum pump assembly.
07AOO51
Inspection of Motor
(1) Disconnect the connector of the vacuum pump assembly. (2) Check that when the battery voltage is applied across terminals @ and @, the motor operates.
07A005t
ACTUATOR INSPECTION
(1) Remove the actuator. (2) Using a vacuum pump, apply a negative pressure to the actuator to check that the holder portion moves more than 35 mm (1.4 in.). Retain the negative pressure in that state to check that the holder portion does not change its position. (3) After the actuator has been mounted, check and adjust the cruise control cable. (Refer to P.13-178.)
07A005i
TSB Revision
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM - Cruise Control System
13-185
M13TD. -
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION L;
5Nm 4 ft.lbs.
h : P 17
18 16
5Nm 4 ft.lbs. 7
Post-installation Operation 1 l Cruise Control Cables --Adillstmcwt -->----.,- 1 j (Refer to P.13-178.)
, Ld
Removal steps of actuator 1. Link protector 2. Connection of accelerator cable and link assembly 3. Connection of cruise control cable and link assembly 4. Connection of throttle cable and link assembly 5. Vacuum pump connector l * 6. Connection of vacuum hose and vacuum pump 7. Link assembly and vacuum pump 8. Vacuum pump 9. Pump bracket IO. Link assembly 11. Link bracket 12. Connecti0.n of accelerator cable and accelerator pedal 13. Accelerator cable 14. Connection of throttle cable and throttle body 15. Throttle cable 16. Actuator and actuator bracket 17. Connection of cruise control cable and actuator 18. Actuator 19. Actuator bracket 1 TSB Revision
07FOO31
13486
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM - Cruise Control System
1.6 - 2.2 ft.lbs.
Removal steps of control switches l * 20. Air bag module 21. Air bag module bracket 22. Cruise control switch 23. Switch garnish 24. Main switch
07FOO27
Removal steps of control unit 25. Scuff plate (R.H.) 26. Cowl side trim (R.H.) 27. Cruise control unit Removal steps of sensors and switches 28. Throttle position sensor 29. Accelerator pedal switch 30. Stop light switch 31. Clutch switch <M/T> 4* 32. Vehicle speed sensor <Non turbo> (Refer to GROUP 54 - Meters and Gauges.) 4* 33. Vehicle speed sensor <Turbo> (Refer to GROUP 54 - Meters and Gauges.) 34. Inhibitor switch <A/T>
07FOO28
28
68FOO12
07FOO20
TSB Revision
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM - Cruise Control Svstem SERVICE POINT OF REMOVAL

20. REMOVAL OF AIR BAG MODULE
13-187
Ml3lDBG
(1) Remove the negative terminal of the battery and wait for more than 30 seconds.
Caution The capacitor in the SRS diagnosis unit retains enough voltage to deploy the air bag for a given period even after disconnection of the battery. If an operation is performed during that given period, unintended deployment of the air bag could result and cause serious injury.
(2) Remove the air bag module. To remove the clock spring connector (squib connector) from the air bag module, force the lock outward and pry it with a plain screwdriver as shown at left so that no undue force will be exerted on the connector when it is removed. (3) The removed air bag module should be stored in a clean, dry, flat place with the pad side up.
I I
INSPECTION
l l l
MlJTDCF
Check the inner and outer cable for damage. Check the cable for smooth movement. Check the link protector for damage.
~ I
INSPECTION OF INDIVIDUAL PARTS

Refer to Service Adjustment Procedures - Individual Parts inspection (P.l3-181).
Vacuum hose
M13TDDF
6. CONNECTION OF VACUUM HOSE TO VACUUM PUMP

Route the vacuum hose over the throttle cable and connect the hose to the vacuum pump so as to prevent the slackened hose from interfering with other parts.
~
TSB Revision
COOLING
CONTENTS
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE UNIT, ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR AND ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _.__ 15 RADIATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SERVICE ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES . . . . . . . .
Cap Pressure Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._....... Engine Coolant Concentration Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Coolant Leak Check L, Engine Coolant Replacement ............................ ........................
M14AA..
SPECIFICATIONS
Lubricant
. . . . . . . . . . . . .._.................................
. ..___....___._...___.__............
2 2 2 3 2 11 3
General Specifications
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._.................._........ ..........................
Sealant and Adhesive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._...........
8 7
7 7 7 7
Service Specifications
THERMOSTAT
. . . ..__......................_.._................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _. .
TROUBLESHOOTING
Overheat
No Rise in Temperature
WATER PUMP, WATER PIPE AND WATER HOSE . . . . _......_........_ _.._ .._..... . . . . . . . . . . . ._. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
14-2 SPECIFICATIONS
Items Cooling method Radiator Type Radiator fan motor Type Water pump Type Thermostat Type Identification mark
COOLING - SDecifications
MMCA..
Specifications Water-cooled, pressurized, forced circulation with electrical fan Pressurized corrugated fin type Direct current ferrite type Centrifugal impeller type Wax type with jiggle valve 76.5 (Stamped on flange)
Items Standard value Range of coolant antifreeze concentration % Thermostat Valve opening temperature of thermostat C (F) Full-opening temperature of thermostat C (F) kPa (psi) Opening pressure of cap high pressure valve Therm0 sensor (on radiator) operating temperature <For radiator fan> C (F) OFF-t ON C (F) ON -+ OFF <For condenser fan-Vehicles with air conditioner> OFF-ON C (F) C (F) ON + OFF Limit Opening pressure cap high pressure valve kPa (psi) Specifications 30-60 76.5 (170) 90 (I 94) or more 75-105(11-15)
81-89 (178- 192) 77(171)orless 91-99 (196-210.) 87 (189) or less 65 (9.2)

MlQCD- -
LUBRICANT
Item Engine coolant lit. (qts.) Specified lubricant High quality ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant Quantity 8.0 (8.5).
TSB Revision
COOLING - Specifications / Troubleshooting
14-3
MMCE-
/ / id
SEALANT AND ADHESIVE

Items Engine coolant temperature gauge unit Engine coolant temperature sensor (Engine control) Engine coolant temperature sensor (Air conditioner) 3M Nut Locking Part No. 4171 Specified sealants and adhesive
TROUBLESHOOTING
Symptom Overheat Probable cause Insufficient engine coolant Too high an anti-freeze concentration Inoperative electric cooling fan Faulty thermosensor Faulty electrical motor Faulty radiator fan relay Damaged or blocked (insufficiently ventilated) radiator fins Water leaks Damaged radiator core joint Corroded or cracked hoses (radiator hose, heater hose, etc.) Faulty cap valve or setting of spring Cracked thermostat housing Loose water pump mounting bolt or leaking gasket Loose bolt or leaking gasket in water outlet fitting Loose bolt or leaking gasket in water inlet fitting Loose thermostat housing bolts or leaking from gasket Faulty automatic transaxle oil cooler operation Blocked or collapsed hose and pipe Loose hose and pipe connection Faulty thermostat operation Faulty water pump operation Water passage clogged with slime or rust deposit or foreign substance No rise in temperature Faulty thermostat Remedy Replenish Correct anti-freeze concentration
MllEAAL
Replace Correct
Replace
Correct or replace I Retorque bolts or replace gasket
Replace Correct Replace Replace Clean Replace
( TSB Revision
14-4
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
COOLING - Troubleshooting
FUSIBL LINK0
IGNITION
,2L-R
RADIATOR FAN ASSEMBLY , RADIATOR { ( FAN MOTOR > r !& w
J
j
0
A
J/B
lx I ti 5
A-04X ,---
1 .: , A-07X
> I
ti
Li
cp
J1 I 6
R
m &
b3
RADIATOR FAN ASSEMBLY
L!a ml T
X35-AC-NWOl-NY
TSB Revision
COOLING - Troubleshootina
14-5
@ 2L-R
FUSIBLE LINK@
AIR CONDITIONER COMPRESSOR LOCK CONTROLLER
RADIATOR FAN MOTOR RELAYCLO)
:--II II II II 1 nI I 1 6 III II II II II II ii II !I c 1 I--
_------ __._ -_--
L-
i L
@
G-B
A-36
A-45 @!A
TSB Revision
14-6
COOLING - Troubleshooting
l
1. Neither the radiator fan nor condenser fan rotate at all.

l
Check fusible link No. 5. Check dedicated fuse No. 8.
2. Only the condenser fan does not operate.

l
3. The radiator fan and condenser fan do not operate in the low speed mode, but operate otherwise.
(1) The A/C compressor magnet clutch does not enter the ON state. l Check whether the output of the auto compressor control unit is available. NOTE For troubleshooting of the air conditioner control unit, refer to GROUP 55. (2) The A/C compressor magnet clutch enters the ON state. l Check the resistor.
Check the radiator fan motor relay (LO) and condenser fan motor relay (LO). l Check the therm0 sensor (for radiator fan). (3) The radiator fan does not rotate when the ail conditioner switch is turned ON. l Check the radiator fan motor control relay.
4. The radiator fan and condenser fan do not operate in the high speed mode, but operate otherwise.
l l
Check the therm0 sensor (for condenser fan). Check the radiator fan motor relay (HI) and condenser fan motor relay (HI).
Fan Operating Mode

Switch conditions Therm0 sensor Air conditioner switch For radiator fan ON at 85 k 4C (185 f 7F) or more OFF at 77C (171F) or less
I
F a n revolving operation condition Engine coolant temperature switch (for air conditioner cut-off) OFF at 115 + 3C (239 2 5F) or over, ON at 108C (226F) or less
/ I
Condenser fan motor Radiator fan motor Condenser fan motor operates In HIGH only when it receives input from condenser fan motor relay (HI) and U-0). OFF OFF LOW LOW LOW HIGH LOW
For condenser fan ON at 95 t 4C (203 + 7F) or more OFF at 87C (189F) or less OFF OFF
OFF
OFF LOW HIGH LOW ON LOW HIGH
OFF I ON
ON OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF
HIGH
TSB Revision
COOLING - Service Adiustment Procedures.
14-7

ENGINE COOLANT LEAK CHECK
Ml4FAAF
1. Loosen cap. 2. Confirm that the engine coolant level is up to the filler neck. 3. Install an adapter to the water outlet fitting and apply 160 kPa (23 psi) pressure. Hold pressure for two minutes, while checking for leakage from the radiator, hose or connections.
Caution Be sure to completely clean away any moisture from the places checked. When the tester is removed, be careful not to spill any engine coolant from it. Be careful, when installing and removing the tester and when testing, not to deform the water outlet fitting.
4. If there is leakage, repair or replace the appropriate part.
CAP PRESSURE TEST
M14FBAH
1. Use a special tool to attach the cap to the tester. 2. Increase the pressure until the indicator of the gauge stops moving.
Limit: 65 kPa (9.2 psi) Standard value: 75 - 105 kPa (11 - 15 psi)
3: Replace the cap if the reading does not remain at or above the limit. NOTE Be sure that the cap is clean before testing, since rust or other foreign material on the cap seal will cause an improper indication.
ENGINE COOLANT REPLACEMENT

Refer to GROUP 00 - Maintenance Service.
M14FCAG
ENGINE COOLANT CONCENTRATION TEST

M14FDAL
Refer to GROUP 00 - Selection of Coolant.
1 TSB Revision
14-8 RADIATOR
COOLING - Radiator
M14QA..
Removal steps of radiator

1. Drain plug 2. Cap 3. Overflow tube 4. Water level sensor connector 5. Reserve tank 6. Radiator upper hose 7. Radiator lower hose 8. Automatic transaxle oil cooler hoses <Vehicles with A/T> 9. Condenser fan motor connector <Vehicles with air conditioner> 10. Condenser fan motor assembly <Vehicles with air conditioner> ** 11. Radiator fan motor connector 12. Connection of therm0 sensor (For radiator fan) 13. Connection of therm0 sensor (For condenser fan) <Vehicles with air conditioner> 14. Radiator fan motor assembly 15. Upper insulator 16. Radiator assembly 17. Lower insulator 18. Therm0 sensor (For radiator fan) 19. Therm0 sensor (For condenser fan) <Vehicles with air conditioner> 20. Fan 21. Radiator fan motor 22. Resistor 23. Shroud
Removal steps of radiator fan motor assembly

1. Drain plug 2. Cap 6. Radiator upper hose 9. Condenser fan motor connector <Vehicles with air conditioner> 10. Condenser fan motor assembly <Vehicles with air conditioner> l * 11. Radiator fan motor connector 12. Connection of therm0 sensor (For radiator fan) 13. Connection of therm0 sensor (For condenser fan) <Vehicles with air conditioner> 14. Radiator fan motor assembly 20. Fan 21. Radiator fan motor 22. Resistor 23. Shroud
TSB Revision
COOLING - Radiator SERVICE POINT OF REMOVAL
14-S
M14QBAK
8. DISCONNECTION OF AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE OIL COOLER HOSES

Use a plug or otherwise cover the hose and nipple part of the radiator so that dust, dirt, foreign materials, etc. do not enter after the hose has been disconnected from the radiator.
INSPECTION
l l l l l l
M14QCAN
Check for foreign material between radiator fins. Check the radiator fins for bent, or damage. Check the radiator for corrosion, damage rust or scale. Check the radiator hoses for cracks, damage or deterioration. Check the reserve tank for damage. Check the automatic transaxle oil cooler hoses for cracking, damage or deterioration.
RADIATOR FAN MOTOR INSPECTION

(1) Check to be sure that the radiator fan rotates when battery voltage is applied between terminals (as shown in the figure). (2) Check to see that abnormal noises are not produced, while motor is turning.
INSPECTION OF RESISTOR
(1) Measure the resistance between connector terminals @ and @ of the radiator fan motor. (2) The resistor is normal if the resistance is within the following range.
Resistance: 0.29 - 0.35 IZ

THERM0 SENSOR INSPECTION
04N0002
(1) Immerse the water temperature switch in hot water as shown. (2) Change the water temperature and check continuity with a circuit tester.. If it is as specified below, the switch is functioning correctly. Item With continuity b;F;;ature of Without continuity (t;,n-r3;rature of For condenser fan 91 - 99C (196 - 210F) 87C (189F) or less For radiator fan 81 - 89C (178 - 192F) 77C (I 71 F) or less
TSB Revision
14-10
COOLING - Radiator
RADIATOR FAN MOTOR RELAY INSPECTION
(1) Remove radiator fan motor relay from the relay box located at the right side in the engine compartment. Ll
(2) Check for continuity between the terminals when the battery power-supply is applied to terminal 0, and terminal @ is grounded.
r--- --I
113
: 2 : EY
i.-.-.. i
0312
When current flows When no current flows
Between terminals 1 - 3 Between terminals 1 - 3 Between terminals 2 - 4
Continuity No continuity Continuity
161908
M14QDAH
11. CONNECTION OF RADIATOR FAN MOTOR CONNECTOR

Ionnector
Connect the radiator fan motor connector to the body harness. Then, insert into the shroud hole and fix securely.
04FOOO8
TSB Revision
COOLING - Thermostat
14-11
MlbGB- -
THERMOSTAT
i

Pre-removal and Post-installation
l
Draining and Supplying of the (Refer to GROUP 00 - Maintenance
Removal steps
+a
1. Air hose A <Turbo> 2. Air intake hose A <Turbo> 3. Air intake hose <Non-Turbo> 4. Connection of radiator lower hose 5. Water inlet fitting 6. Gasket a 7. Thermostat
OlFOO37
INSPECTION
l l l l
M14GDAL
Check that valve closes tightly at room temperature. Check for defects or damage. Check for rust or encrustation on valve. Remove if any. Immerse thermostat in container of water. Stir to raise water temperature and check that thermostat opening valve temperature and the temperature with valve fully open [valve lift-over 10 mm (39 in.)] are at the standard value.
7cooo43l
Standard value: Opening valve temperature Full-open temperature

Fully closed
76.5% (170F) 90C ( 194F)
NOTE Measure valve height when fully closed. Calculate lift by measuring the height when fully open.
04N0004 -
TSB Revision
14-12
COOLING - Thermostat SERVICE POINTS OF INSTALLATION

7. INSTALLATION OF THERMOSTAT
Install the thermostat with its jiggle valve lined up with the , LJ mark on the thermostat housing.
M14GEAI
2. INSTALLATION OF AIR INTAKE HOSE A

Assemble the air intake hose A with its notches (arrowmarked) lined up with the L marks on the air intake hoses B and C. Insert the hoses into the air intake hose A until they are bottomed.
Air intake hose B

05FOO23
TSB Revision
COOLING - Water Pump, Water Pipe and Water Hose
14-13
M14MB-B
WATER PUMP, WATER PIPE AND WATER HOSE

/

l l
Draining and Supplying of the Engine Coolant (Refer to GROUP 00 - Maintenance Service.) Removal and Installation of Power Transistor Unit and Ignition Coil (Refer to GROUP 16 - Engine Electrical) Removal and lnstallatlon of Timing Belt (Refer to GROUP 11 -Timing Belt)
17-20 Nm 12-15Nm 9-11 ft.1bs.q
1
17-20 Nm 12-14ft.lbs.
OlFOO51
Removal steps
1. Water pump 2. Gasket 3. Air hose A <Turbo> 4. Air intake hose A <Turbo> 5. Air intake hose B <Turbo> 6. Air intake hose C <Turbo> 7. Air intake hose <Non-Turbo> 8. Connection of radiator upper hose 9. Connection of water hose <Turbo> IO. Water outlet fitting 11. Gasket 12. Connection of harness 13. Connection of heater hose 14. Connection of water hose A 15. Connection of water hose 16. Connection of water hose <Turbo> 17. Connection of radiator lower hose 18. Connection of water hose <Turbo> 19. Thermostat housing 20. Gasket 21. Her water pipe 22. O-ring
Installation steps
2. Gasket ** 1. Water pump I)+ 22. O-ring l * 21. Inlet water pipe 20. Gasket 19. Thermostat housing 18. Connection of water hose <Turbo> 17. Connection of radiator lower hose 16. Connection of water hose <Turbo> 15. Connection of water hose 14. Connection of water hose A 13. Connection of heater h&e 12. Connection of harness 11. Gasket 10. Water outlet fitting 9. Connection of water hose <Turbo> 8. Connection of radiator upper hose 7. Air intake hose <Non-Turbo> l * 6. Air Intake hose C <Turbo> ** 5. Air intake hose B <Turbo> l * 4. Air intake hose A <Turbo> 3. Air hose A <Turbo>
TSB Revision
COOLING - Water Pump, Water Pipe and Water Hose INSPECTION

WATER PUMP
If any of the following irregularities are observed, replace the LJ water pump as an assembly. (1) Damage or crack on the water pump body (2) Water leakage. With improper sealing, a water leakage mark may be observed around hole @.
MIQMDAOZ

1. INSTALLATION OF WATER PUMP
M14MEAW
(1) Clean both gasket surfaces of water pump body and cylinder block. (2) Install new water pump gasket and water pump assembly and tighten the bolts. (3) Water pump installation bolt size are different and caution must be paid to ensure that they are properly installed.
(.31 x .98)
OlLO188
22. INSTALLATION OF O-RING / 21. INLET WATER PIPE

Replace the O-rings at both ends of the water inlet pipe with new ones and apply water to the outside of O-rings to help smooth insertion of the pipe into the water pump,. thermostat housing.
Caution LJ Care must be taken not to permit engine oil or other greases to adhere to the O-ring.
6COO35
6. INSTALLATION OF AIR INTAKE HOSE C / 5. AIR INTAKE HOSE B / 4. AIR INTAKE HOSE A
Assemble the air intake hose A with its notches (arrowmarked) lined up with the D marks on the air intake hoses B and C. Insert the hoses into the air intake hose A until they are bottomed. Insert the air intake hoses B and C on the turbocharger side until they are bottomed.
Air intake hose B

OSFOO23
TSB Revision
COOLING
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge Unit, Engine Coolant - Temperature Sensor and Engine Coolant Temperature Switch
14-15
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE UNIT, ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR AND ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE L, SWITCH
M140B. -

l
Draining and Supplying of the Engine Coolant (Refer to GROUP 00 - Maintenance Service.)
30 Nm
OlFOO38
Removal steps
l
+ IF*
1. Air hose A <Turbo> 2. Air intake hose A <Turbo> 3. Air intake hose B <Turbo> 4. Connection of radiator upper hose 5. Engine coolant temperature gauge unit 6. Engine coolant temperature sensor (Engine control) 7. Engine coolant temperature switch (Air conditioner)
INSPECTION
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE UNIT
Refer to GROUP 54 - Meters and Gauges.
M140DAM
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR (Engine control)

Refer to GROUP 13 - MPI System Inspection.
TSB Revision
14-16
COOLING
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge Unit, Engine Coolant - Temperature Sensor and Engine Coolant Temperature Switch
I
I
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SWITCH (Air condition4

(1) Immerse the engine coolant temperature switch in oil and then heat (by using a gas stove flame or similar method) so L.2~ as to increase the oil temperature. (2) Check to be sure that the engine coolant temperature switch is switched OFF when the oil temperature reaches the standard value.
Standard value: 112 - 118C (234 - 244F) Caution The oil used above should be engine oil and should be stirred well while being heated; do not heat more than necessary.
M140EAz
3. INSTALLATION OF AIR INTAKE HOSE B / 2. AIR INTAKE HOSE A

Assemble the air intake hose A with its notches (arrowmarked) lined up with the n marks on the air intake hoses . B and L. d Insert the hoses Into the air intake hose A until they are bottomed. Insert the air intake hose B on the turbocharger side until they are bottomed.
Air Intake hose B

05FOO2:
TSB Revision
15-I
I k..
INTAKE AND ~ EXHAUST =

CONTENTS
ACTIVE EXHAUST SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AIR CLEANER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AIR INTAKE PLENUM <Non Turbo> AIR INTAKE PLENUM <Turbo> 33 9
ME.AA-
8 6
Supercharging Pressure Relief Solenoid Valve Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._........ Turbocharger Supercharging Pressure Inspection . . . . . . . . . . .._................................._.___......... Variable Induction Control System Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ._. . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . 13 14 27 28 30 31 16
....................
EXHAUST MANIFOLD <Non Turbo> . . . .._.._. EXHAUST MANIFOLD <Turbo> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _
SPECIAL TOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _____.. SPECIFICATIONS ................................................

.................................... ....................................
EXHAUST PIPE, MAIN MUFFLER AND CATALYTIC CONVERTER <Non Turbo>
..
Service Specifications
EXHAUST PIPE, MAIN MUFFLER AND CATALYTIC CONVERTER <Turbo> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INTAKE MANIFOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INTERCOOLER
TROUBLESHOOTING
Abnormal Noise
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _._. _. .
Exhaust Gas Leakage
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 6 8 8 7
TROUBLESHOOTING (Active Exhaust System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ________.. . TURBOCHARGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TURBOCHARGER (FRONT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TURBOCHARGER (REAR)
4 24 18
SERVICE ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES . . . . . . . .

Air Bypass Valve Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._.. Intake Manifold Vacuum Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Supercharging Pressure Control System Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
15-2
INTAKE AND EXHAUST - Specifications / Special Tool
SPECIFICATIONS
Items Air cleaner Element Exhaust system Front exhaust pipe Muffler Coupling Suspension system Turbocharger We identification No. Supercharging pressure control Intercooler Type Specifications Unwoven cloth type Dual type Expansion resonance type Flat coupling, insertion type Rubber hangers Exhaust gas turbine type TD04-09BS-6 Waste gate actuator and solenoid valve Air cooled type
MlSCA-
Items Intake and exhaust manifolds Distortion oJcnylirrdjer head contacting surface Supercharging pressure solenoid valve terminal resistance [at 20C (68F)l Q Turbocharger Supercharging pressure kPa (psi) Waste gate valve opening pressure kPa (psi) Standard Less than 0.15 (.0059) 36-44 Limit 0.2 f.008)
MVXB-.
iJ
Approx. 20 - 60 (2.9 - 8.7) Approx. 48 (6.8)
SPECIAL TOOL
Tool Number MD998770 Name Oxygen sensor wrench Use Removal/Installation of oxygen sensor <Turbo>
MlSDA- -
TSB Revision
INTAKE AND EXHAUST - Troubleshooting
15-3
MlSEAAD
TROUBLESHOOTING
Symptom Exhaust gas leakage Probable cause Loose joints Broken pipe or muffler Abnormal noise Broken separator in muffler Broken rubber hangers Interference of pipe or muffler with vehicle body Broken pipe or muffler Remedy Retighten Repair or replace Replace Correct Repair or replace
TSB Revision
15-4
INTAKE AND EXHAUST -
Troubleshooting (Active Exhaust System)
TROUBLESHOOTING (ACTIVE EXHAUST SYSTEM)

TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE
MlSEBAA
(1) Make sure that the valve operating cable is not dislocated. (2) Make sure that the connectors of each component are positively connected and that no fuse has blown. (3) Have an overall understanding of the substance and procedure of checking by reference to the Troubleshooting Quick-Reference Table and perform check in the proper sequence. (4) Check each component with its connectors disconnected.
TROUBLESHOOTING QUICK-REFERENCE TABLE

If no abnormality is found in all parts by the check performed in the following sequence, the problem is probably caused by faulty active exhaust control unit and therefore the active exhaust control unit is replaced.
Se-
luence 1 2
Part to be checked Valve Active exhaust switch Power window relay
Checking procedure Normal Operate valve manually. Operates freely.
Judgement Abnormal Does not operate.
Probable cause
Remedy
Valve sticking Faulty switch
Replace main muffler. Replace switch.
Refer to P.15-34.
Check continuity between terminals @and @of relay. With battery voltage applied between terminals @and @ of relay, check continuity between terminals @ and @ of relay.
Continuity present
No continuity
Faulty power window relay
Replace power window relay.
Actuator assembly
Check contrnuity between terminals in SPORT mode.
NO continuity present between terminals @and 0.
Continuity present between terminals @and 0. No continuity present between terminals @and 0. between terminals @and @ Continuity present between terminals @and 0. Motor does not operate. Motor does not turn.
NO continuity
Continuity present between terminals @and 0. Check continuity between terminals while idling in TOUR mode. Continuity present between terminals @and 0.
NO continuity present between terminals @and 0.
present
Faulty actuator assembly
Replace actuator assembly.
Apply battery voltage between terminals @and 0.
Motor operates. Motor turns in reverse direction when polarity is reversed. Actuator operates and valve operates as well.
Cable
Operate active exhaust switch (while idling)
Actuator operates, but valve does not work.
Broken or Replace or adjust maladjusted cable cable
TSB Revision
INTAKE AND EXHAUST ACTIVE EXHAUST SYSTEM CIRCUIT CHECK
Troubleshooting (Active Exhaust.System)
15-5
5 = i C-82 @g 0 J/S 1% -i 6 c-71 3 1 I
ACTlYE FXoQBIlBZ "NIT
+
RHEOSTAT
m 1
ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY
F-29 &$j
::
Checking Active Exhaust Control Unit
Terminal No. 1 Signal SPORT MODE signal SPORT MODE TOUR MODE SPORT MODE (Not lesithan 5V) Engine control unit output signal TOUR MODE, engine speed of not less than 3,500 rpm TOUR MODE, idle SPORT MODE Control unit ground Control unit ground At all times At all trmes TOUR MODE (Not lesk?than 5V) Intermediate position detection signal At all times Not less than 5V Battery voltage ov Battery voltage ov Battery voltage Status Terminal voltage Not less than IOV Not less than IOV
I-
T TOUR MODE signal

Full open posrtion detection srgnal
I
I
9
Full close position detection signal
TSB Revision
15-6
INTAKE AND EXHAUST - Service Adjustment Procedures

MlSGlAA
VARIABLE INDUCTION CONTROL SYSTEM IN- d SPECTION (Non Turbo)

SYSTEM INSPECTION
(1) Warm up the engine. (2) Connect the tachometer. (Refer to GROUP 11 - Engine Adjustment.) (3) Make sure that when the engine speed is increased from the idle speed to 5,000 rpm, the induction control valve shaft turns.
VARIABLE INDUCTION CONTROL SERVO INSPECTION

(1) Disconnect the variable induction control servo connectors. (2) Teck the vanable induction control servo coil for continuiVariable rnductior control servo connectors 6FU1277
Standard value
Measured terminal Between terminals @ and @]
Continuity Present 15 - 35 0: 2 0 C (68F)I
Open
Close
(3) Make sure that when DC 6V is applied to terminals @ and @ of the variable induction control servo connector, the induction control valve shaft turns smoothly.
Caution Be sure to apply a voltage of not higher than DC 6V to the variable induction control servo connector terminals since application of high voltage may lock the servo gears.
71 NO105
(4) If deviation from the standard value.occurs or the variable induction control valve shaft does not turn smoothly, replace the air intake plenum assembly.
TURBOCHARGER SUPERCHARGING PRESSURE INSPECTION (Turbo) MlSGAAC

Caution Perform running inspection with two passengers in the vehicle and where full throttle acceleration can be safely made. The pressure gauge reading is taken by a front seat passenger.
,k
,i
TSB Revision
INTAKE AND EXHAUST - Service Adiustment Procedures
15-7
(1) Disconnect the hose (black) from the waste gate solenoid valve, and connect the pressure gauge to the hose. Plug the nipple of the solenoid valve from which the hose (black) has been disconnected. (2) Drive the vehicle with full throttle and accelerate the engine to a speed of more than 3,500 rpm at 2nd gear. Measure the supercharging pressure when the pointer is stabilized.
Standard value: 20 - 60 kPa (2.9 - 8.7 psi) Caution If the supercharging pressure deviates from the standard value, check the following items for possible causes. When pressure is high: Waste gate actuator malfunction When pressure is low: Waste gate actuator malfunction Supercharging pressure leaks Faulty turbocharger
SUPERCHARGING PRESSURE CONTROL SYSTEM INSPECTION (Turbo) MlSGFAB

(1) After the self-diagnosis code of MPI system is completely read, turn off the ignition switch. (2) Disconnect the hose (black) from the waste gate solenoid valve and connect a three-way joint between the hose and the solenoid. (3) Conncet a hand vacuum pump to the three-way joint. (4) Disconnect the hose (with its end painted red) from the wastegate actuator control boost nipple and plug the nipple. (5) Disconnect the battery negative cable from the battery terminal for 10 seconds or more and connect it again. (6) Applying a negative pressure with the hand vacuum pump, check tightness both when the hose end (with its end painted red) is closed and when it is open. Engine state stop (Ignition switch: Hose (with its end painted red) Opened Closed by finger Closed by finger Normal state Negative pressure leaks. Negative pressure is maintained. Negative pressure leaks.
ON)
Idling
NOTE If this check indicates an abnormal condition, the waste gate actuator, waste gate solenoid valve or hose is broken.
1 TSB Revision
INTAKE AND EXHAUST - Service Adiustment Procedures SUPERCHARGING PRESSURE RELIEF SOLENOID VALVE INSPECTION (Turbo)
OPERATION INSPECTION
(1) Connect a hand vacuum pump to the solenoid valve nipple @ (see the illustration to the left). (2) Using a jumper wire, connect between the solenoid valve terminal and battery terminal. (3) Connecting and disconnecting the jumper wire at the battery negative terminal to apply a negative pressure, check tightness. Jumper wire @I nipple condition Open Connected Close Disconnected Open Negative pressure is held. Negative pressure is held. Normal condition Negative pressure leaks.
COIL RESISTANCE INSPECTION

Measure resistance between solenoid valve terminals
Standard value: 36 - 44 0 [at 20C (68F)I
AIR BYPASS VALVE INSPECTION (Turbo)
MlSGHAB
(1) Remove the air bypass valve. (2) Connect the hand vacuum pump to the nipple of the air bypass valve. (3) Apply a negative pressure of approx. 400 mmHg (16 in.Hg), and check operation of the valve. Also check that air tightness is maintained. Negative pressure About 400 mmHg (16 in.Hg) Valve operation It starts opening
INTAKE MANIFOLD VACUUM INSPECTION
MISGCAC
Refer to GROUP 11 - Service Adjustment Procedures.
TSB Revision
INTAKE AND EXHAUST - Air Cleaner
15-9
AIR CLEANER i
MlIFA- -
12 I
<Non T u r b o >
< T u r b o > 15
Hose clamp
Removal steps of air cleaner
Removal steps of air intake hose <Turbo>
1. Connection of air flow sensor connector 2. :;; cleaner cover and air flow sensor assem3. Air cleaner element 4. Air cleaner body 5. Air duct 6. Insulator 7. Collar 8. Air cleaner cover 9. Air flow sensor gasket IO. Air flow sensor assembly
Removal steps of air intake hose
/ i
<Non-Turbo>
14. Connection of boost hose 15. Air hose A 16. Breather hose 17. Connection of vacuum hose l * 18. Air intake hose A, air by-pass valve and air by-pass hose 19. Connection of purge hose l + 20. Atr intake hose B 21. Connection of boost hose I)+ 22. Air intake hose C 23. Air by-pass hose 24. Air by-pass valve 25. Air intake hose A
11. Breather hose 12. Air intake hose 13. Resonator

TSB Revision
15-10
INTAKE AND EXHAUST - Air Cleaner INSPECTION

l l l
M15FCAH
Check the air cleaner body, cover or packing for deforma, tion, corrosion or damage. 4 Check the air duct for damage. Check the air cleaner element for clogging, contamination or damage. If element is slightly clogged, remove dust by blowing air from inside of element.
AIR-FLOW SENSOR CHECK

For inspection of air-flow sensor, refer to GROUP 13 -Air-Flow Sensor Check.
&$1 Air intake hose C
Ml5FDAB
22. INSTALLATION OF AIR INTAKE HOSE C / 20. AIR INTAKE HOSE B / 18. AIR INTAKE HOSE A, AIR BY-PASS VALVE AND AIR BY-PASS HOSE
Air intake hose A Air intake hose B
Engaging the notch with the n mark at points indicated by the arrows, insert air intake hoses B and C until seated. $d Insert the turbocharger end of air intake hoses B and C completely.
05FOO2:
TSB Revision
INTAKE AND EXHAUST - Intercooler
INTERCOOLER /
MlSTA- -
18 /
?1
I OSPDOU
24Nm / 17 ft.lbs.
IO-13Nm 7-9ftJbs.
7- .9 ft.lbs.
ANm . .-... 2.9 ft.lbs.
/ Turbocharger
b-ring
05FOOO3
lo-13 Nm 7 - 9 ft.lbs.
OSFOC.02
Removal steps of intercooler right
** l *
l
I. Air hose C 2. Air hose D 3. Intercooler duct (RH) 4. Intercooler right
(When equipped with intercooler left)

l
Removal steps of intercooler left
Installation of Front Bumper (Refer to GROUP 51 - Front Bumper.)
5. Air hoseG 6. Air pipe A 7. Heat protector F I)* 8. Air hose B l * 9. Air hose E 10. Air pipe B II. Air pope C ** 12. Air hose F *I) 13. Engine oil cooler 14. Intercooler duct (LH) l * 15. Intercooler left
1 TSB Revision
Removal steps of air intake hose
16. Connection of boost hose 17. Air hoseA 18. Connection of air flow sensor connector I)* 19. Air intake hose A ** 20. Air intake hose B *a 21. Air intake hose C 22. Air cleaner 23. Air by-pass hose 24. Air by-pass valve
15-12
INTAKE AND EXHAUST - lntercooier SERVICE POINT OF REMOVAL

13. REMOVAL OF ENGINE OIL COOLER
Disconnect the hose from the engine oil cooler and remove IL) the engine oil cooler only.
MlSTSAC
INSPECTION
l l
MISTCAB
Check the intercooler fins for bending, damage, or foreign matter. Check the intercooler hoses for cracking, damage, or wear.
MlSTDAC
21. INSTALLATION OF AIR INTAKE HOSE C / 20. AIR INTAKE HOSE B / 19. AIR INTAKE HOSE A
Engaging the notch with the n mark at points indicated by the arrows, insert air intake hoses B and C until seated. Insert the turbocharger end of air intake hoses B and C completely.
Air Intake hose B
15. INSTALLATION OF INTERCOOLER LEFT / 12. AIR HOSE F / 9. AIR HOSE E / 8. AIR HOSE B / 5. AIR HOSE G
Aligning the marks at the points indicated by the arrows, insert securely into the stepped portion of the pipe or until seated.
Caution Be careful not to allow any foreign matter to get into the hoses, pipes, or the intercooler itself.
4. INSTALLATION OF INTERCOOLER RIGHT / 2. AIR HOSE D / 1. AIR HOSE C

Aligning the marks at the points indicated by arrows, insert securely into the stepped portion of the pipe.
1 ~ LJ~
Air hose
05FOO21
TSB Revision
INTAKE AND EXHAUST - Air Intake Plenum <Non Turbo>
15-13
AIR INTAKE PLENUM <Non Turbo>
L/
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATIQN

I Post-installation ODeration
MlWA-B
Adjustment of Accelerator Cable (Refer to GROUP 13 - Engine Control.)
Removal steps
7-9ft.lbs.
I. Connection air intake hose 2. Connection of accelerator cable _ *I) 3. Throttle body assembly l * 4. Throttle body gasket 5. Connection of brake booster vacuum hose 6. Harness connecters 7. Connection of VIC servo motor 8. EGR pipe 9. EGR valve <Vehicles for 10. EGR valve gasket California> 11. EGR temperature sensor 12. Accelerator cable bracket
8 60Nm 43 ft.lbs.
;6Nm 13 ft.lbs.
05FOO32
13. Connection of air intake plenum stay 14. Air intake plenum installation bolts 15. Air intake plenum installation nuts 16. Air intake plenum 17. Air intake plenum gasket

3. REMOVAL OF THROTTLE BODY ASSEMBLY
M15UBC2
Leaving the water hoses and vacuum hoses in their installed positions, remove from the air intake plenum.
INSPECTION
M15UCAD2
Check the following points; replace the part if a problem is found.
AIR INTAKE PLENUM

Throttle body (1) Check air intake plenum for defect or cracks. Replace if defective or cracked. (2) Check load (negative pressure) of drain port. Clean if required.

4. INSTALLATION OF THROTTLE BODY GASKET
Ml5UDAB2
Install with the gasket protrusion positioned as shown.
Caution If installed in an incorrect direction, idling failure or other problems may occur.
TSB
Revision
15-14
INTAKE AND EXHAUST - Air Intake Plenum <Turbo>

MIBUA-C
AIR INTAKE PLENUM <Turbo>

5Nm
(Refer to GROUP 13 - Engine Control.)

L
18 Nm
/ Turbocharger
O&g
OSFOOOS
18
19 Nm 13 ft.lbs.
05FOO31
Removal steps
I. Connection.air hose A 2. Connection of accelerator cable a* 3. Throttle body assembly l * 4. Throttle body gasket 5. Air pipe A 6. Connection of vacuum hose 7. Connection of brake booster vacuum hose 8. Harness connecter 9. Connection of clutch booster vacuum hose 10. EGR temperature sensor <Vehicles for California>
11. EGR valve 12. EGR valve gasket 13. EGR pipe installation bolts 14. EGR pipe gasket 15. Connection of air intake plenum stay 16. Air intake plenum installation bolts 17. Air intake plenum installation nuts 18. Air intake plenum 19. Air intake plenum gasket

3. REMOVAL OF THROTTLE BODY ASSEMBLY
M15UBAU
Leaving the water hoses and vacuum hoses in their installed positions, remove from the air intake plenum.
TSB Revision
INTAKE AND EXHAUST - Air Intake Plenum <Turbo> INSPECTION

AIR INTAKE PLENUM
15-15
MlSUCAD3
Check the following points; replace the part if a problem is found. (1) Check air intake plenum for defect or cracks. Replace if defective or cracked. (2) Check load (negative pressure) of drain port. Clean if required.
Throttle body Protrusion

4. INSTALLATION OF THROTTLE BODY GASKET
Ml5UoAB3
Install with the gasket protrusion positioned as shown.
Caution If installed in an incorrect direction, idling failure or other problems may occur.
-+
$ik
,5,=,,,,57
TSB Revision
15-16
INTAKE AND EXHAUST - Intake Manifold
INTAKE MANIFOLD
Pre-removal Operation l Release of Residual Pressure from High Pressure Fuel Hose (Refer to GROUP 13-Service Adjustment Procedures.) l Draining of Engine Coolant (Refer to GROUP 00 -Maintenance Service,) l Removal of Air Intake Plenum (Referto P.15-13, 14.) lo-13Nm 8-9ftJbs. \ 5Nm 4 ft.lbs. w2 I
Post-installation Operation l Installation of Air Intake Plenum (Refer to P.1.5-13. 14.) l Filling of Engine Coolant (Refer to GROUP 00 - Maintenance Service.) l Adjustment of Accelerator Cable (Referto GROUP 13-Engine Control.) . Checkina for Fuel Leakage
5 2 :;bs.) <Non turbo> gp,. qgs ~-zt!EJ
OSFOO24
Removal steps I. Connection for high-pressure fuel hose 2. O-ring 3. Connection for fuel return hose 4. Connection for vacuum hoses 5. Connection for injector connector 6. Delivery pipe (with injectors) 7. Insulators 8. Timing belt upper cover I)* 9. Intake manifold mounting nut <Non turbo> I)* 10. Intake manifold mounting nut <Turbo> II. Cone disc spring <Turbo> 12. Intake manifold** 13. Intake manifold gasket
TSB Revision
INTAKE AND EXHAUST - Intake Manifold. INSPECTION

INTAKE MANIFOLD
15-17
MlIMCATZ
Check the following points; replace the part if a problem is found. (1) Check for damage or cracking of any part. (2) Clogging of the negative pressure (vacuum) outlet port, or clogging of the gas passages. (3) Check deflection of installation surface with straight edge and thickness gauge.
Standard value : 0.15 mm (.0059 in.) or less Limit : 0.2 mm (.008 in.)
05LOO84
Protrusion
FRONT A
Protrusion \
MISMDAH
13. INSTALLATION OF INTAKE MANIFOLD GASKET

Install with gasket protrusions in the position illustrated.
\
Protrusion FRONT
Protrusidn OIL0857
10. INSTALLATION OF INTAKE MANIFOLD MOUNTING NUT <Turbo>

Tighten the intake manifold mounting nuts one bank after the other by the following procedure. (1) Tighten the nuts in the front bank to 3 to 5 Nm (2.2 to 3.6 ft.lbs.). (2) Tighten the nuts in the rear bank to 12 to 15 Nm (9 to 11 ft.lbs.). (3) Tighten the nuts in the front bank to 12 to 15 Nm (9 to 11 ft.lbs.). (4) Repeat steps (2) and (3) one more time respectively.
Intake mamfold
7lN0090
APPLY ~~ lubricant
9. INSTALLATION OF INTAKE MANIFOLD MOUNTING NUT <Non Turbo>

Apply lubricant sparingly to the intake manifold mounting nuts.
TSB Revision
15-18
INTAKE AND EXHAUST - Turbocharger (Front)

I MlSLA-A I
TURBOCHARGER (FRONT)
Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation l Removal and Installation of Radiator (Refer to GROUP 14 - Radiator.) l Removal and Installation of Transmission
I
l
Rerr ioval and Installation of Front Exhaust Pipe (Refer to P.15-31.)
-13Nm 9 ft.lbs.
lJl QG!?
1\2
Removal steps 9 - 11 ft.lbs.
40 - 47 ft.lbs.
25
05FOO43
** 1. Air hose C *+ 2. Air intake hose B *+ 3. Air hose D 4. Air hose A l * 5. Air hose B. 6. Air pipe B l + 7. Air hose E
8. Air pipe C
9. Drive belt (Refer to GROUP 11 - Service Adjustment Procedures.) 10. Alternator assembly (Referto GROUP 16Alternator.) 11. Engine oil level gauge guide 12. Heat protector B
1 TSB Revision
13. Water pipe A 14. Water pipe B 15. Connection of oxygen sensor 16. Turbocharger & fitting assembly 17. Gasket 18. Ring l * ** 19. Oxygen sensor 20. Turbocharger stay 21. Exhaust fitting 22. Gasket 23. Oil return pipe l * 24. Turbocharger assembly l * 25. Air conditioner compressor 26. Tension pulley bracket 27. Air conditioner compressor bracket 28. Oil pipe
I LJ
INTAKE AND EXHAUST - Turbocharger (Front) SERVICE POINTS OF REMOVAL

19. REMOVAL OF OXYGEN SENSOR
15-19
M15LBAE
Disconnect the connector of the oxygen sensor, and install the special tool to the oxygen sensor.
25. DISCONNECTION OF AIR CONDITIONER COMPRESSOR

Disconnect air conditioner compressor with hoses from the bracket. NOTE The removed air conditioner compressor should be fastened (by using rope, etc.) in a position that will not interfere with the removal/installation of the turbocharger assembly.
INSPECTION
TURBOCHARGER ASSEMBLY CHECK
l l l l
MlSLCADl
Visually check the turbine wheel and the compressor wheel for cracking or other damage. Check whether the turbine wheel and the compressor wheel can be easily turned by hand. Check for oil leakage from the turbocharger assembly. Check whether or not the waste gate valve remains open. If any problem is found, replace the part after disassembly.
OIL PIPE AND OIL-RETURN PIPE CHECK

Check the oil pipe and oil-return pipe for clogging, bending, or other damage. If there is clogging, clean it.
MllLDAE
24. INSTALLATION OF TURBOCHARGER ASSEMBLY

Clean the alignment surfaces shown in the illustration. Supply clean engine oil through the oil pipe installation hole of the turbocharger assembly.
Caution When cleaning, care must be taken so that a piece of the gasket does not enter the oil passage hole.
05FOO2(
TSB Revision
15-20
INTAKE AND EXHAUST - Turbocharger (Front)

19. INSTALLATION OF OXYGEN SENSOR
Use the special tool to install the oxygen sensor. ;,i I
I-
=x---b
05F004E i
7. INSTALLATION OF AIR HOSE E / 5. AIR HOSE B

Aligning the marks at the points indicated by the arrows, insert securely into the stepped portion of the pipe or until seated.
Caution
Be careful not to allow any foreign matter to get the hoses or pipes.
l
into
Matchmark Hose end paint Pipe end protrusion Matchmark Hose end paint Pipe end protrusion
05F002F
3. INSTALLATION OF AIR HOSE D / 1. AIR HOSE C

Aligning the marks at the points indicated by the arrows, insert securely into the stepped portion of the pipe.
Caution Be careful not to allow any foreign matter to get into LJ the hoses or pipes.
Intercooler right
2. INSTALLATION OF AIR INTAKE HOSE B

Engaging the notches with LL marks at the points indicated by the arrows, insert until seated. Insert the turbocharger end of air intake hose B completely.
Air Intake hose B

05FOO23
[ TSB Revision
INTAKE AND EXHAUST - Turbocharger (Rear)
15-21
MlSLA-B
TURBOCHARGER (REAR) i
Post-installation ODeration
l l
Installation of Front Exhaust Pipe (Referto P.15-31.) Refilling of the Engine Coolant (Refer to GROUP 00 - Maintenance
Adjustment of Accelerator Cable 1 ~~~~o~~ GROUP 13 - Engine

l
0-nng
05FOOO3
6.
7 55-65Nm 5 40 - 47 ft.lbs. b i
18Nm d 13 ft.lbs. 9Nmv 10 //--! 7 ft.lbs. 45 Nm 33 ft.lbs.

l
Removal steps
LIZ-15Nm 9- 11 ft.lbs.
OSFOO41
1. Battery 2. Connection of accelerator cable ** 3, pg,t;eye) AirpipeA Heat protector F Clutch booster vacuum hose Connection of accelerator cable (pedal side) I)+ 8. Air intake hose A O+ 9. Air intake hose C l * I)* 10. Oxygen sensor 11. Heat protector D 12. EGR pipe
TSB Revision
l
* 4. 5. 6. 7.
/ id
13. Eye bolt * 14. Oil pipe 15. EGR valve 16. Water pipe A 17. Water pipe B 18. Exhaust fitting 19. Heat protector E 20. Gasket 21,. Turbocharger & return pipe assembly 22. Oil return pipe l * 23. Turbocharger assembly 24. Gasket 25. Ring 26. Exhaust fitting stay
INTAKE AND EXHAUST - Turbocharger (Rear) SERVICE POINT OF REMOVAL

Disconnect the connector of the oxygen sensor, and install d, the special tool to the oxygen sensor.
M15LBAF
INSPECTION
TURBOCHARGER ASSEMBLY CHECK
M15LCADZ
l l l l
Comrxessor w h e e l \u ~
i ,r
Visually check the turbine wheel and the compressor wheel for cracking or other damage. Check whether the turbine wheel and the compressor wheel can be easily.turned by hand. Check for oil leakage from the turbocharger assembly. Check whether or not the waste gate valve remains open. If any problem is found, replace the part after disassembly.
OlR0182
OIL PIPE AND OIL-RETURN PIPE CHECK

Check the oil pipe and oil-return pipe for clogging, bending, or other damage. If there is clogging, clean it.
MlBLDAF
23. INSTALLATION OF TURBOCHARGER ASSEMBLY

Clean the alignment surfaces shown in the illustration.
Caution When cleaning, care must be taken so that a piece of the gasket does not enter the oil passage hole. 14. INSTALLATION OF OIL PIPE
05FOO19
Supply clean engine oil through the oil pipe installation hole of the turbocharger assembly.

Use the special tool to install the oxygen sensor.
TSB Revision
INTAKE AND EXHAUST - Turbocharger (Rear)
15-23
9. INSTALLATION OF AIR INTAKE HOSE C / 8. AIR INTAKE HOSE A

Engaging the notches with n marks at the points indicated by the arrows insert until seated. Insert the turbocharger end of air intake hose C completely.
Air intake hose A Air intake hose B
4. INSTALLATION OF AIR PIPE A / 3. AIR HOSE A

Hose end paint
Aligning the marks at the points indicated by-the arrows, insert securely into the stepped portion of the pipe.
Caution Be careful not to allow any foreign matter to get into the hoses or pipes..
id
1 TSB Revision
15-24 TURBOCHARGER
INTAKE AND EXHAUST - Turbocharger

AIIlSLE- _

12 Nm
Disassembly steps
I Snap pin 2. Waste gate actuator 3. Coupling I)+ 4. Turbine housing ** I)* 5. Snap ring +I) l * 6. Cartridge assembly l * 7. O-ring 8. Compressor cover
71N0096
SERVICE POINTS OF DISASSEMBLY

5. REMOVAL OF SNAP RING
MISLFAC
Place the compressor cover assembly on the floor with its end surface down and remove the snap ring with pliers.
Caution During removal, hold with a finger the snap ring which can spring out.
61N0053
6. REMOVAL OF CARTRIDGE ASSEMBLY

Remove the cartridge assembly by tapping the compressor cover with a soft hammer.
Caution Some resistance will be experienced in the removal due to the O-ring on the cartridge assembly.
1 TSB Revision
INTAKE AND EXHAUST - Turbocharger INSPECTION

TURBOCHARGER
15-25
MllLGAB
L/
(I) Manually open and close the waste gate valve to make sure it operates freely. (2) Inspect the oil passage in the cartridge for signs of deposits or blockage. (3) Clean the inlet section of the compressor cover with a rag. Inspect it for signs of contact with the compressor turbine. If worn, replace it.
SERVICE POINTS OF REASSEMBLY

7. INSTALLATION OF O-RING
M15LHAC
Coat the inner surface of a new O-ring with a thin film of engine oil, and set it in the groove of the cartridge assembly.
O-ring
Caution Be careful not to damage the O-ring while installing it as oil leakage could result.
3EN23C 3
6. INSTALLATION OF CARTRIDGE ASSEMBLY

(1) Coat the outer circumference of the cartridge assembly O-ring with a thin film of engine oil. (2) Install the cartridge assembly on the compressor cover by aligning the dowel pin.
Caution When installing the cartridge assembly on the compressor cover, be careful not to damage the compressor wheel blades.
062
snap ring Chamfered .
5. INSTALLATION OF SNAP RING

Place the cartridge assembly with the compressor cover faced down and install the snap ring.
Caution Install the snap ring with the tapered side of its outside diameter up.
v cartr~d~om,,ir F,j WI
cover
61 NO070
4. INSTALLATION OF TURBINE HOUSING

Install the compressor cover and cartridge assembly on the turbine housing with the dowel pin in alignment.
Caution 1. Be careful not to damage the blades of the turbine wheel. 2. Be careful to install the turbine housing in the correct direction.
TSB Revision
15-26
INTAKE AND EXHAUST - Turbocharger TEST OF WASTE GATE ACTUATOR OPERATION

MlSLlAC
Using a tester, apply a pressure of approx. 48 kPa (6.8 psi) to Lj the actuator and make sure that the rod moves.
Caution 90 not apply a pressure of more than 61 kPa (8.7 psi) to the actuator. Otherwise, diaphragm may be damaged. / Never attempt to adjust the waste gate valve.
1 TSB Revision
INTAKE AND EXHAUST - Exhaust Manifold <Non Turbo>
15-27
MSNA-8
EXHAUST MANIFOLD <Non Turbo>

i
Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation l Removal and Installation of Front Exhaust Pipe
l
Removal and Installation of Condenser Fan Motor Assembly <Vehicles with Air Conditioner> (Refer to GROUP 14 - Radiator.) 12-15Nm 9 - 11 ft.lbs.
60 Nm ,43 ft.lbs. 45 Nm 33 ft.lbs. 24Nm 17ft.lbs.1 Li \
l-
45 Nm 33 ft.lbs.
33 ftlbs.
05F0033
Removal steps of exhaust manifold (front)
Removal steps of exhaust manifold (rear)
1. Drive belt (Alternator) (Refer to GROUP 11 Service Adjustment procedures) 2. Alternator assembly 3. Oil level gauge guide 4. Heat protector 5. Exhaust manifold (front)
7. Stud
8. Heat protector 9. EGR pipe <Vehicles for California> IO. Exhaust manifold (rear) 11. Gasket
6. Gasket
INSPECTION
hllSNCAU2
Check the following points; replace the part if a problem is found. l Check for damage of cracking of any part.
TSB Revision
15-28
INTAKE AND EXHAUST - Exhaust Manifold <Turbo>

MlINA-C
EXHAUST MANIFOLD <Turbo>

l
12-15Nm 9 - 11 ft.lbs.
Removal and Installation of Turbocharger Assembly (Refer to P.15-18, 21.)
Removal steps of exhaust manifold (front)
I. Heat protector ** 2. Exhaust manifold (front) ** 3. Exhaust manifold stay 4. Gasket

Removal steps of exhaust manifold (rear)
iJ
05FOO25
5. Heat protector *+ 6. Exhaust manifold (rear) 7. Gasket
INSPECTION
Ml5NCAU3
Check the following points; replace the part if a problem is found. l Check for damage of cracking of any part.

Tighten the nuts in the following order.
MlBNDAH
6. INSTALLATION OF EXHAUST MANIFOLD (REAR)
v
Cone disc spring
7lNOll 5
(1) Tighten five nuts @ to 30 Nm (22 ft.lbs.1. (2) Tighten nuts @I to 47 - 53 Nm (34 - 38 ft.lbs.1. (3) Back off nuts @ until torque value of 10 Nm (7 ft.lbs.1 is achieved. (4) Tighten nuts @I to 29 - 31 Nm (21 - 22 ft.lbs.1. NOTE 1. Fit the cone disc spring with the grooved side facing the nut. 2. Install the nut, cone disc spring and washer in the order shown in the illustration.
TSB Revision
INTAKE AND EXHAUST - Exhaust Manifold <Turbo>
15-29
3. INSTALLATION OF EXHAUST MANIFOLD STAY

Exhaust manifold stay
With the exhaust manifold stay resting on the exhaust manifold, fit it along with the exhaust manifold over the studs.
Exhaust manifold
05FOO17
2.
INSTALLATION OF EXHAUST MANIFOLD (FRONT)

Tighten the nuts in the following order. (1) Tighten four nuts @ to 30 Nm (22 ft.lbs.1. (2) Temporarily tighten the turbocharger to the exhaust manifold. (3) Tighten nut @ to 30 Nm (22 ft.lbs.1. (4) Tighten nuts @ and @ to 47 - 53 Nm (34 - 38 ft.lbs.). (5) Back off nuts @ and @ until torque value of 10 Nm (7 ftlbs.) is achieved. (6) Tighten nuts @ and @ to 29 - 31 Nm (21 - 22 ft.lbs.1. N O T E 1. Fit the cone disc spring with the grooved side,facing the nut. 2. Install the nut, cone disc spring and washer in the order shown in the illustration.
Cone disc spring
71NOll;
TSB Revision
15-30 INTAKE AND EXHAUST <Non Turbo>

Exhaust Pipe, Main Muffler and Catalytic Converter <Non Turbo>
EXHAUST PIPE, MAIN MUFFLER AND CATALYTIC CONVERTER

MlLRA-A
1. Main muffler and center exhaust

50 Nm 36 Fbs.
yil / \
I\
2: h2yR i
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17.

13 Nm
!
9 ftlbs. - - - - - - -17 --------/--------
Rubber , , hangers Rubber nanger Main muffler Mouldings Hanger brackets Catalytic converter and center exhaust pipe installation bolts Hanger bracket Protector Rubber hangers Center exhaust pipe Gasket Rubber hangers Hanger bracket Hanger brackets Rear floor heat protector
9fl
m _
9 ftlbs.
13 Nm 9 ft,lbs.
r/-
5Nm 4 ft.lbs.
35hlm 25 ft.lbs.
9 ft.lbs.
\/
18. Catalytic converter and front exhaust pipe installation bolts 19. Catalytic converter 20. Gasket 21. Oxygen sensor connection 22. Self-locking nuts 23. Rubber hanger 24. Front exhaust pipe 25. Gasket 26. Hanger bracket 27. Front floor heat protector
05FOO39

3. 4. REMOVAL OF RUBBER HANGER / 5. MAIN MUFFLER
Support with a transmission jack, etc.
INSPECTION
l l l
MlSRCAM
Check the mufflers and pipes for corrosion or damage. Check the rubber hangers for deterioration or damage. Check for gas leakage from mufflers and pipes.
L.J
wision
INTAKE AND EXHAUST -
Exhaust Pipe, Main Muffler and Catalytic Converter <Turbo>
15-31
MlSRA-S
- EXHAUST PIPE, MAIN MUFFLER AND CATALYTIC CONVERTER <Turbo>

ii REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION 31
36ft.lbs.
220
13 Nm 9 ft.lbs.
----
13 Nm 9 ft.lbs.
/ L
em _ 5ftJbs. /---------6
m -.Ibs.
Removal steps
13 Nm 9 ft.lbs.
1. Main muffler and center exhaust pipe installation bolts 2. Protector l + 3. Connection of cable assembly a* 4. Rubber hangers a* 5. Rubber hangers l * 6. Main muffler 7. Gasket 8. Mouldings 9. Hanger brackets 10. Catalytic converter and center exhaust pipe installation nuts 11. Hanger bracket 12. Rubber hangers
Center exhaust pipe 25. Gaskets Gasket 26. Self-locking nuts Rubber hangers 27. Catalytic converter (Right) Hanger brackets 28. Gasket Hanger bracket 29. Hanger bracket Rear floor heat +* l 41 30. Oxygen sensor connection protector 31. Heat protector D 19. Catalytic converter and front 32. EGR pipe connection exhaust pipe installation bolts 33. Gasket 34. Catalytic converter (Left) 20. Catalytic converter 21. Gasket 35. Heat protector E 22. Self-locking nuts 36. Gasket 37. Front floor heat protector 23. Rubber hanger 24. Front exhaust pipe 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18.
TSB Revision
15-32 INTAKE AND EXHAUST -
Exhaust Pipe, Main Muffler and Catalytic Converter <Turbo>

Support with a transmission jack, etc.
MlBRBAA
4. 5. REMOVAL OF RUBBER HANGER / 6. MAIN MUFFLER

:iJ ~

Disconnect the connector of the oxygen sensor, and install the special tool to the oxygen sensor.
INSPECTION
l l l l
MlSRCAN
Check the mufflers and pipes for corrosion or damage. Check the rubber hangers for deterioration or damage. Check for gas leakage from mufflers and pipes. Check if the main muffler active exhaust system valve can be moved smoothly by hand.
SERVICE POINTS OF-INSTALLATION

Use the special tool to install the oxygen sensor.
MllRDAl
3. INSTALLATION OF CABLE ASSEMBLY

Install with the paint mark facing up and adjust the adjusting nut to obtain the illustrated dimension.
TSB Revision
INTAKE AND EXHAUST - Active Exhaust System
15-33
M15WA- -
ACTIVE EXHAUST SYSTEM

7Nm 5 ft.lbs.
Removal steps
I. Active exhaust system control unit
I)+
2. 3. 4. l + 5. 6.
Connection of cable (Actuator side) Actuator Protector Connection of cable (Muffler side) Cable
Pre-removal and Post-installation l Removal and Installation of Rear Side Trim (LH) (Refer to GROUP 52A-Trims.)

5. INSTALLATION OF CABLE (Muffler Side)
MISWDAA
Install with the paint mark facing up and adjust the adjusting nut to obtain the illustrated dimension.
DSFDO21
2. INSTALLATION OF CABLE (Actuator Side)

Adjusting nuts
After adjusting the cable on the muffler side, adjust the adjusting nuts for an inner cable play of 0 to 1 mm (0 to .04 in.).
05FOO2
TSB
Revision
INTAKE AND EXHAUST - Active Exhaust System INSPECTION

ACTIVE EXHAUST SWITCH
(1) Remove switch garnish B from the knee protector.
MllWCAA
(2) Operate the switch and check the continuity between the terminals.
05FOO5
NOTE O-O indicates that there is continuity between the terminals.
TSB Revision
17-1
EMISSION C O N T R O L .~
CONTENTS
CATALYTIC CONVERTER
Removal and Installation
M17.U.
........................... .:...
14
Inspection ............................................................ 14 ................................ 14
EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SYSTEM . . . . . ..____._.._........__........_____.........................

Air-Fuel Ratio Control (MPI) System . . . . . . . . Components Location .................................... EGR Control Solenoid Valve <California - Non Turbo, Turbo> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EGR System Inspection <California - Non Turbo, Turbo> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EGR Temperature Sensor <California> . . . . . . . . EGR Valve <California - Non Turbo, Turbo> EGR Valve Control Vacuum Check <California - Non Turbo, Turbo> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
14 11 13 12 13 13 12 2 2 2 2
CRANKCASE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Components Location .................................... ............ Crankcase Ventilation System Inspection ._.. Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM ................................................................

Air Conditioner Switch
.................................... 10
Air Flow Sensor, Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor and Intake Air Temperature Sensor ........................................ 10 Canister ............................................................ 10 .................................... .................... ........................ 6 10 9 7 8 ................................ 10 Components Location Fuel Filler Cap Inspection
SPECIFICATIONS
................................................
.................................... ....................................
General Specifications Service Specifications
TROUBLESHOOTING
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ______.. . . . . . .
Overfill Limiter (Two-way Valve) Purge Control Solenoid Valve
VACUUM HOSES ................................................

Inspection ............................................................ Installation ........................................................ Vacuum Hoses Routing ....................................
Purge Control System Inspection <Non Turbo> .................................................... Purge Control System Inspection <Turbo> ............................................................ Purge Control Valve <Turbo> ........................ Purge Port Vacuum Check ................................
9 9
17-2
EMISSION CONTROL - Specifications / Troubleshooting
SPECIFICATIONS
Items Crankcase emission control system Evaporative emission control system Canister Purge control solenoid valve Exhaust emission control system Exhaust gas recirculation system EGR valve EGR temperature sensor <California> EGR control solenoid valve <California - Non Turbo, Turbo> Catalytic converter Location <Non-Turbo> <Turbo> Specifications Closed type with positive crankcase ventilation valve Canister storage type Charcoal type ON/OFF solenoid valve
MlICA-
Vacuum-activated diaphragm type Thermistor type Duty cycle solenoid valve Monolith type Under floor Turbocharger outlet (front bank and rear bank,) and under floor
Items Purge control solenoid valve coil resistance kfl EGR temperature sensor resistance EGR control solenoid valve coil resistance 0 Specifications
36 - 44 [at 20C (68F)I 60 - 83 [at 50C (I 22F)]
Ml7CB-.
12
11 - 14 [at 100C (212F)l 36 - 44 [at 20C (68F)l
d
I
TROUBLESHOOTING
Symptom Engine will not start or hard to start Probable cause Vacuum hose disconnected or damaged The EGR valve is not closed Malfunction of the purge control solenoid valve Rough idle or engine stalls The EGR valve is not closed Vacuum hose disconnected or damaged Malfunction of the positive crankcase ventilation valve Malfunction of the purge control system Engine hesitates or 3oor acceleration Zxcessive oil :onsumptron Ioor fuel mileage Malfunction of the exhaust gas recirculation system Positive crankcase ventilation line clogged Malfunction of the exhaust gas recirculation system
TSB Revision
Remedy Repair or replace Repair or replace Repair or replace Repair or replace Repair or replace Replace Check the system; if there is a problem, check its component parts Check the system; if there is a problem, check its component parts Check positive crankcase ventilation system Check the system; if there is a problem, check its component parts
EMISSION CONTROL - Vacuum Hoses
17-3
M17JA- -
VACUUM 1-10sEs
l
VACUUM HOSES ROUTING
L// <Federal - Non Turbo>
Fuel pressure regulator L: Light blue R: Red B: Black
Vehicle front
7EM0131
id
<California - Non Turbo>
cud valve /
r-c,
Canister
I Li
G: Green Y: Yellow L: Light blue R: Red B: Black
Fuel pressure regulator
v Vehicle front
7EM0132
TSB
Revision
17-4
<Turbo>
EMISSION CONTROL - Vacuum Hoses
Fuel pressure control solenoid valve
Waste gate control solenoid valve / aste gate actuator
\,i
Purge control solenoid valve
Bypass valve
G: Green Y: Yellow L: Light blue R: Red B: Black W:White
/
Purge control valve
Fuel pressure regulator Waste gate actuator
TLrbocharger
7EM0133
INSPECTION
M17JCAF
(1) Referring to the VACUUM HOSES ROUTING, confirm that the vacuum hoses are properly connected. (2) Check the hoses for irregularities (disconnection, looseness, etc.) and confirm that there is no breakage or damage.
INSTALLATION
M17JDAF
(1) When connecting a hose, firmly press it onto the nipple.
(2) Referring to the VACUUM HOSES ROUTING, connect the hoses correctly.
TSB Revision
EMISSION CONTROL - Crankcase Emission Control System
17-5
M17KA--
CRANKCASE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

COMPONENTS LOCATION
ventilation valve
\
7EM0134 LYJ
i{ ------r
J I r---l
7FU1002
Name Positive crankcase ventilation valve
Symbol A
CRANKCASE VENTILATION SYSTEM INSPECTION M171ABG

(1) After disconnecting the ventilation hose from the positive crankcase ventilation valve, disconnect the positive crankcase ventilation valve from the rocker cover, and reconnect the positive crankcase ventilation valve to the ventilation hose. (2) Idle engine, put finger on the opening end of the positive crankcase ventilation valve, and check that the negative pressure of the intake manifold is felt with finger. NOTE At this time, the plunger in the positive crankcase ventilation valve moves back and forth. (3) If negative pressure is not felt, clean or replace the positive crankcase ventilation valve.
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION VALVE

Ml7lACC
INSPECTION
(1) Remove the positive crankcase ventilation valve. (2) Insert a thin stick into the positive crankcase ventilation valve from the threaded side to check that the plunger moves. (3) If the plunger does not move, the positive crankcase ventilation valve is clogged. Clean it or replace.
INSTALLATION
Install the positive crankcase ventilation valve and tighten to specified torque.
Specified tightening torque: 10 Nm (7.2 ft.lbs.1

TSB Revision
17-6
EMISSION CONTROL - Evaporative Emission Control System

M17LA- -
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

COMPONENTS LOCATION
Ld i
\ \-
TUW -\pJJ
7FIIl
Name Canister Purge control solenoid valve 1 Purge control valve <Turbo> I
Symbol B A c I
LI
I TSB
Revision
EMISSION CONTROL - Evaporative Emission Control System PURGE CONTROL SYSTEM INSPECTION <Non Turbo>
17-7
M17lBBP
Engine control unit
7EM0161
(1) Disconnect the vacuum hose (red stripes) from the throttle body,and connect it to a hand vacuum pump. (2) Plug the nipple from which the vacuum hose is disconnected. (3) Under the engine conditions shown below, check by applying vacuum from a hand vacuum pump.
When engine is cold - engine coolant temperature: 60C (140F) or less

I- - - - I \
7EM0140t
When engine is hot - engine coolant temperature: 70C (158F) or higher

Engine operating condttion ldllng Applying vacuum 375 mmHg (14.8 In.Hg) Result Vacuum is maintalned I
after staiting engine
NOTE The vacuum will leak contenuously if the altitude is 2,200 m (7.200 ft.) or higher, or the intake air temperature is 50C (I 22F) or higher.
TSB Revision
17-8

M17IBBQ
PURGE CONTROL SYSTEM INSPECTION <Turbo>

Canister Purge control valve \
PI IrnQ rnntrnl I.1 I
kXffo~~~~r~~ I I-J
relay
Barometric pressure sensor Intake air temperature sensor
1 I I
Engine coolant temperature sensor I Air flow sensor
Engine control unit
6EM0215
(1) Disconnect the purge air hose from the air intake hose, and plug the air intake hose. Then, connect the hand vacuum pump to the purge air hose. (2) Under the engine conditions shown below, check by applying vacuum from a hand vacuum pump.
When engine is cold - engine coolant temperature: 60C (140F) or less

Engine operating condition Idling 3,000 rpm Applying vacuum 375 mmHg (14.8 in.Hg) Result Vacuum is maintained
When engine is hot - engine coolant temperature: 70C (158F) or higher

Engine operating condition Idling 3,000 rpm within three minutes after starting engine 3,000 rpm after three minutes have elapsed after starting engine Applying vacuum 375 mmHg (14.8 in.Hg) Try applying vacuum 375 mmHg (14.8 in.Hg) Result Vacuum is marntained Vacuum leaks
Vacuum WIII be maintained momentarily, after which it will leak. NOTE The vacuum WIII leak continuously if the altitude is 2,200 m (7,200 ft.) or hrgher. or the Intake arr temperature is 50C (122F) or higher.
1 TSB Revision

/----Purge h o s e - - - - -
17-9
M17lBKD
PURGE PORT VACUUM CHECK

Check Condition
Engine coolant temperature: 80 - 95C (176 - 205F)
(1) Disconnect the vacuum hose from the throttle body purge hose nipple and connect a hand vacuum pump to the nipple.
(2) Start the engine and check to see that, after raising the engine speed by racing the engine, vacuum remains fairly constant. E z 8 > NOTE If there is no vacuum created, it is possible that the throttle body port may be clogged and require cleaning.
Engine speed (rprd
3FU262
PURGE CONTROL VALVE <Turbo>

INSPECTION
Ml7IBCE
(1) Remove the purge control valve. (2) Connect a hand vacuum pump to the vacuum nipple of the purge control valve. (3) Apply a vacuum of 400 mmHg (15.7 in.Hg.1 and check airtightness. (4) Blow in air lightly from the canister side nipple and check conditions as follows.
Hand vacuum pump vacuum 0 mmHg (0 in.Hg.1 (No vacuum is applied) (8.0 in.Hg.) or more
Normal condition Air does not blow through
I .. 200 mmHg
Air blow through
(5) Connect a hand vacuum pump to the positive pressure nipple of the purge control valve. (6) Apply a vacuum of 400 mmHg (15.7 in.Hg.1 and check airtightness.
PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

INSPECTION
Ml7lBFI
NOTE When disconnecting the vacuum hose, make an identification mark on it so that it can be reconnected to the original position. (I) Disconnect the vacuum hoses (non stripe and red stripe hose) from the solenoid valve. (2) Disconnect the harness connector from solenoid valve. (3) Connect a hand vacuum pump to the nipple to which the red-striped vacuum hose was connected.
TSB
Revision
17-10
(4) Apply a vacuum and check for airtightness when voltage applied directly to the purge control solenoid valve and when the voltage is discontinued. Battery voltage Non-Turbo When applied When discontinued Turbo When applied When discontinued Result Vacuum leaks Vacuum is maintained Vacuum is maintained Vacuum leaks
(5) Measure the resistance between the terminals of the solenoid valve.
6EM13i
AIR FLOW SENSOR, ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR AND INTAKE AIR TEMPERAM17lBGF TURE SENSOR
To inspect these parts, refer to GROUP 13 - MPI System Components.
AIR CONDITIONER SWITCH
Ml7IBHF
To inspect the air conditioner switch, refer to GROUP 55 - Air Conditioner Switch.
M17IBEF
To inspect the overfill limiter (two-way valve), refer to GROUP 13 - Fuel Tank.
CANISTER
M17lBIF
To inspect the canister, refer to GROUP 13 - Fuel Line and Vapor Line.
FUEL FILLER CAP INSPECTION
M17IBJB
Check the gasket of the fuel filler cap, and the filler cap itself, for damage or deformation; replace the cap if necessary.
TSB Revision
EMISSION CONTROL - Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System
17-11 rm?MA- -
EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SYSTEM

COMPONENTS LOCATION
\ \ (%vTT 4/ -
I I ---Id/ - -3Th
1-a II
J-l f--An
Name Symbol 1~ E G R c o n t r o l s o l e n o i d v a l v e <California - Non Turbo, Turbo> EGR temperature sensor <Cahfornla> ~EGR valve <California - Non Turbo, Turbo> :
\
7FUlOl 02
7EM014f
, i
TSB Revision
17-12
EMISSION CONTROL - Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System EGR SYSTEM INSPECTION <California - No, Turbo, Turbo> M171WQ
(1) Disconnect the vacuum hose (green stripe) from the EGR valve, and connect a hand vacuum pump through the three-way terminal. (2) Regarding cold condition [coolant temperature: 20C (68F) or less] and warm condition [coolant temperature: 70C (158F) or more] of the engine, check the following two points:
<Cold condition of engine>
~1
<Warm condition of engine>

Engine operation Race the engine by rapidly press in the accelerator pedal. I Normal state The negative pressure rises to 100 mmHg (3.9 in.Hg) or more.
(3) Disconnect the three-way terminal, and connect the hand vacuum pump to the EGR valve. (4) When a negative pressure of 230 mmHg (9.1 in.Hg.1 is applied during idling, check that the engine stops or idles unstably.
EGR VALVE CONTROL VACUUM CHECK <California - Non Turbo, Turbo> Ml7ICMF
Check Condition
Engine coolant temperature: 80 - 95C (176 - 205F) (1) Disconnect the vacuum hose from the throttle body EGR vacuum nipple and connect a hand vacuum pump to the nipple.
(2) Start the engine and check to see that, after raising the engine speed .by racing the engine, vacuum raises proportionately with the rise in engine speed. NOTE If there is a problem with the change in vacuum, it is possible that the throttle body port may be clogged and require cleaning.
Engine speed
(rpm) 1 FU44l
EMISSION CONTROL - Exhaust Gas Recirculation IEGR) Svstem
17-13
M17lCKJ
EGR VALVE <California - Non Turbo, Turbo>

INSPECTION
(1) Remove the EGR valve and check it for sticking, deposit of carbon, etc. If such condition exists, clean with adequate solvent to ensure tight valve seat contact. (2) Connect a hand vacuum pump to the EGR valve. (3) Apply a vacuum of 500 mmHg (19.8 in.Hg.) and check airtightness. (4) Blow in air from one passage of the EGR to check condition as follows.
GM159
INSTALLATION
Install a new gasket and EGR valve, tighten bolts to specified torque.
Specified tightening torque: 19 .Nm (13 ft.lbs.)
EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR <California>

INSPECTION
M17lCYC
QQQQQQ
(1) Remove the EGR temperature sensor. (2) Place the EGR temperature sensor in water, and then measure the resistance value between terminals 1 and 2 while increasing the waters temperature. Replace the EGR temperature sensor if there is a significant deviation from the standard value.
7FMnn4
INSTALLATION
Install the EGR temperature sensor tighten to specified torque.
Specified tightening torque: 11 Nm (8 ftlbs.)
EGR CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE <California MlllCRE Non Turbo, Turbo>

INSPECTION
NOTE When disconnecting the vacuum hose, make an identification mark on it so that it can be reconnected to the original position. (1) Disconnect the vacuum hose (yellow and green stripe) from the solenoid valve. (2) Disconnect the harness connector. (3) Connect a hand vacuum pump to the nipple to which the green-striped vacuum hose was connected.
1 TSB Revision
17-14 EMISSION CONTROL -
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System / Catalytic Converter
(4) Apply a vacuum and check for air-tightness when voltage applied directly to the EGR control solenoid valve and when the voltage is discontinued. Battery voltage When applied When discontinued
6EM01871
Result Vacuum is maintained Vacuum leaks
(5) Measure the resistance between the terminals of the solenoid valve.
6EM0181
AIR-FUEL RATIO CONTROL (MPI) SYSTEM

l l
M17ICAJ
To inspect the air-fuel ratio control (MPI) system, refer to GROUP1 3 - Service Adjustment Procedures. For detailed information concerning the illumination pattern of the malfunction-indicator light and other aspects of the self-diagnosis function, refer to GROUP 13 -Self-diagnosis.
.J
CATALYTIC CONVERTER
Ml7N& -
Refer to GROUP 15 - Exhaust Pipe, Main Muffler and Catalytic Converter.
INSPECTION
Ml7NCAA
Inspect for damage, cracking or deterioration. Replace if faulty.
Caution 1. Operation of any type, including idling, should be avoided if engine misfiring occurs. Under this condition the exhaust system will operate at abnormally high temperature, which may cause damage to the catalyst or underbody parts of the vehicle. 2. Alteration or deterioration of ignition or fuel system, or any type of operating condition which results in engine misfiring must be corrected to avoid overheating the catalytic converters. 3. Proper maintenance and tune up according to manufacturers specifications should be made to correct the bi conditions as soon as possible.
T S B R e v i s i o n
CLUTCH
CONTENTS
CLUTCH CONTROL . . .._.........._........................_... CLUTCH COVER AND DISC ,............................... CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLUTCH PEDAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLUTCH RELEASE CYLINDER : L/ ........................ 10 19 14 8 15 17 5 7 6 6 5 SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._..._............... Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sealant _..............._............................................... Service Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..._........_.
2 2 3 3 2 3
TROUBLESHOOTING
Clutch Slips Clutch Vibrates Gear Shifting Failure Heavy Clutch Pedal Noisy Clutch
........................................
CLUTCH VACUUM LINE, VACUUM TANK <AWD> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._........... SERVICE ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES . . . . . . . .
Bleeding . . . . .._................................_................_... Check Valve Operation Check <AWD> . . .._... Clutch Booster Operating Inspection <AWD> . . . .._....._................................................ Clutch Pedal Inspection and Adjustment ..____..
CLUTCH - Specifications
SPECIFICATIONS
MZlCA--
I
i
Type
Facing diameter
Single dry disc type
Single dry disc type
Diaphragm spring strap
terns Standard value Clutch pedal height mm (in.) Clutch pedal stroke mm (in.) Amount of clutch pedal return from full pedal stroke position to where operating sound of interlock switch is produced mm (in.) Clutch pedal clevis pin play mm (in.) mm (in.) Clutch pedaLfree play Distance between the clutch pedal and the firewall when the clutch is disengaged mm (in.) Booster push rod to master cylinder piston clearance mm (in.) <AWD> mm (in.) <AWD> Vacuum hose insertion distance Limit Facing rivet sink mm (in.) Diaphragm spring end height difference Specifications 177 - 182 (6.97 - 7.17) 160 (6.29) IO-15(.394-,591) I-3 (.04-.12) 6-13(.24-.51) 55 (2.2) or more 0.21 - 0.46 (.0082 - .0181) 20 - 25 (0.8 - 1 .O)
mm (in.)
0.3 l.012) 0 . 5 (.020)
1 TSB Revision
CLUTCH - Specifications / Troubleshooting LUBRICANTS

Items Contact surface of release bearing and fulcrum of clutch release fork Inner surface of clutch release bearing Inner surface of clutch disc spline Contact portion of release fork to release cylinder push rod Clutch fluid Inner surface of clutch release cylinder and outer circumference of piston and cup Inner surface of clutch master cylinder and outer circumference of piston assembly Specified lubricants MITSUBISHI genuine grease Part No.0101 011 or equivalent
21-3
Conforming to DOT3
SEALANT
Items Thread part fitting Specified sealant 3M ADT Part No. 8660 or equivalent
M21CE. -
TROUBLESHOOTING
Symptom Clutch slips Probable cause Clutch pedal play too small Excessive wear of clutch disc facing Hardened clutch disc facing or oil on facing Clutch release fork not operating smoothly Settled or damaged diaphragm spring Clogged hydraulic system Poorly adjusted clutch booster push rod <AWD> Gear shifting failure Clutch pedal play too large Large clutch disc distortion or runout Worn clutch cover assembly Worn or corroded clutch disc splines Separated clutch disc facing Worn clutch release bearing Damaged pressure plate or flywheel Leaky or clogged hydraulic system or air trapped in hydraulic system Poorly adjusted clutch booster push rod <AWD> Remedy Adjust Replace Replace Repair or replace Replace Repair or replace Adjust Adjust Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Repair or replace Adjust
tvl21EAAM
TSB Revision
21-4
CLUTCH - Troubleshooting
Clutch release fork not operating
efective clutch booster <AWD>
1 TSB Revision
CLUTCH - Service Adjustment Procedures

Clutch pedal height
21-5

CLUTCH PEDAL INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
MZlFAAP
1.
Measure the clutch pedal height (from the face of the pedal pad to the firewall).
Standard value: 177 - 182 mm (6.97 - 7.17 in.)
08YO41
auto-cruise control
If the clutch pedal height is not within the standard value range, adjust as follows: For vehicles without auto-cruise control system, turn and adjust the bolt so that the pedal height is the standard value, and then secure by tightening the lock nut to the specified torque. Vehicles with auto-cruise control system, disconnect the clutch switch connector and turn the switch for standard clutch pedal height. Tighten the lock nut to the specified torque.
Specified torque: 13 Nm (9 ft.lbs.)

<AWD> L-l
NOTE When the pedal height is lower than the standard value, loosen the bolt or clutch switch, and then turn the push rod to make the adjustment. After making the adjustment, tighten the bolt or clutch switch to reach the pedal stopper, and then lock with the lock nut.
\
Clutch pedal stroke
\
\
Cl;tch switch
08F0010
2. Measure the clutch pedal stroke.
Standard value: 160 mm (6.29 in.) or more

If the clutch pedal stroke deviates from the standard value, turn the push rod to adjust the stroke.
Lock nut
08F0054 14110052
3. Return the clutch pedal gradually from its full-stroke position to measure amount of the return made by the pedal u,ntil the interlock switch makes an operating sound.
Standard value: 10 - 15 mm (.394 - .591 in.)

If the amount of pedal return deviates from the standard value, adjust it by loosening the lock nut and turning the interlock switch.
TSB Revision
21-6
CLUTCH - Service Adjustment Procedures

4. Measure pedal play. In the case of AWD vehicles, depress the pedal 2 or 3 times to eliminate booster negative pressure with the engine stopped and then push the pedal with a finger to measure the play. ~
Clutch pedal play (including play of clevis pin) Standard value: 6 - 13 mm (.24 - 51 in.)
LJ
08YO4Z
Distance between the clutch pedal and the firewall when the clutch is disengaged
5.
Measure the clearance to the toe board (or pedal stopper) when the clutch disengages. In the case of AWD vehicles, measure with the engine running.
Clearance to toe board when clutch disengages: Standard value: 55 mm (2.2 in.) or more
6. If the play and/or clearance is out of specification, bleed the hydraulic system or check the master cylinder, release cylinder or clutch proper.
08NOOl
CLUTCH BOOSTER OPERATING INSPECTION <AWD> MZlFCAA

For simple checking of clutch booster operation, carry out the following tests. (I) Run the engine for one or two minutes, and then stop it. (2) Step on the clutch pedal several times. with normal pressure. If the pedal depressed fully the first time but gradually becomes higher when depressed succeeding times the booster is operating properly. If the pedal height remains unchanged, the booster is faulty. (3) With the engine stopped, step on the clutch pedal several times with the same foot pressure to make sure that the pedal height will not change. Then step on the clutch pedal and start the engine. If the pedal moves downward slightly, the booster is in good condition. If there is no change, the booster is faulty. (4) With the engine running, step on the clutch pedal and then stop the engine. Hold the pedal depressed for 30 seconds. If the pedal height does not change, the booster is in good condition. If the pedal rises, the booster is faulty. If the above three tests are okay, the booster performance can be determined as good. If one of the above three tests is not okay at last, the check valve, vacuum hose, or booster will be faulty.
Good
No good
c1
14UOO61
\)
14UOO6: 2
When engine is stopped
When engine is started
14UOO60
CHECK VALVE OPERATION CHECK <AWD>

MZlFOAA
When checking the check valve, keep the check valve fit in the vacuum hose. 1. Remove the vacuum hose.
Caution L The check valve is press-fit inside the vacuum hose and do not remove the check valve from the vacuum hose. TSB Revision
CLUTCH - Service Adiustment Procedures

2. Check the operation of the check valve by using a vacuum w-w. Accept/reject criteria A negative pressure (vacuum) is created and held. A negative pressure (vacuum) is not created. ~
Vacuum pump connection Connection at the clutch booster side @

Intake manifold side Valve
08FOO3
Connection at the intake manifold side @
Caution If the check valve is defective, replace it as an assembly unit together with the vacuum hose.
BLEEDING
MZlFBAG
Whenever the clutch tube, the clutch hose, and/or the clutch master cylinder have been removed, or if the clutch pedal is spongy, bleed the system.
Specified fluid: Conforming to DOT3 Caution Use the specified fluid. Avoid using a mixture of the specified fluid and other fluid.
TSB Revision.
21-8 CLUTCH PEDAL
CLUTCH - Clutch Pedal

MZlPA- .
0@- a D.,I ; Gsd

13 Nm Gw+, 9 ft.lbs.
30 Nm 22 ftlbs.
9 ft.lbs.
8
7
!
I_
a 9ft.lbs.
k
Removal steps
16
08FOO47
1. Connection of brake booster Adjustment of brake pedal (Refer to GROUP 35 - Service Adjustment Procedures.) 2. Connection of clutch master cylinder 3. Clevis pin 4. Clevis pin 5. Return spring 6. Pedal support bracket ;: EIe;i; pin 9. Turn over spring 10. RodB 11. Bush 12. Clutch pedal shaft
Clutch pedal Bushing Spacer Clutch pedal pad Brake pedal shaft Brake pedal Stop light switch Bolt <Vehicles without auto-cruise control system> 21. Clutch switch <Vehicles with auto-cruise control system> 22. Interlock switch
13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20.
1 TSB Revision
I
CLUTCH - Clutch Pedal
<AWD>
08FOO25
Removal steps
23. Brake booster (Refer to GROUP 35 - Brake Booster.) 24. Connection of clutch master cylinder 25. Connection for vacuum hose 26. Pedal support bracket 27. Clevis pin 28. Clevis pin 29. Clevis pin 30. Yoke 31. Clutch pedal shaft 32. Clutch pedal
33. Bushing 34. Spacer $ E$ch pedal pad 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. Lever assembly Bushing Spacer Support bracket Clutch booster Clutch switch Interlock switch
INSPECTION
Ohmmeter
l l l l
MZlPCAL
Check the Check the Check the <FWD> Check the
pedal shaft and bushing for wear. clutch pedal for bend or torsion. turn over spring for damage or deterioration. pedal pad for damage or wear.
INTERLOCK SWITCH INSPECTION

(1) Disconnect the connector. (2) Check to be sure that there is continuity between connector terminals 1 and 2.
08AOO4L -
TSB Revision
a-10
CLUTCH - Clutch Control

MZlJA- -
CLUTCH CONTROL
l
Draining of the Clutch Fluid
3%
2ti
m
I.0050
I
9
<AWD> \Gk
Bleeding of the Clutch Line (Refer to P.21-7.) Adjustment of Clutch Pedal (Refer to P.21-5.)
Clutch master cylinder removal step
1. Brake booster (Refer to GROUP 35 - Brake Booster.) 2. Clevis pin <FWD> 3. Clutch master cylinder l * Adjustment of piston to push rod clearance <AWD> 4. Sealer
3 <AWD>
<MID> 6 15 Nm 11 ft.lbs.
Cluch tube removal steps
15Nm 11 ft.lbs.
1. Brake booster (Refer to GROUP 35 - Brake Booster.) ** 5. Air hose A <AWD> 6. Air cleaner cover, air intake hose cFWD>. l + 7. Air cleaner cover, air intake hose A <AWD> ** 8. Vacuum pipe <AWD> 9. Battery IO. Battery seat, washer tank 11. Steering column assembly (Refer to GROUP 37A- Steering Wheel and Shaft.) a* l * 12. Clutch tube
08FOO44
TSB Revision
21-11
Release cylinder push rod txw51:
15 Nm 11 ftlbs. Clutch release cylinder removal steps
13
08FOO45
5. Air hose A <AWD> 6. Air cleaner cover, air intake hose <FWD> l * 7. Air cleaner cover, air intake hose A <AWD> l * 8. Vacuum pipe cAWD> 9. Battery 10. Battery seat, washer tank +* *+ 13. Clutch release cylinder
Clutch hose removal steps
Clutch tube A, tube B, tube C, damper removal steps
5. Air hose A <AWD> 6. Air cleaner cover, air intake hose <FWD> l * 7. Air cleaner cover, air intake hose A <AWD> ** 8. Vacuum pipe <AWD> 9. Battery 10. Battery seat, washer tank *I) I)* 14. Clutch hose
5. Air hose A <AWD> 6. Air cleaner, air intake hose <FWD> 7. Air cleaner cover, air intake hose A <AWD> l +* 8. Vacuum pipe <AWD> 9. Battery 10. Battery seat, washer tank *I) l I 15. Clutch tube A cFWD> +* l a 16. Clutch tube B cAWD> 17. Clutch tube C <FWD> 18. Cluch damper <FWD>
M2lJBAH
12. REMOVAL OF CLUTCH TUBE (CLUTCH HOSE SIDE)

While holding the clutch hose side nut, loosen the clutch tube flare nut.
13.
REMOVAL OF CLUTCH RELEASE CYLINDER

On AWD-vehicles, use a flat type short box wrench to remove the clutch release cylinder mounting bolts.
08FOO35
TSB Revision
21-12

14. REMOVAL OF CLUTCH HOSE
To disconnect clutch hose from the clutch tube, proceed as follows: (I) Secure the nut on the clutch hose and loosen the flare nut on the clutch tube. (2) Remove the clip from the clutch hose to remove clutch hose from bracket.
OBFOOBf
!J
15.REMOVAL OF CLUTCH TUBE A <FWD> (CLUTCH HOSE SIDE) / 16. CLUTCH TUBE B <AWD> (CLUTCH HOSE SIDE)
While holding the clutch hose side nut, loosen the clutch tube flare nut.
INSPECTION
l
M21 JCAF
Check the clutch hose or tube for cracks or clogging.

M2lHDAO
16. INSTALLATION OF CLUTCH TUBE B <AWD> / 15. CLUTCH TUBE A <FWD> / 14. CLUTCH HOSE / 12. CLUTCH TUBE
Be careful that the clutch hose does not become twisted.
13. INSTALLATION OF CLUTCH RELEASE CYLINDER

On AWD-vehicles, use a flat type short box wrench to tighten the clutch release cylinder mounting bolts.
8. INSTALLATION OF VACUUM PIPE <AWD>

If the vacuum pipe has a stepped part, connect the vacuum hose to the pipe securely, up to the stepped part, as shown in the illustration.
03FOOE
Air Intake hose C
7. INSTALLATION OF AIR CLEANER COVER, AIR INTAKE HOSE A

Align slots indicated by arrows in air intake hose A with n markings on air intake hoses B and C; then, insert hoses B and C all the way into air intake hose A. Insert air intake hoses B and C all the way up to the roots on the turbocharger end.
Air intake hose A - Air intake hose B

05FOO23
Air hose C
Air hose A I
5. INSTALLATION OF AIR HOSE A

Connect the air hoses ensuring that alignment marks are aligned with projections. Insert air hoses B and C into pipe all the way to its step.
05FOOZE
TSB Revision
21-13
. ADJUSTMENT OF CLEARANCE BETWEEN CLUTCH BOOSTER PUSH ROD AND PISTON <AWD>
Adjust the clearance (A) between the clutch booster push rod and piston as follows:
(1) Measure the dimension (B) between the master cylinder end face and piston. NOTE To obtain (B), first take measurement with a square placed on the master cylinder end face. Then, subtract the thickness of the square to arrive at (B).
(2) Obtain the dimension (C) between the clutch booster mounting surface on the master cylinder and the end face.
14UOO65
14U006t
(3) Measure the dimension (D) between the master cylinder mounting surface on. clutch booster and the push rod end. NOTE To obtain (D). first take measurement with a square placed on the clutch booster. Then, subtract the thickness of the square to arrive at (D).
(4) Using the measured values obtained in (1) through (3).
obtain the clearance (A) between the clutch booster push rod and piston.
Standard value: [A (A = B - C - D )] 0.2j - 0.46 mm (.0082 - .0181 in.) [Atmospheric pressure]

[When the clutch booster negative pressure of 66.7 kPa (9.7 psi) is applied, the clearance (A) becomes 0.1 to 0.3 m m (.0039 to .0118 in.).]
14GOO50
(5) If the clearance is not within the standard value range, adjust by changing the push rod length by turning the adjustable end of the push rod.
08FOO27
Caution Improper clearance may cause excessive brake drag.

I
TSB Revision
21-14
CLUTCH i Clutch Master Cylinder

M21NA.
CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER

Disassembly steps <FWD>
Master cvlinder ..--_-. -I------- kit --.-
a* *I) c*
1. Piston stop bolt <FWD> 2. Gasket <FWD> 3. Piston stop ring <FWD> 4. Snap ring <AWD> 5. Push rod <FWD> 6. Boot <FWD> 7. Piston assembly 8. Reservoir cap 9. Reservoir band 10. Reservoir 11. Master cylinder body
08FOO40
6.0 Nm 4.0 ft.lbs
13 Nm 9.0 ftlbs.
---&
<AWD>
08FOO39
Master cvlinder kit
6.0 Nm 4.0 ft.lbs:

08FOO41
09FOl34
M21NSAE
3. DISASSEMBLY OF PISTON STOP RING <FWD> / 4. SNAP RING <AWD>

Remove the piston stop ring or snap ring, while depressing the piston.
14LO193
7. REMOVAL OF PISTON ASSEMBLY Caution 1. Do not damage the master cylinder body and piston assembly. 2. Do not disassemble piston assembly.
INSPECTION
l l
MZlNCAD
Check Check l Check l Check
the the the the
inside piston piston clutch
cylinder body for rust or scars. cup for wear or deformation. for rust or scars. tube connection part for clogging.
Id
TSB Revision
CLUTCH - Clutch Release Cylinder
21-15
CLUTCH RELEASE CYLINDER
L.4/
Lubricant: Conforming to DOT3 Disassembly steps
/ iJ
1. Valve plate 2. Spring 3. Push rod 4. Boots *I) l * 5. Piston and cup 6. Conical spring 7. Cap 8. Bleeder plug 9. Release cylinder
7CLOOOl

5. DISASSEMBLY OF PISTON AND CUP
M2lLBAF
(1) Remove the corrosion from the piston-removal port of the release cylinder. (2) Remove the piston from the release cylinder using compressed air.
6CLO3!
Caution 1. Cover with rags to prevent the piston from popping out. 2. Apply compressed air slowly to prevent brake fluid from splashing.
1 TSB Revision
21-16
CLUTCH - Clutch Release Cylinder INSPECTION

M21LCAF
(1) Check the inner surface of the release cylinder for scratches or irregular wear. (2) Replace if the piston cup outer circumference is scratched or shows signs of fatigue, or if there is excessive wear of the lip where indicated in the figure.
LI
6CLOOO3

5. APPLICATION OF FLUID TO PISTON AND CUP
MZlLDAH
Apply specified brake fluid to the release cylinder inside and outer surface of the piston and piston cup and push the piston cup assembly in the cylinder.
Specified brake fluid: Conforming to DOT3
DCLOOE
TSB Revision
CLUTCH - Clutch Vacuum Line, Vacuum Tank <AWD>
21-17
CLUTCH VACUUM LINE, VACUUM TANK <AWD>

Hose clamp 4.0 Nm I 2.9 ftlbs.
M21VA- _
.lO 15 \
08FOO21
;3
I I
+ 1. Vacuum hose A I)* 2. Vacuum hose B +I) W+ 3. Vacuum hose C with check,valve 4. Fitting
Vacuum pipe A removal steps
l
* 5. Air hose A I)+ 6. Air cleaner cover, air intake hose A 7. Vacuum pipe A
Vacuum tank assembly, vacuum hose E, vacuum pipe C removal steps
I i
Vacuum pipe B, vacuum hose D removal steps
8. Brake booster (Refer to GROUP 35 - Brake Booster.) 9. Vacuum pipe B l + 10. Vacuum hose D
TSB Revision
11. Right member (Refer to GROUP 32 - Right Member, Left Member and Crossmember) 12. Vacuum tank assembly l * 13. Vacuum hose E 14. Vacuum pipe C
21-18
CLUTCH - Clutch Vacuum Line. Vacuum Tank <AWD> SERVICE POINTS OF REMOVAL
M2lVBAA
3. REMOVAL OF VACUUM HOSE C WITH CHECK VALVE

Check valve
NOTE Since the check valve is fit to the vacuum hose C, replace the check valve as an assembly unit together with the vacuum hose C if the check valve is defective.
INSPECTION
l l
M2lWcAA
Check the hose and pipes for cracks, bend, deformation and clogging. Check the vacuum tank for deformation or crack.
MZlVDAA
OSFOOO
13. INSTALLATION OF VACUUM HOSE E / 10. VACUUM HOSE D / 3. VACUUM HOSE C WITH CHECK VALVE / 2. VACUUM HOSE B / 1. VACUUM HOSE A
If a hose is connected to a pipe with a stepped part, insert the hose up to the stepped part. If it is connected to a pipe without any stepped part, insert the hose until the insertion amount reaches the standard value. a
OSFOO7
Standard value: 20 - 25 mm (.8 - 1.0 in.) 6. INSTALLATION OF AIR CLEANER COVER, AIR INTAKE HOSE A
Align slots indicated by arrows in air intake hose A with n markings on air intake hoses B and C; then, insert hoses B and C all the way into air intake hose A. Insert air intake hoses B and C all the way up to the roots on the turbocharger end.
A&ir$ke
Air intake hose A
Air intake hose B

05FOO23
Air hose C
Air hose A I
5. INSTALLATION OF AIR HOSE A

Connect tha air hoses ensuring that alignment marks are aligned with projections. Insert air hoses B and C into pipe all the way to its step.
Caution Be careful not to allow any foreign matter to get into the hoses, pipes, or the intercooler itself. ;i
TSB Revision
CLUTCH - Clutch Cover and Disc
21-19
M21GA-.
CLUTCH COVER AND DISC

)I
l
Removal of the Transaxle Assembly
30-42Nm
\ \
15-21 Nm 11 - 15 klbs.
Removal steps
M w 1. Clutch cover assembly +e W+ 2. Clutch disc 3. Return clip I)* 4. Clutch release bearing W+ 5. Release fork 6. Fulcrum 7. Release fork boot
TSB Revision
CLUTCH - Clutch Cover and Disc
6CLOl f
Lubricant: MITSUBISHI genuine grease Part No. 0101011 or equivalent
7CLOOO8 Lubricant: MITSUBISHI genuine grease Part No. 0101011 or eauivalent
6CL03:
Lubricant: MITSUBISHI genuine grease Part No. 0101011 or equivalent
MZlGBAK
1. REMOVAL OF CLUTCH COVER ASSEMBLY / 2. CLUTCH DISC

Diagonally loosen bolts which attach clutch cover to flywheel. Back off bolts in succession, one or two turns at a time, to avoid bending cover flange.
Caution DO NOT clean clutch disc or release bearing with d cleaning solvent.
TSB Revision 1
CLUTCH - Clutch Cover and Disc INSPECTION

CLUTCH COVER ASSEMBLY
l l
21-21
MZlGCAG
Check the diaphragm spring end for wear and uneven height. Replace if wear is evident or height difference exceeds the limit.
Limit : 0.5 mm (02 in.)

l l
Check the pressure plate surface for wear, cracks and color change. Check the strap plate rivets for looseness and replace the clutch cover assembly if loose. Check the facing for loose rivets, uneven contact, deterioration due to seizure, adhesion of oil or grease and replace the clutch disc if defective. Measure the rivet sink and replace the clutch disc if it is out of specification.
CLUTCH DISC
l
Limit : 0.3 mm (.012 in.)

l l
Check for torsion spring play and damage and if defective, replace the clutch disc. Combine the clutch disc with the input shaft and check sliding condition and check for play in the rotating direction. If it does not slide smoothly, check after cleaning and reassembling. If the play is excessive, replace the clutch disc and/or the input shaft.
Sleeve Bearing
CLUTCH RELEASE BEARING Caution 1. The release bearing is packed with grease, so dont use cleaning oil, etc. to clean it. 2. Do not disassemble the bearing and sleeve of the clutch release bearing. If disassembled, replace. (AWD only)
l
TFM0131
Check for bearing heat damage, other damage, abnormal noise and/or improper rotation. Also check whether or not there is wear at the point of contact with the diaphragm spring. If there is abnormal wear at the point of contact with the release fork, replace the bearing.
RELEASE FORK
If there is abnormal wear at the point of contact with the bearing, replace the release fork.
TSB Revision
21-22
CLUTCH - Clutch Cover and Disc SERVICE POINTS OF INSTALLATION

5. APPLICATION OF GREASE TO RELEASE FORK
(1) Apply a coating of the specified grease to the point of contact with the fulcrum and the point of contact with the release bearing.
MZIGDAU
Specified grease: MITSUBISHI genuine grease Part No. 0101011 or equivalent Caution When installing the clutch, apply grease to each part, but be careful not to apply excessive grease; excessive grease will cause clutch slippage and shudder.
(2) Apply a coating of the specified grease to the end of the release cylinders push rod and to the push rod hole in the release fork.
Specified grease: MITSUBISHI genuine grease Part No. 0101011 or equivalent
4. APPLICATION OF GREASE TO CLUTCH RELEASE BEARING (FWD)

Pack the inner surface of the clutch release bearing and the groove with the specified grease.
APPLY grease
6CLOlE
2. APPLICATION OF GREASE TO CLUTCH DISC / 1. CLUTCH COVER ASSEMBLY

(1) Apply a coating of the specified grease to the clutch disc spline, and then use a brush to rub it in.
lir#L
Clutch disc

(2) Using the universal clutch disc aligner, position the clutch disc to the flywheel. (3) Install the clutch cover assembly. Tighten the bolts a little at a time, working in a diagonal sequence, finally tightening them to the specified torque.
Clutch cover assembly
v-l
6CL02E I
TSB Revision
22-1
iv,
MANUAL ~ T R A N S A X L E ~I
CONTENTS
MANUAL TRANSAXLE <AWD>
GENERAL INFORMATION
M22AA. -
. . . . . . . . . . . . _. .
48
48 51 52 53 53 51 51 53 50 49 49 49
INPUT SHAFT ASSEMBLY _..________.. . . . . . : . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INTERMEDIATE GEAR ASSEMBLY ....................................
....................................................
30 36
SERVICE ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES ............................ Drive Shaft Oil Seals Replacement .................................... Speedometer Cable Replacement .................................... Transfer Oil Seal Replacement ............................................ Transmission Oil Level Inspection .................................... Transmission Oil Replacement ............................................ SHIFT LEVER ASSEMBLY .................................................... SPECIAL TOOLS ........................................................................ SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................... General Specifications ........................................................ Lubricants ............................................................................ TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY .................................................... TRANSAXLE CONTROL* ........................................................ TRANSFER ASSEMBLY ........................................................
OUTPUT SHAFT ASSEMBLY ......................................... ....... 41 SERVICE ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES ............................ 9 Drive Shaft Oil Seals Replacement .................................... 10 Speedometer Cable Replacement .................................... 9 Transmission Oil Level Inspection .................................... 9 Transmisston Oil Replacement ............................................ 9 SHIFT LEVER ASSEMBLY SHIFT RAILS AND FORKS SPECIFICATIONS .................................................... .................................................... 13 42 6 3 z 6 3 3 45 14 11 8
SPECIAL TOOLS ........................................................................ .................................................................... General Specifications ........................................................ Lubricants ............................................................................ Sealants and Adhesives ........................................................ Service Specifications ........................................................ Snap Ring (for Adjustment) and Spacer ............................ SPEEDOMETER DRIVEN GEAR ASSEMBLY .................... TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY _____...._........__.................................... TRANSAXLE CONTROL* . . ..________.___.._ ..__._.__.__............... TROUBLESHOOTING ___.._______._____.......,..................................
56,60 54 59
MANUAL TRANSAXLE <MID>
....................
2
46 43 28 2
CLUTCH HOUSING ASSEMBLY ............................................ DIFFERENTIAL ASSEMBLY .................................................... 5TH SPEED SYNCHRONIZER ASSEMBLY ........................ GENERAL INFORMATION .................................................... SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
(1) A Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), which uses a driver-side air bag, has been installed in the 3000GT. (2) The SRS includes the following components: impact sensors, SRS diagnosis unit: SRS warning light, air bag module, clock spring, interconnecting wiring. Other SRS-related components (that may have to be removed/installed in connection with SRS service or maintenance) are indicated in the table of contents by an asterisk (*). WARNING! (1) Improper service or maintenance of any component of the SRS, or any SRS-related component, can lead to personal injury or death to service personnel (from inadvertent firing of the air bag) or to the driver (from rendering the SRS inoperative). (2) Service or maintenance of any SRS component or SRS-related component must be performed only at an authorized MITSUBISHI dealer. (3) MITSUBISHI dealer personnel must thoroughly review this manual, and especially its GROUP 52B Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), before beginning any service or maintenance of any component of the SRS or any SRS-related component.
22-2
MANUAL TRANSAXLE <FWD> - General Information
MANUAL TRANSAXLE <FWD>

GENERAL INFORMATION
F5M33 R Cl/utch housing 2nd speed gear Bearing retainer 1 st weed get 3r I 1 st-2nd speed synchronizer assembly I 3rd beed gear 3rd-LIth speed synchronizer assembly L Lth speed gear I : Spacer 5th speed gear 5th speed synchronizer assembly
M226AAU
Input shaft I
\i
noise-prevention
I \ d I
Filter 5th speed intermediate gear Intermediate gear
rcer t- Output shaft
1 I 1 I ~ \ d!
TFMOlll
:er
Differential drive gear
TSB Revision
MANUAL TRANSAXLE <FWD> - Specifications
22-3
SPECIFICATIONS
M22CA.A
items Model Applicable engine Type Gear ratio 1 st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th Reverse Final reduction ratio Speedometer gear ratio (driven/drive) Oil quantity liters (qts.)
Specifications F5M33-2-SNZR 6G72-DOHC MPI 5-speed transaxle floor shift 3.090 1.833 1.217 0.888 0.741 3.166 4.153 28136 2.3 (2.4)
Items Specifications
M22CB-A
mm (in.)
L.J
Standard value Transaxle Input shaft end play Input shaft rear bearing end play Intermediate gear bearing end play Intermediate gear preload Output shaft preload Differential Differential case preload Differential pinion backlash Limit Synchronizer ring and clutch gear clearance
0 - 0.05 (0 - ,002) 0.01 - 0.09 i.0004 - ,004) 0.01 -0.14 (.0004- ,006) 0.05 - 0.10 (.002 - ,004) 0.05 - 0.10 (.002 - ,004) 0.05 - 0.10 (.002 - .004) 0.025 - 0.150 (.OOl - ,006) 0.5 (.02)
SNAP RING (FOR ADJUSTMENT) AND SPACER

Part name Spacer (For adjustment of input shaft end play) Thickness mm (in.) 0.80 i.0315) 0.83 (.0327) 0.86 (.0338) 0.89 t.0350) 0.92 (.0362) Identification symbol 80 83 86 89 92 Part No. MD727661 MD720937 M D720938 MD720939 MD720940
M22CF.A
TSB Revision
22-4
Part name
MANUAL TRANSAXLE <FWD> - Specifications /- ,

Thickness mm (in.) 0.95 l.0374)
0.98 t.0386)
Identification symbol 95
98
Part No. MD720941 MD720942 M D720943 MD720944 MD720945 MD71 0454 MD700270 MD710455 MD710456 MD700271 MD710457 MD710458 MD706574 M D7 10459 MD71 0460 MD706573 MD710461 MD710462
MD703779
Spacer (For adjustment of input shaft end play)
1 .Ol t.0398)
0.04 (.0409) 1.07(.0421) 1.10(.0433) 1.13 l.0445) 1.16 i.0457) 1.19 (.0468) l.ZZ(O.480) 1.25 i.0492) 1.28 t.0504) 1.31 (.0516) 1.34(.0527) 1.37 (.0539) 1.40(.0551) 1.43 t.0563) 1.46l.0575)
01
04 07
J D K L
G
M
N
E
0
P
Q R
Snap ring (For adjustment of intermediate gear front bearing end play) Spacer :For adjustment of intermediate
1.4 l.0551) 1.5 l.0591) 1.6 f.0630)
None Brown Blue

80 83 86 89 92 95 98
MD703780 MD703781 MD7241 42 MD7241 43 MD724144 MD7241 45 MD7241 46 MD724147 MD7241 48 MD724149 MD7241 50 MD7241 51 MD7241 52 MD7241 53 MD7241 54 MD7241 55 MD7241 56 MD7241 57 MD7241 58 MD7241 59 MD7241 60 MD7241 61
gear preload)
0.80 t.0315) 0.83 l.0327) 0.86f.0338) 0.89 t.0350) 0.92 f.0362) 0.95 l.0374) 0.98 i.0386)
1 .Ol t.0398)
1.04 (.0409) 1.07(.0421)
01
04 07
1 .I0 (.0433)
1.13 f.0445) 1.16 t.0457) 1.19 (.0468)
10
13 16 19 22 25 28 31 34 37
1.22 (.0480)
1.25 t.0492) 1.28 f.0504) 1.31 l.0516) 1.34(.0527) 1.37 (.0539)
1 TSB Revision ~~~
MANUAL TRANSAXLE <FWD> - Specifications

Part name Spacer (For adjustment of output shaft preload) Thickness mm (in.) 0.83 (.0327) 0.86 (0338) 0.89 (.0350) 0.92 (.0362) 0.95 (.0374) 0.98 (.0386) 1 .Ol t.0398) 1.04 (.0409) 1.07 (.0421) 1 .I 0 (.0433) 1 .I 3 (.0445) 1.16(.0457) 1 .I9 (0468) 1.22 (.0480) 1.25 (0492) 1.28 (.0504) 1.31 (.0516) 1.34 (0527) 0.80 (0315) 0.83 (0327) 0.86 (.0338) 0.89 (0350) 0.92 (0362) 0.95 (.0374) 0.98 (.0386) 1 .Ol (.0398) 1.04 (.0409) 1.07 (0421) 1 .I 0 (.0433) 1.13 (.0445) 1.16 (.0457) 1.19 (.0468) 1.22 (.0480) 1.25 LO4921 0.75 - 0.82 LO295 - .0323) 0.83 - 0.92 (0327 - .0362) 0.93 - 1 .oo (0366 - .0394) 1.01 -1.08 (.0398 - .0425) 1.09-1.16 t.0429 - .0457) Identification symbol 83 86 89 92 95 98 01 04 07 J D K L G M N E 0 80 83 86 89 92 95 98 01 04 07 J D K L G M Part No.
22-5
MD720937 MD720938 MD720939 MD720940 MD720941 MD720942 MD720943 MD720944 MD729945 MD71 0454 MD700270 MD71 0455 MD71 0456 MD700271 MD710457 MD710458 M D706574 MD71 0459 MD727661 M D720937 M D720938 M D72d939 MD720940 M D720941 MD720942 MD720943 MD720944 MD720945 MD71 0454 MD700270 MD710455 MD71 0456 MD700271 MD71 0457 MA1 80862 MA1 80861 MA1 80860 MA1 80875 MA1 80876
Spacer (For adjustment of differential case preload)
Spacer (For adjustment of differential pinion backlash)
TSB Revision
22-6
Items
MANUAL TRANSAXLE <FWD> - Specifications / Special Tools

M22CD-A
LUBRICANTS
Specified lubricant Hypoid gear oil, SAE 75W-90 or 75W-85W conforming to API classification GL-4 or higher Quantity lit. (qts) 2.3 (2.4) As required
Manual transmission oil Drive shaft oil seal lip
SEALANTS AND ADHESIVES

Items Transaxle case - clutch housing mating surfaces Transaxle case - rear cover mating surfaces Differential drive gear bolts Bearing retainer screw (flush head screw) Reverse brake cone mounting screw bolts Air breather Specified sealants and adhesives
MUCE-
Mitsubishi genuine part No. 997740 or equivalent 3M Stud Locking part No. 4170 or equivalent
3M ATD part No. 8001 or equivalent
SPECIAL TOOLS
M22DA-A.
nstallation of spring pin and lock
MD998323-01
TSB Revision
MANUAL TRANSAXLE <FWD> - Special Tools
22-7
MD998348-0 1
Bearing remover
Removal of gears and bearings of input shaft, intermediate gear and output shaft
and intermediate shaft lock nut
M D998808-01
Snap ring installer
Installation of input shaft rear snap ring
MD998822
installer adapter
Installation of differential case bearings
TSB Revision
22-8
MANUAL TRANSAXLE <FWD> - Troubleshooting
TROUBLESHOOTING
Symptom Vibration, noise Probable cause a. Loose or damaged transaxle and engine mounts b. Inadequate shaft end play c. Worn of damaged gears d. Use of inadequate grade of oil e. Low oil level f. Inadequate engine idle speed 3il leakage t-lard shift a. Broken or damaged, oil seal or O-ring a. Faulty control cable b. Poor contact or wear of synchronizer ring and gear cone c. Weakened synchronizer spring d. Use of inadequate grade of oil Jumps out of gear a. Worn gear shift fork or broken poppet spring b. Synchronizer hub to sleeve spline clearance too large Remedy a. Tighten or replace mounts b. Correct end play c. Replace gears d. Replace with specified oil e. Replenish f. Adjust idle speed a. Replace oil seal or O-ring a. Replace control cable b. Correct or replace c. Replace synchronizer spring d. Replace with specified oil a. Replace shift fork or poppet spring b. Replace synchronizer hub and sleew -
1 TSB Revision
MANUAL TRANSAXLE <FWD> - Service Adiustment Procedures
22-9
MZZFBAEl

TRANSMISSION OIL LEVEL INSPECTION
TRANSMISSION OIL REPLACEMENT

11
M22FCAI
(1) Position vehicle on a flat level. (2) Remove filler and drain plugs and allow the transmission oil to drain. (3) Refill the transaxle to the proper level with specified transmission oil. The oil level should be the bottom of the oil filler hole.
Transmission oil: Hypoid gear oil, SAE 75W-85W conforming to API classification GL-4 or C2.3 liters (2.4 pts.)] higher
0*u0110
09FO12
SPEEDOMETER CABLE REPLACEMENT

1.
MUFEALl
Correctly insert the adapter into the instrument panel, and fasten the new speedometer cable.
2.
Install the grommet so that, as shown in the illustration, the cable attachment part and the projecting part are horizontal.
Caution The cable arrangement should be made so that the radius of cable bends is 150 mm (5.9 in.) or more.
3. At the transaxle end of the speedometer cable, the key joint should be inserted into the transaxle, and the nut should be securely tightened.
Caution If the cable is not correctly and securely connected, it may cause incorrect indication. by the speedometer, or abnormal noise. Be sure to connect it correctly.
DSB Revision
22-10 MANUAL TRANSAXLE <FWD> - Service Adjustment Procedures

DRIVE SHAFT OIL SEALS REPLACEMENT
M2ZFDAI
(I) Disconnect the drive shaft from the transaxle. (Refer to GROUP 26 - Drive Shaft.) (2) Using a flat-tip (-) screwdriver, remove the oil seal.
) d,
09K5671
(3) Using the special tool, tap the drive shaft oil seal into the transaxle. The drive shaft oil seal must be installed in the direction shown. (4) Apply a coating of the transmission oil to the lip of the oil seal.
Transmission oil: Hypoid gear oil, SAE 75W-90 or 75W-85W conforming to API classification GL-4 or higher
160024
Oil seal lip
* Transaxle side
2200037
TSB
Revision
MANUAL TRANSAXLE <FWD> - Transaxle. Control
22-11
M22JA-A
TRANSAXLE CONTROL
I
(Refer to GROUP 52A-Floor Console.)
12 Nm 9 ft.lbs.
/
6
09FOO79
Transaxle control cable assembly removal steps
Shift lever assembly removal steps

l
1. Air cleaner, Air intake hose 2. CD amp. (Vehicles with CD player) I)* 3. Connection for transaxle control cable assembly (Shift lever assembly side) 4. Retainer 5. Transaxle control cable assembly
1. Air cleaner, Air intake hose 3. Connection for transaxle control cable assembly (Shift lever assembly side) 6. Shift lever assembly
1 TSB Revision
22-12
MANUAL TRANSAXLE <FWD> - Transaxle Control INSPECTION

l l l
M22JCAFl
Check the transaxle control cable assembly for function and for damage. IlJ Check the boot for damage. Check each bushing for wear or abrasion, sticking, impeded action, and damage.
SERVlCE POINTS OF INSTALLATION
MUJDAL
3. CONNECTION OF TRANSAXLE CONTROL CABLE ASSEMBLY (SHIFT LEVER ASSEMBLY SIDE)

(I) Move the transaxle shift lever to the neutral position. NOTE The select lever will be set to the neutral position when the transaxle shift lever is moved to the neutral position.
Neutral position
End of select cable er B
(2) With the shift lever on the passenger compartment side in the neutral position, turn adjuster on select cable so that select cable end is positioned as shown with reference to lever B of shift lever. (3) Install the select cable so that the flange side of the \ plastic bushing at the end of select cable is on the end d face side of lever B.
0910023
Lever B
09FOO71
(4) Turn adjuster on shift cable so that shift cable end is positioned as shown with reference to shift lever on the passenger compartment side. (5) Install the shift cable so that the flange side of the plastic bushing at the end of shift cable is on the split pin side.
(6) Connect the shift cable, then turn adjuster on shift cable so that dimension A equals dimension B. (7) Move the shift lever to each position and check that the shifting is smooth.
OSFOOo8
TSB Revision
MANUAL TRANSAXLE <FWD> - Shift Lever Assembly
22-13
M22GE-A
SHIFT LEVER ASSEMBLY i

16
24 Nm 17 ftlbs. \
24Nm
09FOO17
Disassembly steps
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. IO. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23.
Nut Spring washer Plain washer Shift lever Bushing Plain washer Wave washer Nut Spring washer Plain washer Return spring Bushing Pipe Bolt Lever (A) Bushing Bushing Snap ring Washer Lever(B) Bushing Cable bracket Bracket assembly
(To arrow marked portions)
OS%=0066
1 TSB Revision
22-14
MANUAL TRANSAXLE <FWD> - Transaxle Assembly

M22MA-A
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
(Refer to GROUP 51 -Front Bumper.)
4.0 Nm 2.9ft$bs. t 19 Nm 13 ft.lbs.
09FO112
09FOO89
Removal steps
1. Side under cover 2. Battery 3. Battery seat, Washer tank 4. Air cleaner cover, Air intake hose 5. Connection for clutch release cylinder 6. Connection for clutch tube bracket and clutch damper assembly 7. Connection for transaxle control cable 8. Connection for speedometer cable
TSB Revision
22-15
id
Post-installation Operation l Installation of Front Under Cover (Referto GROUP 51 -Front Bumper.) l Supplying of Transmission Oil (Refer to P.22-9.) l Filling of Engine Coolant (Refer to GROUP 14Service Adjustment Procedures.) l Checking Operation of Shift Lever at Each Position l Checking the Operation of the Meters and Gauges
70 Nm
26 ft.lbs.
4*
09FOO84
9. Connection for transaxle mount 10. Transaxle mount bracket l * 11. Mounting stopper 12. Transaxle assembly upper part coupling bolt 4* 13. Connection for tie rod end 4* 14. Connection for lower arm ball joint 15. Right member
16. Starter 17. Drive shaft (Left side), inner shaft assembly +* ** 18. Drive shaft (Right side) 19. Transaxle stay (Front bank side) 20. Transaxle stay (Rear bank side) 4* 21. Transaxle assembly lower part coupling bolt 4* 22. Transaxle assembly 4*
MZZMBBA
6. DISCONNECTION OF THE CLUTCH TUBE BRACKET AND CLUTCH DAMPER ASSEMBLY

Remove the clutch release cylinder and clutch oil line bracket installation bolt, and then secure at the body side without disconnecting the oil line coupling.
1 TSB Revision
22-16

9. DISCONNECTION OF TRANSAXLE MOUNT
Raise transaxle assembly with a jack up to a level where mount bracket no longer receives its weight and remove transaxle mount insulator bolt.
Caution Support the transaxle assembly with the jack so that no localized force is applied to the assembly.
13. DISCONNECTION OF TIE ROD END

Using the special tool, disconnect the tie rod end from the knuckle.
Caution 1. Be sure to tie the cord of the special tool to the nearby part. 2. Loosen the nut but do not remove it.
14. DISCONNECTION OF LOWER ARM BALL JOINT

Using the special tool, disconnect the lower arm ball joint from the knuckle.
17. REMOVAL OF DRIVE SHAFT (LEFT SIDE), INNER SHAFT ASSEMBLY

(1) Remove the bearing bracket mounting bolts and insert the pry bar between the bearing bracket and the cylinder block. (2) Remove drive shaft (left side) and inner shaft assembly from transaxle assembly. NOTE Remove drive shaft and inner shaft assembly as an assembly together with hub, knuckle, and other parts. (3) Suspend the removed drive shaft (left side) and inner shaft assembly with wire or something similar to prevent it from sharply bending or turning at each joint.
TSB Revision
MANUAL TRANSAXLE <FWD> - Transaxle Assemblv

18. REMOVAL
22-17
OF DRIVE SHAFT (RIGHT SIDE)
(1) To remove drive shaft (right side) from transaxle assembly, apply pry bar to the protrusion. NOTE Remove drive shaft (right side) as an assembly together with hub, knuckle, and other parts. (2) Suspend the removed drive shaft (right side) with wire or something similar to prevent it from sharply bending or turning at each joint.
21. REMOVAL OF TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY LOWER PART COUPLING BOLT / 22. TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
Support transaxle assembly with a transaxle jack and remove transaxle assembly lower part coupling bolt; then, lower transaxle assembly.

18. INSTALLATION OF DRIVE SHAFT (RIGHT SIDE)
M2ZMDAT
ProvisionaHy install the drive shaft (right side) so that the inboard joint part of the drive shaft (right side) is straight, and not bent relative to the transaxle.
Caution Care must be taken to ensure that the oil seal lip part of the transaxle is not damaged by the serrated part of the drive shaft (right side). 11. INSTALLATION OF MOUNTING STOPPER
Install mounting stopper in the direction shown.
Transax mount bracket
OlFOO45
TSB Revision
22-18
MANUAL TRANSAXLE <FWD> - Transaxle Assemblv

I
M22ME.A
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
I
dl
l5-22Nm 11 - 15 ftlbs. -42 Nm - 30 ftlbs. 30-35 Nm 22 - 25 ft.lbs. / J lIll4 4.0 - 5.5 Nm 2.9 - 3.9 ftlbs. 140 - 160 Nm 102 - 115 ftlbs. 1
18
3-5Nm 2.5 - 3.5 ftlbs. 11
Disassembly steps
1. Bolt 2. Rear cover 3. Wave spring 4. Screw bolts 5. Reverse brake cone 6. Backup light switch 7. Gasket 8. Poppet plug 9. Poppet spring IO. Poppet ball 11. Bolt 12. Speedometer driven gear assembly 13. Air breather +* +* 14. Spring pin
*+ l * 15. Lock nut *+ l + 16. Lock nut 17. 5th speed synchronizer assembly 18. 5th speed shift fork 19. Synchronizer ring 20. 5th speed gear 21. Needle bearing 22. 5th speed intermediate gear
TSB Revision
MANUAL TRANSAXLE <FWD> - Transaxle Assemblv ;EALING AND ADHESION POINTS
Adhesive: 3M Stud Locking Part No. 4170
TFM0016
M ATD Part No. 8001
1 TSB Revision
22-20
30-35Nm 22 - 25 ftlbs.
35-42 Nm 26 - 30 ft.lbs.
43-55Nm 32 - 39 ft.lbs.
Disassembly steps
Sealant: MITSUBISHI Genuine Part No. 997740 or equivalent
23. Reverse idler gear shaft bolt 24. Gasket 25. Bolt l * 26. Transaxle case I)* 27. Oil guide 28. Bolt 29. Spring washer 30. Stopper bracket 31. Restrict ball assembly 32. Gasket ** 33. Oil seal 34. Bearing outer race l a 35. Spacer 36. Bearing outer race l a 37. Spacer 38. Filter 39. Bearing outer race
** 40. Spacer 41. Bearing outer race l * 42. Spacer 43. Bolt 44. Reverse shift lever assembly 45. Reverse shift lever shoe ** 46. Reverse idler gear shaft 47. Reverse idler gear *I) I)+ 48. Spring pin *I) l * 49. Spring pin *,I) I)* 50. Shift rail assembly
TFMOlO9
TSB Revision
15-22Nm 11-15 ft.lbs. .
52 I 53
-22Nm -15 ftlbs.
litI63 67
62
51. Screw 52. Bolt 53. Bearing retainer 54. Intermediate gear assembly 55. Input shaft assembly 56. Output shaft assembly 57. Differential gear assembly 58. Bearing outer race 59. Bearing outer race 60. Oil guide 61. Bearing outer race 62. Bearing outer race ** 63. Oil seal l 4 64. Oil seal 65. Magnet 66. Magnet holder 67. Clutch housing assembly
TSB Revision
MANUAL TRANSAXLE <FWD> - Transaxle Assembly SERVICE POINTS OF DISASSEMBLY

MZZMFAW
14. REMOVAL OF SPRING PIN Remove the spring pin using a pin punch. \,/ NOTE If the spring pin interferes with the synchronizer ring or cone gear, rotate the gear for dislocation and remove the spring pin.
15.16. REMOVAL OF LOCK NUTS (1) Unstake lock nuts of the input shaft and intermediate gear.
Lock nut ;
201021
(2) Shift the transaxle in reverse using the control lever and select lever.
(3) Install the special tool onto the inout shaft. (4) Screw a bolt [IO mm] into the hole on the periphery of clutch housing and attach a spinner handle to the special tool. (5) Remove the lock nut, while using the bolt as a spinner handle stopper.
48.49. REMOVAL OF SPRING PINS Remove the spring pins for 1 st-2nd and 3rd-4th speed shift forks using a pin punch.
TSB Revision
22-23
50. REMOVAL OF SHIFT RAIL ASSEMBLY (I 1 Shift the Ist-2nd speed shift fork to the 2nd speed. (2) Shift the 3rd-4th speed shift fork to the 4th speed.
(3) Remove the shift rail assembly.
INSPECTION
M22MOAB
BACKUP LIGHT SWITCH Operate the backup light switch to check continuity with a circuit tester. If without continuity, replace the switch.
MZZMGAX
54. INSTALLATION OF OIL SEAL Install the drive shaft oil seal using the special tool.
MD998325-01
I
MD998325-01
/I
\I
2010291
TSB Revision
22-24

63. INSTALLATION OF OIL SEAL Install the input shaft front oil seal using the special tool.
MD998321-01 Oil seal
2010041
50. INSTALLATION OF SHIFT RAIL ASSEMBLY (1) Set the 1 st-2nd speed shift sleeve at 2nd speed. (2) Set the 3rd-4th speed shift sleeve at 4th speed. (3) Fit the shift forks of shift rail assembly to groove of sleeves. LJ
(4) Insert the shift rails into the shift rail holes of clutch housing. (5) Turn the shift rails in the directions indicated by the arrows in the order shown in the illustration, and engage the shift lugs to control finger and the interlock plate.
48.49. INSTALLATION OF SPRING PINS (1) Install the spring pins using the special tool or a pin punch. Caution Do not reuse the spring pins.
TSB Revision

Slit Spring pin #Jl /
22-25
(2) When installing, make sure that the slit of the spring pin is aligned with the shift rail center line.
II-+
1 I I
Shift rail
201034
46. INSTALLATION OF REVERSE IDLER GEAR SHAFT Install in the direction illustrated.
er
35.37. 40. 42. INSTALLATION OF SPACERS (1) Place two pieces of solder measuring about 10 mm (.4 in.) in length and 1.6 mm (.06 in.) in diameter as illustrated and install the outer races. (2) Install the transaxle case and tighten the bolts to specified torque. (3) Remove the transaxle case. (4) Remove the outer races and remove the solder. (5) If solder is not crushed, perform steps (1) to (4) with a solder with a larger diameter. (6) Measure the thickness of the crushed solder with a micrometer and select and install a spacer of thickness that gives standard preload and end play. Standard value: Input shaft end play 0 - 0.05 mm (0 - .002 in.) Intermediate gear preload 0.05 - 0.10 mm (.002 - .004 in.) Output shaft preload 0.05 - 0.10 mm (.002 - .004 in.) Differential case preload 0.05 - 0.10 mm (.002 - .004 in.)
2150008
MD998325-01
33. INSTALLATION OF OIL SEAL Install the drive shaft oil seal using the special tool.
vision
22-26
MANUAL TRANSAXLE .<FWD> - Transaxle Assembly

27. INSTALLATION OF OIL GUIDE Install the oil guide to the transaxle case as illustrated.
Amount
l-2 mm
26. INSTALLATION OF TRANSAXLE CASE (1) Place the selected spacers on the intermediate gear and differentials bearing outer race. Also insert the selected spacer between the output shaft bearing outer race and the transaxle case. (2) Set so that the threaded hole of the reverse idler gear shafts head is facing in the direction indicated in the illustration. NOTE If there is a great deviation in the direction in which the threaded hole is facing, it will be impossible to align the threaded hole and the hole in the case after the transaxle case is installed. (3) Apply specified sealant to the clutch housing side of the transaxle case. Specified sealant: MITSUBISHI genuine Part No. MD997740 or equivaLJ lent Caution Squeeze out sealant from the tube uniformly without excess or discontinuity. (4) Install the transaxle case onto the clutch housing. (5) Insert a Phillips screwdriver [8 mm (.32 in.) shaft diameter] into the bolt hole in the case, as shown in the figure, and use it to align the threaded hole of the reverse idler gear shaft with the bolt hole in the transaxle case. (6) Install the reverse idler gear shaft bolt and tighten the bolt by fingers. (7) Tighten the all transaxle tightening bolts to specified torque. (8) Tighten the reverse idler gear shaft bolt to specified torque. 16.15. INSTALLATION OF LOCK NUTS (1) Install the special tool to the splined end of input shaft. (2) Screw a bolt [lo mm (.40 in.)] into the hole on the periphery of clutch housing and attach a spinner handle to the special tool.
TSB Revision
22-27
(3) Shift the transaxle in reverse using control lever and select lever. (4) Tighten the lock nut to specified torque, while using the bolt attached in the above step as a spinner handle stopper. (5) Loosen the lock nuts. (6) Retighten the lock nuts to the specified torque. (7) Stake the lock nut.
MD998245-01
14. INSTALLATION OF SPRING PIN (1) rr;tl.the spring pin using the special tool or a pin Caution Do not reuse the spring pins.
(2) When installing, make sure that the slit of the spring pin is aligned with the shift rail center line.
Spring pir
Shift rail
TSB Revision
22-28
MANUAL TRANSAXLE <FWD> -
5th Speed Synchronizer Assembly
5TH SPEED SYNCHRONIZER ASSEMBLY

TEMOl18
Disassembly steps
1. Reverse brake ring 2. Synchronizer spring 3. Synchronizer sleeve ** 4. Synchronizer key l * 5. Synchronizer hub
l
INSPECTION
SYNCHRONIZER SLEEVE AND HUB Combine the synchronizer sleeve and hub and check that l they slide smoothly. Check that the sleeve is free from damage at its inside front l and rear ends. Check for wear of the hub front end (surface in contact with l the 5th speed gear).
Caution
When replacing, replace the synchronizer hub and sleeve as a set. SYNCHRONIZER KEY AND SPRING Check for wear of the synchronizer key center protrusion. l Check the spring for weakness, deformation and breakage. l
/r / .\: ,:. .-JI @

201045
1 TSB Revision
MANUAL TRANSAXLE <FWD> Oil groove
5th Speed Synchronizer Assembly
2 2 - 2 9

5. INSTALLATION OF SYNCHRONIZER HUB / 4. SYNCHRONIZER KEY / 2. SYNCHRONIZER SPRING (1) Assemble the synchronizer hub, and key noting their direction.
Spring protrusion
(2) Assemble the synchronizer spring so that its projection may be engaged in the groove of the synchronizer key. NOTE Take care to prevent the projections of the front and rear spring from sitting in the groove of the same key.
201001a
TSB Revision
22-30
MANUAL TRANSAXLE <FWD> - Input Shaft Assembly

MZZMICA
INPUT SHAFT ASSEMBLY

2150009
Disassembly steps l * l a 1. Taper roller bearing l * *a 2. Bearing sleeve I)+ 3. Snap ring l * l a 4. Taper roller bearing l 4 5. Snap ring ** 6. Conespring l * 7. Subgear 8. 4th speed gear 9. Needlebearing l * 10. Bearing sleeve II. Synchronizer ring l * 12. 3rd-4th speed synchronizer assembly ** 13. Synchronizer spring 1 TSB Revision
Synchronizer sleeve Synchronizer key Synchronizer hub Synchronizer ring 18. 3rd speed gear 19. Needle bearing 20. Input shaft
14. 15. 16. 17.
MANUAL TRANSAXLE <FWD> - Input Shaft Assembly SERVICE POINTS OF DISASSEMBLY

1. REMOVAL OF TAPER ROLLER BEARING
22-31
Remove the front bearing using the special tool as illustrated.
2. REMOVAL OF BEARING SLEEVE Remove the bearing sleeve using the special tool as illustrated.
4th speed igear
4. REMOVAL OF TAPER ROLLER BEARING Remove the taper roller bearing together using the special tool as illustrated. 18. REMOVAL OF 3RD SPEED GEAR Remove the bearing sleeve, 3rd-4th speed synchronizer assembly and 3rd speed gear together using the special tool as illustrated.
MD998i48-01 2150012
INSPECTION
INPUT SHAFT l Check the outer surface of the input shaft where the needle bearing is mounted for damage, abnormal wear and seizure [portion @I. l Check the splines for damage and wear.
TSB Revision
22-32

NEEDLE BEARING l Combine the needle bearing with the shaft or bearing sleeve and gear and check that it rotates smoothly without abnormal noise or play. l Check the needle bearing cage for deformation
20105'
Damage, breakage
SYNCHRONIZER RING l Check the clutch gear teeth for damage and breakage. l Check paper lining on cone I.D. for damage, wear, and flaking.
Damage, wear
TFMOll!
l
Force the synchronizer ring toward the clutch gear and check clearance A. Replace if it is out of specification. Limit: 0.5 mm (.02 in.)
Synchnizer ring
GLar
TFMOll
201044
SYNCHRONIZER SLEEVE AND HUB Combine the synchronizer sleeve and hub and check that l they slide smoothly. Check that the sleeve is free from damage at its inside front l and rear ends. Check for wear of the hub end surfaces (in contact with l each speed gear). Caution When replacing, replace the synchronizer hub and sleeve as a set. SYNCHRONIZER KEY AND SPRING Check for wear of the synchronizer key center protrusion. l Check the spring for deterioration, deformation and breakl age.
TSB Revision
MANUAL TRANSAXLE <FWD> - Input Shaft AssemblY
22-33
SPEED -GEARS l Check the bevel gear and clutch gear teeth for damage and wear. l Check the synchronizer cone for rough surface, damage and wear. l Check the gear bore and front and rear ends for damage and wear.

Spri prot Key
13. INSTALLATION OF SYNCHRONIZER SPRING Assemble the synchronizer spring so that its projection may be engaged in the groove of the synchronizer key. Take care to prevent the projections of the front and rear spring from sitting in the groove of the same key.
2010018
MD998348-01
12. INSTALLATION OF 3RD-4TH SPEED SYNCHRONIZER ASSEMBLY (I) Install the synchronizer assembly so that the part that has the small round indentation is in the oil groove at the hub end. NOTE If the installation is in the opposite way, press-in might not be possible. This is because the edge of the hub inner diameter spline at the part that has the small round indentation is made to facilitate pressing in. (2) Press the 3rd-4th speed synchronizer assembly onto the input shaft using the special tool as illustrated. Caution When installing the synchronizer assembly, make sure that three synchronizer keys are seated correctly in respective grooves of the synchronizer ring. (3) Check the 3rd speed gear rotates smoothly.
10. INSTALLATION OF BEARING SLEEVE Use the special tool as illustrated.
rTSB Revision
22-34

7. INSTALLATION OF SUB GEAR / 6. CONE SPRING / 5. SNAP RING Install the sub gear and cone spring to 4th gear, and then install the snap ring. <LJ NOTE Be sure that the cone spring is installed so that it is facing in the correct direction.
MD99831 8-01
4. INSTALLATION OF TAPER ROLLER BEARING Install the taper roller bearing over the input shaft using the special tool.
2nd speed
2150014
3. REASSEMBLY OF SNAP RING (1) Select thickest possible snap ring which can enter the snap ring groove. Standard value: 0.01 - 0.09 mm (.0004 - .004 in.)
(2) Using a special tool, attach the snap ring to the input shaft. Caution 1. Dont reuse the old snap ring. 2. If snap ring pliers are used, the snap ring may sometimes be expanded excessively. This will prevent proper mounting of the sleeve.
TSB Revision
22-35
2. REASSEMBLY OF BEARING SLEEVE (1) Using a special tool, fit the bearing sleeve to the input shaft. Caution After fitting, check that the sleeve flange is closely fit to the bearing.
1. INSTALLATION OF TAPER ROLLER BEARING Install the taper roller bearing over the input shaft using the special tool.
TSB Revision
22-36
MANUAL TRANSAXLE <FWD> - Intermediate Gear Assembly
INTERMEDIATE GEAR ASSEMBLY

I
MZZMJAS
6 4 I
d Disassembly steps
l
I)* 1. Snap ring * ** 2. Taper roller bearing ** 3. Bearing sleeve l * 4. 1 st speed gear 5. Needle bearing l a 6. Synchronizer ring l * 7. Synchronizer spring *C 8. 1 st-2nd speed synchronizer sleeve I)* 9. Synchronizer key *I) I)+ IO. 1 st-2nd speed synchronizer hub l * 11. Synchronizer ring l * 12. 2nd speed gear 13. Needle bearing ** l * 14. Taper roller bearing 15. Intermediate gear-
MD998348-01

2. REMOVAL OF TAPER ROLLER BEARING / 4.1ST SPEED GEAR
Remove the taper roller bearing, 1 st speed gear and bearing sleeve using the special tool as illustrated.
Caution 1. Do not reuse the bearing removed from the shaft. 2. Replace the inner and outer races of the taper roller d bearing as a set. TSB Revision
MANUAL TRANSAXLE <FWD> - Intermediate Gear Assemblv
22-37
10. REMOVAL OF lST-ZND SPEED SYNCHRONIZER HUB / 12. 2ND SPEED GEAR Remove the 1 st-2nd speed synchronizer assembly and 2nd speed gear together using the special tool as illustrated.
14. REMOVAL OF TAPER ROLLER BEARING Use the special tool as illustrated. Caution 1. Do not reuse the bearing removed from the shaft. 2. Replace the inner and outer races of the taper roller bearing as a set.
210022
INSPECTION INTERMEDIATE GEAR l Check the outer surface of the intermediate gear where the needle bearing is mounted for damage, abnormal wear and seizure [portion @I. l Check the splines for damage and wear.
Spine
NEEDLE BEARING l Combine the needle bearing with the shaft or bearing sleeve and gear and check that it rotates smoothly without abnormal noise or play. l Check the needle bearing cage for deformation.
TSB Revision
22-38
MANUAL TRANSAXLE <FWD> - Intermediate Gear Assembly SYNCHRONIZER RING l Check the clutch gear teeth for damage and breakage. l Check paper lining on cone I.D. for damage, wear, and flaking.
Damage and breakage
TFMOllE
Force the synchronizer ring toward the clutch gear and check clearance A. Replace if it is out of specification. Limit: 0.5 mm (.02 in.)
Syndhronizer ring
GAar
TFMOll:
SYNCHRONIZER SLEEVE AND HUB l Combine the synchronizer sleeve and hub and check that they slide smoothly. l Check that the sleeve is free from damage at its inside front and rear ends. l Check for wear of the hub end surfaces (in contact with each speed gear). Caution When replacing, replace the synchronizer hub and sleeve as a set. SYNCHRONIZER KEY AND SPRING l Check for wear of the synchronizer key center protrusion. l Check the spring for weakness, deformation and breakage.
201045
SPEED GEARS l Check the bevel gear and clutch gear teeth for damage and wear. l Check the synchronizer cone for rough surface, damage and wear. l Check the gear bore and front and rear ends for damage and wear.
TSB Revision
MANUAL TRANSAXLE <FWD> - Intermediate Gear Assembly
22-39
MD998350-01
SERVICE POINTS OF REASSEMBLY 14. INSTALLATION OF TAPER ROLLER BEARING Install the taper roller bearing over the intermediate gear using the special tool. Caution When installing the bearing, push the inner race only.
11.8. INSTALLATION OF SYNCHRONIZER RINGS The 1 st speed synchronizer ring has an identification mark.
Identification mark
Front +
10. INSTALLATION OF lST-2ND SPEED SYNCHRONIZER HUB / 9. SYNCHRONIZER KEY / 8. lST-2ND SPEED SYNCHRONIZER SLEEVE / 7. SYNCHRONIZER SPRING (1) Combine the Ist-2nd speed synchronizer hub and sleeve as illustrated.
Identification mark
Spring protrusion
(2) Assemble the synchronizer spring so that its projection may be engaged in the groove of the synchronizer key. NOTE (1) Take care to prevent the projections of the front and rear spring from sitting in the groove of the same key. (2) A synchronizer spring of a different shape from what is shown may be installed; however, there is no difference in installation procedure.
TSB Revision
22-40
MANUAL TRANSAXLE <FWD> - Intermediate Gear Assembly (2) Install the Ist-2nd speed synchronizer assembly over the intermediate gear using the special tool. Caution 1. When installing the synchronizer assembly, L/: make sure that three synchronizer keys are seated correctly in respective grooves of the synchronizer ring. 2. After installation of the synchronizer assembly, check that the 3rd speed gear rotates smoothly.
MD998350-01 / 1 st-2nd speed synchronizer assembly MD998348-01
2100022
3. INSTALLATION OF BEARING SLEEVE Install the 1st speed gear and bearing sleeve together over the intermediate gear using the special tool.
MD998350-01
1st speed gear

20106
2. INSTALLATION OF TAPER ROLLER BEARING Install the taper roller bearing over the intermediate using the special tool. Caution When installing the bearing, push the inner race only.
1. INSTALLATION OF SNAP RING Select and install a snap ring that will result in an intermediate gear bearing end play that is the standard value. Standard value: 0.01 - 0.14 mm (.0004 - .006 in.)
TSB Revision
MANUAL TRANSAXLE <FWD> - Output Shaft.Assembly
22-41
MZZMKAH
OUTPUT SHAFT ASSEMBLY

DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY L
/ id
Disassembly steps
** l * I. Taper roller bearing *I) I)* 2. Taper roller bearing 3. Output shaft
210028
I8I
Press

1. 2. REMOVAL OF TAPER ROLLER BEARINGS Remove the taper roller bearing using the special tool as illustrated. Caution 1. Do not reuse the bearings removed from the shaft. 2. Replace the inner and outer races of the taper roller bearing as a set.
71 nn75

MD998350-01
1. 2. INSTALLATION OF TAPER ROLLER BEARINGS Install the taper roller bearing using the special tool. Caution When installing the bearing, push the inner race only.
TSB Revision
22-42
MANUAL TRANSAXLE <FWD> - Shift Rails and Forks

MZZMLAF
SHIFT RAILS AND FORKS

7-5
i-s
Disassembly steps 1. 1 st-2nd speed shift fork 2. 1 st-2nd speed shift rail 3. 3rd4th speed shift fork 4. 5th-reverse speed shift rail l a 5. Interlock plunger 6. 3rd-4th speed shift rail 7. Reverse shift lug
201073
Interlock
Reverse shift lug

5. INSTALLATION OF INTERLOCK PLUNGER Insert the interlock plunger at illustrated position of the 3rd-4th speed shift rail.
TSB Revision
MANUAL TRANSAXLE <FWD> - Differential Assembly
22-43
DIFFERENTIAL ASSEMBLY I
Disassembly steps ** 1. Bolt 2. Differential drive gear ** *+ 3. Taper roller bearing l * l + 4. Lock pin l * 5. Pinion shaft l * 6. Pinion l * 7. Washer ** 8. Side gear l * 9. Spacer (Select) 10. Differential case
TFM0054 Adhesive: 3M Stud Locking / ]PartNo.417Ooreqr _ . .
130-i40Nnl 94- 101 ft.lbs.
Press ti Bearmg

3. REMOVAL OF TAPER ROLLER BEARING Remove the taper roller bearing using the special tool as illustrated. Caution 1. Do not reuse the bearing removed from the differential case. 2. Replace the inner and outer races of the taper roller bearing as a set. ,
TSB Revision
22-44
MANUAL TRANSAXLE <FWD> - Differential Assembly

4. REMOVAL OF LOCK PIN
Lock pin Pinion shaft
Drive out the lock pin from the hole A using a punch. :,,)
2 150020

9. INSTALLATION OF SPACER / 8. SIDE GEAR / 7. WASHER / 6. PINION / 5. PINION SHAFT (I 1 Install the spacer on the back of the side gear and then install the gear in the differential case. Caution When installing a new side gear, use a spacer of medium thickness [0.93 - 1.00 mm (.036 - .04 in.)].
(2) Set the washer on the back of each pinion and insert the two pinions to specified position while engaging them with the side gears and turning them. (3) Insert the pinion shaft.
(4) Measure the backlash between the side gears and pinions. Standard value: 0.025 - 0.150 mm (.OOl - .006 in.) (5) If the backlash is out of specification, disassemble again and using correct spacer, reassemble and adjust. Caution Adjust for same backlash of both side gears.
160124
Differen-
4. INSTALLATION OF LOCK PIN Align the pinion shaft lock pin hole with the case lock pin hole and insert the lock pin. Caution 1. Do not reuse the lock pin. 2. The lock pin head must be sunk from the flange surface of the differential case.
ock pin end with
TSB Revision
MANUAL TRANSAXLE <FWD>
Differential Assembly / Speed- ometer Driven Gear Assembly
22-45
3. INSTALLATION OF TAPER ROLLER BEARING Install the taper roller bearings on both sides of the differential case. Caution When press-fitting the bearings, push the inner race only.
TFYOO4Q
1. INSTALLATION OF BOLTS Apply specified adhesive to the entire threads of the bolts and quickly tighten in the order shown to specified torque. Specified adhesive: 3M Stud Locking Part No. 4170 or equivalent Caution If a bolt is reused, remove traces of oil adhesive completely from the threads.
The numerals @to @ indicate the tightening sequence.
9
SPEEDOMETER DRIVEN GEAR ASSEMBLY

MZ2MNAE
Disassembly steps
l l
I. O-ring 2. Spring pin * 3. Speedometer driven gear 4. Oil seal 5. Sleeve *

201078

3. INSTALLATION OF SPEEDOMETER DRIVEN GEAR Apply gear oil sparingly to the speedometer driven gear shaft and insert the shaft. 2. INSTALLATION OF SPRING PIN Install the spring pin in such a way that its slit does not face the gear shaft.
201075
TSB Revision
22-46
MANUAL TRANSAXLE <FWD> - Clutch Housing Assembly

M22MPAM
CLUTCH HOUSING ASSEMBLY

DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMELY
iJ
15-22Nm II- 15 ft.lbs.
14
/ 43
15-
m16----@
20-27Nm 15- 19ft.lbs.
2100019
Disassembly steps 1. Bolt 2. Select lever assembly 3. Select lever shoe 4. Interlock plate bolt 5. Gasket 4~ l a 6. Lock pin +* I)* 7. Spring pin 8. Neutral return spring 9. Stopper body 10. Control finger 11. Interlock plate 12. Neutral return spring assembly 13. Control shaft 14. Control shaft boot l * 15. Oil seal
* 16. Needle bearing I)+ 17. Needle bearing ; 98: F:;tch housing 20. Return spring 21. Stopper plate 22. Spring pin
1 TSB Revision
MANUAL TRANSAXLE <FWD> - Clutch Housing Assembly SERVICE POINTS OF DISASSEMBLY
22-47
6. REMOVAL OF LOCK PIN Drive out the lock pin from the control finger using the pin punch. Caution When removing the lock pin, turn the control lever to such position that the lock pin will not contact the clutch housing.
7. REMOVAL OF SPRING PIN Drive out the spring pin from the stopper body using the pin punch. Caution When removing the spring pin, pull the control shaft in the direction illustrated so that the spring pin will not contact the clutch housing.

17.16. INSTALLATION OF NEEDLE BEARINGS Install the needle bearing flush with the surface A of the clutch housing.
15. INSTALLATION OF OIL SEAL Install the control shaft oil seal using a socket wrench.
Socket wrench Oil seal
7. INSTALLATION OF SPRING PIN / 6. LOCK PIN (I) Install new spring pin and lock pin using the special tool. Caution Do not reuse the spring pin and lock pin. (2) Install the spring pin with its slit at right angle to the control shaft center.
TSB Revision
22-48
MANUAL TRANSAXLE <AWD> - General Information

GENERAL INFORMATION
Ist-2nd speed synchronizer assembly
M22BAAV
~
I\, i ~
Transaxle case 3rd-4th speed synchronizer assembly Input shaft 5th speed gear
Center shaft
Viscous coupling
Center differentral
Reverse idler gear
\
Front differential
TFMOllO
TSB Revision
MANUAL TRANSAXLE <AWD> - Specifications
22-49
MZZCA-B
SPECIFICATIONS
Items Model Applicable engine Type Gear ratio 1 St 2nd 3rd 4th 5th Reverse Reduction ratio Primary Front differential Transfer Speedometer gear ratio (driven/drive) Oil quantity liters (qts.) Transaxle Transfer Specifications W5MGl-0-FNBR 6G72-DOHC (Turbo) 5-speed transaxle floor shift 3.071 1.739 1.103 0.823 0.659 3.076 1.375 2.888 0.814 27136 2.4 (2.5) 0.27 (.29)
LL U B R I C A N T S
I t e m s Specified lubricants 1 Quantity lit. (qts.)
MUCD-B
classification GL4 or higher 1 Transfer oil seal lip
a:
TSB Revision
22-50
- Special T.ools
MZZDA-B
SPECIAL TOOLS
foreign object entry
TSB Revision
MANUAL TRANSAXLE <AWD> - Service Adjustment Procedures
22-51

TRANSMISSION OIL LEVEL INSPECTION
M22FBAE2
TRANSMISSION OIL REPLACEiVlENT
MUFCAJ
(I) Position vehicle on a flat level and remove filler and drain plugs to drain transmission oil.
(2) Pour in fresh transmission oil through filler port. Transmission oil: Hypoid gear oil, SAE 75W-85W conforming to API classification GL-4 or higher Transaxle: 2.4 liters (2.5 qts.) Transfer: 0.27 liters (.29 qts.) (3) After checking to be sure that the oil level is the specified level, tighten the filler plug at the specified torque.
1 TSB Revision
22-52 MANUAL TRANSAXLE <AWD>
- Service Adjustment Procedures

MZZFDAJ )
(I) Disconnect the drive shaft from the transaxle. (Refer to GROUP 26 - Drive Shaft.) (2) Remove the transfer assembly. (3) Using a flat-tip (-) screwdriver, remove the oil seal.
ij
L.H. side
For L.H.
Dust seal .
For R.H.
(4) Install the oil seals using the following procedure: Using the special tool, tap the oil seal into the transaxle. Note that there are two types of oil seals, one for R.H. and the other for L.H., and the shape of each type is different, as shown.
(5) Drive shaft 011 seal must be installed in the direction shown. (6) $4~1~ a coatrng of the transmission oil to the lip of the oil Transmission oil: Hypoid gear oil, SAE 75W-90 or 75W-85W conforming to API classification GL-4 or higher
wision
MANUAL TRANSAXLE <AWD> -
Service Adjustment Procedures / Shift Lever Assembly22-53
TRANSFER OIL SEAL REPLACEMENT
MUFGAH
(1) Pull out the propeller shaft from the transfer. (Refer to GROUP 25 - Propeller Shaft.) (2) Using a flat-tip (-) screwdriver, remove the oil seal.
Front exhaust p6eU .
09FOO64
& MD998304-01
(3) Using the special tool, tap the drive shaft oil seal into the transfer. (4) Apply a coating of the transmission oil to the lip of the oil seal. Transmission oil: Hypoid gear oil, SAE 75W-90 or 75W-85W conforming to API classi-. fication GL-4 or higher
MZ2FEAH
LJ
-3
-----XL I
Refer to P.22-9.
SHIFT LEVER ASSEMBLY

Refer to P.22-13.
M22GE-B
TSB Revision
22-54
- Transaxle Control
TRANSAXLE CONT.ROL
Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation l Removal and Installation of Front Console Assembly (Refer to GROUP 52A-Floor Console.)
Transaxle control cable assembly removal steps l * 1. AirhoseA ** 2. Air cleaner cover, Air intake hose A ** 3. Vacuum pipe 4. CD amp. (vehicles with CD player) l * 5. Connection for transaxle control cable assembly (Shift lever assembly side) 6. Retainer 7. Transaxle control cable assembly
Shift lever assembly removal steps l * 1. AirhoseA I)+ 2. Air cleaner cover, Air intake hose A l * 3. Vacuum pipe I)* 5. Connection for transaxle control cable assembly (Shift lever assembly side) 8. Shift lever assembly
TSB Revision
MANUAL TRANSAXLE <AWD> - Transaxle Control INSPECTION

l l l
22-55
M22JCAFZ
Check the transaxle control cable assembly for function and for damage. Check the boot for damage. Check each bushing for wear or abrasion, sticking, impeded action, and damage.
M22JDAM
5. CdNNECTlON OF TRANSAXLE CONTROL CABLE ASSEMBLY (SHIFT LEVER ASSEMBLY SIDE) Refer to P.22-12. 3. INSTALLATION OF VACUUM PIPE If the vacuum pipe has a stepped part, connect the vacuum hose to the pipe securely, up to the stepped part, as shown in the figure.
03FOO 8
Air intake hose C
2. CONNECTION OF AIR CLEANER COVER, AIR INTAKE HOSE A Align slots indicated by arrows in air intake hose A with n markings on air intake hoses B and C; then, insert hoses B and C all the way into air intake hose A.
Airmtake hose A Air intake hose B

05FOO2:
Air hose A
1. CONNECTION OF AIR HOSE A Connect the hoses ensuring that paint marks are aligned with projections. Insert air hoses B and C into air hose A all the way, or up to the step in hose A. Caution Be careful not to allow any foreign matter to get into the hoses, pipes, or the intercooler itself.
05FOOZE
1 TSB Revision
22-56
MANUAL TRANSAXLE <AWD> - Transaxle Assembly

MUMA-B ~
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
Post-installation Operation l Installation of Transfer Assembly (Refer to P.22-59.) l Supplying of Transmission Oil (Refer to P.2351,) l Checking Operation of Shift Lever at Each Position l Checking the Operation of Meters and Gauges
19 Nm 13 f;t.lbs.
Hose clamp
4.0 Nm
OSFOllO
Removal steps
1. Side under cover * 2. Air hose A 4 3. Air cleaner cover, Air intake hose A I)* 4. Vacuum pipe 5. Air cleaner element 6. Air cleaner body 7. Battery 8. Battery seat, Washer tank 9. Connection for transaxle control cable
l l
TSB Revision

45 Nm aa 33ftlbs. .,.,
22-57
.15
09FOO91
31 Nm 22 ftlbs.
50-72Nm 43 - 52 ft.lbs.
28
9.0Nm
4.0 ftlbs.
10. Connection for clutch tube bracket 11. Connection for clutch release cylinder 12. Connection for transaxle mount 13. Plug 14. Transaxle mount bracket (Body side) I)* 15. Mounting stopper 16. Transaxle mount bracket (Transaxle side) 17. Transaxle assembly lower part coupling bolt 4* 18. Connection for tie rod end l * 19. Connection for lower arm ball joint
20. Right member 21. Starter cover 22. Starter Mb 23. Drive shaft (Left side), Inner shaft assembly +* l * 24. Drive shaft (Right side) 25. Connection for transaxle stay (Front bank side) 26. Connection for transaxle stay (Rear bank side) 27. Transaxle assembly lower part coupling bolt 28. Transaxle assembly
TSB Revision
22-58
MANUAL TRANSAXLE <AWD> - Transaxle Assembly SERVICE POINTS OF REMOVAL

MPMBBB
11. REMOVAL OF CLUTCH RELEASE CYLINDER / 12. CONNECTION OF TRANSAXLE MOUNT L-J Refer to PZ-15. 18. DISCONNECTION OF TIE ROD END / 19. LOWER ARM BALL JOINT Refer to P.22-16. 23. REMOVAL OF DRIVE SHAFT (LEFT SIDE), INNER SHAFT ASSEMBLY / 24. DRIVE SHAFT (RIGHT SIDE) / 27. TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY LOWER COUPLING BOLT / 28. TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY Refer to P.22-16.
M22MDAU
24. INSTALLATION OF DRIVE SHAFT (RIGHT SIDE) / 15. MOUNTING STOPPER Refer to P.22-17.
4. INSTALLATION OF VACUUM PIPE If the vacuum pipe has a stepped part, connect the vacuum hose to the pipe securely, up to the stepped part, as shown in the figure.
03FOOE
3. INSTALLATION OF AIR CLEANER COVER, AIR INTAKE HOSE A Align slots indicated by arrows in air intake hose A with LI markings on air intake hoses B and C; then, insert hoses B and C all the way into air intake hose A. Insert air intake hoses B and C all the way up to the roots on the turbocharger end.
Air intake hose B
05FOO23
Air hose C
Air hose A /
2. INSTALLATION OF AIR HOSE A Connect the air hoses ensuring that alignment marks are aligned with projections. Insert air hoses B and C into pipe all the way to its step. Caution Be careful not to allow any foreign matter to get into the hoses, pipes, or the intercooler itself. #L.&J
TSB Revision
MANUAL TRANSAXLE <AWD> - Transfer Assemblv
22-59
M22VA- _
TRANSFER.ASSEMBLY
7
Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation l Draining and Supplying of Transfer Oil (Refer to P.22-51.) l Removal and Installation of Active Front Venturi Skirt (Refer to GROUP 51 -Front Bumper.) l Removal and Installation of Front Exhaust Pioe (defer to GROUP 15 - Exhaust Pipe and Main Muffler.)
8561 -
09FOOO6
Sleeve yoke lOGO
1. Transfer assembly
Gear oil: Hypoid gear oil, SAE 75W-90 or 75W-85W conforming to API classification GL-4 or higher
M22VBAC
1. REMOVAL OF TRANSFER ASSEMBLY Caution 1. Be cautious to avoid damaging the transfer oil seal lip. 2. Cover the transfer opening with the special tool to prevent transaxle oil discharge and the entry of foreign objects. I
09FOOO8 I 09FOOO9 I
3. The propeller shaft should be suspended so that it is not sharply bent.
09AOO27
TSB Revision
22-60
MANUAL TRANSAXLE <dWD> - Transaxle Assembly
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
The W5MGl transaxle cannot be disassembled. If any parts other than describes below are defective, replace the transaxle assembly. REPLACEABLE PART
1. * 2. 3. *a 4. l 4 5. 6.
l
Transaxle to transfer connecting bolt Transfer case oil seal Transfer oil seal guide Input shaft rear seal cap Center shaft oil seal Air vents (breather caps) for transaxle and transfer Oil filler plugs for transaxle and transfer Oil drain plugs for transaxle and transfer
TFM0157

6. INSTALLATION OF CENTER SHAFT OIL SEAL Fabricate a tool having the following dimensions from a pipe to install the oil seal. Dimension : I.D. . . . ..___........._...................... Approx. 27 mm (1.06 in.) O.D. . . . . . .._...........___............_..... Approx. 31 mm (1.22 in.) Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . __.. . . _____. Approx. 200 mm (7.87 in.)
TSB Revision
22-61
5. INSTALLATION OF INPUT SHAFT REAR SEAL CAP Install the input shaft rear seal .cap.
MD99,8812
2. INSTALLATION OF TRANSFER CASE OIL SEAL Using the special tool, install the transfer case oil seal.
TSB Revision
23-1
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
CONTENTS
ANNULUS GEAR AND TRANSFER DRIVE GEAR SET ................................................................................................ DIFFERENTIAL ........................................................................ END CLUTCH ASSEMBLY .................................................... FRONT CLUTCH ASSEMBLY ................................................ GENERAL INFORMATlON .................................................... KICKDOWN SERVO ................................................................ LOW-REVERSE BRAKE ............................................................ OIL PUMP .................................................................................... PLANETARY GEAR ................................................................ REAR CLUTCH ASSEMBLY .................................................... SELECTOR LEVER ASSEMBLY ............................................ SERVICE ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES ............................ Accelerator Switch Inspection and Adjustment ................ Drive Shaft Oil Seals Replacement .................................... Inhibitor Switch and Control Cable Adjustment ................ Key Interlock Mechanism Check ........................................ Kickdown Servo Adjustment ................................................ Line Pressure Adjustment .................................................... Reducing Pressure Adjustment ........................................ Selector Lever Operation Check ........................................ Shift Lock Mechanism Check ............................................ Speedometer Cable Replacement .................................... 102 104 99 95 2 107 107 93 100 97 58 46 50 52 52 50 47 48 49 50 51 53
MZJAA-
Transmission Fluid Level Inspection ................................ 46 Transmission Fluid Replacement ........................................ 46 SPECIAL TOOLS ........................................ . ............................... 16 I SPECIFICATIONS .......................... :......................................... 12 General Specifications ........................................................ 12 Lubricants ............................................................................ 15 Service Specifications ........................................................ 12 Spacer and Snap Ring ........................................................ 13 Valve Body Spring Identification Chart ............................ 13 SPEEDOMETER DRIVEN GEAR ASSEMBLY .................... 106 TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY ........................................................ TRANSAXLE CONTROL* ........................................................ TRANSAXLE OIL COOLER, HOSES, TUBES .................... TRANSFER SHAFT .................................................................... TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................................ 62 54 66 92
19 A/T Safety-lock System Troubleshooting ........................ 44 Converter Stall Test ............................................................ 43 Diagnosis and Test ................................................................ 22 Element in Use at Each Position of Selector Lever ........ 31 Inspection of Control System ............................................ 28 Inspection of Electronic Control System Components .... 32 Oil Pressure Tests ................................................................ 39 Shift Patterns ....................................................................31, 42 Troubleshooting Guide ........................................................ 20 VALVE BODY . . . .._._.................................................................... 108
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) (1) A Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), which uses a driver-side air bag, has been installed in the 3668GT. (2) The SRS includes the following components: impact sensors, SRS diagnosis unit: SRS warning light, air bag module, clock spring, interconnecting wiring. Other SRS-related components (that may have to be removed/installed in connection with SRS service or maintenance) are indicated in the table of contents by an asterisk (*). WARNING! (1) Improper service or maintenance of any component of the SRS, or any SRS-related component, can lead to personal injury or death to service personnel (from inadvertent firing of the air bag) or to the driver (from rendering the SRS inoperative). (2) Service or maintenance of any SRS component or SRS-related component must be performed only at an authorized MITSUBISHI dealer. (3) MlTSUBISHI dealer personnel must thoroughly review this manual, and especially its GROUP 52B Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), before beginning any service or maintenance of any component of the SRS or any SRS-related component.
23-2
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - General Information

MZ3BABW
GENERAL INFORMATION
CROSS-SECTIONAL VIEW
I
\ 1
TFA0540
TSB Revision
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - General Information HYDRAULIC CONTROL SYSTEM

<F4A2 1 - Neutral> i \ t
Low-reverse hr3b.3 3ear clutch IYhF I\\\\\\
23-3
7 1 ,/I // L1 jierhaustvalve
//
j/
.j/,
Damper cluG control solenoid valve To lubncatlon (front) c To lubncatlon ,-= (rear)
.
k&!&!&I h valve
---il
Transaxld
I e 1 11
l-2 shift valve
Torque
I 1 Shik control I!: solenoid valve 6
;ilEjJJBi, ;?A+ S3ivcontroI I/
\sl
[ 011 filter J Ex 011 pan m Line pressure
i % valve
Oil pump suction pressure a Modulated line pressure Pressure control solenoid I valve pressure
Irl Damper clutch pressure m Damper clutch control solenoid valve pressure
- Tyue converter and lubrication sure -_ucing pressure
TFA0070
TSB Revision
23-4
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - General information
<F4A21 - Parking>
Kickdown servo Tort Front clutch Rear clutch Low-reverse brake End clutch -
F 12 / !P
ii /
Ii
OFF z7szzz
I I C jamper clutc C ontrol solerwu v alve To lubrrcatron c (front) To lubrrcatton c (rear)

J
10
OFF
-IF=?
Reducing L valve
valve
1'7 H I------ -i II/ II valve B

solenoid
snort control
Pressure control
N-R control valve
OFF
Pressure control solenord
m Lrne pressure
m Oil pump suction pressure 0 Modulated line pressure Pressure control solenoid I valve pressure
0 Damper clutch pressure Damper clutch control solenoid @gjJ valve pressure
Torque converter and lubrication pressure Reducing pressure
TFA0071
TSB Revision
AUTOMATIC T
cF4A21 - Drive-Stopping>
LE - General Information
23-5
Torque converter Front clutch
Kickdown servo Low-reverse brake Rear clutch End clutch
jy
~&~ntroiun~t
Damper clutch control solenc valve To lubrmtl (front)
Torque converter control valve
I31 F
EX
Pressure control
*Y - -4 -_ _
Oil filter Oil pan Line pressure
Torque converter
x Lme relief valve

EX
Pressure ^,?t*,.l
[Damper clutch pressure and lubrication 0 Modulated line pressure Pressure control solenoid I valve pressure Damper clutch control solenoid valve pressure
0 pressure
Reducing pressure
1 Drive (Stop)
TFA0242
1 TSB Revision
23-6
<F4A21 - Drive-First>
Kickdow:: servo tront LlutLh ILOWreverse Ibrake End clutch
II rransaxk!
II
, j p Ja
P
Damper Cll cmltrol SOlf
II
Iill
/I I%--
----=*
To lubrlcdtlon + (Wir) Torque COWtei control valv!?
ihlfr rontrol Vllve
,k.x,
P Rhln71
JI
&
11 I
PC \JPl<f
V B I L B : 4 i4 - _____ I,1
2 n I6 ,S^_ @II pan E*
PUW
; ; LlrlC r&t. Y$ __.--
[ LIW pressure
/ 011 pump SUC!IO!l pressure n Mod&ted 1x1~ pressure

El
1 pressurs
Torque cnnvertar and lubrication
Damper clutch co L&e pressure
] RedllCl!?g preswre
Pressure contrcJ snlerloid wlve presslirs psiizq
TFA0072
TSB Revision
15
b/
ib
fPIV

<FLEA21 - Drive-Second>
23-7
Toryl~e cixwertsi irunt clutch hd clu!ch
KIckdown servo
i4 m Btl -314.3 hift valve
1,
Lh1per clutcn contm so1PPoic
V-SVI
// L!i
OFF
1 2 shift
\~alVf3
n
J 0 :
Tc %ricat~ni-i ifrunt)
r0 IU~II~~~IIOII irear
c
c=
1 z ic!!ly
00
I oiqvc conve, tar control valw
I! I
_solsyd / valve A #
ON
111
L1 ; LIneieii,~f 0 0 Vd!P , 0
LIIW pr5u
rorque iorweiir, SlU .i~id /iibcritlm
/ 0 pump Suctlotl pressure
Damper clutch F Damper clutch c Yale pressure :nlenoid
/ Modulated llne pressure
Drive (Second) 1
TFA0073
TSB Revision
23-8
cF4A21 - Drive-Third>
Kickdo:.rn sewn ,,\\\\ \ b
p th11per dutcI1 mlirol solenud ia1vLl 1~0 IublIcatiun ifrunt] lo lubrlcailarl += kari Ioiquc corlverler (0m DO va,\a /x ,3
/j
/ ! Shift cct:troI solewld valve Es 11 - ii -
m LIW pre55ure Toryue cnveit~r and lubr~cdt~on SE
j O!l pump SUCtlcn
pre3iure
Damper clutch F Damper clutch c b
Moduated line pressure P9xrP COnfrUl solenoid
0 L p&K;
1( Drive T h i r d ) 1
TFA0074
1 TSB Revision

cF4A21 - Drive-Fourth>
23-9
T<,r:,tp r-nnverter trrmt clu:ctl FM! ~CIUtCtl
K~ckdown servo Low !e?rise bra*,; P
i i;::o
V~llVC lo ILibrlcatlon + (!m!!) To lubricd!iw + lreari
---..___ /
1 1 /J
LlllC rel1rf
L I$ pir-w!w
j @!I plimp Suction pressu:e i Modulated line pressuie
Damper clutch pressure Damper clutch cnntrol snleno~d valve pressure
rorque co,lcrI?r r<!?d luhriciitloii pressuic

Reduclr~~] piessuri:
TFA007t
1 TSB Revision
23-10
<F4A21 - Lock-up-First>
Kickmwn sers.a iirar ciuic!i brake Fnd i:l!itcib
Damper lutch cclntm .alw
lamper ClUtCh :ontrol snlenold /alvr lo lubrlcatlorl . ifront) To lubncatinn s (Wiil)
II_-
---h-H+
II
I ON
Shift c o n t r o l ix snlewld valve A
ill c.
II II
Ii m 011 pump iUCIIO!I pressure
Darn~ei clutch piessure Damper clutcl control soleno;d valve pressllra
c:
,e co~ver:ei ilrxl lubrcatlon
,urc
u M&t&ted !\ne pisss!ire
El valve p&re
Pressure control solenoid
Lock-up (First) /
TFA0076
1 TSB Revision
L.
.a*+
4,
.*i
-w:
1/(
.:, v$<::i&
i.f
Lli k
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - General lnformatisn

<F4A21 - Reverse>
Torque converter Low-reverse Front clutch End clutch
Kickdown servo
ransaxle ontrol unit
-3/4-3 hift valve Hear clutch exhaust valve I!
Damper clutct control soleno valve To lubrlcatlon c (front) :p,$matlon c Torque converter control 0s F valve
Shift control valve
,:+
Ex E
I,
Ive
Pressure control 2 valve
Pressure N-R control -7
----___ i+ Oil filter

011 pan
\I
EX
H .j :o valve
;tro
0 Oil pump suction pressure 0 Modulated line pressure Damper clutch Damper clutch valve pressure Ire
Line pressure Torque converter and lubrlcatlon pressure Reducing pressure
I solenoid
Pressure control solenoid valve pressure
I Reverse I
TFA0077
1 TSB ,Revision
23-12 SPECIFICATIONS
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Specifications
~
M23CA.C
Items Model Type Torque converter We Engine stall speed Stall torque ratio Transaxle Type Gear ratio First Second Third Fourth Reverse Final gear ratio Speedometer gear ratio (Drive/Driven) Electronically controlled 4-speed full-automatic 2.551 1.488 1.000 0.685 2.176 3.958 36128 3 element with damper clutch 2,200- 3,200 rpm 1.80 Specifications F4A33-I-MNN2 Full automatic 4 speed transaxle
terns Standard value Accelerator switch switching point Sleeve and selector lever assembly end play Transfer driven gear preload Low-reverse brake end play Input shaft end play Differential case preload Differential gear and pinion backlash Oil pump side clearance Output flange bearing end play Front clutch end play Rear clutch end play End clutch end play Specifications 2 - 6 (.079 - .24) 15.2 - 15.9 (598 - .625) 0 . 0 7 5 - 0 . 1 3 5 (.0030- .0053) 1 .O - 1.2 (.0394 - .0472) 0.3 - 1 .O t.0118 - .0394) 0.075 - 0.135 (0030 - .0053) 0.025 - 0.150 LOOI 0 - .0059) 0.03 - 0.05 (.0012 - .0020) 0 - 0.09 (0 - .0035) 0.8 - 1 .O (0315 - .0394) 1 .O - 1 .j (.0394- .0472) 0.60 - 0.851.0236 - .0335)
M23CB-C
mm (in.)
1 TSB Revision
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Specifications VALVE BODY SPRING IDENTIFICATION CHART .

Part name Regulator valve spring l-2 shift valve spring Pressure control valve spring Rear clutch exhaust valve spring End clutch valve spring 23 shift valve spring N-R control valve spring Reducing valve spring Line relief spring Torque converter valve spring Shift control valve spring Damper clutch control valve spring Wire diameter 1.4 (.055) 0.6 (024) 0.45 (.0177) 0.7 (028) 0.6 (024) 0.8 (031) 0.7 (.028) 1.2 (.047) 1 .o (.039) 1.3 (.051) 0.5 (.020) 0.7 (.028) Outside diameter 15 (59) 7.6 (.299) 7.6 f.299) 6.8 (268) 6.6 7.0 9.2 8.9 7.0 9.0 (260) (.276) (.362) (350) (276) (.354) Length 52 (2.05) 26.6 (1.047) 21.3 (.839) 27.4 (1.079) 24.4 (.961) 27.5 (1.083) 32.1 (1.264) 29.5(1.161) 17.3 (.681) 22.6 f.890) 26.8 (1.055) 14.2 t.559) No. of turns 11.5 13.5 8.5 12.5 15.5 15.5 8.5 12.5 10 9.5 22 9.5
23-13
MZJCG-
mm (in.)
5.7 (.224) 6.2 (.244)
SPACER AND SNAP RING

Part name Thickness mm (in.) 3.62 3.65 3.68 3.71 3.74 3.77 3.80 3.83 3.86 3.89 3.92 3.95 3.98 1 .Ol 1.04 1.07 1 .I0 1 .I3 I. 16 1.19 1.22 1.25 1.28 1.31 (.0244) (.0256) (.0268) (0280) (.0291) (.0303) (.0315) (.0327) l.0339) (0350) (0362) (.0374) (0386) (.0398) (.0409) (.0421) (.0433) (.0445) (.0457) f.0469) (.0480) (.0492) (.0504) (.0516) Identification symbol 62 65 68 71 74 77 80 83 86 89 92 95 98 01 04 07 10 13 16 19 22 25 28 31 Part No. MD737444 MD737445 MD737446 MD737447 MD728802 MD728803 MD726804 MD728805 MD728806 MD726807 MD726808 M D726809 MD72881 0 MD72881 1 MD72881 2 MD72681 3 MD72881 4 MD72881 5 MD72881 6 MD72881 7 MD72881 8 MD72981 9 MD729820 MD72682 1
id
??$%justment of transfer driven gear preload)
TSB Revision
23-14
Part name
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Specifications

Thickness mm (in.) 5.9 6.0 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 6.7 6.8 6.9 l.232) f.236) i.240) (.244) (.248) (.252) (.256) (.260) (.264) (.268) l.272) Identification symbol A 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 83 86 89 92 95 98 01 04 07 J D K L G M N E 0 P Brown None Blue Brown None Blue Brown None Part No. MD731 736 MD731 737 MD731738 MD731 739 MD731 740 MD731 588 MD731 741 MD731742 MD731 743 MD731744 MD731 745 MD720937 MD720938 MD720939 MD720940 MD720941 MD720942 MD720943 MD720944 MD720945 MD710454 MD700270 MD710455 MD710456 MD700271 MD710457 MD71 0458 MD706574 MD710459 MD710460 MD73331 4 MD722538 MD721 014 MD721015 MD721016 MD721017 MD722539 MD73331 5
Pressure plate (for adjustment of low-reverse brake end play)
Spacer (for adjustment of differential case preload)
0.83 (.0327) 0.86 l.0339) 0.89 t.0350) 0.92 t.0362) 0.95 f.0374) 0.98 t.0386) 1 .Ol f.0398) 1.04 l.0409) 1.07 (.0421) I. 10 f.0433) 1.13 f.0445) 1.16(.0457) 1.19 l.0469) 1.22 (.0480) 1.25 (.0492) 1.28 i.0504) 1.31 (.0516) 1.34 l.0528) 1.37 f.0539) 1.76 1.82 1.88 1.94 2.00 2.06 2.12 2.18 t.0693) (.0717) i.0740) (.0764) t.0787) (.0811) l.0835) t.0858)
Snap ring for adjustment of output flange bearing end play)
TSB Revision
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Specifications.

Part name Spacer (for adjustment of differential gear and pinion backlash) Thickness mm (in.) 0.75 - 0.82 LO295 - .0323) 0.83 - 0.92 t.0327 - .0362) 0.93 - 1 .oo LO366 - .0394) 1.01 - 1 . 0 8 (.0398 - .0425) 1.09-1.16 LO429 - .0457) 1.3 i.051) 1.4* (.055) 1.5 (.059) 1.6 f.063) 1.7 t.067) 1.8 (.071) 1.9 (.075) 2.0 t.0791 2.1 f.083) 2.2 t.087) 2.3 (.091) 2.4 (.094) 1.05 1.30 1.55 1.80 2.05 f.0413) (.0512) (.0610) (.0709) (.0807) Identification symbol None Blue Brown None Blue Brown None Blue B r o w n None Blue Brown White Yellow None Green Pink Part No.
23-15
MD722986 MD722985 MD722984 MD722982 MD7;!2983 MD731 747 MD731 748 MD731 749 MD731750 MD731751 MD731 752 MD731 753 MD731 754 MD731 755 MD731756 MD731757 MD731 758 MD71 5800 MD71 5801 MD71 5802 MD71 5803 MD720849
Snap ring (for adjustment of front clutch and rear clutch end play) * __. Only for rear clutch
Snap ring (for adjustment of end clutch end play)
LUBRICANTS
Items Transaxle fluid liters (qts.) 1 Specified lubricants Dia ATF SP or MITSUBISHI PLUS ATF or equivalent 1 Quantity
M.23CD.B
Drive shaft oil seal lip
TSB Revision
23-16 SPECIAL TOOLS
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Special Tools

M23DA.B
Reassembly of valve body
1 TSB Revision
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Special Tools
23-17
MD998829
Installer adapter (60)
Driving of bearing
TSB Revision
23-18
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - SDecial Tools
Removal and installation of low/reverse
pnng compressor
Kickdown servo wrench adapter MD998916-2-01 Outer sleeve MD998916-3-01 Inner sleeve
MD998916-l-01
Kickdown servo
TSB Revision
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Troubleshootincl

Based upon use of the troubleshooting
23-19
M23EEAY
TROUBLESHOOTING
Checks should be made of fluid levels and the condition of the ATF, as well as the condition of the manual control cables; adjustments should then be made if found to be necessary.
Functional malfunctions of the ELC4A/T can lead to other problems, such as those described below: (I ) Improper maintenance and/or adjustments (2) Malfunctions of the electronic control functions (3) Malfunctions of mechanical functions (4) Malfunctions of hydraulic control functions (5) Malfunctions of engine performance etc. In order to properly determine (Troubleshoot) the source of these malfunctions, it is first essential to methodically question the user concerning the details of the problem, such as the condition of the problem, the situation at the time the problem occurred, and any other relevant information, all in as much detail as possible. The user should also be asked whether or not the problem has occurred more than once, and under what conditions. Subsequently, certain tests should be conducted in a certain order, as described at the left.
If a presumption has been made that there is an abnormal condition somewhere in the electronic-control system, check the fault code, in order to determine the probable location of the problem, by using a multi-use tester or voltmeter. I When the abnormal system is discovered, check each element (sensors, etc.) one by one, and make repairs as necessary.
I
When the abnormal condition is presumed to be in the oil-pressure-control system When the result of the oil-pressure test does not satisfy the specified pressure, check each system at places related to the valve body, check the oil-pressure passages for leakage, etc. I If the problem isunusually dirty ATF, abnormal noises, oil leakage, or slippage of the clutch or brakes, or an abnormal condition of the transaxle itself, disassemble and repair the transaxle.
TSB Revision
23-20
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Troubleshootina
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
resumed cause
38
Malfunction of transaxle control untt Abbrewatlons TPS = Throttle powon sensor DCCSV = Damper clutch control solenoid valve SCSV = Shift control solenoid valve OD = Overdwe
NOTE- @ indicates items of prlortty during Inspection. PSCV = Pressure control solenoid valve
1 TSB Revision
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Troubleshooting
23-21
1 i
E 7 E c II 1 1: 1: lr l!
11 1; 12 15 2c 2' 2; 2: 21 2: 2c 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
TSB Revision
23-22
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Troubleshooting DIAGNOSIS AND TEST

FLUID LEVEL AND CONDITION
1. 2. 3. Drive until the fluid temperature reaches the usual temperature [70 - 80C (160 - 18OF)]. Place vehicle on level floor. Move selector lever sequentially to every position to fill torque converter and hydraulic circuit with fluid, then place lever in N Neutral position. This operation is necessary to be sure that fluid level check is accurate. Before removing dipstick, wipe all dirt from area around dipstick. Then take out the dipstick and check the condition of the fluid. The transaxle should be overhauled under the following conditions. l If there is a burning odor. l If the fluid color has become noticeably blacker. l If there is a noticeably great amount of metal particles in the fluid. Check to see if fluid level is in HOT range on dipstick. If fluid level is low, add automatic transaxle fluid until level reaches HOT range. Low fluid level can cause a variety of conditions because it allows pump to take in air along with fluid. Air trapped in hydraulic circuit forms bubbles which make fluid spongy. Therefore, pressures will be erratic. Improper filling can also raise fluid level too high. When transaxle has too much fluid, gears churn up foam and cause same conditions which occur with low fluid level, resulting in accelerated deterioration of automatic transaxle fluid. d In either case, air bubbles can cause overheating, fluid oxidation, which can interfere with normal valve, clutch, and servo operation. Foaming can also result in fluid escaping from transaxle vent where it may be mistaken for a leak. Be sure to examine fluid on dipstick closely.
4.
5.
0
TM362
6.
,CONTROL CABLE
Whether control cable is properly adjusted can be confirmed by checking whether inhibitor switch is performing well. 1. Apply parking brakes and service brakes securely. 2. Place selector lever to R range. 3. Set ignition key to ST position. 4. Slowly move the selector lever upward until it clicks as it fits in notch of P range. If starter motor operates when lever makes a click, P position is correct. 5. Then slowly move selector lever to N range by the same procedure as in foregoing paragraph. If starter motor operates when selector lever fits in N, N position is correct. 6. Also check to be sure the vehicle doesnt begin to move and the lever doesnt stop between P-R-N-D. 7. The control cable is properly adjusted if, as described above, the starter motor starts at both the P range and the N range.
TSB Revision

OBTAINING FAULT CODES
23-23
(1) Connect the voltmeter or multi-use tester to the connector for diagnosis. (2) Read the output fault codes. Then follow the remedy procedures according to the FAULT CODE DESCRIPTION on the following page. NOTE l As many as a maximum of ten fault codes, in the sequence of occurrence, can be stored in the Random Access Memory (RAM) incorporated within the control unit. l If the number of stored fault codes or fault patterns exceeds ten, already stored fault codes will be erased, in sequence beginning with the oldest. l Do not disconnect the battery until all fault codes or fault patterns have been read out, because all stored fault codes or fault patterns will be canceled when the battery is disconnected.
p: E LC-4A/T ~9: Dlagnosls control @I: Ground
:Multi-use tester> Cigarette lighter socket Diagnosis connector
(3) If the fail-safe system is activated and the transaxle is locked in 3rd gear, the fault code in the Fail-Safe Code Description will be stored in the RAM. Three of these fault codes can be stored. (4) The cancellation will occur if, with the transaxle locked in 3rd gear, the ignition key is turned to the OFF position, but the fault code is stored in the RAM.
MB991 359
16POl51
TSB Revision
23-24
Code No.
FAULT CODE DESCRIPTION

Display Pattern Item Excessively large throttle position sensor output
l l l l
Remedial Action Check throttle position sensor connector. Check throttle position sensor on bench. Adjust throttle position sensor. Check accelerator switch (whether code number 24 is being output).
12
Excessively small throttle position sensor output
13
Defective or improperly adjusted throttle position sensor Improperly adjusted throttle position sensor
14
Open-circuited low-oiltemperature sensor
l l
Check oil temperature sensor connector. Check oil temperature sensor on bench.
16 I-lMnnM-. 17 rlnnnruuvl
Short-circuited high-oiltemperature sensor
Open-circuited high-oiltemperature sensor or shortcircuited low-oil-temperature sensor Open-circuited kickdown servo switch
l l
Check kickdown servo switch connector. Check kickdown servo switch on bench.
Short-circuited kickdown servo switch
Open-circuited ignition pulse pickup cable
Check ignition pulse signal line.
24
Open-circuited or improperly adjusted accelerator switch
l l l
Check accelerator switch connector Check accelerator switch on bench. Adjust accelerator switch.
12A0104 12A0107
1 TSB Revision

Zode No. Display Pattern Item Open-circuited pulse generator A
l l
23-25
Remedial Action Check pulse generator A or B on bench. Check vehicle-speed reed switch (chattering).
31
32
Open-circuited pulse generator B
Open-circuited shift control solenoid valve A
l l
Check solenoid valve connector. Check shift control solenoid valve A on bench.
42
Short-circuited shift control solenoid valve A
Open-circuited shift control solenoid valve B
l l
Check solenoid valve connector. Check shift control solenoid valve B on bench.
Short-circuited shift control solenoid valve B
45 uuuLNulM46
Open-circuited pressure control solenoid valve
l l
Check solenoid valve connector. Check pressure control solenoid valve on bench.
Short-circuited pressure control solenoid valve
Open-circuited damper clutch control solenoid valve
l l
Check solenoid valve connector. Check damper clutch control solenoid valve on bench.
Short-circuited damper clutch control solenoid valve
49
Defective damper clutch system
lllJl!12A0107 12A0105
Check damper clutch hydraulic circuit. l Check damper clutch control solenoid valve on bench. 0 Replace control unit.
l
TSB Revision
23-26
Code No.

Display Pattern Item 1 st speed shift not finish
l l l
Remedial Action Check connectors of pulse generators A and B. Check pulse generators A and B on bench. Rear clutch slipping Check connectors of pulse generators A and B. Check pulse generators A and B on bench. Rear clutch slipping Kickdown brake slipping Check connectors of pulse generators A and B. Check pulse generators A and B on bench. Front clutch slipping Rear clutch slipping Check connectors of pulse generators A and B. Check pulse generators A and B on bench. End clutch slipping Kickdown brake slipping Check torque reduction request signal line. Check torque reduction execution signal line.
52 uuuuu-ln-
2nd speed shift not finish
l l l l
53
3rd speed shift not finish
l l l l
4th speed shift not finish
l l l l
61
Short-circuited torque reduction request signal line or open-circuited torque reduction execution signal line Open-circuited torque reduction request signal line
l l
62
0 Check torque reduction request signal line.
\J
63
Short-circuited torque reduction execution signal line
Check torque reduction execution signal line.
12A0106
TSB Revision
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Troubleshootinn

FAIL-SAFE CODE DESCRIPTION
Dde
VO.
23-27
Related Self-Diagnosis 31
Display Pattern
Item Open-circuited pulse generator A
Fail-safe Fixed at 3rd (D) or 2nd (2, L)
81
82
Open-circulted pulse generator B
Fixed at 3rd (D) or 2nd (2, L)
32
Open- or short-circuited Fixed at 3rd shift control solenoid valve A
41,42
84
Open- or short-circuited Fixed at 3rd shift control solenoid valve B
43,44
85 uuu-
Open- or short-circuited Fixed at 3rd (D) pressure control or 2nd (2, L) solenoid valve
45,46
86 uuum
Shift not finish
Fixed at 3rd (D) or 2nd (2, L)
51,52 53,54
12L0296
TSB Revision
23-28
INSPECTION OF CONTROL SYSTEM

Check the control system by using the multi-use tester and following the procedure given below.
CONTROL SYSTEM INSPECTION TABLE

Check Item
sensor l Data list l Item No. 15
Cold engine (before start)
nglne warming up
l l
Data list Item No. 23
or circuit harness
Item No. 26
lerator pedal switch

l
Item No. 27
l l
Defective inhibitor switch circuit Defective TPS circuit
l l
Defective pulse generator A shielded wire External noise interference
TSB Revision

Check Item
23-29
l l
Defective pulse generator B shielded wire External noise interference
l l
l l
output where vehicle is stationary. Otherwise, vehicle-speed reed switch or circuit harness is defective.
Damper clutch slip l Data list l Item No. 47 DCCSV duty Data list Item No. 49
D range, 3rd speed, 1,500 rpm (tachometer reading) D range, 3rd speed, 3,500 rpm (tachometer reading) D range, 3rd speed, 1,500 rpm (tachometer reading) D range, 3rd speed, 3,500 rpm (tachometer reading)
100 - 300 rpm 0 rpm 0% Depends on loads
l l l l l l l
Defective damper clutch Defective ignition signal line or pulse generator B circuit Incorrect transmission fluid pressure Defective DCCSV Defective TCU Defective TPS circuit Defective pulse generator B circuit
l l
1 TSB Revision
23-30
TRANSMISSION CONTROL UNIT

T h e c o n n e c t o r h a s 4 2 p i n s t o a c c o m m o d a t e t h e i n c r e a s e d n u m b e r o f senso.r i n p u t s . Here are the pin assignments.
109. 110. 1. 3':
102. 103. 104. 105. 106. 107. 108.
101.
4.
Z: i: 9.
10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 51. 52. 53. 54. 55. 56. 57. 58. 59. 60. 61. 62. 63. 64.
Damper clutch control solenoid valve Shift control solenoid valve A Power source Ground Pressure control solenoid valve Shift control solenoid . valve . B* Engine communrcatron srgnai Power source Ground Ground Accelerator switch Diagnosis output terminal Air-conditioner relay signal Engine communication signal Diagnosis control terminal Engine communication signal Power source (backup) Kickdown servo switch Idle switch oil temperature sensor (Low temperature side) Oil temperature sensor (High temperature side) Throttle position sensor Sensor ground Vehicle-speed reed switch Inhibitor switch (P) Inhibitor switch (R) Inhibitor switch (N) Inhibitor switch (D) Inhibitor switch (2) Inhibitor switch (L) Overdrive switch Pulse generator B Pulse generator B Pulse generator A Pulse generator A Ground Ignition pulse Power mode signal
TFA0360
TSB Revision
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Troubleshooting ELEMENT IN USE AT EACH POSITION OF SELECTOR LEVER
23-31
/ L
NOTE Cl Front clutch C2 . Rear clutch C3 End clutch Bl . . . Low reverse brake B2 . . Kickdown brake OWC One way clutch
SHIFT PATTERNS
Two shift patterns are pre-stored in the control unit of this transaxle. One is the power pattern (for more powerful performance), and the other is the economy pattern (for improved fuel consumption and quieter operation). The driver can select and switch to the desired pattern by using the power/economy select switch on the center Iconsole. The solid lines shown in these shift patterns indicate up-shifts, and the broken lines indicate down-shifts. The reason why there is a difference between the shift points for upshifts and for down-shifts is so that up-shifts and down-shifts will not occur frequently when driving at a speed in the vicinity of the shift point. When the vehicle is stopped, there is a shift to 2nd gear in order to obtain a suitable creeping, but when the accelerator pedal is then depressed the vehicle starts off in 1st gear.
TSB .Revision
23-32
INSPECTION OF ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM COMPONENTS

Based on the wiring diagram. check whether the continuity and grounding of each harness is OK. I ~ Improper connection of connector, damaged or disconnected harness, or incorrect wiring connection. I I Reconnect the connector; repair or replace the harness.
1. Wiring
Continuity I Normal
2. Oil-temperature sensor
Vary the thermo-sensitive part from low temperature to high temperature and check the resistante between the terminals 1 an 2or2and3. 4 Changes of the resistance continuous and smooth.
Damaged or disconnected wiring J Replace the oiltemperature sensor
1750447 1: LOW temperature side 2: Ground 3: High temperature side
4 Normal
I:K
I 3. Throttlep~~~t,ion sensor
iI-
Check the resistance between terminals 1 and 4 of the TPS. 3.5 - 6.5 kW20C (68F) I Check the resistance between terminals 4 and 2 with the engine idling after throttle-valve opening warm-up.
hiah or infinite m
\ I
t
Damaged or discon- -----i nectec ..----Awiring I

v
TPS terminal
c
7FUO535
>
Replace the TPS.
/R esistance: \
more or less than 0.4 kQ/ Improper adjustment
1. 2. 3. 4.
Ground Idle switch output Power
Resistance: approx. 0.4 kR/ 20C (68F)
stallaiion.
Check for changes of the resistance between terminals 4 and 2 when the throttle valve is operated from the idling position o the fully open position.
Poor contact I
Changes of the resistance continuous and smooth.
TSB Revision

4. Pulse generator AorB iv Pulse generator terminals l-2: pulse generator A 3-4 pulse generator B
1750338 1 I \
23-33
aged or disconnected
Check the resistance between terminals 1 and 2 or 3 and 4 . 1
1fWWF;tf:
pulse
Connect the pulse generator and
front wheels raised.
With the selector lever at the L position and the engine running at 1,000 rpm, check the voltage waveform between terminals 1
Oscilloscope waveform Noise
1 .OOO mVp-p or higher
>
iJh
171092
Correct the inst.allation condition, or replace the pulse generator.

L-
f \ / With the selector lever at the L \ position and the engine running at 1,000 rpm. check the voltage waveform between terminals 3 and 4. * 500 mVp-p or higher I
Noise
Correct the installation condition. or redace the I 11 pulse generator,.
171092
Normal
1 TSB Revision
23-34
6. Pressurecontrol solenoid valve

Check the resistance between terminal 1 of the solenoid valve connector and the transaxle case. Short-circuit, or damaged or disconnected wiring 1
too low or too
IJ
2.9 + 0.3Q/20C (68F)
I
Foreign material caught between the valve and guide 4 Replace the PCSV.
1
-l
Connect 12V between the transaxle case and terminal 2; switch ON and OFF and check for
Solenoid valve connector terminals 1 : PCSV 2: DCCSV 3: SCSV-A 4: SCSV-B
1750338
I
I
7. Shift-control solenoid valve (SCSV) A or B
I
I
Check the resistance between terminal 3 or 4 of the solenoid valve connector and the transaxle case. & 22.3 + 1 .5R/20C (68F)
too low or too
Short-circuit, or damaged or disconnected wiring I I 4 Replace the SCSV. I I
Connect 12V between the transaxle case and terminal 3 or 4; switch ON and OFF and check for operation noise of the solenoid valve, and check the valve stroke.
Residue accumulated in valve and core. 1 1 Replace the SCSV. 1
Noise exists. I
Normal
1 TSB Revision

P u l l t h e p a r k i n g b r a k e ~I+~ set it securely. I t o
23-35
With the engine idling, depress the foot brake firmly. . Set the selector 3 or D range.
Stop the engine.
Improper adjustment of idling
c .
Let the engine continue idling. Normal I
-Readjust
Replace the damper clutch control solenoid valve.
1c9$4nFv;ithe l u t c
h 1
1 f;w$aul t h e v a l v e 1
Sticking (seizure) of the damDer clutch
TSB Revision
23-36
9. Damper clutch control solenoid valve (DCCSV)

Check the resistance between terminal 2 of the solenoid valve connector and the transmission case. ( Standard value: 3 fWO% 1 ? too low or too Short-circuit, or damaged or disconnected wiring I * Replace the DCCSV. Foreign terminal caught between the valve and guide 1 Replace the DCCSV. J is *Sticking usually at the release side. 1
Solenoid valve connector terminals 1 : PCSV 2: DCCSV 3: SCSV-A 4 : SCSV-B

1750338
Connect 12 V between the trans-
Normal
With the accelerator pedal not
171096
No continuity (resistance: a~) ) Normal I
TSB Revision
23-37
i Continuity exists In the R range, check for continuity between terminals 4 and 7, and terminals 10 and 11. Continuity exists ,
(t}
tinuity between termrnals 2 and 4,
L.
Continuity exists 4 In the ti D range, check for continuity between terminals 4 and 6. No continuity
+
Continuity exists In the 2 range, check for continuity between terminals 1 and 4. \I
/ P$f the inhibitor
/ b
gzizkzg
tinuity between terminals 4 and 5.
4
Continuity exists Normal -I I
1 TSB Revision
23-38
12. Kickdown (K/D) servo switch

Check for continuity between the kickdown servo switch terminal and the transaxle case. + Continuity exists + Start the engine, set to the L range, and let the engine idle; check for continuity between the kickdown servo switch terminal and the transaxle case. NOTE: Be sure the brakes are applied during this check. + No continuity I + Normal I Poor contact, or damaged or disconnected wiring c Replace the K/D servo switch.
1 19=11
TFAO389
Poor contact (sticking) 4 Replace the K/D servo switch.
13. Transaxle control unit(TCU)
Disconnect the harness (both A and B connectors) from the vehicles TCU. Then connect, via an intermediate harness for checking, a new TCU to this harness and make a road test. 4 Consider the original TCU to be normal, and again check the sensors. wiring, etc. 4 Same problem (as before TCU exchange) occurs. Install a new TCU.
TSB Revision
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Troubleshooting OIL PRESSURE TESTS
23-39
/! 6Rear @Front clutch pressure I
1. Completely warm up the transaxle. 2. Raise the vehicle by using a jack so that the front wheels can be rotated. 3. Connect an engine tachometer and place it in a position where its easy to see. 4. Attach the special oil-pressure gauge (MD998330-01) and the adaptor (MD998332-01) to each oil-pressure outlet port. When the reverse pressure is to be tested, the 3,000 kPa (400 psi) type of gauge should be used.
@Kickdown brake oressure (Release)
5. Measure the oil pressure under various conditions, and check to be sure that the measured results are within the standard value range shown in the Standard oil pressure table below. If the oil pressure is not within the specified range, check and repair as described in the section Remedial steps if oil pressure is not normal on the next page.
STANDARD OIL PRESSURE TABLE

Condtttons No Select lever posItloll Engme speed v ldlmg ldlmg Approx. 2,500 4 5 (SWZFF) 2 Approx. 2.500 Approx. 2,500 Approx 1.000 Approx. 2.500 Approx. 1,000 Reverse 3rd 2nd 1 st Reverse Gear posltlon Red&g pressure @ K/D brake pressure (application) Standard 011 pressure 0 WD brake pressure (release) 0 Front clutch pressure kPa (PSI) E% clutch pressure 0 Lowreverse brake pressure 0 Torque converter pressure 8, 100 - 210 (14 - 30) 7 3 0 - 830 (104 - 118) 830 900 (118 128) 8 3 0 - 900 830 - 900 (118 - 1 2 8 ) (118 - 1 2 8 ) 8 3 0 - 900 ( 1 1 8 128) 8 3 0 - 900 (118 - 128) 8 3 0 - 900 (118 - 128) 1.640 2.2401.640 2.240 (233 - 319) (233 319) 1.500 (213) 1.500 ( 2 1 3 ) or more or more 300 - 450 I43 .- 64) 830 (118 900 128) k 4 5 0 - 650 (64 92) 450 - 650 (64 - 921 450 650 (64 - 921 A
0 Rear clutch pressure
1 2 3
N D (SWFON,
Neutral 2nd 4th
360 - 480 ( 5 1 - 681 360 - 480 (51 - 68) 360 (51 -
480 830 - 900 68) (118 128) 830 - 900 (118 128) 830 -- 900 (118 - 128)
360 - 480 ( 5 1 - 68) 360 - 480 ( 5 1 - 68) 360 480 (51 - 68) 360 480 (51 - 68) 360 - 480 ( 5 1 - 68)
1.640 - 2.240 450 - 650 ( 6 4 ~- 921 ( 2 3 3 319) 1.500 (213) or more 4 5 0 ~- 650 ( 6 4 - 92)
NOTE ( I) -: Indicates pressure is below 10 kPa (1.4 psi). (2) SW-ON: OD switch in ON position. (3) SW-OFF: OD switch in OFF position. (4) a: Pressure IS not standard.
TSB Revision
23-40
Symptom 1. All line pressures are low (or high). NOTE: Line pressures are @.@.@).@.@ and @shown on the Standard Oil Pressure Table on the preceding paw. 2. Improper reducing pressure

INADEQUATE OIL PRESSURE Remedy a. Visually check oil filter and replace it if plugged. b. Measure line pressure (2) (KID brake pressure) and readjust line pressure if it is out of specifications. Or, replace valve body assembly. c. Replace valve body assembly. d. Torque valve body clamp bolt and mounting bolt to specification. e. Check oil pump gear side clearance and replace oil pump assembly as necessary. a. Disassemble valve body assembly to check filter and replace filter if it is plugged. b. Measure reducing pressure @and readjust as necessary. c. Replace valve body assembly. a. Disassemble K/D servo and check seal ring and D-ring for damage. Replace seal ring or D-ring if damaged or scratched. b. Replace valve body assembly. a. Disassemble KID servo and check seal ring and D-ring for damage. Replace seal ring or D-ring if damaged or scratched. b. Replace valve body assembly. a. Disassemble K/D servo and check seal ring and D-ring for damage. Replace seal ring or D-ring if damaged or scratched. b. Replace valve body assembly. c. Disassemble transaxle and check front clutch piston and retainer for wear and D-ring and seal ring for damage. Replace piston, retainer, D-ring, or seal ring as necessary. a. Disassemble rear clutch and check input shaft D-ring, center support seal ring, and piston D-ring; replace if damaged or scratched. b. Replace valve body assembly. a. Disassemble the end clutch and check piston oil seal, D-ring, and center support seal ring; replace if damage or scratches are evident. b. Replace valve body assembly. a. Remove valve body assembly and check O-ring on top of upper valve body; replace if damage or scratches are evident. b. Replace valve body assembly. c. Disassemble transaxle and check D-ring and O-ring; replace if damage or scratches are eviden a. Check damper clutch system and DCCSV for operation. b. Repair or replace cooler or pipings. c. Disassemble transaxle and check seal ring; replace if it is damaged. d. Replace torque converter.
REMEDIAL ACTION TO TAKE FOR

Possible cause
a. Plugged oil filter b. Improperly adjusted regulator valve line pressure c. Defective valve body assembly d. Valve body left loose e. Improper oil pump delivery. pressure a. Plugged reducing pressure circuit filter (L-shaped) b. Improperly adjusted reducing pressure c. Defective valve body assembly a. Defective seal ring @ and D-ring @ of K/D servo piston and seal ring @of sleeve b. Defective valve body assembly a. Defective seal ring @ and D-ring @ of K/D servo piston and seal ring @ of sleeve b. Defective valve body assembly a. Defective seal ring @and D-ring @ of K/D servo piston and seal ring @ of sleeve b. Defective valve body assembly c. Worn front clutch piston and retainer or defective D-ring @ or seal ring @ a. Defective D-ring @ of piston, seal ring @ of retainer, and seal ring @and D-ring @ of input shaft b. Defectrve valve body assembly a. Defective seal ring 0. D-ring 0, and oil seal (iJ of end clutch b. Defective valve body assembly a. Damaged O-ring between valve body and transmission b. Defective valve body assembly c. Defective D-ring @of piston or O-ring @I of center support a. Sticking damper clutch control solenoid valve (DCCSV) or damper clutch control valve b. Plugged or leaky oil cooler and pipings c. Damaged seal ring @of input shaft d. Defective torque converter
3. Improper K/D brake pressure (application) 4. Improper KID brake pressure (release) J. Improper front clutch pressure
3. Improper rear clutch pressure
7. Improper end clutch pressure 8. Improper low-reverse brake pressure
3. Improper torque converter pressure
\ d
TSB Revision
23-41
L-l$&-g&J\
!A>. .Yr&w
@Seal ring @Seal ring \ h. 43 D-ring @ D-rmg @I O-ring @ 011 seal A \ ring
/ @I Seal ring
@Seal rmg I Front clutch Low-reverse brake
@Seal rmg r I I tna cIuIcn

TFA0641
@Seal ring /
TFA0362 TSB Revision
23-42
SHIFT PATTERNS
P range
-i; an 60 .r s 8 -z" 40 5 <A 2 u-1 I I 2000 1000

I I I I I I I
2 413 (2, L) I I I 5000

I I I I
+-!
3 4(b) 6000
I I I
4000 3000 Transferdrivegearspeedtrpm)

I I I I I I
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
130 140
150 160
170 180 TFA0570
Vehiclespeed (km/h)
E range
IOC
80 -z 6 F 60 'E 4 $ 40 5 E 20 3 e-4 (DA
2000
I I
I I I I I
4000 3000 Transferdrivegearspeed (rpm)

I I I I I I I I
5000
I I I
6000
I
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110 120
130
140
150
160
170 180 T FA0571
Vehiclespeed (km/h)
TSB Revision
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Troubleshootinn CONVERTER STALL TEST

Stall test consist of determining maximum engine speed obtained at full throttle in D and I? positions. This test checks torque converter stator overrunning clutch operation, and holding ability of transaxle clutches and low-reverse brake. Caution During this test, make sure that no one stand in front of or behind vehicle. 1. Check transaxle fluid level. Fluid should be at normal operating temperature [70 - 80C (160 18OF)I. Engine coolant should also be at normal operating temperature [80 - 90C (180 - 19OF)l. 2. Apply chocks to both rear wheels. 3. Attach engine tachometer. 4. Apply parking and service brakes fully. 5. Start engine. 6. With selector lever in D position, depress accelerator pedal fully to read engine maximum rpm. Do not hold throttle wide open any longer than is necessary to obtain maximum engine rpm reading, and never longer than 5 seconds at a time. If more than one stall test is required, operate engine at approximately 1,000 rpm in neutral for 2 minutes to cool transaxle fluid between tests. Stall speed: 2,200 - 3,200 rpm 7.
23-43
Place selector lever to R position and perform stall test by the same procedure as in foregoing item.
Stall Speed Above Specification in D If stall speed is higher than specification, rear clutch or overrunning clutch of transaxle is slipping. In this case, perform hydraulic test to locate cause of slippage. Stall Speed Above Specification in R If stall speed is higher than specification, front clutch of transaxle or low-reverse brake is slipping. In this case, perform hydraulic test to locate cause of slippage. Stall Speed Below Specification in D and R If stall speed is lower than specification, insufficient engine output or faulty torque converter is suspected. Check for engine misfiring, ignition timing, valve clearance, etc. If these are good, torque converter is faulty.
TRANSAXLE CONTROL Symptom Selector lever operation is stiff Probable cause Incorrect adjustment of sleeve Incorrect adjustment of control cable Excessive wear of detent plate Worn contact surfaces of pushbutton and sleeve Starter motor does not operate with the selector lever in the N or P position Will not shift to 4-speed Malfunction in inhibitor switch Incorrect adjustment of control cable Malfunction of starter relay Malfunction of OD switch Remedy Adjust Adjust Replace Replace Replace Adjust Replace Replace
1 TSB Revision
23-44
A/T SAFETY-LOCK SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING
n or sagging outer cable (shift lot
be selected into R from P by depressing brake pedal with ignition key in position other than LOCK.
eck and adjust slide lever
ide lever and ca Selector lever Iperation from P to R s not smooth.
TSB Revision

Symptom Selector lever cannot be shifted from R to P. Probable cause Defective selector lever assembly Improperly adjusted transaxle control cable Ignition key cannot be turned to LOCK position with selector lever in P. Remedy Check and replace selector lever assembly. Adjust transaxle control cable.
23-45
Ref. page 23-54 23-56 23-58 213-55 23-55 2:3-58 2:3-55 2355 2:3-55 2:3-55 2:3-52
Foreign matter wedged in lock cams A and B Check and replace lock cams A and B. Improperly adjusted key interlock cable, sticking inner cable Binding slide lever inside key cylinder Check, adjust, and replace key interlock cable. Check slide lever. Check and replace lock cam A. Check and retighten cover. Check and replace key interlock cable. Check and replace cam lever. Check and replace buzzer. Check or correct harness. Check and replace inhibitor switch. Adjust transaxle control cable.
Ignition key can be turned to LOCK position even with selector lever in position other than P.
Damaged lock cam A Loose key cylinder cover Broken key interlock cable, loose connections, elongated inner cable Damaged cam lever inside key cylinder
Buzzer does not sound Defective buzzer even when selector lever is placed in R Open-circuited buzzer circuit harness position. Defective inhibitor switch Improperly adjusted transaxle control cable
TSB Revision
23-46
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Service Adjustment Procedures
SERVICE ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE!5

MZ3FElBJ
TRANSMISSION FLUID LEVEL INSPECTION

Fluid level must be within this range.
TFA038:
Drive until the fluid temperature reaches the usual temperat u r e 170 - 80C ( 1 6 0 - 18OF)]. 2. Place vehicle on level floor. 3. Move selector lever sequentially to every position to fill torque converter and hydraulic circuit with fluid, then place lever in N Neutral position. 4. Before removing dipstick, wipe all dirt from area arounid dipstick. Then take out the dipstick and check the condition of the fluid. The transaxle should be overhauled under the following conditions. l If there is a burning odor. l If the fluid color has become noticeably blacker. l If there is a noticeably great amount of metal particles in the fluid. 5. Check to see if fluid level is in HOT range on dipstick. If fluid level is low, add automatic transmission fluid until level reaches HOT range. 1.
Transmission fluid: MITSUBISHI PLUS ATF/Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON abr DEXRON II
Low fluid level can cause a variety of conditions because it allows pump to take in air along with fluid. Air trapped in hydraulic circuit forms bubbles which make fluid spongy. Therefore, pressures will be erratic, causing delayed shift, slippy clutch and brakes, etc. Improper filling can also raise fluid level too high. When transaxle has too much fluid, gears churn up foam anld cause the same conditions which occur with low fluid level, resulting in accelerated deterioration of automatic transaxlle fluid. In either case, air bubbles can cause overheating, fluid oxidation, which can interfere with normal valve, clutch, and servo operation. Foaming can also result in fluid escaping from transaxle vent where it may be mistaken for a leak. 6. Be sure to examine fluid on dipstick closely.
TRANSMISSION FLUID REPLACEMENT

M23FCBH
TSB Revision
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Service Adjustment Procedures KICKDOWN SERVO ADJUSTMENT
23-47
M23FRAC
(1) Remove dust, dirt, and other contaminants completely from kickdown (K/D) servo cover and surrounding areas. (2) Snap off the snap ring and remove K/D servo switch. (3) Fit claw of special tool into cutout in piston to prevent piston from turning and use adapter to fix the piston into position. Caution 1. Do not push piston with the special tool. 2. Secure adapter only hand-tight to L/R brake pressure take-up port and do not apply excessiwe torque. (4) Loosen lock nut to immediately before V-groove in adjust rod (see illustration on left) and tighten special tool (Inner Wrench) until it contacts lock nut.
MD998916-3-01
(5) Fit special tool (Outer Wrench) over the lock nut. Turn Outer Wrench counterclockwise and turn inner cylinder clockwise to lock the lock nut and special tool (Inner Wrench).
(6) Fit torque wrench to special tool (Inner Wrench) and repeat tightening and loosening cycle two times with a torque of 10 Nm (7.2 ft.lbs.). Then, torque to 5 Nm (3.6 ftlbs.). Next, back off special tool (Inner Wrench) 2 to 2/4 turns.
(7) Fit special tool (Outer Wrench) to lock nut. Turn Outer Wrench clockwise and Inner Wrench counterclockwise to unlock the lock nut from special tool (Inner Wrench). Caution Be sure to apply even torque to the two special tools when unlocking.
TSB Revision
23-48
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
(8) Tighten lock nut by hand until it contacts piston. Then, using torque wrench, tighten to specification. Lock nut: 29 Nm (21 ftlbs.) Caution Use of socket wrench or torque wrench could result in lock nut being turned with adjust rod. (9) Remove the special tool to secure the piston and torque plug to specification at L/R brake pressure take-up port.
LINE PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT

(I) (2) (3) (4) Discharge AFT. Remove oil pan. Remove oil filter. Remove oil temperature sensor.
M23FSAC
(5) Press solenoid valve harness grommet catch to push in grommet; then, remove valve body assembly. Caution Do not let manual valve fall.
(6) Turn adjusting screw of regulator valve to obtain the specified line pressure (K/D brake pressure). 870 - 890 kPa (124 - 127 psi) Standard value: Oil pressure change for 38 kPa (54 psi) each turn of adjustment screw:
Adjusting screw ~0\====m00~ 4 or / 7 I
c TFAm Pi 1
(7) Check that an O-ring is fitted at the location shown on top off valve body. (8) Replace O-ring of solenoid valve intermediate grommet with a new one and then fit the O-ring into case.
TSB Revision

1
23-49
(9) Install valve body and oil temperature sensor. Bolt A = Length 18 mm (.709 in.) Bolt B = Length 25 mm (.984 in.) Bolt C = Length 40 mm (1.575 in.)
Caution Secure solenoid valve and oil temperature sensor harness at locations shown.
(1O)lnstall oil filter. (1l)lnstall new oil pan gasket and oil pan. (12)Add the specified amount of ATF. (13)Carry out hydraulic test. Readjust as necessary.
REDUCING PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT

When multi-use tester is not used
h323FfAD
(1) Following the same steps as those in line pressure adjustment, remove parts up to oil filter. There is no need to remove valve body. (2) Turn adjusting screw of lower valve body to obtain the specified reducing pressure. Turn it counterclockwise to increase the pressure.
Standard value: Oil pressure change for each turn of adjusting screw:
425 f 10 kPa (60 f 1 psi) 45 kPa (6 psi)
(3) In the same way as in line pressure adjustment, /nstall oil filter and oil pan. (4) Perform hydraulic test. Adjust as necessary.
When multi-use tester is used

(1) Adjust to obtain the specified K/D brake pressure when PC solenoid is energized at duty 50% with the multi-use tester.
Standard value: Oil pressure change for each turn of adjusting screw:
275 kPa (39 psi) 50 kPa (7 psi)
(2) After adjustment has been made, check that the recuding pressure is in the range 360 - 480 kPa (51 - 68 psi).
Caution This adjustment should be made with oil temperature 70 - 80C (160 - 180F). The adjustment made with high oil temperature could result in improper adjustment due to a line pressure drop at idle.
TSB Revision
23-50
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - s ervice Adiustment Procedures ACCELERATOR SWITCH INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT M23FZAA
Check that current flows between terminals of accelerator switch when accelerator pedal is in free state and that no d current flows when the pedal is depressed and the specified stroke A is obtained.
Standard value: 2 - 6 mm (.079 - .24 in.)

If stroke A is out of specification, adjust with adjusting bolt.
09FO117
09FOO19
SELECTOR LEVER OPERATION CHECK

L Pushbutton v
M23FIAG
09FOO61
1.. Shift selector lever to each range and check that lever moves smoothly and is controlled. Check that position indicator is correct. 2. Check to be sure the selector lever can be shifted to each position (by button operation as shown in the illustration). 3. Start the engine and check if the vehicle moves forward when the selector lever is shifted from N to D, and moves backward when shifted to R. 4. When the shift lever malfunctions, adjust control cable and selector lever sleeve. Check for worn shift lever assembly sliding parts. NOTE To move the selector lever from the P position to any other position, first turn the ignition key to any position other than LOCK and depress the brake pedal.
@ Button pressed (while brake pedal is depressed) c Button not pressed @ Button pressed
KEY INTERLOCK MECHANISM CHECK
M23FlJAC
Completely stop the vehicle and switch OFF the engine before making the check 1. Check to be sure that, under the following conditions, the selector lever cannot be moved from the P position to any other position. Also check, at the same time, that the button cannot be pressed. /
Ignition key position: LOCK or removed Brake pedal: Depressed

\ \ \ OSFODd
TSB Revision
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Service Adiustment Procedures
23-51
2. Check to be sure that, under the following conditions, the

selector lever can be moved from the P position to any other position. Press the button a few times and check to be sure that the selector lever moves smoothly.
Ignition key position: ACC Brake pedal: Depressed Button : Pressed
Check to be sure that, at all positions of the selector lever (other than P), the ignition key cannot be turned to the LOCK position. Check to be sure that the ignition key smoothly turns to the LOCK position when the selector lever is then set to the P position and the button is released. 4. If above are not checked okay, adjust key interlock cable mechanism as follows. (1) Remove front console assembly. (2) Place selector lever into P position. (3) Turn ignition key to the LOCK position. (4) Loosen nut that secures key interlock cable. (5) Lightly pressing lock cam A in the direction of arrow, lightly push key interlock cable to take up slack and tighten nut to secure key interlock cable. (6) Reinstall front console assembly.
3.
D9N007S
SHIFT LOCK MECHANISM CHECK
MZ3FVAC
1. Check to be sure that, under the following condi,tions, the selector lever cannot be moved from the P position to any other position.
Ignition key position: ACC Brake pedal: Not depressed Button: Pressed 2. Check to be sure that, under the following conditions, the
selector lever can be moved smoothly from the P position to other position.
Push button
Ignition key position: ACC Brake pedal : Depressed Button: Pressed 3. Check to be sure that, under the following conditions, the
selector lever can be moved smoothly from the R position to the P position.
Ignition key position: ACC Brake pedal: Released Button: Pressed 4. If a malfunction is discovered when following the above
checking procedures, either adjust or check the shift lock cable mechanism. (Refer to P.23-56.)
TSB Revision
23-52

Manual control lever
INHIBITOR SWITCH AND CONTROL CABLE ADJUSTMENT M23FJAD

1. Place selector lever in N (Neutral) position. 2. Place manual control lever in N (Neutral) position. d 3. For adjustment, turn inhibitor switch body so that the end (section A-A in illustration on left) of manual control lever is aligned with the hole In inhibitor switch body flange. 4. Tighten the mounting bolts of the inhibitor switch body to the specified torque. At this time, take care to prevent dropping the switch body.
Mounting bolt
TFA0359
Specified torque: 10 - 12 Nm (7 - 9 ftlbs.)
Section A-A
Manual control I
Switch body
09N0062
Loosen the nut shown in the figure, and lightly pull the end of the transaxle control cable in the direction of arrow by hand. 6. Tighten the nut to the specified torque.
5.
Specified torque: 13 Nm (9 ftlbs.)

7. Check that the selector lever is in N position. 8. Check that it securely operates and functions on the transaxle side in the range which corresponds to each position of the selector lever.
M23FLN3D
(1) Disconnect the drive shaft from the transaxle. (Refer to GROUP 26 - Drive Shaft.) (2) Using-.a flat-tip (-) screwdriver, remove the oil seal.
Oil skal v 0 I 1 I o\l II *0 // 0

09K567
09K566
TSB Revision
23-53
(3) Using the special tool, tap the drive shaft oil seal into the transaxle. Note in illustration the direction of installation of drive shaft oil seal. (4) Apply a coating of the transaxle fluid to the lip of the oil seal.
Transaxle fluid: Dia ATF SP or MITSUBISHI PLUS ATF or equivalent
Transaxle side
011 seal lip
2200037
-f

1.
M23FEAL2
Correctly insert the adapter into the instrument panel, and fasten the new speedometer cable.
OQFOO83
2.
Install the grommet so that, as shown in the illustration, the cable attachment part and the projecting part are horizontal.
Caution The cable arrangement should be made so that the radius of cable bends is 150 mm (5.9 in.) or more.
3.. At the transaxle end of the speedometer cable, the key joint should be inserted into the transaxle, and the nut should be securely tightened.
Caution If the cable is not correctly and securely connected, it may cause incorrect indication by the speedometer, or abnormal noise. Be sure to connect it correctly.
TSB Revision
23-54
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Transaxle Control.

M231A-
TRANSAXLE CONTROL
_
\
(Refer to GROUP 52A-Floor Console.)
7 ft.lbs.
09FOO31
Transaxle control cable removal steps 1. Air cleaner cover, Air intake hose 2. CD amp. (Vehicles with CD player) l 5. Connection for transaxle control cable assembly (Select lever assembly side) 6. Transaxle control cable, assembly 7. Clamp 8. Adjuster
Selector lever assembly removal steps 1. Air cleaner cover, Air intake hose l + 3. Connection for key-interlock cable (Selector lever assembly side) *+ 4. Connection for shift-lock cable (Selector lever assembly side) I)+ 5. Connection for transaxle control cable (Selector lever assembly side) 9. Selector lever assembly
TSB Revision
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Transaxle Control
23-55
11
9 ft.lbs.
12 Nm
OQFOO35
Key-interlock cable removal steps 2. CD amp. (Vehicles with CD player) I)+ 3. Connection for key-interlock cable (Selector lever assembly side) 10. Connection for transaxle control unit 11. Knee protector (Refer to GROUP 52AInstrument Panel) 12. Column cover lower 13. Cover *C 14. Cam lever ** 15. Key-interlock cable I)+ 16. Slide lever 17. Cable guide 18. Clamp
Shift-lock cable removal steps 2. CD amp. ** 4. Connection for shift-lock cable (Selector lever assembly side) 10. Connection for transaxle control unil: *4 19. Shift-lock cable 20. Clamp Reverse (R) position alarm buzzer removal 21. Reverse (R) position alarm buzzer
TSB Revision
23-56
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Transaxle Control INSPECTION

l l l
M231CAM
Check the control cable for function and for damage. Check the outer cable (key interlock cable, shift lock cable) ~ J for damage and spring for breakage and tension. Check the inner cable (key interlock cable, shift lock cable) for extension.
REVERSE (R) POSITION ALARM BUZZER

Check that the buzzer sounds when battery voltage is applied across terminals.
OQPOOQQ
M231DAW
19. CONNECTION OF SHIFT LOCK CABLE (BRAKE PEDAL SIDE)

Connect the shift lock cable so that its threads measure about 4 mm (.16 in.).
Caution Do not change the routing of shift lock cable to the selector lever assembly.
16. INSTALLATION OF SLIDE LEVER / 15. KEY INTERLOCK CABLE (STEERING LOCK ASSEMBLY SIDE) / 14. CAM LEVER
(1) Place the ignition key at the LOCK position or keep it removed. (2) Install the slide lever, key interlock cable, and cam lever to the steering lock assembly as shown.
09FOO5
Caution Do not change the routing of key interlock cable to the selector lever assembly. 5. CONNECTION OF TRANSAXLE CONTROL CABLE (SELECTOR LEVER ASSEMBLY SIDE)
Connect the transaxle control cable, then make the following adjustment. (1) Place the selector lever in N position. (2) Loosen the nut and slightly pull the transaxle control cable in the direction of the arrow; then, tighten the nut.
4. CONNECTION OF SHIFT LOCK CABLE (SELECTOR LEVER ASSEMBLY SIDE)

(1) Place the selector lever in P position. (2) Disconnect the key interlock cable from the selector lever assembly side. (3) Turn the lock cam B counterclockwise (arrow 0) to move the set lever upward (arrow _. 0). (4) Frt the cutout in set lever to the jock pm ot lock cam B. u
TSB Revision
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Transaxle Control
23-57
-1 I I
(5) Connect the shift lock cable to lock cam B and temporarily tighten the nut. At this time, install the spring and washer, vvhich have been fitted to the shift lock cable, as shown. (6) Pressing the set lever to prevent lock cam B from moving, lightly pull the shift lock cable to take up slack and tighten the nut to secure the shift lock cable into position. NOTE Make sure that the shift lock cable end is in contact with the fixing pin of lock cam B as shown, then install the washer and snap pin. (7) Connect the key interlock cable to lock cam A and temporarily tighten the nut. At,this time, install the spring and washer, vvhich have been fitted to the key interlock cable, as shown. (8) Lightly pressing lock cam A in the direction of arrow, lightly push the key interlock cable to take up slack and tighten the nut to secure the key interlock cable in position.
Nut
09N0049
09N0050
~ I
Was
(9) Turn the set lever and fit it onto the fixing pin on lock cam A, then install the snap pin. (lO)After the key interlock cable has been connected, check the shift lock and key interlock mechanism. (Refer to P.23-50.) I
3. CONNECTION OF KEY INTERLOCK CABLE (SELECTOR LEVER ASSEMBLY SIDE)

(1) Place the selector lever into P position. (2) Connect the key interlock cable to lock cam A and temporarily tighten the nut. At this time, install the spring and washer, which have been fitted to the key interlock cable, as shown. (3) Lightly pressing lock cam A in the direction of arrow, lightly push the key interlock cable to take up slack and tighten the nut to secure the key interlock cable in position. (4) Turn the set lever and fit it onto the fixing pin on lock cam A, then install the snap pin. (5) After the key interlock cable has been connected, check the key interlock mechanism. (Refer to P.23-50.)
Was
Nut
0910046 I
09FOlOt
TSB Revision
23-58
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Selector Lever Assembly
SELECTOR LEVER ASSEMBLY

@b h-
16
6 \
/7
Disassembly steps l * 1. Overdrive control switch, position light and Power (PWRVEconomy (ECO)/Hold (HOLD) changeover switch connector 2. Cover Selector knob ** i: Overdrive control switch button a* 5. Overdrive control switch Pin .., 76: Pushbutton Spring :: Indicator panel 10. Power (PWRVEconomy (ECOVHold (HOLD) chanaeover switch connector 11: Slider 12. Indicator panel lower 13. Socket assembly 23W 2 6 l * 14. Sleeve 15. Bolt 16. Lever assembly 17. Bushina 18. Pioe 19. Cotter pin 20. Washer 21. Lock cam B Spring 2 Cotter pin 24. Washer 25. Set lever 26. Lock cam A 27. Bracket assembly
14 \.GLg >I
/ 2.0 Nm
1.6 ftlbs.
\13
17
18
I fi& -
09FOO39
1 TSB Revision
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Selector Lever Assemblv SERVICE POINTS OF DISASSEMBLY
23-59
M230FAD
/ L
Terminal
1. REMOVAL OF OVERDRIVE CONTROL SWITCH CONNECTOR

Disconnect the overdrive control switch connector and then remove the terminal from the overdrive control switch connector.
Scjewdriver
D9R0054
4. REMOVAL OF OVERDRIVE CONTROL SWITCH BUTTON / 5. OVERDRIVE CONTROL SWITCH

(1) Using the flat-tip screwdriver, remove the overdrive control switch button. (2) Remove the overdrive control switch mounting screw. (3) Pressing the switch, remove the overdrive control switch.
INSPECTION
l l l
MWOGAE
Check the detent plate for wear. Check the bushing for wear or damage. Check the spring for damage or deterioration.
POWER (PWR)/ECONOMY (ECO)/HOLD (HOLD) SWITCH

Check for continuity between terminals when the switch is OFF and when ON.
/ L
09FOO99
09FOlOO
ON (PWR) OFF (ECO) I ~~
b-l-l I I I
I I
I--ON (HOLD)
~~~
o-+0
OVERDRIVE CONTROL SWITCH

Check for continuity between terminals when the switch is OFF and when ON.
4
ON (Overdrive activation)
09FOO99
09FOlOl
OFF (Overdrive non-activation)

14. INSTALLATION OF SLEEVE
M230HAO
L/
Lever assembly
Place the selector lever in the N position, and then turn the sleeve so that the clearance between the sleeve and the lever assembly end is within the standard value.
Standard value (A): 15.2 - 15.9 mm (-598 - .625 in.)
TSB Revision
23-60
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Transaxle Oil Cooler, Hoses, Tubes

NZlSA-
TRANSAXLE OIL COOLER, HOSES, TUBES

<Vehicles without oil cooler>
Pre-removal and Post-installation Ooeration
<Vehicles with oil cooler>
12 Nm 9 ft.lbs.
4* 4* 4* 4*
1. Hose 2. Tube assembly 3. Feed hose 4. Return hose
Hose assembly removal steps 5. Air cleaner cover, Air intake hose 4* 6. Hose assembly Tube assembly removal steps 7. Front splash shield extension (right side) 4* l 4 8. Eye bolt 9. Tube assembly Transaxle oil cooler removal steps 7. Front splash shield extension (right side) l * **I 8. Eye bolt 10. Transaxle oil cooler
4.0 ium 2.9 ft.lbs.
1 TSB Revision
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - T ransaxle Oil Cooler, Hoses, Tubes SERVICE POINTS OF REMOVAL
23-61
M23SBAG
1. REMOVAL OF HOSE / 2. TUBE ASSEMBLY J 3. FEED HOSE / 4. RETURN HOSE Caution Take care not to spill the transaxlefluid when removing components.
6. REMOVAL OF HOSE ASSEMBLY Caution 1. When removing the hose assembly, use care not to allow the transaxle fluid to spill. 2. After removing the hose assembly, plug so that foreign materials cannot enter the transaxle.
8. REMOVAL OF EYE BOLT

(1) Wipe the connection threads and tightly contacting surfaces clean of dust and dirt. (2) Secure the oil cooler connector with a spanner to prevent excessive force from being applied to it, then loosen the eye bolt.
OQFOO95
INSPECTION
l l l
MZ3SCAH
Check the hose for crack, damage and clog. Check for rusted or clogged radiator oil cooler. Check oil cooler fins for bend, damage, and clogged foreign matter.

8. INSTALLATION OF EYE BOLT -
M23SDAD
(1) Wipe the connection threads and tightly contacting surfaces clean of dust and dirt. . (2) Secure the oil cooler connector with a spanner to prevent excessive force from being applied to it, then tighten the eye bolt.
OQFOOQt
TSB Revision
23-62
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Transaxle Assembly

MZJLA- -
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
l l
Place Selector Lever in N Position and Stop the Engine. Draining of Transaxle Fluid (Refer to GROUP 00 - Maintenance Service.) Removal of Front Under Cover (Referto GROUP 51 -Front Bumper.)
70 Nm 51 ft.lbs. 70 Nm 51 ft.lbs. I
09FO112
Removal steps 1. Side under cover 2. Battery 3. Battery seat, Washer tank 4. kiorsteaner cover, Air intake
l +
4*
5. Connection for transaxle control cable 6. Connection for oil cooler hose 7. Inhibitor switch connector 8. Kickdown servo switch connector 9. Pulse generator connector 10 Oil temperature sensor connector 11. Shift control solenoid valve connector 12. Connection for speedometer cable 13. Connection for transaxle mount bracket
09FOO81
1 TSB Revision
23-63
LJ
75 Nm
31 Nm
75 Nm 54 ftlbs.
60 - 72 Nm 43 - 52 ft.lbs.
14
60-72Nm
\ 20
Ia 26
15
).
C-J
15 16
23
\
j5 Nm
64ft.lbs.
43-G ,.%S.
36 N m 26 ft.lbs.
OSFOOBH
14. Transaxle assembly upper part coupling bolt 4* 15. Connection for tie rod end 4* 16. Connection for lower arm ball joint 17. Right member 18. Starter 4* 19. Drive shaft (left side), Inner shaft assembly l * l * 20. Drive shaft (right side) 21. Transaxle stay (front bank side) 22. Transaxle stay (rear bank side) 23. Bell housing cover 4* 24. Special bolts 4* 25. Transaxle assembly lower part coupling bolt 4* 26. Transaxle assembly
Post-installation Operation
l l l l
Installation of Front Under Cover (Refer to GROUP 51 -Front Bumper.) Supplying of Transaxle Fluid (Refer to GROUP 00 - Maintenance Service.) Checking the Operation of Selector Lever Checking the Operation of Speedometer
M22kBAV
13. DISCONNECTION OF TRANSAXLE MOUNT BRACKET

(1) Raise the transaxle assembly with a jack up to a level where no weight is applied to the mount bracket.
Caution When raising the transaxle assembly, make sure it is supported over a wide area and no local force is being applied.
TSB Revision
23-64
AUTOMATIC, TRANSAXLE - Transaxle Assembly

(2) Remove the nut and move the bolt so that a spanner can be applied to the transaxle mount bracket mounting bolt; then, remove the transaxle mount bracket mounting bolt.
15. DISCONNECTION OF TIE ROD END / 16. LOWER ARM BALL JOINT
Refer to GROUP 22 - Manual Transaxle.
$3
19. REMOVAL OF DRIVE SHAFT (LEFT SIDE) AND INNER SHAFT ASSEMBLY / 20. DRIVE SHAFT (RIGHT SIDE)
24. REMOVAL OF SPECIAL BOLTS / 25. TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY LOWER PART COUPLING BOLT / 26. TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
(1) Support the transaxle assembly with the transaxle jack. (2) ;;F;ng the crankshaft, remove the special bolts at four (3) After removing the special bolts, push the torque converter toward transaxle so that it does not remain on the engine side. (4) Remove coupling bolt at the bottom of transaxle assembly and lower the transaxle assembly.
SERVICE POINTS OF IliSTALLATlON

26. INSTALLATION OF TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
M23LDAD
Attach the torque converter on the transaxle side and mount the transaxle assembly on the engine.
Caution If the torque converter is mounted first on the engine, Id the oil seal on the transaxle side may be damaged. Therefore, be sure to first assemble the torque converter on the transaxle side. 20. INSTALLATION OF DRIVE SHAFT (RIGHT SIDE)
5. CONNECTION OF TRANSAXLE CONTROL CABLE

(1) Connect the transaxle control cable to the manual
control lever and tighten the nut temporarily. (2) Loosen the nut, pull the transaxle control cable lightly in the arrow direction and retighten the nut.
TSB Revision
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Transaxle Assembly DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY
23-65
M23LEAN
%&,kd!~~
I!- 1 26
A8
ii9
25 24
TFA0409
LJ
4. Thrust washer #I Front clutch assembly :: Thrust race #3 Thrust bearing #4 ;: Thrust washer #2 9. Rear clutch assembly 10. Thrust bearing #5 11. Rear clutch hub 12. Thrust race #6 13. Thrust bearing #7 14. Kickdown band 15. Kickdown drum 16. Snap ring
1 Z:
1
14 Torque converter ~.I~I~~~ assembly
-1
17. Center support 18. Wave spring 19. Return spring 20. Pressure plate 21. Brake disc 22. Brake plate 23. Reaction plate 24. Reverse sun gear 25. Thrust bearing #8 26. Thrust race #9 27. Forward sun gear 28. Planetary carrier asseml 29. Thrust bearing #I 0 30. Output flange 31. Oil level gauge 32. Oil filler tube 33. Snap ring 34. Kickdown servo switch 35. Snap ring TSB Revision
36. Kickdown servo piston 37. Spring 38. Anchor rod 39. Detent assembly 40. Manual control shaft 41. Parking roller support 42. Oil pan 43. Gasket 44. Oil temperature sensor 45. Oil screen 46. Valve body assembly 47. Manual control lever 48. Inhibitor switch 49. End clutch shaft 50. Bearing retainer 51. Thrust bearing #I 1 52. End clutch hub 53. Thrust washer 54. End clutch assembly 55. O-ring 56. End clutch cover 57. Pulse generator 58: Lock bolt 59. Idler shaft 60. Idler gear 61. Spacer 62. Gasket
23-66
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Transaxle Assemblv
32
48
58 60 7 I
66 43
Si
6s
42
63. 64. 65. 66. 67.
Idler gear cover Differential bearing retainer Outer race Differential front bearing cap Differential assembly 1 TSB Revision
68. 69. 70. 71. 72.
Gasket Differential cover Output bearing retainer Transfer shaft Transaxle case
TFA0410
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Transaxle Assembly DISASSEMBLY
23-67
Caution 1. The automatic transaxle consists of high-precision parts and utmost care must be exercised during disassembly and reassembly to prevent damage to the parts. 2. Place a rubber mat on the workbench and keep it clean at all times. 3. Do not use cotton work gloves or waste cloth for the disassembly job. Use nylon cloth or paper towel if necessary. 4. Clean all disassembled parts. Commercially available detergent may be used to clean the metalllic parts; however, be sure to dry them completely with air. 5. Clean the clutch disc, plastic thrust plates, and rubber parts with ATF (automatic transmission fluid) to prevent adhesion of dust and dirt. 6. If the transaxle is damaged, the cooler system should also be disassembled and cleaned.
(1) Remove the torque converter. (2) Install the dial indicator to the transaxle case and measure the end play in the input shaft. (3) Remove brackets. (4) Remove the oil level gauge and oil level gauge guide.
(5) Remove pulse generators A and B
(6) Remove the manual control lever and then remove the inhibitor switch. (7) Remove the speedometer drive gear assembly.
TSB Revision
23-68
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Transaxle Assembl,y

(8) Remove the oil pan, magnet, and gasket.
(9) Remove the oil screen.
(10)Remove the ten valve body mounting bolts. (11 IRemove the oil temperature sensor holder and remove the oil temperature sensor harness from the clamp.
(12)Press the solenoid valve harness grommet claw to push the grommet into the case; then, remove the valve body assembly. (13)Pull off the oil temperature sensor.
(14)Remove
the parking roller support.
TSB Revision
23-69
(15)Remove the set screw from the manual control shaft and remove the manual control shaft assembly. (16)Remove the detent assembly.
(17)Remove (18)Remove
the differential cover and gasket. the differential front bearing cap.
(19)Remove the differential bearing retainer, spacer, and outer race.
(20)Remove the differential assembly
(21)Remove the end clutch cover mounting bolts and remove the end clutch cover.
[ TSB Revision
23-70

(22)Remove the end clutch assembly.
(23)Remove the thrust plate.
(24)Remove the end clutch hub. (25)Remove the thrust bearing. NOTE The bearing may be adhering to the end clutch hub.
(26)Pull out the end clutch shaft.
(27)Remove the idler gear cover mounting bolts and remove the idler gear cover and gasket.
TFAOl24
23-71
(28)Straighten the lock where it forms over the bolt and remove the bolt.
(29)Pull off the idler shaft and remove the idler gear and bearing inner race.
(30)Remove
the spacer.
(3 l)Remove the oil pump bolts.
(32)Using the special tool, remove the oil pump.
1 TSB Revision
23-72

(33)Remove the thrust washer and thrust race.
(34)Holding onto the input shaft, remove the front clutch assembly and rear clutch assembly together.
(35)Remove the thrust bearing.
(36)Remove the rear clutch hub. NOTE The thrust race may be sticking to the clutch hub.
(37)Remove the thrust bearing.
TSB Revision

(38IRemove the kickdown d r u m .
23-73
(39)Remove the kickdown band.
(40Enap off the snap ring and remove the kickdown servo switch.
(41 )Using the special tool, push ,in the kickdown servo piston to snap off the snap ring.
(42)Remove the kickdown servo piston.
TSB Revision
23-74

(43)Remove the anchor rod.
(44)Remove the plug and pull out the air exhaust plug.
(45)Remove the snap ring.
(46)Using the special tool, remove the center support
(47)Remove the reverse sun gear and forward sun gear.
TSB Revision

(48)Remove the planetary carrier assembly.
2 3 - 7 5
(49)Remove the wave spring, return spring, reaction plate, brake disc, and brake plate.
(50)Remove the screw and remove the rear bearing retainer.
(51)Snap off the snap ring and remove the output flange assemblv.
(52)Remove the output bearing retainer mounting bolts and remove the output bearing retainer and outer race.
TFAOl491
TSB Revision
(54)Using a sliding hammer, remove the outer race. (55)Remove oil seals.
TFA0478
TSB Revision
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Transaxle Assembly REASSEMBLY
23-77
MZ3LFAP
Caution 1. The gasket, O-ring, and oil seal should never be reused. Whenever they have been removed, they must be replaced with new ones. (Note: The rubber used in the oil level gauge does not require replacement.) 2. Never use grease other than petrolatum. 3. Be sure to apply ATF to the friction elements and rotary and sliding surfaces before reassembly. A new clutch disc and brake disc should be dipped in ATF for more than 2 hours before installation. 4. Do not use sealant or adhesive for gaskets. 5. When replacing a bushing, replace the whole assembly containing that bushing. 6. Do not use cotton work gloves or waste cloth for the reassembly job. Use nylon cloth or paper towel if necessary. 7. Replace oil in the cooler.
MD998325-01
(I) Using the special tool, press-fit the drive shaft oil seal into position.
TFA0159
(2) Using the special tool, press-fit the outer race into the transaxle case.
TFA0479
(3) Install the transfer shaft.
1 TSB Revision
23-78

(4) Place 10 mm-long t.39 in.), 1.6 mm-dia. (.06 in.) solders at the locations shown of the output bearing retainer and install the outer race.
TFA016i
(5) Install the output bearing retainer and tighten bolts to specification. (6) Loosen the bolts and remove the output bearing retainer.
Outph bearing retainer
TFA0149
(7) Remove the outer race from the output bearing retainer and remove the solders. If the solders are not crushed, use larger dia. (3 mm or .12 in.) solders to repeat steps (4) to (6). Measure the thickness of the solders crushed with a micrometer and select a spacer to obtain the specified preload. L4 Standard value: 0.075 - 0 . 1 3 5 m m LOO3 - .0053-in.) / (8) Install the spacer selected in the preceding step as well as outer race into the output bearing retainer.
(9) Fit a new O-ring over the periphery of the output bearing retainer. (lO)Coat the O-ring with ATF and tighten the output bearing retainer mounting bolts to specification.
(I 1)lnsert the output flange into the case and fit the snap ring over the periphery of the bearing.
TSB Revision

(12)lnstall the bearing retainer with new bolts.
23-79
(13)Stake the heads of the bolts.
Thrust earing #lO
(14)Coat thrust bearing #lO with petrolatum and affix the bearing to the planetary carrier.
(15)lnstall the planetary carrier.
TSB Revision
23-80
#2 (SZtion) (SZtio$
#5
#6
#7
#8
#9
#IO
#II TFAO243
IDENTIFICATION OF THRUST BEARINGS, THRUST RACES AND THRUST WASHERS LOCATION

mm (in.) O.D. (27% I.D. 55.7 (2.193) Thickness 1.4 LO551 Part No. I I Code O.D. 48.9 (I ,925) 48.9 (I ,925) 1 48.1 (1.874) (2% (2% 48.9 (1.925) 48.9 (I ,925) 48.9 (I .925) 48.9 (I ,925) 48.9 (1.925) 48.9 (1.925) 1 34.4 (1.354) (12180, 38.7 (I ,524) 36.4 (1.433) .(I?& (1% 36.4 (1.453) $3, M D 7 0 7 2 7 1 #4 M D 7 2 0 7 5 3 #5 1.6 i.063) M D 7 3 5 0 6 2 #8 (1% (I%, ($6, ($6, ($6, 1.6 i.063) 1.8 LO71 ) 2.0 LO791 MD997849 (included 2) M D997850 (included 3) MD997851 (included 3) #3 MD72001 0 MD724206 (25:8, #II #IO (2% 0.8 (.031) M D 7 3 5 0 6 3 #9 I.D. $6, ($6, Thickness 2.2 1.087) 2.4 (.094) Part No. MD997852 (included *4) #3 MD997853 (included *4) Code
I,J
~&Ii
(2% ($6, ($6, ($6,
I 1.8 i.071) 1 .o (.039) 1.2 (.047) 1.4 (.055)
c%
*4
4 2 . 6 (I ,677) (25;3,
,
M D 7 0 4 9 3 6 #6 MD72001 0 #7
M D 7 3 1 2 1 2 #2 MD997854 (Included *I) MD997847 (included *I 1 MD997848 (included 2)
(2%
\ d
TSB Revision
23-81
(16)Assemble the forward sun gear, thrust race #9, thrust bearing #8, and reverse sun gear.
Thkst bearing #8 1 7 7 0 0 6 6 J (17)lnstall the two sun gears assembled in the preceding step into the planetary carrier.
(18)lnstall the reaction plate, brake disc, and brake plate.
Caution If a new brake disc is to be used, it should be dipped in ATF for more than two hours.
(19)lnstall the pressure plate disassembled and return spring.
Caution Make sure the return spring is installed in the correct direction.
(20)Coat the wave spring with petrolatum and affix it to the center support.
TSB Revision
23-82

(21 jlnstall the special tool to the center support, fit new O-rings (at two places), and press the center support into the transaxle case.
Caution LJ 1. Coat the O-rings with ATF and align oil holes. 2. Install with care not to allow the wave spring to shift its position.
(22)Fit the snap ring.
(23)Using a feeler gauge, measure the end play in low-reverse brake. Select a pressure plate to obtain the specified end play.
Standard value: 1.0 - 1.2 mm (.039 - .047 in.)
(24)lnstall the air exhaust plug and mount the plug.
(25)lnstall the anchor rod.
TSB Revision
23-83
(26)lnstall the kickdown servo spring, piston, and sleeve.
Caution Make sure that the ends of seal ring on the kickdown servo piston are not located at the oil supply port (indicated by arrows).
(27)Using the special tools, press the kickdown servo piston and sleeve into position and fit the snap ring.
(28)Fit the kickdown band.
Caution Install so that the arrow points to the front.
Thrust sher
(29)lnstall thrust bearing #4 and thrust washer #2 to the rear clutch.
TFA0269
(30)Mate the rear clutch with the front clutch.
TFAo27
TSB Revision
23-84

(31)Mount thrust bearing #5 to the rear clutch hub.
TFA027l
(32)Assemble the rear clutch hub to rear clutch.
(33)lnstall thrust race #6 to the rear clutch hub end face.
Thrust race #6
TFA0273
(34)lnstall t hrust bearing #7 to the kickdown drum
(35)Assemble the clutch assembly to kickdown drum.
TSB Revision
23-85
(36)lnstall the clutch assembly and kickdqwn drum to the transaxle case at the same time.
[Thrust race #3
(37)Using petrolatum, affix thrust race #3 and thrust washer #I to the rear end face of oil pump.
rhn -
(38)Using the special tool, install a new oil pump gasket and oil pump assembly.
(39)Measure the end play in input shaft. If the measurement is out of specification, replace thrust race #3 and thrust washer #I to obtain the specified end play.
Standard value: 0.3 - 1.0 mm (.012 - .039 in.j
(40)lnstall the spacer, idler gear, and bearing and insert the idler shaft.
Caution Install so that the identification groove in the idler gear end face is on the rear face side.
TSB Revision
23-86
(41 )Tighten the idler shaft lock bolt to specification and raise the new lock plate for locking. Id
(42)lnstall the idler gear cover and new gasket
(43)lnsert the end clutch shaft with its longer splines facing front.
(44)Fit the thrust washer onto the end clutch return spring.
Thrust washer
(45)lnstall the end clutch hub to the end clutch assembly.
1750204
TSB Revision
23-87
(46)Using petrolatum, affix the thrust bearing to the end clutch hub.
1750205
(47)lnstall the end clutch assembly.
(48)Mount a new O-ring onto the end clutch cover.
(49)lnstall the end clutch cover and tighten bolts to specification.
(50)lnstall the differential assembly.
1 TSB Revision
23-88

(51 )Place 10 mm-long (.39 in.), 1.6 mm-dia. (.06 in.) solders at the locations shown of the differential rear bearing retainer and install the outer race.
(52)lnstalI the differential rear bearing retainer and tighten bolts to specification. (53)Loosen the bolts, remove the differential rear bearing retainer, and remove the solders. If the solders are not crushed, use larger dia. [3 mm (.I2 in.)] solders to repeat steps (51) to (53).
(54)Measure the thickness of the solders crushed with a micrometer and select a spacer to obtain the specified end play and preload.
Standard value: Front differential case preload 0.075 - 0.135 mm (.003 - .0053 in.)
2200048
(55)Fit a new O-ring to the differential rear bearing retainer, apply ATF, and mount the retainer to the transaxle case before torquing the bolts to specification.
TFA0590 J
(56)Mount the front bearing cap and tighten bolts to specification. (57)lnstall the differential cover and new gasket.
TSB Revision

(58)lnstall the detent assembly.
23-89
(59)Fit a new O-ring to the manual control shaft assembly, apply ATF, and insert it into the transaxle case. (6O)Align the groove in manual control shaft with the set screw hole and install the set screw.
(61)Mount the parking roller support.
(62)lnstall the oil temperature sensor into the case.
(63)Fit the O-ring into the O-ring groove in the top surface of valve body assembly.
TSB Revision

(64)Replace the solenoid valve harness grommet O-ring with a new one. (65)Pass the solenoid valve connector into the hole in transaxle case from the inside. (66)Press the solenoid valve harness grommet into the case hole.
(67)Fitting the detent plate pin into the groove in manual valve, temporarily secure the valve body. Then, install the oil temperature sensor and holder and tighten bolts to specification.
.A
Bolt A = 18 mm (.71 in.) Bolt B = 25 mm (.98 in.) Bolt C = 40 mm (1.57 in.) Caution Secure the solenoid valve and oil temperature sensor harnesses as shown.
(68)lnstaII the oil screen.
(69)Mount the magnet to oil pan and install the oil pan
(70)lnstall the inhibitor switch and manual control lever. (71 )Install the speedometer gear assembly.
Inhibitor switch
TSB Revision

(72)lnstall pulse generator A and B.
23-91
Caution Install the black tube to the output gear side and transparent tube to end clutch side.
(73)Mount the oil filler tube and insert the level gauge. (74)lnstall the brackets. (75)Adjust the kickdown servo.
(76)lnstall the kickdown servo switch and secure it with the snap ring.
(77)Apply ATF to the oil pump drive hub, install the torque converter, and push converter into position so that dimension A is up to specification.
Standard value: Approx. 16.3 mm (.642 in.)
COMPONENT PRECAUTIONS
DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY
M23NEAB
GENERAL CLEANING PRECAUTIONS

(1) Clean parts and blow the oil passages and oil holes with compressed air to check that they are not clogged. (2) For the cleaning solution, use the specified ATF or kerosene. (3) When drying parts with compressed air, use care not to allow ATF or kerosene to splash over your face.
PARTS HANDLING PRECAUTIONS

(1) Keep parts after cleaning in good order to ensure correct inspection, repair, and reinstallation. (2) When disassembling the valve body, keep each valve with the mating spring. (3) Keep the new brake disc and clutch disc for replacement dipped in ATF for more than two hours.
TSB Revision
23-92
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Transaxle Assembly / Transfer Shaft GENERAL REASSEMBLY PRECAUTIONS

(1) Coat the seal rings, clutch disc, clutch plate, and rotary and sliding surfaces with ATF before installation. (2) Replace all gaskets and O-rings with new parts. They should not be reused. (3) Use petrolatum to secure parts in position.
TRANSFER SHAFT
M23LMAE
Disassembly steps
*I* I)* 1. Bearing 2. Transfer shaft ** l 4 3. Bearing
TFA0322

bearings from both ends of
1 TSB Revision
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Transfer Shaft / Oil Pump

Front side -
23-93

1. 3. INSTALLATION OF BEARING Using the special tool, install the bearings to the transfer shaft.
TFAo324
Rear side fq/ MD998812 MD998825
OIL PUMP
2
11
Nm
hQ3LGAL
Disassembly steps ** 1. O-ring ** 2. Reaction shaft support l * 3. Steel ball l * l + 4. Drive gear +* l * 5. Driven gear 6. Snap ring 7. Oil seal 8. Seal ring l 4 9. Oil seal 10. Oil pump housing
SERVICE. POINTS OF DISASSEMBLY

4. REMOVAL OF DRIVE GEAR / 5. DRIVEN GEAR
Make reassembly alignment marks on the drive and driven gears.
TSB Revision
23-94
MD998334-01 IQ
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Oil Pump SERVICE POINTS OF REASSEMBLY

Pump housing
Using the special tool, install the oil seal to the pump housing.
I-
TFAOX)3
5. MEASUREMENT SIDE CLEARANCE OF DRIVEN GEAR / 4. DRIVE GEAR

Measure the side clearance of the oil pump gear and, if the specification is exceeded, replace the gear or oil pump assembly.
Standard value: 0.03 - 0.05 mm (-001 - .002 in.)
3. LOCATION OF STEEL BALL

Install the steel ball at the location shown.
2. INSTALLATION OF REACTION SHAFT SUPPORT

(I) Assemble the reaction shaft support and the pump housing, and tighten the bolts by fingers. (2) Insert the special tool (Guide Pin, MD998336-01) into the oil pump mounting bolt hole and clamp the periphery with the special tool (Band, MD998335-01) to position the support and housing. (3) Tighten the five bolts to the specified torque. (4) Make sure that the oil pump gear turns freely.
T FAO201
1. INSTALLATION OF O-RING
Install a new O-ring in the gro,ove of the pump housing and apply petrolatum jelly to the O-ring.
TSB Revision
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Front Clutch Assembly
23-95
MWLHAH
FRONT CLUTCH ASSEMBLY

i
: 1
TFA0422
123 5
1. Snap ring 2. Clutch reaction plate 3. Clutch plate 4. Clutch disc l * 5. Clutch pressure plate l * l * 6. Snap ring 7. Return spring 8. Front clutch piston 9. D-ring 10. D-ring 11. Front clutch retainer
l l l
a a *
TFA0423
TSB Revision
23-96
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Front Clutch Assembly SERVICE POINT OF DISASSEMBLY

(I) Compress the return spring with the special tool. (2) Remove the snap ring.
1750264

(I) Compress the return spring with the special tool. (2) Install the snap ring.
1750264
7
5. INSTALLATION OF CLUTCH PRESSURE PLATE / 3. CLUTCH PLATE / 2. CLUTCH REACTION PLATE

(1) When installing the clutch pressure plate, clutch plate, and clutch reaction plate, align the areas where one tooth is missing [indicated by @I. N O T E This ensures that the automatic transmission fluid escapes well and the plate and disc are cooled efficiently.
Clutch reactior
(2) Install the plates so that the shear droop side of each plate is located as shown. (3) Make sure that the thickest plate (clutch reaction plate) is located on the snap ring side.
plate
v Clutch disc
TFAQ424
1. SELECTION OF SNAP RING

(1) Check clearance between the snap ring and clutch reaction plate. To check the clearance, hold entire circumference of the clutch reaction plate down with 50 N (11 Ibs.) force. If clearance is out of standard value, select a snap ring to obtain the standard value.
TSB Revision
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Rear Clutch Assembly
23-97
MWLHBI
REAR CLUTCH ASSEMBLY

TFA0418
Disassembly steps 1. Seal ring l + 2. Input shaft 3. O-ring 4. Snap ring 5. Thrust race 6. Seal ring l * 7. Snap ring M 8. Clutch reaction plate 9. Clutch disc l + 10. Clutch plate 11. Wave spring *I) l a 12. Snap ring 13. Return spring 14. Rear clutch piston 15. D-ring 16. D-ring 17. Rear clutch retainer TSB Revision
TFA0490
23-98
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Rear Clutch Assembly SERVICE POINT OF DISASSEMBLY

MD998337-01

(1) Using the special tool, compress the return spring.
(2) Using the snap ring pliers, remove the snap ring.
LJ
MD998337-01

,

(I) Using the special tool, compress the return spring. (2) Using the snap ring pliers, install the snap ring.
10. INSTALLATION OF CLUTCH PLATE / 8. CLUTCH REACTION PLATE

Install the clutch plate and reaction plate so that the areas where one tooth is missing [indicated by @] are aligned with each other. NOTE 4~ This ensures that the automatic transmission fluid escapes well and the plate and disc are cooled efficiently.
7. SELECTION OF SNAP RING

Check clearance between the snap ring and clutch reaction plate. To check the clearance, hold entire circumference of the clutch reaction plate down with 50 N (11 Ibs.) force. If clearance is out of standard value, select a snap ring to obtain the standard value.
2. INSTALLATION OF INPUT SHAFT

Align the oil groove in the input shaft with the alignment mark on the rear clutch retainer.
TSB Revision
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - End Clutch Assembly
23-99
M23LHFF
END CLUTCH ASSEMBLY

Ial3
9
TFA0607
8 7
13
Disassembly steps
1. Seal ring I)4 2. Snap ring 3. Clutch reaction plate 4. Clutch disc 5. Clutch plate l 6. Snap ring 7. Washer 8. Return spring 9. End clutch piston 10. Oil seal 11. D-ring 12. End clutch retainer 13. Oil seal
TFA0608

Using the special tool, fit the snap ring.
Caution Make sure that the snap ring is fitted in position in the groove.
1 TSB Revision
23-100 AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
- End Clutch Assembly / Planetary Gear
2. SELECTION OF SNAP RING After the snap ring has been installed,.check to see if the clearance between the snap ring and clutch reaction plate is up to specification. When measuring the clearance, press the entire periphery of the clutch reaction plate with a force of 50 N (1 1 Ibs.). If the clearance is out of specification, reselect the snap ring to obtain the specified clearance.
Standard value: 0.6 - 0.85 mm (0.24 - 0.33 in.)
I\\\ 7
TFA0268
PLANETARY GEAR
M23LKAL
Disassembly steps 1. Thrust bearing ** l * 2. Rivet l * 3. Waved washer 4. One-way clutch outer race 5. End plate l * 6. One-way clutch 7. End plate 8. Planet carrier
TFA0491

2. REMOVAL OF RIVET
(I) Shift the stopper plate to ensure that the rivet head does not hit it. NOTE Make sure that the stopper plate claw is not located at the groove in the one-way clutch outer race.
(2) Using a pin punch, drive out the rivet.
TSB Revision
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Planetary Gear. SERVICE POINTS OF REASSEMBLY

6. INSTALLATION OF ONE-WAY CLUTCH
23-101
Push the one-way clutch into position so that the arrow on its gauge points at a direction as shown.
3. INSTALLATION OF WAVED WASHER

Install the waved washer to the rivet so that its indentation is placed on the outer race side.
TFM0506
2. INSTALLATION OF RIVET
Stake the rivet using a punch and press. NOTE (1) Use a punch with a 60 tip angle. (2) Stake the rivet with a load of 11,000 - 13,000 N (2,425 2,866 Ibs.).
TSB Revision
23-102
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE -
Annulus Gear and Transfer Drive Gear Set
I I
ANNULUS GEAR AND TRANSFER DRIVE GEAR SET

M23LlAG
TFA0262
Disassembly steps l + 1. Snap ring 2. Stopper plate l * I)* 3. Bearing +I) ** 4. Bearing +W I)* 5. Transferdrivegear 6. Snap ring 7. Output flange 8. Annulus gear

3. 4. REMOVAL OF BEARING / 5. TRANSFER DRIVE GEAR
(1) Using the special tool, remove the transfer drive gear together with two bearings from the output flange.
Caution Install the special tool in position between the output flange and bearings.
(2) Using the special tool, remove the bearings from both sides of the transfer drive gear.
TFAO225
TSB Revision
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE -
Annulus Gear and Transfer Drive Gear Set
23-103

5. INSTALLATION OF TRANSFER DRIVE GEAR / 4. 3. BEARING
(1) Using the special tool, press-fit the bearings into both sides of the transfer drive gear.
TFA0226
(2) Using the special tool, install the transfer drive gear to the output flange.
II
TM0227
1.. SELECTION. OF SNAP RING

Measure the snap ring groove clearance and select the appropriate spacer to obtain the specified end play. I
Standard value: 0 - 0.09 mm (0 - .0035 in.)
id
TSB Revision
23-104 DIFFERENTIAL
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Differential

M23LNAH I
. ? , \
9
163025
Disassembly steps I)* 1. Bolt 2. Differential drive gear +* I)* 3. Bearing +* w+ 4. Lock pin ++ 5. Pinion shaft I)+ 6. Pinion l a 7. Washer l * 8. Sidegear I)* 9. Spacer IO. Differential cgse

3. REMOVAL OF BEARING Using the special tool; remove the bearing.
4. REMOVAL OF LOCK PIN Using a pin punch, drive 6ut the lock pin. NOTE The lock pin can be easily driven out.
TFA0231
TSB Revision
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Differential SERVICE POINTS OF DISASSEMBLY
23405
9. INSTALLATION OF SPACER / 8. SIDE GEAR / 7. WASHER / 6. PINION / 5. PINION SHAFT

(1) Fit the spacer to the back face of the side gear, then install the gear into the differential case. (2) Fit washer to back of pinion and rotate two pinions at the same time into position to mesh with the side gear.
(3) Insert the pinion shaft \

Pinion, shaft Pinion gear /
(4) Measure the backlash between the side gear and pinion.
Standard value: 0.025 - 0.150 mm (.OOl - .0059 in.)

(5) If the backlash is out of specification, select the appropriate spacer and disassemble and reassemble the gears as necessary. NOTE Adjust so that the backlash in both side gears equals.
4. INSTALLATION OF LOCK PIN

Align the lock pin hole in pinion shaft with that in the case and install the lock pin.
Cautipn The lock pin should be lower than the differential case flange surface.
3. INSTALLATION OF BEARING
MD998822
Using the special tool, press-fit the bearings into both sides of the differential case.
TFY0040
TSB
Revision
23-106 AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE -
Differential / Speedometer Driven Gear Assembly
1. INSTALLATION OF BOLTS
Coat the differential drive gear bolts with ATF and tighten them to specification in the numerical order shown. d
21 SPEEDOMETER DRIVEN GEAR ASSEMBLY

210025
M23LOAF
201078
Disassembly steps
1. l * 2. l * 3. 4. 5. O-ring Spring pin Speedometer driven gear Oil seal Sleeve
Ls

3. INSTALLATION OF SPEEDOMETER DRIVEN GEAR
Apply gear oil sparingly to the speedometer driven gear shaft and insert the shaft.
2. INSTALLATION OF SPRING PIN

Install the spring pin in such a way that its slit does not face the gear shaft. Sli;
20107s
TSB Revision
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Kickdown Servo / Low-Reverse Brake B-107
KICKDOWN SERVO
i
M23lPAF
Disassembly steps 1. O-ring 2. Kickdown servo 3. D-ring 4. Seal ring 5. Lock nut 6. Kickdown servo rod 7. Kickdown servo piston
1750299
LOW-REVERSE BRAKE
M23WAF
Disassembly steps I. Low-reverse brake piston 2. D-ring 3. D-ring 4. Center support
TSB Revision
23408 VALVE BODY
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Valve Body

hV3LOAM
Viewed from A
TFA0523
1. Manual valve * 2. Pressure control solenoid valve ** 3. Damper clutch control solenoid valve l * 4. Shift control solenoid valve A l a 5. Shift control solenoid valve B 6. Clamp 7. Valve stopper 8. N-D control sleeve 9. N-D control valve *4 10. Lower valve body sub assembly 11. Lower separating plate 12. Nut 13. Jet l + 14. Relief spring l * 15. Steel ball I)* 16. Oil filter l * 17. Upper valve body sub assembly ** 18. Steel ball l + 1 9. Teflon ball _ ^ l * 20. N-D plate 21. Block 22. Upper separating plate 23. Intermediate plate
l
TSB Revision
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Valve Bodv
23409
26
46
2?
I A
7 .7L% + 6 if tp+?E LF$ \ w a G G r

Viewed from B 45 B 44 /@ <@ /
24. Front end cover 25. Pressure control spring 26. Pressure control valve 27. Torque converter control spring 28. Torque converter control valve 29. Adjusting screw 30. Regulator spring 31. Regulator valve 32. Shift control spring l + 33. Stopper plate 34. Shift control plug 35. Rear clutch exhaust valve A 36. Rear clutch exhaust valve B 37. Rear clutch exhaust spring TSB Revision 38. 2-3/4-3 shift spring 39. 2-314-3 shift valve 40. Rear end cover 41. Shift control plug B l * 42. Stopper plate 43. Shift control valve 44. 1-2 shift spring 45. 1-2 shift valve 46. Upper valve body
41
r) F
e 40
VA0518
23-110
56
47. Pin 48. Stopper .^_.. 4Y. tnd clutch plug 50. End clutch spring 51. End clutch valve 52. End cover 53. Damper clutch control sleeve 54. Damper clutch control valve 55. Damper clutch control spring 56. N-R control valve 57. N-R control spring 58. Adjusting screw 59. Reducing spring 60. Reducing valve 61. Lower valve body TSB Revision
52 T FA0541
23-111
42.33. LOCATION OF STOPPER PLATE / 20. N-D PLATE / 19. TEFLON BALL / 18. STEEL BALL
Install the stopper plates, N-D plate, teflon ball, and steel balls into the upper valve body as shown.
17. INSTALLATION OF UPPER VALVE BODY SUB ASSEMBLY

Install the special tool and secure the upper separating plate and intermediate plate with eight mounting bolts. Then, remove the special tool.
16. INSTALLATION OF OIL FILTER / 15. STEEL BALL / 14. RELIEF SPRING
Install the oil filter, two steel balls, and spring to the intermediate plate.
MD998226-01
10. INSTALLATION OF LOWER VALVE BODY SUB ASSEMBLY

(1) Mount the special tool to the intermediate plate.
(2) Install the separating plate.
TSB Revision
23-112
I\
----TY
(3) Secure the lower valve body with mounting bolts and then remove the special tool.
5. 4. 3.2. INSTALLATION OF SOLENOID VALVE ASSEMBLY

Install the solenoid valves as shown. Solenoid valve Shift control solenoid valve A Shift control solenoid valve B ; & V - A S&V-B &sV
TFmm
Wire color Orange Yellow Red Blue
Damper clutch control solenoid valve Pressure control solenoid valve
TSB Revision
25-1
PROPELLER ~ ~ SHAFT
CONTENTS
PROPELLER SHAFT ................................................ SPECIAL TOOL ........................................................ SPECIFICATIONS .................................................... 3 3 2
M25AA-
I
I
Lubricants ................................................................ 2 Service Specifications ........................................ 2
TROUBLESHOOTING
Noise at Start
............................................
........................................ 2
Noise and Vibration at High Speed
25-2 SPECIFICATIONS
PROPELLER SHAFT - Specifications

M25CA-
Items Propeller shaft Type Length x O.D. Front Center Rear Universal joint 4 joint propeller shaft mm (In.) 673.5 x 65 (26.52 x 2.56) 662.5 x 65 (26.08 x 2.56) 555.5 x 75 (21.87 x 2.95) Specifications
Type No. 1 (front) No. 2 (center front) No. 3 (center rear) [Lobro joint] No. 4 (rear) Lubrication mm (in.) Size Cross type joint journal O.D. Constant velocity joint O.D.
Cross type Cross type Constant velocity type Cross type Pre-packed type 16 t.63) 99.73 (3.93)
NOTE Propeller shaft length indicates the length between the center points of each joint
Items Limit Propeller shaft runout (Dial indicator reading) Front mm (in.) mm (in.) Center mm (in.) Rear Specifications
M25CE d
0.6 l.024) or less 0.6 i.024) or less 0.6 t.024) or less
LUBRICANTS
Items Sleeve yoke surface Lobro joint assembly Outer and inner races ball grooves Lobro joint assembly inner part Rubber packing Specified lubricant Hypoid Gear Oil/API classification GL-4 or higher, SAE 75W-85W Repair kit grease Repair kit grease 3M ATD Part No. 8155 or equivalent Quantity As required
M25CD..
As required 45-55g (1.59 - 1.94 oz.) As required
1 TSB Revision
PROPELLER SHAFT -
Special Tool / Troubleshooting / Propeller Shaft
SPECIAL TOOL
i r 1 Tool Number MB991 193 Name Plug
MZSDA- -
I I Use I Prevention of entry of forergn objects into the transaxle and transfer
I I
TROUBLESHOOTING
Symptom Noise at start Probable cause Worn journal bearing Worn sleeve yoke spline Loose propeller shaft installation Noise and vibration at high speed Unbalanced propeller shaft Worn journal bearing Remedy Replace Retighten Replace Replace
M25EAAF
PROPELLER SHAFT
M25GA..
lOGO
Gear oil: Hypoid Gear Oil/ API classification GL-4 or higher, SAE 75W-85W
50-60Nm 36 - 43 ft.lbs.
Li
Removal steps 1. Self-locking nut l + 2. Insulator l * l 4 3. Propeller shaft .4* 4. Spacer
22 ft.lbs.
.a 1.111
22 ftlbs.
w TSB Revision
lON0013
25-4
PROPELLER SHAFT - ProDeller Shaft SERVICE POINTS OF REMOVAL

3. REMOVAL OF PROPELLER SHAFT
(1) Make mating marks on the differential companion flange and flange yoke.
M25GEAI
Propeller shaft
L6bro Joint boot
LGbro joint assembly
Caution Remove the propeller shaft in a straight and level manner so as to ensure that the boot is not damaged through pinching.
NOTE Damage to the boot can be avoided, and the work will be easier, if a piece of cloth or similar material is inserted in the boot.
(2) Use the special tool provided as a cover to prevent the entry of foreign objects into the transfer.
4. REMOVAL OF SPACER
The number of spacers necessary may differ from one location to another (front, rear, right, left). Record the number of spacers used to ensure correct installation.
Lj
INSPECTION
l l l
M25GCAI
Check the sleeve yoke, center yoke and flange yoke for wear, damage or cracks. Check the propeller shaft yokes for wear, damage or cracks. Check the propeller shaft for bends, twisting or damage.
Measure the propeller shaft runout with a dial indicator.
Limit: Front propeller shaft Center propeller shaft Rear propeller shaft
0.6 mm (.024 in.) or less 0.6 mm (.024 in.) or less 0.6 mm (.024 in.) or less
NOTE Set the V-blocks as much as possible to the end of the shaft. Measure deflection at the center of the shaft.
TSB Revision
PROPELLER SHAFT - Propeller Shaft

l l l
25-5
Check the universal joints for smooth operation in all directions. Check the center bearing for smooth movement. Check the center bearing mounting rubber for damage or deterioration.
lOW504
lOW505
M25GOAP
3. INSTALLATION OF PROPELLER SHAFT (I) Caution Be cautious to avoid damage to the oil seal lip of the transfer.
Matlng marks
(2) Install the propeller shaft to the companion flange with the mating marks properly aligned.
Caution Tighten installation bolts after removing oil and grease from threads to prevent them from loosening due to lubrication.
2. INSTALLATION OF INSULATOR
Install spacers and insulators as indicated in the illustration.
Caution When installing the center bearing, assemble the same spacers as removed from it (or new spacers of equal thickness).
10AOOl 2
TSB Revision
25-6

M25GE-

35 Nm 25 ft.lbs.
lOFOOO3
Rubber mount 16
Lijbro joint Ltjbro joint (outer race) (inner race)loxools
4% .(? yo 1 , ia \0 A; .fr i 42 *
,0x00.0
lON0009
Grease: Repair kit grease [45-55g(1.59-1.9402.)1 Disassembly steps *I) I, Front propeller shaft assembly I)+ 2. Self-locking nut ** *+ 3. Companion flange a* l * 4. Center bearing assembly *I) l + 5. Center propeller shaft assembly 6. Snap ring l * 7. Boot band +* I)* 8. Lobro joint assembly TSB Revision
3M ATD Part No. 8155 or equivalent 9. Rubber packing +* ** IO. Lobro joint boot 11. Washer 12. Center propeller shaft l + 13. Self-locking nut ** l * 14. Companion flange 41) l * 15. Center bearing assembly 16. Rear propeller shaft
PROPELLER SHAFT - Propeller Shaft SERVICE POINTS OF DISASSEMBLY

Mating marks
25-7
M25GFAO
1. REMOVAL OF FRONT PROPELLER SHAFT ASSEMBLY Put mating marks on the front propeller shaft flange yoke and the companion flange before removing the front propeller shaft assembly.
1ONOOOL
3. REMOVAL OF COMPANION FLANGE

Mating marks
Put mating marks on the companion flange and the center propeller shaft before removing the companion flange.
1 ON0003
4. REMOVAL OF CENTER BEARING ASSEMBLY

(commercially available)
First remove the center bearing bracket and then remove the center bearing using a puller (commercially available).
lOS520 '
lOY507
5. REMOVAL OF CENTER PROPELLER SHAFT ASSEMBLY

Put mating marks on the center propeller shaft, the Lobro joint assembly and the companion flange before removing the center propeller shaft assembly.
8. REMOVAL OF LOBRO JOINT ASSEMBLY

(1) Remove the Lobro joint boot from the Lobro joint assembly.
TSB Revision
25-8
1 Mating marks ,A I ^.I

Outer race I
(2) Put mating marks on the outer race, cage and inner race with a scriber before removing the outer race and balls.
Caution Note the positions of balls so that they can be reinstalled in their original positions.
Cage
Inner race
(3) Remove the inner race with cage from the center propeller shaft by using a puller (commercially available). NOTE When changing the grease on the Lobro joint assembly, wipe off the grease and clean the outer and inner races, cage and balls.
(4) If the outer race cannot be removed, remove the complete Lobro joint assembly from the center propeller shaft by using a puller (commercially available).
10. REMOVAL OF LOBRO JOINT BOOT

Tape the serration of the center propeller shaft and then remove the Lobro joint boot.
14. REMOVAL OF COMPANION FLANGE

Put mating marks on the companion flange and the rear propeller shaft before removing the companion flange.
lON0012 TSB Revision

Puller [commercially
25-9
15. REMOVAL OF CENTER BEARING ASSEMBLY

available)
First remove the center bearing bracket and then remove the center bearing using a puller (commercially available).
INSPECTION
l l l l
M25GIAA
Check Check wear, Check Check
the propeller shaft splines for wear or damage. the ball grooves in inner or outer race for uneven damage or rust. ball surface for rust, wear or other damage. the cage for rust or damage.

Companion flange Rubber mount
M25GHA.R
15. INSTALLATION OF CENTER BEARING ASSEMBLY / 14. COMPANION FLANGE / 13. SELF-LOCKING NUT
(1) Install the bearing in the rubber mount groove of the center bearing bracket. (2) Install the center bearing assembly to the rear propeller shaft with its dust seal facing the companion flange side. (3) Install, lining up the mating marks on the companion flange and the rear propeller shaft. (4) While tightening the self-locking nut, install the center bearing assembly with the companion flange.
L;
Self -lockir nut
lON0007
10. INSTALLATION OF LOBRO JOINT BOOT

Tape the serration of the center propeller shaft and then install the Lobro joint boot.
lONO
8. INSTALLATION OF LOBRO JOINT ASSEMBLY

Assemble the Lobro joint as follows: (I) Apply a thin coat of the specified grease to the ball grooves of the inner and outer races.
Specified grease: Repair kit giease
10X0018
TSB Revision
25-10
PROPELLER SkIAFT - ProDeller Shaft

(2) Put the cage on the inner race with the mating marks aligned and install two balls, one in a groove and the other in the groove opposite to that groove. Both balls should be placed in the grooves where they were before disassembly. (3) Assemble the inner race and cage in the outer race with their mating marks aligned. NOTE Make sure that the recessed end (where snap ring will be fitted) of ,the inner race, the recessed end (where packing will be fitted) of the outer race, and the chamfered end of the cage are all on the same side. Also ensure that the relative positions of the inner and outer races are as shown in the illustration. (4) Install the remaining balls in their original positions. (5) Check that the outer race rotates on the inner race smoothly.
inner race
Recessed end of inner race Chamfered end of cage
(6) Apply specified grease to the Lobro joint assembly.
Specified grease: Repair kit grease

[45 - 55 g (1.59 - 1.94 oz.)]
Rubber king
(7) Apply quick fix adhesive at three locations illustrated to prevent displacement of the rubber packing and fix it to the Lobro joint assembly temporarily.
Specified adhesive: 3M ATD Part No. 8155 or equivalent
(8) Lining up the mating marks on the Lobro joint assembly and the center propeller shaft and applying the socket to the inner race of the Lobro joint assembly, install the Lobro joint assembly to the center propeller shaft.
TSB Revision

Mounting bolts
25-11
(9) Using the center propeller shaft bolt, align the bolt holes of the Lobro joint boot and the Lobro joint assembly and install the Lobro joint boot to the Lobro joint assembly.
L6bro ioht boot

1ouooll 5
(10)Check that the Lobro joint assembly moves smoothly.
/
L
1ouoo17
Boot band clio Dosition 7
7. INSTALLATION OF BOOT BAND Caution Position the boot,band clip on the side opposite to the bosses which are provided in the boot for ventilation. Be sure to remove grease, if present, from around the bosses. Grease obstructs the ventilation air passage.
1ouoo13 I
5. INSTALLATION OF CENTER PROPELLER SHAFT ASSEMBLY

Install, lining up the mating marks on the center propeller shaft, the Lobro joint assembly and the companion flange.
Companion flange Dust seal \
Rubber/mount
4. INSTALLATION OF CENTER BEARING ASSEMBLY / 3. COMPANION FLANGE / 2. SELF-LOCKING NUT

(1) Install the bearing in the rubber mount groove of the center bearing bracket. (2) Install the center bearing assembly to the center propeller shaft with its dust seal facing the companion flange side. (3) Install, lining up the mating marks on the companion flange and the center propeller shaft. (4) While tightening the self-locking nut, install the center bearing assembly with the companion flange.
TSB Revision
26-1
FRONT AXLE
CONTENTS
DRIVE SHAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _. . . . . . HUB AND KNUCKLE ............................................ SERVICE ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES ........
Hub End Play Inspection ................................
M26AA-
2 2 2
i
2
i
11 6 5
5
S P E C I F I C A T I O N S _..._...........................................
General Specifications Service Specifications .................................... .................................... Lubricants ............................................................
TROUBLESHOOTING
........................................
5 I
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._.................. .: . . . . . . . . . . . .
26-2
FRONT AXLE - Specifications

M26CA-A
SPECIFICATIONS
Items Wheel bearing Type O.D. x I.D. mm (in.) Double-row angular-contact ball bearing 84 x 45 (3.31 x 1.77) Unit ball bearing FWD AWD
Drive shaft Joint type Outer Inner mm (in.) Length L.H. shaft R.H. shaft NOTE 1 <Al-r>
B.J. T.J. 417 (I 6.4) 405 (15.9) or 393 (15.5)
B.J. T.J. 419 (16.5) 391 (15.4)
terns standard value Setting of T.J. boot length L.H. R.H. mm (in.) 85 f 3 (3.35 k .I 2) 85 + 3 (3.35 +- .I 2) 0.05 (.002) 1.8 (16) Specifications
M26CB-A
Limit Hub end play mm (in.) Wheel bearing starting torque (Hub starting torque) Nm (in.lbs.)
LUBRICANTS
Items T.J. boot grease B.J. boot grease <FWD> <AWD> Dust seal inner Dust seal outer Specified lubricants Repair kit grease Repair kit grease Multipurpose grease Quantity 160 g (5.64 oz.) 145 g (5.11 oz.) 135 g (4.76 oz.)
M26CO-A
14-2og (.49-.71 oz.) 8-12g(.28-.42oz.)
1 TSB Revision
FRONT AXLE - Special Tools
26-3
M26DA-A
SPECIAL TOOLS
MB990998-01
Front hub remover and installer
Removal or press-in the front hub <FWD> Measurement of front hub unit bearing rotation starting torque <AWD>
of the hub <FWD>
M B990955-01
Oil seal installer
MB990890-01
M B990883-01
Rear suspension
TSB Revision
26-4
Tool Number
FRONT AXLE - Special Tools

Name Inner shaft remover
7
Use Removal of the inner shaft
MB991 248 or MD998801
MB990925-01
Bearing and oil seal installer set
Removal of wheel bearing M 8990932-01 M B990938-01 Removal and installation of center bearing MB990930-01 MB990932-01 M 8990938-01
MB990938-0 1
Handle
MB990925-01
Tool number MB990926-01 MB990927-01 MB990928-01 M B990929-01 MB990930-01 MB990931-01 MB990932-01 MB990933-01 MB990934-01 MB990935-01 MB990936-01 MB990937-01
Installer disc O.D. mm (in.: 39.0 45.0 49.5 51 .o 54.0 57.0 61 .O 63.5 67.5 71.5 75.5 79.0 (1.54) (1.77) (1.95) (2.01) (2.13) (2.24) (2.40) (2.50) (2.66) (2.81) (2.97) (3.11)
TSB Revision
FRONT AXLE - Troubleshooting / Service Adjustment Procedures
26-5
MPBEBAA
TROUBLESHOOTING
Symptom Vehicle pulls to one side Probable cause Seizure of drive shaft ball joint Abnormal wear, play or seizure of wheel bearing Malfunction of front suspension or steering Vibration Bend, damage or abnormal wear of drive shaft Play in drive shaft and hub serration Abnormal wear, play or seizure of wheel bearing Shimmy Improper wheel alignment Malfunction of front suspension or steering Excessive noise Broken boot, grease leakage Bend, damage or abnormal wear of drive shaft Play of drive shaft and hub serration Abnormal wear, play or seizure of center bearing Abnormal wear, play or seizure of wheel bearing Loose wheel nut Malfunction of front suspension and steering i. Remedy Replace Replace Adjust or replace Replace Replace Replace Adjust or replace Adjust or replace Replace, repack grease Replace Replace Replace Replace Retighten Adjust or replace

HUB END PLAY INSPECTION
M26FAAE
1. Jack up the vehicle and remove the front wheels. 2. Remove the disc brake caliper and suspend it with a wire. (Refer to GROUP 35 - Service Adjustment Procedures.) 3. Attach a dial indicator as shown in the illustration, and then measure the axial play while moving the hub back and forth. Limit: 0.05 mm (.002 in.)
11 A0285
4.
If axial play exceeds the limit, disassemble and check parts.
, 1 TSB Revision 1
26-6 HUB AND KNUCKLE
FRONT AXLE - Hub and Knuckle

M261A-

<FWD>
90 - 105 Nm 7 - 76 fubs.
<AWD>
60-72Nm 43 - 52 ft.bs. b Ibs. 2 9 N m
2001260 Nm 145 - 188 ftlbs.

UN0029
200 - 260 Nm 145- 188 ftlbs.

llFO026
Removal steps 4* 1. Front speed sensor connection <Vehicles with A.B.S.*> l * 2. Cotter pin 4* l + 3. Drive shaft nut 4* 4. Caliper assembly 5. Brake disc 6. Front hub unit bearing 7. Dust shield 4* 8. Lower arm ball joint connection TSB Revision
4* 4* 4*
9. Cotter pin 10. Tie rod end connection 11. Drive shaft 12. Front strut mounting bolt 13. Hub and knuckle 14. Hub
NOTE *: Anti-lock braking system
FRONT AXLE - Hub and Knuckle SERVICE POINTS OF REMOVAL

1. DISCONNECTION OF FRONT SPEED SENSOR
26-7
M2618AH
Remove the mounting bolts which hold the speed sensor bracket to the knuckle, and then remove the speed sensor.
Caution Be careful when handling the pole piece at the tip of the speed sensor and the toothed edge of the rotor so as not to damage them by striking against other parts.
3. REMOVAL OF DRIVE SHAFT NUT

Loosen the drive shaft nut while the vehicle is on the floor with the brakes applied.
MB990998-01
Caution Do not apply vehicle load to the wheel bearing loosing the drive shaft nut. If, however, vehicle load must be applied to the bearing in moving the vehicle, temporarily secure the wheel bearing by using the special tools, MB990998-01, etc.
4. REMOVAL OF CALIPER ASSEMBLY

Remove the caliper assembly and suspend it with wires.
8. DISCONNECTION OF LOWER ARM BALL JOINT

MB990635-01
Caution 1. Be sure to tie the cord of the special tool to the nearby part. 2. Loosen the nut but do not remove it. IO. DISCONNECTION OF TIE ROD END
11. REMOVAL OF DRIVE SHAFT

Use the special tool to push out the drive shaft from the front hub.
14. REMOVAL OF HUB

In the case of AWD-vehicles with A.B.S., take care not to damage the rotor for A.B.S. installed to the B.J. outer race when removing the hub.
1 lA0286 1
TSB Revision
26-8
FRONT AXLE - Hub and Knuckle INSPECTION

l l l l M26lCAE
the the the for
hub for cracks and spline for wear. oil seal for damage. knuckle for cracks. defective bearing.
L)
NOTE If the meshing of the wheel bearing outer race and the knuckle, or of the wheel bearing inner race and the hub, is loose, replace the bearing or damaged parts.
MEASUREMENT OF FRONT HUB UNIT BEARING ROTATION STARTING TORQUE

(1) Set the special tool to the front hub unit bearing. (2) Holding the special tool (bolt), tighten its nut to 200 to 260 Nm (145 to 188 ft.lbs.). (3) Turn the hub to cause grease to distribute evenly over the bearing.
llFO041
(4) Measure the rotation starting torque of the hub.
Limit: 1.8 Nm (16 in.lbs.) or less

:ter
M261OAG
3. INSTALLATION OF DRIVE SHAFT NUT / 2. COTTER PIN pin

(I) Be sure to install the washer and wheel bearing nut in the specified direction. (2) After installing the wheel, lower the vehicle to the ground and finally tighten the wheel bearing nut. (3) If the position of the cotter pin holes does not match, tighten the nut up to 260 Nm (188 ft.lbs.1 in maximum. (4) Install the cotter pin in the first matching holes and bend it securely.
TSB Revision
I
FRONT AXLE - Hub and Knuckle DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY

<FWD> n
26-9
MSIE- .
Disassembly steps
1. Oil seal (drive shaft side) 2. Hub and rotor l 4 Adjustment of wheel bearing starting torque 3. Hub 4. Rotor <Vehicles with A.B.S.> 5. Dust shield l * 6. Oil seal (hub side) 7. Snap ring *I) l * 8. Wheel bearing 9. Knuckle I)+
*I)
/
9Nm 7 ftlbs.

2. REMOVAL OF HUB AND ROTOR
M26lFAP
(1) Attach the special tools to the knuckle and front hub. (2) Secure the knuckle in a vise. (3) Tighten the nut of the special tool and remove the hub and rotor from the knuckle.
Caution 1. Be sure to use the special tools. 2. If the hub and knuckle are disassembled by striking them with a hammer, the bearing will be damaged. 8. REMOVAL OF WHEEL BEARING
(1) Crush the oil seal in two places to that the tabs of the special tool will be caught on the wheel bearing inner race.
(2) Remove the wheel bearing inner race from the hub by using the special tool.
Caution Be careful that the hub will not fall down as the wheel bearing inner race (outer side) is removed from the hub.
bi\
/b
ilR0036
TSB Revision
26-10
MB990932-01
FRONT AXLE - Hub and Knuckle

MB990938-01 /
(3) Remove the snap ring from the knuckle. (4) Remove the bearing by using the special tools. NOTE Removal is easier if the outer side inner race removed from the hub is placed on the bearing and the wheel bearing is then removed. LJ
INSPECTION
l
llR0040
M261GAC
1 MB991355
llL0124
l l
Check the hub and brake disc mounting surfaces for galling and contamination. Check the knuckle inner surface for galling and cracks. Check for defective bearing.
MZBIHAO

8. INSTALLATION OF WHEEL BEARING
12A0545
(1) Fill the wheel bearing with multipurpose grease. (2) Apply a thin coating of multipurpose grease to the knuckle and bearing contact surfaces. (3) With the wheel bearing inner race removed, press-in the bearing by using the special tools. (4) Install the wheel bearing inner race to the wheel bearing.
6. INSTALLATION OF OIL SEAL (HUB SIDE)

(1) Drive the oil seal (hub side) into the knuckle by using the special tools until it is flush with the knuckle end surface. (2) Apply multipurpose _ grease to the lip of the oil seal and to the surfaces ot the 011 seal which contact the hub.
. ADJUSTMENT OF WHEEL BEARING STARTING TORQUE

MB990998-01
(I) Use the special tool to mount the hub assembly onto the knuckle. (2) Tighten the nut of the special tool to 200 - 260 Nm .(I45 - 188 ft.lbs.). (3) Rotate the hub assembly in order to seat the bearing.
MB990998-01
(4) Measure the wheel bearing starting torque (hub starting torque) by using the special tools.
Limit: 1.8 Nm (16 in.lbs.) or less

NOTE The starting torque must be within the limit and, in addition, the bearing must not feel rough when rotated.
llKO12
TSB Revision
FRONT AXLE - Hub and Knuckle / Drive Shaft
26-11
(5) Measure to determine whether the end play of the hub is within the specified limit or not. MB99
Limit: 0.05 mm (.002 in.)

(6) If the starting torque and hub end play are not within the limit range while the nut is tightened to 200 - 260 Nm (145 - 188 ft.lbs.), the bearing, hub and/or knuckle have probably not been installed correctly. Repeat the disassembly and assembly procedure.
1. INSTALLATION OF OIL SEAL (DRIVE SHAFT SIDE)

Drive the oil seal (drive shaft side) into the knuckle until it contacts the snap ring. Apply multipurpose grease to the lip of the oil seal.
MB990890-01
llR0034
DRIVE SHAFT
M26aA- -
60-72Nm /43-52ft.lbs.

l
Removal and lnstallatlon of the Under Cover
60-72 Nm 43 - 52 ftlbs.
nl
/40.
- I
200 - 260 Nm 145 - 188 ftlbs.
11 NO026
Removal steps
+* l a 4* 4* 4* 4*
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Cotter pin Drive shaft nut Lower arm ball joint connection Cotter pin Tie rod end connection Center bearing bracket installation bolt Drive shaft and inner shaft assembly (L.H.1 Drive shaft (R.H.) Circlip
Caution In the case of AWD-vehicles with A.B.S., take care not to damage the rotor for A.B.S. installed to the B.J. outer race.
1 TSB Revision
26-12
FRONT AXLE - Drive Shaft SERVICE POINTS OF REMOVAL

2. REMOVAL OF DRIVE SHAFT NUT
Loosen the drive shaft nut while the vehicle is on the floor with the brakes applied.
M26QBAY
\ L+i
-01
Caution Do not apply vehicle load to the wheel bearing loosing the drive shaft nut. If, however, vehicle load must be applied to the bearing in moving the vehicle, temporarily secure the wheel bearing by using the special tools, MB990998-01, etc. 3. DISCONNECTION OF LOWER ARM BALL JOINT
M 8990635-01
12R0258
5. DISCONNECTION OF TIE ROD END

7. REMOVAL OF DRIVE SHAFT AND INNER SHAFT ASSEMBLY (L.H.) / 8. DRIVE SHAFT (R.H.)
(I) Using the special tool, push out the drive shaft and inner shaft assembly (L.H.) or the drive shaft (R.H.) from the hub.
llA0286i
(2) If the inner shaft is hard to remove from the transaxle, strike the center bearing bracket lightly with a plastic hammer.
llN0027
TSB Revision
FRONT AXLE - Drive Shaft
26-13
(3) To remove the drive shaft (R.H.) from the transaxle, pry off the shaft using a lever against the protrusion of the drive shaft.
Caution Pulling the drive shaft can cause damage to the T.J. Be sure to use a lever.
INSPECTION
l l l
M26QCAG
Check the drive shaft boot for damage or deterioration. Check the ball joints for wear or operating condition. Check the spline part for wear or damage.
llE53C

2. INSTALLATION OF DRIVE SHAFT NUT
Cotter pm /
M26QLlAR
/
HIJb
Washer
llR0015
(1) Be sure to install the washer and wheel bearing nut in the specified direction. (2) After installing the wheel, lower the vehicle to the ground and finally tighten the wheel bearing nut. (3) If the position of the cotter pin holes does not match, tighten the nut up to 260 Nm (188 ft.lbs.1 in maximum. (4) Install the cotter pin in the first matching holes and bend it securely.
TSB Revision
26-14

M26QE- -
ISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY
T.J. Boot Repair Kit
0028
T.J. Repair Kit
llA0116
llA0315
B.J. Boot Repair Kit Disassembly steps
B.J. Repair Kit
Bearing Dust Seal Repair Kit
Bracket Assembly Repair Kit
1. T.J. boot band (large) 2. T.J. boot band (small) 3. T.J. case and inner shaft assembly 4. T.J. case 5. Seal plate l * l + 6. Inner shaft 7. Dust shield 8. Bracket assembly l a 9. Dust seal outer ** 10. Dust seal inner w W+ 11. Center bearing 12. Center bearing bracket 13. Circlip
l l
+ * I)+
14. Dust shield 15. Snap ring l * 16. Spider assembly *I) l * 17. T.J. boot 18. B.J. boot band (large) 19. B.J. boot band (small) l * I)* 20. B.J. boot 21. Dust shield a* 22. B.J. assembly
Caution In the case of AWD-vehicles with A.B.S., take care not to damage the rotor instatted to the B.J. outer race.
1 TSB Revision
FRONT AXLE - Drive Shaft ubrication Points
26-15
Grease: Multipurpose grease Dust seal inner 14-2Og(.49-.71 oz.) Dust seal outer 8 - 12 g (.28- .42 oz.)
Grease: Repair kit grease 160 g (5.64 oz.) Caution The grease in the repair kit should be divided in half for use, respectively, at the joint and inside the boot. Special grease is used to lubricate the joint. Do not mix old and new grease of different types of grease.
llE560
Grease: Repair kit grease
Grease: Repair kit grease <FWD> 145 g (5.11 oz.) <AWD> 135 g (4.76 oz.) Caution The grease in the repair kit should be divided in half for use, respectively, at the joint and inside the boot. Special grease is used to lubricate the joint. Do not mix old and new grease OI different types of grease.
TSB Revision
26-16
FRONT AXLE - Drive Shaft SERVICE POINTS OF DISASSEMBLY

6. REMOVAL OF INNER SHAFT
(1) Using the special tool, remove the inner shaft assembly, together with the seal plate, from the T.J. case. NOTE Press the tool directly against the seal plate. The tool under pressure will puncture and deform the seal plate, and push out the inner shaft underneath.
llNOO36 11AOO76 1 M26QFDE
-,il
(2) Use the special tool to remove the inner shaft from the center bearing bracket.
I ( I 1
11. REMOVAL OF CENTER BEARING
Use the special tools to remove the center bearing from the center bearing bracket.
I I Lj, I
17. REMOVAL OF T.J. BOOT / 20. B.J. BOOT

(1) Wrap vinyl tape around the spline on the T.J. side of the drive shaft so that the T.J. and B.J. boots are not damaged when they are removed. (2) Withdraw the T.J. and B.J. boots from the drive shaft.
22.REMOVAL OF GREASE FROM B.J. ASSEMBLY

Wipe off grease from the B.J. assembly.
I I I
Caution B.J. assembly cannot be disassembled.
d i
l l K O 0 7 1 I
FRONT AXLE - Drive Shaft INSPECTION

l l l l l l l l l l
26-17
M26QGDD
Check the drive shaft for damage, bending or corrosion. Check the inner shaft for damage, bending or corrosion. Check the drive shaft splines for wear or damage. Check the inner shaft splines for wear or damage. Check for entry of water and/or foreign material into B.J. Check the spider assembly for roller rotation, wear or corrosion. Check the groove inside T.J. case for wear of corrosion. Check the boots for deterioration, damage or cracking. Check the center bearing for seizure, discoloration or roughness of rolling surface. Check the dust cover for damage or deterioration.
M26QHDF

20. INSTALLATION OF B.J. BOOT / 17. T.J. BOOT
(1) Wrap vinyl tape around the splines on the drive shaft, and then install the R.J. boots and T.J. boots, in that order.
(2) Fill the inside of the B.J. and B.J. boot with the specified grease.
Specified grease: Repair kit grease <FWD> 145 g (5.11 oz.) <AWD> 135 g (4.76 oz.) Caution 1. The grease in the repair kit should be divided in half for use, respectively, at the joint and inside the boot. 2. Special grease is used to lubricate the joint. Do not mix old and new grease or different types of grease.
(3) Secure the boot bands.
FWD B.J. boot band

11 K03:
AWD 20-75#BJl OOL 20-72#BJlOO

20-I 3 1 #BJlOO
Large Small Large Small
20-22#BJ104 20-I 5#BJ104 20-131#BJlOO 20-72#BJlOO
T.J. boot band
20-72#BJlOO
Caution 1. The boot bands should be tightened with the drive shaft at a 0 joint angle. 2. The B.J. boot band and T.J. boot band are identified by the identification number stamped on the lever. Take good care to install the correct one.
TSB Revision
26-18

16. INSTALLATION OF SPIDER ASSEMBLY
(1) Pack specified grease amply between the spider shaft and rollers of the spider assembly.
Specified grease: Repair kit grease Caution Special grease is used to lubricate the joint. Do not mix old and new grease or different types of grease.
(2) To install the spider assembly to the shaft, insert the shaft from the chamfered end of the spider.
llE560
Id
11. INSTALLATION OF CENTER BEARING

(1) Apply multipurpose grease to the center bearing and inside the center bearing bracket.
11 LOO64
MB990938-01 MB990932-01
(2) Use the special tools to press-fit the center bearing into the center bearing bracket.
11L0010
10.9. INSTALLATION OF DUST SEALS

(1) Apply multipurpose grease to the rear surfaces of all dust seals.
Dust seal inner: 14 - 20 g (.49 - .71 oz.) Dust seal outer: 8 - 12 g (.28 - .42 oz.)
Dust seal inner

MB990890-01
(2) Press the oil seal into the center bearing bracket using the special tool.
Caution Take care not to damage the rubber part on the periphery of the dust seal.
(3) Apply multipurpose grease to the lip of each dust seal. NOTE When applying grease, make sure that it does not adhere to anything outside the lip.
Id
1
I
llLOO9'3 -
TSB Revision

Dust seal outer r -j
MB990934-01
26-19
MB990890-01
6. INSTALLATION OF INNER SHAFT

ler shaft
Use the pipe to hold the inner race of the center bearing and force the inner shaft into place.
3. INSTALLATION OF T.J. CASE AND INNER SHAFT ASSEMBLY

I Inner shaft ; a s s e m b l y t
(1) Apply multipurpose grease to the inner shaft spline, then press fit it into the T.J. case.
llNOO35
(2) Using the special tool, press the seal plate into the T.J. case.
T.J. case
w
llN0037
@ -
(3) Fill the specified grease furnished in the repair kit to the T.J. case.
Grease
llN0033
Specified grease: Repair kit grease 160 g (5.64 oz.) Caution 1. The grease in the repair kit should be divided in half for use, respectively, at the joint and inside the boot. 2. The drive shaft joint uses special grease. Do not mix old and new or different types of grease.
TSB Revision
26-20

2. 1. INSTALLATION OF T.J. BOOT BANDS
Set the T.J. boot bands at the specified distance in order to adjust the amount of air inside the T.J. boot, and then tighten the T.J. boot band securely. d
Standard value: 85 + 3 mm (3.35 k .12 in.)
llN0034
1 TSB Revision
27-1
REAR AXLE
CONTENTS REAR AXLE <AWD> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _._.
AXLE SHAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _. . . . . DRIVE SHAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LSD CASE ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _. . . . 15 24 18 39
Differential (Limited Slip Differential) Abnormal noise during driving or gear changing Abnormal noise when cornering Break down Gear noise Gear oil leakage Seizure The limited slip differential does not function Drive Shaft Noise
M27AA-
SERVICE ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . 13

Gear Oil Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Limited-Slip Differential Check . . . . . . . . . . .._........... Rear Axle Total Backlash Check .................... Rear Wheel Bearing End Play Check 13 14 13
_........... 1 3 14
Rear Wheel Bearing Rotation Torque Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._.............................................
REAR AXLE <FWD> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

REAR AXLE HUB ................................................
2
4 3 3 3 2 2 2 2
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPECIFICATIONS ................................................

General Specifications .......................... .......... Lubricants ............................................................ Sealants and Adhesives .................................... Service Specifications ....................................
8 6
6 7 7 7
SERVICE ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES ........

Rear Hub Rotary-sliding Resistance (Torque) Inspection ............................................ Wheel Bearing End Play Inspection ................
SPECIFICATIONS ................................................
General Specifications .................................... .................................... Service Specifications
TROUBLESHOOTING
Axle Shaft Grease leakage
........................................
11
TROUBLESHOOTING
Abnormal Sound
. . . . . . . . . . .._....._.....................
Noise while wheels are rotating
27-2
REAR AXLE <FWD> - Specifications / Troubleshooting
REAR AXLE <FWD>

SPECIFICATIONS
Items Wheel bearing Specifications Unit ball bearina
M27CA.A
Tvoe
Items Limit Wheel bearing end play mm (in.) Rear hub rotary-sliding resistance N (Ibs.) Rear hub rotary-sliding torque Nm (ft.lbs.) Specifications 0.05 l.002) or less 31 (7) or less 1.8 (1.30) or less
TROUBLESHOOTING
Symptom Abnormal sound Probable cause Loose wheel nuts Damaged or worn wheel bearings Bent or distorted brake discs Remedy Tighten Replace d
TSB Revision
REAR AXLE <FWD> - Service Adiustment Procedures
27-3
1 SERVICE ADJUSTMENT PRbCEDURES

WHEEL BEARING END PLAY INSPECTION
1.
M27FBAG
Inspect the play of the bearings while the vehicle is jacked up and resting on floor jack. 2. Remove the hub cap and then release the parking brake. 3. Remove the caliper assembly and the brake disc. 4. Check the bearings end play. Place a dial gauge against the hub surface; then move the hub in the axial direction and check whether or not there is end play.
Limit: 0.05 mm (.002 in.) or less

NOTE If the limit value is exceeded, the lock nut should be tightened to the specified torque and check the end play again. 5. Replace the rear hub bearing unit if an adjustment cannot be made to within the limit.
REAR HUB ROTARY-SLIDING RESISTANCE (TORM27FFAD QUE) INSPECTION

Inspect the play of the bearings while the vehicle is jacked up and resting on floor jack. 2. Release the parking brake. 3. Remove the caliper assembly and the brake disc. 1.
4. After turning the huba few times to seat the bearing, attach
a spring balance to the hub bolt, from the hub bolt, measure to the rotary-sliding resistance of sliding torque of the rear hub) and, pulling at a 90 angle determine whether or not the rear hub (the rotaryis the standard value.
Limit: Rear hub rotary-sliding resistance 31 N (7 Ibs.) or less Rear hub rotary-sliding torque 1.8 Nm (1.30 ft.lbs.) or less
llN0026
NOTE If the limit value is exceeded, loosen the nut and then tighten it to the specified torque, and check the rear hub rotary-sliding torque again.
5. Replace the rear hub unit bearing if an adjustment cannot

be made to within the limit.
[fsB Revision
27-4 REAR AXLE HUB
REAR AXLE <FWD> - Rear Axle Hub

M27MA- -
50-60Nm 36 - 43 ftlbs.
200 - 260 Nm 145 - 188 ftibs.
Removal steps
4*
4*
l
4*
1. Rear speed sensor <Vehicles with ABS> 2. Calioer assemblv 3. Brake disc 4. Hubcap 5. Wheel bearing nut 6. Tongued washer 7. Rear hub assembly 8. Rear rotor <Vehicles with ABS> 9. Rear hub unit bearing
Caution Rear hub unit bearing cannot be disassembled.

llN0018
M27MBAC
1. REMOVAL OF REAR SPEED SENSOR <VEHICLES WITH ABS> Caution Be careful when handling the pole piece at the tip of the speed sensor and the toothed edge of the rotor so as not to damage them by striking against other parts. 2. REMOVAL OF CALIPER ASSEMBLY
Pole p&e
14NOlO-7
Remove the caliper assembly and suspend it with a piece of wire.
8. REMOVAL OF REAR ROTOR <VEHICLES WITH ABS> Caution Care must be taken not to scratch or scar the rotors toothed surface, and not to drop it. If the rotors toothed surface is chipped or the rotor is deformed, it might not be able to accurately sense the wheel rotation speed and the system as a result might not perform normally.
14NOO99 I
TSB Revision
REAR ~.. AXLE .-_-- <FWD> -_ ---- - Rear Axle Hub SERVICE POINT OF INSTALLATION
27-5
tu27MDAG
5. INSTALLATION OF WHEEL BEARING NUT After tightening the wheel bearing nut, align with the spindles indentation and crimp.
TSB Revision
27-6
REAR AXLE tAWD> - Specifications
REAR AXLE <AWD>

SPECIFICATIONS
Items Axle shaft We Shaft dimensions mm (in.) Outer bearing portion dia. inner bearing portion dia. Center portion dia. Overall length Bearing O.D. x I.D. mm (in.) Outer Inner Drive shaft Joint type Outer Inner Length (joint to joint) x diameter mm (in.) Differential Reduction gear type Reduction ratio Differential gear type and configuration Side gear Pinion gear Number of teeth Drive gear Drive pinion Side gear Pinion gear Bearing O.D. x I.D. mm (in.) Side Front Rear Semi-floating type 35 (1.38) 28(1.10) 34.5 (1.36) 245.4 (9.7) Specifications
M27CA-8
&L/j ~
72 x 35 (2.83 x 1.38) 58 x 28 (2.28 x 1 .I 0)
B.J. T.J. 395x28(15.6x1.10) Hypoid gear 3.545 Straight bevel gear x 2 Straight bevel gear x 4 39 11 16 IO
82.500 x 45.242 (3.25 x 1.78) 68.263 x 30.163 (2.69 x 1.19) 76.200 x 36.513 (3.00 x 1.44)
NOTE *. Denotes the gear (L.H.) which is in a single body with the viscous coupling. B:J.: Birfield Joint T.J.: Tripod Joint
TSB Revision
REAR AXLE <AWD> - Specifications SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS
27-7
M27CEB
Items Standard value Rear wheel bearing rotation torque N (Ibs.) [Nm (in.lbs.)l Setting of T.J. boot length mm (in.) Final drive gear backlash mm (in.) Differential gear backlash (Limited slip differential) mm (in.) Drive pinion rotation torque Nm (in.lbs.) With oil seal New part (with rust-prevention oil) New part/reusable part (gear oil application) Without oil seal New part (with rust-prevention oil) New part/reusable part (gear oil application) Limit Rear axle total backlash mm (in.) Drive gear runout mm (in.) Rear wheel bearing end play mm (in.)
Specifications 12 (2.6) lo.7 (6)] or less 85 +_ 3 (3.35 f .12) 0.11 -0.16(.004-.006) 0.03 - 0.09 (.0012 -.0035)
0.5 - 0.7 (4 - 6) 0.35 - 0.45 (3 - 4) 0.3-0.5(3-4) 0.15 - 0.25 (1 - 2) 5 (2) 0.05 (.002) 0.8 (031)
LUBRICANTS
I t e m s Rear axle gear oil i Specified lubricants Hypoid Gear Oil API classification GL-5 or higher Above -23C (-10F) SAESO, 85W-90,8OW-90 From -34C (-30F) to -23C (-10F) SAE 8OW, 8OW-90 Below -34C (-30F) SAE 75W Repair kit grease Quantity 1 .I lit. (1.2 qts.)
M27CD.~
B.J. boot grease T.J. boot grease
125 g (4.41 oz.) 135 g (4.76 oz.)
M27CE-.
I
Drive gear threaded hole Vent plug Differential cover
Specrfred 7.
sealants and adhesives
3M Stud Locking Part No. 4170 or equivalent 3M ATD Part No. 8663 or equivalent
TSB Revision
27-8 SPECIAL TOOLS
REAR AXLE <AWD> - Special Tools

MZ?DA- .
MB990799-01
TSB Revision
27-9
Removal of the drive pinion rear bearing inner
remover step plate
MB99081 O-01
Side bearing puller
Removal of the drive pinion
TSB Revision
27-10

Number M B990890 Name Rear suspension bushing .base Use Press-fitting of drive gear (for 4WS)
I Tool
M B990802-01
Bearing installer
Pressing of drive pinion rear bearing inner ract Pressing of side bearing inner race
Press-fitting of the drive pinion oil seal
MB990925-01
Bearing and oil seal installer set
M 8990938-01
Handle
Installation of drive pinion rear bearing outer race Installation of drive pinion front bearing outer race M B990932-01 MB990935-01 MB990938-01 Removal of axle shaft inner bearing MB990928-01 M B990938-01 Installation of axle shaft inner bearing MB990931-01 MB990938-01 Inspection of differential gear backlash
MB991 294
Side gear holding tool
TSB Revision
REAR AXLE <AWD> - Troubleshootinn
TROUBLESHOOTING
M27EAAH
li
Symptom 4XLE SHAFT Noise while wheels are rotating Grease leakage DRIVE SHAFT Noise DIFFERENTIAL (LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL) Abnormal noise during driving or gear changing
Probable cause Brake drag Bent axle shaft Worn or scarred axle shaft bearing Worn or damaged oil seal Malfunction of bearing seal Wear, play or seizure of ball joint Excessive drive shaft spline looseness
Remedy Replace
Replace
Replace
Excessive final drive gear backlash Insufficient drive pinion preload Excessive differential gear backlash Worn spline of a side gear Loose companion flange self-locking nut
Adjust Adjust or replace Replace Retighten or replace
NOTE In addition to a malfunction of the differential carrier components, abnormal noise can also be caused by the universal joint of the propeller shaft, the axle shafts, the wheel bearings, etc. Before disassembling any parts, take all possibilities into consideration and confirm the source of the noise.
Abnormal noise when cornering
Damaged differential gears Damaged pinion shaft Insufficient gear oil quantity
Replace Replenish Adjust or replace Adjust Replace
Gear noise
Improper final drive gear tooth contact adjustment Incorrect final drive gear backlash Improper drive pinion preload adjustment Damaged, broken, and/or seized tooth surfaces of the drive gear and drive pinion Damaged, broken, and/or seized drive pinion bearings Damaged, broken, and/or seized side bearings Damaged differential case inferior gear oil Insufficient gear oil quantity
Replenish
NOTE Noise from the engine, muffler vibration, transaxle, propeller shaft, wheel bearings, tires, body, etc., is easily mistaken as being caused by malfunctions in the differential carrier components. Be extremely careful and attentive when performing the driving test, etc. Test methods to confirm the source of the abnormal noise include: coasting, acceleration, constant speed driving. raising the rear wheels on a jack, etc. Use the method most appropriate to the crrcumstances.
TSB Revision
27-12
Symptom Gear oil leakage
REAR AXLE <AWD> - Troubleshooting

Probable cause Worn or damaged front oil seal, or an improperly installed oil seal Damaged gasket Loose companion flange self-locking nut Loose filler or drain plug Clogged or damaged vent plug Remedy Replace
Retighten or replace Retighten or apply adhesive Clean or replace Adjust
Seizure
Insufficient final drive gear backlash Excessive drive pinion preload Excessive side bearing preload Insufficient differential gear backlash Excessive clutch plate preload Inferior gear oil Insufficient gear oil quantity
Replace Replenish
NOTE In the event of seizure, disassemble and replace the parts involved, and also be sure to check all components for any irregularities and repair or replace as necessary. Break down Incorrect final drive gear backlash Insufficient drive pinion preload Insufficient side bearing preload Excessive differential gear backlash Loose drive gear clamping bolts Adjust
Retighten
NOTE In addition to disassembling and replacing the failed parts, be sure to check all components for irregularities and repair or replace as necessary. The limited slip differential does not function (on snow, mud, ice, etc.) The limited slip device is damaged Disassemble, check the functioning and replace the damaged parts
TSB Revision
REAR AXLE <AWD> - Service Adjustment Procedures
2743

REAR AXLE TOTAL BACKLASH CHECK
M27FAAG
If the vehicle vibrates and produces a booming sound due to an imbalance of the driving system, measure the rear axle total backlash by the following procedures to see if the differential carrier assembly required removal. (1) Place the gearshift lever in the neutral position, apply the parking brake and jack up the vehicle.
(2) Manually turn the propeller shaft clockwise as far as it will go and make mating marks on the companion flange dust shield and the differential carrier.
(3) Manually turn the propeller shaft counterclockwise as far as it will go and measure the movement of the mating marks. Limit: 5 mm (.2 in.) (4) If the backlash exceeds the limit, remove the differential carrier assembly and adjust the backlash. (Refer to P.27-26.)
,,rmr
GEAR OIL LEVEL CHECK
M27FCAG
1. Remove the filler plug, and check the oil level. 2. The oil level is sufficient if it reaches the filler plug hole. Specified gear oil: Hypoid Gear Oil API classification GL-5 or higher [l.l liter (1.2 q&J] NOTE Above -23C (-10F): SAE 90, 85W-90, 8OW-90 From -34C (-30F) to -23C (-10F): SAE 8OW, 8OW-90 Below -34C (-30F): SAE 75W
REAR WHEEL BEARING END PLAY CHECK
M27FBAF
1. Support the vehicle on axle stands positioned at the specified locations and remove the rear wheel. 2. Separate the parking brake cable from the rear brake. 3. Remove the caliper assembly and brake disc. 4. Place a dial gauge as shown in the illustration, and then measure the play when the axle shaft is moved in the axial direction. Limit: 0.8 mm (.031 in.) 5. If the play exceeds the limit, check the tightening torque of the companion flange of the axle shaft; if it is correct, replace the wheel bearing.
1 TSB Revision I
27-14
REAR AXLE <AWD> - Service Adjustment Procedures REAR WHEEL BEARING ROTATION TORQUE CHECK M27FJAB
1. Remove the drive shaft from the companion flange. 2. Remove the brake pad or caliper assembly. d 3. Attach a spring balance to the hub bolt, then, pulling the balance at a right angle to the hub bolt, measure the rotation torque (rotation starting torque) to see whether it is within the standard value. Standard value: 12 N (2.6 Ibs.) [rotation starting torque 0.7 Nm (6 in.lbs.)] or less 4. If the rotation starting torque exceeds the standard value, check the tightening torque of the axle shaft companion flange. If it is normal, replace the bearing.
Incorrect
LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL CHECK
M27FlAB
1. Block the front wheels and move the shift lever to neutral. 2. Completely release the parking brake. 3. Jack up the rear wheels and place a rigid rack at the specified part of the side sill. 4. Disconnect the coupling of the differential and propeller LJ shaft. 5. When one wheel is slowly rotated, check whether or not the wheel on the other side turns in the same direction. 6. If it turns in the opposite direction, replace the viscous unit.
llA033C
1 TSB Revision
REAR AXLE <AWD> - Axle Shaft
27-15
-
AXLE SHAFT I
M27HA-
55-65 Nm QO - 47 ftlbs. I
50-60Nm
12 Nm 9 ft.lbs.
y6
36-4?R.bs-
190 Nm 137 ft.lbs. <Turbo> 260 - 300 Nm 188-217ftlbs.
llN0021
i
Removal steps
l *
1. Rear speed sensor <Vehicles with A.B.S.> a* 2. Brake caliper assembly 3. Brake disc 4. Drive shaft mounting nut +I) l * 5. Self-locking nut 6. Washer 7. Companion flange l * 8. Axle shaft assembly +* l + 9. Rear rotor <Vehicles with A.B.S.> +* l + 10. Outer bearing a* l a 11. Dust shield l a 12. Dust shield 13. Axle shaft l * ** 14. Oil seal l * I)+ 15. Inner bearing
llA0325 I
llA026~
M27HBAQ
/ i
1. REMOVAL OF REAR SPEED SENSOR <VEHICLES WITH A.B.S.> Caution Be cautious to ensure that the tip of the pole piece does not come in contact with other parts when removing the speed sensor. 2. REMOVAL OF BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY Remove the brake caliper assembly and suspend it with a piece of wire. 1 TSB Revision
27-16

5. REMOVAL OF SELF-LOCKING NUT With the special tool, secure the axle shaft and remove the companion flange self-locking nut.
8. REMOVAL OF AXLE SHAFT ASSEMBLY With the special tool, remove the axle shaft from the axle housing.
MB990241-01
9. REMOVAL OF REAR ROTOR <VEHICLES WITH A.B.S.> Remove the rear rotor from the axle shaft.
10. REMOVAL OF OUTER BEARING / 1.1. DUST SHIELD Remove the outer bearing and dust shield concurrently from the axle shaft.
MB990,938-01
AY ho"sing
14. REMOVAL OF OIL SEAL / 15. INNER BEARING With the special tool, remove the inner bearing and oil seal from the axle housing.
INSPECTION
l l l l l
11 A0038
hl27HcAG
MB990$28-01
Check Check Check Check Check Check
the companion flange for wear or damage. the dust shield for deformation or damage. the wheel bearings for burning or discoloration. the wheel bearing for unsmooth rotation. the axle shaft for cracking, wear or damage. oil seal for cracking or damage.
TSB Revision

I-
27-17
M27HOAS
Axle housing

MB990938-01
3fe
tiB990931-01
15. INSTALLATION OF INNER BEARING With the special tool, press fit the inner bearing onto the axle housing.
llA0039
MB990641
llN0015
14. INSTALLATION OF OIL SEAL (1) With the special tool, press the oil seal onto the axle housing with the depression in the oil seal facing upward, and until it contacts the shoulder on the inside of the axle housing. NOTE When tapping the oil seal in, use a plastic hammer to lightly tap the top and circumference of the special tool, press fitting gradually and evenly. (2) Apply multipurpose grease to the oil seal lip. 12. INSTALLATlOkl OF DUST SHIELD Orienting the dust shield as shown in the illustration, and using the special tool, press fit the dust shield until it contacts the axle shaft shoulder. NOTE When tapping the oil seal in, use a plastic hammer to lightly tap the top and circumference of the special tool, press fitting gradually and evenly.
- llAQ034
llN0007
I I. INSTALLATION OF DUST SHIELD With the special tool, install the dust shield so that the depression is facing upward. NOTE When tapping the oil seal in, use a plastic hammer to lightly tap the top and circumference of the special tool, press fitting gradually and evenly.
11 A0033
llN0008
IO. INSTALLATION OF OUTER BEARING (1) Apply multipurpose grease around the entire circumference of the inner side of the outer bearing seal lip. (2) Press fit the outer bearing to the axle shaft so that the bearing seal lip surface is facing towards the axle shaft flange.
1 TSB Revision
27-18
REAR AXLE <AWD> - Axle Shaft / Drive Shaft

9. INSTALLATION OF REAR ROTOR <VEHICLES WITH A.B.S.> Press fit the rear rotor to the axle shaft with the rear rotor groove surface toward the axle shaft flange.
57 -
5. INSTALLATION OF SELF-LOCKING NUT With the special tool, secure the axle shaft and tighten the companion flange self-locking nut.
DRIVE SHAFT
55-65 Nm
M27JA- -
Removal steps
4I) l 4 2. Driveshaft
l *
3. Circlip 4. Oil seal
llNO020
M27JBAE
2. REMOVAL OF DRIVE SHAFT Using a tire lever, etc. remove the drive shaft from the differential carrier.
TSB Revision
REAR AXLE <AWD> - Drive Shaft
27-19
M27JHAB
INSPECTION
l l l
Check the drive shaft boots for damage or deterioration. Check the ball joints for excessive play or check operation. Check the drive shaft spline for wear or damage.
M27JCAG
4. INSTALLATION OF OIL SEAL (1) If the oil seal is to be replaced because of damage, drive it in by using the special tool. (2) Apply the specified grease to the oil seal lip.
MB991380
llFOO1;
i
Two-part serration
llAO280
2. INSTALLATION OF DRIVE SHAFT Caution I. Be cautious to ensure that the differential carrier oil seal is not damaged by the drive shaft spline. 2. The right drive shaft for models equipped with the LSD having a VCU has a two-part serration. Be very careful to install each one on the correct side. NOTE The left and right drive shafts can also be distinguished from each other by the identification color of boot band (B.J. side).
Drive shaft
LH Boot band (B.J. side) identification color

White
RH Blue I
Caution Be sure to thoroughly remove any oil or grease, etc. from the threaded part of the bolt and nut used for installation to the companion flange, because any oil, grease, etc. on these parts might cause later loosening even though tightening is at the specified torque.
1 TSB Revision
27-20

M27JD- -
T.J. boot repair kit
llNOO22 11AO
B.J. boot repair kit
llNOO2
11 NO024
B.J. repair kit
T.J. repair kit
Disassembly steps
1. T.J. boot band (large) 2. T.J. boot band (small) 3. T.J. case a* 4. Snap ring ** w 5. Spider assembly ~II, ** 6. T.J. boot w .e+
+ 7. B.J. boot band (large) I)* 8. B.J. boot band (small) a, l * 9. B.J. boot a* 10. B.J. assembly. 11. Circlip
l
TSB Revision

Lubrication Points
27-21
llA0084
11E560
Grease: Repair kit grease Quantity to use: 135 g (4.76 oz.) Caution Apply all of the grease from the repair kit to the joint and boot, a half to each as a rule. Special grease is used for the joint. Do not mix old grease with new or mix different types.
Grease: Repair kit grease Quantity to use: 125 g (4.41 oz.) Caution _ . Apply all of the grease from the repair kit to the joint and boot, a half to each as a rule. Special grease is used for the joint. Do not mix old grease with new or mix different types.
llN0022
TSB Revision
27-22
REAR AXLE <AWD> - Drive Shaft SERVICE POINTS OF DISASSEMBLY

M27JEAD I
4. REMOVAL OF SNAP RING / 5. SPIDER ASSEMBLY (1) Remove the snap ring from the drive shaft with the d i snap ring pliers. (2) Take out the spider assembly from the drive shaft. (3) Clean the spider assembly. Caution 1. Do not disassemble the spider assembly. 2.. If the T.J. of the drive shaft assembly is bent, the joint may be damaged. Use care in handling the drive shaft. 3. The drive shaft joint use special grease. Do not add another type of grease. 6. REMOVAL OF T.J. BOOT / 9. B.J. BOOT (I) Wrap vinyl tape around the spline part on the T.J. side of the drive shaft so that the T.J. and B.J. boots are not damaged when they are removed. (2) Withdraw the T.J. and B.J. boots from the drive shaft.
10. REMOVAL OF GREASE FROM B.J. Wipe out the grease from the B.J. Caution Do not disassemble the B.J.
llKOO7
INSPECTION
l l l l l l
M27JFAD
Check the drive shaft for damage, bending or corrosion. Check the drive shaft spline part for wear or damage. Check for entry of water and/or foreign material into B.J. Check the spider assembly for roller rotation, wear or corrosion. Check the groove inside T.J. case for wear or corrosion. Check the boots for deterioration, damage or cracking.
M27JGAE
9. INSTALLATION OF B.J. BOOT / 8. B.J. BOOT BAND (SMALL) / 7. B.J. BOOT BAND (LARGE) / 6. T.J. BOOT (1) Wrap vinyl tape around the drive shaft spline. (2) Insert the drive shaft in B.J. boot, boot bands, T.J. boot in that sequence.
TSB Revision
27-23
llK008
(3) Fill the inside of the B.J. and B.J. boot with the specified grease. Specified grease: Repair kit grease 125 g (4.4102.) Caution The grease in the repair kit should be divided in half for use, respectively, at the joint and inside the boot. A special type of grease is used on the joint. Be cautious to ensure that not other grease is allowed to come in contact with the joint.
B.J. boot band: 20 - 74 #BJ95 ( T.J. boot band: 20 - 75 #BJ95
:I)
r,.
Lever
(4) Secure the boot bands. Caution 1. The boot bands should be tightened with the drive shaft at a 0 joint angle. 2. The B.J. boot band and T.J. boot band are identified by the identification number stamped on the lever. Install correct ones at correct positions.
llKl'=-
5. INSTALLATION OF SPIDER ASSEMBLY (1) Apply the specified grease furnished in the repair kit to the spider assembly. Specified grease: Repair kit grease (2) Install the spider assembly with the chamfered spline end first.
llE560
2. 1. INSTALLATION OF T.J. BOOT BANDS Set the T.J. boot bands at the specified distance in order to adjust the amount of air inside the T.J. boot, and then tighten the T.J. boot band securely. Standard value: 85 + 3 mm (3.35 + .I2 in.)
HP0124
TSB Revision
27-24
REAR AXLE <AWD> - Differential Carrier

M271A. -
DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER
Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation l Draining and Filling of Differential Gear Oil (Refer to Group 00 - Maintenance Service.) l Removal and Installation of Main Muffler (Refer to Group 15 - Exhaust Pipe and Muffler.)
24Nm 17 ft.lbs.
c/
63 i 90 Nm 65 ft.lbs. 4 / lIl8
90 Nm 65 ft.lbs.
!f%
90 Nm 65 ftlbs. ,55-65Nm 40 - 47 fklbs.
43 - 51 ft.lbs.
22 - 25 ft.lbs.
90 Nm 65 ft.lbs.
llFO034
Removal steps a* 1. Drive shaft

l
*l a
*l *
2. Circlip 3. Propeller shaft connection 4. Differential support assembly 5. Differential support member assembly 6. Rear wheel oil pump installation bolt 7. Differential carrier 8. O-ring
1 TSB Revision
REAR AXLE <AWD> - Differential Carrier SERVICE POINTS OF REMOVAL
27-25
m27wAm
1. REMOVAL OF DRIVE SHAFT With a tire lever, etc., remove the drive shaft from the differential carrier. NOTE Be cautious to ensure that the differential carrier oil seal is not damaged by the drive shaft spline.
Mating marks / /
3. DISCONNECTION OF PROPELLER SHAFT (1) Make mating marks on the differential companion flange and the propeller shaft flange yoke for reference during reassembly. (2) Remove the differential carrier and propeller shaft connection. (3) Support the propeller shaft with wire.
7. REMOVAL OF DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER Holding the bottom of the differential carrier and removing the rear wheel oil pump through the mounting hole, remove the differential carrier. Caution 1. Use care not to damage the rear wheel oil pump gears. 2. Use care not to allow dirt or foreign matter to fall into the differential carrier.
MB991 153
DIFFERENTIAL SUPPORT BUSHING AND DIFFERENTIAL SUPPORT MEMBER BUSHING REM271YAB PLACEMENT
Install or remove the bushing using the special tool. Install the bushing with its hollow portion facing in the direction shown. Caution Install the bushing with the differential support and differential support member chamfered end first and install until the bushing outer case end face is flush with the support and support member.
Differential support member
MBggo8477J=f 4
llNOOl1
Differential
llN0053
27-26
REAR AXLE <AWD> - Differential Carrier SERVICE POINTS OF INSTALLATION

m27lDAL
7. INSTALLATION OF DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER Install the rear wheel oil pump by inserting it through the mounting hole and install the differential carrier securely. \yi Caution Use care not to damage the rear wheel oil pump gears. 3. CONNECTION OF PROPELLER SHAFT Align the mating marks on the flange yoke and the companion flange to install the propeller shaft.
INSPECTION BEFORE DISASSEMBLY
M27lEAJ
Hold the working base in a vice, and attach the differential carrier to the working base.
FINAL DRIVE GEAR BACKLASH With the drive pinion locked in place, measure the final drive gear backlash with a dial indicator on the drive gear. NOTE Measure at four points or more on the circumference of the drive gear. d Standard value: 0.11 - 0.16 mm (.004 - .006 in.) I
IlYl61
DRIVE GEAR RUNOUT Measure the drive gear runout at the shoulder on the reverse side of the drive gear. Limit: 0.05 mm (.002 in.)
FINAL DRIVE GEAR TOOTH CONTACT Check the final drive gear tooth contact by following the steps below. (1) Apply a thin, uniform coat of machine blue to both surfaces of the drive gear teeth.
TSB Revision

-7
27-27
(2) Insert a brass rod between the differential carrier and the differential case, and then rotate the companion flange by hand (once in the normal direction, and then once in the reverse direction) while applying a load to the drive gear, so that the revolution torque [approximately 2.5 - 3.0 Nm (28 33 in.lbs.)] is applied to the drive pinion. Caution If the drive gear is rotated too much, the tooth contact pattern will become unclear and difficult to check. (3) Check the tooth contact condition of the drive gear and drive pinion.
CT2
/ i.J
flG0076
1 TSB Revision
27-28
Standard tooth contact pattern

1 Narrow tooth side 2 Drive-side tooth surface (the side applying power during forward movement) 3 Wide tooth side 4 Coast-side tooth surface (the side applying power during reverse movement)
2 3 4
Problem
Solution
Tooth contact pattern resulting from excessive pinion height
The drive pinion is positioned too far from the center of the drive gear.
Increase the thickness of the pinion height adjusting shim, and position the drive pinion closer to the center of the drive gear. Also, for backlash adjustment, position the drive gear farther from the drive pinion.
Tooth contact pattern resulting from insufficient pinion height
e ectdb
2 3 4
5 &$%$I$&
2 3 4
The drive pinion is positioned too close to the center of the drive gear.
Decrease the thickness of the pinion height adjusting shim, and position the drive pinion farther from the center of the drive gear. Also, for backlash adjustment, position the drive gear closer to the drive pinion. 11 S642
NOTE (I) Tooth contact pattern is a method for judging the result of the adjustment of drive pinion height and final drive gear backlash. The adjustment of drive pinion height and final drive gear backlash should be repeated until tooth contact patterns bear a similarity to the standard tooth contact pattern. (2) When adjustment is not able to obtain a correct pattern, it may be judged that the drive gear and drive pinion have exceed their usage limits and both gears should be replaced as a set.
d
TSB Revision
REAR AXLE <AWD> - Differential Carrier DISASSEMBLY

inspection Before Disassembly l Final Drive Gear Backlash (Refer to P.27-26.) l Drive Gear Runout (Refer to P.27-26.) l Final Drive Gear Tooth Contact (Refer to P.27-26.)
27-29
M27lF- -
64
11 FO032
Disassembly steps
4* 4* 4* 4* 4* 4* 4*
1. Differential cover assembly 2. Vent plug 3. Oil seal 4. Snap ring 5. Side bearing nut 6. Side bearing outer race 7. Differential case assembly 8. Side bearing inner race 9. Drive gear (for 4WS) 10. Drive gear 11. Spring pin (for 4WS) 12. LSD case (refer to P.2759.) 13. Self-locking nut 14:Washer
4*
4*
4* 4* 4*
15. Drive pinion assembly 16. Companion flange 17. Drive pinion front shim (for preload adjustment) 18. Drive pinion spacer 19. Drive pinion rear bearing inner race 20. Drive pinion rear shim (for pinion height adjustment) 21. Drive pinion 22. Oil seal 23. Drive pinion front bearing 24. Drive pinion rear bearing outer race 25. Differential carrier
M27lGBD
5. REMOVAL OF SIDE BEARING NUT Using the special tool, remove the side bearing nut.
TSB Revision
27-30

6. REMOVAL OF SIDE BEARING OUTER RACE (I) Using a press, push the differential case until it is pressed against the carrier. (2) Remove the differential case from the press. Insert two d spacers in diagonally opposed positions between the side bearing outer race to be removed and the inner race. Using the press again, remove the outer race. Caution Use care not to drop the side bearing outer race. NOTE (1) Identify the right- and left-hand side bearing outer races for correct reassembly. (2) Use a spacer, approx. 30 mm (I. 18 in.) long, 10 mm I.39 in.) wide and 1 to 2 mm (.04 to .08 in.) high, made of copper sheet or the like to prevent damage to the bearing.
8. REMOVAL OF SIDE BEARING INNER RACES / 9. DRIVE GEAR (FOR 4WS) Pull out the side bearing inner races by using the special tools.
VlB990811-01
10. REMOVAL OF DRIVE GEAR (I) Make the mating marks to the differential case and the drive gear. (2) Loosen the drive gear attaching bolts in diagonal sequence to remove the drive gear.
13. REMOVAL OF SELF-LOCKING NUT Use the special tools to hold the companion flange and remove the companion flange self-locking nut.
TSB Revision
27-31
Mating marks
15. REMOVAL OF DRIVE PINION ASSEMBLY (1) Make the mating marks to the drive pinion and companion flange. NOTE Mating marks should not be made to the contact surfaces of companion flange and propeller shaft. (2) Drive out the drive pinion together with the drive pinion spacer and drive pinion front shims.
MB990339-01
19. REMOVAL OF DRIVE PINION REAR BEARING INNER RACE Pull out the drive pinion rear bearing inner race by using the special tools.
22. REMOVAL OF OIL SEAL / 23. DRIVE PINION FRONT BEARING Drive out the drive pinion front bearing from the gear carrier.
llY175 J
1
24. REMOVAL OF DRIVE PINION REAR BEARING OUTER RACE Drive out the drive pinion rear bearing outer race from the gear carrier.
INSPECTION
l l l l l l l
M27lHBB
Check the companion flange for wear or damage. Check the oil seal for wear or deterioration. Check the bearings for wear or discoloration. Check the gear carrier for cracks. Check the drive pinion and drive gear for wear or cracks. Check the side gears, pinion gears and pinion shaft for wear or damage. Check the side gear spline for wear or damage.
TSB Revision
27-32
REASSEMBLY

M2711-
Reassembly steps
l
** *
l * ** *a
l *
1. Spring pin (for 4WS) 2. Drive gear (for 4WS) 3. Differential carrier 4. Drive pinion rear bearing outer race 5. Drive pinion front bearing outer race Drive pinion height adjustment 6. Drive pinion 7. Drive pinion rear shim (for drive pinion height adjustment) 8. Drive pinion rear bearing inner race 9. Drive pinion spacer Drive pinion preload adjustment 10. Drive pinion front shim 11. Drive pinion assembly 12. Drive pinion front bearing inner race 13. Oil seal 14. Companion flange
15. Washer 16. Self-locking nut 17. LSD case (Refer to P.27-39.) ** 18. Drive gear ** 19. Side bearing inner race 20. Side bearing outer race l * Final drive gear backlash adjustment 21. Differential case assembly 22. Side bearing nut 23. Snap ring ** 24. Oil seal 25. Vent plug 26. Differential cover assembly NOTE *: Tightening torque with oil applied.
TSB Revision

Lubrication, Sealing and Adhesion Points
27-33
11lwO.
llFOO11
Sealant: 3M AID Part No. 8663 or equivalent
llFO032
Adhesive: 3M Stud Locking Part No. 4170 or equivalent
Spring pin
Djive gear
M27UBG
1. INSTALLATION OF SPRING PIN (FOR 4WS) Tap the spring pin into the differential case to the position shown in the illustration before press fitting the rear wheel oil pump drive gear. The notch on the spring pin should be in the position shown in the illustration.
View A
ilA0262 llA0261
TSB Revision
27-34

2. PRESS-IN OF THE DRIVE GEAR (FOR 4WS) (1) With the beveled (large) part of the rear wheel oil pump drive gear at the inner side, press in the drive gear (by using the special tool) until the drive gear contacts the end surface of the .differential case. (2) Check to ensure that the drive gear and the spring pin are flush.
YYW!
-01
11AOlOl
4. INSTALLATION OF DRIVE PINION REAR BEARING OUTER RACE / 5. DRIVE PINION FRONT BEARING OUTER RACE Press-fit the drive pinion rear and front bearing outer races into the gear carrier by using the special tools. Caution Be careful not to press in the outer race at an angle.
MB99
. DRIVE PINION HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT Adjust the drive pinion height by the following procedures: (1) Install special tools and drive pinion front and rear bearing inner races on the gear carrier in the sequence shown in the illustration. NOTE Apply a thin coat of multipurpose grease to the mating face of the washer of the special tool.
(2) Tighten the handle of the special tool until the standard value of drive pinion rotation torque is obtained. (3) Measure the drive pinion rotation torque (without the oil seal). Standard value Bearing classification
Y223
Bearing lubrication None (with rust-prevention oil) Gear oil application
Rotation torque Nm (in.lbs.1 0.3 - 0.5 (3 - 4) 0.15 - 0.25 (1 - 2) I
New
New/reused
NOTE (1) Gradually tighten the nut of the special tool while checking the drive pinion rotation torque. (2) Because the special tool cannot be turned one turn, turn it several times within the range that it can be turned; then, after fitting to the bearing, measure the rotation torque. L/1 1
TSB Revision
27-35
(4) Position the special tool in the side bearing seat of the gear carrier, and then select a drive pinion rear shim of a thickness which corresponds to the gap between the special tools. NOTE Clean the side bearing seat thoroughly. When selecting the drive pinion rear shims, keep the number of shims to a minimum.
(5) Fit the selected drive pinion rear shim(s) to the drive pinion, and press-fit the drive pinion rear bearing inner race by using the special tool.
MB990802-01
. DRIVE PINION PRELOAD ADJUSTMENT Adjust the drive pinion rotation torque by using the following procedures: (1) Fit the drive pinion front shim(s) between the drive pinion spacer and the drive pinion front bearing inner race. (2) Tighten the companion flange to the specified torque by using the tools. NOTE Do not install the oil seal. (3) Measure the drive pinion rotation torque (without the oil seal) by using the special tools. Standard value Bearing classification New New/reused Bearing lubrication -rust-prevention oil) Gear oil
amlication None (with
Rotation torque Nm (in.lbs.) 0.3 - 0.5 (3 - 4) 0.15 - 0.25 (I - 2)
(4) If the drive pinion rotation torque is not within the range of the standard value, adjust the rotation torque by replacing the drive pinion, front shim(s) or the drive pinion spacer. NOTE When selecting the drive pinion front shims, if the number of shims is large, reduce the number of shims to a minimum by selecting the drive pinion spacers.
TSB Revision
27-36

(5) Remove the companion flange and drive pinion once again. Drive the oil seal into the qear carrier front lip by using the special tool. Apply multipurpose grease to the oil seal lip. (6) Apply a thin coat of multipurpose grease to the companion flange contacting surface of the washer before installing drive pinion assembly.
.:.:&$. p.: :... :B.!I .i Ia \ Grease

11 D554
(7) Install the drive pinion assembly and companion flange with mating marks properly aligned, and tighten the companion flange self-locking nut to the specified torque by using the special tools.
(8) Measure the drive pinion rotation torque (with oil seal) to verify that the drive pinion rotation torque complies with the standard value. Standard value Bearing classification Nt?W
11223
Bearrng lubrication None (with rust-prevention oil) Gear oil application
Rotation torque Nm (in.lbs.)

0.5 - 0.7 (4 - 6) 0.35 - 0.45 (3 - 4)
New/reused
If there is a deviation from the standard value, check whether or not there is incorrect tightening torque of the companion flange tightening self-locking nut, or incorrect fitting of the oil seal.
18. INSTALLATION OF DRIVE GEAR (I) Clean the drive gear attaching bolts. (2) Use an Ml0 x 1.25 tap to remove the adhesive adhering to the threaded holes of the drive gear, and then clean the threaded holes by applying compressed air.
TSB Revision
27-37
(3) Apply multipurpose adhesive to the threaded holes of the drive gear. Specified adhesive: 3M Stud Locking Part No. 4170 or equivalent (4) Install the drive gear onto the differential case with the mating marks properly aligned. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque in a diagonal sequence.
19. PRESS-FITTING OF SIDE BEARING INNER RACE Press-fit the side bearing inner races to the differential case by using the special tool.
. FINAL DRIVE GEAR BACKLASH ADJUSTMENT (1) Using the special tool, temporarily tighten the side bearing nut until it is in the state just before preloading of the side bearing.
I II I
llFO024
(2) Measure the final drive gear backlash. Standard value: 0.11 - 0.16 mm (.004 - .006 in.) NOTE Measure at four or more points around the drive gear circumference.
llFO021
When backlash is
(3) Using the special tool (MB991367 and MB991385), adjust the backlash to standard value by moving the side bearing nut as shown. NOTE First turn the side bearing nut for loosening, and then turn (by the same amount) the side bearing nut for tightening.
1
excesswe
When
backlash
is
1
1102671
TSB Revision
27-38

(4) Using the special tool, to apply the preload, turn down both right and left side bearing nuts on half the distance between centers of two neighboring holes.
\d
Snap ring
(5) Fit the snap ring at either position shown to lock the side bearing nut. (6) Check the drive gear and drive pinion for tooth contact. If poor contact is evident, make adjustment. (Refer to P.27-28.)
llFOOO9
llFOOl0
(7) Measure the drive gear runout at the shoulder on the reverse side of the drive gear. Limit: 0.05 mm (.002 in.) (8) If the drive gear runout exceeds the limit, reinstall by changing the phase of the drive gear and differential d case, and remeasure.
11 FOO20
8-01 380
24. INSTALLATION OF OIL SEAL (1) Using the special tool, install the oil seal flush with the gear carrier end face. (2) Apply a thin coat of Multi-purpose grease to the oil seal lip.
F
L
/T\br
-1lFOO12
TSB Revision
REAR AXLE <AWD> - LSD Case Assembly
27-39
LSD CASE ASSEMBLY /

M27NE- -
Disassembly steps
1. Screw
+ +I) I)+
2. Differential case A 3. Thrust washer (L.H.) 4. Viscous unit M 5. Pinion mate washer *a 6. Differential pinion mate 7. Differential pinion shaft 8. Differential side gear (R.H.) l * 9. Thrust washer (R.H.) l 10. Differential case B
1 lFOO33
INSPECTION BEFORE DISASSEMBLY
M27NFAA
1. CHECKING THE DIFFERENTIAL GEAR BACKLASH (1) Secure the differential case assembly in a vise so that the differential side gear (right) is facing upward.
Caution
When securing the vise, be sure not to hold the differential case assembly too tightly. (2) Insert a 0.03 mm LOO12 in.) feeler gauge at two places (diagonally) between differential case I3 and the thrust washer (right). Caution Do not insert a feeler gauge in the oil groove of differential case B.
Feeler gauge
Differential side Thrust washer (right) llFO037 gear (right)
7--u/
27-40

(3) Insert the special tool at the spline part of differential case B (right) and check to be sure the side gear (right) rotates. (4) Then insert a 0.09 mm t.0035 in.) feeler gauge to \Lj replace a 0.03 mm (.0012 in.) gauge. (5) Insert the special tool at the spline part of the differential side gear (right) and check to be sure the side gear (right) does not rotate. Differential gear backlash Standard value (clearance in thiust direction of side gear): 0.03 - 0.09 m m (.0012 - .0035 in.) NOTE If the clearance in the thrust direction of the side gear is within the standard value range, the backlash of the differential gear is normal. (6) If the clearance in the thrust direction of the side gear is not within the standard value range, remove differential case A and make the adjustment by adjusting the thickness of the thrust washer (left).

Differential side Differential
M27NGAA
3. REMOVAL OF THE THRUST WASHER (LEFT) / 9. THRUST WASHER (RIGHT) The thrust washers (left and right) are of different thickness, and so should be discriminated in some way for reference during installation.
INSPECTION
Differential
M27NHAA
(1) Check the gears and differential pinion shaft for unusual wear or damage. (2) Check the spline part of the differential side gear (right) for stepped wear or damage. (3) Check the thrust washer and pinion mate washer for unusual wear of contact surfaces, heat damage or other damage.
pinion mate
llPO128
r Thrust washer
Pinion mate washer
llPO12
(4) Check differential cases A and B for unusual wear of contact surfaces, heat damage or other damage. 0: Contact surface with the viscous unit 0: Contact s urf ace with the pinion mate washer @ and 0: Contact surfaces with thrust washer
1 lFOO35
TSB Revision
27-41
(5) Check the spline part of the viscous unit for stepped wear or damage, and check the contact surface with differential case B. (6) Check the side gear (left) of the viscous unit for unusual wear or damage.
viscous unit
bSpline part
M27NlhA
10. INSTALLATION OF THE DIFFERENTIAL CASE B / 2. DIFFERENTIAL CASE A Align the mating marks of differential cases B and A, and assemble the cases.
Pinion mate
6. INSTALLATION OF THE DIFFERENTIAL PINION MATE / 5. PINION MATE WASHER With the washer in the position shown in the illustration, install to the differential pinion shaft, and then install to differential case B.
llPO134
Feeler
qauqe
/
Feeler
11 FO03
i
Differential g;ar (right) Thrust kasher (righl
11 FOO3i
3. SELECTION OF THE THRUST WASHER (LEFT) If the differential side gear and pinion mate gear have been replaced, select the thrust washer (left) by following the steps below. (1) Wash the differential side gear and pinion mate gear in unleaded gasoline to remove all oil, grease, etc. (2) Install the previously used thrust washers (being careful the left and right ones are used at the correct side), together with the gears, viscous unit, pinion mate washer and pinion shaft, to differential cases A and B, and then, using screws, secure them temporarily. (3) Secure the differential case assembly in a vise so that the differential side gear (right) is facing upward. Caution When securing in the vise, be sure not to hold the differential case assembly too tightly. (4) Insert a 0.03 mm j.0012 in.) feeler gauge at two places (diagonally) between differential case B and the thrust washer (right). Caution Do not insert a feeler gauge in the oil groove of differential case B.
TSB Revision
27-42

(5) Insert the special tool at the spline part of differential side gear (right) and check to be sure the side gear (right) rotates. (6) Then insert a 0.09 mm l.0035 in.) feeler gauge to replace a 0.03 mm i.0012 in.) gauge. (7) Insert the special tool at the spline part of the differential side gear (right) and check to be sure the side gear (right) does not rotate. Differential gear backlash Standard value (clearance in thrust direction of side gear): 0.03 - 0.09 mm (.0012 - .0035 in.) NOTE If the clearance in the thrust direction of the side gear is within the standard value range, the backlash of the differential side gear is normal. (8) If the clearance in the thrust direction of the side gear is not within the standard value range, remove differential case A and make the adjustment by adjusting the thickness of the thrust washer (left).
Feeler gauge
R-----
Feeler gauge \ Feeler gauge
llFOO36
Thrust washer (right) (reference)
NOTE
Select one thrust washer (left) from the eleven types in the kit.
TSB Revision
31-1
ii
WHEEL. AND TIRE

CONTENTS
SERVICE ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES ............ Tire Inflation Pressure Check ................................ Tire Wear Check .................................................... Wheel Runout Check ............................................ SPECIFICATIONS .................................................... General Specifications ........................................ Service Specifications ........................................ Torque Specifications ............................................ 4 4 4 4 2 2 2 2
M3IA&
I ~
3
TROUBLESHOOTING :. .......................................... Bald Spots Cracked Treads Feathered Edge Rapid Wear at Center Rapid Wear at Shoulders Scalloped Wear Wear on One Side
31-2 SPECIFICATIONS
WHEEL AND TIRE - Specifications

MOICA- -
Items Wheel Tire size Wheel type Wheel size Amount of wheel offset mm (in.) Tire inflation pressure kPa (psi) Front Rear Spare wheel Tire size Wheel size Amount of wheel offset mm (in.) Tire inflation pressure kPa (psi) DOHC-N/A 225l55R 16 93U Aluminum type 16X8J 46 (1.8) 220 (32) 200 (29) T125190D16 l6x4T 46 (1.8) 420 (60) DOHC-T/C 245145ZR 17 Aluminum type 17 x 8.5J 46 (1.8) 220 (32) 200 (29) T135/90D16 l6x4T 46 (1.8) 420 (60)
Items Limit Wheel runout Radial mm (in.) Lateral mm (in.) Tread depth of tire mm (in.) Specifications
M31CB. -
2.0 (.08) 2.0 t.08) 1.6 (.06)
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Items Hub nuts Nm 120- 140 ft.lbs. 87-iO1
MBlCC- -
TSB Revision
WHEEL AND TIRE - Troubleshooting
.
M31EAAB
TROUBLESHOOTING
at center
Over-inflation or lack of rotation
Inspect the camber
Adjust the unbalanced wheels
wear
e front suspension
TSB Revision
WHEEL AND TIRE - Service Adiustment Procedures

TIRE INFLATION PRESSURE CHECK
M3lFDA.E
Check the inflation pressure of the tires. If it is not within the standard value, make the necessary adjustment.
llFOO17
TIRE WEAR CHECK

Measure the tread depth of tires.
L i m i t : 1 . 6 m m (.06 in.)
MJlFBAC
Wear indicator
If the remaining tread depth is less than the limit, replace the tire. NOTE When the tread depth of tire is reduced to 1.6 mm (.06 in.) or less, wear indicator will appear.
53Y510
WHEEL RUNOUT CHECK
M31 FCAE
Jack up the vehicle so that the wheels are clear of the floor. While slowly turning the wheel, measure wheel runout with a dial indicator. Limit: 2.0 mm (.08 in.) Radial 2.0 mm (.08 in.) Lateral If wheel runout exceeds the limit, replace the wheel.
/ Lateral
llFOO1:
TSB Revision
32-1
POWER PLANT MOUNT

CONTENTS
ENGINE MOUNTING ........................................ 3 5 6 2 SPECIFICATIONS ................................................ Service Specifications .................................... TRANSAXLE MOUNTING ................................
MZAA- _
2 2 4 2
ENGINE ROLL STOPPER .................................... RIGHT MEMBER, LEFT MEMBER AND CROSSMEMBER ................................................ SPECIAL TOOLS ....................................................
TROUBLESHOOTING ........................................ Abnormal Noise Excessive Engine Wobble or Vibration
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) (1) A Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), which uses a driver-side air bag, has been installed in the 3000GT. (2) The SRS includes the following components: impact sensors, SRS diagnosis unit: SRS warning light, air bag module, clock spring, interconnecting wiring. Other SRS-related components (that may have to be removed/installed in connection with SRS service or maintenance) are indicated in the table of contents by an asterisk (*). WARNING! (1) Improper service or maintenance of any component of the SRS, or any SRS-related component, can lead to personal injury or death to service personnel (from inadvertent firing of the air bag) or to the driver (from rendering the SRS inoperative). (2) Service or maintenance of any SRS component or SRS-related component must be performed only at an authorized MITSUBISHI dealer. (3) MITSUBISHI dealer personnel must thoroughly review this manual, and especially its GROUP 52B Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), before beginning any service or maintenance of any component of the SRS or any SRS-related component.
32-2
POWER PLANT MOUNT -
Specifications / Special Tools / Troubleshooting
SPECIFICATIONS
M32CB-.
I Items
Standard value No. 1 crossmember Bushing (B) projection Crossmember Bushing (A) projection Bushing (B) projection mm (in.) mm (in.) mm (in.)
Specifications
7.5 - 10.5 (.30 - .41) 7.2 - 10.2 (.28 - .40) 6.5 - 9.5 (.26 - .37)
SPECIAL TOOLS
Bushing remover and installer
TROUBLESHOOTING
TSB Revision
POWER PLANT MOUNT - Engine Mounting
32-3
ENGINE MOUNTING
Raise and Suspend the Engine to the
lOO-120Nm ( 72-87ftlbs. > &6 r I
12 Nm 9 ftlbs.
I/ 4
3emoval steps
c*
1. Connection for air hose G <Turbo> 2. Cruise control pump and link assembly <Vehicles with Cruise Control> 3. Engine mount bracket and body connection bolt 4. Engine mount bracket 5. Mounting stopper 6. Dynamic damper
OlFOO50
M32GBAK
2. REMOVAL OF CRUISE CONTROL PUMP AND LINK ASSEMBLY Remove the actuator mounting nuts and place the actuator where it will not interfere with the work.
INSPECTION
l l
M32GCAMl
Check each insulator for cracks or damage. Check each bracket for deformation or damage.
M32GDAW
5. INSTALLATION OF MOUNTING STOPPER Attach the engine mounting bracket so that the arrow mark on the mounting stopper is in the direction as shown in the illustration.
TSB Revision
32-4
POWER PLANT MOUNT - Transaxle Mounting

M32GE- -
TRANSAXLE MOUNTING
45 Nm 33 ft.lbs. / (Refer to GROUP 15 -Air Cleaner.)
(Refer to GROUP 15 -Air Cleaner.) 70 Nm 51 ftlbs.
Removal steps 1. Transaxle mount bracket and transaxle connection bolt
2. Cap
l
3. Transaxle mount bracket installation bolt 4. Transaxle mount bracket 5. Mounting stopper
01 FOO44
INSPECTION
l l
M32GCAM2
1 Transaxle mount bracket
M32GDAX
5. INSTALLATION OF MOUNTING STOPPER Attach the transaxle mounting bracket so that the arrow mark on the mounting stopper is in the direction as shown in the illustration.
TSB Revision
POWER PLANT MOUNT - Engine Roll Stopper
32-5
MJZGF- .
ENGINE ROLL STOPPER

Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation l Removal and Installation of Condenser Fan Motor Assembly <Turbo> (Refer to GROUP 55 - Condenser and Condenser Fan Motor.) l Removal and installation of Catalytic Converter (Left) <Turbo> (Refer to GROUP 15 -Turbocharger <Rear>.) 43 - 51 ftlbs.
45 Nm /33 ft.lbs.
Front stopper bracket removal steps 1. Front roll stopper bracket and engine connection bolt 2. Front roll stopper bracket installation bolt 3. Front roll stopper bracket 4. Heat protector <Turbo> Rear roll stopper bracket removal steps 5. Air hose A <Turbo> 6. Air intake hose C <Turbo> l + 7. Rear roll stopper bracket and engine connection bolt 8. Rear roll stopper bracket installation bolt +* *+ 9. Rear roll stopper bracket IO. Heat protector <Turbo>
50-60 Nm 36 - 43 ft.lbs.
OlFOO30
M32GEAL
9. REMOVAL OF REAR ROLL STOPPER BRACKET (1) Slightly raise the rear roll stopper bracket. (2) Turn the rear roll stopper bracket in the direction shown in the illustration and lift upward to remove.
INSPECTION
l l
M32GCAM3
M32GJAC
\ OlFOO4:
9. INSTALLATION OF REAR ROLL STOPPER BRACKET Install the rear roll stopper bracket as shown in the illustration. 7. INSTALLATION OF REAR ROLL STOPPER BRACKET AND ENGINE CONNECTION BOLT Install the bolt as shown in the illustration.
9
TSB Revision
32-6
POWER PLANT MOUNT -
Right Member, Left Member and Crossmember
RIGHT MEMBER, LEFT MEMBER AND CROSSMEMBER

M32YA-
(Referto GROUP 51 -Front Bumper.) No. 1 crossmember, Left member, Right member
/I
L
Post-installation Operation l Installation of Under Cover (Referto GROUP 51 -Front Bumper,) l Air Bleeding of the Power-steering Fluid (Refer to GROUP 37AService Adjustment Procedures.) l Adjustment of the Front Wheel Alignment (Refer to GROUP 33AService Adjustment Procedures.) l Supplying of Transfer Oil <AWD> (Refer to GROUP 00 - Maintenance Service.)
60-70Nm 43 - 51 ft.lbs. 11 F=----l
90Nm 65 ft.lbs.
60-70 Nm 43 51 ftlbs.
60-70 Nm 43 - 51 ft.lbs. /aa 60 - 70 Nm 43 - 51 ft.lbs. lV

OiFOO47
lemoval steps of No. 1 crossmember, M member, right member I. Cover installation screw
2. Left member 3. Connection of clutch vacuum hose <Turbo> 4. Vacuum tank installation bolt <Turbo> 5. Right member 6. Vacuum tank <Turbo> 7. Front roll stopper installation bolt 8. No. 1 crossmember installation nut 9. Lower plate 10. No. 1 crossmember 11. Stopper(B) 12. Bushing (B)
1 TSB Revision 1
POWER PLANT MOUNT -
32-7
L
3emoval steps of crossmember
l
Crossmember
r-f
;1
45 Nm 33 ftlbs.
l l l
Front exhaust pipe (Refer to GROUP 15 - Exhaust Pipe, Main Muffler and Catalytic Converter.) Transfer <AWD> (Referto GROUP 22-Transfer.) Stabilizer bar (Refer to GROUP 33A-Stabilizer Bar.) Steering gear box ro:,Tr to GROUP 37A- Power Steering Gear Self-locking nut Clamp installation bolt (short) Clamp installation bolt (long) Clamp Lower arm mounting bolt
13. 14. 15. 16. 17.
18. Stopper
19. Rear roll stopper bracket mounting bolt 20. Self-locking nut 21. Lower plate 22. Self-locking nut 23. Lower plate 24. Crossmember
L;
NOTE
25. Stopper B 26. Stopper A

27. Bushing B 28. Bushing A
*: Indicates parts which should be temporarily tightened, and then fully tightened with the vehicle in the unladen condition.
INSPECTION
l l l l
M32YCAC
the the the the
crossmember for cracks or deformation. bushings for cracks or deterioration. right member for cracks or deformation. left member for cracks or deformation.
Press out
Press fit
BUSHING A AND B REPLACEMENT
M32YDAC
1
Nut
Use the special tool to remove and press in bushings A and B.

MB
12R0121
TSB Revision
32-8
POWER PLANT MOUNT Front
Press in bushings A and B so that the arrows on their bottom surfaces may be directed in the crosswise direction (except those on No. 1 crossmember of FWD vehicles). d Caution Shifting of the arrow in the direction of rotation shall be within 1k5 of the crosswise direction.
Rear Bushing A
OlFOO52
Bushing B
Inner sleeve
12R0128 12R0125
Press in bushings A and B so that the projecting amount of the inner sleeve agrees with the standard value. Standard value: No. 1 crossmember Bushing B 7.5 - 10.5 mm (.30 - .41 in.) Crossmember 7.2 - 10.2 mm (.28 - .40 in.) Bushing A 6.5 - 9.5 mm (.26 - .37 in.) Bushing B Caution When pressing in, apply a solution of soap and water to the sliding part of the bushings, and then press them in without stopping one after the other. If there is a pause during the pressing operation, the frictional resistance will prevent installation.
TSB Revision
33A-1
FRONT SUSPENSION
CONTENTS
LOWER ARM ........................................................ SERVICE ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES ........ Front Wheel Alignment .................................... Wheel Bearing Adjustment ............................ SPECIAL TOOLS .................................................... 8 4 4 4 3 SPECIFICATIONS ................................................ General Specifications .................................... Service Specifications .................................... STABILIZER BAR, ................................................ STRUT ASSEMBLY ............................................ TROUBLESHOOTING ........................................
M33AA-A
2 2 2 10 5 3
33A-2 SPECIFICATIONS
FRONT SUSPENSION - Specifications

M33CA-A
Items
Coil spring identification color
M/T: Orange x 1 ATT: Orange x 2
Shock absorber Type Maximum length Compressed length Damping force [at 0.3 m/set. (0.984 ft./set.)] Hard : 2,650 + 360 (584 + 79) Medium : 1,650 t 230 (363 ?I 51) Soft : 650 f 100 (143 + 22) Hard : 1,200 + 170 (265 * 37) Medium : 1 ,I 50 k 170 (253 + 37) Soft : 1,000 z!z 150 (220 + 33 NOTE *: Option Hydraulic, cylindrical double acting type 485 + 3 (19.09 f .12) 335 I 3 (13.19 + .12) Hydraulic, cylindrical double acting type 485 k 3 (19.09 + .12) 335 2 3 (13.19 + .12) 150 (5.91)
M33CB-A
Camber Caster Toe-in mm (in.) Lower arm ball joint starting torque Nm (in.lbs.) Stabilizer link ball joint starting torque Nm (in.lbs.) Steering angle Inner wheel
IO-22 (86-191) 1.7 - 3.2 (15 - 28)
TSB Revision
FRONT SUSPENSION - Special Tools / Troubleshooting
SPECIAL TOOLS
Removal of the lower arm ball joint and
Wheel alignment gauge attachment
Measurement of the wheel alignment
Spring compressor
Compression of the front coil spring
MB990799-01
L
TROUBLESHOOTING
Symptom Probable cause
Ball joint remover and installer
Installation of the dust shield
M33EBAA
Remedy Adjust orreplace
Steering wheel is heavy, Suspension malfunction Ball joint vibrates or pulls to Coil spring one side Wheel alignment Unbalanced or worn tires Excessive vehicle rolling Poor riding Broken or deteriorated stabilizer Shock absorber malfunction Improper tire inflation pressure Broken or deteriorated coil spring Shock absorber malfunction Inclination of vehicle Noise Broken or deteriorated coil spring Lack of lubrication Looseness and wear of each part Broken coil spring Shock absorber malfunction
TSB Revision
Adjust or replace Replace Adjust Replace Replace Lubricate Retighten or replace Replace
33A-4
FRONT SUSPENSION - Service Adjustment Procedures

M33FBAT
FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT

TOE-IN Standard value: 0 2 3 mm (0 + .12 in.) 1. Adjust the toe-in by undoing the clips and turning the left and right tie rod turnbuckles by the same amount (in opposite directions). 2. After making the adjustments, use a turning radius gauge to confirm that the steering wheel turning angle is within the standard value range. (Refer to GROUP 37A - Service Adjustment Procedures.) Standard value: Inner wheel 3345 Outer wheel 2821
Strut lower mounting bolt
(upper)
CAMBER AND CASTER Standard value: Camber 0 IL 30 Caster 355 IL 30 Install the special tool by tightening it to the same torque as that applied to the drive shaft nut. a To adjust camber, turn the strut lower mounting bolt (upper). One graduation is equivalent to about 20 in camber. Caster has been factory-adjusted to the standard value and requires no adjustment. Caution 1. One camber graduation changes toe by about 0.5 mm (.02 in.). Be sure to adjust toe after camber has been adjusted. 2. The difference in camber between right and left should be within O30.
\
0 camber
/
@ camber
12FOO31
WHEEL BEARING ADJUSTMENT
M33FCAA
Bearing preload is pre-set to the specified value by design and therefore can not be adjusted.
TSB Revision
FRONT SUSPENSION - Strut Assembly
33A-5
M33lA-
STRUT ASSEMBLY I
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION =I
l
Adjustment of Wheel Alignment
45 Nm 33 ft.lbs.
2
AI 4$ ! c 3 li I 7 / / ; Ij I I I; /I ~ : / I/ j j 1 / -r 11 Ii
I---
Removal steps
1. Brake hose tube clamo mountina bolt -, 2. Brake hose tube clam; 3. Fr;;tSs;eed sensor clamp mountmg nut 4. Front speed sensor clamp tABS> 5. Strut lower mounting bolt 6. Strut upper mounting bolt 7. ECS connector <ECS> 8. Cap <ECS> 9. Strut assembly
1 TSB Revision
33A-6
FRONT SUSPENSION - Strut Assembly

M33LE. -
r---8
78 Nm 56 ftlbs.
Caution When applying the grease, take care that grease does not adhere to the insulators rubber part.
Disassembly steps
** l *
I. Dust shield 2. Self-lockrng nut 3. Strut insulator assembly ** 4. Spring upper seat assembly 5. Upper spring pad 6. Bump rubber 7. Dust shield 8. Front coil spring 9. Strut assembly
M33LFAI
2. REMOVAL OF SELF-LOCKING NUT (1) Holding the spring upper seat with the special tool, loosen the self-locking nut. Caution The self-locking nut should be loosened only, not removed.
(2) Using the special tools, compress the coil spring, and then remove the self-locking nut. NOTE Install the special tools evenly, and so that the maximum length will be attained within the installation range.
12L0254 1
FRONT SUSPENSION - Strut Assembly INSPECTION

l l l l
33A-7
M33LGAF
Check the Check the Check the Check the
strut insulator bearing- for wear or rust. rubber parts for damage or deterioration. spring for deformation, deterioration or damage. shock absorber for deformation,
Strut msulatkx bearing

12FOO80
M33UlAM
4. INSTALLATION OF SPRING UPPER SEAT ASSEMBLY (1) Assemble the spring upper seat to the piston rod, fitting the notch in the rod to the shaped hole in spring seat.
(2) Line up the holes in the strut assembly spring lower seat with the hole in the spring upper seat. NOTE The job is easily accomplished with a pipe [$I 8 mm x 300 mm (4 .3 in. x 11.8 in.)].
2. INSTALLATION OF SELF-LOCKING NUT (1) With the coil spring held compressed by the special tools (MB991 237 and MB991 238). provisionally .tighten the self-locking nut. (2) Correctly align both ends of the coil spring with the grooves in the spring seat, and then loosen the special tools (MB991 237 and MB991 238). (3) Using the special tool, tighten the strut insulator at the specified torque.
12FOO20
TSB Revision
33A-8 LOWER ARM
FRONT SUSPENSION - Lower Arm

MOJNA- _
100*.... Nm -Ts.
40 Nm 29 ft.lbs.
shteld
Removal steps
1. Stabilizer link mounting nut (stabilizer bar side) 2. Stabilizer link mounting nut (lower arm side) 3. Stabilizer link l * 4. Self-lockrng nut connecting lower arm ball joint to knuckle 5. Lower arm mounting nut 6. Lower arm mounting bolt 7. Clamp mounting self-locking nut 8. Clamp mounting bolt (small) 9. Clamp mounting bolt (large) ** 10. Lower arm clamp mounting self-locking nut 11. Lower arm mounting clamp 12. arm .- Lower 13. Stopper 14. Dust shield 15. Rod bushing
TSR Revision
1210487
NOTE For tlghtenrng points marked with *, ftrst temporarily trghten them, then ground the vehicle and torque to specification where the vehrcle is empty.
FRONT SUSPENSION - Lower Arm SERVICE POINT OF REMOVAL
33A-9
M33NBAO
MB991 113-01
4. REMOVAL OF LOWER ARM BALL JOINT Using the special tool, disconnect the knuckle from the lower arm ball joint. NOTE (1) Do not remove the nut from the ball joint, but just loosen it. (2) Suspend the special tool with a rope to prevent it from dropping.
12R0258
INSPECTION
l l
M33NCAF
12UOO18
Check the bushing for wear and deterioration. Check the lower arm for bend ,or breakage. l Check the clamp for deterioration or damage. l Check the ball joint dust shield for cracks. l Check all bolts for condition and straightness. CHECKING BALL JOINT FOR STARTING TORQUE Mount two nuts on the ball joint, and then measure the ball joint starting torque. Standard value: 10 - 22 Nm (86 - 191 in.lbs.1
LIPS Dust shield
BALL JOINT DUST SHIELD REPLACEMENT
MJBNEAH
(1) Remove the dust shield. (2) Apply multipurpose grease to the lip and inside of the dust shield.
12R0487
(3) C$Fedn the dust shield with special tool until it is fully
MB990799-01 Dust shield Snap ring
12L0295
M33NFAP
10. INSTALLATION OF LOWER ARM CLAMP MOUNTING SELF-LOCKING NUT Place the lower arm bushing bracket so that its mounting surface tilts 6 ? 1 with respect to the bottom surface of the lower arm; then, mount the self-locking nut.
TSB Revision
33A-10 STABILIZER BAR
FRONT SUSPENSION - Stabilizer Bar

M33TA- -
Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation l Removal and installation of the Front Exhaust Pipe (Refer to GROUP 15 - Exhaust Pipe and Main Muffler.) l Removal and Installation of the Under Cover l Removal and installation of the Left Member and Right Member (Refer to GROUP 32 - Right Member, Left Member and Crossmember.)
36 26 ft.lbs.
40 Nm 29 ftlbs.
Removal steps
1. Tr&smission stay B <AWD vehicles with automatic transaxle> *I* l a 2. Transfer (AWD) (Refer to GROUP 22 -Transfer.) 3. Stabilizer link 4. Stabilizer bar bracket mounting bolt l + 5. Stabilizer bar bracket 6. Bushing 7. Stabilizer bar
12L0217 I-
INSPECTION
l l l l
M33TCAJ
Check the bushing for wear and deterioration. Check the stabilizer bar for deterioration or damage. Check the stabilizer link ball joint dust cover for cracks. Check all bolts for condition and straightness.
TSB Revision
FRONT SUSPENSION - Stabilizer Bar
33A-11
CHECKING STABILIZER LINK BALL JOINT STARTING TORQUE Mount two nuts on the ball joint, and then measure the ball joint starting torque. Standard value: 1.7 - 3.2 Nm (15 - 28 in.lbs.)
BALL JOINT DUST SHIELD REPLACEMENT

(1) Remove the clip ring and the dust shield.
M33TEAF
12LO244
(2) Apply multipurpose grease to the lip and inside of the dust shield.
12LO217
Tape eke
(3) Use vinyl tape to tape the stabilizer link where shown in the illustration, and then install the dust shield to the stabilizer link. (4) Secure the dust shield by the clip link. At this time, make sure that the clip ring ends are located at a point 90 ? 20 with reference to the link axis.
12PO156
Clip ring ends (Could be on 180 opposite side) 1280252
Align end of bushin with marking outer
M33TOAO
5. POSITIONING OF STABILIZER BAR BRACKET (1) Align the bushing (LH) with the stabilizer bar marking end and temporarily tighten the stabilizer bar bracket U-0. (2) In this condition, mount the stabilizer bar bracket (RH) and temporarily tighten it. (3) Temporarily fix the both ends of the stabilizer bar to the link and tighten the stabilizer bar bracket mounting bolts to specification:
1 TSB Revision
33B-1
ELECTRONIC CONTROL SUSPENSION

CONTENTS
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ................................................................ 22 20 21 20 19 19 20 12 12 DAMPING FORCE CHANGEOVER ACTUATOR ................................................................................ ECS CONTROL UNIT ................................................................ ECS INDICATOR LIGHT ............................................................ ECS SWITCH ............................................................................ G SENSOR ................................................................................ POSITION DETECTION SWITCH ............................................ SERVICE ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES ............................ On-Vehicle Inspection ........................................................
M33AA-B
SPECIAL TOOLS ........................................................................ SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................... General Specifications ....................................................... Service Specifications ....................................................... STEERING ANGULAR VELOCITY SENSOR* .................................................................................... STOP LIGHT SWITCH ............................................................ THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR ............................................ TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................................ VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR ....................................................
3 2 2 3 a.
-IY
20 20 4
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) (I) A Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), which uses a driver-side air bag, has been installed in the 3000GT. (2) The SRS includes the following components: impact sensors, SRS diagnosis unit: SRS warning light, aiir bag module, clock spring, interconnecting wiring. Other SRS-related components (that may have 1:o be removed/installed in connection with SRS service or maintenance) are indicated in the table of contents by an asterisk (*). WARNING! (1) Improper service or maintenance of any component of the SRS, or any SRS-related component, can lead to personal injury or death to service personnel (from inadvertent firing of the air bag) or to the driver (from rendering the SRS inoperative). (2) Service or maintenance of any SRS component or SRS-related component must be performed only at an authorized MITSUBISHI dealer. (3) MITSUBISHI dealer personnel must thoroughly review this manual, and especially its GROUP Ei2B Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), before beginning any service or maintenance of any component of the SRS or any SRS-related component.
33B-2
ELECTRONIC CONTROL SUSPENSION (ECS) - Specifications
SPECIFICATIONS
FRONT SUSPENSION
M33CA-B
Coil spring 14.8 x 170 x 322.5 (.58 x 6.69 x 12.70) Effective No. of coils Shock absorber Type Hydraulic, cylindrical double-acting type 485 (19.1) 335 (13.2) 150 (5.9) 15.0 x 170 x 331.0 (.59 x 6.69 x 13.03) 15.7 x 170 x 301.5 (.62 x 6.69 x 11.87)
Expansion Hard Medium Soft Contraction Hard 2,650 (584) 1,650 (364) .650 (143) 1,200 (265)
Pillow ball type
REAR SUSPENSION
Items Suspension system Coil spring Wire dia. x center dia. x free length mm (in.) Effective No. of coils (color coded) I FWD Multi-link type 12.2 x 105 x 350.0 (48 x 4.13 x 13.78) 5.5 (orange x 1) I AWD Double-wishbone type 12.2 x 105 x 379.3 (48 x 4.13 x 14.93) 6.8 (blue x 2) I
1 TSB Revision
ELECTRONIC CONTROL SUSPENSION (ECS) - Specifications

Items FWD I Hydraulic, cylindrical double-acting type
515 (20.3) 356 (14.0) 610 (24.0) 407 (16.0) 203 (8.0)
33B-3
I
AWD
Shock absorber Type Max. length mm (in.) Min. length mm (in.) Stroke mm (in.) Damping force at 0.3 m/see I.9 ft.)/sec. N (Ibs Expansion Hard Medium Soft Contraction Hard Medium Soft Stabilizer bar Mounting method Outside dia. mm (in.) 10 (.37)
159 (6.3)
1,800 (397) 1,200 (265)

550 (121)
950 (209)
850 (187) 850 (143)
Pillow ball type
Rear suspension
M33CB-B
I iJ
Standard value Camber Caster mm (in.) Toe-in
Items
Front suspension
1'
D - O10 Ik 3 0
0 + 30 355 t 3 0 0 + 3 (0 f .12)
0 k 30
.5 2 2.5 (.02 + .I) .5 k 2.5
SPECIAL TOOLS
Tool Number MB991 341 Name Multi-use tester sub-assembly Use
M33DA-B
Inspection of electronic control suspension system l Reading and erasing self-diagnosis codes l Reading service data l Actuator test
MB991 359
ROM pack
TSB Revision
33B-4
ELECTRONIC CONTROL SUSPENSION (ECS) - Troubleshooting

M33EAAE
TROUBLESHOOTING
QUICK REFERENCE CHART FOR TROUBLESHOOTING
Symptoms
XS indicator light does not switch
1. The G. sensor is a sensor associated with ride control (detecting pitching, bouncing and rough road). If it fails, therefore, ride control stops. 2. A self diagnostic decision on the steering angular velocity sensor is made by the ECS control unit which internally detects the voltages of the two sensor output lines connected to the ECS control unit to detect an open circuit in the signal line. When the signal line is short-circuited or when the power line is open-circuited, however, it cannot be detected. In a situation where anti-roll control only stops, if self-diagnosis code No. 21 is not on display, a short-circuited sensor output line or open-circuited sensor power line is suspected. 3. The vehicle speed sensor is a sensor associated with attitude controls (anti-dive, anti-squat) and steering stability controls (anti-roll, high speed sensitive controls). If all these controls stop, therefore, trouble in the sensor is suspected. The vehicle speed sensor is also in use for operation of the speedometer and for the other electronics controlled systems for the engine, automatic transaxle, etc. 4. The sensor associated with anti-squat control is the throttle position sensor. The sensor is also used for control of the engine and automatic transaxle. If the sensor fails, therefore, the check engine light in the combination meter will light, and engine self-diagnosis code No. 14 will be output. In a situation where anti-squat control only stops, therefore, if the check engine light does not light, defective wiring is suspected between the ECS control unit and throttle position sensor.
TSB Revision
ELECTRONIC CONTROL SUSPENSION (ECS) - Troubleshooting is output
33B-5
When diagnosis code No. 11
Disconnect G sensor connector.
No. 1 terminal voltage and continuity between No. 3 terminal and ground up to specification? (Sensor power supply and ground)
Standards: No. 1 terminal 5V No. 3 terminal Continuity provided I
.-1
Is continuity provided across the following areas? Between G sensor and ECS control unit Between No. 1 terminal and No. 54 ! Between No. 3 terminal and No. 57
Yes Replace ECS control unit. Correct harness.
L
Continuity provided between No. 2 terminal of G sensor and No. 61 terminal of ECS control unit? I Yes
No ) Correct harness.
4
Is trouble cleared by replaced G sensor?
N?
Replace ECS control unit.
I
End
Yes
TSB Revision
33B-6
I When diagnosis code No. 21 is output, or when anti-roil control only stops.
Check by entering simulated vehicle speed to simulate anti-roll controls. (Refer to P.33B-16.)
Using MUT, check service data on the steering angular velocity sensor.
N o
No. 2,3 and 4 terminal voltages up to specification?

Standard: 5 V
>
Yes
Is continuity provided across the following areas? Between steering angular velocity sensor and ECS control unit Between No. 2 terminal and No. Between No. 3 terminal and No. Between No. 4 terminal and No. Yes
Is trouble cleared by replacing
End
1 TSB Revision

3 When diagnosis code No. 24 is output
33B-7
1
Yes No
<Turbo> Yes Using MUT, check service data on vehicle speed sensor. Good? No j Check by entering simulated vehicle speed from MUT late high speed-sensitive control. (Refer to P.338-17.)
1
Disconnect vehicle speed sensor connectar and check harness connector.
/
j) Good
5
/
1
Replace ECS control unit. 1
No. 1 terminal voltage and continuity between No. 2 terminal and ground up to specification? (Sensor power supply and ground) Standards: No. 1 terminal Battery voltage No. 2 terminal Continuity provided Yes
J
I
Correct harness (between No. 1 terminal of vehicle speed sensor and battery and between No. 2 terminal of vehicle speed sensor and ground).
l-.-l
Nn
Is continuity provided between No. 3 terminal of vehicle speed sensor and No. 53 terminal of ECS control unit?
Correct harness.
1
I
Yes No Replace vehicle speed sensor.
Check vehicle speed sensor. (Refer to P.33B-19.) Good? Yes Replace ECS control unit. <Non-Turbo> Using MUT, check service data on vehicle speed sensor. No I
late high speed-sensitive control. (Refer to P.33B-17.) Good!

4 t
No
I Correct harness.
Is continuity provided between No. 109 terminal of combination meter and No. 53 terminal of ECS control unit? Yes Is continuity provided between No. 64 terminal of combination meter and ground? Yes Check vehicle speed sensor. (Refer to P.33B-19.) Good? Yes --+ No
Correct harness. 4
Replace vehicle speed sensor.
TSB Revision
33B-8
I I

I
1 4 1 When diagnosis code Nos. 61, 62, 63 and 64 are output.
Using MUT, check actuator. (Refer (-yes to P.33B-15.) Good?

No
Remove cap at top of shock absorber associated with diagnosis code No., disconnect connector directly connected to shock absorber, and check harness connector with ignition switch at ON.
~...-
No. 1 and 3 terminal voltages up to specification?

Standard: 5 V Yes
No
Is continuity provided across the following areas of shock Lsorber associated with diagnosis code No.? Between shock absorbers and ECS control unit Between No. 1 and 7 terminals of F.R. shock absorber Between No. 3 and 6 terminals of F.R. shock absorber Between No. 1 and 10 terminals of F.L. shock absorber Between No. 3 and 9 terminals of F.L. shock absorber Between No. 1 and 13 terminals of R.R. shock absorber Between No. 3 and 12 terminals of R.R. shock absorber Between No. 1 and 16 terminals of R.L. shock absorber Between No. 3 and 15 terminals of R.L. shock absorber
Yes
No
Is continuity provided between Correct harness (between No. 2 and 4 terminals of shock andr ground? rTi a No. b 2sando4 terminals r b e a n d g r o u n d ) .
+ age, force-drive actuator by MUT. Is

Standard: 9 V during forced drive
Yes
Is continuity provided across the following areas of shock absorber associated with diagnosis code No.? shock absorbers and ECS control unit Between No. 5 and 5 terminals of F.R. shock absorber No. 5 and 8 terminals of F.L. shock absorber No. 5 and 11 terminals of R.R. shock absorber No. 5 and 14 terminals of R.L. shock absorber I Yes No
Is trouble corrected by replacing shock absorber (including damping force changeover actuator and POSItion detection switch) associated
Yes
1
End
TSB Revision

1 5 1 ECS indicator light does not switch when ECS switch is operated.
:33B-9
Yes
I
Does ECS indicator light flash?
+
I
Read diagnosis code and check area associated with dralgnosrs .---I code.
Disconnect ECS switch connector and check harness connector with
No
No. 10 terminal voltage and continuity between No. 11 terminal and ground up to specification?
Standards: No. 10 terminal 5V No. 11 terminal Continuity provided Yes
Correct harness.
Check ECS switch. (Refer to P.33BYes
Replace ECS switch.
Replace ECS indicator light bulb. check ECS indicator light for burnt
Is continuity provided across the combination meter and ECS control unit No. 10 and 2 terminals No. 11 and 3 terminals Yes Is continuity provided between No. 2 terminal of combination meter and ground? Yes I Is trouble cleared by replacing combination meter?
- Correct harness.
No
> Correct harness.
No -
Yes
TSB Revision
33B-10 ELECTRONIC CONTROL SUSPENSION (ECS) 6 Anti-dive control only stops.

Yes Using MUT, check service data on stop light switch. Good? >
Troubleshooting
Check by entering simulated vehicle speed from MUT to simulate anti-dive control. (Refer to P.33B-16.) Good? I , c h
Disconnect stop light switch connector and check harness connector. f
(Between No. 2 terminal of stop light switch and battery)
Check stop light switch. (Refer to P.33B-20.) Good? Yes Replace ECS control unit.
Replace stop light switch.
TSB Revision
ELECTRONIC CONTROL SUSPENSION (ECS) - Troubleshooting 33B-11

II L, Yes Using MUT, check service data on throttle position sensor. Good? r Check by entering simulated vehicle speed from MUT to simulate anti-squat control. (Refer to P.33B-16.) Good? !
7
II
Anti-squat control only stops.
1 Good 1 I Does check engine light illuminate? No >
1 ) Replace ECS control unit. 1 I I I
Is continuity provided between No. 2 terminal of throttle position sensor and No. 59 terminal of ECS control unity II Yes Correct harness. i 1 Check throttle position sensor. (Refer to P.33B-20.) Good?
connector and check harness connector with ignition switch at ON.
No. 1 terminal voltage and continuity between No. 4 terminal and ground up to specification? (Sensor power supply and ground)
Standards: 5V No. 1 terminal No. 4 terminal Continuity provided Yes
No
Is continuity provided across the following areas? throttle position sensor and engine control unit No. 1 and 61 terminals No. 4 and 72 terminals I
Yes
-1 1 C o r r e c t harnei: Replace throttle position sensor.
TSB Revision
33B-12
ELECTRONIC CONTROL SUSPENSION (EC9 - i?:~~u:?s*men*

I

ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION
M33FHAD
12FOOOE
1. WARNING INDICATION BY ECS INDICATOR LIGHT If a problem associated with the following items occurs, the ECS indicator light (Tour Sport) in the combination light flashes at intervals of 0.5 sec. At the same time, the self-diagnosis code associated with the problem is output to the diagnosis connector. Warning Indication Items l G sensor l Steering angular velocity sensor l Vehicle speed sensor l Damping force changeover actuator (including position detection switch)
2. SELF-DIAGNOSIS OUTPUT CHECK <When multi-use tester (MUT) is used> (I) Check the self-diagnosis code. (2) After the defective portion has been repaired, erase the self-diagnosis code. (If the defective portion is not completely repaired, it may be impossible to erase the d self-diagnosis code by the MUT.) (3) Perform self-diagnosis output check again and check that the self-diagnosis code is good.
<When voltmeter is used> (1) Set the ignition switch to OFF. (2) Connect the positive (+) terminal of the voltmeter to the No. 3 terminal of the diagnosis connector beside the junction block and connect the negative (--) terminal of the voltmeter to the No. 12 terminal. (3) Set the ignition switch to ON. (4) Read the self-diagnosis code on the basis of the deflection of the pointer of the voltmeter. (5) Based on the self-diagnosis code, repair the associated defective portion. (6) Set the ignition switch to OFF. (7) Disconnect the battery cables from the battery terminals and reconnect them more than 10 seconds thereafter. (8) Set the ignition switch to ON, perform self-diagnosis check again, and check that the self-diagnosis code is good.
TSB Revision
ELECTRONIC CONTROL SUSPENSION (ECS) Fail Safe and Diagnosis List
Service Adjustment Procedures
33B-13
Output Code Diagnosis Item Code No. 0 l-l Indication Pattern [Good] [Good] Fail Safe
11
G sensor defective*
Ride controls (pinching and bouncing control, bad road detection control) sl:op.
21
Steering angular velocity sensor opencircuited* Vehicle speed sensor *open-crrcurted
Anti-roll control stops.
24 nn
Steering stability controls (anti-roll, high speed sensitive controls) and attitude controls (anti-dive, anti-squat) stop. Shock absorber damping force fixed <at MEDIUM
F. L. damping force fl-~-~-j c$i;z;;Fr 11 a c t u a t o r
R. R. damping force
64
j-jMJ-~-~-~
~t$ec~Z$rn&ftYrrZ&
NOTE (1) Control stop, warning indication and fixed damping force return to normal when the ignition switch is set to OFF. When any of the problems marked* occurs, if no subsequent problem occurs (for example, when the problem IS transient) normal operation will be restored even if the ignition switch is not set to OFF. (2) Even if control stop warning indication and fixed damping force return to normal as described above, the self-diagnosis codeis stored in the memory in the ECS control unrt. (3) The self-diagnosis code can be force-cleared by use of the MUT or by stopping the power supply to the ECS control unit. In addition it is automatically cleared if the ON/OFF control of the ignition swatch is repeated 60 times after the self-diagnosis code has been output, provided that no new self-diagnosis code is output during the period.
TSB Revision
339-l 4
ELECTRONIC CONTROL SUSPENSION (ECS) - ~;:i%?tment
Self-Diagnosis Determination Conditions

Code No. 11 21 24 What is Defective G sensor defective Steering angular velocity sensor open-circuited Vehicle speed sensor defective Damping force changeover actuator defective Self-Diagnosis Determination Conditions When sensor input of 0.5 or less or 4.5 V or more lasts for more than 10 seconds. Open circuit detected on the basis of difference in voltage level of sensor signal. When throttle opening of 30% (1.5 V) or more lasts for more than 60 seconds with the ignition switch at ON and if there is no input from the vehicle speed sensor during the period, it is regarded as a problem. If no damping force changeover is made in a second after actuator drive signal has been output (position detection switch output pattern does not change to that of target damping force), it is regarded as a problem.
61 - 64
3. SERVICE DATA OUTPUT CHECK Using the MUT, check the service data. Service Data Inspection List
Item No.
11
14
21 sensor
ST2
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
1 TSB Revision
ELECTRONIC CONTROL SUSPENSION (ECS) - ;;~i%:~ustment

Item No. 24 Check Point Vehicle speed sensor stop light switch F.R. actuator F.L. actuator R.R. actuator R.L. actuator Check Condition Check by actually operating vehicle. Depress brake pedal. Do not depress brake pedal. Tour mode with vehicle stationary Sport mode with vehicle stationary 62 Tour mode with vehicle stationary Sport mode with vehicle stationary 63 Tour mode with vehicle stationary Sport mode with vehicle stationary 64 Tour mode with vehicle stationary Sport mode with vehicle stationary
339-15
Soundness Determination Value Speedometer indication and MUT indication coincide. ON OFF SOFT HARD SOFT HARD SOFT HARD SOFT HARD
26
61
I,
4. ACTUATOR CHECK (I) Using the MUT, force-drive the actuator and fix the damping force changeover. (2) Check service data (Item No. 61 through 64) to verify that the actuator has been force-driven. NOTE l All of the four actuators in the shock absorbers are simultaneously changed over by forced drive. l The damping force changed over and fixed by forced drive is cleared by the following three conditions. 1. Ignition switch OFF 2. Vehicle speed 3 km/h (1.9 mph) or more 3. MUT disconnected Actuator Check List
Item No. 01 03 04 Check Point Damping force SOFT Damping force MEDIUM Damping force HARD Vehicle in stationary condition Check Condition MUT Service Data Item No. 61 - 64 Indicated SOFT MEDIUM HARD
TSB Revision
339-l 6
ELECTRONIC CONTROL SUSPENSION (ECS) - ;;:%,:?Stment

5. CONTROL FUNCTION SIMULATION CHECK Using the MUT, check all control functions during operation with the vehicle in stationary condition. 5-1. Anti-Roll Control Function Check :d (1) Raise the front wheels on a jack and have them supported by rigid racks. (2) Place the steering wheel in straight ahead position. (3) Select the Tour mode by the ECS switch. (4) Enter a simulated vehicle speed of 100 km/h (62 mph) from the MUT. (5) Using the MUT, check the indications of service data items No. 61 through 64. MUT indication: SOFT (6) Turn the steering wheel clockwise or counterclockwise from the straight ahead position. (7) Using the MUT, check that the indications of service data items No. 61 through 64 change over.
Approx. 0.2 seconds for 90 rotation (8) Check that the original damping force indication (SOFT) is restored a second later. 5-2. Anti-Dive Control Function Check (1) Select the Tour mode by the ECS switch. (2) Enter a simulated vehicle speed of 100 km/h (62 mph) from the MUT. (3) Using the MUT, check the indications of service data items No. 61 through 64. MUT indication: SOFT (4) Depress the brake pedal and simultaneously change the entered simulated vehicle speed by the MUT. (Change the speed in 0.4 seconds after depressing the brake pedal.) (5) Using the MUT, check that the indications of service data items No. 61 through 64 change over. Changing entered simulated vehicle speed 100 km/h (62 mph) to 80 km/h (50 mph)
12FOO64
Ls
MUT indication HARD
(6) Check that the original damping force indication (SOFT) is restored a second later. 5-3. Anti-Squat Control Function Check (1) Select the Tour mode by the ECS switch. (2) Enter a simulated vehicle speed of 30 km/h (19 mph) from the MUT. (3) Using the MUT, check the indications of service data items No. 61 through 64. MUT indication: SOFT l/i
TSB Revision
ELECTRONIC CONTROL SUSPENSION (ECS) - :;:~u:~men*
33B17
(4) Check that when the accelerator dedal is operated, the indications of service data items No. 61 through 64 on the MUT change as shown in the following table. (5) With the simulated vehicle speed at 60 km/h (37 mph) and 90 km/h (56 mph), similarly operate the accelerator pedal and check that the MUT indications change over.
EnE~~esismp~~ed ~;zz-KzxJ
Accelerator operating condition 130km/h(19mph) 1 60 km/h (37 mph) 1 90 km/h (56 mph) 1 1 1 HARD MEDIUM SOFT I I MEDllJM MEDllJM MEDLJM I I
(6) Check that when the accelerator pedal is released, the original damping force (SOFT) is restored in less than a second. 5-4. High Speed Sensitive Control Function Chleck (I) Select the Tour mode by the ECS switch. (2) Check that when the entered simulated vehicle speed is changed by the MUT, the indications of service data items No. 61 through 64 change. (If the simulated vehicle speed is continuously cihanged by the Q and .!J keys of the MUT, however, the indications of service data items No. 61 through 64 do not change during the period the 0 or a key is pressed.)
Changing entered simulated vehicle speed Acceleration 129 km/h (80 mph) to 130 km/h (81 mph) Deceleration 120 km/h (75 mph) to 119 km/h (74 mph) MUT indication SOFT + MEDIUM MEDIUM +, SOFT
5-5. Pitching and Bouncing Control Function Check (1) Select the Tour mode by the ECS switch. (2) Using the MUT, check the indications of service data items No. 61 through 64. MUT indication: SOFT
(3) Remove the G sensor, slowly shake it up and down through a space of about 5 cm (1.9 in.) with the connector connected, and check that the indications of service data items No. 61 through 64 change.
G sensor status Shake up and down at a speed of a rou.nd trip in a second.
MUT indication HARD
(4) Check that when the G sensor is held stationary, the original damping force indication (SOFT) is restored. TSB Revision
33B-18
ELECTRONIC CONTROL SUSPENSION (EC9 - ~::::u:?s*men*

6. ACTUATOR OPERATION CHECK M33FJAA 6-1. Actuator Operating Sound Check (I) Set the ignition switch to ON. d (2) Bring your ear near the top of the shock absorber. NOTE In the case of the rear shock absorbers, remove the trim cover at the top of the shock absorber before bringing your ear near the shock absorber. (3) Check that the operating sound of the actuator in the shock absorber can be heard each time the control modes are changed by pressing the ECS switch. 6-2. Damping Force Check (1) Set the ignition switch to ON. (ECS indicator Tour ON, damping force SOFT) (2) Check the damping force SOFT state by shaking the top mounting points of the front shock absorbers or the top of the rear end panels of the rear shock absorbers up and down. (3) Press the ECS switch to change the control mode to Sport. (ECS indicator Sport ON, damping force HARD) (4) Shake the vehicle up and down to check that the damping force is harder than in the SOFT state.
/I
(Front)
(Rear)
12FOOG
TSB Revision
ELECTRONIC CONTROL SUSPENSION (ECS)
ECS Switch I Steering Angular Velocity - Sensor I G Sensor I Vehicle Speed Sensor
3:3B-19
MUZCAB
ECS SWITCH
To mount or remove the ECS switch, refer to GROUP 54 Meters and Gauges. Remove the meter bezel before rnounting or removing the ECS switch.
12FOO6t 3
INSPECTION
Operate the switch to check for continuity between the individual terminals.
3
ECS switch
I
12FOO71
ON
I
0
I
OFF
STEERING ANGULAR VELOCITY SENSOR
M33ZHAB
To mount or remove the steering angular velocity sensor, refer to GROUP 54 - Column Switch. Remove the steerilng wheel and clock spring *before mounting or removing the sensor.
\\
12FOO72
G SENSOR
M33ZIAB
To mount or remove the G sensor, refer to GROUP 52A-Front Seat. Remove the front seat (L.H.) before removing or mounting the sensor.
M33ZJAB
To mount or remove the vehicle speed sensor, refer to GROUP 54 - Meters and Gauges.
INSPECTION
Refer to GROUP 54 - Meters and Gauges.
i
TSB Revision
wmtk tkmng .semor stop tight Acl swiutatc. ch , I/ POr Detsctiol.nigil* 33B-20 ELECTRONIC CONTROL SUSPENSION (ECS) - lSWi tEh 1 Posi DPmpi Force Ichangeover EC3iticmIndii.ar
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
Refer to GROUP 13 - Fuel System.
M33ZKA6
I
lJ
STOP LIGHT SWITCH
M33ZCAC
To remove or mount the stop light switch, refer to GROUP 35 Brake Pedal.
INSPECTION
Refer to GROUP 35 - Brake Pedal.
POSITION DETECTION SWITCH and DAMPING FORCE CHANGEOVER ACTUATOR
M33ZCAD
To remove or mount the position detection switch and damping J force changeover actuator, refer to GROUP 33A - Strut L Assembly and GROUP 34 - Shock Absorber Assembly. Caution The position detection switch and damping force changeover actuator are built into the shock absorber assemblies of front and rear suspensions. Since they are of the non-disassembly type, remove or mount them in the form of a strut assembly or shock absorber assembly.
ECS INDICATOR LIGHT
M33ZLAB
To remove or mount the ECS indicator lights, refer to GROUP 54 - Meters and Gauges.
TSB Revision
ELECTRONIC CONTROL SUSPENSION (ECS) - ECS Control Unit
33B-21
M33ZXAD
ECS CONTROL UNIT

Removal steps
12FOO98
I. Cargo floor box (R.H.) 2. Lid 3. ECS control unit
TSB Revision
33B-22 ELECTRONIC CONTROL SUSPENSION (ECS) - Circuit Diagram CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

FUSIBLE LINK@ TAILL ,lGH -_ -.- T - RELAY M33ZEAB
J/B
@ I
1GA
! !1
-1 F;;;CATED 3 & E
m II
123E
1
1
----- -
[1:
>
u2
1234 5578 J/G iv, -m I

1 -2 \L E s= 43
pyspq 3 2 101? 12!~3 Ir. Eli
JUIvPER CONNECTOR 1254 LEd
B
8
m
M
__
p7zERmj
ELECTROMIC CONTROL SUSPEldSiOi,d CONTRllL Ui'dIT
62 -------____
21_ r % c; 0 q ,:= J .4 ET 12 --c. n
I
.---._-__ 60 1 ------.--
,p ___. _ lt 1-L u .
0, iLL
10
i;4 mi
ECS SWITCr; f pg&-jqq ET- 1 JN -. m'll I
Q2 A
E
2 %t 34 II3
12
CXECK COKNECTOR
10 rk SELF-DIAGNOSIS
3 -
X35-AX-Bi?Gl-E ,
TSB Revision
ELECTRONIC CONTROL SUSPENSION (ECS) - Circuit Diaaram
33B-23
IGN: sw1:
ON :A? - (IG2)
1234 5678 12 J333 77
m I &
el
SV GND Ifi
ENGINE f"BTROL
64
61
72
I i ' 2 3
> CL I
,J
,\
L2 c I I m4 /\
THROTTLE ;;;EI;;ON 4-1
Y J -+d
TJ -jV
___--_--- _-- ------2 54 55 3
F cl 11 __-----IGNITION SWITCH(IG1) G-R 18Bl NONTURBO\ m
Ll "p & w 4 3 ------ 2 -
.I !i ss
ni I CL
COMBI%kiN '(REED> G SENSOR lf?EzJi

TSB Revision
STEERING WHEEL ANGLE SPEED SENSOR
1 2 3a liZI
33B-24 ELECTRONIC CONTROL SUSPENSION (ECS) - Circuit Diagram
FRONT SHOCK ABSORBERtLH) ,I
FRONT SHOCK ABSORBERCRH)
LB\ _ + 3 a1 !
\, k, 1
pi..+ _ 13
m 2 L II 3- - -
---$--i , & 3 y1 Lb-cj
m c I oc 2
a &
3 ---
mI 1 =
4 --
4-- 5 4-/ 05 i qff dii 3 ! f /! I
pR!izaq w
,I i fj y cc/ !2
r---------
/I 1 Jo I I _I II //
I
L&J 110 9 -------- - - - - - - - - -...-------------. 6 - - - I7 --- * \ +d 1 .& 2 sv 5Y f q LI 5-g
I$
5 5 5Y gfzi TG z-3 pl Q 5 l-3 q; y GNE 4 r-4 -y;-~,-~--~~~-------------~~~-~~~~l 1 ;5r 114 ii0 !!d
: ! c!Y! > i L
i-5 v 2 j,t k c1 CL ,/\3 :I b 43! sv
IELECTRONIC ICONTROL ,SUSPENSION ICONTROL UNIT
I I
m/r fGiz&j 1 I I i A, KlqqEL 5j ;I FFR! :; 7 j I ;-1112;;/;: iII A/ & i 1 -i - 1 2

3456 3456
&L-*4-- ,3
,I5
tk ii j &--~:;--A, PC ___;* p ,a-.C 7 iti : : iy~ /I / i/!j

I I
&,I \ n;, !,L 3
ii [-- (--f--!y[ ,r!,;> I,\ I* A ?n ! j-J-A,& 1 ! i j;&ONd q j j :, ;#-r ON Ti / I I I I

I -1
w/ [ A 1
WJ SHXK
s$flp SHOCK \
KX35-AX-Rl701A-NM
TSB Revision
id
REAR SUSPE,NSlON
CONTENTS <AWD>
REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . .._.. 24 SERVICE ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES . . 23 Rear Wheel Alignment Inspection . . . . . . . . . . 23 SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 SPECIAL TOOLS . .._____......_..................._................. 20 SPECIFICATIONS .__............................................. 19 General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Service Specifications .._............................... 1 9 STABILIZER BAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 TRAILING ARM .._........_._...................................... 30 TROUBLESHOOTING _....................................... 22 UPPER AND LOWER ARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..t.......... 27
M34AA-.
<FWD>
REAR AXLE HUB ................................................ 17 REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY .................... 7 SERVICE ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES ........ 5 Rear Hub Rotary-sliding Resistance (Torque) Inspection ................................................ 6 Rear Wheel Alignment Inspection.. .................. 5 Wheel Bearing End Play Inspection .................... 6 SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY .................... 13 SPECIAL TOOLS .................................................... 3 SPECIFICATIONS ................................................ 2 ,General Specifications .................................... 2 Service Specifications .................................... 2 STABILIZER BAR ................................................ 15 TRAILING ARM .................................................... 11 I TROUBLESHOOTING ........................................ 4 UPPER ARM, LOWER ARM AND 1 ASSIST LINK ........................................................ 9
/ id
34-2
REAR SUSPENSION <FWD> - Specifications
SPECIFICATIONS <FWD>
Items Suspension system Coil spring Wire dia. x O.D. x free length mm (in.) 12X95X350 (47 x 3.74 x 13.78) Pink x 1 352 1.8(196? 10.1) Hydraulic cylindrical double-acting type 515 f 3 (20.2 i .I) 356+3(14.0+.1) 159 (6.3) 1,000 + 150 (220 + 33) Vehicles without ECS Vehicles with ECS Multi-link 12.2x105x350 (.48x4.13x13.78) Orange x 1 35+ 1.8(196+ 10.1) Hydraulic cylindrical double-acting type 515 + 3 (20.2 f .I) 356 Ifr 3 (14.0 k .I) 159 (6.3) Hard: 1,800 ? 250 (397 f 55) Medium: 1,200 rt 170 (265 + 37 Soft: 550 * 90 (121 f 20) Hard: 950 + 140 (209 k 31) Medium: 850 * 130 (187 f 29) Soft: 650 t- 100 (143 i 22) Unit bail bearing
Coil spring identification color Spring constant N/mm (Ibs./in.) Shock absorber Type Max. length mm (in.) Min. length mm (in.) Stroke mm (in.) Damping force [at 0.3 m/set. (.9 ftisec.)] Expansion N (Ibs.)
Contraction
N (Ibs.)
550_+80(121 + 18)
aheel bearing Type
Items Standard value Toe-in (Left-right difference) mm (in.) Camber Stabilizer link ball joint starting torque Nm (in.lbs.) Ball joint rotation starting torque Nm (inlbs.) Stabilizer link protrusion mm (in.) Crossmember bushing projection, mm (in.) Limit Wheel bearing end play mm (in.) Rear hub rotary-sliding resistance N (Ibs.) Rear hub rotary-sliding torque Nm (ftlbs.) Specifications 0.5 + 2.5 (.Ol + .09) 0 2 30 1.7-3.2(15-28) 2-9(17-78) 5-7(.197-,276) 8.5 - 9.5 (33 - .37) 0.05 (002) or less 31 (7) or less 1.8 (I .30) or less
M34CB.A
TSB Revision
REAR SUSPENSION <FWD> - Special Tools
34-3
M34DA-A
SPECIAL TOOLS
pring compressor
ompressfon 0
member
1 TSB Revision
34-4
REAR SUSPENSION <FWD> - Troubleshooting
TROUBLESHOOTING
Symptom Squeaks or other abnormal noise Probable cause Loose rear suspension installation bolts and nuts Malfunction of shock absorber Worn bushings Upper arms and/or lower arms and/or assist link deformed or damaged Trailing arms deformed or damaged Crossmember deformed or damaged Poor ride Excessive tire inflation pressure Malfunction of shock absorber Weakpr broken springs Stabilizer bar and/or stabilizer link deformed or damaged Body tilting Weak or deteriorated bushings Weak or broken springs Upper arms and/or lower arms and/or assist link deformed or damaged Trailing arms deformed or damaged Crossmember deformed or damaged Replace Adjust the pressure Replace Remedy Retrghten Replace
TSB Revision
REAR SUSPENSION <FWD> - Service Adjustment Procedures
34-5
M34FAAH
\
0 camber er ewer arm (L.H.)
,

REAR WHEEL ALIGNMENT INSPECTION
CAMBER Standard value: 0 + 30 To adjust camber, turn the lower arm mounting bolt (crossmember side). NOTE (1) Make the adjustment with the assist link mounting bolt (crossmember side) loosened. (2) The difference between the right and left wheels should be 30 or less. (3) Left wheel: Clockwise (0 camber) Right wheel: Clockwise (0 camber) One graduation changes camber by about 15.
A-L!?. cLrl4
TOE-IN Standard value: 0.5 -+ 2.5 mm (.Ol + .09 in.) To adjust toe, turn the assist link mounting bolts (on crossmember side) on both sides t,he same amount. NOTE (1) The difference between right and left wheels should be 3 mm (.I2 in.) or less. (2) Left wheel: Clockwise (toe-in) Right wheel: Clockwise (toe-out) One graduation changes toe by about 4.8 mm (.19 in.) <equivalent to toe angle 27 on one side>. Caution 1. Adjust the eccentric bolt within 90 from the central position. 2. Adjust camber and toe, in that order, and, if camber is adjusted, be sure to adjust toe also.
12F002E
TSB Revision
34-6
REAR SUSPENSION <FWD> - Service Adiustment Procedures WHEEL BEARING END PLAY INSPECTION
M34FBAG
12NOOOl
1. Inspect the play of the bearings while the vehicle is jacked up and resting on floor jack. 2. Remove the hub cap and then release the parking brake. s& 3. Remove the caliper assembly and the brake disc. 4. Check the bearings end play. Place a dial gauge against the hub surface; then move the hub in the axial direction and check whether or not there is end play. Limit: 0.05 mm (.002 in.) or less NOTE If the limit value is exceeded, the lock nut should be tightened to the specified torque and check the end play again. 5. Replace the rear hub bearing unit if an adjustment cannot be made to within the limit.
REAR HUB ROTARY-SLIDING RESISTANCE (TORM34FCAC QUE) INSPECTION

1. Inspect the play of the bearings while the vehicle is jacked up and resting on floor jack. 2. Release the parking brake. 3. Remove the caliper assembly and the brake disc.
..J
4. After turning the hub a few times to seat the bearing, attach a spring balance to the hub bolt, and, pulling at a 90 angle from the hub bolt, measure to determine whether or not the rotary-sliding resistance of the rear hub (the rotarysliding torque of the rear hub) is the standard value. Limit: Rear hub rotary-sliding resistance 31 N (7 Ibs.) or less Rear hub rotary-sliding torque 1.8 Nm (1.30 ftlbs.) or less NOTE If the limit value is exceeded, the lock nut should be tightened to the specified torque and check the end play again. 5. Replace the rear hub unit bearing if an adjustment cannot be made to within the limit.
TSB Revision
REAR SUSPENSION <FWD> - Rear Suspension Assembly
34-7
M34GA-A
REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY

/
140- 160 Nm* IOI- 116ftlbs.
Removal steps
1. Shock absorber mounting nuts (upper) 2. ECS connector (ECS) 3. Cap 4. Brake line clamp bolt 5. Brake caliper mounting bolt 6. Brake caliper assembly 7. Brake disc 8. Parkina brake cable clamo bolt l * l + 9. ParkinG brake cable end (Refer to GROUP 36 - Parking Brake.) 10. Rear speed sensor clamp bolt (ABS) 11. ABS speed sensor (ABS) 12. Trailing arm mounting bolt and nut *I) 13. Crossmember mounting nut *I) 14. Rear suspension assembly
NOTE *. indicates parts which should be temporarily tightened, and then fully tightened with the vehicle in the unladen condition.
(Refer to GROUP 15 - Exhaust Pipe and
Post-installation Operation l Installation of the Main Muffler (Refer to GROUP 15 - Exhaust Pipe and Main Muffler.) l Check of Wheel Alignment (Refer.to P.34-5.) l Check of Parking Brake Lever Stroke (Refer to GROUP 36 -Service Adjustment Procedures.)
l
Installation of the Absorber Lid to Rear Side Trim

(Refer to GROUP 52A-Trims.) A
12FOllO
M34GBAT
13. REMOVAL OF CROSSMEMBER MOUNTING NUT / 14. REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY

Support the crossmember with a transmission jack, then remove the crossmember mounting nut and rear suspension assembly.
TSB Revision
34-8
REAR SUSPENSION <FWD> - Rear Suspension Assembly INSPECTION

l l
M34GcANl
;d
Check the crossmember for cracks or deformation. Check the bushings for cracks or deterioration.
Press out
Press fit
CROSSMEMBER BUSHING REPLACEMENT
M34GTAF
(1) Using the special tool, remove and press-fit the bushing.
(2) When press-fitting the bushing, apply soapsuds to it and position the arrows as shown.
(3) Make sure that the protrusion (dimension A) of the inner sleeve is up to specification. Standard value: 8.5 - 9.5 mm (.33 - .37 in.)
12N009f
TSB Revision
REAR SUSPENSION <FWD> -
Upper Arm, Lower Arm and Assist Link
34-9
UPPER ARM, LOWER ARM AND ASSIST LINK i

140- 160 Nm* IOl-116ft.lbs. \
M34SA-S
2
75-89Nm /7 Pre-removal
l
54 - 64 ft.lbs.
Operation
Removal of the Shock Absorber (Refer to P.34-13.)
140 - 160 Nm* 101 - 116ft.lbs.*
l l
Check of Wheel Alignment (Refer to P.34-5.) Installation of the Shock Absorber (Refer to P.34-13.)
Upper arm removal steps
a*
1. Brake line clamp bolt 2. Self-locking nut 3. Upper arm mounting bolt and nut 4. Upper arm
Lower arm removal steps

l *
5. Lower arm mounting bolt and nut 6. Self-locking nut 7. Lower arm
Dust
cover
Assist link removal steps
4* NOTE
*:
8. Assist link mounting bolt and nut 9. Self-locking nut 10. Assist link
indicates parts which should be temporarily tightened, and then fully tightened with the vehicle in the unladen condition.
rz4
12R0487

upper arm, lower arm, and assist link.
MSBAB
2. 6. 9. REMOVAL OF SELF-LOCKING NUT Using the special tool, disconnect the knuckle from the
NOTE (1) Do not remove the nut from the ball joint, but just loosen it. (2) Suspend the special tool with a rope to prevent it from dropping.
12A009$ 3
TSB Revision
REAR SUSPENSION <FWD> l l l l
Upper Arm, Lower Arm and Assist Link
INSPECTION
M34SCAB
Check the bushing for wear and deterioration. Check the upper, lower arm or assist link for bend or breakage. d Check the ball joint dust cover for cracks. Check all bolts for condition and straightness.
CHECKING OF BALL JOINT FOR STARTING TORQUE Mount two nuts on the ball .joint, and then measure the ball joint starting torque. Standard value: 2 - 9 Nm (17 - 78 in.lbs.)
BALL JOINT DUST COVER REPLACEMENT
M34SEABl
(1) Remove the dust cover. (2) Apply multipurpose grease to the lip and inside of the dust cover. (3) Drive in the dust cover with special tool until it is fully seated.
12ROl
Removal
ing
LOWER ARM, UPPER ARM, ASSIST LINK BUSHING REPLACEMENT M34SFAB

Use the special tool to remove and press-fit the bushing.
12NOlOl
TSB Revision
REAR SUSPENSION <FWD> - Trailing Arm
34-11
M34TA-A
TRAILING ARM
t
Post-installation
l
Operation
Check of Wheel Alignment Refer to P.34-5.) >heck of Parking Brake Lever Stroke (Refer tn GROIJP 36 - Service Adiustment (Refer to GROUP 35 -Service Adjustment
r/A
90Nm* A 65ft.lbs.* 1 5
50-60Nm
36 - 43 ftlbs.
18
-160Nm* - 116ft.lbs.*
36 - 43 ftlbs.
12FOlll
Removal steps
, i;
1. Brake caliper mounting bolt 2. Brake caliper 3. Brake line clamp bolt 4. Rear brake disc 5. Hubcap 6. Wheel bearing nut 7. Hub assembly 8. Parking brake cable clamp bolt *I) I)* 9. Parking brake cable end (Refer to GROUP 36 - Parking Brake.) IO. Rear speed sensor clamp bolt (ABS) 11. ABS speed sensor (ABS)
1 TSB Revision
12. Backing plate I)+ 13. Stabilizer link mounting nut l I) 14. Self-locking nut 15. Shock absorber mounting bolt (upper) l * 16. Self-locking nut l * 17. Self-locking nut 18. Trailing arm mounting bolt and nut 19. Trailing arm assembly
NOTE *: indicates parts which should be temporarily tightened, and then fully tightened with the vehicle in the unladen condition.
34-12
REAR SUSPENSION <FWD> - Trailina Arm SERVICE POINTS OF REMOVAL

M34TBAB
14.16. 17. REMOVAL OF SELF-LOCKING NUT Using the special tool, remove the knuckle from the lower, arm, upper arm, and assist link. NOTE (1) Do not remove the nut from the ball joint, but just loosen it. (2) Suspend the special tool with a rope to prevent it from dropping.
I
Pressure fitting Removal
12A009E
INSPECTION
l l
M34TCABl
Check trailing arm for cracks and deformation. Check bushing for cracks, deterioration and wear.
M34TEABl
TRAILING ARM BUSHING REPLACEMENT
MB991 389
12N009t
M34lDAA
_ Hold with wrench
13. INSTALLATION OF STABILIZER LINK MOUNTING NUT Holding the stabilizer link with a wrench, tighten the self-locking nut so that the protrusion of the stabilizer link (dimension A indicated in illustration) is within the standard , value. Standard value: 5 - 7 mm (.197 - .276 in.)
A
12AOlOC
1 TSB Revision
REAR SUSPENSION <FWD> - Shock Absorber Assembly
SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY
M34NA-A

45 Nm 33 ft.lbs.
Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation l Removal and Installation of the Rear Side Trim
Removal steps
1. Shock absorber upper mounting nut 2. ECS connector (ECS) 3. Cap 4. Brake line clamp bolt 5. Shock absorber lower mounting bolt 6. Shock absorber
NOTE *: indicates parts which should be temporarily tightened, and then fully tightened with the vehicle in the unladen condition.
12FOO87
M34GMA
20-25 Nm
Disassembly steps
l
3 4 7 5 6 8 10
*l a
1, Piston rod tiahtenina nut 2. Washer d u 3. Upper bushing (A) ** 4. Bracket assembly 5. Upper spring pad 6. Upper bushing (B) 7. Collar 8. Cup assembly 9. Dust cover 10. Bump rubber +* 11. Coil spring 12. Shock absorber
1280325:
TSB Revision
34-14
REAR SUSPENSION <FWD> - Shock Absorber Assemblv SERVICE POINT OF DISASSEMBLY

M34GNAB
1. REMOVAL OF PISTON ROD TIGHTENING NUT (1) Before removing the piston rod tightening nut, cornd press the coil spring using the special tool.
12K(u9
(2) While holding the piston rod, remove the piston rod tightening nut.
INSPECTION
l l
M34GOACl
Check the rubber parts for damage. Check the coil springs for crack, damage or deterioration.
M34GPAC
11. INSTALLATION OF COIL SPRING (1) Use the special tool (MB990987-01) to compress the coil spring and insert it in the shock absorber. (2) Align the edge of the coil spring to the position of the shock absorber spring seat as shown.
Coil seat
12A0049
4. INSTALLATION OF BRACKET ASSEMBLY / 1. PISTON ROD TIGHTENING NUT (1) With the position of the bracket assembly as shown in the figure, tighten the tightening nut to the specified torque. (2) Install the coil spring so that the lower edge fits into the spring seat groove and the upper edge fits into the spring pad groove, then remove the special tool (MB990987-01). L/i
TSB Revision
Stabilizer Bar
34-15 M341A.A
STABILIZER BAR
/ REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal steps 1. Stabilizer bracket mounting bolt l * 2. Stabilizer bar bracket 3. Bushing l * 4. Self-locking nut 5. Joint cup (A) 6. Stabilizer rubber 7. Joint cup (B) l * 8. Self-locking nut l * 9. Stabilizer link 10. Joint cup (A) 11. Stabilizer rubber 12. Stabilizer bar
:(I t
Z -5
@+-----4
l?FOlOO
INSPECTION
l l l l
MWBACl
the bushing the stabilizer the stabilizer all bolts for
for wear and deterioration. bar for deterioration or damage. link ball joint dust cover for cracks. condition and straightness.
, id
1210241
CHECKING OF STABILIZER LINK BALL JOINT FOR STARTING TORQUE Mount two nuts on the ball joint, and then measure the ball joint starting torque. Standard value: 1.7 - 3.2 Nm (15 - 28 in.lbs.1 I TSB Revision
34-16
Stabilizer Bar
MWEAA

(1) Remove the clip ring and the dust cover.
CGrina
fi
(2) Apply multipurpose grease to the lip and inside of the dust cover.
Multipurpose grease
12LO21
(3) Use vinyl tape to tape the stabilizer link where shown in the illustration, and then install the dust cover to the stabilizer link. (4) Secure the dust cover by the clip ring.
12LO24:

Hold with wrench
M341CAE
9 . I N S T A L L A T I O N O F S T A B I L I Z E R L I N K / 8. SELFLOCKING NUT / 4. SELF-LOCKING NUT (I) Hold the stabilizer link ball studs with a wrench and install the self-locking nut (A). (2) Holding the stabilizer link with a wrench, tighten the self-locking nut (B) so that the protrusion of the stabilizer link is within the standard value. Standard value: 5 - 7 mm (197 - .276 in.)
2. INSTALLATION OF STABILIZER BAR BRACKET (1) Align the bushing (L.H.) with the stabilizer bar marking end and temporarily tighten the stabilizer bar bracket (L.H.). (2) In this condition, mount the stabilizer bar bracket (R.H.) and temporarily tighten it. (3) Temporarily fix the both ends of the stabilizer bar to the link and tighten the stabilizer bar bracket mounting bolts to specification. \ 1 TSB Revision I
Rear Axle Hub
34-17
REAR AXLE HUB

50-60Nm 36 - 43 ftlbs.
Removal steps *I) I, Rear speed sensor <Vehicles with ABS>

a*
l +
*I)
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Caliper assembly Brake disc Hubcap Wheel bearing nut Tongued washer Rear hub assembly Rear rotor <Vehicles with ABS> Rear hub unit bearing Caution Rear hub unit bearing cannot be disassembled.
llN0018
M34MBAC
1. REMOVAL OF REAR SPEED SENSOR <VEHICLES WITH ABS> Caution Be careful when handling the pole piece at the tip of the speed sensor and the toothed edge of the rotor so as not to damage them by striking against other parts. 2. REMOVAL OF CALIPER ASSEMBLY
14NOlO
Remove the caliper assembly and suspend it with a piece of wire.
8. REMOVAL OF REAR ROTOR <VEHICLES WITH ABS> Caution Care must be taken not to scratch or scar the rotors toothed surface, and not to drop it. If the rotors toothed surface is chipped or the rotor is deformed, it might not be able to accurately sense the wheel rotation speed and the system as a result might not perform normally.
14N009E
TSB Revision
34-18
REAR SUSPENSION <FWD>
- Rear Axle Hub

M34MDAG

5. INSTALLATION OF WHEEL BEARING NUT
After tightening the wheel bearing nut, align with the spindles indentation and crimp.
Spindle
\a
14NOOOt
1 TSB Revision
REAR SUSPENSION <AWD> - Specifications
34-19
M34CA-B
SPECIFICATIONS <AWD>
Items Suspension system Coil spring Wire dia. x O.D. x free length mm (in.) 12.2x105x379.3(.48x4.13x14.93) Blue x 2 28.0 2 1.4 (I 57 -t 8) Coil spring identification color N/mm (Ibs./in.) Spring constant Shock absorber Type Max. length Min. length Stroke Hydraulic, cylindrical, double-acting type mm (in.) mm (in.) 610 2 3 (24.0 f .I) 407 f 3 (16.0 2 .I) 203 (8.0) Hard: 1,800 + 250 (397 +- 55) Medium: 1,200 rtr 170 (265 t 37) Soft: 550 f 90(121 + 20) Contraction N (Ibs.) Hard: 950? 140 (209 t 31) Medium: 850 2 130 (187 + 29) Soft: 650 f 100 (143 2 22) Specifications Double wishbone suspension type
mm (in.) N (Ibs.)
Damping force [at 0.3 misec. (0.9 ft./set.)] Expansion
Items Standard value Toe-in mm (in.) Camber mm (in.) Protruding length of stabilizer bar mounting bolt Nm (in.lbs.) Nm (inlbs.) Stabilizer link ball joint starting torque Lower arm ball joint starting torque Crossmember support bushing projection Upper part Lower part Differential support bushing projection mm (in.) mm (in.) 15.5 (.59) 2.1-3.7(.08-.15) 6.7-7.3 (.26-.29) Specifications
M34CB-B
0.5 k 2.5(.01 f .09) -0lO Ifr 30' 5 - 7 (.197-,276) 2.0-9.0(17 - 78) 1.7-3.2(15-28)
TSB Revision
34-20 SPECIAL TOOLS
REAR SUSPENSION <AWD> - Special Tools,.

M34DA.B
remover an
MB990241-01
TSB Revision
REAR SUSPENSION <AWD> - Special Tools
34-21
I id
TSB Revision
34-22
REAR SUSPENSION <AWD> - Troubleshooting

M34EA-B
TROUBLESHOOTING
Trailing arms deformed or damaged Crossmember deformed or damaged
TSB Revision
REAR SUSPENSION <AWD> - Service Adjustment Procedures
34-23

REAR WHEEL ALIGNMENT INSPECTION
CAMBER Standard value: -0lO + 30 To adjust camber, turn the lower arm mounting bolt on the crossmember side. NOTE Left wheel: Clockwise (0 camber) Right wheel: Clockwise (0 camber) The difference between the right and left wheels shoiuld be 30 or less. One graduation changes camber by about 12.
M34FDAC
12FOO21
TOE-IN Standard value: 0.5 -t 2.5 mm (.Ol + .09 in.) To adjust toe, turn the trailing arm mounting bolts on the crossmember side on both sides the same amount. NOTE Left wheel: Clockwise (toe-in) Right wheel: Clockwise (toe-out) The difference between right and left wheels should be 3 mm (.12 in.) or less. One graduation changes toe by about 2 mm (.08 in.). Caution 1. Adjust the eccentric cam bolt within 90 from the central position. 2. Adjust camber and toe, in that order, and, if camber is adjusted, be sure to adjust toe also. 3. For the vehicles with 4WS, make the adjustments with the 4WS tie rod end disconnected from the trailing arm.
\ \
Trailing arm (L.H.)
12A0083
17FllO75
TSB Revision
34-24
REAR SUSPENSION <AWD> - Rear Suspension Assembly

M34GA-B
REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY

45 Nm 1 - 33 ftlbs.
9 Rel 1. Shock absorber mounting nuts (upper)* 2. ECS connector <ECS>*
l l
Removal of the Rear Side Trim Absorber Lid (RefertoGROUP52A-Trims.) Removal of the Center Exhaust Pipe and Main Muffler (Refer to GROUP 15 - Exhaust Pipe and Main Muffler.)
5. Brake caliper*
1 ,
50-60Nm 36 - 43 ft.lbs.
35 Nm
$8 Nm
wez I,..=.
?C,ILc.
ash BP----12Nm 9 ftlbs.
15
8. Pressure tube assembly to pipe assembly connection <4WS> 9. Feed pipe assembly to suction hose connection <4WS>
..e
12FO108
10. Return pipe assembly to rubber hose connection t4WS> 11. Power cylinder tie rod coupling nut <4WS>* 12. Differential carrier to propeller shaft coupling bolt and nut 13. Center bearing mounting nut 14. Harness connector connection CABS>* 15. Parking brake cable and ABS sensor fixing bolt <ABS>* 16. Cable band* 17. Crossmember bracket* 18. Crossmember mounting nut (on differential side) 19. Rear suspension assembly
NOTE
l l l
installation of the Center Exhaust Pipe and Main Muffler (Refer to GROUP 15 - Exhaust Pioe and Main Muffler.) Installation of the Rear Side Trim Absorber Lid (Refer to GROUP 52A-Trims.) Refilling and Bleeding of the Power Steering System (Refer to GROUP 37A- Service Adjustment
Procedures.)
l l
Checking Wheel Alignment (Refer to P.34-23.) Bleeding of 4WS System (Refer to GROUP 37B - Service Adjustment Procedures.) Operation Inspection of the 4WS System
(Refer to GROUP 37B - Service Adiustment

Procedures.) ,* Checking the Parking Brake Lever Stroke (Refer to GROUP 36 -Service Adjustment
Parts marked with * are symmetrical.

L
Procedures.)
i
I
1 TSB Revision
REAR SUSPENSION <AWD>
- Rear Suspension Assembly
34-25
M34GBAU
17. REMOVAL OF CROSSMEMBER BRACKET / 18. CROSSMEMBER MOUNTING NUT (ON DIFFERENTIAL SIDE) / 19. REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY (1) Before removing the crossmember bracket, support the differential case with the transmission jack. (2) Remove the crossmember mounting bolt and nut.
12AOlOE
NOTE Lowering the rear suspension assembly down from the transmission jack requires three persons, as the rear suspension assembly is very heavy. (Assign one person to the differential and one each to the left and right lower arm.) (3) Apply a wood block to the ball joint of the lower arm to prevent the dust shield from being deformed.
Dust shield
12A022i
Press out
MB991 387
INSPECTION
l l
M34GCAN2
Check the crossmember for cracks or deformation. Check the bushings for cracks or deterioration.
CROSSMEMBER SUPPORT BUSHING (FRONT) M34GTAG REPLACEMENT

MB991 388
(1) Using the special tool, remove and press-fit the crossmember support bushing.
12N008E
Press-fit
MB991 387
MB990890
12N008f
(2) When press-fitting the bushing, make sure that the hollow portions are positioned as shown. NOTE Ensure that the shift in rotating direction is within + 5.
1 TSB Revision
34-26
REAR SUSPENSION <AWD> -
Rear Suspension, Assembly
(3) Make sure that the protrusion of the inner sleeve (dimension A and B) are up to specifications. Standard value Dimension A: 15.5 mm (.59 in.) Dimension B: 2.1 - 3.7 mm (.08 - .15 in.) d
I
I Press out
12FOO7C
MB990958-01
CROSSMEMBER BUSHING (REAR) REPLACEM34GTAH MENT

(1) Using the special tool, remove and press-fit the bushing.
12N008
M B990958-01
(2) When press-fitting, position the bushing as shown. NOTE Ensure that the shift in rotating direction is within t- 5.
12F007E
(3) Make sure that the protrusion of the inner sleeve (dimension A) is up to specification. Standard value: 6.7 - 7.3 mm (.26 - .29 in.)
12FOO791
TSB Revision
Upper and Lower Arm
34-27
M34SA-B
UPPER AND LOWER ARM

4sl
Dust cover
/ l $e;k pd ri;;k0ignrnent 1 A
140- 160 Nm IOI- 116ft.lbs.
12R0487
Upper arm removal steps *I) 1. Self-locking nut 2. Upper arm mounting nut 3. Upper arm mounting.bolt 4. Upper arm Lower arm removal steps
80
/ L
5. Lower arm mounting nut 6. Lower arm mounting bolt Stabilizer link to lower arm ;: Self-locking nut 9. Lower arm
NOTE For tightening points marked with *, first temporarily tighten and then ground the vehicle to torque to specification where the vehicle is empty.
140- 160 Nm* IOI- 116ftlbs.*
/3

1. REMOVAL OF SELF-LOCKING NUT
M34SBAC
Using the special tool, disconnect the upper arm ball joint from the knuckle. NOTE (1) Do not remove the nut from the ball joint, but just loosen it. (2) Suspend the special tool with a rope to prevent it from dropping.
8. REMOVAL OF SELF-LOCKING NUT Lower down the lower arm on the crossmember side. Then, install the special tool and disconnect the lower arm ball joint from the knuckle. NOTE (1) Do not remove the nut from the ball joint, but just loosen it. (2) Suspend the special tool with a rope to prevent it from dropping.
12A0091
TSB Revision
34-28
REAR SUSPENSION <AWD> INSPECTION

l l l l
Upper and Lower Arm

M34SCAC
the bushing for wear and deterioration. the upper arm or lower arm for bend or breakage. the ball joint dust cover for cracks. all bolts for condition and straightness.
CHECKING OF BALL JOINT FOR STARTING TORQUE Mount two nuts on the ball joint, and then measure the ball joint starting torque. Standard value: 2 - 9 Nm (17 - 78 in.lbs.)
12uoo1I3

B990800-01
M34SEAS2
Dust cover
(1) Remove the dust cover. (2) Apply multipurpose grease to the lip and inside of the dust cover. (3) Drive in the dust cover with special tool until it is fully seated. Ij
Snap ring
17R019
Removal
MB991 072
LOWER ARM BUSHING REPLACEMENT
M34SFAC
(1) Use the special tool to remove and press-fit the bushing.
MB991 073
12NOlOl
Press-fit
MB991 072
MB991 073
12NOlOC1
TSB Revwon
- Upper and Lower Arm
34-29
(2) Press-fit the lower arm bushing until the bushing outer pipe edge flush with the lower arm pipe edge.
Pipe. (lower arm)
tluter pipe (bushing)
12A00353
M34SDAB
7. INSTALLATION OF STABILIZER LINK TO LOWER ARM COUPLING NUT Holding the stabilizer link with a wrench, tighten the self-locking nut so that the protrusion of thG stabilizer link (dimension A indicated in illustration) is within the standard value. Standard value: 5 - 7 mm (.197 - .276 in.)
12AOlOC
I c
1 TSB Revision
34-30 TRAILING ARM
REAR SUSPENSION <AWD> - Trailing Arm

M34TA-B 1
N/A $icJ 14 ft.lbs. T/C vehicles 26-30Nm 19 - 22 ft.lbs. 50-60Nm 36 - 43 ftlbs.
9
\
100 Nm 72 ft.lbs.
55-65Nm 40 - 47 ft.lbs.
200 - 240 Nm* 145- 174ft.lbs.*
il
58 Nm 42 ft.lbs.
<8
12FOO89
Removal steps 1. Rear brake caliper assembly 2. Rear brake disc 3. Drive shaft to companion flange mounting bolt and nut *I) 4. Self-locking nut 5. Companion flange *I) 6. Rear axle shaft 7. Parking brake cable end 8. Parking brake cable clamp bolt 9. Rear speed sensor (ABS) IO. Rear speed sensor cable and parking brake cable bands (ABS) II. Dust shield +* 12. Self-locking nut (upper arm) +* 13. Self-locking nut (lower arm) 14. Tie rod end mounting nut 15. Trailing arm mounting bolt and nut 16. Rear shock absorber mounting bolt 17. Trailing arm NOTE For tightening points marked with *, first temporarily tighten and then ground the vehicle to torque to specification where the vehicle is empty.
Post-installation Operation l Check of Wheel Alignment (Refer to P.34-23) l Check of Parking Brake Lever Stroke (Refer to GROUP 36 - Service Adiustment
TSB Revision
Trailing Arm
34-31
M34TBAC

With the special tool, secure the rear axle shaft, then remove the self-locking nut.
6. REMOVAL OF REAR AXLE SHAFT With the special tool, remove the rear axle shaft
MB990241-01 MB990211-01 12AO612
12. REMOVAL OF SELF-LOCKING NUT (UPPER ARM) / 13. SELF-LOCKING NUT (LOWER ARM) Using the special tool, disconnect the ball joint from the knuckle. NOTE (1) Do not remove the nut from the ball joint, but just loosen it. (2) Suspend the special tool with a rope to prevent it from dropping.
Pressure fitting
Removal
INSPECTION
l l
M34TCAB2
Check trailing arm for cracks and deformation. Check bushing for cracks, deterioration and wear.
M34TEAE2
TRAILING ARM BUSHING REPLACEMENT
12A030!
CONNECTING ROD REPLACEMENT

(1) Remove the trailing arm bushing. (2) Remove the bolt and nut.
M34TFAB
Replace the connecting rod using the following procedure:
Trading arm bushing
12A029
TSB Revision
34-32
REAR SUSPENSION <AWD> - Trailing Arm

Bolt B
(3) Set the special tool onto the trailing arm as shown in the illustration. FPdpply lubricant to the sliding portion of the special tool (at the arrow marked A in the illustration). (2) Install bolt B to the trailing arm, at the point shown in the figure. (4) Use a spanner, etc., to turn the portion marked C in the illustration to remove the connecting rod.
12A0'291
BOUY
Guide shaft , center lme
(5) installation of the body (special tool) should be performed with the screw shaft and guide shaft center lines oriented as shown in the illustration.
M B 9 9 1 2 5 4 ,,+.s
(6) Apdply soapy water to the rubber portion of the connecting (7) Reverse the removal procedures to press-fit.
(8) Remove the special tool after aligning the holes in the special tool and trailing arm. (9) Tighten the bolts and nuts to the specified torque. Tightening torque : 98 Nm (71 ftlbs.) (IO)Press-fit the trailing arm bushing. (Refer to P.34-31.)
\ L VA02971
TSB Revision
REAR SUSPENSION <AWD> - Shock Absorber Assembly
34-33
M34NA-6
SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY
L
,
1 v i5 KS
2 3
Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation l Removal and Installation of the Rear Side Trim Absorber Lid (Refer to GROUP 52A-Trims.)
Removal steps
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Shock absorber upper mounting nut ECS connector (ECS) Cap Shock absorber lower mounting bolt Shock absorber assembly
12FOO86

20-25 Nm 14- 18ft.lbs.
M34GM-B
Disassembly steps
1. Cap 2. Piston rod tightening nut (Refer to P.34-14.) 3. hasher 4. Upper bushing (A) 5. Bracket assembly (Refer to P.34-14.) 6. Spring pad 7. Upper bushing (B) 8. Collar 9. Cup assembly 10. Dust cover 11. Bump rubber 12. Coil spring (Refer to P.34-14.) 13. Shock absorber
12A0360
INSPECTION
l l
M34GOAC2
Check the rubber parts for damage. Check the coil springs for crack, damage or deterioration.
TSB Revision
34-34
REAR SUSPENSION <AWD> - Stabilizer Bar

M341A.B
STABILIZER BAR
100 Nm 72 ft.lbs. 42 Nm 30 ft.lbs. _ 4
Nm .Ibs.
IIO-130Nm 80 - 94 ftlbs. 70-85 Nm 51- 61 ftlbs.
Removal steps
l * l a
1. Self-locking nut* 2. Self-locking nut* 3. Joint cup A* 4. Stabilizer rubber* 5. Joint cup B I)* 6. Stabilizer link* 7. Joint cup A* 8. Stabilizer rubber* 9. Tie rod end mounting nut* IO. Parking brake cable bracket mounting bolt 11. 4WS prping fixing bolt <4WS> 12. Rear shock absorber mounting bolt 13. Power cylinder mounting bolt <4WS> 14. Crossmember bracket* 15. Crossmember mounting nut* 16. Stabilizer bracket* 17. Bushing* 18. Stabilizer bar NOTE Parts marked with * are symmetrical
12L0217
12A0113
TSB Revision
- Stabilizer Bar
34-35
M34lDAC
14. REMOVAL OF CROSSMEMBER BRACKET / 15. CROSSMEMBER MOUNTING NUT (1) Support the rear suspension assembly with the transmission jack. (2) Remove the crossmember bracket and crossmember mounting nut.
---hIlll~~II --;:- L IT ; -7 ,.GLZ, . ? il , . . / ,E! /. ,:

\
18. REMOVAL OF STABILIZER BAR (1) Lower the transmission jack a little to obtain a gap between the rear suspension and body. (2) Remove the stabilizer bar.
12AOll'
INSPECTION
l l l l
M341BACZ
the bushing for wear the stabilizer bar for the stabilizer link ball all bolts for condition
and deterioration. deterioration or damage. joint dust cover for cracks. and straightness.
CHECKING OF STABILIZER LINK BALL JOINT FOR STARTING TORQUE Mount two nuts on the ball joint, and then measure the ball joint starting torque. Standard value: 1.7 - 3.2 Nm (15 - 28 in.lbs.)

(1) Remove the clip ring and the dust cover.
M34lEBA
Clip r&g
h
12LO24'
TSB Revision
34-36
Stabilizer Bar
(2) Apply multipurpose grease to the lip and inside of the dust cover.
12LO217
TaDe here
(3) Wind tape around the threads of the stabilizer link stud and install the dust cover. (4) Secure the dust cover with the clip ring. At this time, make sure that the clip ring ends are located at a point 90 f 20 with reference to the link axis.
Clip ring ends (Could be 180 opposite end)
12PO25;
M34lCAF
6 . I N S T A L L A T I O N O F S T A B I L I Z E R L I N K / 2. SELFLOCKING NUT / 1. SELF-LOCKING NUT (1) Secure the stabilizer link ball stud with a wrench and mount the self-locking nut.
lZAOll0
(2) Hold the stabilizer link with a wrench so that its protrusion on the lower arm side (dimension A) is up to specification, then mount the self-locking nut. Standard value: 5 - 7 mm (.197 - .276 in.)
12AOlOC
1 TSB Revision
L,
SERVICE BRAKES
CONTENTS
ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING 7
Actuator Test Function . . . . ..___..._____.__................................ I 2, 36 Check Using Self Diagnosis Function __._.....,_._.._____........ 11, 28 Diagnosis Code Chart ..,,........,......_..................................,. 1 I, 28 7 How to Use the Troubleshooting Flow Chart _____.___......._._. Method of Clearing Diagnosis Code Memory ._.,._...... 12, 30 7 Particular Phenomena of the Anti-lock Braking System Troubleshooting (ABS-AWD) ._______._.._...........................,... 26 8 Troubleshooting (ABS-FWD) ______.._._........_...........,.....,.....,.... Troubleshooting Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
M35AA..
BRAKE LINE . . . . . . .._....................................................................... 71 BRAKE PEDAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 / L ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT (ABS) . . . . .._._..___..__._............ 93 FRONT DISC BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 G SENSOR (AWD-ABS) ____.____.___.__._._.................,,......,.....,.... 92 HYDRAULIC UNIT (ABS) .___.._._._._.______.............,...,,..........~ .,_____ 86 MASTER CYLINDER AND BRAKE BOOSTER ..__.._____.._____ REAR DISC BRAKE . . . . . . .._..._._.___................................................ SERVICE ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES ..___........
Bleeding Brake Booster Operating Inspection . Brake Drum Inside Diameter Check . . Brake Fluid Level Sensor Check . Brake Lining and Brake Drum Connection Check
Brake Linrng Thickness Check ............................................ Brake Pedal Inspection and Adjustment ............................ Check Valve Operation Check ............................................ Front Brake Disc Run-out Check ........................................ Front Brake Disc Run-out Correction ................................ Front Disc Brake Pad Check and Replacement ................ Inspection of Front Brake Disc Thickness ........................ Inspection of Hydraulic Unit ................................................ Inspectton of Power Relay .................................................... Inspection of Valve Relay and Motor Relay (ABS) ............ Measurement of Wheel Speed Sensor Output Voltage Proportioning Valve Function Test .................................... Rear Brake Disc Run-out Check ........................................ Rear Brake Disc Run-out Correction ................................ Rear Brake Disc Thickness Check .................................... Rear Disc Brake Pad Check and Replacement ................ Remedy in Case of Discharged Battery ............................
56 45 46 52 53 48 52 58 62 62 57 47 55 55 55 53 62
SPECIAL TOOLS ..__.......___.......................................................... SPECIFICATIONS ._....._.___.....................................

General Specifications ........................................................ Lubricants ............................................................................ Sealants and Adhesives ........................................................ Service Specifications ........................................................
67 81 45
48 46 . 56 46 56
TROUBLESHOOTING
............................................................
5 88
WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (ABS) ............................................
35-2 SPECIFICATIONS
SERVICE BRAKES - Specifications
rvKwx.- FWD AWD
Items Master cylinder Type I.D. mm (in.) Brake booster Type Effective dia. of power cylinder Boosting ratio [Brake pedal depressing force] Proportioning valve Split point MPa (psi) Decompression ratio Front brakes Type Disc effective dia. Disc thickness Pad thickness mm (in.) Floating caliper, 2-piston, ventilated disc (M-R57W) 227 (9.0) 24 (.94) 16 (.63)
42.8(1"/16)X2
Tandem type (with level sensor) 25.4 (1) or 26.9 (1 %s)*
Tandem type (with level sensor) 26.9 (1

'/l6)
mm (in.)
Vacuum type, tandem 180 (7.0) + 205 (8.0) or 203 (8.0) + 230 (9.0) 6.0 [at 247 N (54 Ibs.)] or 7.0 [at 261 N (58 Ibs.)]
Vacuum type, tandem 203 (8.0) + 230 (9.0) 7.0 [at 261 N (58 Ibs.)]
3.75 - 4.25 (533 - 604) 0.37
3.75 - 4.25 (533 - 604) 0.37
Rigid caliper, 4-piston, ventilated disc (M-R66Z) 249 (9.8) 30 (1.18) 15 l.59)
40.4(1'g/32)x2 +42.8(1"/16)~2
mm (in.) mm (in.) mm (in.)
Wheel cylinder I.D. Clearance adjustment Rear brakes Type Disc effective dia. Disc thickness Pad thickness
Automatic
Automatic
Floating caliper, l-piston, ventilated disc (M-R45V) mm (in.) mm (in.) mm (in.) mm (in.) 228 (9.0) 18 (.71) 15.5 (.61) 34.9 (13/8) Automatic
Floating caliper, 1 -piston, ventilated disc (M-R58V) 237 (9.4) 20 (.79) 15.5 (.61) 38.1 (1%) Automatic
Wheel cylinder I.D.
Clearance adjustment Rotor teeth Front wheel side Rear wheel side Speed sensor NOTE *:ABS
47 47 Magnet coil type
47 47 Magnet coil type
TSB Revision
SERVICE BRAKES - Specifications SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS
3ms andard value Brake pedal height Brake pedal free play mm (in.) mm (in.)
FWD
AWD
177 - 182 (7.0 - 7.2) 3-8(.1 -.3) 80 (3.1) or more 10.0 (.39) 24.0 t.94) 18.0 (71) 3.75 - 4.25 (533 - 604) 5.23 - 5.73 (744 - 815) f8.0 (I, 138)]
177 - 182 (7.0 - 7.2) 3-8(.1 -.3) 80 (3.1) or more 10.0 (.39) 30.0 (1.18) 20.0 (.79) 3.75 - 4.25 (533 - 604) 5.23 - 5.73 (744- 815) 18.0 (1,138)]
Brake pedal to floorboard clearance mm (in.) Pad thickness mm (in.) mm (in.) Front disc thickness Rear disc thickness
mm (in.) Proportioning valve pressure MPa (psi) Split point Output pressure [input pressure] Booster push;; (To,,;?aster cylinder piston clearance 7 + 8 inch brake booster 8 + 9 inch brake booster Disc brake drag force (tangential force of wheel mounting bolts) N (Ibs.) [Disc brake dragging torque Front Rear Rear speed sensor pole piece-to-rotor tooth surface clearance mm (in.) Clearance between the spmefm;l[yle piece and the toothed rotor Front Rear nit Left/right proportioning valve output pressure difference MPa (psi) mm (in.) Front disc run-out Pad thickness mm (in.) mm (in.) mm (in.) mm (in.) mm (in.) mm (in.) Front disc thickness Front hub end play Rear disc thickness Rear disc run-out Rear hub end play [Nm (ft.lbs.)] kQ Speed sensors (ABS) internal resistance
0.55 - 0.75 (.022 - ,030) 0.65 - 0.85 (.026 - ,033) 70 (15.4) or less [4 (3) or less] 1.4-2.2 1.3-2.1 -
0.65 - 0.85 (026 - ,033) 70 (15.4) or less [4 (3) or less] 0.8 - 1.2 0.8- 1.2 28.15-28.45(1.11 -1.12)
0.3 - 0.9 (.012 - ,035) 0.2 - 0.7 (008 - .028)
0.4 (57) 0.1 (.004) or less 2.0 (08) 22.4 (.88) 0.05 (.002) 16.4 (65) 0.08 (0031) or less 0.05 (002)
0.4 (57) 0.1 (.004) or less 2.0 (08) 28.4 (1.12) 0.05 (.002) 18.4 (.72) 0.08 (.0031) or less 0.8 (.031)
TSB Revision
35-4
LUBRICANTS
Items Brake fluid
SERVICE BRAKES - Specifications / Special Tools M3!3xh~

Specified lubricant Conforming to DOT3 Brake grease SAE J310, NLGI No.1 Repair kit grease d
Inside of shim A and shim B, or inside of inner shim A, inner shim B, and outer shim Guide pin and lock pin sliding part Piston boot inner surface Pin boot inner surface

Items Thread part fitting Specified sealant 3M ATD Part No.8663 or equivalent
M3S.X..
SPECIAL TOOLS
M35DA-
MB991 359
MB991 377
Adapter harness
TSB Revision
SERVICE BRAKES - Special Tools / Troubleshooting
TROUBLESHOOTING
Symptom Vehicle pulls to one side when brakes are applied Probable cause Grease or oil on pad or lining surface Inadequate contact of pad Auto adjuster malfunction Insufficient braking power Low or deteriorated brake fluid Air in brakesystem Overheated brake rotor due to dragging of pad Grease or oil on pad surface Inadequate contact of pad Brake booster malfunction Auto adjuster malfunction Clogged brake line Proportioning valve malfunction Increased pedal stroke (Reduced pedal to floorboard clearance) Air in brake system Worn pad Broken vacuum hose Brake fluid leaks Excessive push rod to master cylinder clearance Faulty master cylinder Brake drag Worn brake pedal return spring Insufficient push rod to master cylinder clearance Defective master cylinder piston return spring Clogged master cylinder return port Remedy Replace Correct Adjust Add or refill Bleed air Correct Replace Correct Correct Adjust Correct Replace Bleed air Replace Replace Correct Adjust Replace Replace Adjust Replace Correct
MJSEAAS
TSB Revision
35-6
Symptom Insufficient parking brake function
SERVICE BRAKES - Troubleshooting

Probable cause Worn brake pad Excessive parking brake lever stroke Remedy Replace Adjust the parking brake lever stroke or check the parking brake cable routing Replace Replace Replace Replace Correct or replace Correct or replace Replace Correct or replace Correct or replace Clean or deburr Clean or replace Adjust Lubricate or replace Retighten Correct Correct Replace Adjust Remove stones, etc. Retighten Replace Retighten Adjust
Grease or oil on pad surface Parking brake cable sticking Stuck caliper piston Scraping or grinding noise when brakes are applied Worn brake pad Caliper to wheel interference Cracked brake disc Squealing, groaning or chattering noise when brakes are applied Disc brakes - missing or damaged brake pad anti-squeak shim Brake discs and pads worn or scored Improper lining parts Disc brakes-burred or rusted calipers Dirty, greased, contaminated or glazed pad Incorrect adjustment of brake pedal or booster push-rod Squealing noise when brakes are not applied Disc brakes - rusted, stuck Loose or extra parts in brakes Improper positioning of pads in caliper Improper installation of support mounting to caliper body Poor return of brake booster or master cylinder Incorrect adjustment of brake pedal or booster push-rod Groaning, clicking or rattling noise when brakes are not applied Stones or foreign material trapped inside wheel covers Loose wheel nuts Disc brakes-failure of shim Disc brakes - loose installation bolt Incorrect adjustment of brake pedal or booster push-rod
TSB Revision
SERVICE BRAKES -
Anti-lock Braking System Troubleshooting
35-7
ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTlilG

L PARTICULAR PHENOMENA OF THE ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM
Models equipped with the anti-lock braking system (ABS) may exhibit one or more of the following phenomena from time to time, but none of these are abnormal. (1) A pulsing feeling in the brake pedal, or vibration of the body or the steering wheel, when the anti-lock braking system is activated by sudden braking or by braking on a slippery road surface. .9ctually, this phenomenon is an indication that the anti-lock braking system is functioning normally. (2) When the vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 km/h (4 mph) after the engine is started and the vehicle starts off (for the first time), a whining motor noise may be heard from the engine compartment if the vehicle is traveling in a quiet place, but this noise is simply the result of a self-check being made of the anti-lock braking system operation. For problems in the electrical system, the selfdiagnosis function is built into the electronic control unit (E.C.U.) causing the ABS warning light to illuminate as a warning to the driver. In this instance, checks can be made by using the multi-use tester and oscilloscope. Problems in the hydraulic system (poor braking, etc.) can be located in the same way as for ordinary brakes. There is, however, the necessity to check to determine whether the problem is related to ordinary brake components or to the components related to the ABS. To make this check, use the multi-use tester.
HOW TO USE THE TROUBLESHOOTING FLOW CHART

(1) Using the flow chart, check the ABS warning light light-up sequence. Read the diagnosis codes and check the condition of braking operation. (2) Following the check chart listed in the remedy column, perform the checks. There are [Explanation] and [Hint] in each check chart. Refer to them when troubleshooting. NOTE ECU: Electronic control unit HU: Hydraulic unit MUT: Multi-use tester
TROUBLESHOOTING METHODS
Problems related to the anti-lock braking system (ABS) can be classified into two general categories: problems in the electrical system and those in the hydraulic system. L
1 TSB Revision
35-8
SERVICE BRAKES -
TROUBLESHOOTING (ABS - FWD)

Confirm condition in the following way and diagnosis accordingly. Does the ABS warning light illuminate as described below up to the time the engine starts? (1) When the ignition key is turned to the ON position, the ABS ECU causes the ABS warning light to flash twice in about one second (during which the valve relay self check is made) and then causes it to go out.
-
(2) With the ignition key in the START position, power to the ABS ECU is interrupted and the ABS warning light remains lit because the valve relay is OFF. (3) When the ignition key is returned from the START position to the ON position, the ABS warning light flashes twice in about one second (during which. the valve relay self check is made again) and then goes out.
A B S w a r n i n g ON light -
I I I
key ACC, LO!: +-14A0589
Yes
>
CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE No
ween ABS warning
1 TSB Revision
SERVICE BRAKES No. Trouble condition \

l l
Major causes Break in harness for ECU warning light drive circuit Malfunction of ECU
Remedy Check, using flow P.35-19.)
After the ignition key is turned to the ON position, it blinks once and then illuminates when it is turned to the START position. When the key is returned to the ON position, the light blinks again. (Blinking with the ignition key in the ON position is synchronized with operation noise of the valve relay.) ABS warning
light
Ignition
key A C C . L::+
14A0593
1CONTINUED FROM PREVIOUS PAGE
Does the ABS warning light illuminate when starting to drive the car?
Is there one-sided braking, insufficient i
>
Yes I
Trouble condition One-sided braking Insufficient braking force
l l l l
Remedy Check HU operation and, if necessary, replace HU. If HU is normal, check structural parts for normal braking.
HydraJic Malfunction in HU solenoid valve Insufficient wheel speed sensor put voltage (sensor malfunction, too large a gap between sensor rotor,
ABS sometimes functions even when there is no sudden braking. (ABS operation vibration is transmitted.)
l
(Refer to P.35-57.) and, if necessary, replace sensor, If tests indicate that there are no mechanical or electrical faiIures,replace the ECU.
Malfunction of ABS ECU
TSB Revision
35-10
SERVICE BRAKES -
j CONTINUED FROM PREVIOUS PAGE /
After a test drive, use self-diagnosis to P.35-11.). >
1 No trouble codes output and normal codes are displayed?

Y e s
No
Trouble codes are output put terminals and the diagnosis check connector.
If trouble does not reappear, watch vehicle movements until it reappears. (Refer to P.35-12.)
All ABS functions are normal. (Nor are there stored memory of past trouble code.)
[~sf3 Revision
SERVICE BRAKES -
35-11
CHECK USING SELF DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION

(1) With the ignition switch OFF, connect the MUT through the adapter harness (MB9913771, turn the ignition ON and select the ABS system. (The ABS warning light lights up, it goes into the MUT mode. In the MUT mode, ABS does not function.) If it does not go into the MUT mode, check the ECU power circuit and the harness between the ECU and diagnosis check terminals. (2) Read the diagnosis output codes from the ECU memory. (3) Clear the diagnosis codes once from memory. (Refer to P.35-12.) If the memory cannot be cleared, the ECU is currently detecting the trouble and the ABS ECU is in fail safe. If it can be cleared, the trouble is either temporary or appears only when driving. (4) When the trouble codes cannot be cleared, or when the ABS ECU goes into fail safe during another test drive and trouble codes are output, check according to trouble code check charts (E-l-E-6).
Adapter iarness%f& (MB9913771
(Mi3991341) \
12FOO57
DIAGNOSIS CODE CHART

Diagnosis code No. MUT display letters L 11
12 13 14
Check chart name or remedy
Reference page
Check chart name No. MUT display letters or remedy

41 42
Diagnosis code
Reference paw
FR SNSR. OPEN FL SNSR. OPEN E-l RR SNSR. OPEN RL SNSR. OPEN VEH. SPD. SNSR. STOP LAMP SW E-2 E-3 P.35-20 P.35-20 P.35-20
FR SOL. VALVE FL SOL. VALVE REAR SOL. V. VALVE RELAY MOTOR RELAY E-5 E-6 ECU replacement P.35-24 P.35-25 I
E-4 P.35-23
43 51
15 22
52
55 CONT. UNIT
TSB Revision
35-12
SERVICE BRAKES -
METHOD OF CLEARING DIAGNOSIS CODE MEMORY

Caution l When servicing is finished, clear the diagnosis c o d e m e m o r y . Trouble codes cannot be cleared from memory when the ABS ECU system is in fail safe. Proceed to diagnosis and repair. (1) Clear memory using MUT. (No. 7 DIAG. ERASE in the actuator test is selected to erase the diaanosis code.) (2) After clearing, recheck the diagnosis codes, and check that memory is cleared.
ACTUATOR TEST FUNCTION

The actuator can be forcibly driven in the following way by using the MUT. NOTE d l The actuator test cannot be carried out when the ABS ECU system is in fail safe. l When using forced drive using the MUT, the vehicle must be stopped. l During forced drive using the MUT, forced drive operation is stopped when any wheel speed reaches 10 km/h (6 mph).
Actuator test specifications

No.
MUT display
Drive solenoid valve and motor
Drive pattern
01
FR VALVE A
02
FL VALVE A
Not used
03
REAR VALVE A
04
FR VALVE M Solenoid valve and pump motor for each HU corresponding channel. <Manual pattern>
Start of forced drive End of forced drive
1440588
05
FL VALVE M
06
REAR VALVE M
TSB Revision
SERVICE BRAKES -
35-13
'
A ABS warning light does not light at all. iJ [Hint] If other warning lights do not light up either, fuse is probably blown.
IGNITION SWITCH(IG2) m IN
[Explanation] When it does not light up at all, there is a strong possibility that there is trouble with ABS warning light or with power to the light.
m! :IGl) j:
JSIBLE LINK0
ti
B 2 L__---------___ 0 1% 2
f%ER RELAY
r
10
Lp % (L-R) d
j: g 6
G-R
id
1
G-R
59
ki@iNATION
iB
* :: h g = 6
E.??-t 2 E I r fi4 ~4 -5
=
0 ____--.
:: 5 d
1 .- 2
I
-k &h+&"..L"Ei
SOLENOID
1:
tl ^
HH
H?bb
ABS-ECU
Kxss-AK-RSGOIA
1 TSB Revision
- Anti-lock SERVICE BRAKES
Braking System Troubleshooting
Yes
4 - No
Does voltage between harness connector terminal No. 14 and ground indicate battery voltage? Yes
combination meter from fuse No. 11 is broken.
yl Circuit in combination meter is broken. Turn the ignition switch OFF and check.
Is there continuity between combination .rT/I./ meter No. 58 and No 59 terminals7
Faulty1
+I[
&
,No
,
Connect connectors firmly. (Check for pins pulled out or bent, and repair as needed.)
Are instrument panel wiring harness and body wiring harness connected properly? Yes Broken wire in ECU, valve relay or both drive circuits. Check both circuits.
TSB Revision
SERVICE BRAKES -
35-15
I Check ABS ECU.

Remove the ECU connector and check.
Does the voltage between ECU harness connector terminal No. 25 and ground indicate battery voltage while the ignition key is in the ON position? Yes
b Broken wire between ABS warning light and ECU
) Repair harness.
I ABS ECU malfunction
) Replace ABS ECU.
Is valve relay normal? (Refer to P.35-62.) Yes install the valve relay, remove the HU connector and check.
+ Valve relay malfunction
b Replace valve relay.
I
Does voltage between the HU harness connector terminal No. 8 and ground indicate battery voltage while the ignition key is in the ON position? Yes
INO
\----+I Broken harness wire between ABS warning light and HU
1-1 Repair harness. 1
II
Is there continuity between HU harness 4: ~~&?$?%$&nd connector terminal No. 9 and ground?
Is there continuity between HU harness connector terminals No. 8 and No. 9? Yes
j HU malfunction
> Replace HU.
L Connector not connected securely.
, Replace connector.
TSB Revision
35-16
B
SERVICE BRAKES -
ABS warning light stays on when the ignition key is in the ON position.
[Explanation] This is the symptom when the ABS ECU does not power up due to broken ECU power circuit, etc., when the fail safe function operates and isolates the system or when the warning light drive circuit is short circuited.
[Hint] Check the diagnosis output and if there is no output voltage or if the MUT and ABS ECU cannot communicate, there is a good possibility that power is not flowing to the ECU. Caution l If the trouble code is output, the system can be in the fail safe mode. in such a case, erase the trouble code and then restart the engine to check if the system is currently in a fault condition.
!8 -
SWIT( (IGl) : Et
IGNII
IN
JB @ 151 C : E
1 , ig
~~~~
~~~~1
COMBINATION METER
)158 7
,No
Yes
Replace ECU.
1 4 ,No r I
Does the ABS warning light remain illuminated even with the HU connector disconnected? Yes
610
7
9 2
-1 ------____-_---1
Short-circuit in harness between HU or ECU and ABS warning light
> Repair harness or replace combination meter.
~;@lizEFg c, 62 I J r L b I27
-1
r-
TSB i bvision
SERVICE BRAKES -
3547
CONTINUED FROM PREVIOUS PAGE
Yes
ABS POSER RELAY
Is power relay normal? (Refer to P.35-62.)
Replace power relay.
DIODE
With the ignition key in the ON position, does voltage between ECU connector terminal No. 18 and ground indicate the battery voltage? I Yes
I-J r
No
Harness wire between power relay and ECU is broken
1 Repair harness. I
SELFLM&OS'S CONNECTOR FRONT SIDE
~ No Is there continuity between body harness connector terminals No. 23 and No. 24, and diagnosis inspection terminals No. 4 & No. 1 O? Yes
agnosis inspection terminal and ABS ECU is
Malfunction of ABS ECU Replace ABS ECU.
TSB Revision
35-18
C
SERVICE BRAKES -
ABS warning light does not illuminate when the ignition key is in the START position. LJ and the ECU turns the valve relay OFF. If the warning light does not illuminate at this time, there is trouble in the warning light circuit on the valve relay side.
[Explanation] The ABS ECU uses the IG2 power source which is turned off in the START position. The ABS warning light uses the IG, power source which is not turned off even in the START position. Consequently, in the START position, power is off
ON (IGl)
(--)
With the ignition key in the
JB 6 15 [
sE , 8 5 : 1 2i9 7r ', L
indicate the battery voltage? Yes
COMBINATION METER
Yes
ALII 58 Y3 G-R l,,l G-6 >

7
B :: 9
.- ------ ---_-__1
HU harness malfunction
Yes
*
Replace valve relay.
NOTE When performing the check marked *, note polarity of the diode (refer to the circuit diagram). $2 4 127 7
;
ABS ECU
vision
SERVICE BRAKES D (L.-J [Explanation]
35-19
ABS warning light blinks once after the ignition key is turned to the ON position. It illuminates in the START position and blinks once again when turned to the ON position.
When power flows, the ABS ECU turns on the warning light for approximately 1 sec. while it performs a valve relay test. If there is a break in the
harness between the ECU and the warning light, the light illuminates only when the valve relay is off in the valve relay test, etc.
In the ignition key ON position, does voltage between terminal No. 25 and
ground indicate battery voltage? Yes
ABS warning light and ECU is broken.
Repair harness. v
58 g: "
3 I 2 456788 7
COMBINATION METER
+ Replace ABS ECU.
mi
ASS-ECU
TSB Revision
35-20
SERVICE BRAKES -
the following diagnosis codes are displayed 11 FR SNSR. OPEN 12 FL SNSR. OPEN 13 RR SNSR. OPEN 14 RL SNSR. OPEN [Explanation] The ABS ECU detects breaks in the wheel speed sensor wire. This trouble code is output if the wheel speed sensor signal is not input (or short circuited) or if its output is low when starting to drive or while driving. [Hint] In addition to a broken wire/short circuit in the wheel speed sensor, also check whether the sensor gap is too large, sensor harness wire is broken, or sensor harness and body connector are not properly connetted.
E - 2 W h e n dlagnoslsr--~[Explanation]
c o d e 15 VEH. SPD. SNSR. is displayed

l l
This trouble code is output when there is an abnormality (other than broken wire or short circuit) in any of the wheel speed sensor output signals while driving. [Hint] The following can be considered as the cause of the wheel speed sensor output abnormality. l Distortion of rotor, teeth missing l Low frequency noise interference when sensor harness wire is broken l Noise interference in sensor signal l Sensor output signal is below the standard value or amplitude modulation is over the standard value. Using an oscilloscope to measure the wave shape of the wheel speed sensor output signal is very effective.
Broken sensor harness Poor connection of connector
NOTE (1) If contact is poor, check the sensor cable by bending and lightly stretching it. (2) Except for the case where a fault condition exists in the system, but the inspection results are normal; if an abnormality cannot be found in the sensor circuit displayed as abnormal, erase the diagnosis code and turn the ignition switch to OFF once, and then test-drive again. If the same trouble code is output, replace the ABS ECU. If the trouble does not occur anymore, the problem is likely to be with the ABS ECU. (If the trouble is in the speed sensor circuit, but is difficult to recreate, it will recur even after the ABS ECU has been replaced.)
SPEED SENSOR
FRONTCLH) FRONTFTRH) @cTJ @ij
RF.AR(LH) @
REfIR(RH) fi&
1 TSB Revision
SERVICE BRAKES Check flow connected with wheel speed sensor

ii No Is the resistance value of the wheel speed sensor part normal?
35-21
N O T E When checking with an oscilloscope, first measure voltage variations in the wheel speed sensor output. (Refer to P.35-57.)
> Malfunction of wheel speed sensor
Standard value: Front 1.4 - 2.2 kR Rear 1.3 - 2.1 kSZ Yes
Yes
Is the standard value for the gap between the wheel speed sensor and rotor within the range?
Standard value: ;+;;fi3 - 0.9 mm LO12 poe288r,$ - 0.7 mm LOO8 -
Yes
I Yes
No
sensor has a poor waveform. Replace sensor or L
Check the output of each wheel speed sensor with an oscilloscope, including the waveform. (Refer to measurement of wheel speed sensor output voltage variations on P.35-57.) Is the output voltage for each wheel speed sensor over the standard value and is the waveform normal?
Yes
RB R e v i s i o n
35-22
E-3
SERVICE BRAKES -
Anti-lock Braking System Troubleshootin,g
When diagnosis code 22 STOP LAMP SW is displayed [Hint] If the stop light operates normal, the harness for the stop light switch input circuit is broken or there is a malfunction in the ABS ECU. !Li
[Explanation] The ABS ECU outputs this trouble code in the following cases. l Stop light switch may remain on for more than 15 minutes without ABS operation. l The harness wire for the stop light switch may be open.
r 7
Yes
6 Repair harness.
Replace ABS ECU.
ABS-ECU -~ RESISTOR
Ll 12 13 14 / 5 16 1716 ~9~10111~12~13~14/15(16i~7~1~ ~'9~20~1~2~2~24~~6~~~~9~30~3~~~~2~~5~
KK35-AK-R3506A
vision
SERVICE BRAKES E-4 iL [Explanation]
35-23
When diagnosis codes 41 FR SOL. VALVE, 42 FL SOL. VALVE or 43 REAR SOL. V. are displayed.
The ABS ECU normally monitors the solenoid valve drive circuit. If no current flows in the solenoid even if the ECU turns the solenoid ON or if it continues to flow even
when turned OFF, the ECU determines the solenoid coil wire is broken/short-circuited or the harness is broken/short-circuited, and then these trouble codes are output.
disconnect ECU connector
/ ii
$$l.E#AT'ON
The harness wire for the solenoid valve circuit whose resistance value is outside the range of the standard value is broken or short circuited. Yes
;;QO'D i 4I I
I
Repair ABS harness.
>?
-.
I i' ---i
) Replace ABS ECU.
ABS-ECU
-A22 Al9 *17 ,I
Y Y Y Y I
LJ
TSB Revision
35-24
E-5
SERVICE BRAKES -
When diagnosis code 51 VALVE RELAY is displayed
[Explanation] When the ignition switch is turned ON, the ABS ECU switches the valve relay OFF and ON for an initial check, compares the voltage of the signal to the valve relay and valve power monitor line voltage to check whether the valve relay operation is normal. In addition, normally it monitors whether or not there is power in the valve power monitor line since the valve relay is normally ON. Then, if the supply of power to the valve power monitor line is interrupted, this trouble code will be output.
Remove and check the valve relay.
EPfiiBenE
I When the valve relay is checked, are the following conditions found? No. 85 -No. 86: Resistance value 60 - 120 fi No. 30-No. 87a: Continuity No. 30 - No. 87: No continuity When battery voltage is applied between terminals No. 86 and No. 85. No. 30 - No. 87: Continuity No. 30 - No. 87a: No continuity Yes Install the valve relay and remove the HU connector.
I &
E+GG-pq
/ Nn
With the ignition key ON, does the
COMSINATION
m I 4: u H g@J$s2 ,,8 I. -----I/ IL / II II I / II II /I / >yo---a-+G ------------------ ?$ -__--_, -, ; : [1? m pEl%zq~, 610 ___2 ____________~_______~~~~ ? >; -: d Yi L1: $ .G 22 +%! 27 = 62
Is there continuity between HU No. 8 and No. 7 terminals? Yes I Connect the HU harness and remove the ECU connector.
Faulty harness in HU
1
Does resistance between body connector terminal No. 2 and terminal No. 27 indicate 60 - 120 II
Yes
No
Malfunction of harness between HU and ECU.
No
With the ignition key ON, does the voltage between terminal No. 22 and ground indicate battery voltage? Yes
- Malfunction of harness between HU and ABS ECU.
Repair harness. i .-I 1 / 2 13 1 a ) 5 16 17 18 ( Q IIO(I ~~~2(13~~a~i5~~6/i7~~~

IQ$O~Y~2~3~24~~6~~~28~~~1~2~3~4~5~
vision
SERVICE BRAKES -
I E- 6 When I diagnosis code 52 MOTOR RELAY is displayed

[Explanation] The ABS ECU outputs this trouble code for the motor relay and motor in the following cases. l When the motor relay does not function l When there is trouble with the motor itself and it does not revolve . l When the motor ground line is disconnected and the motor does not revolve
FUSIBLE LINKa
l
When the motor continues to revolve
[Hint] If there is motor operation noise during MUT forced drive mode, there is a broken or short circuited motor monitor wire.
Yes
Does the motor make a noise during MUT forced drive mode
Broken wire or short cir-
10 n .7 ;: rn
-_ ------- --
5 1 9 u
Remove the motor relay and check resistance values. No. 85 - No. 86: Resistance value 30 - 60 fi No. 30-No. 87: No continuity Battery voltage is applied between terminals No. 85 and
Replace motor relay.
No. 86.
No. 30-No. 87: Continuity
? E5
Yes Is pump motor ground connected normally? Yes Install motor relay and remove HU connector. Connect ground wire.
3 3 10 p?GEilq~+ -_------- --
ES-ECU
.- 4
26
I No
-;I
I
Connect the HU connector and remove the ECU connector

I I No I 3
1 1 12 I3 / 4 15 15 17 13 I g ~10~1~~12~19114~15]1~17118j ~ls~o~l~e~3~4415~2T~E~~o~l~~~~~5~
(X35-AK-33533
Is resistance between body connector terminal No. 5 and ground 0.1 -0.3 R? Yes ABS ECU malfunction
Repair harness.
P Replace ABS ECU.
1 TSB Revision
35-26
SERVICE BRAKES -
Anti-lock Braking System Troubleshooting I
TROUBLESHOOTING (ABS - AWD)

Confirm condition in the following way and diagnosis accordingly. Does the ABS warning light illuminate as described (2) With the ignition key in the START position, below up to the time the engine starts? power to the ABS ECU is interrupted and the (1) When the ignition key is turned to the ON ABS warning light remains lit because the valve position, the ABS ECU causes the ABS warning relay is OFF. light to flash four times in about one second (3) When the ignition key is returned from the (during which the valve relay self check is made) START position to the ON position, the and then causes it to go out. ABS warning light flashes four times in about one second (during which the valve relay self check is made again) and then goes out.
OFF ST ON ACC, LOCK 1
u--
I I I
I
-I
14A0594
Yes
>
CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE No
No.
1
Trouble condition ABS warning light does not light up at all.

ABS
warning light OFF
l l
Major causes ABS warning light bulb is burnt out. Open in ABS warning light electrical circuit (check for blown fuse)
Remedy Check, using flow

chart A (Refer to
P.35-31.)
lgmtlon ACC,LOb-key
14AO590
When the ignition key is turned to the ON position, it remains lighted.

ABS warning light
l l l
,,F J-
Fail safe is functioning due to ECU self diagnosis. Short in ECU warning light drive circuit Malfunction of ECU
Check, using flow chart B (Refer to P.35-34.)
Ignition key .;i,LOi h
Does not illuminate when ignition key is in START position.

warning
l l l
Check, using flow Malfunction of valve relay Break in harness between ABS warning chart C (Refer to light and HU P.35-36.) Break in harness between HU and
body ground
TSB Revision
SERVICE BRAKES No. Trouble condition After the ignition key is turned to the ON position, it blinks once and then illuminates when it is turned to the START position. When the key is returned to the ON position, the light blinks again. (Blinking with the ignition key in the ON position is synchronized with operation noise of the valve relay.) ABS
warrmg light lgmtion key A C C . LOi;+
14A0593
35-27
Remedy Check, using flow chart D (Refer to P.35-37.)
I
l l
Major causes Break in harness for ECU warning light drive circuit Malfunction of ECU
4
, i-
Does the ABS warning light illuminate when starting to drive the car?
Trouble with the motor relay, solenoid valve [due to self test at start-up or
Is there one-sided braking, insufficient braking force or malfunction of ABS Yes Trouble condition One-sided braking Insufficient braking force Decline in ABS function
l l l l
Major causes Hydraulic line in HU is clogged. Mechanical lock of HU solenoid valve Hydraulic line in HU is clogged. Malfunction in HU solenoid valve operation Insufficient wheel speed sensor output voltage (sensor malfunction, too large a gap between sensor rotor, missing rotor teeth) Malfunction of ABS ECU
Remedy Check HU operation and, if necessary, replace HU. If HU is normal, check structural parts for normal braking. Check wheel speed sensor (Refer to P.35-57.) and, if necessary, replace sensor, adjust gap or replace rotor. If tests indicate that there are no mechanical or electrical failures,replace the ECU.
ABS sometimes functions even when there is no sudden braking. (ABS operation vibration is transmitted.)
TSB Revision
SERVICE BRAKES 1 CONTINUED FROM PREVIOUS PAGE 1
I
After a test drive, use self diagnosis to check (Refer to P.35-29.).
I
No trouble codes output and normal codes are displayed? Yes
No No
No diagnosis output Trouble codes are output
All ABS functions are normal. (Nor are there stored memory of past trouble code.)
TSB Revision
SERVICE BRAKES -
CHECK USING SELF DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION

(1) With the ignition switch OFF, connect the MUT through the adapter harness (MB991377). turn the ignition ON and select the ABS system. (The ABS warning light lights up, it goes into the MUT mode. In the MUT mode, ABS does not function.) If it does not go into the MUT mode, check the ECU power circuit and the harness between the ECU and diagnosis check terminals. (2) Read the diagnosis output codes from the ECU memory. (3) Clear the diagnosis codes once from memory. (Refer to P.35-30.) If the memory cannot be cleared, the ECU is currently detecting the trouble and the ABS ECU is in fail safe. If it can be cleared, the trouble is either temporary or appears only when driving. (4) When the trouble codes cannot be cleared, or when the ABS ECU goes into fail safe during another test drive and trouble codes are output, check according to trouble code check charts (E-l-E-7).
I/ MUT (MB991 341) \

03A0211
DIAGNOSIS CODE CHART

Reference we -1 ;+EiT;
I E-5 P.35-42
Reference iwe
I
P.35-38
41
I I
FR SOL. VALVE
1/ ;; / ;;tS;L;;;E
I I
21
51
VALVE RELAY
) E-7
P.35-43 P.35-44
P.35-38 1 52 1 M O T O R R E L A Y
G SNSR. STOP LAMPSW
I
1
E-3 E-4
[ 22 1
si 55 / ONT. UNlT
/ replaEcCeUment
1 TSB Rtivision
35-30
SERVICE BRAKES -
METHOD OF CLEARING DIAGNOSIS CODE MEMORY

Caution When servicing is finished, clear the diagnol sis code memory Trouble codes cannot be cleared from memory when the ABS-ECU system is in fail safe mode. Proceed to diagnosis and repair. (1) Clear memory using MUT. (No. 7 DIAG. ERASE in the actuator test is selected to erase the diagnosis code.) (2) After clearing, recheck the diagnosis codes, and check that memory is .cleared.
ACTUATOR TEST FUNCTION

The actuator can be forcibly driven in the following way by using the MUT.
l
NOTE The actuator test cannot be carried out when the ABS ECU system is in fail safe mode. l When using forced drive using the MUT, the vehicle must be stopped. During forced drive using the MUT, forced drive l operation is stopped, when any wheel speed reaches 10 km/h (6 mph).
Actuator test specifications
Not used
Start of forced drive
1 TSB Revision
SERVICE BRAKES -
35-31
A ABS warning light does not light at all. L [Explanation] When it does not light up at all, there is a strong possibility that there is trouble with ABS warning light or with power to the light. [Hint] If other warning lights do not light up either, fuse is probably blown.
IGNITION SWITCH(IG2) IGNITION SWITCH(IG1)
FUSIBLE LINE I
(L-R)
-'
. 3
7 m
G-R I i
59
COMBINATION METER
L
1or =
--L
-- 5
!
_- ----- 2 -- Ti----%--79 -_----- -7 -- j-+3I -----11:

p!Rq 3;
g:
W
25
ABS-ECU
n =
1 TSB Revision
35-32
SERVICE BRAKES No
AniLlock Braking System Troubleshooting
With the ignition key in the ON posiI-J
Check fuse No. 11. If it is blown, correct the cause of the blown fuse and then replace the fuse.
Yes
( ~;T&$Efg,?~ )
harness connector terminal No. 59 and ground indicate battery voltage?
----F-Circuit in combination meter is broken.
&
Repair harness.
Is there continuity between combination meter No. 58 and No. 59 terminals?
Are instrument panel wiring harness and body wiring harness connected
Broken wire in ECU, valve relay or both drive circuits. Check both circuits.
TSB Revision
SERVICE BRAKES i, 1 CheckABSECU. ,
35-33
Remove the ECU connector and check.
Does the voltage between ECU harness connector terminal No. 25 and ground indicate battery voltage while the ignition key is in the ON position? Yes
> Broken wire between ABS warning light and ECU
j Repair harness.
> ABS ECU malfunction
> Replace ABS ECU.
Remove valve relay and check. I
1
is valve relay normal? (Refer to P.35-62.) Yes Install the valve relay, remove the HU connector and check.
No
) Valve relay malfunction + Replace valve relay. I
Does voltage between the HU harness uLEm-h[ connector terminal No. 8 and ground indicate battery voltage while the ignition key is in the ON position?
Repair harness.
Yes
Is there continuity between HU harness r7; I connector terminal No. 9 and ground? t%$~?$!Je~~~g~und 9 Repair harness.
Is there continuity between HU harness connector terminals No. 8 and No. 9? Yes
+ HU malfunction I
+ Replace HU.
b Connector not connected securely.
- Replace connector.
1 TSB Revision
35-34
I
1
SERVICE BRAKES -
I
I
1
I \
1 B 1 ABS warning light stays on when the ignition key is in the ON position. [Explanation] This is the symptom when the ABS ECU does not power up due to broken ECU power circuit, etc., when the fail safe function operates and isolates the system or when the warning light drive circuit is short circuited. [Hint] Check the diagnosis output and if there is no output voltage or if the MUT and ABS ECU cannot communicate, there is a good possibility that power is not flowing to the ECU. Caution l If the trouble code is output, the system can be in the fail safe mode. In such a case, erase the trouble code and then restart the engine to check if the system is currently in a fault condition. k.J
4
Replace ECU.
j @ I7 -_ f
j 0 7a
:ml:I1
I2 a -----1 1 I g: a 30 I -=_-. -----------1
4 a: & I
II Yes
Replace HU or replace valve relay.
25
P
iz- 11213 ia 15 16 j 7 j 8 19 ~10~11~12~13~14~15~16~17~18 19l20l21C2C3Ca~25~~7~3~29~0~1~32~3~35 :95-AK-R9502
ABS ECU
_ ai
TSB hevIsIon
SERVICE BRAKES -
35-35
PREVIOUS PAGE IGNITION SWITCH(IG2)
R&R
RELAY
DIODE
With the ignition key in the ON position, does voltage between ECU connector terminal No. 18 and ground indicate the battery voltage?
Is there continuity between body harness terminals No. 9 and No. 34, and ground? Repair harness. v Is there continuity between body harness connector terminals No. 23 and No. 24, and diagnosis inspection terminals No. 4 & No. 1 O? Yes No diagnosis inspection terminal and ABS ECU
KX35-AK-R35028
Malfunction of ABS ECU Replace ABS ECU.
TSB Revision
35-36
C
SERVICE BRAKES -
ABS warning light does not illuminate when the ignition key is in the START position. LJ and the ECU turns the valve relay OFF. If the warning light does not illuminate at this time, there is trouble in the warning light circuit on the valve relay side.
[Explanation] The ABS ECU uses the IG2 power source which is turned off in the START position. The ABS warning light uses the IG, power source which is not turned off even in the START position. Consequently, in the START position, power is off
EfiE 9 B
w -
SW1 -
IGN
IN
;IGl)
Remove the hydraulic
unit (HU) connector and

check.
J/B
Yes
COMBINATION METER
c -No Is there continuity between -> Broken line between HU body connector terminal No. 9 and body ground and ground?
G-R 11 G-
-No Is there continuity between HU connector terminal No. 8 and terminal No. 9? Yes
7 > Valve relay malfunction or break in HU harness wire
Yes
&
1
HU harness malfunction NOTE
When performing the check marked *, note polarity of the diode (refer to the circuit diagram).
j Replace HU.
I TSB I
vision
SERVICE BRAKES D L [Explanation]
35-37
ABS warning light blinks once after the ignition key is turned to the ON position. It illuminates in the START position and blinks once again when turned to the ON position.
1 sec. while it
performs a valve relay test. If there is a break in the
harness between the ECU and the warning light, the light illuminates only when the valve relay is off in the valve relay test, etc.
IGNITION SWITCH(IG1) I
J/B In the ignition key ON position, does voltage between terminal No. 25 and ground indicate battery voltage?
m
F 2
r+ m d i
ABS warning light and
Yes Repair harness. v
/ L/
COMBINATION METER
+ Replace ABS ECU.
ABS-ECU -____
KK35-KK-It3503
TSB Revision
35-38
E-l
SERVICE BRAKES -
When the following diagnosis codes are displayed 11 FR SNSR. OPEN 12 FL SNSR. OPEN 13 RR SNSR. OPEN 14 RL SNSR. OPEN d [Hint] In addition to a broken wire/short circuit in the wheel speed sensor, also check whether the sensor gap is too large, sensor harness wire is broken, or sensor harness and body connector are not properly connetted.
[Explanation] The ABS ECU detects breaks in the wheel speed sensor wire. This trouble code is output if the wheel speed sensor signal is not input (or short circuited) or if its output is low when starting to drive or while driving.
E-2 When diagnosis code 15 VEH. SPD. SNSR. is displayed [Explanation] This trouble code is output when there is an abnormality (other than broken wire or short circuit) in any of the wheel speed sensor output signals while driving. [Hint] The following can be considered as the cause of the wheel speed sensor output abnormality. l Distortion of rotor, teeth missing Low frequency noise interference when sensor l harness wire is broken l Noise interference in sensor signal Sensor output signal is below the standard value l or amplitude modulation is over the standard value. Using an oscilloscope to measure the wave shape of the wheel speed sensor output signal is very effective.
l l
Broken sensor harness Poor connection of connector
NOTE (1) If contact is poor, check the sensor cable by bending and lightly stretching it. (2) Except for the case where a fault condition exists in the system, but the inspection results are normal; if an abnormality cannot be found in the sensor. circuit displayed as abnormal, erase the diagnosis code and turn the ignition switch to OFF once, and then test-drive again. If the same trouble code is output, replace the ABS ECU. If the trouble does not occur anymore, the problem is likely to be with the ABS \ ECIJ. - -. \ d (If the trouble is in the speed sensor circuit, but is difficult to recreate, it will recur even after the ABS ECU has been replaced.)
SPEED SENSOR
FRONTCLH) FRONTGW m I@
R!%R(LH) m
REARmi @
If?
All B 110 5
130 125 8 8
ASS-ECI. I
TSB Revision
SERVICE BRAKES Check flow connected with wheel speed sensor
35-39
NOTE Check speed sensor harness and connector connection and then observe with oscilloscope. (Refer to P.35-57.)
No
Is the resistance value of the wheel speed sensor part normal?
,
z Malfunction of wheel speed sensor
Standard value: 0.8 - 1.2 kR

Yes
,I /
LY
14N0127
1 Yes
14N0181
Check the output of each wheel speed sensor with an -No oscilloscope, including the waveform. (Refer to P.35-57.) Is the output voltage for each wheel speed sensor over the standard value and is the waveform normal?
TSB Revision
35-40
E-3
SERVICE BRAKES -
When diagnosis code 21 G SNSR. is displayed
[Explanation] The ABS-ECU outputs this trouble code in the following cases. l G sensor OFF trouble (It is judged that the G sensor continues to be OFF for more than approximately 13 seconds except when the vehicle is stopped or when there is stop light switch input.) When there is a broken wire or short circuit in the harness for the G sensor system.
iNo
FUSIBLE LINK@
Is G sensor normal? (Refer to P.35-92.)
Replace G sensor.
Yes
Remove the ABS-ECU connector and check at the harness connector.
pilGI GRq;
4
4
With the ignition key ON, does the voltage between terminal No. 6 and ground indicate battery voltage? Repair harness. __ 1
I t I , 1 I I 1 I i I I I I I I I i I I I I I / I I ; / I I I I I I I I ! : I I / / I I I I / .--A
dB pEmg=1
a 2
ABS-ECU malfunction I
P Replace ABS-ECU.
X35-LK-R9505 I
TSB Revision
SERVICE BRAKES -
35-41
E-4 When diagnosis code 22 STOP LAMP SW is displayed ii [Explanation] The ABS-ECU outputs this trouble code in the following cases. l Stop light switch remains on for more than 15 minutes while the ABS is not functioning. l The harness wire for the stop light switch may be open. [Hint] If the stop light operates normal, the harness for the stop light switch input circuit is broken or there is a malfunction in the ABS-ECU.
FUSIBLE,LINK@
go out normally?
F Check the stop light related circuit and repair problem spots.
J/B
When the brake pedal is pressed between connector terminal No. 29 and ground indicate battery 1I voltage! , Yes / Repair harness.
Is the voltage between No. 1 terminal and ground equal to the battery voltage when measured wrth resistor connector disconnected? Yes Repair harness. No ) Replace resistor.
ABS-ECU
0I I
Is resistor resistance 780 to 860 sl?

Yes
29
Fpyl
Is there continuity between No. 2 Replace ABS-ECU.
j 1 ) 2 13 14) 5 / 6 17 / 9 j 9 ~10~11~12~13(14~15(161171~9~ ~'9~0l21~2~3l9~~~6~~~9~~0l31l321U13l35l
KX35-AK-33306
vision
35-42
E-5
SERVICE BRAKES -
When diagnosis codes 41 FR SOL. VALVE, 42 FL SOL. VALVE or 43 VALVE DRIFT are displayed. LJ
[Explanation] The ABS-ECU normally monitors the solenoid valve drive circuit. If no current flows in the solenoid even if the ECU turns the solenoid ON or if it continues to flow even when turned OFF, the ECU determines the solenoid coil wire is broken/short-circuited or the harness is broken/short-circuited, and then these trouble codes are output. ABS-ECU controls the solenoid valve current and if the current value of the solenoid valves differs from each other in the same mode, solenoid valve drift error is produced and the ABS-ECU goes into the failsafe mode.
IGNITION SWITCH(IG2) F w
j: z! d 9 E 6 T mA9
1
In the resistance value for the solenoid valve within the range of the standard values? Standard value: 1.1 - 1.3 R Yes Connect HU 1 OP connector, \,) ci;;;;;;;t EC,U connector
No ) Replace HU.
f#;NATIOM
"50 fm!Eaq I I-N G-R ?,I G-R
----_---____
+ The harness wire for the solenoid valve circuit whose resistance value is outside the range of the standard value is broken or short circuited. Yes Repair harness.
1 Malfunction of ABS-ECU
I
4 Replace ABS-ECU.
I
I 1
X35-AK-K3507
TSB Revision
SERVICE. BRAKES E-6 L
35-43
I
When diagnosis code 51 VALVE RELAY is displayed
[Explanation] When the ignition switch is turned ON, the ABS ECU switches the valve relay OFF and ON for an initial check, compares the voltage of the signal to the valve relay and valve power monitor line voltage to check whether the valve relay operation is normal. In addition, normally it monitors whether or not there is power in the valve power monitor line since the valve relay is normally ON. If the supply of power to the valve power monitor line is interrupted, this trouble code will be output.
(> ;;reove;d ch; the
IGNlTION SWITCH(IG1) I -I--
4.
When the valve relay is checked, are the following conditions found? No. 85 - No. 86: Resrstance value 60 - 120 II No. 30-No. 87a: Continuity No. 30 - No. 87: No continuity When batterv voltaoe IS aoolied between terminalsho. 86 and No. 85. No. 30 - No. 87: Contrnurty No. 30 - No. 87a: No continurty
Yes
N o
-----+ Valve relay malfunction +l
idz p = i7TEaq 7 6 E dI
b
COMBINATION METER
I
&
/ N
With the ignition key ON, does the voltage between the connector terminal No. 52 and ground indicate battery voltage? Yes
--;Gm 1
--- --
11
I /I
I
Connect the HU harness and \ remove the ECU connector.
4 I + m i I% d10 --- 2 -- ? 3 ii Dz 62 27 ~
iE b
710
+ I
Nn
ground Indicate battery voltage.
L
KX35-AK-K3503
11 12 j 3 1 a 15 ( 6 / 7 16 18 /10(11112113/14/15j16/17(181 18~20~21~2~3~4~5~~~2@~~~0~31~2~3~~~35
Replace ABS ECIJ.
r-
TSB I
vision
35-44
E-7
SERVICE BRAKES -
When diagnosis code 52 MOTOR RELAY is displayed
[Explanation] The ABS ECU outputs this trouble code for the motor relay and motor in the following cases. l When the motor relay does not function l When there is trouble with the motor itself and it does not revolve
l l
When the motor ground is disconnected and the motor does not revolve When the motor continues to revolve
[Hint] If there is motor operation noise during MUT forced drive mode, there is a broken or short circuited motor monitor wire.
FUSIBLE LINKa
during MUT forced drive mode?
1 ;;pa4r&&rness between 1 Remove the motor relay.
= :: s
10
Remove the motor relay and check resistance values. No. 85 - No. 86: Resistance value 30 - 60 fi No. 30 - No. 87: No continuity Battery voltage is applied kotw8esfn terminals No. 85 and
Replace motor relay.
* m I L% Q7
3 _1
No. 30 - No. 87: Continuity

L
Yes
+
Is pump motor ground connected normally?
, No
I
Connect ground wire.
plGizq+- ----..-___I
I
3%ECU
L--
Yes
1 4 i +---I
T -sTI I
h h
h v
26
I
Install motor relay and remove HU connector.
@Vyi
ground indicate battery voltage?
ll21314 15 16 17 16 ~8~10)11~12~13~14~15~16~17~16~ 1Q~0~1~~23~4~*6~2?~E~Q~30~1~2~33~~~5J li
I Yes
Repair harness.
Connect the HU connector and remove the ECU connector

X35-AK-R3500
J -
No
L
I
Is resistance between body connector terminal No. 2 and No. 26 30 - 60 a?
P Malfunction of harness between HU and ECU
tNc-11
<
r ;~~:;$$a$?%d 1
Repair
harness.
ABS ECU malfunction
> Replace ABS ECU.
TSB Revision
SERVICE BRAKES - Set-vice Adiustment Procedures
35-45

BRAKE PEDAL INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
1. Measure the brake pedal height as illustrated. If thebrake pedal height is not within the standard value, adjust as follows. Standard value (A): 177 - 182 mm (7.0 - 7.2 in.)
lUF51F
Pedal
(I) Disconnect the stop light switch connector, loosen the lock nut, and move the stop light switch to a position where it does not contact the brake pedal arm. (2) Adjust the brake pedal height by turning the operating rod with pliers (with the operating. rod lock nut loosened), until the correct brake pedal height is obtained. (3) After screwing in the stop light switch until it contacts the brake pedal stopper (just before the brake pedal is caused to move), return the stop light switch l/2 to 1 turn and secure by tightening the lock nut. (4) Connect the connector of the stop light switch. (5) Check to be sure that the stop light is not illuminated with the brake pedal unpressed. Reference value (6): 0.5 - 1.0 mm (.02 - .04 in.) 2. On vehicles with automatic transaxle, check the shift-lock mechanism. (Refer to GROUP 23 - Transaxle Control.) 1 ~
~ \ \
!4FOO7. 7
3. With the engine stopped, depress the brake pedal two or three times. After eliminating the vacuum in the power brake booster, press the pedal down by hand, and confirm that the amount of movement before resistance is met (the free play) is within the standard value range. Standard value (C): 3 - 8 mm (.I - .3 in.) If the free play is less than the standard value, confirm that the clearance between the stop light switch and brake pedal is within the standard value. If the free play exceeds the standard value, it is probably due to excessive play between the clevis pin and brake pedal arm. Check for excessive clearance and replace faulty parts as required. 4. Start the engine, depress the brake pedal with approximately 500 N (110 Ibs.) of force, and measure the clearance between the brake pedal and the floorboard. Standard value (D): 80 mm (3.1 in.) or more If the clearance is less than the standard value, check for air trapped in the brake line and for brake fluid leaks. If necessary, check the brake system mechanism (excessive shoe clearance due to faulty auto adjuster) and repair faulty parts as required.
_. 1
1 I
I I I
F14511
F1451 9
TSB Revision
35-46
SERVICE BRAKES

MBSFBAF
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SENSOR CHECK
1. Connect a circuit tester to the brake fluid level sensor. 2. Move the float from top to bottom and check for continuity. 3. The brake fluid level sensor is in good condition if there is k&J no continuity when the float surface is above A, and if there is continuity when the float surface is below A.
I ,
Good
No good
BRAKE BOOSTER OPERATING INSPECTION

M35FCAO
14UOO61
When engine is stopped
When engine is started
14UOO6C )
For simple checking of brake booster operation, carry out the following tests. 1. Run the engine for one or two minutes, and then stop it. 2. Step on the brake pedal several times with normal pressure. If the pedal depresses fully the first time but gradually becomes higher when depressed succeeding times, the booster is operating properly. If the pedal height remains unchanged, the booster is faulty. 3. With the engine stopped, step on the brake pedal several times with the same pressure to make sure that the pedal height will not change. Then step on the brake pedal and start the engine. If the pedal moves downward slightly, the booster is in good condition. If there is no change, the booster is faulty. 4. With the engine running, step on the brake pedal and then stop the engine. Hold the pedal depressed for 30 seconds. If the pedal height does not change, the booster is in good condition. If the pedal rises, the booster is faulty. If the above three tests are okay, the booster performance can be determined as good. If one of the above three tests is not okay at last, the check valve, vacuum hose, or booster will be faulty.
CHECK VALVE OPERATION CHECK

Checkvalve /
M35FNAL
When checking the check valve, keep the check valve fit in the vacuum hose. 1. Remove the vacuum hose. Caution The check valve is press-fit inside the vacuum hose and do not remove the check valve from the vacuum hose. d 1 ~
TSB Revision
SERVICE BRAKES
Valve Spring
35-47
2.
Check the operation of the check valve by using a vacuum pump.
Vacuum pump connection Connection at the brake booster side @ Connection at the intake manifold side @ created and held. created.
Caution If the check valve is defective, replace it as an assembly unit together with the vacuum hose.
Pressure w-w
PROPORTIONING VALVE FUNCTION TEST

Pressure
MOBFKAK
1. Connect two pressure gauges, one each to the input side
and output side of the proportioning valve, as shown. 2. Air bleed the brake line and the pressure gauge. 3. While gradually depressing the brake pedal, make the following measurements and check to be sure that the measured values are within the allowable range. (1) Output pressure begins to drop relative to input pressure (split point). Standard value: 3.75 - 4.25 MPa (533 -- 604 psi)
I ,* Split point , I , , , ,*
(2) Output fluid pressure when input fluid pressure is 8.0 MPa (1,138 psi) Standard value: 5.23 - 5.73 MPa (744 - 815 psi) (3) C$txrt pressure difference between left and right brake Limit: 0.4 MPa (57 psi) 4. If the measured pressures are not within the permissible ranges, replace the proportioning valve.
output pressure
br. Input pressure

14U005E
TSB Revision
35-48
SERVICE BRAKES - Service Adjustment Procedures BLEEDING

M35FYAO
Caution Use the specified brake fluid. Avoid using a mixture of the specified brake fluid and other fluid. Specified brake fluid: Conforming to DOT3
BLEEDING THE MASTER CYLINDER If the master cylinder is empty of brake fluid, bleed the cylinder as follows. (1) Fill the reserve tank with brake fluid. (2) Depress and hold the brake pedal. (3) Let your fellow worker plug the master cylinder outlet with finger. (4) Keeping the condition (3), release the brake pedal. (5) Repeat steps (2) to (4) three to four times while filling the master cylinder with brake fluid. BLEEDING THE BRAKE PIPE LINE Bleed the brake pipe line with the engine running in the order shown in the illustration. Caution When adding brake fluid on vehicles with ABS, be sure to fit the filter to the reserve tank.
14POO3C1
14A045
When new
When worn
FRONT DISC BRAKE PAD CHECK AND REPLACEM35FQAG MENT

NOTE The brake pads have wear indicators that contact the brake disc when the brake pad thickness becomes 2 mm (.079 in.), and emit a squealing sound to warn the driver.
W ear indicator
Lrake disc
indicator
Brake disc
14FOO4C
&ion
SERVICE BRAKES
- Service Adiustment Procedures
<FWD> 1. Visually check the brake pad thickness through the inspection hole in the caliper body. Standard value: IO.0 mm (.39 in.) Limit: 2.0 mm (.08 in.) Caution Replace the pad if worn beyond the limit. At this time, replace the pads on right and left wheels as a set.
14LO29C
2. Remove the guide pin, raise the caliper assembly, and support it with a wire, etc. Caution The guide pin has been coated with special Igrease. Do not wipe off the special grease on the lock pin, and do not contaminate the lock pin.
1Al 0781
3. Remove the following parts from the caliper support. @ Pad and wear indicator assembly 8 F$$ assembly 3 I @ Outer shim
i
14LO291
141029
4. Measure the rotating torque of the hub with the pads removed to determine brake drag torque after pads are installed. 5. Install the pad clips to the caliper support in position.
14AO400
TSB Revision
35-50
SERVICE BRAKES - S ervice

6.
Adjustment Procedures
Clean the piston and, using the special tool, push the piston into the cylinder. 7. With care not to allow the piston boot to be wedged, lower the caliper assembly and fit the lock pin. d 8. Using the following procedure, check the brake drag torque. @ Start the engine and depress and hold the brake pedal for five seconds. @ Stop the engine. (Approx. 200 N [44 Ibs.]) @ Rotate the brake disc ten turns in the forward direction. @ Using a spring balance, check the brake drag force. 9. If the difference between the brake drag force and hub rotating force exceeds the standard value, disassemble the piston and check the piston sliding surfaces for dirt and rust, piston seal for deterioration, and lock pin and guide pin for sliding motion. Standard value: 70 N (15.4 Ibs.) [4 Nm (3 ftlbs.)] or less
<AWD>
1.
Visually check the brake pad thickness. Through the opening in the caliper body. Standard value: 10.0 mm (-39 in.) Limit: 2.0 mm (.08 in.)
Pad pin
L&i Caution Replace the pad if worn beyond the limit. At this time, replace the pads on right and left wheels as a set.
1 AFnn97
2. Remove the clip and, holding the cross spring with hand, remove the pad pins.
TSB Revision
SERVICE BRAKES
35-51
3. Using a screwdriver, remove the pads and shims. @ Inner pad (with wear indicator) 8 C$+r ;ad (iJ Sh:: A
4. Measure the rotating torque qf the hub with the pads removed to determine brake drag torque after pads are installed.
5.
Clean the piston and then push the piston into the cylinder.
Pad assembly
6. Apply repair kit grease to both sides of the inner shims.

Shim B
Shim A
Shim B
3 Grease
Specified grease: Brake grease SAE 5310, NLGI No. 1 Caution 1. Make sure that the friction surfaces of pads and brake discs are free of grease- and other contaminants. 2. The grease should never squeeze out from around the shim.
. _-
Shim A
Grease
14FOO9i
TSB Revision
35-52
SERVICE BRAKES
7. Using the following procedure, check the brake drag torque. @ Start the engine and depress and hold the brake pedal for five seconds. [Approx. 200 N (44 Ibs.)] @ Stop the engine. @ Rotate the brake disc ten turns in the forward direction. @ Using a spring balance, check the brake drag force. 8. If the difference between the brake drag force and hub rotating force exceeds the standard value, disassemble the piston and check the piston sliding surfaces for dirt and rust, piston seal for deterioration, and lock pin and guide pin for sliding motion. Standard value: 70 N (15.4 Ibs.) [4 Nm (3 ft.lbs.)] or less
14FOO94
INSPECTION OF FRONT BRAKE DISC THICKNESS

1. Remove dirt and rust off the surface of the brake disc. 2. Measure the thickness of disc at four or more places of the pad contacting surface. Standard value: <FWD> <AWD> Limit: <FWD> <AWD> 3. 24.0 mm (.94 30.0 mm (1.18 22.4 mm (.88 28.4 mm (1.12 in.) , in.) in.) in.)
If the wear exceeds the limit even at one place, replace the right and left discs and brake pads as a set.
M35FSAF
FRONT BRAKE DISC RUN-OUT CHECK
1. Remove the front brake assembly; and support it with a wire, etc.
k.!! I
14FOO42
2. Place a dial gauge approximately 5 mm (.2 in.) from the outer circumference of the brake disc, and measure the run-out of the disc. Limit: 0.10 mm (.004 in.) or less NOTE Secure the disc to the hub with wheel nuts.
TSB Revision
SERVICE BRAKES -
35-53
M35FFAC
FRONT BRAKE DISC RUN-OUT CORRECTION
L.
1.
If the run-out of the brakedisc is equivalent to or exceeds the limit specification, change the phase of the disc and hub, and then measure the run-out again. (1) Before removing the brake disc, chalk both sides of the wheel stud on the side at which run-out is greatest.
14A0398
(2) Remove the brake disc, and then place a dial gauge as shown in the illustration; then move the hub in the axial direction and measure the play. Limit: 0.05 mm (.002 in.) If the play is equivalent to or exceeds the limit, replace the front hub unit bearing.
14F003r
(3) If the play does not exceed the limit specification, and then check the run-out of the brake disc once again. Mount the brake disc on the position dislocated from the chalk mark. 2. If the run-out cannot be corrected by changing the phase of the brake disc, replace the disc.
14A040
REAR DISC BRAKE PAD CHECK AND REPLACEM35FUAE MENT

1. Check brake pad thickness through caliper body check port. Standard value: 10.0 mm (39 in.) Limit: 2.0 mm (08 in.) Caution 1. When the limit is exceeded, replace the pads at both sides, and also the brake pads for the wheels on the opposite side at the same time. 2. If there is a significant difference in the thicknesses of the pads on the left and right sides, check the sliding condition of the piston, lock pin sleeve and guide pin sleeve. 2. Loosen the parking brake cable (from the vehicle interior), and disconnect the parking brake end installed on the rear brake assembly. 3. Remove lock pin. Lift caliper assembly and retain with wires. i Caution Do not smear special grease on lock pin or make it dirty. TSB Revision
14NOO27
SERVICE BRAKES
4. Remove the following parts from caliper support. @ @ @ @ @ @ Outer shim Pad assembly Pad & wear indicator assembly Clip Inner shim A Inner shim B
14N0031
<AWD>
\ 0 / 0
14N0137 14N0136
5. Measure hub torque with pad removed to measure brake drag torque after pad installation. On vehicles with VCU-equipped LSD, disengage the drive shaft and companion flange. NOTE Secure the disc to the hub with wheel nuts. 6. Securely attach the pad clip to the caliper support. Caution Do not deposit &ease or other dirt on pad or brake disc friction surfaces. 7. Clean the piston and then push the piston into the cylinder. 8. With care not to allow the piston boot to be wedged, lower the caliper assembly and fit the lock pin.
14A040;
14N003:
9. Check brake drag torque as follows. (I) Start engine and hold brake pedal down for 5 seconds. [Approx. 200 N (44 Ibs.)] (2) Stop engine. (3) Turn brake disc forward 10 times. (4) Check brake drag torque with spring scale. If the difference between brake drag torque and hub torque exceeds the standard value, disassemble piston and clean piston. Check for corrosion or worn piston seal, and check the sliding condition of the lock pin sleeve and guide pin l/j sleeve. Standard value: 70 N (15.4 Ibs, ,) [4 Nm (3 ft.lbs.)] or less
14AO401
l%FLision
SERVICE BRAKES - Service Adjustment Procedures REAR BRAKE DISC THICKNESS CHECK
1. Remove dirt and rust from brake disc surface. 2. Measure disc thickness at 4 locations or more. Standard value: <FWD> <AWD> Limit: <FWD> <AWD> 18.0 20.0 16.4 18.4 mm mm mm mm
35-55
M35FVA.D
(-71 (.79 (.65 (.72
in.) in.) in.) in.)
14N0171
Replace the discs and pad assembly for both sides left and right of the vehicle if they are worn beyond the specified limit.
REAR BRAKE DISC RUN-OUT CHECK

1.
M35FWAC
Remove the rear brake assembly, and support it by a wire, etc.
\\ \ \
14NOO98]
2. Place a dial gauge approximately 5 mm (.2 in.) from the outer circumference of the brake disc, and measure the run-out of the disc. Limit: 0.08 mm (.0031 in.) or less NOTE Tighten nuts to secure the disc to the hub.
14A0401 3
REAR BRAKE DISC RUN-OUT CORRECTION

1.
M35FXAB
If the run-out of the brake disc is equivalent to or exceeds the limit specification, change the phase of the disc and hub, and then measure the run-out again. NOTE The procedures for checking by changing the installation phase of the disc are the same as those for the front brake discs. Note, however, that the axial play (limit) in the hub differs. (Refer to P.35-53.) 0.05 mm (.002 in.) Limit: <FWD> 0.8 mm (.031 in.) <AWD>
2.
If the problem cannot be corrected by changing the phase of the brake disc, replace the disc.
1 TSB Revision
35-56
SERVICE BRAKES
1.

M35FIAD
BRAKE LINING THICKNESS CHECK
Remove the rear brake assembly, and support it by a wire, etc. L? j 2. Remove the brake disc. 3. Measure the wear of the brake lining at the place worn the most. i Standard value: 2.8 mm (.I1 in.) Limit: 1.0 mm (-04 in.) Replace the shoe and lining assembly if brake lining thickness is less than the limit and/or if it is not worn evenly. Caution Whenever the shoe and lining assembly is replaced, replace both RH and LH assemblies as a set to prevent car from pulling to one side when braking.
BRAKE DRUM INSIDE DIAMETER CHECK

1.
M35FJAD
Remove the rear brake assembly, and support it by a wire, etc. 2. Remove the brake disc. 3. Measure the inside diameter of the hub and drum at two or more locations. Standard value: 168.0 mm (6.6 in.) Limit: 169.0 mm (6.7 in.)
14N0179
Replace brake drums and shoe and lining assembly when wear exceeds the limit value or is badly imbalanced.
~ ~
BRAKE LINING AND BRAKE DRUM CONNECTION M35FPAD CHECK

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. \
14N008E
Remove the rear brake assembly, and support it by a wire, etc. Remove the brake disc. Remove the shoe and lining assembly. Chalk inner surface of brake disc and rub with shoe and lining assembly. Replace shoe and lining assembly or brake disc if very irregular contact area. NOTE Clean off chalk after check.
TSB Revision
SERVICE BRAKES
35-57
MEASUREMENT OF WHEEL SPEED SENSOR M35FOAO OUTPUT VOLTAGE

~18~17~16~15~14~13~12~11~10~ 9 18 I 7 16 I 5 14 13 12 1 1 1 [35~34~33~32~31~30~29~28~27~26~25~24~23~22~21~20~19~
Check connector ECU
1. Lift up the vehicle and release the parking brake. 2. Disconnect the ECU harness connector and measure with the adapter harness (MB991 356) connected to the harness side connector. Caution 1. Never insert a probe, etc. into the connector as it may result in poor contact later. 2. Do not connect the connector (Special Tool) marked with r+ except when recording the waveform on a driving test. In such a case, connect the connector to the ECU.
Terminal No. (same for AWD and FWD) FL RR FR RL
/m Body harness
/ MB991 356
14N018(
4 5
24 26
21 23
8
3
When turned manually ~---~---~-.-~---[--. I 1
3. Manually turning the wheel to be measured by 112 to 1 turn/second, measure the output voltage with a circuit tester or oscilloscope. Output voltage: When measured with circuit tester: 70 mV or more When measured with oscilloscope (max. voltage): 100 mV or more Probable causes of low output voltage l Speed sensor pole piece-to-rotor clearance too large l Faulty speed sensor 4. Then, in order to observe the output state of the wheel speed sensors, shift into low gear (AWD vehicle) and drive the wheels, observe the output voltage waveform of each wheel speed sensor with an oscilloscope. In the case of the FWD vehicle, observe the waveform with an oscilloscope; for the front wheels, shift into low gear and drive the wheels; for the rear wheels, turn the wheels manually at a constant speed. NOTE 1. Waveform may also be observed by actually driving the vehicle. 2. The output voltage is low when the wheel speed is low and increases as the wheel speed increases.
TSB Revision
35-58
SERVICE BRAKES
POINTS IN WAVEFORM MEASUREMENT

Symptom Too small or zero waveform amplitude Waveform amplitude fluctuates excessively (this is no problem if the minimum amplitude is 100 mV or more) Noisy or disturbed waveform Probable causes Faulty wheel speed sensor Incorrect pole piece-to-rotor clearance Axle hub eccentric or with large runout Remedy Replace sensor Adjust clearance Replace hub
Open circuit in sensor Open circuit in harness Incorrectly mounted wheel speed sensor Rotor with missing or damaged teeth
Replace sensor Correct harness Mount correctly Replace rotor
NOTE The wheel speed sensor cable moves following motion of the front or rear suspension. Therefore, it is likely that it has an open circuit only when driving on rough roads and it functions normally on ordinary roads. It is, therefore, recommended to observe sensor output voltage waveform also under special conditions, such as rough road driving,
INSPECTION OF HYDRAULIC UNIT

INSPECTION BY FEEL (I) Jack up the vehicle and support the vehicle with rigid racks placed at the specified jack-up points. (2) Release the parking brake and determine the drag force (drag torque) of each wheel by feel. LJ (3) Set the MUT through the adapter harness (MB991377) as illustrated. (4) After confirming that the shift lever or selector lever is in the neutral position, start the engine. The ABS warning light lights up, it goes into the MUT mode. In the MUT mode, ABS does not function. (5) Operate the MUT to force the actuator to operate (item No. 04, 05, 06). (6) Turning the wheel manually, check the change of the braking force when the brake pedal is depressed. The change should be as shown in the following illustration. NOTE While the ABS is in the fail safe mode, the MUT actuator test cannot be made.
(ME!991 377)
12FOO5i
TSB Revision
SERVICE BRAKES
- Service Adiustment Procedures
35-59
MUT actuator test start
3 sec. Pressure decrease 3 sec. Pedal operation pattern @ J
Pedal operation pattern @ J - - -- - - - - - - - - r __--
Release
I I I - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4I
pjgKq
Lock
Drag force when pedal is released
r- - - - - - - - - - a I
6 sec. 1 ------ __---____-__ - --___-__--_ --- J14FOO96
(7) If any abnormality is found in the check, take corrective action according to the following Judgement in Inspection by Feel table.
Judgement in Inspection by Feel
No.
MUT display
Operation (1) Depress brake pedal to lock wheel. (2) Using the MUT. select the wheel to be checked and force the actuator to operate. (3)Turn the selected wheel manually to check the change of brake force.
1-1 gkte / R e m e d y Normal Brake force released for 6 seconds after locking. Clogged brake Wheel does not lock when line other than brake pedal HU is depressed. Clogged hydraulic circuit in HU Brake force is not released Incorrect HU brake tube connection HU solenoid valve not functioning correctly Check and clean brake line Replace HU assembly Connect correctly Replace HU assembly
04
FR VALVE M
05
FL VALVE M
1
I I
06 NOTE *: FWD
Rear VALVE M
TSB Revision
35-60
SERVICE BRAKES
INSPECTION BY USING BRAKE FORCE TESTER NOTE (1) The brake force tester roller and tire must be dry during the test. (2) When testing the front brakes, apply the parking brake and when testing the rear brakes, apply chocks to the front wheels to lock them.
(I) Place the front or rear wheels on the brake force tester roller. (2) Set the MUT through the adapter harness (MB9913771 as illustrated. (3) After confirming that the shift lever or selector lever is in the neutral position, start the engine. (The ABS warning light lights up, it goes into the -MUT mode. In the MUT mode, ABS does not function.) (4) Operate the brake force tester roller. (5) Depress the brake pedal until the brake force tester indicates the following value and keep the brake force at this level during the test. Front wheels: 1,000 N (220 Ibs.) Rear wheels: 650 N (143 Ibs.) (6) Allow the brake tester indication to stabilize before operating the MUT to perform actuator test (Item No. 01, 02, 03). Then, read change of tester indication. Referring to the following Judgement in Inspection by Using Brake Force Tester table, judge and take corrective action if necessary. NOTE While the ABS is in the fail safe mode, the MUT actuator test cannot be made.
1 TSB Revision
SERVICE BRAKES - Service Adiustment Procedures
35-61
?i c .5 Y : 6 i
W 1 :f F w .ZE .Y ?-z .c % ii -: 5 z 4 23 _5 WGt: WC .c w g ?g &=2 30 $5; '5 E.o -o.s 2 w= g 9; 8 .,o L-0 v)CW ." $5 F m G 6 E . g .s a, & 5
0 E F P m cn r m Q
W Y 2 Q
c+w OCm .G s 5 Fma, gg 002 wars ,v.X 0 E U-t +-d 0 c-. wou gzz 0 .c 2.E G EX ig 2 5 wg $ -c w L +-Qv, P$?-F Z m+S&C
& 5 0 E := m % 5 E : z = m 2 z 5 '5 z
.$f E 2 .g + lik z Q-o 0 w W w w.2 z 2y w i; ,225 &Q

CnWY+p =sCWQ 'E-wow p,;Z& ge O.-2-c -5
1 TSB Revision
35-62
SERVICE BRAKES - Service Adjustment Procedures INSPECTION OF POWER RELAY

M35FOAP
Remove the relay box cover in the engine compartment and remove the power relay. 2. Apply the battery voltage to the terminal @ and check for L-J continuity between the following terminals when the terminal @ is short-circuited to ground.
When energized When de-energized Between terminals 4 and 5 Between terminals 4 and 5 Between terminals 1 and 3 Continuity No continuity Continuity
1.
fl \\
16FO264
16FO122
L--J
18FOCII 1
REMEDY IN CASE OF DISCHARGED BATTERY

M35FOAQ
14FOOS
If the engine is jump-started, because of a completely discharged battery, the vehicle may suffer misfiring and fail to start if an attempt is made to start without allowing the battery to recover sufficiently. This is because the ABS consumes a great deal of current for its self check. In such a case, allow the battery to sufficiently charge or remove the ABS power relay in the engine compartment to disable the ABS. Removing the ABS causes the ABS warning light to light. After the battery is charged sufficiently, install the power relay and restart the engine to check that the ABS warning light goes out.
d~ i
INSPECTION OF VALVE RELAY AND MOTOR RELAY (ABS) M35FOAR

1. Remove the splash shield (FR) and remove the relay box cover by inserting a screwdriver between the hydraulic unit and cover to pry off the lock. 2. Remove the relays. The one closest to you (larger one) is the motor relay and the one farthest from you (smaller one) is the valve relay.
14FOO8
TSB l-
wision
SERVICE BRAKES - Service Adjustment Procedures
35-63
3. Check continuity of the relays both when they are energized and de-energized. Motor Relay
When de-energized Between termrnals @ and@ Between termrnals @ and @ When energized between terminals @and@ Between terminals @ and @ 30-600 N o contrnurty (mm Continuity (approx. ORI
16R067C
vVhen de-energized
Between terminals @ and Q Between terminals @ and @I Between terminals @ and @
60-120~~ Continuity (approx. On) flo;rntinuity cc yo;;ntinuity co Contrnuity (approx. OR
16R0670
When energized oetween terminals @and@
Between terminals @and @ Between terminals @ and @
1 TSB Revision
35-64 BRAKE PEDAL
SERVICE BRAKES - Brake Pedal

M35GA- -

<FWD-M/T>
30 Nm ftlbs.
l
l l
Installation of Steering Column Assembly (Refer to GROUP 37A-Steering Wheel and Shaft.) Clutch Pedal Adjustment (Refer to GROUP 21 -Clutch Pedal.) Brake Pedal Adjustment (Refer to P.3545.)
12Nm 9 ft.lbs.
c-i
A.14
I I
~ d
I I
14
Stop light switch removal steps

I. Stop light switch connector 2. Stop light switch
..
4
14FO106
I
l?
I I
14AO256
Brake pedal removal steps

I)* 3. Return spring 4. Cotter pin 5. Washer 6. Clevis pin 9. Brake pedal assembly (parts from step 10 to step 21) 10. Brake pedal shaft bolt 13. Brake pedal 14. Bushing 15. Spacer l * l * 20. Clutch pedal (Refer to Group 2 1 -Clutch Pedal.) 21. Brake pedal support member
~ 1 1 ~ d,
,36
% i
l4OOS,
TSB Revision
SERVICE BRAKES
- Brake Pedal
35-65
Ii
14 Nm
i3Nmy 9 ftlbs.
6 <FWD.
h 14FOlO8
22ttJbs.
. .
--2 Stop light switch removal steps

1. Stop light switch connector 2. Stop light switch -.113Nm 14 Nm 9 ft.lbs. 10 klbs.
Brake pedal removal steps

l *
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.
12.
13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 21.
Return spring Cotter pin Washer Clevis pin Cotter pin Shift lock cable connection Brake pedal assembly (parts from step 10 to step 21) Brake pedal shaft bolt Lever assembly installation nut Lever assembly Brake assembly Bushing Spacer Cotter pin Link assembly Lever assembly Bushinq Brake pedal support member
\ 12 Nlm
9 ftllbs.
//
14FO107
TSB Revision
35-66
SERVICE BRAKES
l l l
- Brake Pedal
M35GCAN
INSPECTION
Check the bushing for wear. Check the brake pedal for bend or twisting. Check the brake pedal return spring for damage.
LJ)
STOP LIGHT SWITCH (I) Connect a circuit tester to the stop light switch. (2) The stolj light switch is in good condition if there is no continuity when the plunger is pushed in to a depth of within 4 mm (.16 in.) from the outer case edge surface, and if there is continuity when it is released. For vehicles with the cruise control system, the check for continuity should be made at connectors a and b of the stop light switch.
14LO142
No continuity Continuity
4mm (.I6 in.)

14LO171
:Vehicles with cruise control> a
b
14LO17C

3. INSTALLATION OF RETURN SPRING
M35GDBG
Install the return spring with the shorter hook on the brake pedal.
Brake pedal
14FOO76
TSB Revision
SERVICE BRAKES - Master Cylinder and Brake Booster
35-67
MASTER CYLINDER AND BRAKE BOOSTER

Brake tube flare nut 15Nm 11 ft.lbs.
l-----l
Post-installation Operation l Supplying Brake Fluid l Bleeding (Refer to P.35-48.) l Adjustment of Brake Pedal (Refer to P.35-45.)
m
14FO38
14ux216
Sealant: 3M ATD Part No. 8663 or equivalent -----I
<AWD>
<FWD>
14 Nm IO ft.lbs.
10 Nm 7 ft.lbs.
lb
14FOlll
Master cylinder removal steps *I) 1. Low-pressure hose

2. Brake fluid level sensor connector 3: Brake tube connection 4. Master cylinder l e . Adjustment of clearance between brake booster push rod and primary piston
9 10 b pr. cl1 t
Brake booster removal steps

4. 5. 6. l a 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. Master cylinder Vacuum hose Vacuum tube Vacuum hose with check valve Fitting Cotter pin Washer . Clevis pin Sealer Spacer Brake booster
11
TSB Revision
35-68
SERVICE BRAKES
- Master Cvlinder and Brake Booster

1. MOVING LOW-PRESSURE HOSE
M35lBAK
Remove the nuts and bolts securing low-pressure hose shown in the illustration, and using a wire, suspend the hose from the hood to a position where it does not hamper the removal and installation of the brake booster. Caution Move the hose slowly with care not to bend it.
Vacuum hose
mm (in.

VALVE
M35lDAU
(1) In the case of AWD, insert the vacuum hose of the

Brake booster 20 - 23 t.79 - .91
14A039i
not to allow it to contact the check valve. Then, secure the hose with hose clip. connected until it contacts the hexagonal edge of the fitting, and then should be secured by the hose clip. If the check valve is defective, replace the vacuum hose.
BOOSTER PUSH ROD AND PRIMARY PISTON Adjust the clearance (A) between the brake booster push
(I) Measure the dimension (B) between the master cylinder end face and piston. NOTE To obtain (B), first take measurement with a square placed on the master cylinder end face. Then, subtract the thickness of the square to arrive at (B).
(2) Obtain the dimension (C) between the brake booster mounting surface on the master cylinder and the end face.
TSB Revision
SERVICE BRAKES - Master Cylinder and Brake Booster
35-69
(3) Measure the dimension (D) der mounting surface on brake booster and the push rod end. NOTE To obtain (D), first take measurement with a square placed on the brake booster. Then, subtract the thick(D). (3),
light scale
push rod and primary piston. Standard value: A (A = - C - D) 7 + 8 inch brake booster 0.55 - 0.75 mm (.022 - .030 in.) 8 + 9 inch brake booster 0.65 - 0.85 mm (.026 - .033 in.) (5) If the clearance is not within the standard value range, adjust by changing the push rod length by turning the adjustable end of the push rod. Caution Improper clearance may cause excessive brake drag.
M35HA- -
14AO471
Brake fluid: Conforming to DOT3
Disassembly steps 1. Reservoir cap assembly 2. Diaphragm 3. Reservoir cap 4. Filter <Vehicles with ABS> 5. Brake fluid level sensor 6. Float 7. Reservoir stopper bolt 8. Reservoir 9. Reservoir seal *I) IO. Piston stopper bolt 11. Gasket a* 12. Piston stopper ring 13. Primary piston assembly a* 14. Secondary piston assembly 15. Master cylinder body 1 TSB Revision
14FOll3
Do not disassemble the primary ancH secondary piston assembly.
35-70
SERVICE BRAKES
- Master Cylinder and Brake Booster

MBSHBAF

10. DISASSEMBLY OF PISTON STOPPER BOLT
Remove the piston stopper bolt, while depressing the piston.
12. DISASSEMBLY OF PISTON STOPPER RING Remove the piston stopper ring, while depressing the piston. 14. DISASSEMBLY OF SECONDARY PISTON ASSEMBLY NOTE If it is hard to remove the secondary piston from the cylinder, gradually apply compressed air from the outlet port on the secondary end of the master cylinder.
INSPECTION
l l l
M35HDAF
Check the inner surface of master cylinder body for rust or pitting. Check the primary and secondary pistons for rust, scoring, wear, damage or wear. Check the diaphragm for cracks and wear. .
d I
TSB Revision
SERVICE BRAKES
- Brake Line
35-71 M35uA. -
BRAKE LINE
<Vehicles without ABS> Pre-removal Operation
l
Draining of Brake Fluid
l l
Supplying Brake Fluid Bleeding (Refer to P.35-48.)
Flared brake line nuts 15 Nm 11 ft.lbs.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Brake hose Brake tube (strut) Brake tube (A) Brake tube (B) Brake tube (front, R.H.) Brake tube (front, L.H.) Brake tube (main, R.H.)
8. Brake tube (main, L.H.) 14. Proportioning valve
Caution Do not disassemble the proportioning valve because its performance depends on the set load of the spring.
TSB Revision
35-72
<Vehicles with ABS>
SERVICE BRAKES - Brake Line
I Flared brake line nuts

15Nm 11 ft.lbs.
1 AFO38
Cormecting part of hvdraulic wnit
5 4 12 11 3 6
14FOOlS
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. O+ 13. 14.
Brake hose Brake tube (strut) Brake tube (A) Brake tube (B) Brake tube (front, R.H.) Brake tube (front, L.H.) Brake tube (main, R.H.) Brake tube (main, L.H.) Brake tube Z-way connector Brake tube (rear, R.H.) Brake tube (rear, L.H.) Hydraulic unit Proportioning valve
TSB Revision
SERVICE BRAKES - Brake Line / Front Disc Brake INSPECTION

l l l
35-73
MPBKCAE
Check the brake tubes for cracks, crimps and corrosion. Check the brake hoses for cracks, damage and leakage. Check the flared brake line nuts for damage and leakage.
MOBKDAK

13. CONNECTION OF TUBE TO HYDRAULIC UNIIT
Connect the tubes to the hydraulic unit as shown in the illustration. 1 6

14FOO20
1. From the hydraulic unit to the brake (L.H.) 2. From the hydraulic unit to the brake (R.H.) 3. From the hydraulic unit to the brake (R.H.) 4. From the hydraulic unit to the brake (L.H.) 5. From the master cylinder (for left front and right rear) 6. From the master cylinder (for right front and left rear)
front rear front rear
FRONT DISC BRAKE

M35LA-.
Pod-installation Operation
l
Bleeding (Refer to P.35-48.)
:: ft.lbs.
Nm
Removal steps
l a
I, Brake hose and the brake tube connection 2. Front brake assembly 3. Brake disc
14N0140
TSB Revision
35-74
SERVICE BRAKES
l l l
- Front Disc Brake

M35LCAE
INSPECTION
Check disc for wear. (Refer to P.35-52.) Check disc for runout. (Refer to P.35-52, 53.) Check disc for damage.
SERVICE POINTS OF lNS?ALLATlON

2. INSTALLATION OF FRONT BRAKE ASSEMBLY
M35LDDA
(1) Measure hub torque with pad removed to measure brake drag torque after pad installation. NOTE Secure the disc to the hub with wheel nuts.
14A040C
(2) After installing the caliper support to the knuckle, expand the piston, and then install the caliper body.
(3) Check brake drag torque as follows. @ Start engine and hold brake pedal down for 5 seconds. [Approx. 200 N (44 Ibs.)] @ Stop engine. @ Turn brake disc forward 10 times. @ Check brake drag torque with spring scale. If the difference between brake drag torque and hub torque exceeds the standard value, disassemble piston \\ and clean the piston. Check for corrosion or worn piston seal. l/i Standard value: 70 N (15.4 Ibs.) [4 Nm (3 ft.lbs.)l or less
14A033E
TSB Revision
SERVICE BRAKES - Front Disc Brake SASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY

<FWD>
35-75
M35LE-A
75 Nm 54 ftlbs.
Caliper assembly disassembly steps

1)* 1. Guide pin l 2. Lock pin 3. Bushing 4. Caliper support (pad. clip, shim) 5. Pin boot 6. Boot ring a* 7. Piston boot l * 8. Piston l * 9. Piston seal IO. Caliper body
Brake caliper kit
Pad assembly disassembly steps

I)+ I. Guide pin w 2. Lock pin 3. Bushing 4. Caliper support (pad, clip, shim) 1 I. Pad &wear indicator 12. Pad assembly 13. Outer shim 14. Clip
TSB Revision
35-76
Lubrication points
SERVICE BRAKES - Front Disc Brake
14KO69
ai
14A0541
Grease: Repair kit grease (orange)
14Y184
Brake fluid: Conforming to DOT3
14LO128
TSB Revision
SERVICE BRAKES - Front Disc Brake SERVICE POINTS OF DISASSEMBLY

7. REMOVAL OF PISTON BOOT / 8. PISTON
35-77
M35LFCB
When disassembling the front disc brakes, disassemble both sides (left and right) as a set. Send compressed air from the port to which brake hose is installed and remove the pistons and piston boots. Caution Send the air gradually, and using the handle of a plastic hammer etc., keep the protrusions of the two pistons even. If one of the two pistons is removed, the other one cannot be removed.
14AO553
9. REMOVAL OF PISTON SEAL (1) Remove piston seal with finger tip. Caution Do not damage the cylinder inner surface. (2) Clean piston surface and inher cylinder with trichloroethylene, alcohol or specified brake fluid. Specified brake fluid: Conforming to DOT3
14AO551
INSPECTION
l l l l
MOBLGCB
Check cylinder for wear, damage or rust. Check piston surface for wear, damage or rust. Check caliper body or sleeve for wear. Check pad for damage or adhesion of grease, check backing metal for damage.
PAD WEAR CHECK Measure thickness at the thinnest and worn area of the pad. Replace pad assembly, when pad thickness is less than the limit value. Standard value: 10.0 mm (.39 in.) Limit value: 2.0 mm (08 in.) Caution 1. Whenever the pad is to be replaced, replace the pads on both right and left wheels as a set. 2. If there is a large difference in thickness between the pads on the right and left wheels, check the sliding portions of the caliper.
14uoo7i
TSB Revision
SERVICE BRAKES - Front Disc Brake

ldenti fication

2. INSTALLATION OF LOCK PIN / 1. GUIDE PIN
M35LHCC
I
I
LJ
Install the guide pin and lock pin mating the head markings on the guide and lock pins with the identification markings on the caliper body.
~
i
1 TSB Revision
SERVICE BRAKES - Front Disc Brake IISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY <AWD>

MJSLE-8
V f
14FOO25
14FO117
Caution The piston seal contained in the seal and boot kit is coated with special grease. Do not wipe off the grease. Brake fluid: Conforming to DOT3
7 6 5
8 6 5 Brake caliper kit
Grease: Brake grease SAE 5310, NLGI No. 1
14FOQ24
St-ease: Repair kit grease (orange) Xsassembly steps
14FO118
Pad kit
Seal and boot kit
*I)
l *
*I) *I)
1. Clip 2. Pad pin 3. Cross spring 4. Pad assembly 5. Shim A 6. Shim B 7. Inner pad (with wear indicator) 8. Outer pad 9. Retaining nng 10. Piston boot 11. Piston 12. Piston seal 13. Washer 14. Caliper body
1 TSB Revision
14FOll9
14FO120
35-80
SERVICE BRAKES - Front Disc Brake SERVICE POINTS OF DISASSEMBLY

2. REMOVAL OF PAD PIN
Holding the cross spring with hand, remove the pad pin.
M35LFCC
4. REMOVAL OF PAD ASSEMBLY

Using a screwdriver, remove the pad assembly.
11. REMOVAL OF PISTONS

Install a wood block as shown and send compressed air through the port, to which brake hose is attached, to remove the pistons. At this time, make sure that the four pistons come out evenly.
Caution 1. Be careful not to get your fingers to be pinched. 2. Use care not to let the brake fluid splash.
14FOOl
12. REMOVAL OF PISTON SEAL

(1) Remove the piston seal.
Caution Do not damage the cylinder inner surface.

(2) Clean the piston surfaces and cylinder inner surfaces with trichloroethylene, alcohol, or the specified brake fluid.

14FOO4
INSPECTION
INSPECTION OF PAD WEAR
MJSLGCC
Measure the thickness of the pad at a point which wears most. Replace the pad assembly if the measurement is less than the limit.
Standard value: 10.0 mm (.39 in.) Limit: 2.0 mm (.08 in.) I/ Caution Whenever the pad is to be replaced, replace the pads on 14FOO2: the right and left wheels as a set. TSB Revision
SERVICE BRAKES - Rear Disc Brake
35-81
M35MA- -
REAR DISC BRAKE /

Flared brake line nuts 15 Nm 11 ft.lbs. (Refer to P.35-48.1 <FWD> 50-60Nm 36 - 43 ft.lbs. <AWD> 50-60Nm 36 - 43 ftlbs.
3 Removal steps
I. Brake hose ~4 2. Rear brake assembly 3. Brake disc
INSPECTION
INSPECTING THE BRAKE DISC
l l l
M35MDAC
Check disc for wear. (Refer to P.35-55.) Check disc for runout. (Refer to P.35-55.) Check disc for damage.
M35MCAG
2. INSTALLATION OF THE REAR BRAKE ASSEMBLY

Install the rear brake assembly using the same procedure as that for the front brake assembly. (Refer to P.35-74.)
TSB Revision
35-82
<AWD>

M35NA-
USASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY
44Nm 32 ft.lbs.
,18
14NOl58
Brake caliper kit
Caliper assembly disassembly steps

l l
* *
l *
4* a*
1. Lock pin 2. Guide pin 3. Bushing 4. Caliper support (pad, clip, shim) 5. Pin boot 9. Boot ring 10. Piston boot 11. Piston 12. Piston seal 13. Caliper body
Pad kit
Seal and boot kit
*+ 1. Lock pin l * 2. Guide pin 3. Bushing 4. Caliper support (pad, clip, shim) 14. Pad and wear indicator assembly 17. Pad assembly 18. Outer shim 19. Clip
TSB Revision
14N0160
SERVICE BRAKES - Rear Disc Brake :FWD>

" :a;* .* 4~. .*",/' +: w
27 Nm 20 ft.lbs.
-r
35-83
19
8Nm &&----6ft.lbs.
4
I ,
18
Illi
I 13
11 pi, dA,, :$ ;y, "?"L -
Brake caliper kit
44
4%
w403.57
Grease: Br3rt;ty SAE J310,
Caliper disassembly steps
*I) *I) *+
1. Lock pin 4. Caliper support (pad, clip, shim) 6. Sleeve 7. Lock pin boot 8. Guide pin boot 9. Boot ring 10. Piston boot 11. Piston 12. Piston seal 13. Caliper body
155
Pad kit
Seal and boot kit
1. Lock pin 4. Caliper support (pad, clip, shim) 14. Pad and wear indicator assembly 15. Inner shim B 16. Inner shim A 17. Pad assembly 18. Outer shim 19. Clip
TSB Revision
18
14N0156
Grease
14N015
35-84
Lubrication Points

<AWD>
4s
14N0121
14Y184
Grease: Repair kit grease (orange) t
Caution The piston seal contained in the seal and boot kit is coated with special grease. Do not wipe off the grease. Brake fluid: Conforming to DOT3
I-
14NO158
14N0121
<FWD>
14LO12,
14LO128
TSB Revision
SERVICE BRAKES - Rear Disc Brake SERVICE POINTS OF DISASSEMBLY

10. REMOVAL OF PISTON BOOT / 11. PISTON
35-85
M35NBAF
i id
Protect caliper body with cloth. Blow compressed air through brake hose to remove piston boot and piston.
Caution Blow compressed air gently.
12. REMOVAL OF PISTON SEAL

(I) Remove piston seal with finger tip.
Caution Do not damage the cylinder inner surface.

(2) Clean piston surface and inner cylinder with trichloroethylene, alcohol or specified brake fluid.

14N0131
INSPECTION
l l l l
M35NCAO
Check cylinder for wear, damage or rust. Check piston surface for wear, damage or rust. Check caliper body or sleeve for wear. Check pad for damage or adhesion of grease, check backing metal for damage. Check wear indicator for damage.
PAD WEAR CHECK

Measure the thickness at the thinnest worn area of the pad. Replace pad assembly when pad thickness is less than the limit value.
Standard value: 10.0 mm (39 in.) Limit: 2.0 mm (.08 in.) Caution 1. Whenever the pad is to be replaced, replace the pads on the right and left wheels as a set. 2. If there is a large difference in thickness between the pads on the right and left wheels, check the sliding portions of the caliper.

Identification mark G
M35NOAI
2. INSTALLATION OF GUIDE PIN / 1. LOCK PIN <AWD>

Install the guide pin and lock pin mating the head markings on the guide and lock pins with the identification markings on the caliper body.
ldent mark TSB
Revision
35-86
I SERVICE BRAKES - Hydraulic Unit (ABS)
HYDRAULIC UNIT (ABS)

M350A.A
Flared brake line nuts
/ 15 Nm llftlbs.
14FO33
Removal steps 4* 1. Brake tube connection
l l l l
4*
2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Harness connector connection Bracket bolt Hydraulic unit (with bracket) Hydraulic unit bolt Grounding wire connection
Removal of Splash Shield Draining of Brake Fluid Removal of Relay Box Removal of Air Duct
Installation steps
6. Grounding wire connection 5. Hydraulic unit bolt initial tightening 4. Hydraulic unit (with bracket) 3. Bracket bolt 2. Harness connector connection ** 1. Brake tube connection
19FO127
TSB Revision
SERVICE BRAKES - Hvdraulic Unit (ABS) SERVICE POINTS OF REMOVAL

1. REMOVAL OF BRAKE TUBES
35-87
M350BAB
Pull up the relay box with harness attached and inserting a hand under the relay box, remove the brake tubes using the flare nut wrench.
4. REMOVAL OF HYDRAULIC UNIT (HU)

Remove the hydraulic unit together with the bracket from the wheel house.
Caution 1. The HU is heavy. Use care when removing it. 2. The HU cannot be disassembled. Never loosen its nuts or bolts. 3. Do not drop or shock the HU. 4. Do not turn the HU upside down or lay it on its side.

6. CONNECTION OF GROUNDING WIRE
M350DAB
Connect the grounding wire at the point shown in the illustration.
14FOO8:
1. INSTALLATION OF BRAKE TUBE

Pull up the relay box with harness attached and inserting a hand under the relay box, install the brake tubes using flare nut wrench. Connect the tube and hose to the hydraulic unit correctly. (Refer to P.35-73.)
c
1 TSB Revision
3588
SERVICE BRAKES - Wheel Speed Sensor (ABS)
WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (ABS)

M350A-B L/ 1
<FWD>
14FOO78
LJ
a*
1. Front rotor (Refer to Group 42 - Fender.)
Front speed sensor removal steps
2. Clip *I) ++ 3. Front speed sensor w 4. Front speed sensor bracket *I) 5. Rear rotor
Rear speed sensor removal steps
l l
6. Clip a* l + 8. Rearspeedsensor
Installation of Splash Shield (Front Only) (Refer to Group 42 - Fender.) Inspection of A.B.S. (Refer to P.35-7.)
TSB Revision
SERVICE BRAKES - Wheel Speed Sensor (ABS)
35-89
<AWD>
12 Nm 9 ft.lbs.
2 3
12 Nm - 9 ft.lbs.
a*
I, Front rotor
Front speed sensor removal steps

l
a*
* I)*
2. Clip 3. Front speed sensor 5. Rear rotor
Pre-removal Operation l Removal of Splash Shield (Front Only) (Refer to Group 42 - Fender.) Post-installation Operation l Installation of Splash Shield (Front Only) (Refer to Group 42 - Fender.) l Inspection of A.B.S. (Refer to P.35-7.)
Rear speed sensor removal steps
+I) l
6. Clip 7. Cable band 8. Rear speed sensor 9. O-ring
14FOlOO
TSB Revision
SERVICE BRAKES - Wheel Speed Sensor (ABS) SERVICE POINTS OF REMOVAL

M35OBAC
1. REMOVAL OF FRONT ROTOR / 5. REMOVAL OF REAR ROTOR d Caution Do not damage rotor teeth and never drop the rotor. If the rotor has missing teeth or is deformed, accurate wheel speed detection cannot be expected and the system may fail to function normally. Use particular care in handling the front rotor of an AWD vehicle as it cannot be disassembled. 3. REMOVAL OF FRONT SPEED SENSOR / 8. REAR SPEED SENSOR Caution When removing the speed sensor from the knuckle, use care not to strike the tip of the pole piece against the rotor teeth or any other parts.
IFront
<FWD>
Rear
INSPECTION
INSPECTION OF SPEED SENSOR
MJSOCAC
(1) Check the tip of the speed sensor pole piece for deposits of metal or other foreign matter and clean the pole piece as necessary. Also check the pole piece for damage and replace if damaged.
Caution The speed sensor pole piece is magnetized by a built-in magnet inside the sensor, so it tends to attract metal. If the pole piece is damaged, accurate wheel speed detection may not be expected.
+ : Pole piece
14N016:
(2) Measure resistance between speed sensor terminals.
Standard value: <FWD> Front Rear <AWD>
1.4-2.2 kR 1.3-2.1 kR 0.8- 1.2 kfl
If the internal resistance of the speed sensor is out of specification, replace with a new one.
14NOlO:
SERVICE BRAKES - Wheel SDeed Sensor lABSI
35-91
(3) zue$ the speed sensor cable for open circuit and replace if NOTE Remove the cable clamp from the body and, while flexing the cable near the clamp, check for temporary open circuit. Also check connector connection and terminal insertion.
INSPECTION OF ROTOR
Check the rotor for missing or worn teeth and replace if faulty.
lARnlA6
M350DAC
8. INSTALLATION OF REAR SPEED SENSOR <FWD>

Insert a feeler gauge between the speed sensor pole piece and the rotor tooth surface and tighten the speed sensor to specified torque where the clearance is as specified all around.

NOTE The rear speed sensor pole piece-to-rotor tooth surface clearance is not adjustable in the case of AWD vehicles. In this case, measure the sensor mounting surface-to-rotor tooth surface clearance.
Standard value: 28.15 - 28.45 mm (1.11 - 1.12 in.) 4. INSTALLATION OF FRONT SPEED SENSOR BRACKET
NOTE (I) The right and left speed sensor brackets differ in shape. Install correctly referring to the identification symbols. FR: For front speed sensor R: For right wheel L: For left wheel (2) After installation of the speed sensor to the bracket, check that the letters FR are visible.
3. INSTALLATION OF FRONT SPEED SENSOR Caution Handle the speed sensor carefully so as not to strike the tip of the pole piece or the rotor teeth against any metal parts and damage them.
/ i
14N012
Insert a feeler gauge between the speed sensor pole piece and rotor tooth surface and tighten the speed sensor to specified torque where the clearance is as specified all around.
Standard value: 0.3 - 0.9 mm (.012 - .035
in.)
TSB
Revision
35-92
REMOVAL
SERVICE BRAKES - G Sensor (AWD - ABS)
G SENSOR (AWD - ABS)

INSTALLATION
M35OA-C
Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation Removal and installation of Front (Refer to Group 52A - Console Box.)
5Nm 4 ft.lbs. Removal steps 1. G sensor connector 2. G sensor 3. G sensor bracket

14FO115
INSPECTION
1. INSPECTION OF G SENSOR
M350CAD
(I) Lay the G sensor on a level surface and check for continuity between its terminals.
14A019)1
(2) Incline the G sensor toward the vehicle front gradually and check that continuity is lost at an angle of 30 or more.
14A0195
(3) Incline the G sensor toward the vehicle rear gradually and check that continuity is lost at an angle of 30 or more.
14A0196 I
TSB Revision
SERVICE BRAKES - Electronic Control Unit (ABS)
35-93
ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT (ABS)

M350A.D
14FOO79
Post-installation Operation l Installation of Quarter Trim l Installation of Rear Seatback (R) l Installation of Rear Seat Cushion l inspection of A.B.S. (Refer to P.35-7.)
Removal steps 4* 1, Control unit connector connection 2. Electronic control unit

1. REMOVAL OF CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR
M350BAD
Insert a screwdriver into the lock section as illustrated and

pull out the connector from below.
TSB Revision
36-1
PARKING BRAKES
CONTENTS
PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PARKING BRAKE LEVER AND PARKING BRAKE CABLE* .................................................... SERVICE ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES ........
Parking Brake Lever Stroke Check ................ Parking Brake Switch Check ............................
M36AA-.
8 5 4
4 4
SPECIAL TOOLS . .._.._............................................. SPECIFICATIONS ................................................

....................................
Lubricants ............................................................ Sealants and Adhesives .................................... Service Specifications ....................................
TROUBLESHOOTING
........................................
i
u I
36-2 SPECIFICATIONS
PARKING BRAKES - Specifications

M36CA- -
Items Parking brakes Type Brake lever type Cable arrangement Mechanical brake acting on rear wheels Lever type V-type Specifications i I
Items Standard value Parking brake lever stroke Brake lining thickness mm (in.) Brake drum I.D. mm (in.) Clearance between th;$;;d) sensor pole piece and the rotor tooth Limit Brake lining thickness mm (in.) Brake drum I.D. mm (in.) Specifications 3 - 5 notches 2.8 (.I 1)
168.0 (6.6) 0.2 - 0.7 LOO8 - .028)
M36cB-.
1 .o f.039) 169.0 (6.7)

M36CD- d
LUBRICANTS
items Rear brake shoe and backing plate contact surfaces Contact surface between shoe & lining assemblys strut and adjuster Contact surface between shoe & lining assembly and shoe-adjustment bolt and shoe-support piece Specified lubricant Brake grease SAE J310, NLGI No. 1

Items Shoe hold-down pin installation surface Specified sealant 3M ATD Part No. 8513 or equivalent
1 TSB Revision
PARKING BRAKES - Special Tools / Troubleshooting
36-3
SPECIAL TOOLS
I /
i/
Tool
Number MB990767-01
Name End yoke holder I
Use Removal of the rear axle shaft assembly 1
MB990241-01
Axle puller
MB99021 I-01
SL$p;;rmmer with
TROUBLESHOOTING
Symptom Probable cause Incomplete release of parking brake lndorrect parking brake adjustment Insufficient parking brake function Worn brake pad Excessive parking brake lever stroke Remedy Correct Adjust Replace
M36EAAL
Brake drag
Adjust the parking brake lever stroke or check the parking brake cable routing Replace Replace
Grease or oil on pad surface Parking brake cable sticking
1 TSB Revision
36-4
PARKING BRAKES - Service Adiustment Procedures

PARKING BRAKE LEVER STROKE CHECK
M36FEAK
1. Pull the parking brake lever with a force of approx. 200 N d (45 Ibs.), and count the number of notches.
Caution The 200 N (45 Ibs.) force of the parking brake lever must be strictly observed. Standard value: 3 - 5 notches
-
2.
If the parking brake lever stroke is not the standard value, adjust as described below. (1) Remove the cup holder and plug and loosen the adjustment nut to the cable end so that the cable becomes free. (2) Repeat depressing the brake pedal until the pedal stroke becomes stable. NOTE When the brake pedal is repeatedly depressed, shoe clearance is adjusted properly. (3) Disengage the drive shaft and companion flange. (4) Remove the adjusting hole plug. Using a screwdriver, turn the adjuster in the direction of the arrow (to expand the shoe) until brake is lightly applied [where the disc cannot be turned with both hands: approx. 2.7 Nm (23 in.lbs.)]. Then, turn the adjuster five notches in the direction opposite the arrow. (Reference: Shoe clearance on one side 0.19 mm d I.0075 in.])
Adjusting nut
(51 Turn the adjusting nut to obtain specified parking brake lever stroke. After the adjustment, check that there is no play between the adjusting nut and pin.
Caution Do not adjust parking brake lever stroke too tight, less than the standard value, or brake drag could result.
14u015: un' 14FOO3
(6) After the parking brake lever stroke has been adjusted, jack up the rear part of the vehicle. Loosen the parking brake and turn the rear wheel to check that the parking brake does not drag.
PARKING BRAKE SWITCH CHECK

1.
M36FDAG
Disconnect the connector of the parking brake switch, and connect an ohmmeter to the parking brake switch and the switch installation bolt. 2. The parking brake switch is good if there is continuity when the parking brake lever is pulled and there is no continuity when it is returned. ,(J
TSB Revision
PARKING BRAKES - Parking Brake Lever and Parking Brake Cable
36-5
M36WA-
: I
PARKING BRAKE LEVER AND PARKING BRAKE CABLE

/
r-remwal O p e r a t i o n l Removal of Front and Rear Console (Refer to GROUP 52A-Console Box.) Post-installation Operation l Parking Brake Lever Stroke Adjustment (Refer to P.36-4.) l Installation of Front and Rear Console (Refer to GROUP 52A-Console Box.)
14FOO67
14FOlOl
Parking brake lever removal steps 1. Cable adjuster 2. Parking brake stay 3. Bushing 4. Parking brake switch 5. Parking brake lever
1 TSB Revision
36-6
PARKING BRAKES - Parking Brake Lever and Parking Brake Cable
50-60 Nm 36 - 43 ft.lbs. <FWD >
I I I
16
<AWD>
\ d
I ~
14FOO70
Parking brake cable removal steDs .
1. Cable adjuster
l * l *
6. Rear speed sensor
(Refer to GROUP 35 -Speed Sensor.) 7. Rear brake assembly 8. Rear brake disc 9. Adjusting wheel spring 10. Shoe hold-down cup
11. Shoe hold-down pin ** 12. Adjuster l a 13. Shoe-to-anchor spring 14. Strut 15. Strut return spring 16. Shoe *-I PI. & lining assembly I /. Llrp 18. Parking cable protector 19. Parking brake cable
TSB Revision
PARKING BRAKES - Parking Brake Lever and Parking Brake Cable SERVICE POINTS OF REMOVAL
10. REMOVAL OF SHOE HOLD DOWN CUP
36-7
M36WBAE
Expand the shoe & lining assembly and remove the shoe hold down cup.
MJBWOAH
13. INSTALLATION OF SHOE TO ANCHOR SPRINGS

The shoe-to-anchor spring must be installed in the sequence shown in the illustration.
Caution
Each shoe-to-anchor spring has a unique spring load and the spring a is painted to prevent erroneous installation.
14N000'
NOTE The figure shows the left wheel; for the right wheel, the position in symmetrical.
12. INSTALLATION OF ADJUSTER

Install the adjuster facing the left adjusting bolt to the vehicle front and right adjusting bolt to the vehicle rear.
TSB Revision
36-8 PARKING BRAKE
PARKING BRAKES - Parking Brake

M36YA- -

<FWD>
71
Adjustment (Refer to P.36.4.)
83 Nm 60ft.lbS.
50-60Nm 36 - 43 ft.lbs. /
{emoval steps
C* l
1. Rear speed sensor 3. Rear brake assembly 4. Rear brake disc 5. Hubcap l + 6. Flange nut 7. Washer 8. Rear hub unit beanng 12. Adjusting wheel spring 13. Shoe hold-down cup 14. Shoe hold-down spring 15. Shoe hold-down pin l * 16. Adjuster l a 17. Shoe-to-anchor spring 18. Strut 19. Strut return spring 20. Shoe & lining assembly 21. Clip 23. Backing plate *
d,
I I
14NOOll
50-60 Nm 36 - 43 ftlbs.
23 20 *
14N0004 L
14LOO15
c:&
14D650
Grease: Brake grease SAE J310, NLGI No. 1
TSB Revision
PARKING BRAKES - Parking Brake

4WD>
36-9
83 Nm 60 ft.lbs. 190 Nm 137 ft.lbs. 50-60 Nm 36 -43 ft.lbs.
12 Nm 9 ft.lbs.
Removal steps +* I. Rear speed sensor
2. O-ring 3. Rear brake assembly 4. Rear brake disc l * l * 9. Self-locking nut 10. Companion flange l * 11. Rear axle shaft 12. Adjusting wheel spring 13. Shoe hold-down CUD 14. Shoe hold-down spnng 15. Shoe hold-down pin I)* 16. Adjuster I)* 17. Shoe-to-anchor spring 18. Strut 19. Strut return spring 20. Shoe & lining assembly 21. Clip 22. Brake tube connection 23. Backing plate
50-60Nm 36 - 43 ft.lbs.
23
Grease: Brake grease SAE 5310, NLGI No. 1
1 TSB Revision
36-10
PARKING BRAKES - Parking Brake SERVICE POINTS OF REMOVAL

M36YBAL
I. REMOVAL OF REAR SPEED SENSOR Caution When removing the speed sensor from the knuckle, use i&J care not to hit the pole piece at its tip against the rotor teeth or other parts.

With the special tool, secure the axle shaft and remove the companion flange self-locking nut.
11 FO038
II. REMOVAL OF AXLE SHAFT ASSEMBLY

With the special tool, remove the axle shaft from the trailing arm.
INSPECTION
M36YCAI
CHECKING FOR UNUSUAL WEAR OF THE BRAKE LINING AND BRAKE DRUM
(1) Measure the thickness of the brake lining at several places.
Standard value: 2.8 mm (.I10 in.) Limit: 1.0 mm (.039 in.) Caution Replace the brake shoes if the thickness of the brake lining is the limit value or less.
14LOOOi
(2) Measure the brake disc drum inner diameter at two or more places.
Standard value: 168.0 mm (6.6 in.) Limit: 169.0 mm (6.7 in.) Caution Replace if the brake disc drum inner diameter is the limit value or more.
14NOli
TSB Revision
PARKING BRAKES - Parking Brake SERVICE POINTS OF INSTALLATION
36-11
M36YDAP
17. INSTALLATION OF SHOE-TO-ANCHOR SPRING

The shoe-to-anchor spring must be installed in the sequence shown in the illustration.
Caution Each shoe-to-anchor spring has a unique spring load and the spring a is painted to prevent erroneous installation.
14N000'
NOTE The figure shows the left wheel; for the right wheel, the position in symmetrical.
16. INSTALLATION OF ADJUSTER

Install the adjuster facing the left adjusting bolt to the vehicle front and right adjusting bolt to the vehicle rear.
9. INSTALLATION OF SELF-LOCKING NUT

With the special tool, secure the axle shaft and tighten the companion flange self-locking nut.
6. INSTALLATION OF FLANGE NUT <FWD>

After tightening the flange nut, align with the spindles indentation and crimp.
Spindle I_,
14NOO05
1. INSTALLATION OF REAR SPEED SENSOR <FWD>

Insert a filler gauge between the speed sensor pole piece and rotor teeth and tighten the speed sensor at such position where the gap is as specified below over the entire circumference.
TSB Revision
37A-1
STEERING
CONTENTS
POWER STEERING GEAR BOX* .................... 17 32
28
M37AA-A
Steering Wheel Return to Center Check ................................................................ Tie Rod End Ball Joint Startinq Torque Check . . . . . . . . .._.............................. r . . . . . . . . ..I . . . . . . Tie Rod End Ball Joint Variation Check (Shaft direction) ................................................ V-Belt Tension Check ........................................
8 6 5 8
POWER STEERING HOSES ................................ POWER STEERING OIL PUMP . .._....................
SERVICE ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES ........

Bleeding Fluid Level Check / b ............................................
5
9 9
............................................................ 10

General Specifications Sealant and Adhesives Service Specifications .................................... .................................... .................................... Lubricants ............................................................
3 2
2 3 3 2
Fluid Replacement ............................................ Oil Pressure Switch Check
............................ 12 8 5 6 5
Oil Pump Pressure Test .................................... 1 1 Stationary Steering Effort Check .................... Steering Angle Check ........................................ Steering Wheel Centering ................................ Steering Wheel Free Play Check ....................
STEERING WHEEL AND SHAFT* ....................
13
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) (1) A Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), which uses a driver-side air bag, has been installed in the 3000GT. (2) The SRS includes the following components: impact sensors, SRS diagnosis unit: SRS warning light, air bag module, clock spring, interconnecting wiring. Other SRS-related components (that may have to be removed/installed in connection with SRS service or maintenance) are indicated in the table of contents by an asterisk (*). WARNING! (I) Improper service or maintenance of any component of the SRS, or any SRS-related component, can lead to personal injury or death to service personnel (from inadvertent firing of the air bag) or to the driver (from rendering the SRS inoperative). (2) Service or maintenance of any SRS component or SRS-related component must be performed only at an authorized MITSUBISHI dealer. (3) MITSUBISHI dealer personnel must thoroughly review this manual, and especially its GROUP 52B Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), before beginning any service or maintenance of any component of the SRS or any SRS-related component.
37A-2 SPECIFICATIONS
Items Steering wheel mm (in.) Steering wheel O.D. Gear box Steering gear type Power steering oil pump Oil pump type Displacement cm3/rev. (cu.in./rev.) Relief set pressure MPa (psi)
STEERING - Specifications
M37CA-A
Specifications 390 (15.4) Rack and pinion Vane type 9.6 t.59) 8(1,138)
M37CB-A
LA,
!ms Specifications
andard value 11 (43) Steering wheel free play (with engine stopped) mm (in.) Steering angle 3345 2 2 Inner wheel 2821 Outer wheel Tie rod end ball joint starting torque Nm (in.lbs.) 0.5 - 3.0 (4 - 26) FWD l.O-3.0(9-26) AWD Stationary steering effort N (Ibs.) 35 (8) or less V-belt deflection mm (in.) 9 - 1 1 (.35-.43) When belt tension is inspected or readjusted 7 - 8.5 (.28 - .33) When new belt is installed MPa (psi) Oil pump pressure 7.5-8.2 (1,067- 1,166) Pressure gauge valve closed 0.8-1.0(114-142) Pressure gauge valve opened Oil pressure switch operating pressure MPa (psi) 1.5-2.0(213-284) Oil pressure switch contacts closed (continuity) Oil pressure switch contacts opened (no continuity) 0.7-1.2(100-171) 0.6-1.3(5-11) Total pinion torque Nm (in.lbs.) 8-18(1.8-4.0) Tie-rod joint swing resistance N (Ibs.) 2-5(17-43) Tie-rod joint swing torque Nm (in.lbs.) nit mm (in.) 30 (1.2) Steering wheel free play (when hydraulic operation) Variation of tie rod end ball joint shaft direction mm (in.) 1.5 i.059) Oil pump pressure 1.5 (213) Pressure gauge valve opened MPa ( p s i ) Space between vane and rotor mm (in.) 0.06 (0024)
LJ
Ll
1 TSB Revision
STEERING - Specifications / Special Tools LUBRICANTS
37A-3
M37CD-A
Items Power steering gear box Bearing O-ring Oil seal Special tool (MB991 213) Pinion and valve assembly seal ring part Bellows Power steering oil pump Power steering fluid Flow control valve Friction surface of rotor, vane, cam ring and pump cover O-ring
Specified lubricant MITSUBISHI PLUS ATF/Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON or DEXRON II MlTSUBlSHl.PLUS ATF/Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON or DEXRON II MITSUBISHI PLUS ATF/Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON or DEXRON II MITSUBISHI PLUSATFIAutomatic transmission fluid DEXRON or DEXRON II MITSUBISHI PLUS ATF/Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON or DEXRON II Silicone grease MITSUBISHI mission fluid MITSUBISHI mission fluid MITSUBISHI mission fluid MITSUBISHI mission fluid PLUS ATF/Automatic transDEXRON or DEXRON II PLUS ATF/Automatic transDEXRON or DEXRON II PLUS ATF/Automatic transDEXRON or DEXRON II PLUS ATF/Automatic transDEXRON or DEXRON II
Quantity As required As required As required As required As required As required 0.9 liter (.95 qt.) As required As required As required
/ b
SEALANT AND ADHESIVES

Items Power steering gear box End plug screw Power steering rack support cover screw Dust cover Specified sealant and adhesive 3M ART Part No. 8663 or equivalent 3M ART Part No. 8663 or equivalent 3M ART Part No. 8663 or equivalent
M37CE-A
SPECIAL TOOLS
Tool Number MB991 113-01 Name I Steering linkage puller Disconnection of tie-rod end Use
M37DA.A
MB991 006-01
Preload socket
Measurement of the total pinion torque
TSB Revision
37A-4
STEERING - Special Tools
easuremen
MB990993-01
Power steering oil pressure gauge adapter (pump side)
Measurement of oil pressure
MB991 204
Removal of rack housing needle bearing
TSB Revision
STEERING 2 Service Adjustment Procedures
37A-5

STEERING WHEEL FREE PLAY CHECK
M37FABI
1. With engine running (hydraulic operation), set front wheels straight ahead. 2. Measure the play on steering wheel circumference before wheels start to move when slightly moving steering wheel in both directions.
Limit: 30 mm (1.2 in.)

13FOOOi
3: When the play exceeds the limit, check for play on steering shaft connection and steering linkage. Correct or replace. 4. If the free play still exceeds the limit value set steering wheel straight ahead with engine stopped. Load 5 N (1 lb.) towards steering wheel circumference and check play.
Standard values (steering wheel play with engine stopped): 11 mm (.43 in.)
If the play exceeds the standard value, remove steering gear box and check total pinion torque.
13FOOO3
STEERING ANGLE CHECK

Standard values: Inner wheel Outer wheel
M37FDBK
1. Set front wheels on turning radius gauge and measure steering angle.
3345 k 2 2821
2. When not within the standard value, it is probably a toe problem. Adjust toe (refer to GROUP 33A - Service Adjustment Procedures) and recheck.
TIE ROD END BALL JOINT VARIATION CHECK M37FPAF (SHAFT DIRECTION)
1. Hold the ball joint with pliers. 2. Set a caliper gauge as illustrated and measure the displacement with the ball stud compressed.
Limit: 1.5 mm (.059 in.)

3. If the measured displacement exceeds the limit, replace the tie-rod end.
Caution Even if the variation is within the limit, check ball joint starting torque.
TSB Revision
STEERING - Service Adjustment Procedures TIE ROD END. BALL JOINT STARTING TORQUE CHECK M37FEBF
1. Disconnect tie rod and knuckle with special tool. ~ LJ
2. Move ball joint stud several times and install nut on stud. Measure ball joint starting torque.
Standard value: <FWD> <AWD>
0.5 - 3.0 Nm (4 - 26 in.lbs.1 1.0 - 3.0 Nm (9 - 26 in.lbs.)
13G005E
3. When starting torque exceeds the standard value, replace tie rod end. 4. When the starting torque is under the standard value, check for play or ratcheting in ball joint. If none of these, it is still serviceable.
STEERING WHEEL CENTERING

SIMPLIFIED STEERING WHEEL CENTERING Determining Steering Wheels Off Center
Tape or mark on steering wheel hub
M37FNAI
13FOO4:
Dotted lines show wheel at desired positlon Tape or mark on steenng wheel rim
Lines at straight- -ahead position Ruler 7
1. For the road test, take along chalk or tape and a ruler. 2. Drive straight ahead on an uncambered level surface. 3. When the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead, mark the steering wheel hub and column cover with a chalk or tape line. 4. Stop the vehicle and line up the marks on the hub and column cover. 5. Place a tape strip 01 mark on the steering wheel rim. 6. Hold a ruler next to the rim as shown in the illustration, and then steer the steering wheel until it is in the desired centered position. 7. Record the distance the strip or mark on the rim has moved. This is how far the steering wheel is off center. If it is more than 16 mm (518 in.) off center, it can be centered by indexing it ten degrees towards the center.
tance off-center
13FOO4;
Indexing Steering Wheel to Center It

The steering wheel shaft has 36 splines, allowing the steering wheel to be indexed in ten-degree increments. 1. Remove the steering wheel. 2. Without disturbing the position of the steering wheel shaft, re-install the wheel as near on-center as possible.
36 splines
13W589
13FOO45
TSB Revision
STEERING - Service Adjustment Procedures

PRECISION STEERING WHEEL CENTERING
37A-7
In general, the tie rods are adjusted to steer the front wheels in the same direction that the steering wheel is off center. If the steering wheel is off center to the left, center it by adjusting the tie rods to make the front wheels steer toward the left, and vice versa.
13FOO46
Steering wheel off center left
13K11l
1. Mark the tie rods and tie rod ends with chalk before loosening the lock nuts. 2. Hold the tie rod with a wrench and loosen the lock nut. 3. Hold the tie rod end with a wrench and turn the tie rod the desired number of turns. i
For 2 or 6 mm (.25 in.) at the steering wheel rim l/5 turn of tie rods
4. Tighten the lock nut to specified torque, taking care not to turn the tie rod.
13FOO48
Off center to left
Off center to left
Off center to right
Off center to right
Turn both tie rods in the same direction.

13R055E
TSB Revision
37A-8
STEERING - Service Adjustment Procedures STATIONARY STEERING EFFORT CHECK

M37FFAM
1. With the vehicle stopped on a flat, paved surface, turn the steering wheel to the straight ahead position. 2. Start the engine and set it to 1,000 + 100 rpm. d
Caution After checking the engine speed, there must be a return to the standard idling speed.
3. Attach a spring balance to the outer circumference of the steering wheel and measure the steering force required to turn the steering wheel from the straight ahead position to the left and right (within a range of 1.5 turns). Also check to be sure that there is no significant fluctuation of the required steering force.
13FOOO3
Standard value: Steering effort Fluctuation allowance
35 N (8 Ibs.) 6 N (1.3 Ibs.)
or less or less
STEERING WHEEL RETURN TO CENTER CHECK

M37FGACi
13FOOOl
To make this test, conduct a road test and check as follows. 1. Make both gradual and,sudden turns and check the steering feeling to be sure that there is no difference in the steering force required and the wheel return between left and right turns. 2. At a speed of 35 km/h (22 mph), turn the steering wheel 90. and release the steering wheel after 1 or 2 seconds. If the steering wheel then returns 70 or more, the return can be judged to the satisfactory. NOTE There will be a momentary feeling of heaviness when the wheel is turned quickly, but this is not abnormal. (This is because the oil pump discharge amount is especially apt to be insufficient during idling.)
V-BELT TENSION CHECK
M37FHAJ
Check to be sure that the belt is not damaged and that the V-belt is correctly attached to the groove of the pulley. NOTE If there is abnormal noise or belt slippage, check the belt tension and check for unusual wear or abrasion, or damage, of the pulley contact surface, and for scars or scratches on the pulley.
TSB Revision

1.
37A-9
Press in V-belt at the illustrated position with about 100 N (22 Ibs.) and measure deflection.
Standard value:
When belt tension is inspected or readjusted When new belt is installed 2.
13N002E
/ 9 - 11 mm (.35 - .43 in.) I 7 - 8.5 m m (.28 - .33 in.)
If the deflection is out of the standard values, adjust the belt tension using the following procedure. (1) Loosen the tension pulleys securing bolts A and B. (2) Mount the extension bar on the tension pulley. (3) While increasing the tension of the V-belt with the extension bar, retighten the tension pulleys securing bolts A and B in the order mentioned.
FLUID LEVEL CHECK

FluId f[uctuatlon
M37FlAJ
While engine running
While engme stopped
13uo13:
Park the vehicle on a flat, level surface, start the engine, and then turn the steering wheel several times to raise the temperature of the fluid to approximately 50 - 60C (122 140F). 2. With the engine running, turn the wheel all the way to the left and right several times. 3. Check the fluid in the oil reservoir for foaming or milkiness. Check the difference of the fluid level when the engine is stopped, and while it is running. If the fluid level changes considerably, air bleeding should be done.
1.
FLUID REPLACEMENT
M37FJAL
Return ho Vinyl hose
1. Raise the front wheels on a jack, and then support them with rigid racks. 2. Disconnect the return hose connection. 3. Connect a vinyl hose to the return hose, and drain the oil into a container. 4. Disconnect the high-tension cable, and then while operating the starting motor intermittently, turn the steering wheel all the way to the left and right several times to drain all of the fluid.
13AO142
Caution Be careful not to position the high-tension cable near the carburetor or the delivery pipe.
5. 6. Connect the return hoses securely, and then secure it with the clip. Fill the oil reservoir with the specified fluid up to the lower position of the filter, and then bleed the air.
L:
1 TSB Revision
Specified fluid: MITSUBISHI PLUS ATF/Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON or DEXRON II
37A-10
STEERING - Service Adjustment Procedures BLEEDING

M37FKAl
1. Jack up the front wheels and support them by using a floor stand. 2. Manually turn the oil pump pulley a few times. 3. Turn the steering wheel all the way to the left and to the right several times. 4. Disconnect the high-tension cable, and then, while operating the starting motor intermittently, turn the steering wheel all the way to the left and right several times (for 15 to 20 seconds).
LJ I I
Caution 1. During air bleeding, replenish the fluid supply so that the level never falls below the lower position of the filter. 2. If air bleeding is done while engine is running, the air will be broken up and absorbed into the fluid; be sure to do the bleeding only while cranking.
5. Connect the ignition cable, and then start the engine (idling). 6. Turn the steering wheel to the left and right until there are no air bubbles in the oil reservoir. 7. Confirm that the fluid is not milky, and that the level is up to the specified position on the level gauge. 8. Confirm that there is very little change in the fluid level when the steering wheel is turned left and right.
~ I
LJ ,
Fluid level change: wlthln 5 mm 1.2 in.)
9.
I
Check whether or not the change in the fluid level is within 5 mm (.2 in.) when the engine is stopped and when it is running.
While engine running
While engine stopped
13UOl
Caution 1. If the change of the fluid level is 5 mm I.2 in.) or more, the air has not been completely bled from the system, and thus must be bled completely. 2. If the fluid level rises suddenly after the engine is stopped, the air has not been completely bled. 3. If air bleeding is not complete, there will be abnormal noises from the pump and the flowcontrol valve, and this condition could cause a lessening of the life of the pump, etc.
TSB Revision

Shut-off valve Pressure gauge (FuW dose) Temperature
37A-11
M37FLAl-l
OIL PUMP PRESSURE TEST

CHECKING THE OIL PUMP RELIEF PRESSURE
1.
Disconnect the pressure hose from the oil pump, and then connect the special tools. 2. Bleed the air, and then turn the steering wheel several times while the vehicle is not moving so that the temperature of the fluid rises to approximately 50 - 60C (122 140F). 3. Start the engine and idle it at 1,000 + 100 rpm. 4. Fully close the shut-off valve of the pressure gauge and measure the oil pump relief pressure to confirm that it is within the standard value range.
Standard value: 7.5 - 8.2 MPa (1,067 - 1,166 psi) Caution Pressure gauge shut off valve must not remain closed for more than 10 seconds.
5. If it is not within the standard value, overhaul the oil pump. 6. Remove the special tools, and then tighten the pressure hose to the specified torque. 7. Bleed the system.
Shut-off valve
CHECKING THE PRESSURE UNDER NO-LOAD CONDITIONS

Disconnect the pressure hose from the oil pump, and then connect the special tool. 2. Bleed the air, and then turn the steering wheel several times while the vehicle is not moving so that the temperature of the fluid rises to approximately 50 - 60C (122 140F). 3. Start the engine and idle it at 1,000 + 100 rpm. 4. Check whether or not the hydraulic pressure is the standard value when no-load conditions are created by fully opening the shut-off valve of the pressure gauge. 1.
Standard value: 0.8 - 1.0 MPa (114 - 142 psi) Limit: 1.5 MPa (213 psi)
If it is not within the standard value, the probable cause is a malfunction of the oil line or steering gear box, so check these parts and repair as necessary. 6. Remove the special tools, and then tighten the pressure hose to the specified torque. 7. Bleed the system. 5.
TSB Revision
37A-12
Temperature
(MB990662-01)
Pressure gauge

Shut-off valve (Fully open) I
CHECKING THE STEERING GEAR RETENTION HYDRAULIC PRESSURE

1. 2. Disconnect the pressure hose from the oil pump, and then / connect the special tools. d Bleed the air, and then turn the steering wheel several times while the vehicle is not moving so that the temperature of the fluid rises to approximately 50 - 60C (122 140F). Start the engine and idle it at 1,000 & 100 rpm. Fully close and fully open the shut-off valve of the pressure gauge. Turn the steering wheel all the way to the left or right; then check whether or not the retention hydraulic pressure is the standard value.
3. 4. 5.
Standard value: 7.5 - 8.2 MPa (1,067 - 1,166 psi)

-01)
13AO146
6. When not within the standard value, overhaul the steering gear box. Remeasure fluid pressure. 7. Remove the special tools, and then tighten the pressure hose to the specified torque. 8. Bleed the system.
Adapter (MB990993-01) Temperature \
Pressure gauge (MB990662-01)
Shut-off valve /
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH CHECK

1. 2.
M37FUAC
3. 4. 5.
Disconnect the pressure hose from the oil pump, and then connect the special tools. Bleed the air, and then turn the steering wheel several times while the vehicle is not moving so that the temperature of the fluid rises to approximately 50 - 60C (122 d 140F). The engine should be idling. Disconnect the connector for the oil pressure switch, and place an ohmmeter in position. Gradually close the shut-off valve of the pressure gauge and increase the hydraulic pressure then check whether or not the hydraulic pressure that activates the switch is the standard value.
Standard value: 1.5 - 2.0 MPa (213 - 284 psi)

6.
-01)
Gradually open the shut-off valve and reduce the hydraulic pressure; then check whether the hydraulic pressure that deactivates the switch is the standard value.
Standard value: 0.7 - 1.2 MPa (100 - 171 psi)

7.
1310148
8.
Remove the special tools, and then tighten the pressure hose to the specified torque. Bleed the system.
TSB Revision
STEERING - Steering Wheel and Shaft
37A-13
M37GA-
STEERING WHEEL AND SHAFT

L
Post-installation Operation l Checking of Steering Wheel Positlon with Wheels Straight Ahead
\ 40 Nm 29 ftlbs.
5Nm 4 ft.lbs.
\
7 12 Nn 8ft.lb
13FOO35
Removal steps Mb 1. Air bag module
*I) l a
/ L
2. 3. 4. 5.
Steering wheel Lower column cover Upper column cover Knee protector (Refer to GROUP 52A- Instrument Panel.) 6. Lap cooler duct and foot shower duct
TSB Revision
;: E;feTn switch assembly <Automatic transaxle vehicles> 9. Key interlock cable (Refer to GROUP 23 IO. Slide lever I Transaxle Control.) 11. Steering column assembly 12. Column support assembly
37A-14
STEERING - Steering Wheel and Shaft SERVICE POINTS OF REMOVAL

1. REMOVAL OF AIR BAG MODULE
(1) Remove the air bag module mounting nut using a socket wrench from the back side. (2) To remove the clock spring connector (squib connector) from the air bag module, force the lock outward and pry it with a standard screwdriver, as shown in the illustration at the left, to make sure that no undue force is exerted to the connector when it is removed.
M37GBAV
Caution Wait at least 30 seconds after disconnecting the battery cable before doing any further work. The SRS system is designed to retain enough voltage to deploy the air bag for a short time even after the battery has been disconnected, so serious injury may result from unintended air bag deployment if work is done on the SRS system immediately after the battery cable is disconnected.
(3) The removed air bag module should be stored in a clean, dry place with the pad cover face up.
1 I I I I : dl I I I 1 I I I ~
2. REMOVAL OF STEERING WHEEL

Remove the steering wheel by using a steering wheel puller.
Caution Do not hammer on the steering wheel to remove it; doing so may damage the collapsible mechanism.

2. INSTALLATION OF STEERING WHEEL
M37GDAR
Line up the NEUTRAL mark of the clock spring with the mating mark before installing the steering wheel.
13R0654
Caution If the clock springs mating mark is not properly aligned, the steering wheel may not be completely rotational during a turn, or the flat cable within the clock spring may be severed, obstructing normal operation of the SRS and possibly leading to serious injury to the vehicles driver.
d!
TSB Revision
STEERING - Steering Wheel and Shaft DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY

M37GE-
Disassembly steps
1. Boot 2. Cover assembly I)* 3. Bearing 4. Joint assembly *+ 5. Special bolts l * l a 6. Steering lock bracket +* I)* 7. Steering lock cylinder 8. Steering column assembly
13A0170
M37GFAS
6. REMOVAL OF STEERING LOCK BRACKET / 7. STEERING LOCK CYLINDER

If it is necessary to remove the steering lock cylinder, use a hacksaw to cut the special bolts at the steering lock bracket side.
Steering lock cylinder
13FOO51
TSB Revision
37A-16
STEERING - Steering Wheel and Shaft INSPECTION

l l l l
M37GGAK
the the the the
steering shaft for play and round movement. joints for play, damage, or rough movement. joint bearing for wear and damage. dust shield for damage.
M37GHBE
7. INSTALLATION OF STEERING LOCK CYLINDER / 6. STEERING LOCK BRACKET / 5. SPECIAL BOLT

(1) When installing the steering lock cylinder and steering lock bracket to the column tube, temporarily install the steering lock in alignment with the column boss.
(2) After checking that the lock works properly, tighten the special bolts until the head twists off.
13E;O6
The steering lock bracket and bolts must be replaced with new ones when the steering lock cylinder is installed.
Caution
13FOO5
3. INSTALLATION OF BEARING
(1) Fill the inside of the bearing with multipurpose grease. (2) Install the bearings to the shaft on the joint assembly. (3) Wrap vinyl tape approximately one and one-half times around the concave circumferences of the bearings, and then press fit the bearings into the cover assembly.
inyl tape
13NOOl;
TSB Revision
37A-17
M37PA- -
POWER STEERING GEAR BOX

/

Pre-removal ODeration l Draining of the Power Steering Fluid (Refer to P.37A-9.) l Removal of Front Exhaust Pipe (Refer to GROUP 15 - Exhaust Pipe 1 and Main Muffler.) l Removal of Transfer Assembly (Refer to GROUP 22 -Transfer.) 40 Nm 29 ftlbs. /
Post-installation Operation l Installation of Transfer Assembly (Refer to GROUP 22 -Transfer.) l Installation of Front Exhaust Pipe (Refer to GROUP 15 - Exhaust Pipe and Main Muffler.) l Supplying of the Power Steering Fluid (Refer to P.37A-9.) l Bleeding of the Power Steering Fluid Line (Refer to P.37A-IO.) l Checking of Steering Wheel Position with Wheels Straight Ahead l Adjustment of the Front Wheel Alignment (Refer to GROUP 33A-Service Adiustmeni t Procedures.)
60-70 Nm 43 - 51 ft.lbs. 35 Nm 25 ft.lbs.
60-70 Nm 43 - 51 ft.lbs.
i
50 Nm 36 ft.lb
15 Nm 11 ftlbs. 18 Nm
i/
Removlal steps 1. Joint assembly and gear box connecting bolt 2. Cotter pin 3. Tie-rod end and knuckle connecting nut 4. Left member 5. Right member 6. Stabilizer bar bracket 7. Connection of steering gear box with 4WS oil line 8. Clamp 9. Gear box assemblv *a 10. Mounting rubber
70 Nm 51 ftlbs.
13FOOE.5
TSB Revision
37A-18
STEERING - Power Steering Gear Box SERVICE POINTS OF REMOVAL

3. DISCONNECTION OF TIE-ROD END
Using the special tool, disconnect the tie rod from the , LJ knuckle.
M37PBAI
9. REMOVAL OF GEAR BOX ASSEMBLY

(1) Move the rack completely to the right and then remove the gear box from the crossmember. (2) While tilting the gear box downward, remove it to the left.
Caution When removing the gear box, pull it out carefully and slowly to avoid damaging the boots.
INSPECTION
GEAR BOX FOR TOTAL PINION TORQUE
M37PCAF
Using the special tools, rotate the pinion gear at the rate of one rotation in approximately 4 to 6 seconds to check the total pinion torque.
Standard value: 0.6 - 1.3 Nm (5 - 11 in.lbs.)

NOTE Measure the pinion torque through the whole stroke of the rack.
MB991 006-01 \l\
If the measured value is not within the standard range, first adjust the rack support cover, and then check the total pinion starting torque again. If the total pinion starting torque cannot be adjusted to within the standard range by adjusting the rack support cover, check the rack support cover, rack support spring, rack support and replace any parts necessary.
13R017
CHECK THE TIE ROD FOR SWING RESISTANCE

(1) Give 10 hard swings to the tie rod. (2) Measure the tie rod swing resistance with a spring balance
Standard value: 8 - 18 N (1.8 - 4.0 Ibs.) [2 - 5 Nm (17 - 43 in.lbs.)]

(3) If the measured value exceeds the standard value, replace tie rod assembly. NOTE Even if the measured value is below the standard value, the tie rod which swings smoothly without excessive play may be used.
M37PDAE
10. INSTALLATION OF MOUNTING RUBBER / 9. GEAR BOX ASSEMBLY

When installing the mounting rubber, align the projection of the mounting rubber with the indentation in the crossmember to install the gear box.
8 Mounting clamp
13R0077
TSB Revision
STEERING - Power Steering Gear Box SASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY

<Vehicles with 4WS>
1olIl IOlill
37A-19
M37PE..
Steering gear seal kit
<Vehicles without 4WS>

/
22 Nm 16 ft.lbs.
13FOO3l
1 Flarenut
15 Nm 11 ft.lbs
13NOO23
50-55Nm 36 - 40 ft.lbs. 90 Nm 65 ftlbs.
i 07 la29
Disassembly steps
I. Tie rod end locking nuts

+4 2. Tie rod ends
4* l l
+W I)+ 3. Dust shield 4. Bellows clips l * 5. Bellows bands 6. Bellows l * 7. Tab washers +4 8. Tie rods 9. Feed tubes 10. O-rings +4 Adjustment of total pinion torque Cc* *a II. End plug 12. Self-locking nut 13. Locking nut cc* 14. Rack support cover 15. Rack support spring 16. Rack support 17. Valve housing
TSB Revision
4 18. Oil seal a I 9. Pinion and valve assembly I)* 20. Seal rings 4* 21. Ball bearing 4* 22. Oil seal *I) l + 23. Circlip 24. Rack stopper l + 25. Rack bushing +e l + 26. Rack I)+ 27. O-ring 4I) I)4 28. Oil seal 29. Seal rings 30. O-ring *I) l + 31. Ball bearing ** l + 32. Needle roller bearing 4* *4 33. Oil seal l l * 34. Back-up washer 35. Rack housing
37A-20
.UBRICATION AND SEALING POINTS
Automatic transmission fluid
Fluid: MITSUBISHI PLUS ATF/ Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON or DEXRON II Sealant: 1 3M ART, Part No. 8663 or equivalent
13N0022
hid: MITSUBISHI PLUS ATF/ Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON or DEXRON II

13G0070
LI-
Grease: Silicone grease
13N0019
Fluid: MITSUBISHI PLUS ATF/ Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON or DEXRON II
l.?POO,,
13Y564
1360186
Sealant: 3M ART, Part No. 8663 or equivalent
Fluid: MITSUBISHI PLUS ATF/ Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON or DEXRON II
13FOO30
TSB Revision
STEERING - Power Steering Gear Box SERVICE POINTS OF DISASSEMBLY

3. REMOVAL OF DUST SHIELD
37A-21
M37PFAN
Remove the dust shield from the tie rod end.
5. REMOVAL OF BELLOWS BANDS

Using a screwdriver or similar tool, loosen and then remove the boot retaining band. I
7. REMOVAL OF TAB WASHER

Unstake the tab washer which fixes the tie rod and rack with a chisel.
11. REMOVAL OF END PLUG

Disconnect end plug caulking and remove end plug.
'13K588
14. REMOVAL OF RACK SUPPORT COVER

Using the special tool, remove the rack support cover from the gear box. I
TSB Revision
37A-22

18. REMOVAL OF OIL SEAL
Using a plastic hammer, gently tap the pinion to remove it.
I
13A0284
I 21. REMOVAL OF BALL BEARING / 22. OIL SEAL

Using a socket, remove the oil seal and the ball bearing from the valve housing simultaneously.
Socket
I I I
13A0285
23. REMOVAL OF CIRCLIP

Rack stopper
I I I I
(1) Turn the rack stopper clockwise until the end of the circlip comes out of the slot in the rack housing. (2) Turn the rack stopper anticlockwise to remove the circlip.
:,i; 1 I 26. REMOVAL OF RACK

Pull out the rack slowly. At this time also take out the rack stopper and the rack bushing simultaneously.
~ I
\kdY
I
13R0541
28. REMOVAL OF OIL SEAL

Partially bend oil seal and remove from rack bushing.
I I
Caution Do not damage oil seal press fitting surface.

I ijl
TSB Revision

31. REMOVAL OF BALL BEARING
37A-23
Use a brass bar to remove the ball bearing from the gear housing.
13R054f
32. REMOVAL OF NEEDLE ROLLER BEARING

Use the special tool to remove the needle roller bearing from the rack housing.
Caution Do not open special tool excessively to prevent damaging housing interior.
_ Needle bearing
33. REMOVAL OF OIL SEAL / 34. BACK-UP WASHER

Use a piece of pipe or similar tool to remove the back-up washer and oil seal from the gear housing.
Caution Be careful not to damage the inner surface of the rack cylinder of the gear housing.
INSPECTION
RACK
l l
M37PGAH
Check the rack tooth surfaces for damage or wear. Check the oil seal contact surfaces for uneven wear. 0 Check the rack for bends. Check the pinion gear tooth surfaces for damage or wear. Check for worn or defective seal ring. Check for roughness or abnormal noise during bearing operation. Check the bearing for play. Check the needle roller bearings for roller slip-off. Check the damage. Check the Check the Check the cylinder inner surface of the rack housing for boots for damage, cracking or deterioration. rack support for uneven wear or dents. rack bushing for uneven wear or damage.
PINION AND VALVE ASSEMBLY

l l
BEARING
l l l
OTHIERS
l l
l l
TSB Revision
37A-24
STEERING - Power Steering Gear Box SERVICE POINTS OF REASSEMBLY

Guide
M37PHAW
34. INSTALLATION OF BACK-UP WASHER / 33. OIL SEAL

(1) Apply a coating of the specified fluid to the outside of the oil seal. LJ

Oil seal Back-up washer
13A0181
(2) Using a tool, press the back-up washer and the oil seal into the rack housing to the specified position (where the upper surface of the press-in guide coincides with the stepped part of the press-in tool).
32. INSTALLATION OF NEEDLE ROLLER BEARING

(1) Apply specified fluid to housing, bearing and oil seal press fitting surface.
Needle roller bearmg
I I I

(2) Press fit needle roller bearing.
I I
13R0547
Caution Press fit straight as valve housing is aluminium. 31. INSTALLATION OF BALL BEARING
Press fit ball bearing.
28. INSTALLATION OF OIL SEAL / 27. O-RING
&
Vent hole
13K583(
MB990927-01
(1) Apply a coating of the specified fluid to the outside of the oil seal and O-ring.

(2) Press fit oil seal until it touches rack bush end.
13R0378
26. INSTALLATION OF RACK

(1) Apply a coating of multipurpose grease to the rack teeth face.
Caution Do not close the vent hole in the rack with grease.
TSB Revision

(2) Cover rack serrations with special tool. (3) Apply specified fluid on special tool.
37A-25
Specified fluid: MITSUBISHI PLUS ATFIAutomatic transmission fluid DEXRON or DEXRON II

(4) Match oil seal center with rack to prevent retainer spring from slipping and slowly insert rack from power cylinder side.
Back-up washer
1360147
25. INSTALLATION OF RACK BUSHING

Wrap the rack end with vinyl tape, apply a coating of the specified fluid, and then install the rack bushing and rack stopper.
Vinyl tape Rack bushing
Specified fluid: MITSUBISHI PLUS ATF/Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON or DEXRON II Caution Do not allow oil seal retainer spring to slip out. 23. INSTALLATION OF CIRCLIP
Insert circlip to rack stopper hole through cylinder hole. Turn rack stopper clockwise and insert circlip firmly.
Caution Insert circlip to rack stopper hole while turning rack stopper clockwise.
1360146
13K687
Seal rings
20. INSTALLATION OF SEAL RINGS / 19. PINION AND VALVE ASSEMBLY

(I) When installing seal rings, press firmly into valve groove. Apply specified fluid.
MB99131 7
NOTE Because the seal rings expand at the time of installation, use the special tool to compress the seal rings so that they are well seated.
Tapered side
13A031 3
I TSB Revision
37A-26
STEERING - Power Steerina Gear Box

(2) Apply multipurpose grease to pinion gear and housing bearing. (3) Wrap vinyl tape around the serrated part so that the oil seal wont be damaged when the pinion and valve ii assembly is installed to the valve housing. (4) Mount the pinion and valve assembly to the valve 1 housing.
I 1
Apply grease

Using a tool, press the oil seal into the valve housing.
Tool
I I I I 1 I
Caution In order to eliminate a seal malfunction at the valve housing alignment surface, the upper surface of the oil seal should project outward approximately 1 mm (.040 in.) from the housing edge surface.
Approx. 1 mm (Approx. .040 in.)
l13POO76
11. INSTALLATION OF END PLUG

End plug End plug
(1) Apply the semi-drying sealant to the threaded part of the end plug.
Specified sealant: 3M ART Part No. 8663 or equivalent

(2) Secure the threaded portion of the end plug at two places by using a punch.
Sealant
13K130
I yl ( I
r=
13K132
. ADJUSTMENT OF TOTAL PINION TORQUE

(1) Position rack at its center. With special tool, tighten rack support cover to 15 Nm (11 ft.lbs.1. (2) In neutral position, rotate pinion shaft clockwise one turn/4 - 6 seconds with special tool. Return rack support cover 30 - 60 and adjust torque to the standard value.
1 I 1 I
Standard value: 0.6 - 1.3 Nm (5 - 11 in.lbs.)
I MB991 006-01
Caution 1. When adjusting, set the standard value at its highest value. 2. Assure no ratcheting or catching when operating rack towards the shaft direction.
NOTE When it cannot be adjusted within the specified return angle, check rack support cover components or replace.
I I
(3) After adjusting, lock rack support cover with lock nut. i/
TSB Revision

8. INSTALLATION OF TIE ROD
3/A-Z/
After installing tie rod to rack, fold tab washer end (2 locations) to tie rod notch.
13A0175
Lip
MB990776-01
3. INSTALLATION OF DUST SHIELD

(1) Pack dust shield interior and lip with multipurpose grease. (2) Apply semi-drying sealant to dust shield.
Specified sealant: 3M ART Part No. 8663 or equivalent

(3) Using the special tool, press dust shield to tie rod end.
Sealant
I3Y564 13AO259
2. INSTALLATION OF TIE ROD END

Screw in tie rod end to have its right and left length as illustrated. Lock with lock nut.
<FWD> <AWD>
190.6 - 192.6 mm (7:504 - 7.583 in.) 193.6 - 195.6 mm (7.622 - 7.701 in.)
13R007: 3
TSB
Revision
37A-28
STEERING - Power Steering Oil Pump

M37RA-.
POWER STEERING OIL PUMP

Pre-removal Operation l Draintng the Power Steenng Flurd
22 Nm 16 ft.lbs.
Post-installation Operation l Supplying of the Power Steering Fluid l Adjusting V-belt Tension (Refer to P.37A-8.) l Bleeding the Power Steering Fluid Line (Refer to P.37A-10.) l Checking of the Oil Pump Pressure (Refer to P.37A-11.)
Removal steps
31 ft.lbs.
1. V-belt 2. Suction hose ** 3. Pressure hose 4. O-ring 5. Pressure switch connector 6. Oil pump 7. Oil pump bracket 8. Tensioner pulley
Ij
13N0029
43 Nm 31 fklbs.
INSPECTION
l l
M37RCAC
Check the V-belt for cracks. Check the pulley assembly for uneven rotation.

3. INSTALLATION OF PRESSURE HOSE
M37ROAL
Connect the pressure hose so that its slit part contacts the oil pumps guide bracket.
TSB Revision
STEERING - Power Steering Oil Pump DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY
37A-29
MSRE- -
13N0030
Oil pump seal kit :iuid: VllTSlJBlSHI PLUS ATF/Automatic transnission fluid DEXRON or DEXRON II
1 Oil pump cartridge kit
20 Nm 14 ft.lbs.
8N
6 ft.lbs.
13N0031
25-30 Nm 18 - 22 ft.lbs. Disassembly steps
Pump cover O-ring *a 3. Vanes 4. Rotor l a 5. Cam ring l a 6. Side plate *a 7. O-ring 8. Connector ** 9. O-ring 10. Flow control 11. Flow control 12. Terminal assembly l * 13. O-ring l * 14. Spring
:I
15. Plunger Piston rod Snap ring Terminal Washer Insulator O-ring Plug Clip Suction connector O-ring Oil pump body and Pulley assembly
Caution Do not disassemble the flow control valve.
TSB Revision
37A-30
STEERING - Power Steering Oil Pump INSPECTION

l l l l l
M37RGAM
Check the flow control spring for wear. Check the shaft of the pulley for play and round movement. Check the groove of rotor vane for stepped wear. Check the contact surface of cam ring and vanes for stepped wear. Check the vanes for breakage.
CHECK OF GAP BETWEEN VANE AND ROTOR GROOVE

Install vane to rotor groove as illustrated. Measure the gap between vane and rotor groove with thickness gauge.
Limit: 0.06 mm (.0024 in.)
I 1 I I
13R0433
Connector
Side plate

25. 21. 13. 9. 7. INSTALLATION OF O-RINGS
Apply specified fluid on O-rings to install. No. I.D. x Width 1 1 x 1 . 9 (.433 x ,075) (.512 x ,075) 13x1.9 17.8 x 2.4 (.701 x ,094) (.531 x .059) 13.5x1.5 3.8 x 1.9 (. 150 x ,075) 16.8 x 2.4 i.661 x ,094)
M37RHBI
mm (in.)
6
13N0059
13K752
Suction connector mounting portion of oil pump body
Terminal assembly
1 2 3 4 5 6
13K753
13NOOSi
14. INSTALLATION OF SPRING

Fit the spring to the oil pump body with the larger-diameter end at the terminal assembly side.
13FOO50
TSB Revision
STEERING - Power Steering Oil Pump

6. INSTALLATION OF SIDE PLATE
37A-31
Line up the dowel pin hole of the side plate with the dowel pin of the pump body when installing the side plate.
Dowel pin
131025i
5. INSTALLATION OF CAM RING

Install the cam ring with the punch mark facing the side plate.
3. INSTALLATION OF VANES
Direct round edge to the cam nng
Install the vanes on the rotor, paying close attention to the installation direction.
1 TSB Revision
37A-32
STEERING - P ower Steering Hoses

M37TA. _
POWER STEERING HOSES

Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation l Draining, Supplying, and Bleeding of I the Power Steerina Fluid (Refer to P.37A-9,iO.) <Vehicles with 4WS> 12 Nm 8 ftlbs. 5Nm 4 ftlbs.
<Vehicles without 4WS> 35 Nm 12 Nm 25 ft.lbs. 8 ftlbs. 2
8 ft.lbs.
22 Nm ad/ 16 ft.lbs.
12 Nm
24 Nm 17 f-tlbs
12/Nm 8 ftlbs.
11 klbs.
Removal steps I. Return hose 2. Suction hose 3. Return hose l a 4. Pressure hose 5. O-ring
6. 7. 8. 9. IO.
Cooler tube Pressure tube Return tube O-ring Oil reservoir

4. INSTALLATION OF PRESSURE HOSE
M3TTDAG
(1) Connect the pressure hose so that its slit part contacts
the oil pumps guide bracket.
(2) When the pressure hose is installed, align the white line on the pressure hose with the white line on the pressure tube so that together they form a straight line.
White line
13po14: 3
TSB Revision
37B-1
li 4-WHEEL STEERING SYSTEM (4WS)

CONTENTS
CONTROL VALVE ................................................ POWER CYLINDER REAR OIL LINE ............................................ 9 6 10 11 4
5 4 5 5
MWAA-0

.................................... ....................................
2 2
2 2 2
....................................................
General Specifications Service Specifications
:. ........... Lubricants ...............................................
REAR OIL PUMP .................................................... SERVICE ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES . . . . . .

Ball Joint Rotation Starting Torque Check ....
TROUBLESHOOTING
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _._._
LJ
Bleeding
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _______._ ................................................
Function Check
Rear Oil Pump Discharge Flow Volume Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._...........................
37B-2
4-WHEEL STEERING SYSTEM (4WS) -
Specifications / Special Tools
SPECIFICATIONS
Items Power steering gear box Type Oil pump Type cm/rev. (cu.in./rev.) Displacement MPa (psi) Relief set pressure Rear oil pump Type cm/rev. (cu.in./rev.) Displacement Relief set pressure MPa (psi) Power cylinder Type Stroke mm (in.) Rack and pinion Vane type 9.6 (0.59) 8 (1,138) Vane type 3.3 (0.20) 4 (569) Hydraulic double action type 20 i.78) [one side 10 (.39)1
M37CEB M37CA-B
Specifications
Items Standard value Rear oil pump displacement [at speedometer reading of liter (qts.) 31 mph (50 km/h) for 30 seconds] Nm (in.lbs.) Power cylinder ball joint rotation starting torque Power cylinder tie rod swing torque N (Ibs.) [Nm (in.lbs.)] N (Ibs.) Power cylinder slide resistance Specifications Approx. 1 .O (1.06) 0.5 (4) or less 9 - 55 (2 - 12) IO.5 - 3.0 (4 - 26)l 67 (15) or less
LUBRICANTS
, I
M37CD.B I
Items Power steering fluid Dust cover
Specified lubricant MITSUBISHI PLUS ATFiAutomatic Transmission fluid DEXRON or DEXRON II Silicone grease
Quantity 1.45 liter (1.53 qts.) As required
SPECIAL TOOLS
M37DA-6
MB990993-01
Power steering oil pressure gauge
Measurement of fluid flow volume
TSB Revision
4-WHEEL STEERING SYSTEM (4WS) - Troubleshooting
37B-3
M37EMK
TROUBLESHOOTING
Before inspecting, check the following items: Ensure that the suspension has not been modified l Tire and wheel size, specifications, air pressure, balance and amount of wear l Steering wheel type l Wheel alignment
l l
@
l l
Oil pump drive belt tension Power steering fluid level, and air in the system Engine Idle soeed and even idle Oil leakage
Malfunction symptom 4WS does not operate
Malfunctioning system Power cylinder
Inspection item Tie rod swing torque Power cylinder slide resistance
Rear oil pump Control valve Poor steering feeling Feeling of friction in steering Poor steering return Steering wheel efforts excessive Steering gears and linkage
Flow volume check Rack cracks or deformation
Control valve Power cylinder Oil line Oil reservoir
Oil leakage from control valve jornt Oil leakage from piston rod Pressure hose breakage Oil reservoir deformation or oil leakage Stuck control valve spool Stuck power cylinder Relief valve remains open Excessive power cylinder friction Looseness in power cylinder tie rod ball jo.int Ball joint dust cover cracks -
Rear wheels cannot be steered Poor rear wheels return Hydraulic pressure for rear wheel is constantly high Long rear wheel steering delay Poor steering response Poor steering return Poor rear wheel steering response Poor rear wheel steering range Poor steerability (extreme tire wear)
Control valve Power cylinder Rear oil pump Power cylinder
Control valve Power cylinder Rear oil pump Power cylinder
Oil leakage from control valve spool Oil leakage from power cylinder Extreme oil pump internal wear Tie rod length improperly adjusted after toe-in adjustment
[ TSB Revision
37B4

M37FKAH
BLEEDING
(1) Bleed air from power steering system (Refer to GROUP 37A - Service Adjustment Procedures.) (2) Lift up the vehicle. (3) Start the engine and let it idle.
,LJ
(4) Loosen the bleeder screw on the left side of the control valve and set the special tool to the bleeder screw. (5) Turn the steering wheel all the way to the left, immediately returning it half way back. At this time confirm that air is discharged with the fluid. (6) Repeat step (5) two or three times, then check to ensure that all air has been bled from the system. (7) Repeat steps (4) through (6) for the right side bleeder sc,rew, turning the steering wheel to the right this time. 13FOO13
(8) Loosen the power cylinder bleeder screw and set the special tool to the bleeder screw.
Caution Loosen the bleeder screw about 30 to 45 degrees, and secure it with the special tool (rotation prevention metal fixtures) so as not to be loosened more.
(9) Start the engine, running the vehicle at an indicated speed of about 70-80 km/h (43-50 mph) to circulate the fluid.
I/l1
Caution When replenishing the fluid, take special care as all four wheels will be rotating.
(lO)Maintain an indicated speed of about 30-40 km/h (19-25 mph), turning the steering wheel all the way to both left and right. When the wheel is steered all the way in either direction, pressure will rise and air will circulate inside the tube (special tool). Check to ensure that this air is discharged into the oil reservoir. (1 l)Repeat step (10) several times until that all air in the system has been bled.
Fluid level difference within 5 mm (.20 in.)
(12)Ensure that the difference in the fluid levels when the engine is running and when it is stopped are within 5 mm (.20 in.). If the difference exceeds 5 mm (.20 in.), there is still air in the system and it must be bled again.
While engine IS running
While engine is stopped 13lJO13~ TSB Revision
Caution If air has not been completely bled from the system, the pump will make a humming sound or an unusual noise ,, will come from the flow control valve; this also d contributes to shortened pump life.
37B-5
M37FWAA
FUNCTION CHECK _
(1) Raise the vehicle so that all four wheels may turn freely. (2) Start the engine, running the vehicle at an indicated speed of about 80 km/h (50 mph). (3) Turn the steering wheel all the way to left and right and turn it swiftly, checking to ensure that the rear wheels steer to the same directions as the front wheels.
Rubber hose
REAR OIL PUMP DISCHARGE FLOW VOLUME M37FLBA CHECK

(1) Disconnect the pressure hose from the rear oil pump and install the special tool with a rubber hose. (2) Place the other end of the rubber hose in a container which permits measurement of flow rate (2-liter graduated cylinder).
13FOOl
(3) Start the engine. Increase speed slowly, then hold the indicated speed of 50 km/h (31 mph), measuring discharge flow volume for 30 seconds.
Caution While performing this work, continuously add fluid into the oil reservoir. Standard value: Approximately 1.0 liter (1.06 qts.)
Graduated cylinder
13FOOll
(4) If the discharge flow volume is extremely high or low, the rear oil pump should be replaced.
BALL JOINT ROTATION STARTING TORQUE CHECK M37FECA

(1) Holding the power cylinder tie rod with a spanner, disconnect the tie rod and trailing arm.
(2) After swinging the ball joint stud several times, install the stud nut, then measure the ball joint rotation starting torque with the special tool.
Standard value: 0.5 Nm (4 in.lbs.) or less

(3) If the rotation starting torque exceeds the standard value, replace the tie rod end. (4) If the rotation starting torque is less than the standard value, check that the ball joint is not loose and operates smoothly. If not, it may be reused.
TSB Revision
37B-6
4-WHEEL STEERING SYSTEM (4WS) - Power Cylinder

M37S&~
POWER CYLINDER
Cleaning of Pipings with Steam
l l
Installation of Main Muffler Assembly
Removal of Main Muffler Assembly (Referto GROUP 15- Exhaust Pipe and Muffler.)
Refilling and Bleeding of Power Steering System (Refer to GROUP 37A-Service Adjustment Procedures.) l Bleeding of 4WS System (Refer to P.37B-4.) l Checking of 4WS System for Operation (Refer to P.37B-5.) 0 Checking of Wheel Alignment (Refer to GROUP 34 -Service Adiustment 1 Procedures.)
Ilo-130Nm
\
78 Nm 56 ft.lbs.
l;O- 130 Nm 80 - 94 ft.lbs. f @, i%,s. 78 Nm IIO-130Nm 56 ft.lbs. 80 - 94 ft.lbs. yf ,30Nm 80 -94 ft.lbs. ,
Removal steps 1. Rear shock absorber lower mounting bolt 2. Crossmember bracket a* 3. Crossmember mounting nut (on differential side) 4. Pressure tube (RL) 5. O-ring 6. Pressure tube (RR) 7. O-ring 8. Oil line clamp bolt 4* 9. Tie rod end nut l * 10. Power cylinder installation bolt l * 11. Power cylinder Fluid line flared nut 15 Nm 11 ft.lbs.
14FO38
TSB Revision
4-WHEEL STEERING SYSTEM (4WS) - Power Cylinder SERVICE POINTS OF REMOVAL
378-7
M37SBM
3. REMOVAL OF CROSSMEMBER MOUNTING NUT

(1) Before removing the self-locking nuts, support the differential case with a transaxle jack. (2) Remove the self-locking nuts.
12AOlOE
9. REMOVAL OF TIE ROD END NUT

Secure the power cylinder on the tie rod side with a spanner and remove the power cylinder mounting nut.
INSPECTION I
lZAO2;91
M37SCM
TIR ROD SWING TORQUE INSPECTION

(1) Swing the tie rod ten times hard. (2) Point the tie rod end down, then attach a spring balance as shown in the illustration to measure swing resistance (swing torque).
Standard value: 9 - 55 N (2 - 12 Ibs.) [0.5 - 3 Nm (4 - 26 in.lbs.)l

(3) If the swing resistance exceeds the standard value, replace the tie rod. (4) If the swing resistance is less than the standard value, the ball joint may be reused as long as it is not loose and operates smoothly.
3A009
POWER CYLINDER SLIDE RESISTANCE CHECK

(1) Place the piston in a neutral position. (2) Wrap a wire around the tie rod end, then measure slide resistance with a spring balance as shown in the illustration.
Wire
Standard value: 67 N (15 Ibs.) or less

(3) If the slide resistance exceeds the standard value, replace, the power cylinder. (4) If the slide resistance is less than the standard value, the power cylinder may be reused as long as it is not loose and slides smoothly.
M37SDP9
11. INSTALLATION OF POWER CYLINDER / 10. POWER CYLINDER INSTALLATION BOLTS

(1) Secure the power cylinder to the crossmember. (2) Move the power cylinder piston rod over its full stroke to determine its neutral position. (3) Align tie rod ends and the installation holes at trailing a r m .
TSB Revision
37B-8
4-WHEEL STEERING SYSTEM (4WS) - Power Cylinder

(4) When the tie rod ends and the installation holes at the trailing arm do not meet, loosen the tie rod end securing nut, then adjust the length. The dust cover fastener clip should be removed for this. (5) The difference between the lengths of the left and right Lj tie rods should be less than 1 mm ( ,039 in.). NOTE The threads of the tie rod ends may be used as a guide for this.
M37SE. -
:. ;. y:. .: 5; : . & 11.

Grease: Silicone grease Disassembly steps
13G0070
**
l
1. Nut 2. Tie rod end assembly 3. Clip 4. Wire 5. Dust cover 6. Bleeder caps 7. Bleeder screws 8. Cylinder assembly
13A0128

5. INSTALLATION OF DUST COVER
M37SHAA
Apply the specified grease to the place indicated in the illustration, then install the dust cover to the cylinder assembly.
Specified grease: Silicone grease
13G0070
2. INSTALLATION OF TIE ROD END ASSEMBLY

Temporarily attach the tie rod end assembly to the cylinder assembly at the place of dimension as illustrated. NOTE To adjust the assembly dimensions of the tie rod end assembly, remove the dust cover clip and rotate the rod.
Rod
13A025
TSB Revision
IQ-WHEEL STEERING SYSTEM (4WS) - Control Valve
37B-9
M37UA- -
CONTROL VALVE
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION L 1 Pre-removal Operation l Cleaning of Pipings with Steam l Dratning of Power Steering Fluid (Refer to GROUP 37A - Service Adjustment Procedures.) l Removal of Rear Suspension Assembly (Refer to GROUP 34- Rear Suspension Assembly.)
Post-installation Operation l Installation of Rear Suspension Assembly (Refer to GROUP 34 - Rear Suspension Assembly.) l Refillrng and Bleedrng of Power Steering System (Refer to GROUP 37A-Service Adjustment Procedures.) l Bleeding of 4WS System (Refer to P.37B-4.) l Checking of 4WS System for Operation (Refer to P.37B-5.)
15 Nm 11 ft.lbs. . R
12 Nm 9 ftlbs. \
35 Nm 25 ft.lbs. 30 \
24 Nm 17 ft.lbs. ,
9ft Ihc
12 Nm
El5
I .I
-i
El7
35 Nm 25 ftlbs.
13FOO25
Removal steps
1. Pressure hose 2. Pressure tube 3. O-ring 4. Pressure tube (RR) 5. O-ring 6. Pressure tube (RL) 7. O-ring 8. Pressure tube (FL. FR) 9. O-ring 10. Return pipe 11. O-ring 12. Control valve
cd
TSB Revision
37B-10
$-WHEEL STEERING SYSTEM (4WS) - Rear Oil Line

M37YFv
REAR OIL LINE

35 Nm 25 ftlbs. \
Removal steps Return hose Suction hose Protector Pipe assembly to pressure tube connection 5. Pipe assembly 6. Suction hose 7. Rubber hose 8. Feed pipe assembly 9. Return pipe assembly 10. Pressure tube assembly to pipe assembly connection 11. Suction hose 12. Reserve tank 1. 2. 3. 4.
12 Nm 9 ftlbs.
13FOO24
Cleaning of Pipings with Steam
Post-installation Operation l Refilling and Bleeding of Power Steering System (Refer to GROUP 37A-Service Adjustment Procedures.) l Bleeding of 4WS System (Refer to P.37B-4.) l Checking of 4WS System for Operation (Refer to P.37B-5.)
INSPECTION
l l
M37YCAn
Check tubes and pipes for cracking, damage or corrosion. Check hoses for cracking, damage, leakage or fluid seepage. Check flare nuts for damage.
TSB Revision
4-WHEEL STEERING SYSTEM (4WS) - Rear Oil Pump
37B-11
M3?MA- -
REAR OIL PUMP

l
Draining of Power Steering Fluid (Refer to GROUP 37A- Service Adjustment Removal of Main Muffler Assembly (Refer to GROUP 15 - Exhaust Pipe and Muffler.)
Post-installation Operation l Installation of Main Muffler Assembly (Refer to GROUP 15 - Exhaust Pipe and Muffler.) l Refilling and Bleeding of Power Steering System (Refer to GROUP 37A- Service Adjustment Procedures.) l Bleeding of 4WS System (Refer to P.37B-4.) l Checking of 4WS System for Operation (Refer to P.37B-5.)
IIO-130Nm
80 - 94 ft.lbs.
80 - 94 ft.lbs.
Removal steps
13FOO23
4* a*
1. Rear shock absorber lower mounting bolt 2. Crossmember bracket 3. Crossmember mounting nut 4. ~rry~~,ff~h;t~J side) 5. Suction hose 6. Rear-wheel oil pump
7. O-ring NOTE Do not disassemble the rear-wheel oil pump.
M37MBAA
2. REMOVAL OF CROSSMEMBER BRACKET / 3. CROSSMEMBER MOUNTING NUT (ON DIFFERENTIAL SIDE)

(1) Support the differential case with the transmission jack, then remove the crossmember bracket and crossmember mounting nut (on the differential side). (2) Slightly lower the crossmember.
12AOlOS3
TSB Revision
,C, -
42-1
BODY
CONTENTS
CENTRAL DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM CENTER PILLAR GLASS ........................................................ ................................ DOOR ASSEMBLY .................................................................... DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR ........................................ DOOR HANDLE AND LATCH ................................................ DOOR TRIM AND WATERPROOF FILM ............................ DRIP LINE WEATHERSTRIP .................................................... ENGINE HOOD ........................................................................ FENDER* .................................................................................... FUEL TANK FILLER DOOR .................................................... LIFTGATE .................................................................................... LIFTGATE GLASS ........... . ........................................................ LOOSE PANEL ........................................................................ POWER WINDOW .................................................................... QUARTER WINDOW GLASS ................................................ 32 55 40 42 54 41 65 18 23 22 20 37 24 43 33
M42AA-
SERVICE ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES ............................ Door Adjustment ................................................................ Door inside Handle Play Check ............................................ Door Window Glass Adjustment ........................................ Floor Pan inspection ............................................................ Fuel Filler Door Adjustment ................................................ Hood Adjustment ................................................................ Liftgate Adjustment ............................................................ SPECIAL TOOLS ........................................................................ SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................... General Specifications ........................................................ Sealants and Adhesives ........................................................ Service Specifications ........................................................ TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................................ WINDOW GLASS .................................................................... WINDSHIELD ............................................................................
13 14 16 14 17 14 13 13 4 2 2 3 3 5 25 28
42-2 SPECIFICATIONS
Items Hood Type Door Construction Regulator system Locking system Liftgate Type Glass installation method Windshield glass Quarter window glass Liftgate window glass mm (in.) Glass thickness Windshield glass Liftgate window glass Door glass Quarter window glass Power window motor Type Revolutions under no load rpm Revolutions under load vm At 1 Nm (.72 ft.lbs.1 At 2 Nm (1.45 ft.lbs.) Bound current A Direction of rotation Power window main switch Type Rated load current A Lock switch Power window switch Power window sub switch Type Rated load current A
BODY - SDecifications
M42CA.
Specifications Rear hinged, front opening type (with gas damper) Front-hinged, sashless Wire type Pin-fork type Inner-hinged, with gas damper Adhesive type Adhesive type Adhesive type 5.3 (.21) 3.5 (.I41 5.0 f.20) 3.5 (.14) Permanent magnet type (Built-in circuit breaker) 75 or more 45-75 50-80 34 or less Clockwise and counter-clockwise Automatic reset type 10 10 Automatic reset type 10 20 Max. 0.2 0.2 or less
Power window relay Maximum contact current A Rated coil current A Voltage drop between terminals V (At 12 V and the rated load current)
TSB Revision
BODY - SDecifications
Item Specifications 8-16 IO 0.2 or less 0.2 or less 2.5 - 4.5 9-15 5-30
Door lock power relay Range of voltage used V Rated load current (at 13.5 VI A Rated coil current A Voltage drop between terminals V Door lock actuator Bound current (at 12 V) A Operating voltage range V *Tripping time (at 12 VI second
NOTE *: Tripping time is the time consumed until current reaches 0.5 A after power connection
Items Play of door inside handle mm (in.) A (play) B (OPEN) Standard value 7 (.28) 46 f 9 (1.81 31 .35) 69 (2.72) Front pillar Roof Quarter pillar Adjustment of glass longitudinal inclination L Front pillar Roof Quarter pillar 11.7 I!I 1 .O (.46 ?I .04) 11.8 f 1 .O (.46 + ,041 20.5 f 1 .O (.80 f .04) 7.0 i 1 .O (.28 -+ ,041 7.7 If: 1 .o i.30 5 ,041 12.0 f 1 .o I.47 + .04)
M42CB. -
)
Items Front fender panel Splash shield Waterproof film Windshield Quarter window glass Liftgate glass .
C (FULL) Adjustment of glass inclination amount
M42CE- -
1 Specified sealant 3M ATD Part No. 8625 or equivalent
Remarks Ribbon sealer
3M SUPER FAST URETHAN 8609 or equivalent and 3M SUPER FAST URETHAN PRIMER 8608 or equivalent
TSB Revision
42-4 SPECIAL TOOLS
BODY - SDecial Tools

M42DA- -
remover
TSB Revision
BODY - Troubleshooting
42-5
M42EABE
TROUBLESHOOTING
HOOD, LIFTGATE, GLASS AND DOORS

Symptom Hood/ Liftgate Improper closure Difficult locking and unlocking Uneven body clearance Uneven height Probable cause Striker and latch not properly aligned Striker and latch not properly aligned Incorrectly installed hood or liftgate Incorrect hood bumper height Remedy Adjust the alignment Adjust the alignment Adjust the installation of hood, deck lid or liftgate Adjust the hood bumper, deck lid bumper or liftgate bumper height Fill sealant Correct Adjust position Adjust position Fill sealant Correct Adjust position Correct or replace Replace Remove foreign objects Correct or replace Adjust Adjust position Correct or replace Apply grease Adjust position Adjust fit of door Repair or replace Adjust Adjust Adjust Repair or replace
Window Water leak through windshield glass Water leak through door window glass Water leak through liftgate window Doors Door window malfunction Water leak through door edge Water leak from door center Door hard to open Door does not open or close completely
Defective seal Defective body flange Incorrect window glass installation Gap at upper window glass Defective seal Defective body flange Incorrect window glass installation Damaged or faulty regulator Cracked or faulty weatherstrip Drain hole clogged Inadequate waterproof film contact or damage Incorrect latch or striker adjustment Incorrect door installation Defective door check strap Door check strap and hinge required grease
Uneven gap between body yoi$ noise around
Incorrect door installation Weatherstrip not holding firmly Improperly installed weatherstrip or setting of weatherstrip Improperly closed door Improperly fit door Improper clearance between door glass and door weatherstrip holder Deformed door
1 TSB Revision
42-6
HOW TO LOCATE WIND NOISES
(I) Attach cloth tape to every place which might conceivably be the source of wind noise, such as panel seams, projections, moulding seams, glass and body seams, etc. di (2) Then make a road test in order to determine that the places not covered by tape are not sources of wind noise.
18FOlOO
(3) Then remove the strips of tape one by one, making a road test after each is removed, until a wind noise source is discovered.
18FOlOO
(4) When such a place is found, cover it again and continue with the procedure so as to determine if there are any other noise sources. (5) If no others are found, the last remaining tape is the only source.
18FOO99
(6) Cut the remaining piece of tape into smaller pieces, attach it again as it was before, and then remove the pieces one by one in the same way so as to narrow down the source.
18FOO98
(7) Check to confirm that wind noise occurs when the last remaining tape is removed, and that noise does not occur when it is re-attached. (8) When the source(s) of the wind noise is finally located, attach butyl tape, body sealer or similar material to obstruct this source as much as possible.
18FOO97
TSB Revision
BODY - Troubleshooting POWER WINDOW

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
42-7
M42EBEG
FUSIBLE LINK@
i
m I
R-B ,,5 ,\ -__-----------"4 v 3

,: F7
% POWER WINDOWS .RELAY C-07X
,,l /\
m I 2 _____ ---._-- .----------------------------- ----. ---
E-34
I I I I I / I I I I I I I , I I I I I I I I I I I I I
------
POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH

1
(RH)
/ I/
L-
16 E-32
ETACS IJNIT
i
<X35-AC-RllOl-NY
(LH) ----v-POWER WINDOW MOTOR
(RH)
TSB Revision
42-8
SWITCH(IG1) POWER WINDOWS RELAY .p J,B , "C-68& ,i,p ii@i/
JUMPER CONNECTOR
r---- --.-- -_----_---_
11
,i*;i v _---___-_----___ ;i3 Xl
- - ___--__ . . . I 7 I
14%l 1oy2
j4
GND n
-4 ----;7x1
;g*2
L4,
A, c-34 __/\5 pEEL!E]
c!J t I
=
c d
>
E-21 mr
SELF-DIAGNOSIS CHECK C01'6NZCTOR
(RH) DooR TWITCH
(LH)
TSB Revision
OPERATION 0 When, with the ignition switch at the ON I/
position, a power-window (main or sub) switch (UP side or DOWN side) is pressed, current flows through sub-fusible link No. 8 and to the power-window motor, thus causing the door window glass to close or open. When the DOWN side of the power-window main switch at the drivers side is pressed all the way, it is locked at the pressed-in position, and the power-window motor operates until the door glass is fully opened. When the power-window lock switch is set to the LOCK (ON) position, the power-window motor will not operate if any switch (main or sub) other than at the drivers side is operated. A circuit breaker is provided in the powerwindow motor in order to prevent damage to the motor as a result of excessive current. For reference: Circuit breaker characteristics Motor operation is restricted at high temperatures [20 - 25C (68 - 77F)]. Current flow is cut by an initial current flow time of four to 40 seconds; reset occurs within 60 seconds if then left as is.I : The timer function of the ETACS permits the power-window relay to remain ON for 30 seconds after the ignition switch is switched OFF. If, during that period of time, the front door is opened, the power-window relay is switched OFF, and the power windows can no longer be operated.
42-9
1. All door windows cannot be opened or closed. l Check sub-fusible link No. 8. l Check the power-window relay. l Check the power-window main switch. 2. One of the door windows cannot be opened or closed. (1) Neither of the power-window switches (main or sub) operates. l Check the power-window main switch. l Check the power-window motor for the power window that does not operate. (2) Either the power-window main switch or sub switch does not operate. l Check the power-window switch for the power window that does not operate.
3. The one-touch down switch function only does not operate. l Replace the power-window main switch. 4. The power window operation by ETACS control after the ignition switch is switched OFF does not function. l Refer to P.42-43.
1 TSB Revision
42-10
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
M42EBFH I
CENTRAL DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM
DOOR LOCK POWER RELAY

J/V g:s .L.L
,m *Al >; g 4 I E
A %
\,3~
7=
Ei
20 19 15 18 17 ,---~~--~~-------.---_____I ,--,L-, LIZ= II
E-22If 2
E-13
35-AC-Rll02-NU TSB Revision
%l:VEHICLES WITHOUT POWER WINDOW X2:VEHICLES WITH POWER WINDOW

I
>d
I
42-11
L/
DOOR LOCK POWER RELAY

A
J/E
2 Ei
iI I I I I I I I I I I I L
____-----_-
ETACS UNIT
----------L *3
_I
4
*3
C-66
> 2 2
____ ----
-11
51 CONNECTOR _--____-
10X4
T ci
_ _ - - - - -I I
4 14 60s3 > CL
s d
-I
WITH [#&iLARM ;t;Z;iALARM I I

I3
c - 3 4 4-E 19 ~10~11~12~13[1
112~3~4~5(6~7
I-
ir-
N-I)
DOOR
(LH: TWITCH Z3:VEHICLES WITHOUT THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM s4:VEHICLES WITH THEFT-ALARM SYSTLM
TSB Revision
42-12
OPERATION
l
When the door lock switch is set to the LOCK side (or UNLOCK side), the LOCK side (or UNLOCK side) of the door lock relay is turned ON and the door actuators of alIsa doors operate. If the driver seat side door (or assistant seat side door) is opened and the driver seat side inside lock knob (or assistant seat side inside lock knob) is locked with the key inserted in the ignition switch, the ETACS unit grounds the unlock side circuit of the door lock relay to unlock all doors. This way, failure to remove the key is prevented. NOTE The door lock actuator contains a PTC thermister to prevent damage caused by overheating of the motor. If the central door lock is frequently used, the actuator may temporarily fail to operate. If it returns to normal in a few minutes, it is not defective.
1. One of the door lock actuators fails to operate.
l
Check the door actuator which fails to operate. For information concerning ETACS control, refer to P.42-55.
2. The ignition key reminder system does not function.

l
BODY - Service Adjustment Procedures
42-13

HOOD ADJUSTMENT
1.
M42FAA.L
Loosen the hood mounting bolts, and then adjust the hood by moving it so that the clearance is equal on all sides.
2. Turn the bumpers A and B, adjust the height of the hood.
3.
Loosen the hood latch mounting bolts, and move the hood latch to adjust the attachment between the hood latch and hood striker.
LIFTGATE ADJUSTMENT
1.
M42FCAF
Loosen the liftgate hinges mounting bolts, and then adjust the liftgate by moving it so that the clearance is equal on all sides.
, ii
18P058t
2. Turn the bumper to adjust the liftgate height.
3. Loosen the liftgate latch mounting bolts, and move the liftgate latch to adjust the attachment between the liftgate latch and liftgate striker.
TSB Revision
42-14
BODY - Service Rdiustment Procedures FUEL FILLER DOOR ADJUSTMENT

M42FDAF
Loosen the fuel filler door mounting screw and adjust the fuel filler door so that the clearance around the fuel filler door is even without any height differences.
DOOR ADJUSTMENT
1.
M42FEAG
Use the special tool to loosen the hinge mounting bolts on the body side, and then adjust the clearance around the door so that it is uniform on all sides. 2. If the door is not flush with the body, remove the spring pin from the door check, use the special tool to loosen the bolts for mounting the door hinges to the door. Move the door to adjust the door position along the body surface.
MB990834-01
18A0381
Caution Attach protection tape to the fender edges where the hinge is installed.
3. If the door does not open freely, adjust the engagement of the striker with the door latch by means of the striker mounting shim and move the striker up and down or from side to side.
18Ac-461
18A0465
DOOIR WINDOW GLASS ADJUSTMENT
M42FFAL
1. Remove the door trim and waterproof film. (Refer to P.42-41.) 2. Remove the front pillar trim. 3. Remove the drip line weatherstrip. 4. Loosen the bolts and nuts of the following parts. l Glass guide front track l Glass guide rear track l Delta sash l Stabilizer inner front l Stabilizer inner rear . up stop l Door belt line outer weatherstrip NOTE Move the window glass down to the lowest position before removing the delta sash bolt.
1 TSB Revision
-1

5 mm (20 in.)
42-15
5. Remove the stabilizer inner front and adjust the adjusting bolt for the dimension shown here.
lSFO15 2
14.5 mm (.57 in.)
6. Adjust the adjusting bolt for the stabilizer inner rear dimension shown here. 7. Raise door window glass. Push glass against the outer stabilizer of the door belt line outer weatherstrip and insert cloth or the like between the door inner panel and glass.
Stabilizer inner rear
18FO15
8. Adjust glass to have standard clearance between the weatherstrip holder and window glass.
Caution Measure the clearance, specified in section A-A, B-B and C-C, at the corresponding weatherstrip holder screws as shown in the illustration.
Adjustment procedures
of the glass guide rear track same amount.

18N0114
Adjustment of forward or back2 ward tilt of glass
Move the stabilizer Inner front and up stop up and down to adjust the forward or rearward tilt of glass when glass is fully closed. Caution Do not turn the stabilizer inner front adjusting bolt.
Stabilizer inner front1 P

18FOl62
7.0 iI 1.0 (.28 t ,041
7.7 + 1.0 i.30 z!z .04)
12.0 iz 1.0 t.47 IL .04)
TSB
Revision
42-16

NOTE Adjust both inward tilt and forward or backward tilt of glass at the same time. 9.
Stabtlizer Inner front
Force the stabilizer inner front onto the glass guide slider of the window glass assembly and tighten in position.
18FO15:
10. Force the up stop onto the glass stop of the window glass assembly and tighten in position. 11. Tighten the glass guide front and rear tracks.
Caution Do not turn the adjusting bolts of guide tracks.
Window glass end
12. Adjust the delta sash so that the window glass end and the delta sash lip end are positioned as illustrated and tighten in position.
13. Install the drip line weatherstrip. 14. Install the front pillar trim. 15. Install the door trim and the waterproof film. (Refer to P.42-41.) 16. Open and close the door and move up and down the window glass to check fitting of the door.
DOOR INSIDE HANDLE PLAY CHECK

Staindard value A (play): 7 mm (.28 in.) B (OPEN): 46 & 9 mm (1.81 i .35 in.) C (FULL): 69 mm (2.72 in.)
M42FGA
1. Check that the door inside handle play is as specified.
TSB Revision
42-17
2. If out of specifications, adjust as described below. @ Remove the door trim. (Refer to P.42-41.) @ Loosen the screw attaching the inside handle and slide the inside handle back and forth to adjust the inside handle play.
I
Front floor pan
18FOO33
FLOOR PAN INSPECTION

+ Drain plug
M42FIAD
lFlFOO91
A common result of body leaks is a soaked floor mat pad or carpet, and its not unusual to find that the water is getting in through the floor pan to some other low point jn the body. It is possible however, for water to enter higher up and run downward to soak the mat. Since a soaked mat should be removed for drying, its a good way to start your check. Of course, mat removal means youll have to take off door sill plates and pull out seats or seat cushion. But, this gives you a clear field for action so you can check body seam sealing and the plugs in the floor pan. Its usually not practical to water test for floor pan or wheelhousing leaks unless a special underbody water spray arrangement is available. As an alternate, the best way to locate these leak points is to look for rusty seam edges or other traces of leaks after the mats and cushions are removed. Traces of mud are an indication that the water is coming in from below.
18FOO91 3
TSB Revision
42-18
BODY - Engine Hood

M42HAAV
ENGINE HOOD
5Nm
16A0755
9Nm 7 ft.lbs.
12 Nm 8 ft.lbs.
16FO127
16FO261
1. Hood latch 2. Hood lock release handle 3. Hood lock release cable 4. Hood weatherstrip (Front) 5. Hood weatherstrip (Rear) l a 6. Bumper A (Body side) I)* 7. Bumper A (Hood side) l * 8. BumperB 9. Bumper 10. Hood side weatherstrip (LH) 11. Hood side weatherstrip (RH) 12. Heat protector panel 13. Heat protector 14. Hood garnish assembly 15. Hood switch (Vehicles with theft-alarm systern) 16. Engine room inspection light 17. Inspection light switch
Hood hinge removal steps
Washer tube (Refer to GROUP 51 -Windshield Wiper and Washer.) 18. inspection light wiring harness 19. Hood gas spring 20. Hood 21. Hood hinge
Caution 1. Never try to disassemble the hood gas spring or burn it. 2. Always bore a hole in the gas spring to release the interior gas before the spring is discarded.
TSB Revision
BODY - Engine Hood INSPECTION

HOOD SWITCH
Check the continuity between the terminal. Terminal 1 0
42-I Y
2 0
18FOOW
!I
Lid switch unpressed Lid switch depressed
NOTE G-0 indicates that there is continuity between the terminals.
INSPECTION LIGHT SWITCH

Turn the switch ON/OFF and check continuity between terminals (between the connector terminal and the switch body).
I
t
OFF
NOTE O-0 indicates that there is continuity between the terminals.

8. 7. 6. INSTALLATION OF BUMPER B, A
install the bumpers as illustrated.
TSB Revish
42-20 LIFTGATE
BODY - Liftgate
M420AAU
%a
8
lSFO262
12 Nm
12 Nm 8 ft.lbs.
4, ft.bs.
7 ftlbs.
11
4 18FO138
18FOO87
1
Liftgate and liftgate hinge removal steps
+ 1. Bumper 2. Liftgate damper (upper) 3. Liftgate damper (lower)
Liftgate gas spring and liftgate opening weatnerstrllp removal steps
..
..
Liftgate trim (Refer to GROUP Rear side trim > 52A-Trims.) 4. Liftgate gas spring 5. Liftgate opening weatherstrip
Washer tube (Refer to GROUP 51 -Wind. shield Wtper and Washer.) ._ Lrttgate trrm i$ftft;e$d;nm (LH) !!-!-~~~G$)up i 4. Liftgate gas spring 6. Connection for liftgate wiring harness 7. Liftgate Headlining (Refer to GROUP 52A- Headlining.) 8. Liftgate hinge
1 TSB Revision
BODY - Liftgate
42-21
Liftgate lock release cable and handle removal steps
Liftgate lock cylinder removal steps
Scuff plate (drivers side) (Refer to GROUP 52A-Trims.) 9. Release handle cover 10. Liftgate lock release handle Quarter trim Rear side trim (Refer to GROUP Rear end trim I 52A -Trims.) 11. Liftgate latch 12. Liftgate lock release cable
Liftgate latch removal steps
Rear end trim (Refer to GROUP 52A-Trims.) Rear combination light fRefer to GROUP 51 ,Garnishes and Rear panel garnish I Mouldings.) 14. Liftgate lock cylinder switch 15. Retainer 16. Liftgate lock cylinder
Rear end trim (Refer to GROUP 52A-Trims.) 11. Liftgate latch

Liftgate striker removal steps
Liftgate trim (Refer to GROUP 52A-Trims.) 13. Liftgate striker
Caution 1. Never try to disassemble the liftgate gas spring or burn it. 2. Always bore a hole in the gas spring to release the interior gas before the spring is discarded.
INSPECTION
LIFTGATE LATCH SWITCH
(I) Unlock the liftgate latch. (2) Check the continuity between the terminals.
)I
18FOO89
LIFTGATE LOCK CYLINDER SWITCH

Check the continuity between the terminals. Press 11
18F008E

1. INSTALLATION OF BUMPER
Install the bumper so that the amount of projection from the liftgate is as shown in the illustration.
18FOO63
TSB Revision
42-22
BODY - Fuel Tank Filler Door

M42JAAS
FUEL TANK FILLER DOOR

Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation l Removal and Installation of Rear Side Trim, Quarter Trim and Scuff Plate (Referto GROUP 52A-Trims.)
18FOO69
Removal steps
18FOO86
1. Fuel filler door 2. Fuel filler door hook 3. Release handle cover 4. Fuel filler door lock release handle 5. Fuel filler door lock release cable
LA
TSB Revision
BODY - Fender
42-23
M42KAAX
FENDER
16FOO61
18FOO62
16FO126
Removal steps
1. Front splash shield Side airdam (Refer to GROUP 51 -Aero Parts.) 2. Front splash shield Front bumper (Refer to GROUP 51 - Front Bumper.) 3. Front fender panel 4. Front fender bracket
TSB Revision
42-24
BODY - Loose Panel

M42SAAN
LOOSE PANEL
16FO124
FOllQ
support
lntercoolkr duct (1-H)

16FO121
crossmember Deck crossmember /
18FO123
&Air guide duct
16FOl20
18FOll7
TSB Revision
BODY - Window Glass
42-25 M42LAAL
WINDOW GLASS /
Li GENERAL
For bonding of the windshield and liftgate glass, a single-liquid urethane adhesive is used.
ADHESIVE AND RESERVE ITEMS

Adhesive and Reserve Items
Adhesive
Applications
Quantity One cartridge As required
3M SUPER FAST URETHAN 8609 3M SUPER FAST URETHAN PRIMER 8608

Reserve items
Wire (dia. x length) Adhesive gun 3M ATD Part No. 8906 Wiping rags Sealer Glass holder Windshield moulding (Service Part) Window dam (Service Part)
for cutting adhesive for adhesive application for cleaning jointing surfaces for prevention of water leaks and gathering after adhesive application
Five pieces of wire

0.6 mm x 1 m f.02 in. x 3.3 ft.)
One As required As required As required Two One As required
TSB Revision
42-26
BODY - Window Glass
WINDSHIELD AND LIFTGATE GLASS INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
-4
Removal of moutding (wire) Body side
-i--Cleaning bonding surface Scoop out existing adhesive to less than 2 mm (.08 in) thick and clean bonding surface. Then dry 3 minutes or more. Applying primer Apply primer amply on bonding surface and dry 3 minutes or more. Cleaning bonding surface Scoop out existing adhesive completely and clean bondrng surface. Cleaning bonding surface Clean the bonding surface and dry 3 minutes or more.
Apply the window dam to the glass along the reference position inside of the I
Fit the liftgate mouldrng upper and
1 lnstall;rtoio~;~ g l a s s 1
Water test If water leaks (after about 30 minutes _............__,,,__........,........,.....,,,..,
Installation of moulding.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..~ . .
L
TSB Revision
Cleaning of glass and painted surface --I
BODY - Window Glass

Recommended tool Make the tool by
42-27
M42LA80
REPLACEMENT OF MOULDING (BONDING TYPE)

1. Remove the mouldings. 2. To cut the existing adhesive, make a tool such as the one shown.
Sharpen the edge here
4mm (.16in.)
18UO161
3. Using the tool, scoop out the existing adhesive.
Caution 1. Do not remove existing adhesive more than necessary. Use care not to damage the coated surface. 2. If the coated surface is damaged, apply paint.
emove here
lsuo16a /
Upper portion of moulding
4.
Cut off the lower portion of a new moulding and install the moulding temporarily to check that it is seated securely. 5. Apply primer to the moulding.
/ L
Apply primer
Caution Never touch the primer coated surface.
Lower portion of moulding
18FOO51
6. Apply adhesive to the illustrated area and install the moulding before it hardens.
Mouding v
7. Scrape away excessive sealant forced out during installation of the moulding from the glass or body and wipe the surfaces clean with 3M ATD Part No. 8906 or equivalent. 8. After the work, leave the vehicle as it is until the adhesive hardens.
TSB
Revision
42-28 WINDSHIELD
BODY - Windshield
M42LBAX
Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation l Removal and lnstallatron of Deck Garnish (Refer to GROUP 51 - Garnrshes and Mouldrngs.; l Removal and lnstallatron of Roof Drop Mouldrng (Refer to GROUP 51 -Garnishes and Mouldings.] l Removal and lnstallatron of Headlrnrng (Refer to GROUP 52A- Headlrning.) l Removal and lnstallatron of Front Pillar Trim (RefertoGROUP52A-Tnms.)
Removal steps
l
*l *
1. Windshield moulding 2. Windshield glass 3. Window dam
18FOO59
Section A
Section =,Adheswe 12-l5..47-.59jT;F ,< / Cut off nozzle end
Section C
Adhesive
mm (in.)
18FOO60
Adhesive: 3M SUPER FAST URETHAN 8609 or equivalent Primer: 3M SUPER FAST URETHAN PRIMER 8608 or equivalent
TSB Revision
BODY - Windshield SERVICE POINTS OF REMOVAL

2. REMOVAL OF WINDSHIELD GLASS
42-29
Remove windshield using the following procedure. (1) For protection of the body (coated surface), apply cloth tape to all around the body where the glass is installed. (2) Using a drill of sharp bit, drill a hole through the adhesive fixing the windshield glass. (3) Run a wire through the hole from inside of the compartment. (4) Pull the wire alternately from inside and outside of the compartment to cut off the adhesive.
Glass holders
Caution Use care to prevent contact of the wire with the windshield glass edge. (5) Put matchmarks on the body and the glass. (6) Using the glass holders, remove the windshield glass.
Matchmarks
(7) Using a sharp, knife, scoop out existing adhesive from the body flange to 2 mm (.08 in.) or less thickness all around the window opening. (8) Finish smooth the flange surfaces. Caution 1. Do not remove the adhesive more than necessary. 2. Use care not to damage the coated surface of the body with the knife. If it is damaged, apply retouch paint of anti-corrosive. (9) If the glass is reused, scoop out existing adhesive and fragments of the window dam completely from the glass and degrease with 3M ATD Part No. 8906 or equivalent. (1O)Degrease the body same way. Caution After degreasing, allow three minutes or more to dry well before next work. Do not touch the degreased surface.

2. INSTALLATION OF WINDSHIELD GLASS (1) When replacing glass, fit a new glass once to the body and put matchmarks on the body and glass.
TSB Revision
42-30
BODY - Windshield
(2) Apply a uniform coat of primer to the illustrated areas of the body and glass making sure it is applied without breaks or thin spots. Adhesive: 3M SUPER FAST URETHAN PRIMER 8608 & or equivalent Caution 1. The primer is used to strengthen bonding power. Make sure that it covers the surfaces completely. Note that the primer if applied to thick can cause loss of bonding power. 2. Never touch the primer coated surface. (3) Allow 3 to 30 minutes to dry the primer.
18FOOO
Section B L=-q-
18FOO55
18FOO54
J$y$#,
I : Glass surface 2: Body surface 30
18FOOS
Section C
(4) Within 30 minutes of primer application, apply the adhesive all around the windshield glass uniformly. Adhesive: 3M SUPER FAST URETHAN 8609 or equivalent NOTE Cutting the nozzle tip of the sealant gun to a V-shape .will help application. (5) Install the windshield moulding.
Zut off nozzle tip
BODY - Windshield
42-31
(6) After application of the adhesive, line up the matchmarks on the glass and body and force the glass lightly and evenly onto the body for complete fitting. (7) Remove adhesive from around and on the glass and body surfaces using a spatula and wipe the surfaces clean. (8) After the work (installation of the glass), allow to stand until the adhesive hardens. Caution If an infrared lamp or other means are used for quicker hardening, keep the surface temperature 60C (140F) or lower.
dam
Section A 12-15 (.47 - ,591 Primer
(9) After about 30 minutes or more following bonding of the windshield glass to the body, check for water leaks. Caution 1. If the vehicle is to be moved, do so gently. 2. When checking for water leaks, do not apply water with the hose end squeezed.
El--
7 l.28) 10 i.39)
Section B
7 t.28) Section C Adhesive
I LJ
nm (in.)
18FOO56
TSB Revision
42-32 CENTER PILLAR GLASS
BODY - Center Pillar Glass

M42LFAA
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION u j

Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation l Removal and Installation of Quarter Upper Trim (Refer to GROUP 52A-Trims.) l Removal and Installation of Center Pillar Garnish (Refer to GROUP 51 -Garnishes and Mouldings.)
18FOOO2
18FO134
1. Center pillar glass 2. Packing
TSB Revision
BODY - Quarter Window Glass
42-33
M42LECB
QUARTER WINDOW GLASS

: REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Trim (RefertoGROUP52A-Trims.) Removal and Installation of Center Pillar Garnish (Refer to GROUP 51 -Garnishes and
18FOOO2
Removal steps l * I)* 1. Quarter window moulding and glass 2. Packing 3. Window dam
18FO132
Section A
Adhesive
Cut off nozzle tip
mm (in.)
18FOO60 Adhesive: 3M SUPER FAST URETHAN 8609 or equivalent Primer: 3M SUPER FAST URETHAN PRIMER 8608 or equivalent
18FO137
TSB Revision
42-34
BODY - Quarter Window Glass SERVICE POINT OF REMOVAL

1. REMOVAL OF QUARTER WINDOW MOULDING AND GLASS 3 (1) For protection of the body (coated surface), apply cloth LJ tape to all around the body where the glass is installed. (2) Using a cutter knife, cut off the quarter window moulding along its edge. ~
(3) Run a wire between the glass and the body at the upper portion of the quarter window and pull it back and forth along the glass to cut through the adhesive. When doing so, pay attention to the bolt. Caution Hold the window glass with the glass holders to prevent it from falling when the adhesive is cut through.
(4) Using a sharp knife, scoop out existing adhesive from the body flange to 2 mm (.08 in.) or less thickness all around the window opening. (5) Finish smooth the flange surface. Caution 1. Do not remove the adhesive more than necessary. 2. Use care not to damage the coated surface of the body with the knife. If it is damaged, apply retouch paint or anti-corrosive. (6) Degrease using 3M ATD Part No. 8906 or equivalent. Caution After degreasing, allow three minutes or more to dry well before next work. Do not touch the degreased surface.
TSB
Revision
BODY - Quarter Window Glass SERVICE POINT OF INSTALLATION
42-35
1. INSTALLATION OF QUARTER WINDOW MOULDING AND GLASS (I) Apply a uniform coat of primer to the illustrated areas of the body and glass making sure it is applied without breaks or thin spots.
Section A
Caution 1. The primer is used to strengthen bonding power. Make sure that it covers the surfaces completely. Note that the primer if applied to thick can cause loss of bonding power. 2. Never touch the primer coated surface. (2) Allow 3 to 30 minutes to dry the primer.
IO"' (.39)
Section C
I id/
*I : Glass surface 2: Body surface mm (In.)
18FO143
(3) Within 30 minutes of primer application, apply the adhesive all around the windshield glass uniformly. Adhesive: 3M SUPER FAST URETHAN 8609 or equivalent NOTE Cutting the nozzle tip of the sealant gun to a V-shape will help application.
kt off nozzle tip
mm (tn.)
18FOO80
, i
TSB Revision
42-36
BODY - Quarter Window Glass

(4) After application of the adhesive, line up the matchmarks on the glass and body and force the glass lightly and evenly onto the body for complete fitting. (5) Remove adhesive from around and on the glass and \Lj body surfaces using a spatula and wipe the surfaces clean. (6) After the work (installationof the glass), allow to stand until the adhesive hardens. Caution If an infrared lamp or other means are used for quicker hardening, keep the surface temperature 60C ( 1 4 0 F ) o r l o w e r . (7) After about 30 minutes or more following bonding of the windshield glass to the body, check for water leaks. Caution 1. If the vehicle is to be moved, do so gently. 2. When checking for water leaks, do not squeeze the hose end.
Section A Adhesive
Section B
Section C
Window dam
mm (in.)
18FO137
TSB Revision
BODY - Liftgate Glass
42-37
M42LDAO
LIFTGATE GLASS
18FO145
Removal steps I. Defogger connector 2. Liftgate moulding upper 3. Liftgate moulding upper clip a* 4. Liftgate moulding lower 5. Liftgate moulding lower clip 6. Clip grommet +* *+ 7. Lift gate glass 8. Liftgate moulding side 9. window dam
l *
Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation l Removal and Installation of Rear Wiper Arm (Refer to GROUP 51 -Windshield Wiper and Washer l Removal and Installation of Liftgate Upper Trim (Referto GROUP 52A-Trims.) l Removal and Installation of Liftgate Trim (Refer to GROUP 52A-Trims.) l Removal and Installation of Liftgate Side Trim (Refer to GROUP 52A-Trims )
Section A 12-15(.47-.59) Primer 7 Section B 27 (1.06)
Cut off nozzle tip
12 (.47) mm (in.)
18FOO60
E!;~;qiffy ,8Fo,48
,f 7
10 t.391
L
,
Adhesive: 3M SUPER FAST URETHAN 8609 or equivalent Primer: 3M SUPER FAST URETHA N PRIMER 8608 or equivalent TSB Revision
42-38

MB990449 I I\ sEwIcE
POINTS 0~ REMOVAL
2. REMOVAL OF LIFTGATE MOULDING UPPER / 4. LIFTGATE MOULDING LOWER Usina the special tool, pry up the clipped portions to remove the liftgate moulding upper and lower.
7. REMOVAL OF LIFTGATE GLASS Remove the same way as the windshield glass. (Refer to P.42-29.)
18FO142

7. INSTALLATION OF LIFTGATE GLASS (I) Apply a uniform coat of primer to the illustrated areas of the body and glass making sure it is applied without breaks or thin spots. Adhesive: 3M SUPER FAST URETHAN PRIMER 8608 or equivalent Caution 1. The primer is used to strengthen bonding power. Make sure that it covers the surfaces completely. Note that the primer if applied to thick can cause loss of bonding power. 2. Never touch the primer coated surface. (2) Allow 3 to 30 minutes to dry the primer.
Section A
27 (1 06) k--L
Section C
nm (in.)
18FOl4
(3) Within 30 minutes of primer application, apply the adhesive all around the liftgate glass uniformly. Adhesive: 3M SUPER FAST .URETHAN 8609 or equivalent NOTE Cutting the nozzle tip of the sealant gun to a V-shape will help application. L)
TSB Revision
42-39
(4) After application of the adhesive, line up the matchmarks on the glass and liftgate and force the glass lightly and evenly for complete fitting. (5) Remove adhesive from around and on the glass and body surfaces using a spatula and wipe the surfaces clean. (6) After the work (installation of the glass), allow to stand until the adhesive hardens. Caution If an infrared lamp or other means are used for quicker hardening, keep the surface temperature 60C (140F) or lower.
Section A
(7) After about 30 minutes or more following bonding of the liftgate glass to the tail gate, check for water leaks. Caution 1. If the vehicle is to be moved, do so gently. 2. When checking for water leaks, do not squeeze the hose end.
27 (1 .O$)
Section B , Adhesive 12- 15(.47 Primer ; 27 (1.06) Section C
id
12-15
.4;itf;j-$c~:
10 t.391 nm (in.)
18F014E
TSB Revision
42-40
DOOR ASSEMBLY
BODY - Door Assembly
~
M42MAEC
46 Nm 33 ftibs. \ 12 Nm 8 ftlbs.
22Nm 16 ft.lbs.
18FO208
Door assembly removal steps 1. Connection for door wiring harness connector 2. Spring pin 3. Door assembly 4. Upper hinge 5. Lower hinge Door check strap removal steps Door trim (Refer to P.42-41.) Waterproof film (Refer to P.42-41.) 2. Spring pin ** 6. Door check strap
Striker removal steps 7. Striker 8. Striker shim Door switch removal steps 9. Door switch cap 10. Door switch
TSB Revision
B O D Y - Door Assemblv / Door Trim and Waterproof Film INSPECTION

DOOR SWITCH
42-41
Operate the switch, and check the continuity between the terminals.
Open (ON) Switch Depressed (OFF)
NOTE O-O indicates that there is continuity between the terminals

6. INSTALLATION OF DOOR CHECK STRAP Install the door check strap with the identification mark facing up.
Identification mark
18FOO31
Position Door (LH) Door (RH)
Identification mark WL WR L R
DOOR TRIM AND WATERPROOF FILM

M42MBBD
Removal steps
l I)
1. Clip
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
\ Door window regulatorhandle Escutcheon Door light Inside handle cover Door trim carpet Door trim Speaker garnish
NOTE * : Clip locations TSB Revision
9. Power window switch 10. Waterproof film
42-42
BODY -
Door Trim and Waterproof Film / Door Glass and Regulator I

1. REMOVAL OF CLIP
I \L.J I I
Use a shop towel to remove the clip; and remove door

window regulator handle.
DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR

M42MCCA
~;:;zL4.,
l
Door Window Glass Adjustment
d
18FOlQi
I I
Removal steps Door trim (Refer to P.42-41 .I Waterproof film (Refer to P.42-41 .I 1. Delta cover inner 2. Delta cover outer Door belt line outer weatherstrip (Refer to P.42-65.) 3. up stop 4. Stabilizer inner front 5. Stabilizer inner rear 6. Delta sash 7. Door window glass 8. Door glass guide track front 9. Door window regulator assembly IO. Door glass guide track rear TSB Revision
I !
( I
18FO200
L&l
BODY - Power Window
42-43
M42MHAH
POWER WINDOW
/ ;i $
Diagnosis connector -
INPUT CHECK Using the multi-use tester or voltmeter, check whether or not the input signals from each switch are being input to the ETACS unit. (I), Connect the multi-use tester to the diagnosis check connector located at the right side of the junction block or connect the voltmeter between the ETACS terminal and the ground terminal. (2) Check if the buzzer of the multi-use tester sounds or the needle of the voltmeter moves when each switch noted below is operated. If the buzzer sounds or the needle moves, the input signals are being input to the ETACS unit, so that switch can be considered to be functioning normally. If not, the switch or switch input circuit is faulty. Check the switch and the switch input circuit. l Ignition switch l Door switch
Gr&nd Nith voltmeter
ETkCS
6R38 -.___
1With multi-use tester

For information concerning the locations of electrical components, refer to P.42-51.
Problem The power windows do not operate Nhen the ignition switch is at the ON position. Probable cause Check method If a malfunction is indicated as a result of checking the input signals, check by following individual part and the circuit check Remedy Repair the wiring harness.
Damaged or disconnetted wiring of the ignition switch input circuit
No. 2 procedures (P.42-46).

Damaged or disconnetted wiring of the power window relay activation circuit Malfunction of the electronic control unit Check by following individual part and the circuit check No. 3 procedures (P.42-47). Repair the wiring harness, or replace the power window relay. Replace the electronic control unit.
TSB Revision
42-44
Problem The power windows can be opened and closed immediately after the ignition switch is switched OFF, but the power window operation does not stop if a front door is opened within 30 seconds.
B O D Y - Power Window
Probable cause Damaged or disconnetted wiring of the front door switch input circuit Malfunction of the front door switch Malfunction of the electronic control unit
Check method If a malfunction is indicated as a result of checking the input signals, check by following individual part and the circuit check No. 4 procedures (P.42-49). -
Remedy Repair the wiring harness. or replace the front door switch.
Replace the electronic control unit. Repair the wiring harness, or replace the power window relay.
The opening and closing operations of the power windows are possible after the timer operation time has elapsed when the ignition switch is set to the OFF position.
Short-circuit of the power window relay activation circuit Malfunction of the front door switch Malfunction of the electronic control unit
Check by following individual part and circuit check No. 3 procedures (P.42-47).
Replace the electronic control unit.
NOTE ECU (electronic control unit) indicates the ETACS unit.
TSB Revision
CHECKING INDIVIDUAL PART AND CIRCUIT

1. ETACS POWER-SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUITS
L/
Battery
Junction block
Jumper connector
ETACS unrt (ECU)
*I
: Vehicles without theft-alarm system 2: Vehicles with theft-alarm system
16FO314
Description of operation The battery supplies a stabilized 5V power supply to the electronic control unit, via the constant-voltage circuit and terminal (51) directly connected to the battery. If there is an abnormal condition of the power-supply circuit, other ETACS functions also will not operate. Electronic control unit terminal voltage (Connection status of electronic control unit connector)
ECU terminal No. Signal 51 Electronic control unit power supply Condition At all times Terminal voltage System voltage
Checking the ground circuit (Disconnect the connector and check the wiring harness side.)
/ I 1 I 1 I
Terminal No. 57 59?
Connected to/measured part Electronic control unit ground
Measurement Resistance
Tester connection 57*-ground 59*-ground
Check conditions At all times
Standard Continuity
NOTE I : Vehicles without theft-alarm system 2: Vehicles with theft-alarm system TSB Revision
42-46
Battery 20B-Y. ;I II II I ] II ,;rLL
2. IGNITION SWITCH INPUT CIRCUITS

Fusible link
30A
,l \ m
25
123 4 5 6
P z
3:
z 0 3 I =7 \ -7
Junction block @ (Multi-purpose fuse)
1
1 : Vehicles without theft-alarm system 2: Vehicles with theft-alarm system
ETACS unit (ECU)
4,
m
16FO312
Description of operation A condition for operation of this system is the sending of HIGH-level signals to the electronic control unit when the ignition switch is switched to the ON position. Electronic control unit terminal voltage (Disconnect the connector of the electronic control unit and check the wiring harness side.)
ECU terminal No. Signal 52 Condition
Standard OFF ON ov System voltage
Ignition switch: ON
Ignition switch
Checking the individual part Ignition switch: Refer to GROUP 54 - Ignition Switch.
TSB Revision
B O D Y - Power Window ;. POWER WINDOW RELAY ACTIVATION CIRCUIT

Fusible link @
R-B
0 &5 "4
____------y3
I I I I I I I I I I I I I
-------- --_-__--Power window One-touch dnwn circuit
I
L-
Power window sub-switch
*I : Vehicles without theft-alarm system 2: Vehicles with theft-alarm system TSB Revision
16FO324
42-48
Description of operation
BODY - Power Window
When the ignition switch is switched to the ON position, and also for a period of 30 seconds after the I ignition switch is switched to the OFF position, the transistor of the electronic control unit is switched ON, and battery voltage is supplied from the battery (through fusible link No. 9) to the power window relay. 4; In addition, voltage is supplied (through fusible link No. 9) to power window switch and motor as a result of 1 the switch-ON of the power window relay. NOTE Turn the ignition switch from ON to OFF, and power will be supplied to the power window relay for 30 seconds. However, power supply will be stopped if the door is opened during this period.
1 I
Electronic control unit terminal voltage (Disconnect the connector of the electronic control unit and check the wiring harness side.) ECU terminal No. Signal 5 *I
7*2
Condition At all times
Terminal voltage System voltage P
I I I I I I
Power window relay signal
NOTE
*I : Vehicles without theft-alarm system
2: Vehicles with theft-alarm system Checking the individual part Power window relay: Refer to P.42-51. id;
I I I ~
Lb
1 TSB Revision
BODY - Power Window

4. DOOR SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT
5v ETACS unit (ECU)
42-49
L 4w
*l : Vehicles without theft-alarm system 2: Vehicles with theft-alarm system
Passenger door switch
Driver:oor switch
16FO326
When the front door is closed (the door switch is switched OFF), HIGH-level signals are sent to the electronic control unit; when the front door is opened (the door switch is switched ON), LOW-level signals are sent to the electronic control unit.
Electronic control unit terminal voltage (Connection status of electronic control unit connector)
ECU terminal No. Signal 14"' Driver door switch signal Condition Driver door Open Closed 16"' Passenger door switch signal Passenger door Open Closed IO Driver door switch signal and passenger door switch signal Driver door and/or passenger door Open Driver door and passenger door Closed Terminal voltage o v 5V o v 5V o v 5v
NOTE I : Vehicles without theft-alarm system 2: Vehicles with theft-alarm svstem
1 TSB Revision
BODY - Power Window

Checking the driver door switch circuit (Disconnect the connector of the electronic control unitand check the wiring harness side.)
ECU Terminal Connected to/ measured part No. 14 Driver door switch Measurement ~~~~e~rion Resistance Check conditions Closed Open 16 Passenger door switch Driver door switch and passenger door switch Resistance 16*-ground P a s s e n g e r door 1 O*-ground Driver door and/or passenger door Driver door and passenger door NOTE I : Vehicles without theft-alarm system 2: Vehicles with theft-alarm system Closed Open lo** Resistance Closed Standard No continuity Continuity No continuity Continuity No continuity
14*-ground Driver door
Open
Continuity
Check the individual part

D o o r s w i t c h : R e f e r t o P.42-41.
1 TSB Revision
B O D Y - Power Window REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
42-51
Cl
l
Door Wlndow Glass Adjustment
18FO205
/ id
18FO198
18FO199
Door window regulator assembly removal steps Door trim (Refer to P.4241.) Waterproof film (Refer to P.42-41.) 1. Delta cover inner 2. Delta cover outer Door belt line outer weatherstrip (Refer to P.42-65.) 3. up stop 4. Stabilizer inner front 5. Stabilizer inner rear
6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
Delta sash Door window glass Door window regulator assembly Door glass guide track front Door glass guide track rear Door trim (Refer to P.42-41.)
Power window switch assembly removal steps 11. Power window switch assembly
INSPECTION POWER WINDOW RELAY

(1) R e m o v e .the knee protector assembly. (Refer to GROUP 52A - Instrument Panel.) ow relay from indoor relay box.
42-52
BODY - Power Window

(3) Apply battery voltage to terminal 1, and check for continuity when terminal 3 is grounded.
Continuity no voltage Continuity with voltage

18FOO6
0 0 0
POWER WINDOW MOTOR (1) Connect the battery directly to the motor terminal and check that the slider moves smoothly. (2) Connect the battery in reverse polarity and check that the slider moves in opposite direction.
18FO191
CIRCUIT BREAKER (INCORPORATED IN THE POWER WINDOW MOTOR) (1) Press the UP switch to fully close the vjindow glass, and continue to press the switch for 10 seconds. (2) At the moment that the UP switch is released, press the DOWN switch. The circuit breaker can be considered good ! L&J if at this time the door window g!ass begins to open within 60 seconds.
TSB Revision
BODY - P o w e r W i n d o w
Power window passengers
42-53
POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH Check for continuity in accordance to the following connection table.
L
Do& lock switch Power window drivers View A side switch lower window ock switch
18FO107
Drivers side switch
id
NOTE
O-O indicates that there is continuity between the terminals
POWER WINDOW SUB SWITCH Check for continuity in accordance to the following connection table.
Power window switch
Doe; lock switch View A
18FO108
TSB Revision
42-54
BODY - Door Handle and Latch

M42MDCA
DOOR HANDLE AND LATCH

18FOO42
11.
18FOO41
lWO202
Door inside handle removal Door Inside Handle Play Check (Refer to P.42-16.) 1. Door inside handle Door outside handle and latch removal steps 2. Door key cylinder unlock switch connector (Vehicles with theft-alarm system) 3. Door outside handle 4. Ring 5. Door lock key cylinder 6. Door latch assembly
INSPECTION
DOOR KEY CYLINDER UNLOCK SWITCH
The key cylinder unlock switch is normal if there is not continuity between terminals 1 and 2 when the key is turned approx. 20 clockwise or counterclockwise from the neutral position, and there is continuity when it is turned further.
TSB Revision
BODY - Central Door Locking System
42-55
M42ZDAJ
IGNITION KEY REMINDER TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

INPUT CHECK
Using the multi-use tester or voltmeter, check whether or not the input signals from each switch are being input to the ETACS unit. (1) Connect the multi-use tester to the diagnosis check connector located at the right side of the junction block or connect the voltmeter between the ETACS terminal and the ground terminal. (2) Check if the buzzer of the multi-use tester sounds or the needle of the voltmeter moves when each switch noted below is operated. If the buzzer sounds or the needle moves,. the input signals are being input to the ETACS unit, so that switch can be considered to be functioning normally. If not, the switch or switch input circuit is faulty. Check the switch and the switch input circuit. l Door lock actuator l Door switch l Key reminder switch
G r o u n d E T A C S ,611338 Nith voltmeter
IGNITION KEY REMINDER TROUBLESHOOTING QUICK-REFERENCE TABLE

Problem No unlock operation can be made by pressing door lock knob after fulfilment of following conditions.
l l
Probable cause Key reminder switch input circuit shorted Key reminder switch shorted Door switch input circuit broken Breaks in door switch Faulty electronic control unit
Check method If found defective after input check, check circuit bench test No. 4 (P.42-59).
Remedy Correct harness or rep:a~~~ key reminder
Insertion of key in ignition switch (key reminder switch OFF) Opening of door (door switch ON)
Correct harness or If found defective after input check, check circuit replace door switch bench test No. 5 (P.42-60). Replace the electronic control unit
NOTE ECU (Electronic Control Unit) indicates the ETACS unit
1 TSB Revision
42-56
CHECKING INDIVIDUAL PART AND CIRCUIT (IGNITION KEY REMINDER SYSTEM)

1. ETACS POWER-SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUITS
Batterv
$1 ,\ \I \/ \I /1,\/2-1
.
Junction block (Multi-purpose fuse)
m +,2T.,l \ ,. c.i -
151
Jumper connector ETACS unit (ECU)
I : Vehicles without theft-alarm system 2: Vehicles with theft-alarm system

L-
z 1 1
16FO314
Description of operation The battery supplies a stabilized 5V power supply to the electronic control unit, via the constant-voltage circuit and terminal (51) directly connected to the battery. If there is an abnormal condition of the power-supply circuit, other ETACS functions also will not operate. Electronic control unit terminal voltage (Connection status of electronic control unit connector)
ECU terminal No. Signal 51
I
Status
At all times
Terminal
voltage System voltage I
Electronic control unit power supply
I I I I 1
Terminal No. 57 59)
Connected to/measured part
Measurement Resistance
Tester
connection
Check conditions
Standard
Continuity
Electronic control unit ground
57*-ground
59*2-ground
At all times
NOTE
. I : Vehicles without theft-alarm system 2: Vehicles with theft-alarm system
TSB Revision

2. DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR INPUT CIRCUIT
42-57
Fusible link @
r7?r I p O.BBB ETACS unit (ECU)
1 : Vehicles without theft-alarm system 2: Vehicles with theft-alarm system
U-U
16
(RI-U
16FO316
IL/
Description of operation If the door is opened with the ignition key inserted and then locking is made by means of inside lock knob, the door lock actuator is brought to the OFF position, sending H signal to the electronic control unit. This signal operates the timer. circuit of the electronic control unit and the driving circuit operates to actuator all the door lock actuators. Electronic control unit terminal voltage (Connection status of electronic control unit connector)
ECU terminal No. Signal ll, 13 (LH) 12. 14: (RH) Door lock actuator switch signal Condition Door lock actuator switch Lock (OFF) Unlock (ON) Terminal voltage 5v ov
Door lock actuator switch circuit test (Disconnect the connector of the electronic control unit and check the wiring harness side.)
ECU Terminal No. Connected to/ measured part Measurement Resistance Tester connection 11 *-ground 12*-ground 13*:-ground 14*-ground Check conditions Door lock actuator switch Lock (OFF) Standard No continuity
Door lock actuator ll*, 13 (LH) switch signal 12. 14 (RH) NOTE *1 : Vehicles without theft-alarm system 2: Vehicles with theft-alarm system
Unlock (ON) Continuity
Checking the individual part Door lock actuator: Refer to P.42-62. 1 TSB Revision
42-58
3. DOOR LOCK POWER RELAY ACTIVATION CIRCUIT

Fusible link 0
Door lock actuator (LH)
Door lock actuator (RH)

16FO329
Description of operation If the door is opened with the ignition key inserted and then door locking is made, transistor Tr of the electronic control unit is turned ON to operate the door lock power relay (unlock side) and the door lock actuator is unlocked. NOTE Before locking the front seat passenger door, make sure that the driver door lock actuator is in the LOCK position. If the driver door lock actuator is in the UNLOCK position, the front passenger door lock actuator does not operate. Electronic control unit terminal voltage (Connection status of electronic control unit connector)
ECU terminal No. Signal 1 XI , 3 Door lock power relay
Condition
At all times (except when door unlock is
Terminal
voltage
System
(unlock side) signal
in operation)
voltage
NOTE I : Vehicles without theft-alarm system 2: Vehicles with theft-alarm system
Checking the individual part Door lock power relay: Refer to P.42-63. TSB Revision
LJ

4. KEY REMINDER SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT
<Vehicles without theft-alarm system> <Vehicles with theft-alarm system> Fusible link@ ETACS unit
42-59
(ECU)
Key reminder switch
ETACS unit
(ECU)
16FO319
16FO318
Description of operation Insert the key in the ignition key cylinder, and the key reminder switch will be turned OFF, sending H signal to the electronic control unit. Pulling the key out of the cylinder will turn on the key reminder switch, sending L signal to the electronic control unit. If there is any abnormality in the key reminder switch input circuit, abnormal key reminder buzzer will result. Electronic control unit terminal voltage (Connection status of electronic control unit connector)
ECU terminal No. Signal 60 64 Key reminder switch signal Condition Key is pulled out Key is inserted Terminal voltage o v 5 v
Checking the key reminder switch circuit (Disconnect the connector of the electronic control unit and check the wiring harness side.)
Terminal No. 60 Connected to/measured part Key reminder swatch Measurement Resistance Tester connection 60*-ground Check conditrons Key is pulled out Key is inserted NOTE I : Vehicles without theft-alarm system *2: Vehicles with theft-alarm system / Standard Continuity No continuity
Checking the individual part Key reminder switch: Refer to GROUP 54 - Ignition Switch.
TSB Revision
42-60
5. DOOR SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT

ETACS unit
(ECU)
*1 : Vehicles without theft-alarm system *2: Vehicles with theft-alarm system
Passen&r door switch
Drivergoor switch
16FO326
Description of operation When the front door is closed (the door switch is switched OFF), HIGH-level signals are sent to the electronic control unit; when the front door is opened (the door switch is switched ON), LOW-level signals are sent to the electronic control unit. Electronic control unit terminal voltage (Connection status of electronic control unit connector) d
Driver door and passenger door NOTE 1: Vehicles without theft-alarm system 2: Vehicles with theft-alarm system
Closed
5v
1 TSB Revision
42-61
Checking the driver door switch circuit (Disconnect the connector of the electronic control unit and check the wiring harness side.)
Connected to/ measured part Measurement -ff~~e~rion Check conditions Driver door Closed Open Passenger door 1O*2 and passenger door switch Driver door and/or passenger door Driver door and passenger door Closed Open Closed Standard No continuity Continuity No continuity Continuity No continuity
Open
Continuity
i NOTE I : Vehicles without theft-alarm system 2: Vehicles with theft-alarm system
Check the individual part Door switch: Refer to P.42-41.
id
1 TSB Revision
42-62
18FO205 16FO196
Door lock actuator removal
Door lock switch removal
Door trim and waterproof film (Refer to

P.42-41.)
Do& latch assembly (Refer to P.42-54.) 1. Door lock actuator
Door trim (Refer to P.42-41.) 2. Door lock switch
<Drivers side>
INSPECTION
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR (1) Place the rod in the LOCK position, apply the battery power to the terminal L(3) for drivers side or (1) for passengers side1 and check to see that when the terminal [(l) for drivers side or (3) for passengers side] is grounded, the rod moves to the UNLOCK position. (2) Then place the rod in the UNLOCK position, apply the battery power to the terminal [(I) for drivers side or (3) for passengers side], and check to see that when the terminal [(3) for drivers side or (1) for passengers side] is grounded, the rod moves to the LOCK position. (3) Check to ensure that when the rod is placed in the UNLOCK position, there is acontinuity between the terminals (2) and (4). and that when the rod is placed in the LOCK position, there is no continuity.
18FOO52
<Passengers side>
view A
16FOO51
TSB Revision
BODY - Central Door Lockina Svstem

:Vehicles with power window> Dower window main switch side
42-63
DOOR LOCK SWITCH Check for continuity in accordance to the following connection table.
<Vehicles with power window>
Power window main switch side
18FO107
LOCK
o - - + - - Q I
Power window sub switch side
UNLOCK
L
c-+---o
NOTE O-O indicates that there is continuity between the terminals Power window sub switch side
<Vehicles without power window>
1 LOCK OFF 1 UNLOCK
I I
o - - - + - o I I I
c--+--
NOTE O-O indicates that there is continuity between the terminals. <Vehicles without power window>
LOCK OFF UNLOCK
DOOR LOCK RELAY (1) Remove the knee protector assembly: (Refer to GROUP 52A - Instrument Panel.) (2) Remove the door lock relay from indoor relay box.
TSB Revision
42-64

(3) Check for continuity between terminals under the conditions described below.
.I
NOTE (I ) O-O indicates that there is continuity between the terminals. (2) O---O indicates terminals to which battery voltage is applied.
1 TSB Revision
B O D Y - Drir, Line Weatherstrir,
42-65
M42MFAL
DRIP LINE WEATHERSTRIP

Removal steps Delta cover inner (Refer to Delta cover outer 1 P.42-42.51.) Door trim (Refer to P.4241.) 2-
/ L
*I) I)+
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Door Door Door Door Door
belt line outer weatherstrip outer opening weatherstrip inner opening weatherstrip front inner opening weatherstrip rear opening weatherstrip lower
Drip line weatherstrip removal steps 6. Drip line weatherstrip 7. Door weatherstrip holder
18FO219

2. REMOVAL OF DOOR OUTER OPENING WEATHERSTRIP Make a tool as shown in the illustration to remove the door opening weatherstrip.

2. INSTALLATION OF DOOR OUTER OPENING WEATHERSTRIP The clip color identifies the left and right weatherstrips, so be sure to use the coiors so as to install correctly.
I
i
Identification color White Orange,
Applicable side Left door Right door
TSB Revision
EXTERIOR
CONTENTS
AERO PARTS ..................................................... . .. DOOR MIRROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FRONT BUMPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...__............... 20 38 11 Inspection of Active Aero System
MSIAA-
SERVICE ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES ........ ................
10 10 4 2 2 3 3 5 24
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..__............_._... SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._............... . .................................... .................................... ........................................ ............
G A R N I S H E S AND MOULDINGS . ..__............... 16 REAR BUMPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REAR WIPER AND WASHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 35
General Specifications Service Specifications TROUBLESHOOTING
Sealants and Adhesives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER
51-2
EXTERIOR - Specifications
SPECIFICATIONS
Items Windshield wiper motor Type Speed control system Braking system rpm at load of 1 Nm (0.72 ft.lbs.) Low speed High speed Nominal torque Rear wiper motor Motor type Braking system rpm at load of 0.6 Nm (0.43 ft.lbs.) Windshield wiper blade Wiping angle Drivers side Passengers side Wiper blade length Drivers side Passengers side Tear wiper blade Wiping angle Wiper blade length mm (in.) 87 k 1.5 550 (21.7) mm (in.) 525 (20.7) 500 (19.7) 89 91 Ferrite-magnet type Dynamic braking system 38 + 5 Nm (ft.lbs.) 48 _+ 4 70 2 7 24(17) Ferrite-magnet type Third brush system Dynamic brake system Specifications
MSlKB- \ I
LJ
Nindow washer motor and pump Motor type Pump type Power consumption A Time of continuous use With washer fluid Empty operation Nozzle jet pressure Tank capacity kPa (psi) sec. Max. 60 Max. 20 120 (17) or more 2.0 (2.1) or more Direct current ferrite magnet type Centrifugal type 3.8 or less
lit. (qts.)
3ear window washer motor and pump Motor type Pump type Power consumption A Time of continuous use With washer fluid Empty operation Nozzle jet pressure Tank capacity kPa (psi) lit. (qts.) sec. Max. 60 Max. 20 120 (17) or more 1.2 (1.3) or more Direct current ferrite magnet type Centrifugal type 3.8 or less
L/i
TSB Revision
EXTERIOR - SDecifications -a- - -~------~----
/ L
Items Wiper and washer switch Rated load A Wiper switch LO, HI INT Washer switch Voltage drop (at 12V and the rated load) Wiper switch Washer switch Rear wiper and washer switch Rated load A Wiper switch Washer switch Voltage drop V Intermittent wiper relay <Front (incorporated in column switch)> sec. Intermittent interval (min.-max.) Variable-interval intermittent wiper Delay time in washer moving <Rear> Intermittent interval sec. sec. V
Specifications
4 0.22 f 0.05 Max. 4 0.2 or less 0.5 or less
5 5 0.1 or less
Approx. 3 - 12 0.6 8+2
, LJ
Door mirror Printed heater lines Working voltage V Operating current A R e s i s t a n c e s1 IO-15 3.5 or less 7.7 - 10.2
Items Standard value Front wiper blade park position (A) Specifications
MBlKC- -
mm (in.)
15 -; (.6 +_$I

items Specified adhesive 3M ATD Part No. 8609 SUPER FAST URETHAN or equivalent 3M ATD Part No. 6382 or equivalent 3M ATD Part No. 6382 or equivalent I
r--Side garnish
~~
TSB Revision
EXTERIOR - SDecial Tools
SPECIAL TOOLS
I-
MBlKG- .
system inspectlon
MB991 359
TSB Revision
EXTERIOR - Troubleshooting
51-5
MSlKHBM
TROUBLESHOOTING
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
IGNITION :34 fITCH(ACC)
15A -
FRONT Km YE7 JUMPER CONNECTOR A-11X

r
E a d
53 - - - -I-l--r -Iii .
i4
i
.:1 ~;x2,
CT
I s
--f-l-I i
13 15:2
r,.
L1------ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -7 q, ~-fi5
$x2
x3
lTX2 ~ pi2k%hw, :2 -E
v .L
IjWl z
n
I
6LOll"FAST
COLUMN 11 SWITCH C-11

I MITTENT WIPER RELAY I 1 FROii WASHER_SWITCH T I
3
FRONT WIPER SWITCII
VARIABLE INTERMITTENTo WIPER CONTROL SWITCH
C-79 S&~DIAGNOSIS CONNECTOR EB'p%Jg@ g:f;: [pm1

i
:X35-AC-R1301-NY
1 TSB Revision
51-6
FRONT wm
FRON'I WIPER SWITCH *
WIPER IGNITION RELAY SWITCH(ACC) 7
C I
z a C
c-29 [ml
.---
5 -------
FRONT E%iR A-19
r ( L
I:
$1 1 7 I I2 7
55: dCD
1 rEBR ------_ I 4
4 3
A - j I-CII;CUIT
MOTOR A-15
BREFAKER +lk-.--I 1
%l:VEHICLES WITHCUT THEFT-ALARM SYSTEU Z2:VEHICLES WITH THZFT-ALARM SYSTEM
TSB Revision
OPERATION <Low-speed (and high-speed) wiper operation> TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS
51-7
When the wiper switch is placed in the LO position with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, wipers operate continuously at low speed. Placing the wiper switch in the HI position causes the wipers to operate at high speed. When the wiper switch is placed in the OFF position, the cam contacts of wiper motor causes current to flow through the auto wiper stop circuit, allowing the wiper blades to cycle before they reach to the stop positions. When the washer switch is placed in the ON position with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, washers operate.
1. Wipers do not operate. (1) Washer is not operative, either. l Check multi-purpose fuse No. 0. l Check ground. 2. Low-speed (or high-speed) wiper operation only is inoperative. l Check wiper switch.
<Auto wiper stop operation>

l
3. Wipers do not stop. l .Check wiper motor. l Check intermittent wiper relay. l Check wiper switch. 4. Washer is inoperative. l Check washer motor. l Check washer switch. NOTE For information concerning the ETACS control unit, refer to P.51-24.
<Washer operation>
l
REAR WIPER AND WASHER

OPERATION <Low-speed wiper operation> / i,
l
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS 1. Wipers do not operate. (1) Washer is not operative, either. l Check multi-purpose fuse No. @. l Check ground. 2. Low-speed wiper operation only is inoperative. l Check wiper switch. 3. Wipers do not stop. l Check wiper motor. l Check rear intermittent wiper relay. l Check rear wiper switch. 4. Intermittent wiper operation is inoperative. l Check terminal voltage of the rear intermittent wiper relay energized. (Refer to P.51-34 for information concerning the installation position of the intermittent wiper relay.) Terminal No.
2
When the rear wiper switch is placed in the ON position with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, wipers operate continuously at low speed. When the rear wiper switch is placed in the OFF position, the cam contacts of wiper motor causes current to flow through the auto wiper stop circuit, allowing the wiper blades to cycle before they reach to the stop positions. When the rear wiper switch is placed in the INT position with the ignition switch in ACC or ON position, the rear intermittent wiper relay is energized causing the rear intermittent wiper relay contacts to close and open repeatedly. When the contacts are closed, the wiper motor is energized. When the rear wiper motor is energized, the rear intermittent wiper relay contacts open; however, the cam contacts keep the rear wiper motor energized until the wiper blades return to their stop position.
<Auto wiper stop operation>

l
<Intermittent wiper operation>

l
l l
Voltage I OV
12v
Check Rear intermittent wiper relay or rear wiper switch Rear intermittent wiper relay -(Normal)
0 f-, 12v (alternating)
L
TSB Revision
5. Washer is inoperative. l Check washer motor. l Check washer switch
51-8
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
IGNITION I iITCH(ACC)
C-82 REAR INTERMITTENT WIPER RELAY
TAILLIC T RELAY 3I F 0. 0 15A c E-18

3 6
I ~
1
1
DEDICATED FUSE
I I
0.85L
3 C-69 ii+ m d
J/B
1 8 C-71
L
I I
_----_-----_-ii?
m d
17 ----__ CL 23 m t %x4 /\
16
3 &
14 3
J 0; 1 /X7 /\
8 D-44
~
I I
REAR LmFi /
ILL6
,,8
I ii 6 O .-----0 m
D-42 -1 RHEOSTAT 2 F-34 pLi%Fq REAR iii%~~R F-15

m
2 D-41
id m d
REAR WIPER MOTOR F-03 123 w
b5-AC-RlJOE-NY
TSB Revision
EXTERIOR - Troubleshooting ELECTRIC REMOTE CONTROLLED MIRROR

MSlEBBF
i.l
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
BEI LLI fs
:ER -
IGNITION SWITCH(ACC) I
J/B
9L F? PWATED @ iOA 1 w &

: I 1 I I I , I I I I I I I I I t t I 1 I I , I I I I I I I I t ,
---------------------2 2 '-14 f
9
4 @ 15A $
C-82 :::: m
i$iiq
D-42
REMOTE fjI#;"o;LLE' EFti
7 9 -?
8 ;'
3 9:
2 c:
6 m ,
> u a > c3 tI L-------------q+1~-I~---------------------)L13 . --- ---- ------------------ +'7 D-43 1'8 /liRmq t I
w
at2 D-41 .) :: El
(LH)
KXS-AC-R13C3-NY
(RH) REMOTE iy;;I$)LLED
:1
:l:VEHICLES WITH MIRROR HEATER X2:VEHICLES WITHOUT MIRROR HEATEF
OPERATION
l
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS Neither right nor left mirror operates 1) Also cigarette lighter does not operate l Check multi-purpose fuse No. 0. 2) Cigarette lighter operates l Check remote controlled mirror switch.
When the remote controlled mirror switch is operated while the ignition key is in ACC or ON position, current flows through fuse No. @ remote controlled mirror switch, remote controlled mirror, remote controlled mirror switch, and ground, causing the mirror to move.
TSB Revision
51-10
EXTERIOR - Service Adjustment Procedures

INSPECTION OF ACTIVE AERO SYSTEM
1. INSPECTION BY WARNING LIGHT Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON to see if the warning light is lit for approx. three seconds and then goes out. If not, replace the control unit. NOTE (1) The active aero control unit has a self-check function which is designed as follows: Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON. If the unit is in normal condition, the warning light is lit for approx. three seconds and then goes out. (2) If the front venturi skirt does not return to the standard condition properly in normal use, the warning light comes on d!
68FOO51
2. INSPECTION BY ACTIVE AERO SWITCH AT AUTO 2 (1) With the vehicle stopped, insert the key in the ignition key cylinder. (2) Set the active aero switch to AUTO 2 to make sure that the active aero system is placed in the operative condition and the indicator light comes on. Then turn off the active aero switch to confirm that the system LCJ returns to the standard condition and the indicator light goes out. (3) If there is abnormality, check the following parts. l Active aero switch l Lighting monitor switch l Air dam link assembly and rear spoiler l Wiring harness 3. INSPECTION WITH MULTI-USE TESTER Using pseudo vehicle speed input function of the multi-use tester, inspection can be made by means of vehicle speed. (1) (2) (3) (4) Set the multi-use tester to the diagnosis connector. Turn the ignition switch to ACC or ON. Place the active aero switch to AUTO 1. Using the multi-use tester, increase the vehicle speed to approx. 80 km/h (50 mph) or more to make sure that the active aero system is placed to the operative condition. Then decrease the vehicle speed to approx. 50 km/h (30 mph) or less to confirm that the system returns to the standard condition.
Multl-use tester
1 TSB Revision
EXTERIOR - Front Bumper

We A
Installation Grommet
51-11
M51ZAAW
FRONT BUMPER
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF CLIP WITH SCREW

Normally, remove the clip with a Phillips screwdriver. If, however, there is enough space to insert a screwdriver or the like behind the clip, use the following procedure for ease of work.
Screw
10NOl87
Screw t
18N0185
1. Removal Using a screwdriver or the like, press the screw from the inside of the bumper to remove the clip. 2. Installation With the grommet inserted in the hole, press the screw in.
Me B
Removal installation
t
18N0188 18N0184
/ i
I L
1 TSB Revision
51-12
EXTERIOR - Front Bummer

I
REMOVAL ,AND INSTALLATION
9
<Vehicles with active aero system> d.9
F 4 .d
IL
Lag ,
;3 \
<Vehicles without active aero system>
Removal steps (Vehicles without 1. Front under cover side panel active aero system) 2. Front under cover center panel i 3. Side cover panel 4. Front cover panel (Vehicles with 5. Center cover panel active aero system) I)* 6. Front under cover panel 7. Front splash shield extension 8. Fog light 9. License plate bracket
10. Front combination light 11. Optical horn lens 12. Clips with screw 13. Tapping screws 14. Bolts ; 51: Bu;per face assembly 17. Bumper reinforcement assembly

6. INSTALLATION OF FRONT UNDER COVER PANEL
Install the air dam link assembly in the operative condition for ease of front under cover panel. I
TSB Revision
EXTERIOR - Front Bumper DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY
51-13
22 Nm 16 ftlbs.
Bumper face disassembly steps 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Bumper face side plate Bumper face corner plate Bumper face upper front plate Bumper face upper center plate Bumper face protector Side lower plate Center lower plate Bumper face
Bumper reinforcement disassembly steps 9. Fog light bracket ** l * IO. Bumper absorber 11. Bumper reinforcement stay 12. License plate bracket support 13. Bumper reinforcement

10. REMOVAL OF BUMPER ABSORBER
Caution
1. Do not attempt to repair a bumper absorber that has been compressed in an accident; replace it with a new one. 2. Before discarding the bumper absorber, drill a 3 mm (.13 in.) diameter hole to discharge the gas contained in the unit. Be sure to wear safety goggles while performing this operation as the gas is not harmful but chips may be ejected with it. 3. If the bumper absorber is to be discarded, do not burn it.

10. INSTALLATION OF BUMPER ABSORBER If the squareness between the bumper reinforcement stay and the bumper absorber is improper, adjust it by putting a spacer between them.
TSB Revision
EXTERIOR - Rear Bumper
REAR BUMPER
Grommet
MllZAAX
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF CLIP WITH SCREW

Normally, remove the clip with a Phillips screwdriver. If, however, there is enough space to insert a screwdriver or the like behind the clip, use the following procedure for ease of work. t
I d ~
Screw
Screw
1. R e m o v a l
Using a screwdriver or the like, press the screw from the inside of the bumper to remove the clip. I
2. Installation
W ith the grommet inserted in the hole, press the screw in. I I
REMOVAL. AND INSTALLATION
/
Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation l Removal and Installation of Rear I
Ld;
Removal steps ECS control unit (Refer to GROUP 33B - ECS Control Unit.) 1. Rear combination light 2. Rear panel garnish
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Bolts License plate light Clips with screw Nuts Tapping screws Bolts
9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.
Bumper face upper plate Bumper face assembly Rear bumper upper extension Rear bumper harness connector Nuts Bumper reinforcement assembly
LA
TSB Revision
EXTERIOR - Rear Bumper DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY
51-15
22 16
18FOO27
Bumper face assembly disassembly steps I. Bumper face side plate 2. License plate light bracket 3. Bumper muffler plate 4. Bumper face Bumper reinforcement assembly disassembly steps +I) 5. Rear bumper harness 6. Bumper absorber 7. Bumper reinforcement

6. REMOVAL OF BUMPER ABSORBER
Caution
1. Do not attempt to repair a bumper absorber that has been compressed in an accident; replace it with a new one. 2. Before discarding the bumper absorber, drill a 3 mm (.13 in.) diameter hole to discharge the gas contained in the unit. Be sure to wear safety goggles while performing this operation as the gas is not harmful but chips may be ejected with it. 3. If the bumper absorber is to be discarded, do not burn it.
TSB Revision
51-16
EXTERIOR - Garnishes and Mouldings

M51RDAF
GARNISHES AND MOULDINGS

13 Nm
I I
2.5Nm
I I
18FO174
~ 1 :Ij ~ I
Front deck garnish removal steps 1. Wiper arm assembly 2. Front deck garnish Drip moulding and center pillar garnish removal steps (Refer to GROUP 42 Drip line weatherstrip Door weatherstrip holder Drip Line Weatherstrip.) 3. Drip moulding Quarter upper trim (Refer to GROUP 52ATrims.) 4. Center pillar garnish
Windshield moulding removal steps 3. Drip moulding 5. Windshield moulding (Refer to GROUP 42 -Windshield.) Liftgate moulding removal 6. Liftgate moulding (Refer to GROUP 42 - Liftgate Glass.) Quarter window moulding and glass removal steps 4. Center pillar garnish 7. Quarter window moulding and glass (Refer to GROUP42 Quarter Window Glass.) Side garnish removal l * l * 8. Sidegarnish Rear panel garnish removal steps Rear end trim (Refer to GROUP Rear side trim 52A-Trims.) 3 9. Rear combination light 10. Rear panel garnish
I 1 I I
Adhesive tape: 3M ATD Part No. 6382 or equivalent
L.J
TSB Revision
EXTERIOR - Garnishes and Mouldings SERVICE POINT OF REMOVAL

8. REMOVAL OF SIDE GARNISH
51-17
(1) Remove the side garnish mounting nuts. (2) Affix protective tape to the periphery of the side garnish.
Protective tape (3) Insert a fishing line [@0.8 mm (03 in.)] between the body and the side garnish and grip each end of the fishing line. Cut through adhesive material by pulling wire in a sawing motion and remove the side garnish.
(4) When the side qarnish is fastened with a clip or bolt, pull the side garnish toward you to remove the clip or the bolt. / i Caution 1. To reuse the side garnish, remove it by pulling the fishing line along the body so as not to damage the edges of the side garnish. 2. If it is hard to cut through adhesive material, heat it to approx. 40C (104F).
(5) Use an infrared lamp or the like to heat the pressure sensitive double-sided tape remaining on the body to 40 to 60C (?04 to 140F) for 5 to 10 minutes. Caution Do not overheat the tape until its surface dries to turn white.
I
Pressure sensitive double-sided tape
18FO181
(6) Use a resin spatula to scrape off the pressure sensitive adhesive double coated tape.
Resin spatula
-I
TSB Revision
51-18

(7) Wipe off application surface of body with clean cloth dampened with degreaser (3M ATD Part No. 8906 or equivalent). NOTE After wiping surface, leave surface as it is to volatilize degreaser. GJ ~
~~~,~, . .>cpe ~-~~~~~o

8. INSTALLATION OF SIDE GARNISH Adhesion of Pressure Sensitive Double-sided Tape to Side Garnish (For Reuse) (1) Use an infrared lamp or the like to heat the pressure sensitive double-sided tape to 40 to 60C (104 to 140F) for 5 to 10 minutes. Caution Do not overheat the tape until its surface dries to turn white. (2) Using a resin spatula or gasket scraper, scrape off the pressure sensitive double-sided tape. (3) If the pressure sensitive double-sided tape remains on the side garnish, repeat steps (1) and (2).
(4) Use cloth moistened with degreaser (3M ATD Part No. 8906 or equivalent) to wipe the side garnish clean. (5) Scrape old adhesive slightly. Caution Do not scrape off all old adhesive.
18FO19;
, (6) Affix specified pressure sensitive double-sided tape to the side garnish. I I
Rear
Front
Specified adhesive tape: 3M ATD Part No. 6382 or equivalent
Pressure sensitive double-sided tape
18FO178
TSB Revision

Installation of Side Garnish
51-19
(1) Remove strip paper from the pressure sensitive doublesided tape. NOTE Affix adhesive tape to the end of strip paper for ease of strip paper removal.
18FO194
(2) With its clips and bolts aligned with the respective holes in the body, install the side garnish to the body. NOTE If it is hard to affix the pressure sensitive double-sided tape in winter, heat the application surface of the body and the adhesive surface of the side garnish before affixing the tape. Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._........... 40-60C (104- 140F) Side garnish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 30C (68 - 86F) (3) Apply pressure fully to the side garnish.
TSB Revision
51-20 AERO PARTS
EXTERIOR - Aero Parts

M5lXAA.J
25Nm I:8 ft.lbs.
18FO251
Side air dam removal steps Front splash shield (Refer to GROUP 42 Fender.) Quarter trim (Refer to GROUP 52A-Trims.) 1. Side air dam
l * **
18FO179
Rear spoiler removal steps Liftgate lower trim (Refer to GROUP 52ATrims.) 2. Rear spoiler assembly 3. Center stay 4. High mounted stop light
@ Adhesive tape: 3M ATD Part No. 6382 or equivalent m Adhesive: 3M ATD Part No. 8609 SUPER FAST URETHAN or equivalent
TSB Revision

<Vehicles with active aero system>
51-21
16FO252
Side air dam removal steps Front splash shield (Refer to GROUP 42 - Fender.) +I) l + 1. Side airdam Rear spoiler removal steps Liftgate lower trim (Refer to GROUP 52A-Trims.) 2. Rear spoiler assembly 4. High mounted stop light Front under cover panel, air dam link assembly removal steps 5. Side cover panel (L.H.) 6. Front cover panel 7. Center cover panel 8. Front under cover panel 9. Lower plate 10. Upper plate I)* 11. Air dam link assembly 12. Under cover bracket Active aero switch removal steps 13. Switch garnish C 14. Active aero switch Active aero control unit removal steps Rear side trim (L.H.) (Refer to GROUP 52A-Trims.) 15. Active exhaust control unit 16. Active aero control unit
16FOO53
TSB Revision
51-22
EXTERIOR - Aero Parts SERVICE POINT OF REMOVAL

1. REMOVAL OF SIDE AIR DAM Remove the side air dam by the same procedure as the side IJ garnish. (Refer to P.51-17.)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECTION OF REAR SPOILER MOTOR AND LIMIT SWITCH (1) Connect the battery as shown in the illustration to make sure that the motor and spoiler operate freely. Then connect the battery with the reversed polarity to make sure that the motor and spoiler operate freely. (2) While performing the inspection described in (1) above, check the limit switch for continuity.
FLAT (standard position) During operation SLANT (operative position) 1 Motor Limit switch )
0 0
0 0
2. INSPECTION OF AIR DAM LINK ASSEMBLY MOTOR AND LIMIT SWITCH (1) Connect the battery as shown in the illustration to make sure that the motor and the linkage operate freely. (2) While performing the inspection described in (1) above, check the limit switch for continuity.
NOTE
O-O indicates that there is continuity between the terminals.
i--
Limit switch
Motor
/
18FO259
_I
TSB Revision

3. INSPECTION OF ACTIVE AERO SWITCH Operate the switch to check the continuity between the terminals.
18FO257
(Automatic reset type) NOTE O-0 indicates that there is continuity between the terminals.

11. INSTALLATION OF AIR DAM LINK ASSEMBLY Install the air dam link assembly in the operative condition for ease of front under cover panel. 1. INSTALLATION OF SIDE AIR DAM Install the side air dam by the same procedure as the side garnish (refer to P.51-181, provided that specified adhesive is used.
View A _ View B
Rear
Front
Specified adhesive: 3M ATD Part No. 8609 SUPER FAST URETHAN or equivalent
Adhesive
18FO175 3
TSB Revision I---
51-24
EXTERIOR - Windshield Wiper and Washer

INPUT CHECK Using the multi-use tester or voltmeter, check whether or not the input signals from each switch are being input to the ETACS unit. (1) Connect the multi-use tester to the diagnosis check connector located at the right side of the junction block or connect the voltmeter between the ETACS terminal and the ground terminal. (2) Check if the buzzer of the multi-use tester sounds or the needle of the voltmeter moves when each switch noted below is operated. If the buzzer sounds or the needle moves, the input signals are being input to the ETACS unit, so that switch can be considered to be functioning normally. If not, the switch or switch input circuit is faulty. Check the switch and the switch input circuit.
l l l l
\J
Junction block
\ \
ZOFOOl?
Diagnosis connector
A/;
Ground With voltmeter
ETACS
Ignition switch Wiper switch (INT) Intermittent variable-volume switch Washer switch
Diagnosis check connector
With multi-use tester
1 TSB Revision
EXTERIOR - Windshield Wiper and Washer TROUBLESHOOTING QUICK-REFERENCE TABLE

INTERMITTENT WIPERS
Problem The wipers dont operate when the wiper switch is set to the INT position. [The wipers do operate, however, when the wiper switch is set to the 1 (low speed) position.] Probable cause(s) Checking procedure Remedy
51-25
Damage or disconnection If a malfunction is discovof the wiring of the wiper ered as a result of the switch (INT) input checking of the input circuit. (P.51-24). conduct check No. 2 (P.51-28) of the Damage or disconnection individual part and of the wiring of the wiper circuit. switch (INT). Damage or disconnection of the wiring of the ignition switch input circuit. If a malfunction is discovered as a result of the checking of the input (P.51-24). conduct check No. 1 (P.51-27) of the individual part and circuit.
Repair the wiring harness, or replace the column switch.
Repair the wiring harness.
Damage or disconnection Conduct check No. 4 of the wiring of the wiper (P.51-30) of the individual relay activation circuit. part and circuit. Malfunction of the wiper relay. Malfunction of the electronic control unit. The wipers dont stop when the wiper switch is OFF. IThis problem occurs at the low ;p;$ of the wipers.) If the wipers continue operating {without stopping) at the 2 sosition (high speed) of the uiper switch, there is a short-circuit in the circuit at the Ylviper motor high-speed side. Short-circuit in the wiper switch (INT) input circuit. Short-circuit in the wiper switch (INT). Short-circuit in the wiper relay activation circuit. Malfunction of the electronic control unit. JVhen the wiper switch is set to the INT position, the wipers operate continuously at low speed, not intermittent operation. IThe wipers stop, however, when :he wiper switch is set to OFF.) The intermittent time does not :hange when the intermittent Jariable volume switch setting s changed. Short-circuit in the wiper switch (INT) input circuit. Short-circuit in the wiper switch (INT). Malfunction of the electronic control unit. -
Repair the wiring harness, or replace the column switch.
Replace the electronic control unit. Repair the wiring harness, or replace the column switch.
If a malfunction is discovered as a result of the checking of the input (P.51-24). conduct check No. 2 (P.51-28) of the individual part and circuit. Conduct check No. 4 (P.51-30) of the individual part and circuit. -
Repair the wiring harness. Replace the electronic control unit. Repair the wiring harness. or replace the column switch.
If a malfunction is discovered as a result of the checking of the input (P.51-24). conduct check No. 2 (P.51-28) of the individual part and circuit. -
Replace the electronic control unit.
Damage or disconnection If a malfunction is discov- Repair the wiring harof the wiring of the inter- ered as a result of the ness, or replace the column switch. mittent variable volume checking of the input switch input circuit. (P.51-24). conduct check No. 3 (P.51-29) of the Damage or disconnection individual part and circuit. of the wiring of the intermittent variable volume switch. Malfunction of the electronic control unit. Replace the electronic control unit.
TSB Revision
51-26
MIST WIPERS/WASHER-INTERLOCKED WIPERS

Problem The wipers do not function when the washer switch is switched ON for 0.6 second or longer. (With the wiper switch at the INT position, however, intermittent operation of the wipers is normal, and the washer function is normal.) Probable cause(s) Checking procedure Remedy Repair the wiring harness, or replace the column switch.
Damage or disconnection If a malfunction is discovof the wiring of the ered as a result of the washer switch input checking of the input circuit. (P.51-241, conduct check No.5(P.51-31)ofthe Damage or disconnection individual part and circuit, of the wiring of the washer switch. Malfunction of the electronic control unit. -
Replace the electronic control unit. Replace the electronic control unit.
The wipers do not function when the washer switch is switched ON for less than 0.6 second. (The wipers and washer do function, however, when the washer switch is switched ON for 0.6 second or longer.)
Malfunction of the electronic control unit.
NOTE ECU (electronic control unit) indicates the ETACS unit.
TSB Revision
EXTERIOR
1. IGNITION SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT
Battery
- Windshield Wiper and Washer
51-27
CHECKING INDIVIDUAL PART AND CIRCUIT

Fusible link
LOCK lgnitlon switch
Junction block (Multl-purpose fuse)
Jumper connector
i! ~~A$ unit
16FO313
Operation Description As the condition for operation of the system, HIGH-level signals are sent to the electronic control unit when the ignition switch is set to the ACC or ON position. Electronic Control Unit Terminal Voltage (Disconnect the ECU Connector and Check at the Wiring Harness Side.) ECU terminal No.
53
Signal Ignition switch (ACC)
Status Ignition switch OFF ACC
Standard ov System voltage
Checking Individual Part Ignition switch: Refer to GROUP 54 - Ignition Switch.
TSB Revision
51-28
EXTERIOR
- Windshield Wiper and Washer
2. WIPER SWITCH ANT INPUT CIRCUIT
in,Ullnl,,en, lllC I,CI,II dctcclion CIICUI,
ETACS unrt
,ij
5v
i-i
7 ;;:2 I
Wrper switch
A3 I-Lolumn switch
J/B
16FO320
Operation
Description
L+,
When the wiper switch is set to the INT position, LOW-level signals are input to the electronic control unit; the intermittent time interval detection circuit is then activated, and the wipers operate at the intermittent time interval according to the setting of the intermittent variable volume switch. Electronic Control Unit Terminal Voltage (Connection Status of Electronic Control Unit Connector)
ECU terminal No. 9 1 1 *2 Signal Wiper switch INT signal Status Wiper switch OFF Wiper switch INT Terminal voltage 5V ov
Checking the Wiper Switch (INT Position) Circuit (Disconnect the ECU Connector and Check at the Wiring Harness Side.)
ECU terminal No. Connected to/measured component Wiper switch INT Measurement Tester connection Check conditions Standard No continuity
Checking Individual Part Wiper switch: Refer to P.51-33. NOTE *l : Vehicles without theft-alarm system 2: Vehicles with theft-alarm system
TSB Revision

3. INTERMITTENT VARIABLE VOLUME SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT
51-29
ETACS unit (ECU)
Xi
i-7 I
I Column switch
JIB
*l : Vehicles without theft-alarm system 2: Vehicles with theft-alarm system

ei
A16FO321
Operation
Description
This circuit functions to input (to the intermittent time interval detection circuit of the electronic control unit) the set value of the intermittent variable volume switch. Electronic Control Unit Terminal Voltage (Connection Status of Electronic Control Unit Connector)
ECU terminal No. 13 15*2 Signal Intermittent variable volume switch signal Status Intermittent variable volume switch FAST -+ SLOW Terminal voltage 0 + 2.5V
Checking the Intermittent Variable Volume Switch Circuit (Disconnect the Connector of the Electronic Control Unit and Check at the Wiring Harness Side.)
ECU terminal No. 13 15*2 Connected to/measured component Intermittent variable volume switch Measurement Tester connection Resistance 13*-ground 1 S*-ground Check condition FAST + SLOW (Should change in accordance with changes of the intermittent variable volume.) Standard O+ IkS1
Checking Individual Part / Intermittent variable volume switch: Refer to P.51-33.
id NOTE 1: Vehicles without theft-alarm system 2: Vehicles with theft-alarm system TSB Revision
51-30
E X T E R I O R - Windshield Wiper and Washer

lgnttton switch (ACC) I Junction block (Multi-purpose fuse)
4. WIPER RELAY ACTIVATION CIRCUIT
Lj I
0.85L
Column switch
*11 $0 i co a It
\ ?+ ii
I I
0.85L-W d ETACS untt (ECU) t,

A * I I
Wiper motor
12
Ei
16FO322
3 4
Operation Description
W ith the wiper switch at the INT position, switch ON the transistor (by the intermittent activation signal from the electronic control unit) in order to activate the wiper relay.
Electronic Control Unit Terminal Voltage (Connection Status of Electronic Control Unit Connector)
ECU terminal No. 4 6 *2 Signal Wiper relay signal Status )N$FyI, switch Ignition switch OFF Ignition switch ACC Terminal voltage ov System voltage
NOTE I : Vehicles without theft-alarm system 2: Vehicles with theft-alarm system
Checking Individual Part

W iper relay: Refer to P.51-34.
1 TSB Revision
EXTERIOR - Windshield WiDer and Washer

5. WASHER SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT
51-31
lgnitlon swatch (ACC)
-7-l
Column switch
Junction block 15~ @ (Multi-purpose fuse)
ETACS unit
(ECU) *,
ON-time detec\I \I
16FO323
Operation Description While the washer switch is ON, HIGH-level signals are sent to the washer switch ON-time detection circuit simultaneous with the activation of the washer motor, thus causing the transistor to be switched ON and the wipers to be activated for a certain fixed time. Electronic Control Unit Terminal Voltage (Connection Status of Electronic Control Unit Connector) ECU terminal No. 58 60*2
NOTE
Signal Washer switch signal
Status Ignition switch ACC Washer switch OFF Washer switch ON
Terminal voltage ov
System
voltage
*I : Vehicles without theft-alarm system 2: Vehicles with theft-alarm system Checking Individual Part Washer switch: Refer to P.51-33
1 TSB Revision
EXTERIOR - Windshield Wiper and Washer MOVAL AND INSTALLATION

Y5lK.JAR
LJ
( I
\
9Nm 7 ft.lbs.
16FO103
3emoval steps of linkage I. Wiper blade I)* 2. Wiper arm 3. Front deck garnish 4. Air inlet garnish (RH) 5. Hole cover 6. Wiper motor a* 7. Linkage Removal steps of wiper motor 1. Wiper blade l * 2. Wiper arm 5. Hole cover 6. Wiper motor *I) Removal of column switch (wiper and washer switch) 15. Column switch (Refer to GROUP 54 Column Switch.) TSB Revision
Removal steps of washer tank 8. Battery 9. Battery tray 10. Washer tank 11. Washer motor 12. Washer fluid level sensor Removal steps of washer tube 8. Battery 9. Battery tray 13. Washer nozzle 14. Washer tube
EXTERIOR - Windshield Wiper and Washer SERVICE POINT OF REMOVAL

6. REMOVAL OF WIPER MOTOR
51-33
(1) Remove the wiper motor mounting bolts. (2) Using a plain screwdriver, detach the crank arm of the wiper motor from the linkage to remove the wiper motor. Caution Do not remove the crank arm from the wiper motor except when necessary, as the auto stop angle has been preset. When the crank arm is to be removed, make a mark on both of them before removal.
INSPECTION
INSPECTION OF WIPER MOTOR Inspect the wiper motor mounted on the vehicle with its connector disconnected. Inspection of Wiper Motor Operation at LOW and HIGH Speeds
Inspection of Operation
Connect the battery to the wiper motor as shown, and check its operation at LOW and HIGH speeds. Inspection of Wiper Motor STOP Position
Low-speed High-speed operation operation Inspection of Stop Posltion
1610026
(1) Operate the wiper motor at LOW speed and intermediately disconnect the battery to let the wiper motor stop. (2) Connect the terminals as well as the battery, as shown, and check that the wiper motor stops at the automaticallystopped position following LOW-speed operation. INSPECTION OF COLUMN SWITCH
16NOO25
(1) Remove the knee protector. (Refer to GROUP 52A - Instrument Panel.) (2) Remove the column cover. (3) Remove the column switch right coupling connector (11 terminals). Inspection of Wiper and Washer Switch Operate the switch to check for continuity between the terminals.
3 4 5 6 7 8
Variable intermittent wiper control switch Washer switch
lj
16FO200
C-0 denotes that there is continuity between the terminals. TSB I I
NOTE
vision
51-34
Connector B

Inspection of Wiper Relay (Built-in Column Switch) (1) Check to ensure that there is continuity between terminals @ and @ and between the terminals @ and @, and that there is no continuity between terminals @ and @. d (2) Connect the positive terminal of the battery to terminal @ and the negative terminal to terminal @ to check that the battery voltage is available at terminal @.
-____
1.310027
INSPECTION OF WASHER MOTOR (I) When the washer motor is inspected, make sure that it is mounted on the washer tank and that the washer tank is filled with water. (2) Connect the battery as shown to check whether water is pumped out.
lXN007t
INSPECTION OF WASHER FLUID LEVEL ,SENSOR (1) Connect a circuit tester to the connector of the level sensor as shown. (2) Check that when the float is moved down, the circuit is closed and that when the float is moved up, the circuit is opened.

2. INSTALLATION OF WIPER ARM (1) The wiper arms, right and left, are different in shape. Check the identification symbol. (2) After the wiper blades have been set, install them in such a way that the ends of the wiper blades will stop at the specified positions (standard values).
dentification mark: A Front deck garnish
18FO164
Standard value: (A) 15 tz mm (.6 tf in.)
d
TSB Revision
EXTERIOR - Rear Wber and Washer
51-35
M51 KKAO
REAR WIPER AND WASHER

,/
.lO
.ll
16FO104
Removal steps of wiper motor

l *
1. Wiper blade 2. Wiper arm 3. Spacer Liftgate lower trim (Refer to GROUP 52A Trims.) 4. Wiper motor
Removal steps of washer tank Rear end trim (Refer to GROUP 52A-Trims.) 5. Cap 6. Washer tank 7. Washer motor
Removal steps of washer tube Front pillar trim (RH) Quarter trim (RH) Quarter upper trim (RH) !R$$f$$ GRoUP 52A Rear roof rail trim Rear side trim (RH) i . l * 8. Liftgate moulding, upper 9. Washer nozzle 10. Tube and grommet assembly 11. Washer tube
1 TSB Revision
51-36
EXTERIOR - Rear Wiper and Washer SERVICE POINT OF REMOVAL

8. REMOVAL OF LIFTGATE MOULDING, UPPER Using a special tool, pry the clip portion to remove the upper liftgate moulding. ~
INSPECTION
WIPER MOTOR Check the wiper motor with it mounted on the vehicle and with its harness connector disconnected. Operation of Wiper Motor
nspection of operation
Connect a battery to the wiper motor, as shown, to check the operation of the wiper motor.
Wiper Motor Stop Position

16N0029
Inspection of stop position
(1) Operate the wiper motor by the procedure described above and intermediately disconnect the battery to let the wiper motor stop. (2) Reconnect the battery as shown and check that the wiper motor stops at the automatically-stopped position after d operation.
WIPER WASHER SWITCH (I) Remove switch garnish B from the knee protector.
(2) Operate the switch to check for continuity between the terminals.
16FO191
16FO201
NOTE
O-0 denotes that there is continuity between the terminals.

1
TSB
Revision
EXTERIOR - Rear Wiper and Washer

INTERMITTENT WIPER RELAY
51-37
(1) Remove the quarter trim. (Refer to GROUP 52A - Trims.) (2) With the intermittent wiper relay connected to the wiring harness connector, let the wiper operate intermittently and check the voltage at terminal 0.
WASHER MOTOR (1) When the washer motor is inspected, make sure that it is mounted on the washer tank and that the washer tank is filled with water. (2) Connect the battery as shown to check whether water is pumped out.
18N007F

2. INSTALLATION OF WIPER ARM After assembling the wiper blade to the wiper arm, install the wiper arm with its tip positioned along the ceramic part.
TSB Revision
51-38 DOOR MIRROR
EXTERIOR - Door Mirror

~
MSlGAAR
18FO166
Door mirror removal steps

l *
a*
I. Door mirror 2. Harness connector 3. Mirror
Electric remote controlled mirror switch removal 4. Instrument panel switch 5. Electric remote controlled mirror switch

1. REMOVAL OF DOOR MIRROR Tilt the door mirror backward and forward to remove the attaching bolts.
Pivnt
3. REMOVAL OF MIRROR Tilt the mirror upward and fit a screwdriver blade covered with protective tape in the notch between the mirror and the pivot plate to pry up the mirror. Caution Do not fit the screwdriver blade between the pivot plate and actuator assembly.
\ Lj
Notches TSB Revision
EXTERIOR - Door Mirror

<Vehicles witpout heater>
51-39
INSPECTION
DOOR MIRROR (1) Check to be sure that the mirror moves as described in the table when each terminal is connected to the battery. (2) Check to see that there is continuity between terminals 1 and 5.
18FO167
RIGHT
0 0 0 0
LEFT
NOTE (I) O-O indicates that each terminal is connected to the battery (2) * indicates door mirror terminal on vehicles without heater.
c
ELECTRIC REMOTE CONTROL MIRROR SWITCH Operate switches and check for continuity between terminals.
18FO22(
!I
TSB Revision
INTERIOR
CONTENTS
FLOOR CONSOLE* ____....._.........__._..._......_..._...... 11 FRONT SEAT* HEADLINING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 ........................................................ .................................... 17 8 REAR SEAT . .._._____..______....____.._.._._..___.._._____.....___.... SEAT BELT* TRIMS ........................................................
NWAA-A
24 25 12 2 I I
.................................................................... ......................
INSTRUMENT PANEL*
TROUBLESHOOTING
SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
(1) A Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), which uses a driver-side air bag, has been installed in the 3000GT. (2) The SRS includes the following components: impact sensors, SRS diagnosis unit: SRS warning light, air bag module, clock spring, interconnecting wiring. Other SRS-related components, (that may have to be removed/installed in connection with SRS service or maintenance) are indicated in the table of contents by an asterisk (*). WARNING! (I) Improper service or maintenance of any component of the SRS, or any SRS-related component, can lead to personal injury or death to service personnel (from inadvertent firing of the air bag) or to the driver (from rendering the SRS inoperative). (2) Service or maintenance of any SRS component or SRS-related component must be performed only at an authorized MITSUBISHI dealer. (3) MITSUBISHI dealer personnel must thoroughly review this manual, and especially its GROUP 52B Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), before beginning any service or maintenance of any component of the SRS or any SRS-related component.
52A-2 TROUBLESHOOTING
OWER SEAT
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
INTERIOR - Troubleshooting
MSZEBHA dl
IGNI'TI ON SWITl I-I (IGl)
FUSIB E LINK b Q
m 3
123 456
c-01
m % '1
I / kt
lm
C-82 ,\ 7 77 J/B 0 15A i C-80 "3

p77ziFq
__---_----_
1 TSB Revision
52A-3
POWER WINDOWS RELAY
SWITCH D-21
EXFR
m , %
11
4 --3 b : ;
:I
3 ----ce zs m c
q
2 --? 5: cu 2
z/
Di 5: cu &
1: :-I
J/B 2B 1
C-82 5 f
I
1 IEe12 $l
34
r!Gt 1 M 2
LUMBAR SUPPORT MOTOR IQ 2 1
SIDE SUPPORT MOTOR 1 2 Q
ROWER SEAT ASSEMBLY J;

1 9 C-78
1 TSB Revision
INTERIOR - Troubleshootina TENSION-REDUCER TYPE SEAT BELT

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
M52EBIA
II/Cu
FUSIBLE LiNK@ I m I E? q C-68 ,.l El '
ON (IGIl aI
2
/
15A
1OA
C-Slm r3 pTE$i@ d F-19 $6
z C-80
j1'121"14151sij
, XL
1 c-77 [pER@gqi
FRONT SEAT ;;B; S;;Y$H 2 FRONT SEAT BELT SOLENOID (RH) (LH)
E-26 @yiq
E-14 /EzJ
2 I1
E-20 m
? J EFS ---_-___-~~~~__--C-65
I :2 jX3
cp cc
k
3 ck 51 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
j2 _----
mx2
I pziEgqX' II II I 0 6 L----v-----------v ________ Y " Err1 7 16" 7 14:' & lo:2 > >0
c-?9 PI
SELF-DIAGNOSIS m CHECK CONNECTORa #jT -m 4 \

(35AC-RlSlO-NY
t1:VEHTCT.F.S
WiTHOUT
(RI% (LH) 7. DOOR SWITCH

TSB Revision
@$;"LA"' *cl - \PxJTPI UC w +c.v,a,,,uhhu ,,ITH ;tjgFgiALARM iRE pp&Jq H
INTERIOR - Troubleshootinn
OPERATION
l
52A-5
HINTS
TROUBLESHOOTING
If the driver fastens the seat belt with the ignition switch placed in the ON position, the seat belt switch in the seat belt buckle is turned ON to operate the seat belt solenoid in the retractor. This will reduce the seat belt rewinding torque to minimize a sense of oppression given by the belt. Owing to the timer function of the ETACS unit, the seat belt solenoid is kept in operation for 30 seconds after turning off the ignition switch, with due consideration to elimination of the sudden rise in a sense of oppression caused by the belt immediately after the ignition switch is turned off.
The seat belt solenoid does not function (I) The power window does not operate as well.
l
Check the ETACS unit. (Refer to GROUP 42 - Power Window.) Check dedicated fuse No. 1 and 19. Check the inoperative seat belt switch. Check the inoperative seat belt solenoid.
(2) The power window operates.

l
(3) Some of the tension reducers do not operates

l l
COMPONENT LOCATION Name ETACS unit Symbol

A
19FO134
1 TSB Revision
.52A-6
BUZZER
MSZEBAF
ON (IGl)
J/B
3 LT
: piT!$Rq
r----
D-43 9
COMBINATION METER D-05 BUZZER
T= >
,-& 102 A I----3 II: A

A
I?I y. dl
ss sl
101
c:i:~ Y-Rn (
3 A
DIODE c-09
cp > :
E-2112 ETACS UNIT

-
DOOR SWITCH(LH) S&DIAGNOSIS ~oIw~CT~R 3ET m

i%i
c-79
Ia 'THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM
TSB Revision
OPERATION Key-reminder warning L 0 Battery voltage is always supplied, through fusible link No. 6 to the key-reminder switch. l When the drivers seat is opened while the ignition key is still in the key cylinder, the door switch is switched ON, electricity flows to fusible link No. 6, the key-reminder switch, the buzzer, the door switch, and ground, and the buzzer sounds. Seat belt warning
l
52A-7
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS Key-reminder warning The key-reminder warning doesnt sound. (I) The seat belt warning function is OK. l Check the door switch. (2) The seat belt warning also doesnt function. l Check the buzzer. Seat belt warning 1. The seat belt warning doesnt function. (I) The seat belt warning light flashes. l Check the seat belt switch. (2) The seat belt warning light also does not function (and the key-reminder warning also does not function). l Check the key-reminder switch. 2. The buzzer doesnt stop even though the drivers seat belt has been buckled. l Check the seat belt switch. 3. The seat belt warning light doesnt flashes (but the buzzer sounds). l Check the light bulb. NOTE For the inspection of the ETACS unit, refer to P.52A-25.
Battery voltage is applied, through fuse No. 11 to the ETACS unit when the ignition key is at the ON position. Electricity flows to fusible link No. 6, the seat belt warning light, the ETACS unit, and ground, and the seat belt warning light flashes for approx. 6 seconds. If the driver does not buckle the seat belt, the seat belt switch is switched ON, electricity flows to fusible link No. 6, the key-reminder switch, the buzzer, the seat belt switch, the ETACS unit, and ground, and the buzzer sounds for approx. 6 seconds. When the driver buckles the seat belt, the seat belt switch is switched OFF and the buzzer stops.
COMPONENT LOCATION 1 Symbol ( I A t
Name
ETACS unit
19FO134
16FO35
1 TSB Revision
52A-8 INSTRUMENT PANEL
INTERIOR - Instrument Panel

M52UAAT
For installation of the instrument panel, the bolts and screws described below are used. They are indicated by symbols in the illustration.
4 x 16 (.I6 x .63)
5 x 16 (.20 x .63)
4 x 12 (.I6 x .47)
6 x 16 (.24 x .63)
6 x 25 (.24 x .98)
19N0001 I
NOTE D = Thread diameter L = Effective thread length
TSB Revision
INTERIOR - Instrument Panel REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation l Removal and Installation of Floor Console (Refer to P.52A-11.)
52A-9
Removal steps 1. Hood lock release handle 2. Rheostat 3. Switch garnish B 4. Knee protector assembly 5. Column cover 6. Glove box striker 7. Glove box and cross pipe cover 8. Center air outlet assembly 9. Heater control assembly installation screws 10. Meter bezel 11. Combination meter 12. Speedometer cable adapter (Mechanical type speedometer) 13. Speaker or plug 14. Harness connector 15. Steering shaft mounting bolts 16. Instrument panel assembly
i*
19FO131
Front of

5. REMOVAL OF COLUMN COVER Remove the screws and remove the column cover while using care not to break the claws.
TSB Revision
52A-10
INTERIOR - Instrument Panel

8. REMOVAL OF CENTER AIR OUTLET ASSEMBLY Disengaging the clips of the center air outlet assembly with a flat tip (-1 screwdriver, remove the center air outlet assembly with the trim stick.
screwdriver
2OFOO321
I
12. REMOVAL OF SPEEDOMETER CABLE ADAPTER
(MECHANICAL TYPE SPEEDOMETER) (1) Disconnect the speedometer cable at the transaxle end of the cable. (2) Remove the adapter locks from the instrument panel. (3) Pull the speedometer cable slightly toward the passenger compartment and remove the adapter. I I I
I I
Glove box disassembly steps 1. Glove box stopper 2. Cross pipe cover 3. Glove box cover w 4. Ratchet assembly 5. Lock cylinder assembly 6. Glove box Instrument panel disassembly steps 7. Glove box lower frame Side air outlet (Refer to GROUP Photo sensor 55 -Ventilators.) Defroster garnish 1 Heater ducts Combination gauge (Refer to GROUP 54 2
L&i
19FO132
Meters and Gauges.)

8. Instrument panel wiring harness TSB Revision
INTERIOR - Floor Console
52A- 11
MSZUBAS
FLOOR CONSOLE
i
Removal steps WQ~~~~ ,_ 1. Cup holder \ 2. Console plug /t9 3. Rear console assembly 4. Radio panel 5. Radio 6. Switch garnish C 7. Console side cover 8. Front console garnish 9. Manual transaxle shift lever knob 10. Front console assembly
v@y
19FO130
Front console disassembly steps I. AIT garnish <ATT> 2. M/T shift lever cover <M/T> 3. Ashtray 4. Cigarette lighter 5. Power seat switch 6. Front console 7. Front console bracket Rear console disassembly steps 8. Plug 9. Console lid 10. Lock lever 11. Spring 12. Rear console TSB Revision
19FO129
52A-12 4
Trim
INTERIOR - Trims
TRIMS
M52UCW
TRIM CLIP REMOVAL/INSTALLATION PROCEDURES

19POO80
The type of clip shown in the illustration, which is used for the installation of instrument panel, should be removed and installed by the following procedures described below.
m in.)
Eli
REMOVAL (1) Use a cross-tip (+) screwdriver to push inward the pin (at the center of the trim clip) to a depth of about 2 mm (.08 in.). (2) Pull the trim clip outward to remove it. Caution Do not push the pin inward more than necessary because it may damage the grommet, or the pin may fall in, if pushed too far.
horn
19POO70
19POO8,
Pin Trim
19POO82
INSTALLATION (1) With the pin pulled out, insert the trim clip into the hole in the trim. (2) Push the pin inward until the pins head is flush with the grommet. (3) Check whether the trim is secure.
19POO80
TSB Revision
INTERIOR - Trims EMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

<Interior>
52A-13
19FOO33
1 B-B Scuff plate
c-c
Quart& upper trim Front piiar trim

I
,wca*
D-D1
Quart& upper trim
19FOO2C
Rear roof rail trim 1 igFoo22 Rear roof rail trim removal steps 8. Screw 10. Rear roof rail trim
Cowl side trim removal steps 1. Scuff plate 2. Cowl side trim Front pillar trim removal steps 4. 5. 6. 7. Hanger bracket Sash guide cover mounting bolt Clip Front pillar trim
Quarter upper trim removal steps 3. Quarter trim (Refer to P.52A-14.) 48: ;;;;anger 9. Quarter upper trim 1 TSB Revision
NOTE : Location of metallic clip (1) @ (2) c : Location of resin clip (3) * indicates trim clip. (Refer to P.52A-12.) (4) For door trim,. refer to GROUP 42 - Door Trim and Waterproof Film. I
52A-14
INTERIOR - Trims
Scuff plate 33 ftlbs.

19FOl60
19FOO46
Quarter trim removal steps ** ** 11. Rear seat 12. Shelf cover assembly 13. Shelf catcher 14. Cover 15. Garnish 16. Sash guide cover mounting bolt 17. Front seat belt anchor plate mounting bolt 18. Retractor cover 19. Rear seat belt anchor plate mounting bolt
20. Screw
21. Quarter trim 22. Rear side trim (Refer to P.52A-15.) 23. Quarter trim bracket NOTE *: Location of resin clip

11. REMOVAL OF REAR SEAT
With the lever pulled forward, raise the seat cushion to remove it.
TSB Revision
INTERIOR - Trims SERVICE POINT OF INSTALLATION

11. INSTALLATION OF REAR SEAT
52A-15
(1) Fit the seat cushion attachment wire under the seatback positively. (2) Pass the rear seat belt buckles through the. seat cushion. (3) Insert the lock plate of seat cushion in the hole provided in the floor positively.
<Luggage compartment>
I4-A{
Rear end trim
rB-B 9. Luggage compartment light connector con_ nection 10. Hear side trim NOTE (1) @ : Location of metallic clip (2) * : Location of resin clip 1 TSB Revision
Rear side trim, rear end trim removal steps I. Luggage compartment floor box (R.H.) 2. Luggage compartment floor box (L.H.) 3. Lid (R.H.) 4. Lid (L.H.) 5. Rear end trim 6. Screws 7. Floor mat mounting clip 8. High floor center board
52A-16
<Liftgate>
INTERIOR - Trims
19FOO27
A-AI
B-B[ Clip
1 Liftgate lower trim
Liftgate lower trim
D-D
Liftbate side trim
19FO173
Liftgate trim removal steps 1. Shelf hook 2. Liftgate lower trim 3. Liftgate upper trim 4. Liftgate side trim NOTE (1) @ (2) l : Location of metallic clip : Location of resin clip
1 TSB Revision
INTERIOR - Headlining
52A-17
M52lJDBC
HEADLINING
[EMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation l Removal and Installation of Rear Roof Rail Trim (Refer to P52A-13.) l Removal and lnstallatron of Front PillarTrim (Refer to P.52A-13.)
Removal steps 1. Hanger bracket 2. Sash guide cover mounting bolt 3. Clip 4. Passenger compartment temperature sensor (Vehicles with full automatic air conditioner) 5. Sunvisor assembly 6. Sunvisor holder 7. Room light assembly 8. Headlining
TSB Revision
52A-18 FRONT SEAT
INTERIOR - Front Seat

M52UEAR
-45 Nm
33 ftlbs.
s \*
<Sporty type>
lSFO164
.45Nm 33 ftlbs.
I. Head restraint Front seat removal steps 2. Seat anchor covers 3. Seat mounting nut 4. Seat mounting bolt 5. Harness connector l * 6. Front seat assembly Power seat switch removal steps 7. Front console assembly (Refer to P.52A-11.) 8. Power seat switch A
l *
lSFOI63
1 TSB Revision
INTERIOR - Front Seat INSPECTION

POWER SEAT SWITCH A INSPECTION
52A-19
Operate the power seat switch A to check for continuity.
,19FOO9l
Lumbar support 2 PUSH (A, OFF RELEASE(O) 3 3 5 0 7
Side support 1 SPREAD (4D) OFF CLOSE (D 4) 2 7 8
0 0 0
n
0
0
0
0 0
0
0
A
0 0

Inboard Outboard
6. INSTALLATION OF FRONT SEAT ASSEMBLY (I) Locate the lower rails correctly so that the front side seat mounting holes may be positioned at the same relative positions on both R.H. and L.H. sides. Caution Note that when the slide is pulled, the inboard slide rail is unlocked, causing the slide rail to be pulled back by spring force.
(2) After checking that the seat adjuster is locked at both sides, provisionally tighten (in the A, B, C and D sequence) the seat installation nuts and the seat installation bolts; then fully tighten at the specified torque.
19FOO34
52A-20
INTERIOR
- Front Seat
2. INSTALLATION OF SEAT ANCHOR COVERS (1) Install the forward tab of the front seat anchor cover to the front seat forward mounting bracket positively. Then rotate the cover in the drrection of arrow to install d the side tabs in the side holes of the bracket.
ont seat forward lnstallatlon b r a c k e t
Forward tab
A - A cross section lSFOO44 Rear (outboard)
Claw
(2) Insert the rear side seat anchor cover (outer side) to the front seat rearward installation bracket, and then attach each tab of the seat anchor cover to the hole of the bracket.
Hole
lSFOOC4
(3) Insert the rear tab of the rear seat anchor cover in the front seat rear mounting bracket positively. Then rotate the cover in the direction of arrow to install the side tabs in the side holes of the bracket.
B-B crbss section
TSB Revision
INTERIOR - Front Seat IISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY

DRIVER SEAT <Standard seat> 18 <Sporty seat>
52A-21
8,
Q
-i(
45 Nm
45 Nm
P ii filbs. 20-7;s
24N;
19FO136
I24 Nm 17 ftlbs. FRONTPASSENGER SEAT
19FO183
17 ftlbs. 18
Removal steps I. Reclining adjuster knob 2. Plug 3. Cap 1 driver seat) 4. Height adiuster lever I +Qnrl~rrl v~~ L 5. POtier S&t switch B (Sporty driver - sent) ---., 6. Adjuster cover 7. Side shield cover (L.H.) 8. Side shield cover (R.H.) l a 9. Inner seat belt IO. Seat cushion assembly 11. Memorv reclinina knob (Driver seat) 12. Sliding adjuster (nob 13. Seat back panel (Except standard driver seat) 14. Seat back assembly 15. Seat belt guide 16. Lumbar support knob (Stand& dri\mr <eat\ 17. Lumbar support aarnish 7 18. Head restraint gGde 19. Reclinina adiuster lower cover (Driver seat) 20. Height adjuster (Standard driver seat) 21. Power seat harness 22. Power seat adjuster 1 (SporVdrivr---- 23. Walk-in knob 24. Walk-in knob garnish (Front passenger seat) 25. Slide adjuster .23
--4X24Nm
1
19FO184
171, Ihc
1 TSB Revision
52A-22
INTERIOR - Front Seat INSPECTION

INSPECTION OF POWER SEAT SWITCH B Operate the power seat switch B to check for continuity. , )
NOTE O-O indicates that there
IS
continuity between the terminals
INSPECTION OF FRONT HEIGHT MOTOR AND REAR HEIGHT MOTOR (1) Disconnect the connector of each motor. (2) Connect the battery directly to the terminal of the motor and check to see that the power seat adjuster rotates smoothly until it strikes the limit switch. (3) Connect the battery with its polarity changed and check to see that the motor rotation is reversed.
\d
INSPECTION OF LUMBAR SUPPORT MOTOR AND SIDE SUPPORT MOTOR (I) Disconnect the connector of each motor. (2) Connect the battery directly to the terminal of the motor and check to see that either of the motors, namely, the lumbar support and side support, operates. (3) Connect the battery with its polarity changed and check to see that either of the motors, namely, the lumbar support and side support motors, operates.
INSPECTION OF LIMIT SWITCH

Seat outer layer
(1) Connect the battery directly to the connector terminal of each of the front height motor and rear height motor and move the seat to each of the positions shown below. (Refer to Inspection of Front Height Motor and Rear Height Motor.)
TSB Revision
INTERIOR - Front Seat
52A-23
(2) Disconnect the connector of each limit switch and check for continuity between terminals.
lFr= Highest Medium Lowest
) 0
3 0 0
NOTE O-O indicates that there is continurty between the terminals, (3) Make sure that portion A of the harness does not interfere with the selector gear.

9. INSTALLATION OF INNER SEAT BELT
(1) Route the seat belt switch connector harness on the adjuster bracket. (2) Use clips to secure the harness to the adjuster bracket. (3) Fit the locking claw of the inner seat belt positively in the locking hole provided in the seat bracket.
iJ
TSB Revision
52A-24 REAR SEAT
INTERIOR - Rear Seat
Rear seat removal steps

l
* I)*
1. Rear seat cushion 2. Rear seat back 3. Quarter trim (Refer to P.52A-14.) 4. Striker
Striker removal steps

lQFtX-I67

1. REMOVAL OF REAR SEAT CUSHION
With the lever pulled, raise the seat cushion, and remove the seat cushion.
Rear seat belt buckles Lock dat

1. INSTALLATION OF REAR SEAT CUSHION
(1) Fit the attachment wire of the seat cushion under the seatback positively. (2) Pass the rear seat belt buckle through the seat cushion. (3) Insert the lock plate of the seat cushion in the respective holes provided in the floor.
Hole in flo\ori-
19FOO95
TSB Revision
INTERIOR - Seat Belt
52A-25
M52UGEH
SEAT BELT
INPUT CHECK
Diagnosis connector
L J
2OFOOl
With voltmeter
GW161,338
___.-- - - ~~--~ _. ___-- ..-.. .-.-
Using the multi-use tester or voltmeter, check whether or not the input signals from each switch are being input to the ETACS unit. (1) Connect the multi-use tester to the diagnosis check connector located at the right side of the junction block or connect the voltmeter between the ETACS terminal and the ground terminal. (2) Check if the buzzer of the multi-use tester sounds or the needle of the voltmeter moves when each switch noted below is operated. If the buzzer sounds or the needle moves, the input signals are being input to the ETACS unit, so that switch can be considered to be functioning normally. If not, the switch or switch input circuit is faulty. Check the switch and the switch input circuit. l Ignition switch
With multi-use tester
II TROUBLESHOOTING QUICK-REFERENCE TABLE

Problem The warning light does not flash and the warning buzzer also does not sound. Probable cause Damaged or disconnected wiring of the ignition switch input circuit Check method If a malfunction is indicated as a result of checking the input signals, check by following individual part and the circuit check No. 1 procedures (P.52A-27). Check by following individual part and the circuit check No. 2 procedures (P.52A-28). Repair the wiring harness.
Damaged or disconnected wiring of the seat belt warning and buzzer activation circuit Blown fuse Malfunction of the electronic control unit
Replace the fuse. Replace the electronic control unit.
TSB Revision
52A-26
Problem The warning light flashes, but the warning buzzer does not sound.

Probable cause Damaged or disconnetted wiring of the seat belt warning buzzer activation circuit Malfunction of the warning buzzer Malfunction of the key reminder switch or the seat belt switch Check method Check by following individual part and the circuit check No. 2 procedures (P.52A-28). Remedy Repair the wiring harness,
Replace the warning buzzer. Replace the key reminder switch or the seat belt switch. Check by following individual part and the circuit check No. 2 procedures (P.52A-28). Repair the wiring harness.
The warning buzzer sounds, but the warning light does not flash.
Damaged or disconnetted wiring of the seat belt warning light activation circuit Bulb worn out
Replace bulb. Check by following individual part and circuit check No. 2 procedures (P.52A-28). Repair the wiring harness.
The warning light stays on.
Short-circuit of the seat belt warning light and buzzer activation circuit Malfunction of the electronic control unit
Replace the electronic control unit. Replace the electronic control unit.
The warning light keeps blinking
Malfunction of the electronic control unit
TSB Revision
INTERIOR - Seat Belt CHECKING INDIVIDUAL PART AND CIRCUIT

IGNITION SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT
Battery 2oB-y~~/l,l(l,l,,~~ !jw Fusible link 0 u 3w
30A
52A-27
Junction block
*I : Vehicles without theft-alarm system 2: Vehicles wtth theft-alarm system
16FO35.3
It/
A condition for operation of this system is the sending of HIGH-level signals to the electronic control unit when the ignition switch is switched to the ON position.
Electronic control unit terminal voltage (Disconnect the connector of the electronic control unit and check the wiring harness side.)
I ECU terminal No. Signal

52 Ignition switch ON
Condition Ignition switch OFF ON
-1
Standard ~ I ov System voltage
Terminal No. 57, 59*2 Connected to/measured part Electronic control unit ground Measurement Resistance Tester connectron 57*-ground 59*.-ground Check conditions At all times Standard Continuity
NOTE *I : Vehicles without theft-alarm system 2: Vehicles with theft-alarm system
Checking the individual part

Ignition switch: Refer to GROUP 54 - Ignition Switch.
1 TSB Revision
52A-28
2. SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT AND BUZZER ACTIVATION CIRCUIT

Fusible link @
Junctron block (Multr-purpose fuse)
ETACS unit (ECU)
Place the ignition switch in the ON position, and the transistor will be turned on, blinking the warning light and sounding the buzzer four times. However, the warning buzzer will not sound unless the key-reminder switch and seat belt switch are in the ON position.
Electronic control unit terminal voltage (Disconnect the connector of the electronic control unit and check the wiring harness side.) I I I I I
ECU terminal No. Signal
\ !
Condition At all times Key-reminder switch or seat belt switch OFF Key-reminder switch and seat belt switch ON
Terminal voltage
Warning light signal 6 *1 Warning buzzer signal 8*2
System voltage ov System voltage
NOTE 1. Vehicles without theft-alarm system 2: Vehicles with theft-alarm system
Checking the individual part

Key-reminder switch: Refer to GROUP 54 - Ignition Switch. Seat belt switch: Refer to P.5?A-30.
1 TSB Revision
INTERIOR - Seat Belt REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

<Front Seat Belt>
52A-29
---n
Outer seat belt removal steps
7 *j,,, 9 -$g%, . . A 4 ,,+:i,y 0$ 1 II .1 \ _P a

y \, J r w %/ % $!& ,2 4, . $ #. , D \7
1. Quarter trim (Refer to P.52A-14 .) + 2. Outer seat belt
Inner seat belt removal steps

Floor console assembly (Refer to P.52A-11 .I 3. Shield cover l a 4. Inner seat belt
Buzzer removal steps

Floor console assembly (Refer to P.52A-1 j .) 5. Buzzer
4 /
45 Nm
19FOl52
<Rear Seat Belt>
,45 Nm 33 ftlbs.
Outer seat belt removal steps

l
1. Quarter trim (Refer to P.52A-14.) 6. Outerseat belt Rear seat cushion (Refer to P.52A-24.) 7. Inner seat belt 8. inner seat belt bracket
Inner seat belt removal steps
TSB Revision
52A-30
INTERIOR - Seat Belt INSPECTION

BUCKLE SWITCH
(1) Disconnect the buckle switch connector. (2) Check the continuity between the terminals.
Terminal 1 2 3 4
LA
Buckle unlock Buckle lock 0 0
I I
BUZZER
Check that buzzer sounds when battery voltage is applied to the buzzer terminal. I
I
16M456
Paw1 to prevent 1 retractor \

Bead
6. INSTALLATION OF OUTER SEAT BELT

(1) Positively insert the paw1 to prevent the retractor from rotating in the hole provided on the body. (2) Install the anchor plate along the bead of the body.
\ Jl
4. INSTALLATION OF INNER SEAT BELT

i (1) Route the seat belt switch connector harness on the adjuster bracket. (2) Use clips to secure the harness to the adjuster bracket. (3) Fit the locking claw of the inner seat belt positively in the locking hole provided in the seat bracket. I
rawlro -6 .. i,Tlmdsm I J3JJ JJJ p r e v e n t rotation 19FO128
Adjusterbracket
2. INSTALLATION OF OUTER SEAT BELT

(1) Positively insert the paw1 to prevent the retractor from rotating in the hole provided on the body. (2) After connecting the seat belt harness with the body harness, insert the clip on the connector into the hole on the body panel.
Paw1 to prevent rotation
I I I \ L&l ~
19FO120
TSB Revision
52A-31
(3) Insert the pawl of the belt guide in the hole provided on the body.
TSB Revision
528-l
L SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)

CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION ................................
Component Location ........................................ Configurati0.n Diagrams .................................... Construction Diagram ........................................ Introduction ........................................................ SRS Circuit Diagram ........................................ 11 SRS Connector Construction ............................ 9 SRS Schematic ................................................ 6 Warning/Caution Labels .................................... 4
M52AA-B
2 13 7 3 2
INDIVIDUAL COMPONENT SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._................................ 56

AIR BAG MODULE AND CLOCK S P R I N G ._..........._......................._.........._............... AIR BAG MODULE DISPOSAL PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 69
/ i d
SPECIFICATIONS ................................................
15 Service Specification ........................................ 15 SRS MAINTENANCE AND POST-COLLISION DIAGNOSIS ........................ 49 Post-collision Diagnosis .................................... 54 Maintenance .................................................... 49 SRS SERVICE PRECAUTIONS ........................ 14
Test Equipment To Be Used For Troubleshooting ........................................ 16
Air Bag Remote Deployment Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Deployed Air Bag Module Disposal Procedures . . .._..........._....................................... 72 Undeployed Air Bag Module Disposal . . . . . . . . . . 69
FRONT IMPACT SENSORS ._....: _._..._.................. SRS DIAGNOSIS UNIT (SDU) . . . . . . .._...................
56 59
TROUBLESHOOTING
17 Diagnostic Sequence ........................................ 18
........................................
SRS Diagnostic Procedures -Initial Steps .................................................... 17

CAUTION l Carefully read and observe the information in the SRS SERVICE PRECAUTIONS (P.52B-14) prior to any service. l For information concerning troubleshooting or maintenance, always observe the procedures in the Troubleshooting (P.52B-17) or the SRS Maintenance and Post-collision Diagnosis (P.52B-49) sections, _ respectively. l If any SRS components are removed or replaced in connection with any service procedures, be sure to follow the procedures in the INDIVIDUAL COMPONENT SERVICE section (P.52B-56) for the components involved. l In case of any questions about the SRS, call the regional Tech Line at l-800-446-6064.
52B-2
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) - General information

M52BAAF
GENERAL INFORMATION
INTRODUCTION
The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) is designed to supplement the drivers seat belt to help reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver by activating and deploying a drivers-side air bag in certain frontal collisions. The SRS consists of: left front and right front impact sensors located, one each, on the right and left front upper frame lowers; an air bag module located in the center of the steering wheel, which contains the folded air bag and an inflator unit; the SRS diagnosis unit located under the rear console assembly, which monitors the system, and which contains a safing impact sensor; an SRS warning light located on the instrument panel, which indicates the operational status of the SRS; a clock spring interconnection located within the steering column; system wiring and wiring connectors; and a knee bolster located
under the steering column. The SRS is designed so that the air bag will deploy when the safing sensor, plus either or both of the left front and right front impact sensors simultaneously activate while the ignition switches ON. That is designed to occur in frontal or near-frontal impacts of moderate to severe force. Only authorized service personnel should do work on or around the SRS components. Those service personnel should read this manual carefully before starting any such work. Extreme care must be used when servicing the SRS, to avoid injury to the service personnel (by inadvertent deployment of the air bag) or the driver (by rendering the SRS inoperative).
SRS warning light
SELF-DIAGNOSIS/SRS WARNING LIGHT FUNCTION

The diagnosis unit monitors the SRS system and stores data concerning any detected faults in the system. When the ignition key is in ON or START position, the SRS warning light should illuminate for about 7 seconds and then turn off. That indicates that the SRS system is in operational order. If the SRS warning light does any of the following, immediate inspection by an authorized dealer is needed. (1) The SRS warning light does not illuminate as described above. (2) The SRS warning light stays on for more than 7 seconds. (3) The SRS warning light illuminates while driving. If a vehicles SRS warning light is in any of these three conditions when brought in for inspection, the SRS system must be inspected, diagnosed and serviced In accordance wrth this manual.
TSB Revision
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) - General information ONSTRUCTION DIAGRAM
52B-3
Right front Impact sensor / Left front impact sensor
SRS diagnosis unit (Incorporated safing impact sensor)
19FO138
c
1 EHICLE ~ENTIFICATION :ODE CHART LATE
module
lQFO118
LJ
NOTE This construction diagram displays the general view of the SRS components. For details, refer to SRS Schematic (P.52B-6). Configuration Diagrams (P.52B-7) and SRS Circuit Diagram(P.52B-11).
TSB Revision
52B-4
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) - General lnform=*ion

SRS. If labels are dirty or damaged, replace them with new ones.
WARNING/CAUTION LABELS
A number of caution labels relating to the SRS are found in the vehicle, as shown in the following illustration. Follow label instructions when servicing
/----?9FO143
H
19FOO87
19FOO80
A. WARNING This vehicle has a supplemental drivers side air bag. Refer to service manual before servicing or disassembling underhood components. Read SRS section of manual for important instructions. Improper service procedures can result in the air bag firing or becoming inoperative, leading to injury. TSB Revision
_ B. CAUTION: SRS ~1 C. This vehicle has a drivers side air bag to supplement the drivers seatbelt in certain frontal collisions. The driver and all other occupants must wear seatbelts at all times to reduce possible injury.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) - General lnform=*ion
52B-5
c1. L
r Drivers air bag information This vehicle ha% an air bag which will supplement the drivers seatbelt in certain frontal collisions. The air bag is not a substitute for the drivers seatbelt in any type of collision. The driver, and all other occupants, should wear seatbelts at all times. WARNING! If the SRS warning light does not come.on for about 7 seconds when ignition key is turned to ON or engine is started, or if it stays on while driving, drive the vehicle to your nearest authorized dealer right away. Also do so if vehicles front end is damaged or if air bag has deployed. The air bag system must be inspected by an authorized dealer ten years after vehicle manufacture date shown on certification label located on left front door-latch post or door frame. Read SRS section of your owners manual before driving, for important information, about Dperation, service and disposal of the air bag svstem. WARNING: SRS This air bag module cannot be repaired. Do not disassemble or tamper. Do not perform diagnosis. Do not touch with electrical test equipment or probes. Refer to service manual for further instructions, and for special handling, storage and disposal procedures. Tampering or mishandling can result in injury. Danger! Poison. Keep out of the reach of children. Contains sodium acid and potassium nitrate contents are poisonous and extremely flammable. Contact with acid, water, or heavy metals may produce harmful and irritating gases or explosive compounds. Do not dismantle, incinerate or bring into contact with electricity or store at temperatures exceeding (93.3C) 200F. Fast aid: If contents are swallowed induce vomiting. For eye contact flush eye with water for 15 minutes. If gases from acid or water contact are inhaled, seek fresh air. In every case, get prompt medical attention. For additional information, see material safety data sheet (MSDS) for this product. I. CAUTION: SRS clock spring This is not a repairable part. Do not disassemble or tamper. If defective, remove and replace entire unit per service manual instructions. Before replacement, read service manual, center front wheels and align neutral marks. Failure to foHow instructions may render SRS system inoperative, risking serious driver injury. CAUTION: SRS Before removal of steering gearbox, read service manual, center front wheels and remove ignition key. Failure to do so may damage SRS clock spring and render SRS system inoperative, risking serious driver injury.
E. CAUTION: SRS diagnosis unit This unit cannot be repaired. If defective, remove and replace entire unit per , service manual instructions. i i Do not disassemble or tamper. See service manual for handling and storage instructions. Do no drop: keep dry. Failure to follow instructions could render air bag inoperative and result in driver injury. F. CAUTION: SRS Before replacing steering wheel, read service manual, center front wheels ahd align SRS clock spring neutral marks. Failure to do so may render SRS system inoperative, risking serious driver injury.
J.
TSB Revision
52B-6
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) - General Information
;RS SCHEMATIC
STARTER RELAY MIT I IGNITION SWITCH <ST> IGNITION SWITCH <IGI> I Multi -purpose fuses
d r
Connector lock switch - - - -
UNLOCKi
M/T
AA
I Crank signal detection circuit
Warning light malfunction detection circuit
Connector lock detection circuit
Safing impact sensor
1
N
i-
Multi-use Tester interface circuit
Clock spring Front impact sensor (R.H.) Front impact sensor (L.H.)
I P-lAir bag module
Self-diagnosis check connector (For Multi-use Tester)
19FO141
TSB Revision
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) - General Information :ONFIGURATION DIAGRAMS
526-7
q
i
Engine compartment
A-09X /
+m*,. 16, I I
fc \
=is\ IL\\
A-38
\ \iw B I \
q
L&/Y&!! 3BFOO13
dD / f---TJw
Engine and transaxle (Front view)
<A/T>
B-23 B-24
Starter motor
B-26 Inhibitor switch
1 TSB Revision
52B-8
36FOOOl
/
C-57 Clock spring C-59 Ignition switch C-79 Self-diagnosis check connector (For Multi-use Tester)
IbJ Instrument panel and floor console
D-
D-03 D-04 D-05 D-23 D-24 D-25 D-26
Combination meter 14-pin red connector to body wiring harness Z-pin blue connector to right front impact sensor 2-pin yellow connector to left front impact sensor 2-pin red connector to clock spring
Connector to SRS Diagnosis Unit
D-26
225
TSB Revision
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) - General Information SRS CONNECTOR CONSTRUCTION
52B-9
The connector of the SRS diagnosis unit has a double lock mechanism, fit verification mechanism and connector shorting mechanism.
DOUBLE LOCK MECHANISM

The double lock mechanism comprises a mechanism locking the connector of the SRS diagnosis unit and connector of the harness, and a mechanism for locking locked connectors by the lock secondary lever mounted to SRS diagnosis unit side connector. The secondary lock lever locking is done as the lock spring in the notch of the connector. The operating principle is described below. for the the the fits
.ock sprinq \ Secondary lock lever
13R0721
Harness side connector Primary lock /
SRS diagnosis unit side connector
When Connectors Are To Be Fitted

(I) The SRS diagnosis unit and harness side connectors are fitted. (Primary lock) (2) The secondary lock lever mounted to the SRS diagnosis unit side connector is pressed down by finger until a click is heard indicating that the connectors have been locked. (Secondary lock) If the harness and SRS diagnosis unit connectors do not properly fit, the secondary lock lever side projection and the harness side connector projection interfere with each other, making it impossible to lock the connectors.
(Improperly fitted state) Forced down

13RO664
When Connectors Are Unlocked

(1) Press the lock spring on the lock lever side in with a flat tip (--) screwdriver to unlock the secondary lock lever (secondary lock).
Secondarv lock lever projection
Caution Forced removal of the connector without releasing the secondary lock lever will result in a damaged lock lever.
(2) Press the primary lock of each of the harness side connectors and remove the harness side connector.
(Properly fitted state) Secondary lock spring Prll
u
13RO685
13R068t
I
TSB I
Fvision
52B-10

Secondary lock lever sis
FIT VERIFICATION MECHANISM

The mechanism electrically verifies that the connectors of the SRS diagnosis unit have been fitted. The operating principle is : described below. d (1) Securely connect the SRS diagnosis un.it and harness side connectors and press the secondary lock lever down to lock the connectors. (2) At the time, the short bar provided on the rear of the secondary lock lever shorts the associated two pole terminals of the SRS diagnosis unit. The SRS diagnosis unit supplies monitoring current to the circuit to electrically verify that the connectors have been locked. (
iarness side connector

13R0687
Short bar nlnal
CONNECTOR SHORTING MECHANISM

The mechanism is designed for prevention of accidental explosion of the inflator when the clock spring connector (for the squib circuit) is removed from the SRS diagnosis unit. The operating principle is described below.
13R068E
Press-fitted tab terminals
13R0689
Short terminal (open)
When Connectors Are Fitted

When the SRS diagnosis unit and clock spring connectors are coupled, the circuit between the short terminals and clock spring connector terminals are kept in the OFF state by the partition plate provided in the connector of the SRS diagnosis unit.
plate
Short terminal
When Connectors &e Disconnected

When the clock spring connectors are disconnected from the SRS diagnosis unit, the partition plate between the short terminals and clock spring connector terminals is removed. As a result, a short circuit is formed between the two poles of the clock spring connector terminals to prevent generation of a potential difference (current) between the squib terminals.
13R06911
TSB Revision
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) - General information SRS CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
52B-11
2B-W
M,/T
! A(T
WITH TIiFm-
Y 1I
I
COMBINATION METER (SRS WARNING LIGHT) 1.4w x 2 i

WITHOUT
% m
0
1047 -y 105 pq!g$g@ -: l2 &S&7 ._----~~-_-~~_-_------~~~------- -_-_____ ?I! 7 T

I
.
THEFTALfiF!M
INHIBITOR SSWITCH -I
LT \
I I I I I I I I I f I I I I I I I I I I I I I II
I 1I
MICROCOMPUTER
M/T
A/T
?w m
6
m I >a
SELF-DIAGNOSIS CHECK CONNECTOR V;ETF;)T1-USE *

:X35-AX-RlSOQ-N
.._ TSB Revision
52B-12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) -
General Information
CAUTION 1. DO not repair, splice or modify SRS wiring (except for specific repairs to the body wiring harness shown on page QB-14 replace wiring if necessary, after reading and following all precautions and procedures in this manual. 2. DO not use an analogue ohmmeter to check SRS wiring or components; use only special tools and digital multi-meter shown on page 52B-16.
1 2B-W B-W .
2B-W ,, 7 I\ 0
10A
J/B (MULTI-PURPOSE FUSES)
0.85B-W ---_-__--_----_--------~---~~~--~~--~~-~-~----~----
I' 2 --_ 5 SRS DIAGNOSIS UNIT
4 = CONSTANT > VOLTAGE CIRCUIT vvv n ,n N~,11rrnm,vn
CONDENSI DETECTIL,. vAI\vvII ,
-x
Ttttl
.,,,,,,a
l@i fTii51 l@!l %piJ

/
3)
cl
El
$1
-i---EBI i 1 i 2 B VI VI
102 !x 101 z d o @ ii? r d I
CLOCK SPRING
Q FRONT IMPACT SENSOR (L.H.)
y2
qli y jl
FRONT IMPACT SENSOR (R. H. ) I
TSB Revision
y2/
' - ' ' I AIR QA$e_MODULE (5QUIBj
OFF -IfI!?--
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) - General Information COMPONENT LOCATION
52B-13
TSB Revision
.52B-14
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) - SRS Service Precautions

MBZPBAA
SRS SERVICE PRECAUTIONS

1. In order to avoid injury to yourself or others from accidental deployment of the air bag during SRS servicing, read and carefully follow all the precautions and procedures described in this manual. Do not use any electrical test equipment on or near SRS components, except those specified o n P.52B-16. Never use an analogue ohmmeter.
3. Never Attempt to Repair the Following Components:

l l l l
2.
Front Impact Sensors SRS Diagnosis Unit (SDU) Clock Spring Air Bag Module
If any of those components are diagnosed as faulty, they should only be replaced, in accordance with the INDIVIDUAL COMPONENT SERVICE procedures in this manual, starting at page [52B-561.
4.
Do not attempt to repair the wiring harness connectors of the SRS. If any of the connectors is diagnosed as fault, replace the wiring harness. If the wires are diagnosed as faulty, replace or repair the wiring harness according to the following table. Harness Connector (No. of Terminals, Color) 2 pins, red 2 pins, yellow 2 pins, blue
I
I
SDU Terminal No. 101 102 51 52 1 2

I
I
Destination of Harness
Clock spring Front wiring * Harness Front wiring --) Harness Front impact + sensor (LH) Front impact * Sensor (RH) Body wiring * Harness -+ Diagnosis check pin
Replace clock spring. Replace with sensor cable.*
II I
2 3
4
I I
i 14 pins, red
5 t---i 16 t
Correct or replace . control wiring, -+ Control wiring harness + Ignition switch (ST) instrument panel wiring harness -+ General purpose fuse No. 11 or body wiring harness. + General purpose fuse No. 18 Instrument panel + wiring harness SRS warning * light
~ Junction block
L
I
-+ Ground
Correct or replace body wiring harness.
BpdY -+ wrnng harness
NOTE (I) The sensor cable marked with * is available as service part. (2) The sensor cable used as a replacement part is routed along the body wiring harness.
TSB Revision
SRS Service Precautions / - Spectiications
52B-15
Z-pin blue connector to right front impact sensor Z-pin yellow connector to left front impact sen 2-pin red corm to clock spring
SDU
View A To front impact sensor (L.H.) \ To front impact sensor (R.H.)
\
To clock spring
To body wiring harness (14-pin)

19FOllO
14-pin red connector to body wiring harness
j.
SRS components should not be subjected to heat over 93C (2OOF), so remove the front impact sensors, SRS diagnosis unit and air bag module and clock spring before drying or baking the vehicle after painting. Recheck SRS system operability after re-installing them. j. Whenever you finish servicing the SRS, check the SRS warning light operation to make sure that the system function properly. (Refer to P.52B-2.) 7. In case of any questions about the SRS, call the regional Tech Line at I-800-446-6064. NOTE SERIOUS INJURY CAN RESULT FROM UNINTENDED AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, SO USE ONLY THE PROCEDURES AND EQUIPMENT SPECIFIED IN THIS MANUAL.
SPECIFICATIONS
SERVICE SPECIFICATION
Items Standard value Front impact sensor resistance Q Specification 2,000 f 40
MUCB-B
TSB Revision
52B-16 SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) - SRS Sewice Pre=utions

TEST EQUIPMENT TO BE USED FOR TROUBLESHOOTING
M52DA-0
heck harness is used on various
(connected 3R resistor)
Use a multwneter for which the less at the mnmum range of reslstance measurement
1 TSB Revision
SUPPLEMENTAL RESfRAlNT SYSTEM (SRS) - Troub!eshooting
52B-17
M52ECAA
TROUBLESHOOTING
SRS DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURES - INITIAL STEPS id FOLLOW THESE STEPS WHEN BEGINNING ANY SRS SERVICE:
1. Check the SRS fuses (multi-purpose fuses No. 11 and No. 18). If either is loose, tighten it; if damaged or blown, replace it.
.
/I I/ , -u 16FO304
SRS warning light
2. After performing step 1, start engine. Does SRS warning light illumi.nate for about 7 seconds and then turn OFF? If yes, SRS system is functioning properly. If no, continue with following steps. NOTE If the battery power supply (multi-purpose fuses No. 11 or No. 18) is disconnected with the ignition key in the ON position, the SRS warning light will continue to illuminate even after the fuses are replaced in their original positions. In this case, the SRS warning light can be extinguished by turning the ignition switch ON and OFF 10 times. 3. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position. 4. Insert ROM pack into the Multi-use Tester and connect tester to Diagnosis Check Connector in glove compartment. 5. Start the SRS diagnosis, by conducting TEST 1 (SRS warninq liqht does not extinguish) or TEST 2 (SRS warning light does- not illuminate.) which begins on next page or page [52B-191.
Multi-use fester (MB991341) Diagnosis/ service data output
RbM pack (MB991359)
Ground
16LOO9 [TSB
ivision
52B-18
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) - Troubleshooting
DIAGNOSTIC SEQUENCE
TEST 1 SRS WARNING LIGHT DOES NOT EXTINGUISH \
Vehicle Model Selection (1) Turn the ignition key to the ON position. (2) The Multi-use Tester display section successfully passes the self-check and the model selection menu is displayed after completing the self-check of the Multi-use Tester. Select 3000GT 91 MDL [No. 3 (Non-Turbo) or No. 4 (Turbo)] and SRS-AIR BAG system by entering the YES key. (3) If the Multi-use Tester displays CANT COMM., check the Multi-use Tester and vehicle side self-check diagnosis connector for poor connections (Refer to the previous page.) and perform [I. If the 3000GT 91 MDL SRS-AIR BAG system selection is successful, continue with following steps. (4) Select the 1. SELF-DIAG CODE function and read (and write down) all displayed diagnosis codes.
1. SELF-DIAG CODE 2. SERVICE DATA 3. ACTUATOR TEST 4. SPECIAL TEST ,, I,
0 CLEAR and 4 1. SIMLTD VEH SPD 2. PULSE CHK 3. DRIVE RECORDER 4. EXTERNAL COMM 1 11
(5) Press the CLEAR key to return to the Function Selection and select the 4. SPECIAL TEST.
(6) Pr+FE,the 1 key and select the 5. ERASE DIAG. (7) Erase the diagnosis codes following the Multi-use Tester messages. (8) Start engine. Does SRS warning light illuminate for about 7 seconds, turn OFF and then remain extinguished for at least 45 seconds? If yes, SRS system is functioning properly now. If no, check the diagnosis codes written down at step (4) above, refer to SELF-DIAGNOSIS QUICK REFERENCE CHART (P.52B-20) and perform service indicated there.
y,,
SRS-AIR BAG ID NO.: 19 INPUTABOVE CODE I
TSB Revision

TEST 2 SRS WARNING LIGHT DOES NOT ILLUMINATE
52B-19
Vehicle Model Selection
pc-y-y
1. 2. 3. 4.
SELF-DIAG CODE SERVICE DATA ACTUATOR TEST SPECIAL TEST
(1) Turn the ignition key to the ON position. (2) The Multi-use Tester display section successfully passes the self-check and the model selection menu is displayed after completing the self-check of the Multi-use Tester, select 3000GT 91 MDL [No. 3 (Non-Turbo) or No. 4 (Turbo)] and SRS-AIR BAG system by entering the YES key. (3) If the Multi-use Tester displays CANT COMM., check the Multi-use Tester and vehicle side self-check diagnosis connector for poor connections (Refer to P.52B-17.) and perform ITEST 4 1. If the 3000GT 91 MDL SRS-AIR BAG svstem selection is successful, continue with following steps. (4) Select the 1. SELF-DIAG CODE function and read (and write down) all displayed diagnosis codes. (5) Check diagnosis codes against SELF-DIAGNOSIS QUICK REFERENCE CHART and perform service indicated there.
TSB Revision
52B-20 SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)

SELF-DIAGNOSIS QUICK REFERENCE CHART
Fault No. 11 Diagnosis code name [Failure mode] (NORMAL) G-SENS. TRBL 1 [Short circuit] G-SENS. TRBL 2 [One open-circuit] G-SENS. TRBL 3 [Two open-circuit] SQUIB TRBL 1 [Short circuit] SQUIB TRBL 2 [Open-circuit] CONDENS. VO. HI Explanation Normal. The SRS is in good order.
- Troubleshooting
Service
The circuits for the front impact sensor are shorted to each other. Right or left impact sensor cirucit is open or the wire from the sensor to the SDU is open-circuit. Right and left impact sensor circuits are open or the wires from the sensors to the SDU are open-circuit. The circuits for the air bag module (squib) are shorted to each other or the circuit is grounded. The air bag module Isquib) circuit is open or the wire from the air bag to the SDU (clock spring) is opencircuit. The capacitor (integrated in the SDU) terminal voltage is higher than the specified value for 5 seconds.
Perform TEST 5
Perform TEST 6
CONDENS. VO. LO 32
The capacitor (integrated in the SDU) terminal voltage is lower than the specified value for 5 seconds.
(I) Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position, disconnect the negative battery cable and tape the terminal. (2) After waiting at least 30 seconds, replace the SDU. (Refer to P.52B-59.) Perform TEST 7
CRANKING TRBL
The circuit for the cranking signal is shorted to some power supply circuits. It takes at least 45 seconds that the SDU detects this fault. The lock switch (short bar) of the SDU double lock connector is open.
CONN. UNLOCKED NOTE - IMPORTANT
Perform TEST 8
(1) After repairing the SRS, reconnect the battery cable, erase the diagnosis code memory from the Multi-use Tester and check the SRS warning light operation to verify the system functions properly. (Refer to TEST 1.)
(2) SDU = SRS Diagnosis Unit
1 TSB Revision
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) - Troubleshooting 52B-21
/ id
Fault No.
Diagnosis code name [Failure mode] IG VOLT LOW 1
Explanation The multi-purpose fuse (No. 18) is blown or the wire from the fuse to the SDU is open-circuit or its resistance value is increased. It takes at least 5 seconds that the SDU detects this fault. The multi-purpose fuse (No. 11) is blown or the wire from the fuse to the SDU is open-circuit or its resistance value is increased. It takes at least 5 seconds that the SDU detects this fault. The SRS warning light circuits are open or the wire from the light to the SDU is grounded. It takes at least 5 seconds with the light OFF that the SDU detects this fault.
Service Perform TEST 9
41
IG VOLT LOW 2 42
Perform TEST 10
43
SRS LMP TRBL 1 Open circuit or ground short I i
When SRS warning light does not extinguish: Perform TEST 11 When SRS warning light does not illuminate: Perform TEST 12 (1) Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position, disconnet the negative battery cable and tape the terminal. (2) After waiting at least 30 seconds, replace the SDU. (Refer to P.52B-59.)
44
SRS LMP TRBL 2 SRS warning light drive transistor [is open-circuit I SRS DIAG. UNIT
The SRS warning light drive transistor (integrated in the SDU) is open-circuit.
The EEP ROM or A/D converter (integrated in the SDU) is defective.
45
b (1) After repairing the SRS, reconnect the battery cable, erase the diagnosis code memory from the Multi-use Tester and check the SRS warning light operation to verify the system functions properly. (Refer to TEST 1.)
NOTE - IMPORTANT
1 TSB Revision
52B-22 SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) TEST 3
Troubleshooting
NO COMMUNICATION BETWEEN MULTI-USE TESTER AND SDU (SRS warning light does not extinguish) d
COMBINATION METER (SRS WARNING LIGHT)
SRS diag(osis unit
View A
13R0704
I I 1
To front impact sensor (L.H.) To front impact sensor (R.H.) \ SRS DIPGNOSIS UNIT
To clock spring
I To body wiring harness (14-pin)
19FOllO
LJ
(1) Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position, disconnect the negative battery cable and tape the terminal.
(2) Remove the rear console assembly. (Refer to GROUP 52A - Floor Console.) (3) Use a screwdriver to push in the lock spring of the lock lever of the SRS diagnosis unit to unlock the lock lever.
I I
Caution A double-lock mechanism is employed for the connector of the SRS diagnosis unit, so care must be taken not to damage it by using . . excessive force or by not disconnecting it correctly.
(4) Disconnect the red IQpin connector from the SRS diagno- Q sis unit while pressing down the lock of the connector. (Refer to P.52B-9.)
13R0721
13RO72: L
TSB Revision
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) - Troubleshootina 52B-23

MB991349 SRS Check Harness
(5) Connect the now disconnected red harness-side SDU connector (l&pin) to the connector @ of the SRS Check Harness. (6) Check according to the flow chart below, using the specified digital multi-meter.
View A
SRS Check Harness connector @ Diagnosis Fheck connector
16R2166
rterminal Is there continuity between the No. 9 of SRS Check Harness connector
/ lli
@and the No. 8 terminal of the diagnosis check connector (next to the right side of the junction block)? Diagnosis check connector
1Body wiring harness dam-
1 Repair or replace the
L
v ~ N o
Is there continuity between the No. 13 or No. 14 terminal of SRC Check Harness connector @ and ground? Yes Repair or replace the body + wiring harness at the location of the short circuit.(Refer to P.52B-14.)
SDU is grounded.
NOTE - IMPORTANT
TSB Revision

TEST 4
- Troubleshooting
NO COMMUNICATION BETWEEN MULTI-USE TESTER AND SDU (SRS warning light does not illuminate)
idi
J/.8 (MULTI -PURPOSE FUSES) I
I I
SRS DIAGNOSIS UNIT
SRS diagnbsis unit
View A
To front impact sensor (L.H.) To front impact sensor (R.H.) \ I I
19FOllO To clock spring I To body wiring harness (14-pin)
\
MULTI -3SE TESTER1
KKRS-AX-RISE+R
L)I
(2) Remove the rear.console assembly. (Refer to GROUP 52A - Floor Console.) (3) Use a screwdriver to push in the lock spring of the lock lever of the SRS diagnosis unit to unlock the lock lever.
I
1 I I ~ i
Caution A double-lock mechanism is employed for the connector of the SRS diagnosis unit, so care must be taken not to damage it by using excessive force or by not disconnecting it correctly.
onnector notch UNLOCKED ;;bb;;, LOCKED zRok
(4) Disconnect the red l4-pin connector from the SRS diagno- L/ sis unit while pressing down the lock of the connector. (Refer to P.52B-9.)
TSB Revision

MB991349 SW Check Harness
(5) Connect the now disconnected red harness-side SDU connector (14-pin) to the connector @ of the SRS Check Harness. (6) Check according to the flow chart below using the digital multi-meter.
View A
SRS Check Harness Connector
use No. 11
16R2186
Fusk No. 18
r
Gxnd
, No
Is there continuity between the No. 19 1or No. 20 terminal of y:IsCheck , Harness connector @ and ground.
-1 Ground circuit Open
~~~~~i~k;~~~~.~~~-~4.~
\
i
Reconnect negative terminal of battery, and turn the ignition key to the ON position.
Does the voltage between the No. 11 terminal (of SRS Check Harness connector 0) and the No. 19 or 20 terminal (ground) indicate system voltage?
Does the voltage between the No. 12 terminal (of SRS Check Harness connector 0) and the No. 19 or 20 terminal (ground) indicate system voltage? Yes p Malfunction of the SDU + (1) Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position, disconnect the negative battery cable and tape the terminal. (2) After waiting at least 30 seconds, replace the SDU. (Refer to P.52B-59.)
NOTE - IMPORTkNT
(1) After repairing the SRS, reconnect the battery cable, erase the diagnosis code memory from the Multi-use Tester and check the SRS warning light operation to verify the system functions cd properly. (Refer to TEST 1.)
(2) ?Du =-SRS Diagnosis Unit
TSB Revision

TEST 5
- Troubleshooting
REPAIR REQUIRED FOR "11. G-SENS. TRBL I, 12. G-SENS. TRBL 2 or 13. G-SENS. TRBL 3 FAULT
SRS DIAGNOSIS UN1 IMPACT S!NSOR ~M&N"E DETECTION
SRS diagnosis unit

FRONT IMPACT SENS0RtL.H.) FRONT IMPACT sEN80R(R. H. )
View A
--u-~,w-*
13u070r
To front imDact sensor (L.H.)
Front impact sensor resistance check

Digital multi-meter ., , / ?\I. I,/ q ri i~ ~1
To clock spring
19FOllO I To body wiring harness (14-pin)
lQFO102
NOTE If combined front impact sensor and air bag module (squib) failure modes simultaneously occur in two places, the preconditions for the respective detection circuits will go out of order. For this reason, both diagnosis codes may not be stored but only one of them may be indicated. Their relationships are shown in the following table. Front impact sensors Short-circuited
Air bag module Short-circuited
One open-circuited 12 and/or 21 12 and/or 22
Two open-circuited 13 and/or 21 13 and/or 22 I I
11 and/or 21 11 and/or 22
(Squib) Open-circuited The numbers in the boxes are diagnosis codes numbers. (Refer to P.52B-20.)
1 TSB Revision
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) - Troubleshooting 529-27

(I) Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position, disconnect the negative battery cable and tape the terminal.
(4) Disconnect each connector other than 14-pin connector from the SRS diagnosis unit while pressing down the lock of each connector. (Refer to P.52B-9.) (5) Locate the blue and yellow connectors for the wiring leading to the front impact sensors, which were connected to the now-disconnected harness-side connector of the SDU. Connect those blue and yellow connectors to connector @ of the SRS Check Harness. (6) Check according to the flow chart below, using the digital multi-meter and Multi-use Tester.
MB991 349 SRS Check Harness
Front impact sensor connectar (R.H.) @ (blue)
View A
SRS Check Harness connector @ Left Right
16R2189
TSB Revision
529-28 SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)

I I
- Troubleshooting
No
the terminals of the left front impact sensor normal? (Refer to P.526-26.) Standard value: 2,000 k 40R Yes i Front wiring harness is grounded or open.
Is the resistance between the No. 3 terminal of SRS Check Harness connector @ and the No. 4 terminal normal? Standard value: 2,000 k 400 Yes
?No
Is the resistance between the No. 5 terminal of SRS Check Harness connector @ and the No. 6 terminal normal? Standard value: 2,000 2 4Ofl Yes
) Is the resistance between the terminals of the right front impact sensor normal? (Refer to P.52B-26.) Standard value: 2,000 t 40R Yes Front wiring harness is grounded or open.
-No
I 4
CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE NOTE - IMPORTANT d
1 TSB Revision
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) - Troub!eshooting 529-29

/ CONTINUED FROM PREVIOUS PAGE /
* (1) Connect the red 2-pin connector @ of the SRS Check Harness to the SDU in place of the nowdisconnected clock spring-SDU connector. NOTE A 3-ohm resistor that corresponds to the resistance of the air bag module (squib) and the wiring resistance is connected between the terminals of the connector @ of the SRS Check Harness.
SRS Check Harness
(2) Reconnect blue.and yellow connectors, for the wiring leading to the front impact sensors, to the SDU and double lock them. (Refer to P.52B-9.) NOTE If double locking cannot be made, the connector is incorrectly or incompletely inserted; re-check to insert the connector correctly and securely.
ii%\
19FOO93
NOTE - IMPORTANT
(I) After repairing the SRS, reconnect the battery cable, erase the diagnosis code memory from the Multi-use Tester and check the SRS warning light operation to verify the system functions properly. (Refer to TEST 1.)
TSB
Revision

1 CONTINUED FROM PREVIOUS PAGE -1
- Troubleshooting
I / (I) Reconnect negative terminal of battery, and turn the

ignition key to the ON position. (2) Using the Multi-use Tester, erase the diagnosis code memory. (Refer to TEST 1.) (3) Return the ignition key from the ON to the LOCK position and then back to the ON position. _
/ 1 No Is the SRS warning light operation normal? Yes
I 1
) (1) Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position, disconnect the negative battery cable and tape the terminal. (2) After waiting at least 30 seconds, replace the SDU. (Refer to P.528-59.)
\\ ;Ls
Caution Wait at least 30 seconds after disconnecting the battery cable before doing any further work. The SRS system is designed to retain enough voltage to deploy the air bag for a short time even after the battery has been disconnected, so serious injury may result from unintended air bag deployment if work is done on the SRS system immediately after the battery cable is disconnected. (2) Use a screwdriver to push in the lock spring of the lock lever of the SRS diagnosis unit to unlock the lock lever. Caution A double-lock mechanism is employed for the connector of the SRS diagnosis unit, so care must be taken not to damage it by using excessive force or by not disconnecting it correctly. (3) Disconnect the red 2-pin connector of the SRS Check Harness from the SDU while pressing down the lock of the connector. (Refer to P.52B-9.)
I 1 TSB Revision
I \cj,
:id
1 CONTINUED FROM PREVIOUS PAGE
(1) Remove the air bag module. (Refer to P.52B-62.) (2) Join the No. 2 and No. 7 connectors of the clock spring to SRS Check Harness connector @ and SRS Check Harness connector 0, respectively. NOTE When joining SRS Check Harness connector 0, align its white paint with the hollow portion of the No. 2 connector of the clock spring.
19FO109
c
I
No. 2 connector of the clock spring

16R2190
I
CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE I
1 TSB Revision
52B-32 SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) - Troubleshooting

/
I
(1) Is the resistance between terminal 1 and terminal 21 of SRS Check Harness connector @ and between terminal 2 and terminal 22 of SRS Check Harness connector @ normal? Standard value: less than 0.4R
I I No. 2 connector of clock spring View A
To co of
SP
16R2190
Yes
*
No Malfunction of the clock spring. > Malfunction of the air bag module. Caution Never attempt to measure the circuit resistance of the air bag module (squib) even if you are using the specified tester. If the circuit resistance is measured with a tester, accidental air bag deployment will result in serious personal injury. >V/
NOTE - IMPORTANT (1) After repairing the SRS, reconnect the battery cable, erase the diagnosis code memory from the Multi-use Tester and check the SRS warning light operation to verify the system functions properly. (Refer to TEST 1.) (2) SDU = SRS Diagnosis Unit
TSB Revision

1 TEST 6 )
52B-33
1
REPAIR REQUIRED FOR 21. SQUIB TRBL 1 or 22. SQUIB TRBL 2 FAULT
Caution Never attempt to measure the circuit resistance of the air bag module (squib) even if you are using the specified tester. If the circuit resistance is measured with a tester, accidental air bag deployment will result in serious personal injury.
SRS DIAGNOSIS UNIT
------I
FRONT SIDE Ez SELF-DIAGNOISIS CHECK CONNECTOR (FOR MULTI-USE TESTER) J/B
SRS diagnosis unit

13uo704
View A To front impact sensor (L.H.1 To front impact sensor (R.H.) \
i
To dock spring
ms!+Ax-Pls95-Y
AIR (BSAgGU#DULE
I To body wiring harness (IQpin)
19FOllO
No
Have the other diagnosis code test(s) been finished? Yes NOTE If combined front impact sensor and air bag module (squib) failure modes simultaneously occur in two places, the preconditions for the respective detection circuits will go out of order. For this reason, both diagnosis codes may not be stored but only one of them may be indicated. Their relationships are shown in the following table. Front impact sensors Short-circuited One open-circuited Two open-circuited Air bag module (Squib) Short-circuited Open-circuited 11 and/or 21 11 and/or .22 12 and/or 21 12 and/or 22 13 and/or 21 13 and/or 22 / > Perform the other diagnosis code test(s) prior to this test.
The numbers in the boxes are diagnosis codes numbers. (Refer to P.52B-20.)
LI
1 TSB Revision
526-34 SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)

CONTINUED FROM PREVIOUS PAGE c (1) Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position, disconnect the negative battery cable and tape the terminal. Caution Wait at least 30 seconds after disconnecting the battery cable before doing any further work. The SRS system is designed to retain enough voltage to deploy the air bag for a short time even after the battery has been disconnected, so serious injury may result from unintended air bag deployment if work is done on the SRS system immediately after the battery cable is disconnected. (2) Remove the rear console assembly. (Refer to GROUP 52A - Floor Console.) (3) Use a screwdriver to push in the lock spring of the lock lever of the SRS diagnosis unit to unlock the lock lever. Caution A double-lock mechanism is employed for the connector of the SRS diagnosis unit, so care must be taken not to damage it by using excessive force or by not disconnecting it correctly. (4) Disconnect the red 2-pin connector from the SDU while pressing down the lock of the connector. (Refer to P.52B-9.)
- Troubleshooting
/ Lock spring / Clock spring
I
(I) Connect the red connector @ of the SRS Check Harness to the SDU instead of the now-disconnected harness-side connector of the SDU, which were connected to the air bag module (squib) through the clock spring. NOTE A 3-ohm resistor that corresponds to the resistance of the air bag module (squib) and the wiring resistance is connected between the terminals of the connector @ of the SRS Check Harness. (2) Make the double locking. NOTE If double locking cannot be made, the connector is incorrectly or incompletely inserted; re-check to insert the connector correctly and securely. SRS Check Harness
Connector @ of SRS Check Harness
(3R)
19 FOO9:
1
CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE TSB Revision
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) - Troubleshooting 526-35

1 CONTINUED FROM PREVIOUS PAr/
I L
(I) Reconnect negative terminal of battery, and turn the ignition key to the ON position. (2) Using the Multi-use Tester, erase the diagnosis code memory. (Refer to TEST 1.) (3) Return the ignition key from the ON to the LOCK position and then back to the ON position.
Is the SRS warning light operation )?I Malfunction-[
(I) Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position, disconnect the negative battery cable and tape the terminal. (2) After waiting at least 30 seconds, replace the SDU. (Refer to P.52B-59.)
: L;
_I
(I) Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position, disconnect the negative battery cable and tape the terminal. Caution Wait at least 30 seconds after disconnecting the battery cable before doing any further work. The SRS system is designed to retain enough voltage to deploy the air bag for a short time even after the battery has been disconnected, so serious injury may result from unintended air bag deployment if work is done on the SRS system immediately after the battery cable is disconnected. (2) Use a screwdriver to push in the lock spring of the lock lever of the SRS diagnosis unit to unlock the lock lever. Caution A double-lock mechanism is employed for the connector of the SRS diagnosis unit, so care must be taken not to damage it by using excessive force or by not disconnecting it correctly. (3) Disconnect the red 2-pin connector of the SRS Check Harness from the SDU while pressing down the lock of the connector. (Refer to P.52B-9.)
v MB991349 Resistor
(302)
19FOO93
Lij
I
CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE 1 TSB Revision I

1 CONTINUED FROM PREVIOUS PAGE 1
- Troubleshooting
(I) Remove the air bag module. (Refer to P.52B-62.) (2) Join the No. 2 and No. 7 connectors of the clock spring to SRS Check Harness connector @ and SRS Check Harness connector 0, respectively. NOTE When joining SRS Check Harness connector 0, align its white paint with the hollow portion of the No. 2 connector of the clock spring.
19FO109
No. 2 connector of the clock spring
\ /
I
CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE I
TSB Revision

1 CONTINUED FROM PREVIOUS PAGE 1
52B-37
(I) Is the resistance between terminal 1 and termir ial 21 of SRS Check Harness connector 0, and between terminal 2 and terminal 22 of SRS Check Harness connector @ normal? Standard value: less than 0.4fl
No. 2 connector of clock spring
View A
SRS Check Harness connector@
To co
of sP rof ng
Yes
No Malfunction of the clock spring. + ;z;;;tion of the air bag > Replace the clock spring. (Refer to P.52B-62.)
Caution Never attempt to measure the circuit resistance of the air bag module (squib) even if you are using the specified tester. If the circuit resistance is measured with a tester, accidental air bag deployment will result in serious personal injury. NOTE - IMPORTANT
TSB Revision

TEST 7
STARTER HULAY
- Troubleshooting
REPAIR REQUIRED FOR 33. CRANKING TRBL FAULT

IGNITION SWITCH(ST>
7 %
10
INHIBITOR SWITCH
FI
I
r pkEE& -. _ -_-_-_ _ I
SRS diagnosis unit 4 SRS DIAGNOSIS UNIT

13R0704
View A
To front impact sensor (L.H.) \ To front impact sensor (R.H.)
---..-___________ - ____
14 2 da
13
!z d4 --__ J/S
I
To clock spring
19FOllO
CLYL
-A) @g : 6x36-NC-R1606-U
(I) Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position, disconnect the negative battery cable and tape the terminal.
(2) Remove the rear console assembly. (Refer to GROUP 52A -. - Floor Console.) (3) Use a screwdriver to push in the lock spring of the lock lever of the SRS diagnosis unit to unlock the lock lever.
Caution A double-lock mechanism is employed for the connector of the SRS diagnosis unit, so care must be taken not to damage the connector by using excessive force or by not disconnecting it correctly.
(4) Remove the red 14-pin connector from the SRS diagnosis unit while pressing down the lock of the connector. (Refer 1310722 t o P52B-9.1 TSB Revision
I/
13R0721

(5) Connect the now disconnected red harness-side SDU connector (14-pin) to the connector @ of the SRS Check Harness. (6) Check according to the flow chart below, using the digital multi-meter.
connector
View A
SRS Check Harness connector @
Ground I 1 I ~~~~~;,0~~~~~~.~~~-14.~
Is there continuity between the No. 19 1 1 or No. 20 terminal ofi;RSCheck Harness connector @ and ground?
I No
r1 Ground jrcuit Open
Reconnect negative terminal of (()
terminal (of SRS Check Harness connector 0) and the No. 19 or 20 terminal (ground) indicate system voltage? Yes
(1) Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position, disconnect the negative battery cable and tape the terminal. (2) After waiting at least 30 seconds, replace the SDU.(Refer to P.52B-59.) (1) Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position, disconnect the negative battery cable and tape the terminal. (2) After waiting at least 30 seconds, repair or replace the body wiring harness. (Refer to P.52B-14.)
NOTE - IMPOR TANT
(1) If more than 45 seconds of cranking is required to start up the engine, the diagnosis code will be stored in memory, but if there is no problem, the diagnosis code will be cleared and the SRS will return to normal. (2) After repairing the SRS, reconnect the battery cable, erase the diagnosis code memory from the Multi-use Tester and check the SRS warning light operation to verify the system functions properly. (Refer to TEST 1.)
TSB Revision
52B-40 SUPPLEMENTAL ,RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) - Troubleshooting

TEST 8
--
REPAIR REQUIRED FOR 34. CONN. UNLOCKED FAULT

SRS DIAGNOSIS UNIT-
I LA
L
FRONT SIDE EE
SELF-DIAGNOSIS CHECK CONNECTOR (FOR MULTI-USE TESTER)
LOCK SWITCH
KXB-AX-RIRW-Y
I
SRS diagnosk unit 13RQ7Q4
View A
To front impact sensor (L.H.)
To dlock spring
19F0110 I To body wiring harness (14-pin)
I
(1)
Turn
the ignition key to the LOCK position, disconnect the negative battery cable and tape the terminal.
Caution Wait at least 30 seconds after disconnecting the battery cable before doing any further work. The SRS system is designed to retain enough voltage to deploy the air bag for a
Is the SDU lock lever securely locked?
short time even after the battery has been disconnected, so serious injury may result from unintended air bag deployment if, work is done on the SRS system immediately after the battery cable is disconnected.
(2) Remove the floor console. (Refer to GROUP 52A - Floor Console.)
~JII~~
I -1 Malfunction of the SDU 1 1 > Replace the SDU. (Refer to P.52B-59.1 I I NOTE - IMPORTANT
(1) After repairing the SRS, reconnect the battery cable, erase the diagnosis code memory from the Multi-use Tester and check the SRS warning light operation to verify the system functions properly. (Refer to Test 1.)
TSB Revision

1 TEST 9 1 REPAIR REQUIRED FOR 41. IG VOLT LOW 1 FAULT 1
JTCH; IGNITION
DIIll MLLTI -PURPOSE
r---------------------f------
------A i
SRS DIAGNOSIS UNIT
SRS diagnoiis unit
View A
To front impact sensor (L.H.) To front impact sensor (R.H.) \
To klock spring
19FOllO \ To body wiring harness (14-pin)
+a-
(1 )
Lock I
Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position, disconnect the negative battery cable and tape the terminal.
Caution
Wait at least 30 seconds after disconnecting the battery cable before doing any further work. The SRS system is designed to retain enough voltage to deploy the air bag for a short time even after the battery has been disconnected, so serious injury may result from unintended air bag deployment if work is done on the SRS system immediately after the battery cable is disconnected.
(2 0-J
i9FO103
-I
-I
(4) Disconnect the red 14-pin connector from the SRS diagnosis unit while pressing down the lock of the connector. (Refer to P.52B-9.)

- Troubleshooting
I
(5) Connect the now disconnected red harness-side SDU connector (14-pin) to the connector @ of the SRS Check Harness. (6) Check according to the flow chart below, using the digital & multi-meter.
View A

16R2188
FuseNo. 18
Ground
, No Is there continuity between the No. 19 or No. 20 terminal of SRS Check Harness connector @ and ground? Ground circuit open
Yes
Reconnect negative terminal of battery, and turn the ignition key to the ON position.
the No. 19 or 20 terminal (ground) and
Yes
(1) Turnthe ignition key to the LOCK position, disconnect the negative battery cable and tape the terminal. (2) After waiting at least 30 seconds, repair or replace the body wiring harness. (Refer tcI P.52B-14.) Malfunction of the SDU > (I) Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position, disconnect the negative battery cable and tape the terminal. (2) After waiting at least 30 seconds, replace the SDU. (Refer to P.52B-59.)
NOTE - IMPORTANT
~ (1) After repairing the SRS, reconnect the battery cable, erase the diagnosis code memory from the Multi-use Tester and check the SRS warning light operation to verify the system functions L/1 properly. (Refer to TEST 1.)
TSB Revision

1 TEST 10 1 REPAIR REQUIRED FOR 42. IG VOLT LOW 2 FAULT 1
MILT I -PURPOSE
_~_----_-__--_--_-__---~--~~
SRS DIAGNOSIS UNIT
SRS diagnosis unit

13R0704
View A
To front impact sensor (L.H.) To front impact sensor (R.H.) \ ,
To dlockspring
/ lSFO110 To body wiring harness (14-pin)

- Troubleshooting
(5) Connect the now disconnected red harness-side SDU connector (14-pin) to the connector @ of the SRS Check Harness. (6) Check according to the flow chart below using the digital > d multi-meter.
View A
SRS Check Harness connector @ t- Fuse No. 11
Ground
, No
Is there continuity between the No. 19 or No. 20 terminal of SRS Check Harness connector @ and ground?
i- Ground circuit open i
(> py;;;;fgJ;p ~~y~~on
Reconnect negative terminal of
Yes
- No
Is there a voltage of 9V or more between the No. 19 or 20 terminal (ground) and the No. 11 terminal of the SRS Check Harness connector @? Yes > Damaged or disconnected wiring of fuse No. 11, or damaged or disconnected body wiring harness.
(1) Turn the ignition key to the.LOCK position, disconnect the negative battery cable and tape the terminal. (2) After waiting at least 30 seconds, repair or replace the body wiring harness. (Refer to P.52B-14.) > (1) Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position, disconnect the negative battery cable and tape the terminal. (2) After waiting at least 30 seconds, replace the SDU. (Refer to P.52B-59.)
) Malfunction of the SDU
NOTE - IMPORTANT
(1) After repairing the SRS, reconnect the battery cable, erase the diagnosis code memory from the \ i Multi-use Tester and check the SRS warning light operation to verify the system functions properly. (Refer to TEST 1.) d
1 TSB Revision I

REPAIR REQUIRED FOR 43. SRS LMP TRBL 1 FAULT (SRS warning light does not extinguish)
52B-45
TEST 11
COMBINATION METER (SRS WARNING LIGHT) 1.4w x 2
SRS diagno& unit

13R0704
r _________ I
- ____..__----" n
SRS DIAGNOSIS UN11
View A
To front impact sensor (L.H.) To front impact sensor (R.H.1 \
/ 1 -1 "fT%~~ION CIRCUIT/
Toclock spring SELF-DIAGNOISIS CHECK CONNECTOR (TFEOSRTOF.h~ll-USE =
\ To body wiring harness (14-pin)
19FOllO
Kx35-Ax-RIY)I-I
(1 )
Caution Wait at least 30 seconds after disconnecting the battery cable before doing any further work. The SRS system is designed to retain enough voltage to deploy the air bag for a short time even after the battery has been disconnected, so serious injury may result from unintended air bag deployment if work is done on the SRS system immediately after the battery cable is disconnetted .
< lever
(2) Remove the rear console assembly. (Refer to GROUP 52A Floor Console.) (3) Use a screwdriver to push in the lock spring of the lock lever of the SRS diagnosis unit to unlock the lock lever.
I 71, ~,JLockspring (
lonnector
<c--
(4) Disconnect the red 16pin connector from the SRS diagnosis unit while pressing down the lock of the connector. (Refer to P.52B-9.)
notch2
TSB
Revision
- Troubleshooting
(5) Reconnect negative terminal of battery, and turn the ignition key to the ON position. (6) Check according to the flow chart below.
I dl
Does the SRS warning light remain illuminated when the red 14-pin connector of the SDU is disconnected? Yes
- No ) Malfunction of the SDU ) (I) Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position, disconnect the negative battery cable and tape the terminal. (2) After waiting at least 30 seconds, replace the SDU. (Refer to P.52B-59.) (I) Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position, disconnect the negative battery cable and tape the terminal. (2) After waiting at least 30 seconds, repair or replace the body wiring harness. (Refer to P.52B-14.)
A--
i i
NOTE - IMPORTANT
(1) After repairing the SW, reconnect the battery cable, erase the diagnosis code memory from the Multi-use Tester and check the SRS warning light operation to verify the system functions properly. (Refer to TEST 1.)
TSB Revision

TEST 12 REPAIR REQUIRED FOR 43. SRS LMP TRBL 1 FAULT (SRS warning light does not illuminate)
M'LTI-PUROSE
COMEIINATION METER (SRS WARNING LIGHT) 1.4w x 2
05 SRS diagnosis unit

13R0704
SRS DIAGNOSIS UNI'
View A
To front impact sensor (L.H.) To front impact sensor (R.H.) \ I
TO dlock spring
19FOH0 I To body wiring harness (14-pin)
piw&pg
---pm =
(1)
lam-Ax-9150,-Y
IikPl
s-a
7 Lock lever
(2) Remove the rear console assemblv. (Refer to GROUP 52A - Floor Console.) (3) Use a screwdriver to push in the lock spring of the lock lever of the SRS diagnosis unit to unlock the lock lever.
-(4) Disconnect the red 14-pin connector from the SRS diagnosis unit while pressing down the lock of the connector. (Refer to P.52B-9.)
iB Revision

- Troubleshooting
(5) Connect the now disconnected red harness-side SDU connector (14-pin) to the connector @ of the SRS Check Harness. (6) Check according to the flow chart below, using the digital d multi-meter.
14-pin SDU connector (red)
View A
SRS
warning light
Ground
Is there continuity between the No. 19 or No. 20 terminal of SRS Check Harness connector @ and ground?
Yes
No -
Ground circuit open
(()
Reconnect negative terminal of No. 19 or 20 terminal (ground) and the the SIX Check Harness connector @?
Yes
(1) Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position, disconnect the negative battery cable and tape the terminal. (2) After waiting at least 30 seconds, replace the bulbs, repair or replace the body wiring harness.(Refer to P.52B-14.) )/ Malfunction of the SDU -1 (I ) Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position, disconnect the negative battery cable and tape the terminal. (2) After waiting at least 30 seconds, replace the SDU. (Refer to P.52B-59.)
NOTE - IMPORTANT
(1) After repairing the SRS, reconnect the battery cable, erase the diagnosis code memory from the Multi-use Tester and check the SRS warning light operation to verify the system functions d properly. (Refer to TEST 1.)
TSB Revision
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) - Z~-%Z%&Z% 528-49
SRS MAINTENANCE AND POST-COLLISION DIAGNOSIS

MAINTENANCE
M52PCAA
The SRS must be inspected by an authorized dealer 10 years after the car manufacture date shown on the certification label located on left front door latch post.
Manufacture date I
VEHICLE TYPE: PASSENGER CAR
MU9001
OOFOOOl
SRS warnmq - light -
Maintenance Items
1. SRS WARNING LIGHT CHECK
When the ignition key is turned to ON or engine started, the SRS warning light will illuminate for about 7 seconds and then turn off. This means that the system is functioning properly.
2. SRS COMPONENTS VISUAL CHECK

SDU t>
19FOlO:
13R0721
13R0722
TSB Revision
52B-50
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) - k%-%%,na~~g::i!is

2-1 Front Impact Sensors
Remove right and left front splash shield extensions. Check sensors to ensure the arrow marks face the front of the vehicle. LL (2) Check front upper frame lowers and sensor brackets for deformities or rust.
(1)
Front upper frame lower
19FOO67
Caution The SRS may not activate properly if a front impact sensor is not installed properly, which could result in serious injury or death to the vehicles driver.
(3) Check wiring harness (for front impact sensor) for binds, connector for damage, and terminals for deformities. Replace sensor and/or wiring harness if it fails visual check. (Refer to P.52B-56 and P.52B-14.)
I
2 - 2 (1
SRS Diagnosis Unit (SDU)

1 Check SDU case and brackets for dents, cracks, deformities or rust.
Caution The SRS may not activate properly if SRS diagnosis unit is not installed properly, which could result in :Ls i serious injury or death to the vehicles driver. I
(2) Check connectors and lock lever for damage, and terminals for deformities or rust. Replace SDU if it fails visual check. (Refer to P.52B-59.)
TSB Revision
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) - Post-coltision

2-3 Air Bag Module, Steering Wheel and Clock Spring
SRS Maintenance and Diagnosis
52B-51
Rtng gear 3at ca
Rotor
Screw
Air bag module
Remote control switch (radio)
To remote control switch
To body wiring harness
SRS diagnosis unit
19FO150
(1) Remove air bag module from steering wheel. (Refer to P.52B-62.)
Caution When disconnecting the air bag module-clock spring connector, take care not to apply excessive force to it.
(2) Check pad cover for dents, cracks or deformities.
Caution The removed air bag module should be stored in a clean, dry place with the pad cover face up.
19FO119
1 TSB Revision
52B-52 SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM fSRSI - ~Z-%~~~~aK&%k

(3) Check hooks and connectors for damage, terminals deformities, and harness for binds. (4) Check air bag inflator case for dents, cracks or deformities. \ (5) Check harness (built into steering wheel) and connectors ~ LA for damage, and terminals for deformities.
(6) Remove the steering wheel by using a steering wheel puller.
Caution Do not hammer on the steering wheel. Doing so may damage the collapsible column mechanism.
(7) Remove the steering column covers. (Refer to GROUP 52A - Instrument Panel.) (8) Remove the clock spring. (Refer to P.52B-62.)
To air bag module
(9) Check clock spring connectors and protective tube for damage, and terminals for deformities.
To SRS dragnosls unit
(10)Visually check the clock spring case and the gears for damage. (1 l)Align the mating mark and NEUTRAL position indicator and, after turning the vehicles front wheels to straightahead position, install the clock spring to the column switch.
19FOO89
Caution If the clock springs mating mark is not properly aligned, the steering wheel may not be completely rotational during a turn, or the flat cable within the clock spring may be severed, obstructing normal operation of the SRS and possibly leading to serious injury to the vehicles driver.
TSB Revision
SRS Maintenance and - Post-collision Diagnosis
52B-53
(12)lnstall the steering wheel, steering column covers and the air bag module. (13)Check steering wheel for noise, binds or difficult operation. (14)Check steering wheel for excessive free play. REPLACE ANY VISUALLY INSPECTED PART IF IT FAILS THAT INSPECTION. (Refer to P.52B-62.)
Caution The SRS may not activate properly if any of the above components is not installed properly, which could result in serious injury or death to the vehicles driver. 2-4 Front Wiring Harness and Body Wiring Harness
36FOO19
(1) Check connectors for poor connections. (2) Check harnesses for binds, connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities. REPLACE ANY CONNECTORS OR HARNESS THAT FAIL THE VISUAL INSPECTION. (Refer to P.52B-14.)
Caution The SRS may not activate properly if SRS harnesses or connectors are damaged or improperly connected, which could result in serious injury or death to the vehicles driver.
TSB Revision
52B-54 SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) - ZZ%K%~g~~~s

POST-COLLISION DIAGNOSIS
TEST EQUIPMENT TO BE USED FOR POST-COLLISION DIAGNOSIS
Tool Number MB991 341 Name Multi-use tester sub assembly Use
l l l l
Reading diagnosis codes Reading trouble period Erasing diagnosis code Reading erase times
MB991 359
ROM pack (for Multiuse Tester
To inspect and service the SRS after a collision (whether or not the air bag has deployed), perform the following steps.
1. SRS Diagnosis Unit Memory Check

(1) Insert ROM pack into the Multi-use Tester and connect the tester to Diagnosis Check Connector in glove compartment. (2) Read (and write down) all displayed diagnosis codes. (Refer to P.52B-18.) NOTE If the battery power supply has been disconnected or disrupted by the collision, the Multi-use Tester cannot communicate with the SRS diagnosis unit. Inspect and, if necessary, repair the body wiring harness before proceeding further.
IJ i
Multi-usejester (MB991341) Diagnosis/ service data output I
R'OM pack (MB991 359)
16LOO9'
Function Selection
(3) Select the 2. SERVICE DATA function and read (and write down) all displayed 91. TRBL PERIOD (Fault duration) and 92. ERASE TIMES (how many times memories are erased.). Refer to Multi-use Tester Instruction Manual (MB991 342). NOTE l Maximum stored period: 9999 minutes (approximately 7 days) l Maximum number of times to be stored: 250 (4) Erase the diagnosis codes and after waiting 45 seconds d or more read (and write down) all displayed diagnosis c o d e s . ( R e f e r t o P.528-18.)
Data List
TSB Revision
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) - ~~~-~~~~~a~~g~~~s 52B-55

2. Repair Procedure
(1) If air bag deployed in the collision, remove the deployed air bag module. (Refer to P.52B-62.) (2) Check the SRS components using the table shown below. If the SRS components are showing any visible damage such as dents, cracks, or deformation, replace them with new ones. Refer to appropriate INDIVIDUAL COMPONENT SERVICE, P.52B-56. (3) Conduct self-diagnosis using Multi-use Tester to ensure entire SRS operates properly except open circuit of air bag module (22. SQUIB TRBL 2). (4) Install new air bag module. (Refer to P.52B-62.) SRS Components Front impact sensors Inspection (when air bag deploys in collision) Replace front impact sensors. (Refer to P.52B-56.) Inspection (when air bag does not deploy in low-speed collision) (1) Check front upper frame lower and sensor brackets for deformities or rust. (2) Check sensor cases for dents, cracks deformities or rust. (3) Check sensor harnesses for binds, connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities. (1) Check SDU case and brackets for dents, cracks or deformities. (2) Check connectors and lock lever for damage, and terminals for deformities. (1) Check pad cover for dents, cracks or deformities. (2) Remove air bag module from steering wheel. Check hooks and connector for damage, terminals for deformities, and harness for binds. (Refer to P.52B-62.) (3) Check air bag inflator case for dents, cracks or deformities. (4) Install air bag module to steering wheel to.checl fit or alignment with the wheel. (1) Remove air bag module from steering wheel. (Refer to P.52B-62.) (2) Check wiring harness (built into steering wheel) and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities. (3) Install air bag module to check fit or alignment with steering wheel. (4) Check steering wheel for noise, binds or difficult operation and excessive free play, (1) Check clock spring connectors and protective tube for damage, and terminals for deformities. (2) &/;yecheck the case and the gears for
SRS diagnosis unit SDU)
Replace SRS diagnosis unit. (Refer to P.52B-59.)
jir bag module
Replace air bag module. (Refer to P.52B-62.)
Steering wheel/steering column/intermediate ioint
Replace steering wheel, steering column and intermediate joint. (Refer to GROUP 37A- Steering Wheel and Shaft.)
Clock spring
Replace clock spring.
Harness connector IBody and Front wiring iarnessl
(1 )Check connectors for poor connections. (2)Check harnesses for binding, connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities. (Refer to P.52B-53 and P.52B-14.)
TSB Revision
52B-56
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) - front lwtact sensors
INDIVIDUAL COMPONENT SERVICE

If the SRS components are to be removed or replaced as a result of maintenance, troubleshooting, etc., follow each procedure (P.52B-56 - P.52B-68). L++(
Caution 1. SW components should not be subjected to heat over 93C (2OOF), so remove the front impact sensors, SRS diagnosis unit and air bag module and clock spring before drying or baking the vehicle after painting. Recheck SRS system operability after re-installing them. 2. If the SRS components are removed for the purpose of check, sheet metal repair, painting, etc., they should be stored in a clean, dry place until they are reinstalled.
FRONT IMPACT SENSORS

Caution 1. Never repair or disassemble a front impact sensor. If faulty, replace it. 2. Handle the front impact sensors very carefully, taking care not to drop them or otherwise subject them to impact. If a sensor is seen to be dented, cracked, deformed or rusted, replace it with a new one. 3. Replace sensors with new ones after the air bag has deployed.
Removal steps
l *
a*
Post-installation inspection of the negative (-) battery cable to the battery 2. Front splash shield extension I)* 3. Front impact sensor I)* Pre-installation inspection
1. Connection
19FO133
I TSB Revision
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) - Front impact Sensors SERVICE POINTS OF REMOVAL
52B-57
1. DISCONNECTION OF THE NEGATIVE (-) BATTERY CABLE FROM THE BATTERY

INSPECTION
Digital multi-meter
(I) Check upper frame and sensor brackets for deformities or rust. (2) Check sensor harness for binds, connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities. (3) Check for dents, cracks or deformation of the front impact sensor.
/
19FOlC
Caution If a dent, crack, deformation or rust is detected, replace with a .new sensor.
(4) Remove the front impact sensor. (5) Measure the resistance between terminals and check whether it is within the standard value.
Standard value: 2,000 + 40 iZ Caution Always replace the sensor with a new one if the resistance is not within the standard value.
1 TSB Revision
52B-58
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) - Front Impact Sensors SERVICE POINT OF INSTALLATION
PRE-INSTALLATION INSPECTION
(1) Before any front impact sensor is installed in the vehicle, it must be visually inspected. If a dent, crack or other LA deformation, or rust, is detected, discard the sensor and replace it with a new one that passes the visual inspection. (2) Before any front impact sensor is installed in the vehicle, the resistance between its terminals must be confirmed to be within the standard value.
Standard value: 2,000 -t 400

Use the digital multi meter. If the resistance is not within that standard value range, discard it and replace it with a new one that has the standard value.
4. INSTALLATION OF FRONT IMPACT SENSOR

(1) Bend the wiring harness slightly (to the extent that there is no slack), and clip securely by using the clip of the front impact sensor. (2) Install the front impact sensor so that there is close adherence of the upper surface of the front impact sensor and the installation surface of the upper frame d (lower).
19FOO6i
Caution The SRS may not activate properly if a front impact sensor is not installed properly, which could result in serious injury or death to the vehicles driver.
POST-INSTALLATION INSPECTION
Reconnect the negative battery terminal. Turn the ignition switch to ON. Does the SW warning light illuminate for about 7 seconds, turn OFF and then remain extinguished for at least 45 seconds? If yes, SRS system is functioning properly. If no, consult page 52B-17.
19FOO72
TSB Revision
- SRS Diagnosis Unit (SDU) 52B-59
SRS DIAGNOSIS UNIT (SDU)

Caution 1. Never attempt to disassemble or repair the SRS diagnosis unit. If faulty, replace it. 2. Do not to drop or subject the SRS diagnosis unit to impact or vibration. If denting, cracking, deformation, or rust are discovered in the SRS diagnosis unit, replace it with a new SRS diagnosis unit. Discard the old one.
M52PDBA
3. After deployment of an air bag, replace the SRS diagnosis unit with a new one. 4. Never use an ohmmeter on or near the SRS diagnosis unit, and use only the special test equipment described on P.!i2B-16.
19FO130
Removal steps
aI) Post-installation inspection 1. Connection of the negative t-1 battery cable to the battery 2. Cup holder 3. Console plug 4. Rear console assembly a* l d 5. Connection of the SRS diagnosis unit and each harness connector l * 6. SRS diagnosis unit *c Pre-installation inspection
2-pin yellow connector to left front impact sensor Z-pin red tonne to clock sprrng
*a
Z-pin dlue connector to right front Impact sensor \ 14-pin red connector to body wlnng harness
TSB Revision
52B-60 SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) - SRS Diagnosis Unit (SW
/-
I
Battery e

the negative battery cable and tape the terminal.
\\ Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position, disconnect d
Caution Wait at least 30 seconds after disconnecting the battery cable before doing any further work. The SRS system is designed to retain enough voltage to deploy the air bag for a short time even after the battery has been disconnected, so serious injury may result from unintended air bag deployment if work is done on the SRS system immediately after the battery cable is disconnected. 5. DISCONNECTION OF THE SRS DIAGNOSIS UNIT AND EACH HARNESS CONNECTOR
(1) Use a screwdriver to push in the lock spring of the lock lever of the SRS diagnosis unit to unlock the lock lever.
I I
I 1
Caution A double-lock mechanism is employed for the connector of the SRS diagnosis unit, so care must be taken not to damage the connector by using excessive force or by not disconnecting it correctly.
(2) Remove each connector from the SRS diagnosis unit while pressing down the lock of each connector. (Refer t o P.52B-9.)
~ \Lj (
13R0721
lSF1072:
INSPECTION
l l
Check the SRS diagnosis unit case and brackets for dents, cracks or deformities. Check connectors and lock lever for damage, and terminals for deformities.
Caution If a dent, cracks, deformation or rust discovered, replace the SRS diagnosis unit with a new one.
NOTE For checking of the SRS diagnosis unit other than described above, refer to the section concerning troubleshooting. (Refer to P.52B-17.)
SRS diagnosis unit

13R0704
View A To front impact sensor (L.H.) \
\
-
To front impact sensor (R.H.1
I
I, 1 I
\
To clock spring

19FOllt r-
~ I kJ
TSB IRevision
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) -
SRS Diagnosis Unit (SDU) 52B-61

Before SRS diagnosis unit is installed in the vehicle, it must be visually inspected. If a dent, crack or other deformation is detected, discard the SRS diagnosis unit and replace it with a new one that passes the visual inspection.
6. INSTALLATION OF SRS DIAGNOSIS UNIT

With the projection part of the SRS diagnosis unit placed against the bracket as shown in the figure, securely install the SRS diagnosis unit.
Caution The SRS may not activate properly if SRS diagnosis unit is not installed properly, which could result in serious injury or death to the vehicles driver.
5. CONNECTION OF THE SRS DIAGNOSIS UNIT AND EACH HARNESS CONNECTOR

After connecting each harness connector securely and correctly to the SRS diagnosis unit, be sure to press down the lock lever of the SRS diagnosis unit.
1330721
13R072i
POST INSTALLATION INSPECTION

ht-----
Reconnect the negative battery terminal. Turn the ignition switch to ON. Does the SRS warning light illuminate for about 7 seconds, turn OFF and then remain extinguished for at least 45 seconds? If yes, SRS system is functioning properly. If no, consult page 52B-17.
TSB Revision
52B-62
Air Bag Module - and Clock Spring
AIR BAG MODULE AND CLOCK SPRING

Caution 1. Never attempt to disassemble or repair the air bag module or clock spring. If faulty, replace it. 2. Do not drop the air bag module or clock spring or allow contact with water, grease or oil. Replace it if a dent, crack, deformation or rust are detected. 3. The air bag module should be stored on a flat surface and placed so that the pad surface is facing upward.
M52PDCA
Do not place anything on top of it. 4. Do not expose the air bag module to temper- ILJ ature over 93C (200F). 5 After an air bag has deployed, replace with a new air bag module and check the SRS operability. 6. Wear gloves and safety glasses when handling an air bag that has already deployed. 7. An undeployed air bag module should only be disposed of in accordance with the procedures [P.52B-69 - P.52B-721.

l
After setting the steering wheel ant the front wheels to the stralghtahea posltion. remove the ignition key.
5Nm
Clock spring removal steps I)4 Post-installation inspection

4* +* l + l *l a 1. Connection of the negative (-1 battery cable to the battery 2. Air bag module 8. Steering wheel Knee protector 1 (Refer to GROUP 52AColumn cover J Instrument Panel.) Floor console (Refer to GROUP 52A- Floor Console.) 9. Clock spring and SRS diagnosis unit connection 10. Clock spring and body wiring harness connection 11. Clock spring Pre-installation inspection
19FO150
Air bag module removal steps I)4 Post-installation inspection

1. Connection of the negative (-1 battery cable to the battery *I) I)* 2. Air bag module 3. Radio remote control assembly 4. Horn contact plate 5. Horn contact plate and wire 6. Horn button 7. Spring l 4 Pre-installation inspection 4*
*I) *+
I d
I)* I)4
1 TSB Revision
I
II
526-63

Caution Wait at least 30 seconds after disconnecting the battery cable before doing any further work. The SRS system is designed to retain enough voltage to deploy the air bag for a short time even after the battery has been disconnected, so serious injury may result from unintended air bag deployment if work is done on the SRS system immediately after the battery cable is disconnected. 2. REMOVAL OF AIR BAG MODULE
(1) Remove the air bag module mounting nut using a socket wrench from the back side. (2) When disconnecting the connector of the clock spring from the air bag module, press the air bags lock toward the outer side to spread it open. Use a screwdriver, as shown in the figure at the left, to pry so as to remove the connector gently.
Caution When disconnecting the air bag module-clock spring connector, take care not to apply excessive force to it.
(3) The removed air bag module should be stored in a clean, dry place with the pad cover face up.
19FOlll3
8. REMOVAL OF STEERING WHEEL

Remove the steering wheel by using a steering wheel puller.
Caution Do not hammer on the steering wheel. Doing so may damage the collapsible column mechanism.
9. DISCONNECTION OF THE SRS DIAGNOSIS UNIT AND CLOCK SPRING CONNECTION

Caution A double-lock mechanism is employed for the connector of the SRS diagnosis unit, so care must be taken not to damage it by using excessive force or by not disconnecting it correctly. TSB Revision
52B-64
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) - and Clock Spring
Air Eag Module
Connector note \ \ I,
13R0721 13R0722
(3) Remove the 2-pin red connector of the clock spring from the SRS diagnosis unit while pressing down the lock of the clock springs connector. (Refer to P.52B-9.)
I
I I I I
INSPECTION
AIR BAG MODULE Caution Never attempt to measure the circuit resistance of the air bag module (squib) even if you are using the specified tester. If the circuit resistance is measured with a tester, accidental air bag deployment will result in serious personal injury.
Lj
(1) Check pad cover for dents, cracks or deformities. (2) Check the air bag module for denting, cracking or deformation. (3) Check hooks and connectors for damage, terminals for deformities, and harness for binds. (4) Check air bag inflator case for dents, cracks or deformities.
(5) Install the air bag module to steering wheel to check fit or alignment with the wheel.
Caution If a dent, crack or other deformation is discovered, replace the air bag module with a new one. Dispose of the old one according to the specified procedure. (Refer to P52B-69 to P.52B-72.)
iJ i
Air b\g module \
TSB Revision

CLOCK SPRING
52B-65
(I) Check connectors and protective tube for damage, and terminals for deformities.
To SRS diagnosis unit

19FO101
(2) Visually check the case and the gears for damage.
(3) Check for continuity between the No. 1 connector of the clock spring and connectors No. 3, 4, 5 and 6.
LJLJ
19FOlOS
NOTE O-O Indicates that there
IS
continuity between the terminal
TSB Revision
52B-66
MB991349 SRS CHeck Harness
(4) Joint the No. 2 connector (air bag module side) and No. 7 connector of clock spring to connector @ and connector @, respectively, of the SRS Check Harness. NOTE When joining SRS Check Harness connector (4) , align its white paint with the hollow portion of the No. 2 connector of the clock spring.
No. 7 connectc
d:
(5) Check for continuity between terminal 1 and terminal 21, and terminal 2 and terminal 22, of SRS Check Harness connector @ , using a digital multi-meter.
Standard value: less than 0.452

No. 2 connector
(6) If, as result of above checks, even one abnormal point is discovered, replace the clock spring with a new one.
View A
SRS Check Harness connector
\ d : I
16R219C

(I) Before the clock spring and air bag module are installed in the vehicle, they must be visually inspected. If a dent, crack or other deformation, or any rust, is detected, discard the clock spring and/or air bag module and replace it with a new one that passes the visual inspection.
Caution Dispose of an air bag module only according to the specified procedure. (Refer to P.52B-69 to P.52B-72.)
(2) Before the clock spring is installed in the vehicle, the resistance between No. 2 and No. 7 connectors of clock spring must be confirmed to be within standard value; less than 0.4(2. Use the SRS Check Harness and digital multi-meter. (Refer to CHECKING THE CLOCK SPRING.) If the clock spring is not within that standard value range, discard it and replace it with a new one that has the proper standard value.
19FOlO
I LA
!I
TSB Revision
52B-67
(3) Insert ROM pack into the Multi-use Tester and connect tester to Diagnosis Check Connector in glove compartment. (4) Reconnect negative terminal of battery, and turn the ignition key to the ON position. (5) Conduct self-diagnosis using Multi-use Tester to ensure entire SRS operates properly, except open circuit of air bag module (22. SQUIB TRBL 2). (Refer to P.52B-18.) (6) Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position, disconnect the negative battery cable and tape the terminal.
Multi-use Testkr (MB991 341) Diagnosis/ service data oumut
ROM pack (MB991 359)
Ground
16LOO9'
11. INSTALLATION OF CLOCK SPRING

Align the mating mark and NEUTRAL position indicator of the clock spring, and, after turning the front wheels to the straight-ahead position, install the clock spring to the column switch.
Caution If the clock springs mating mark, is not properly aligned, the steering wheel may not be completely rotational during a turn, or the flat cable within the clock spring may be severed, obstructing normal operation of the SRS and possibly leading to serious injury to the vehicles driver. 9. CLOCK SPRING AND SRS DIAGNOSIS UNIT CONNECTION
After securely and correctly installing the clock springs connector to the SRS diagnosis unit, be absolutely sure to press down the lock lever of the SRS diagnosis unit.
13R0721
13R072;
8. INSTALLATION OF STEERING WHEEL

(1) Before installing the steering wheel, be sure to first turn the vehicles front wheels to the straight-ahead position and align the mating mark and NEUTRAL position indicator of the clock spring.
Caution Be sure when installing the steering wheel, that the harness of the clock spring does not become caught or tangled.
(2) After clamping, turn the steering wheel all the way in both directions to confirm that steering is normal. TSB Revision
52B-68
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) - %%%$kg

2. INSTALLATION OF AIR BAG MODULE
(1) Arrange the wiring of the horn switch as shown in the figure at the left, and hook up in place. (2) Install the air bag module, taking care that no wiring is vi caught by it.
POST-INSTALLATION INSPECTION
(1) After installing the clock spring, the steering wheel, the column covers and the air bag module, check steering wheel for noise, binds or difficult operation.
SRS warning light /-----r--l
(2) Reconnect the negative battery terminal. Turn the ignition switch to ON. Does the SRS warning light illuminate for about 7 seconds, turn OFF and then remain extinguished for at least 45 seconds? If yes, SRS system is functioning properly. If no, consult page 52B-17.
I
19FOO72
TSB Revision
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) - ~&%,MprOodcUures 52B-69
AIR BAG MODULE DISPOSAL PROCEDURES

L Before either disposing of a vehicle equipped with an air bag, or prior to disposing of the air bag
M52PmA
module, be sure to first follow the procedures described below to and deploy the air bag.
AIR BAG REMOTE DEPLOYMENT DEVICES
Insulation tape
UNDEPLOYED AIR BAG MODULE DISPOSAL

Caution If the vehicle is to be scrapped, junked, or otherwise disposed of, deploy the air bag inside the vehicle. If the vehicle will continue to be operated and only the air bag module is to be disposed of, deploy the air bag outside the vehicle. 1. DEPLOYMENT INSIDE THE VEHICLE (when vehicle will no longer be driven)
(1) Open all windows and doors of the vehicle. Move the vehicle to an isolated spot. (2) Disconnect the negative (4 and positive (i-1 battery cables from the battery terminals, and then remove the battery from the vehicle.
Caution Wait at least 30 seconds after disconnecting the battery cables before doing any further work. The SRS system is designed to retain enough voltage to deploy the air bag for a short time even after the battery has been disconnected, so serious injury may result from unintended air bag deployment if work is done on the SRS system immediately after the battery cables are disconnected. TSB Revision
52B-70
Air Bag Module - Disposal Procedures
L/!
13R0721
13R0722
(5) Disconnect the clock spring connector from the SRS diagnosis unit while pressing down the lock of the connector. (Refer to P.52B-9.)
lnsulatlon
(6) Connect two wires each six meters (20 feet) long, to the two leads of SRS AIR BAG ADAPTER HARNESS A and cover the connections with insulation tape. The other ends of the two wires should be connected to each other (short-circuited), to prevent sudden unexpected deployment of the air bag.
(7) Connect the SRS AIR BAG ADAPTER HARNESS A to the clock spring connector (which has been disconnected from the SRS diagnosis unit), and then lead the two connected wires outside the vehicle.
\ spring connector s+- M B 6 8 6 5 6 0

19FOO88
Clock
TSB Revision
Air Bag Module - Disposal Procedures
52B-71
(8) At a location as far away from the vehicle as possible, disconnect the two connected wires from each other, and connect them to the two terminals of the battery (removed from the vehicle) to deploy the air bag.
Caution 1. Before deploying the air bag in this manner, first check to be sure that there is no one in or near the vehicle. Wear safety glasses. 2. The inflator will be quite hot immediately following the deployment, so wait at least 30 minutes to allow it to cool before attempting to handle it. Although not poisonous, do not inhale gas from air bag deployment. See Deployed Air Bag Module Disposal Procedures (P.52B-72) for post-deployment handling instructions. 3. If the air bag fails to deploy when the procedures above are followed, do not go near the module. Contact your regional Tech Line at 1-800-4466064 for instructions.
2. DEPLOYMENT OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE

(1) Disconnect the negative (4 and positive (+) battery cables from the battery terminals, and then remove the battery from the vehicle.
id
Caution Wait at least 30 seconds after disconnecting the battery cables before doing any further work. The SRS system is designed to retain enough voltage to deploy the air bag for a short time even after the battery has been disconnected, so serious injury may result from unintended air bag deployment if work is done on the SRS system immediately after the battery cables are disconnected.
(2) Remove the air bag module for the vehicle. (Refer to P.528-62.)
Caution The air bag module should be stored on a flat surface and placed so that the pad cover face up. Do not place anything on top of it.
19FO119
Two wires
Conytion
(3) Connect two wires each six meters (20 feet) long, to the two leads of SRS AIR BAG ADAPTER HARNESS B, and cover the connections with insulation tape. The other ends of the two wires should be connected to each other (short-circuited), to prevent sudden unexpected deployment of the air bag.
Insulation tape
13~075
1 TSB Revision
52B-72
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) - &%~~~~~ures

(4) Place the air bag module, with the pad cover face up, in a flat, spacious area at least 6 meters (20 feet) away from any people, equipment or other objects. Connect SRS AIR BAG ADAPTER HARNESS B to the air bag md module connector on the modules underside. (5) At a location as far away from the air bag module as possible, and from a shielded position, if possible, disconnect the two connected wires from each other and connect them to the two terminals of the battery (removed from the vehicle) to deploy the air bag.
Caution 1. Do not perform deployment outside, if a strong wind is blowing, and if there is even a slight breeze, the air bag module should be placed and deployed downwind from the battery. 2. Before deployment, check carefully to be sure that no one is nearby, because deployment will cause the air bag module to jump upward about 1.5 to 3 meters (about 5 to 10 feet) into the air. 3. The inflator will be quite hot immediately following deployment, so wait at least 30 minutes to allow it to cool before attempting to handle it. Although not poisonous, do not inhale gas from air bag deployment. See Deployed Air Bag Module Disposal Procedures (as shown below) for post-deployment handling instructions. 4. If the air bag module fails to deploy when the procedures above are followed, do not go near the module. Contact your regional Tech Line at l-800-446-6064 for instructions. \
DEPLOYED AIR BAG MODULE DISPOSAL PROCEDURES

After deployment, the air bag module should be placed in a plastic bag and disposed of in the same manner as any other scrap parts, except that the following points should be carefully noted during disposal. (1) The inflator will be quite hot immediately following deployment, so wait at least 30 minutes to allow it to cool before attempting to handle it. (2) Do not put water or oil on the air bag after deployment. (3) There may be, adhered to the deployed air bag module, material that could irritate the eyes and/or skin, so wear gloves and safety glasses when handling a deployed air bag module. IF DESPITE THESE PRECAUTIONS, THE MATERIAL DOES, GET INTO THE EYES OR ON THE SKIN, IMMEDIATELY RINSE THE AFFECTED AREA WITH A LARGE AMOUNT OF CLEAN WATER. IF ANY IRRITATION DEVELOPS, SEEK MEDICAL A-I-TENTION. (4) Put the deployed air bag in a hermetically sealed container and discarded it.
LJ i
TSB Revision
55-1
HEATER, AIR CONDITIONER AND VENTILATION

CONTENTS
HEATERS AND AIR CONDITIONING ................
SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................................
General Specifications ........................................................ Lubricants ............................................................................ Sealant and Adhesive ............................................................ Service Specifications ........................................................
M55AA- 22 35 20 9 10
11 12 11 16 16 17 15 17 15 10
3
3
3 4 4 3
HEATER UNIT* ........................................................................ REFRIGERANT LINE ................................................................ RESISTOR ................................................................................ SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ........................................................ SERVICE ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES ............................
Charging Procedures ............................................................ Charging the Refrigerant .................................................... Compressor Drive Belt Adjustment .................................... Compressor Noise ................................................................ Handling Tubing and Fittings ................................................ Idle-up Operation Check .................................................... Performance Test ................................................................ Power Relay Check ............................................................ Refrigerant Leak Repair Procedure .................................... Test Procedures ....................................................................
SPECIAL TOOLS ........................................................................ i
HEATERS AND MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER

AIR CONDITIONER SWITCH BLOWER ASSEMBLY COMPRESSOR ................................................ BELT LOCK CONTROLLER .................................................... ............................................................ ........................................................................
5
21 20 23 27 33 39 25 18
CONDENSER AND CONDENSER FAN MOTOR ................ ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SWITCH .................... EVAPORATOR ........................................................................ HEATER CONTROL ASSEMBLY* ........................................ SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
TROUBLESHOOTING
............................................................
5 38 36
VENTILATORS (AIR INLET AND AIR OUTLET) ................ VENTILATORS (INSTRUMENT PANEL)* ............................
(1) A Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), which uses a driver-side air bag, has been installed in the 3000GT. (2) The SRS includes the following components: impact sensors, SRS diagnosis unit: SRS warning light, air bag module, clock spring, interconnecting wiring. Other SRS-related components (that may have to be removed/installed in connection with SRS service or maintenance) are indicated in the table of contents by an asterisk (*). WARNING! (1) Improper service or maintenance of any component of the SRS, or any SRS-related component, can lead to personal injury or death to service personnel (from inadvertent firing of the air bag) or to the driver (from rendering the SRS inoperative). (2) Service or maintenance of any SRS component or SRS-related component must be performed only at an authorized MITSUBISHI dealer. (3) MITSUBISHI dealer personnel must thoroughly review this manual, and especially its GROUP 52B Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), before beginning any service or maintenance of any component of the SRS or any SRS-related component.
55-2
FULL AUTO AIR CONDITIONER ........................

AIR-CONDITIONER CONTROL PANEL*, AIR-CONDITIONER CONTROL UNIT* ................................ COMPRESSOR ........................................................................ CONDENSER AND CONDENSER FAN MOTOR ................ DAMPER CONTROL MOTOR ASSEMBLY* ........................ ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SWITCH ....................
40
56 62 62 58 62
OTHER PARTS
........................................................................
62
POWER TRANSISTOR, BELT LOCK CONTROLLER ........ 57 REFRIGERANT LINE ................................................................ 62 SAFETY PRECAUTlONS ........................................................ 56 SENSORS .................................................................................... 60 SERVICE ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES ............................ 56 TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................................ 40
HEATER, AIR CONDITIONER AND VENTILATION - Specifications
55-3
HEATER, AIR CONDITIONER AND VENTILATION
SPECIFICATIONS
Items Heater unit Type Heater control assembly Compressor Model Refrigerant unit lubricant cc (cu.in.1 V belt size mm (in.) Dual pressure switch High pressure switch kPa (psi) Low pressure switch kPa (psi) Freezer prevention C (F) Refrigerant and quantity Three-way-flow full-air-mix system Dial type Scroll type (FX-105 VS) FREOL S-83 or SUNISO 5GS 1,150 (45.3) OFF: 2,700 (384) OFF: 210 (30) Air temperature thermostat OFF: - 2 (28.4) R-l 2 Approx. 970 (34) Specifications
M55CA. -
160 & 20 (9.8 + 1.2)
ON: 2,100 (299) ON : 235 (33) ON: 2 (35.6)
g (oz.)
M55CB. -
/ L;
Items Standard value Idle speed when air conditioner on Resister resistance value 1R
Specifications 900 f 100 CA/T at P range> 1.76 - 2.06 (Across terminals @and 0) 1 .I 0 - 1.26 (Across terminals @and 0) 0.38 - 0.44 (Across terminals @and @) Approx. 110 (230) or less Approx. 155 (311) or more 405 f 35 when ambient temperature is 20C (68F) 0.4 - 0.6 (.Ol - .02) 112-118(233-244)
rpm
Refrigerant temperature sensor Sensor-ON temperature C (F) Sensor-OFF temperature C (F) Revolution pick up sensor standard resistance 0 Clutch clearance mm (in.) Engine coolant temperature switch Switch-OFF temperature C (F) <Fully automatic air conditioner> Air mix damper potentiometer motor assembly resistance MAX. HOT kQ MAX. COOL kS1 Outlet selector damper potentiometer assembly resistance DEF. position kS1 FACE position kfl Water temperature sensor Sensor-ON temperature C (F)
0.2 4.9 2.0 4.3 26.5 f 4 (79.7 + 7)
TSB Revision
55-4 HEATER, AIR CONDITIONER AND VENTILATION LUBRICANTS

Items Each connection of refrigerant line Specified lubricants FREOL S-83 or SUNISO 5GS
Specifications / Special Tools
M55CD. _
Quantity As required
SEALANT AND ADHESIVE
M55CE- -
I Items
Engine coolant temperature switch threaded part
Specified sealant and adhesive 3M Nut Locking Part No. 4171 or equivalent
SPECIAL TOOLS
MSSDA- -
multi-use tester)
TSB Revision
HEATERS AND MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER - Troubleshooting
55-5

t+-/ TROUBLESHOOTING
Symptom Heater insufficient heat Probable cause Obstructed heater outlets Blend air dampers improperly adjusted or binding Thermostat malfunction Obstructed heater hoses Improperly adjusted control cables Plugged or partially plugged heater core No ventilation even when mode selection knob is operated Incorrect adjustment of mode selection dampers Incorrect installation of mode selection control wire Ducts are incorrectly/incompletely connected, crushed, bent or clogged Blower motor inoperative Burnt-out fuse Poor grounding Malfunction blower switch Repair or replace Replace Correct Replace Adjust Clean or replace Adjust Replace Remedy Correct
M55ECAE
Malfunction resistor Malfunction blower motor Malfunction heater relay Malfunction blower motor relay
TSB Revision
55-6
CIRCUIT DAIGRAM
P\IR CONDITIONER CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT
1 Batte
2-J
-use Fuse
l-
L-l
Fuse
( Alternator k
vi ; ~~o~~;motor ;?I Resistor

r---HI ---MH :---ML ---I n II Heater control panel
I-
I. I
A/C I
Air conditioner switch 1
IT
Regulator
I
I
I 1
Air inlet sensor
I
I\
vi;
-yq
1 IFin therm0 sensor
Revolution pick up sensor
i
Compressor @ID Y
2OFOO43 I
TSB Revision
HEATERS AND MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER - Trqubleshooting TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS

Inspection of Air Conditioner Control Unit
55-7
L
2OFOO85
Disconnect the amplifier and inspect the connector on the wire harness side as shown in the chart below.
Test Conditions:
(1) (2) (3) (4) Ignition switch: ON Air conditioner switch: ON Temperature control lever: MAX. COOL Blower switch: HI
Terrrnal 8 1 6
Signal Auto compressor control unit ground Auto compressor control unit power SUPPlY Air conditioner compressor relay Air conditioner switch: A/C Air conditioner switch: ECONO At all times
Conditions ov Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage
When ignition switch is ON When all conditions for switch-ON of the compressor are satisfied When air conditioner switch pressed in to second step When air conditioner switch pressed in to first step Ignition switch, blower switch and air conditioner switch: ON Ignition switch, blower switch and air conditioner switch: ON Ignition switch, blower switch and air conditioner switch: ON Ambient temperature: 4C (39F) Ignition switch, blower switch and air conditioner switch: ON Ambient temperature: 4C (39F)
I I
13 / LJ 14 15
Fin-therm0 sensor 0 Air-inlet sensor 0 Fin-therm0 sensor 0
Approx. 2.5V Approx. IV OV
18
Air-inlet sensor 0
ov
TSB Revision
55-8

Compressor doesnt operate.
d
Criteria Probable cause Abnormal No sound is noted Faulty magnetic clutch I Remedy Replace magnetic clutch.
hen no.
Inspectron point
Method
No continuity
Faulty blower switch
Replace blower switch
No continuity switch terminals. 4 No continuity
Faulty air conditioner switch Faulty air magnetic clutch relay
Replace air conditioner switch. Replace magnetic clutch relay.
pa;? places where gas
6 7
Vo continuity I\Jo continuity
Faulty dual-pressure switch Faulty thermostat
Replace dual-pressure switch. Replace thermostat.
Sensor 9
/
Outside range of 3.9 to 4.1 kfi 3utside range of 1.9tol.l kQ
Faulty fin-therm0 sensor
Replace fin-therm0 sensor
Faulty air inlet sensor
Replace air inlet sensor.
-L If no abnormality is noted at each inspection point after inspection coducted in the sequence shown in this quick-reference table, it is suspected that the compressor IS Inoperative because of faulty air conditioner control unit. Therefore, replace the air conditioner control unit.
TSB Revision
HEATERS AND MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER - safety Pre=utm
55-9
M55PAAF
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
R-12 refrigerant is a chlorofluoro-carbon (CFC) that can contribute to the depletion of the ozone layer in the upper atmosphere. Ozone filters out harmful radiation from the sun. To assist in protecting the ozone layer, Mitsubishi Motor Sales of America recommends that a R-12 refrigerant recycling device that meets SAE standard J1991 be used. Contact an automotive service equipment supplier for refrigerant recycling equipment that is available in your area. The refrigerant used in all air conditioner is R-l 2. It is transparent and colorless in both the liquid and vapor state. Since it has a boiling point of -29.8C (-21.7F), at atmospheric pressure, it will be a vapor at all normal temperatures and pressures. The vapor is heavier than air, non-flammable, and nonexplosive. It is nonpoisonous except when it is in direct contact with open flame. It is noncorrosive except when combined with water. The following precautions must be observed when handling R-12.
In most instances, moderate heat is required to bring the pressure of the refrigerant in its container above the pressure of the system when charging or adding refrigerant. A bucket or large pan of hot water not over 52C (125.6F) is all the heat required for this purpose. Do not heat the refrigerant container with a blow torch or any other means that would raise temperature and pressure above this temperature. Do not weld or steam clean on or near the system components or refrigerant lines.
Caution Keep R-12 containers upright when charging the system.

When metering R-12 into the refrigeration system, keep the supply tank or cans in an upright position. If the refrigerant container is on its side or upside down, liquid refrigerant will enter the system and damage the compressor.
Caution Always work in a well-ventilated room.

Good ventilation is vital in the working area. Although R-12 vapor is normally nonpoisonous, contact with an open flame can cause the vapor to become very poisonous. A poisonous gas is produced when using the flame-type leak detector. Avoid inhaling the fumes from the leak detector.
Caution Wear safety goggles when servicing the refrigeration system.

R-12 evaporates so rapidly at normal atmospheric pressures and temperatures that it tends to freeze anything it contacts. For this reason, extreme care must be taken to prevent any liquid refrigerant from contacting the skin and especially the eyes. Always wear safety goggles when servicing the refrigeration part of the air conditioning system. Keep a bottle of sterile mineral oil handy when working on the refrigeration system. Should any liquid refrigerant get into the eyes, use a few drops of mineral oil to wash them out. R-12 is rapidly absorbed by the oil. Next splash the eyes with plenty of cold water. Call your doctor immediately even though irritation has ceased after treatment.
Caution Do not allow liquid refrigerant to touch bright metal.

Refrigerant will tarnish bright metal and chrome surfaces, and in combination with moisture can severely corrode all metal surfaces.
Caution Do not heat R-12 above 52C (125.6F).
1 TSB Revision
55-10 HEATERS AND MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER -

M55FEAU
TEST PROCEDURES
SIGHT GLASS REFRIGERANT LEVEL TEST
The sight glass is a refrigerant level indicator. To check the refrigerant level, clean the sight glass and start the vehicle engine. Push the air conditioner button to operate the compressor, place the blower switch to high and move the temperature control lever to MAX. COOL. After operating for a few minutes in this manner, check the sight glass. (I) If the sight glass is clear, the magnetic clutch is engaged, the compressor discharge line is warm and the compressor inlet line is cool; the system has a full charge. (2) If the sight glass is clear, the magnetic clutch is engaged and there is no significant temperature difference between compressor inlet and discharge lines; the system has lost some refrigerant. (3) If the sight glass shows foam or bubbles, the system could be low on charge. The system has to be charged with some refrigerant.
v):
I I
MAGNETIC CLUTCH
(1) Disconnect the wiring to the magnetic clutch. (2) Connect battery (+) voltage directly to the wiring for the magnetic clutch. (3) If the magnetic clutch is normal, there will be a click. If the pulley and armature do not make contact (click), there is a malfunction.
\, 3
RECEIVER DRIER To Test the Receiver Drier

(1) Operate the unit and check the piping temperature by touching the receiver drier outlet and inlet. (2) If there is a difference in the temperatures, the receiver drier is restricted. Replace the receiver drier.
DUAL PRESSURE SWITCH (LOW PRESSURE SWITCH)

(I) Turn back the adaptor valve handle all the way and install it to the low pressure side service valve. (2) With the gauge manifold low pressure service valves closed, connect the gauge manifold high pressure side charging hose to the adaptor valve. (3) Tighten the adaptor valve handle and open the service valve. (4) If there in continuity between the dual pressure switch terminals when the low pressure side pressure is at the level of dual pressure switch ON condition shown to the L/( left, the switch is functioning normally. If not, replace the switch.
OFF 210 (30)
1 -----__-__ 235 2,100 2,700 (299) (384) (33)
Pressure Fil
2OPOOlL
1 TSB Revision
HEATERS AND MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER -
Service Adjustment Procedures 55 1 1
FIN-THERM0 SENSOR AND AIR-INLET SENSOR

(1) Disconnect the sensors connector at the evaporator case, and by using an ohmmeter, measure the resistance. If the resistance is within +I 0% of value of the characteristic curve, the sensor is functioning normally. (2) If the sensor is normal, there is a malfunction of the air conditioner control unit, and it should be replaced.
lr In et sensor <Vehicles with manual NC>
2oFoo57
UC0 3xD : c.;am $2lYX SC0 x.x xa 0 ::
:,
: :: Temperature
ii
25 cc, 77h> 20A043F
COMPRESSOR DRIVE BELT ADJUSTMENT

Refer to GROUP 11 - Engine Adjustment.
M55FJAG
CHARGING PROCEDURES
INSTALLATION OF CHARGE EQUIPMENT
M55FTAB
argq se
(I) Turn back the adaptor valve handle all the way and install each adaptor valve to the high and low pressure service valves. (2) Tighten the adaptor valve handle and open the service valves. (3) Connect the charge valve to the T-joint: (4) With the charge valve handle turned back all the way, install the service can. (5) Connect each charge equipment as illustrated. NOTE (4) Do not connect the high and low pressure sides adversely. (Connect high pressure side to the condenser and low pressure side to the evaporator.) (2) The indications DIS and SUC on the compressor indicate high and low pressure sides respectively.
20M012
TSB Revision
55-12 HEATERS AND MANUAL AIR
CONDITIONER - Service Adjustment Procedures
CHARGING SYSTEM
Hold this conditron for 5 minutes.
Gas leak check is evident 1 1
/ Refrigerant charge
The refrigerant system must have been evacuated using the previous procedure before charging. Charge using only R-12 refrigerant. R-12 is available in bulk tanks or small cans. Follow the safety precautions for handling R-12 as listed in this group.
J I I CHARGING THE REFRIGERANT

AdaDtor valve
CHARGING WITH SMALL CANS

Wh,en using disposable cans of this type, follow carefully the can manufacturers instructions. (1) Start up the vacuum pump.
Caution 1. Do not use the compressor for evacuation. 2. Do not operate the compressor in the vacuum condition; damage may occur.
Vacuum meter
20MOli lT S B I
(2) Evacuate to a vacuum reading of 100 kPa (89.5 psi) or higher (approx. IO minutes). (3) Turn back the high pressure side adaptor valve all the way and close the service valve. (4) Stop the vacuum pump and allow to stand for 5 minutes. (5) Check for leaks. (Good if the vacuum is held.) (6) Tighten the charge valve handle to puncture the service can. (7) Open the charge valve to charge the system with refrigerant. (8) When the refrigerant is no longer drawn in, turn back the low pressure side adaptor valve handle all the way and close the service valve. (9) Chack for gas leaks using a leak detector. vision
L./l
HEATERS AND MANUAL . . AIR CONDITIONER - Service AdWment proceres 55-13

(1O)Start the engine. (1l)Operate the air conditioner and set at the lowest temperature (MAX. COOL). (12)Fix the engine speed at 1,500 rpm. (13)Tighten the low pressure side adaptor valve and open the service valve to charge specified amount of refrigerant.
Caution If the service can is inverted, liquid refrigerant may be drawn into the compressor damaging it by liquid compression. Keep the service can upright to ensure that refrigerant is charged in gas state.
(14)Upon completion of charging, turn back the low pressure side adaptor valve handle all the way and close the service valve.
CHARGING WITH REFRIGERANT RECOVERY AND RECYCLING UNIT

When using refrigerant recovery and recycling unit, follow carefully the instruction manual for the unit.
REMOVAL OF CHARGE EQUIPMENT

Adaptor valve
(1) Close the charge valve: (2) Remove the adaptor valve from each service valve. (3) Remove the vacuum pump.
Charging lose \
Vacuum meter
Caution Do not remove the service can, T-joints and adaptor valves but keep them connected for next charge operation.
T-joint
20M0121
1 TSB Revision
55-14 HEATERS AND MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER - Service Adjustment
procedures
CORRECTING LOW REFRIGERANT LEVEL

(I) Install the charge valve to the service can with its handle turned back all the way. (2) Connect the charging hose to the charge valve. L&l (3) Connect the adaptor valve to the charging hose with its handle turned back all the way. (4) Tighten the charge valve handle to puncture the can. (5) Operate the adaptor valve handle to bleed air. (6) Install the adaptor valve to the low pressure side service valve.
Charge valve
rgmg hose
Refrigerant R-l 2
i /
Adaptor valve
Caution Never use the high pressure side as this may cause refrigerant to flow back, using rupture of the service can.
(7) Start the engine. (8) Operate the air conditioner and set at the lowest temperature (MAX. COOL). (9) Fix the engine speed at 1,500 rpm. (10)Open the adaptor valve and charge refrigerant checking level with the sight glass. (1 l)Upon completion of charging, close the adaptor valve and charge valve. (12)Remove the adaptor valve from the service valve. NOTE If the service can is not emptied completely, keep the charge valve and adaptor valve connected to the can for next charging.
20M0128
DISCHARGING SYSTEM
Use the refrigerant recovery unit to discharge refrigerant gas from the system.
Adaptor valve \
NOTE Refer to that Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling Unit Instruction Manual for operation of the unit.
REFILLING OF OIL IN THE AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM

Too little oil will provide inadequate compressor lubrication and cause a compressor failure. Too much oil will ,increase discharge air temperature. When a FX-105VS compressor is installed at the factory, it contains 160 cc (9.8 cu.in.) of refrigerant oil. While the air conditioning system is in operation, the oil is carried through the entire system by the refrigerant. Some of this oil will be trapped and retained in various parts of the system. When the following system components are charged, it is necessary to add oil to the system to replace the oil being removed with the component.
Condenser: 8 cc (5 cu.in.) Evaporator: 72 cc (4.4 cu.in.) Piping: 9.6 cc (6 cu.in.) Receiver drier: 6.4 cc (.4 cu.in.)
TSB Revision
Service Adjustment Procedures 55 15
PERFORMANCE TEST
M55FWAH
(I) Park the tested vehicle at the area which is not exposed to the direct sunlight. (2) Connect a tachometer. (3) Turn back the adaptor valve handle all the way and install the adaptor valves to the high pressure and low pressure service valves. (4) Connect the gauge manifold to the adaptor valves. (5) Tighten the adaptor valve handle and open the service valves. (6) Start the engine. (7) Set the controls to the air conditioner as follows: Air conditioning switch: Air conditioner - ON position Mode selection: Face position Temperature control: MAX. COOL position Air selection: Recirculation position Blower switch: HI (Fast) position (8) Adjust engine speed to 1,000 rpm with air conditioner clutch engaged. (9) Engine should be warmed up with doors, windows close, and hood open. (1O)lnsert a thermometer in the center air conditioner outlet and operate the engine for 20 minutes. (II )Note the discharge air temperature. NOTE If the clutch cycles, take the reading before the clutch disengages.
Performance Temperature Chart
L/
I I
Garage amb;in,L;amperature perature Discharge air "C tem- ("F)
21 (70) (32.0 0.0 - - 3.0 37.4)
26.7 (80) (33.8 1.0 - - 4.0 39.2)
32.2 (90) (33.8 1.0 - - 4.0 39.2)
37.8 (100) (33.8 1.0 - - 4.0 39.2)
43.3 (110) (35.6 2.0 - - 41.0) 5.0
Compressor pressure kPa discharge (psi) Compressor suction pressure kPa (psi)
(98.1 690 - - 105.3) 740 130 - 190 (18.5 - 27.5)
(110.9 780 - - 830 118.1) 130 - 190 (18.5 - 27.5)
(123.7 870 - - 920 130.9) 130 - 190 (18.5 - 27.5)
(153.6 1,080 - - 1,130 160.7) 130 - 190 (18.5 - 27.5)
(172.1 1,210 - - 1,260 179.2) 130 - 190 (18.5 - 27.5)
REFRIGERANT LEAK REPAIR PROCEDURE

LOST CHARGE
M55FHAQ
If the system has lost all charge due to a leak: (1) Evacuate the system. (See procedure.) (2) Charge the system with approximately one pound of refrigerant. (3) Check for leaks. (4) Discharge the system. (5) Repair leaks. (6) Replace receiver drier.
Caution Replacement filter-drier units must be sealed while in storage. The drier used in these units will saturate water quickly upon exposure to the atmosphere. When installing a drier, have all tools and supplies ready for quick reassembly to avoid keeping the system open any longer than necessary.
(7) Evacuate and charge the system. TSB Revision
55-16 HEATERS AND MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER LOW CHARGE
If the system has not lost all of its refrigerant charge; locate and repair all leaks. If it is necessary to increase the system pressure to find the leak (because of an especially low charge) ia add of refrigerant. If it is oossible to reoair the leak without discharging-the refrigerant system, use the procedure for correcting low refrigerant level.
HANDLING TUBING AND FITTINGS
M55FlAF
Kinks in the refrigerant tubing or sharp bends in the refrigerant hose lines will greatly reduce the capacity of the entire system. High pressures are produced in the system when it is operating. Extreme care must be exercised to make sure that all connections are pressure tight. Dirt and moisture can enter the system when it is opened for repair or replacement of lines or components. The following precautions must be observed. The system must be completely discharged before opening any fitting of connection in the refrigeration system. Open fittings with caution even after the system has been discharged. If any pressure is noticed as a fitting is loosened, allow trapped pressure to bleed off very slowly. Never attempt to rebend formed lines to fit. Use the correct line for the installation you are servicing. A good rule for the flexible hose lines is keep the radius of all bends at least 10 times the diameter of the hose. Sharper bends will reduce the flow of refrigerant. The flexible hose lines should be routed so that they are at least 80 mm (3 in.) from the exhaust manifold. It is good practice to inspect all flexible hose lines at least once a year to make sure they are in good condition and properly routed. \ Aj i Unified plumbing connections with O-rings. These O-rings are not reusable. I
COMPRESSOR NOISE
M55FlAD
When investigating an air conditioning related noise, you must first know the conditions when the noise occurs. These conditions are: weather, vehicle speed, in gear on neutral, engine temperature or any other special conditions. Noises that develop during air conditioning operation can often be misleading. For example: what sounds like a failed front bearing or connecting rod. may be caused by loose bolts, nuts, mounting brackets, or a loose clutch assembly. Verify accessory drive belt tension (power steering or alternator). Improper accessory drive belt tension can cause a misleading noise when the compressor is engaged and little or no noise when the compressor is disengaged. Drive belts are speed sensitive. That is, at different engine speeds, and depending upon belt tension, belts can develop unusual noises that are often mistaken for mechanical problems within the compressor.
TSB Revision
HEATERS AND MANUAL AIR CbNDlTlONER -
Service Adjustment Procedures 55 17
ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES
(1) Select a quiet area for testing. Duplicate conditions as much as possible. Switch compressor on and off several times to clearly identify compressor noise. To duplicate high ambient conditions (high head pressure), restrict air flow through condenser. Install manifold gauge set to make sure discharge pressure doesnt exceed 2,070 kPa (300 psi). (2) Tighten all compressor mounting bolts, clutch mounting bolt, and compressor drive belt. Check to assure clutch coil is tight (no rotation or wobble). (3) Check refrigerant hoses for rubbing or interference that can cause unusual noises. (4) Check refrigerant charge. (See Charging System.) (5) Recheck compressor noise as in Step 1. (6) If noise still exists, loosen compressor mounting bolts and retorque. Repeat Step 1. (7) If noise continues, replace compressor and repeat Step 1.
POWER RELAY CHECK
MBBFNAK
(1) Remove the radiator fan motor relays (HI) and (LO) from the relay box on the right of the engine compartment. (2) Remove the radiator fan motor relay (air conditioner), condenser fan motor relays (HI) and (LO), and airconditioner compressor relay from the relay box on the left of the engine compartment. (3) Remove the blower motor relay from the junction box. (4) Remove the blower motor HI relay from the blower case assembly. (5) Check the continuity between terminals using a circuit tester.
J Blower m.otor HI relay
2OFOO6l
IDLE-UP OPERATION CHECK
M55FOAB
(1) Before inspection and adjustment set vehicle in the following condition: l Engine coolant temperature: 80 - 95C (176 - 203F) l Lights, electric cooling fan and accessories: Set to OFF l Transaxle: Neutral (N or P for vehicles with A/T) l Steering wheel: Straightforward (2) Check to be sure that the idling speed becomes the standard value when the air conditioner switch is switched ON and the air conditioner is activated.
Standard value: 900 + 100 rpm

NOTE There is no necessity to make an adjustment, because the idling speed is automatically adjusted by the ISC system. If, however, there occurs a deviation from the standard value for some reason, check the ISC system. ISC: Idle Speed Control
1 TSB Revision
55-I 8
HEATERS AND MANUAL
AIR CONDlTlONER - Heater Control Assembly

M55GA-A
HEATER CONTROL ASSEMBLY

ii, Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation

l
Removal and installation of Floor Console (Refer to GROUP 52A- Floor Console.)
I I I
Removal steps 1. Stopper 2. Glove box outer case assembly ** 3. Connection of the air-selection control wire 4. Ho01 lock release handle 5. Rheostat assembly 6. Rear wiper &washer switch 7. Knee protector 8. Shower duct l * 9. Connection of the mode control wire l * 10. Connection of the temperature control wire a* 11. Center air outlet assembly 12. Heater control assembly
2OFOO78
M55GBAMl
11. REMOVAL OF CENTER AIR OUTLET ASSEMBLY

Disengaging the clips (2 positions) of the center air outlet assembly with a flat tip screwdriver, remove the center air outlet assembly with the trim stick.
II
2OFOO3
TSB Revision
HEATERS AND MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER - Heater cmrol *=mW INSPECTION
55-19
M55GCAI
BLOWER SWITCH Operate the switch, and check the continuity between the terminals.
o-0 indicates that there is continuity between the terminals.
NOTE
20A040f
M55GDAQ
10. INSTALLATION OF TEMPERATURE CONTROL WIRE Connect the temperature control wire to the blend air damper lever by following the steps below. (1) Move the temperature control lever to the rightmost position. (HOT position) (2) With the blend air damper lever pressed completely downward in the direction indicated by the arrow, connect the inner cable of the temperature control wire to the end of the blend air damper lever, and then secure the outer cable by using a clip. 9. INSTALLATION OF MODE SELECTION CONTROL WIRE Connect the mode selection control wire to the mode selection damper lever by following the steps below. (1) Move the mode selection lever to the $$ position. (2) With the mode selection damper lever pressed inward in the direction indicated by the arrow, connect the inner cable of the mode selection control wire to the end of the mode selection lever, and then secure the outer cable by using a clip. 3. INSTALLATION OF AIR SELECTION CONTROL WIRE Connect the air selection control wire to the air selection damper lever by following the steps below. (1) Move the air selection control lever to the &ZI position. (2) With the air selection damper lever pressed inward in the direction indicated by the arrow, connect the inner cable of the air selection control wire to the end of the air selection lever, and then secure the outer cable by using a clip.
TSB Revision
55-20 HEATERS AND MANUAL AIR CONDlTlONER RESISTOR, BELT LOCK CONTROLLER
- Resistor, Belt Lock Controller
M55JA-
vi
Removal steps
1. Stoooer 2. Globk box outer case assembly 3. Resistor 4. Under cover 5. Belt lock controller
2OFOO73
INSPECTION
hl55JCAD
RESISTOR CHECK Using a circuit tester, measure the resistance between the terminals indicated below. The condition can be considered satisfactory if the value measured at this time is equivalent to the standard value. Standard value Terminals measured Between terminals a-- @ Between terminals @ -@ Between terminals @ - @
Standard value fi
Approx. 1.79 - 2.06 Approx. 1 .I 0 - 1.26 Approx. 0.38 - 0.44
TSB I I-2OPOOl
vision
HEATERS AND MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER - Air Condikner Switch
55-21
M55QA- *
AIR CONDITIONER SWITCH

L
1
I I\ L!Y,~ s/
Removal steps
1. Center air outlet assembly 2. Air conditioner switch
I/J
2OFOO95
M55QBAH
1. REMOVAL OF CENTER AIR OUTLET ASSEMBLY Disengaging the clips (2 positions) of the center air outlet assembly with a flat tip screwdriver, remove the center air outlet assembly with the trim stick.
l-----L-
2. REMOVAL OF AIR CONDITIONER SWITCH Remove the center air outlet assembly, and insert hand to the back of the cluster panel assembly through the produced opening. Push it toward you for removal.
INSPECTION
AIR CONDITIONER SWITCH CHECK
M55QCAD
OFF If pressed 1 step (ECONOMY) 0

light
/ L/
20A018I
If pressed 2 steps (Air conditioner)
NOTE
(1) The O-O symbol indicates continuity (2) *: <Indication light>
TSB Revision
55-22
HEATERS AND MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER - Heater Unit

M551A-
HEATER UNIT
Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation l Draining and Supplying of the Coolant

l
(Refer to GROUP 11 -Service Adjustment Procedures.) Removal and Installation of the Floor Console and Instrument Panel (Refer to GROUP 52A- Floor Console and Instrument Panel.)
-6
x
2OFO104
Removal steps
d2
3. 2. 1. Connection Center Under cover reinforcement of water hoses 4. Distribution duct (foot) 5. Foot shower duct 6. Lap cooler duct 7. Evaporator mounting bolt and nut <Vehicles \ Nith air conditioner> 8. Center duct 9. Heater unit 10. Plate 11. Heater core
M551BAS
7. REMOVAL OF EVAPORATOR MOUNTING BOLT <Vehicles with. manual air conditioner> NOTE In order to prevent bolts from falling into the blower assembly, set the inside/outside air-selection damper to the position that permits outside air introduction.
INSPECTION
l l
M55lCAJ
Check the operation of dampers and link mechanism. Check the heater core for clogging and water leakage.
1 TSB Revision
HEATERS AND MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER - Blower Assembly
55-23
M55KA- _
BLOWER ASSEMBLY
/
2OFOO79
Removal steps of blower case assembly
1. Stopper 2. Glove box 3. Glove box outer case assembly 4. Under cover 5. Lower frame 6. Evaporator mounting bolt and nut <Vehicles with air conditioner> l a 7. Connection of the air-selection wire 8. Side frame 9. Blower assembly *+ 10. Blower motor assembly 11. Blower case assembly
Removal steps of blower motor assembly
l
4. Under cover * 10. Blower motor assembly
TSB Revision
55-24
HEATERS AND MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER - Blower Assembly INSPECTION

l l l l l
M55KCAM
Check for bending or abnormal deflection of the rotating I shaft of the blower motor assembly. Check for cracking or deterioration of the packing. d Check for damage to the fan. Check for damage to the blower case. Check the operation of the inside/outside air-selection damper, and for damage.
BLOWER MOTOR ASSEMBLY CHECK (1) Disconnect the blower motor terminals. (2) Connect the blower motor terminals directly to the battery and check that the blower motor operates smoothly. (3) Next, reverse the polarity and check that the blower motor operates smoothly in the reverse direction.
16LO28C
M55KDAH
10. INSTALLATION OF BLOWER MOTOR ASSEMBLY Before installing the blower motor assembly, carefully clean away any dust, dirt, etc. adhering to the inner surface of the blower case.
7. INSTALLATION OF AIR SELECTION CONTROL WIRE Connect the air selection control wire to the air selection damper lever by following the steps below. (1) Move the air selection control lever to the CQ position. (2) With the air selection damper lever pressed inward in the direction indicated by the arrow, connect the inner cable of the air selection control wire to the end of the air selection lever, and then secure the outer cable by using a clip.
TSB Revision
HEATERS AND MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER - Evaporator
55-25
M55RA-
EVAPORATOR
9.0- 11 Nm 7.0 - 8.0 ftlbs.
O-ring
Removal steps
l *
I, Connection of liquid pipe and suction hose 2. O-ring 3. Drain hose 4. Stopper 5. Glove box 6. Glove box outer case assembly 7. Under cover 8. Lower frame 9. A/C control unit 10. Evaporator

l l
Discharge and Charging of Refrigerant Removal and lns~allation of Battery
M55RBAl
1. DISCONNECTION OF LIQUID PIPE AND SUCTION HOSE If the hoses or pipes are disconnected, cap the hoses or pipes with a blank plug to prevent entry of dust, dirt, and water.
INSPECTION
l l l
M55RcAD
Check for damage of the evaporator fin part. Check for damage or collapse of the drain hose. Check for peeling or cracking of the insulator. FIN-THERM0 SENSOR AND AIR-INLET SENSOR CHECK For information concerning the checking procedures, refer to P.55-11.
TSB Revision
55-26
HEATERS AND MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER - Evaporator

M55RE- -
Compressor oil: Freol S-83 or Suniso 5GS
10
9
Disassembly steps 4* 1. Clips
4*
2. Evaporater case (upper) 3. Fin therm0 sensor 4. AirInlet sensor <Vehicles with manual air conditioner> 5. Evaporator case (lower) 6. Evaporator assembly 7. Grommet 8. Insulator 9. Rubber insulator 10. Clip 11. Expansion valve
2OFOO40
M55RFAJ
1. REMOVAL OF CLIPS Remove the clips with a screwdriver covered with a shop towel to prevent damage to case surfaces.
11. REMOVAL OF EXPANSION VALVE Loosen the flare nut by using two wrenches (for both the inlet and outlet).
TSB Revision
HEATERS AND MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER - Compressor
55-27
M55SA-
COMPRESSOR /
l
Post-installation
l
Discharge of the Refrigerant (Refer to P.55-14.)
Adjustment of the Compressor Drive Belt (Refer to GROUP 11 Service Adjustment Procedures.) Charging of Refrigerant (Refer to P.55-11.)
Operation
21 Nm 15 ftlbs.
9.0 Nm 7.Oft.lbs. \
iJ
45 Nm 33 ft.lbs.
Removal steps a* 1. Compressor drive belt
4*
2. Condenser fan motor assembly 3. Connection of suction hose and discharge
41) l + 4. !%znator (Refer to GROUP l6-Alternator.) *I) l * 5. Compressor 6. Idler pulley 7. Compressor bracket !I zorr-rion pulley assembly ; ;: Fontsion pulley
5
2ONOO89
12. Adjustment plate 13. Tension pulley bracket
TSB Revision
55-28
HEATERS AND MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER - Comtxessor SERVICE POINTS OF REMOVAL

M55SBAE
1. REMOVAL OF COMPRESSOR DRIVE BELT (1) Loosen bolt A for holding the tension pulley. (2) Loosen bolt B for adjustment, and remove the J compressor drive belt. 3. REMOVAL OF SUCTION HOSE AND DISCHARGE HOSE If the hoses are disconnected, cap the hoses with a blank plug to prevent entry of dust, dirt, and water. 5. REMOVAL OF COMPRESSOR Caution Lay the towel on the brake tube to protect them. When install the compressor, do not damage the brake tubes. This work must be done carefully so as not to spill the compressor oil.
INSPECTION
l l l l l
M55SCAE
Checking for heat damage of the tension pulley. Check for excessive play or deflection of the tension pulley. Check for unusual wear of the tension pulley. Check for hardening of the air conditioner belt. \ Check for unusual wear or abrasion of the air conditioner , d belt.
OPERATION CHECK OF THE COMPRESSORS MAGNETIC CLUTCH (1) Connect terminal @ at the compressor side to the positive (+) terminal of the battery, and ground the negative (-) terminal of the battery to the compressor. (2) The condition of the compressors magnetic clutch can be considered satisfactory if the operation sound (a click sound) of the magnetic clutch can be heard when this check is made.

20F0067
M55SDAF
5. INSTALLATION OF COMPRESSOR If a new compressor is installed, first adjust the amount of oil according to the procedures described below, and then install the compressor. (1) Measure the amount (X cc) of oil within the removed compressor. (2) Wipe away (from the new compressor) the amount of oil calculated according to the following formula, and then install the new compressor. New compressor oil amount 160 cc (9.8 cu.in.) - X cc = Y cc NOTE l/j Y cc indicates the amount of oil in the refrigerant line, the condenser, the cooling unit, etc.
TSB Revision
HEATERS AND MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER - Compressor DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY
55-29
M55SE- -
16 15
2OFOO97
Magnetic clutch disassembly steps
Control valve disassembly
1. Bolts 2. Pulley l * l * 3. Nut l * 4. Armature plate gI i;yirring * 7. Snap ring F* 8. Clutch coil 9. Shims
l
13. Snap ring 14. Control valve

Thermostat and revolution pick up sensor disassembly steps
15. Plate 16. Thermostat and revolution pick up sensor
High pressure relief valve disassembly steps
10. Cover 11. Dust cover 12. High pressure relief valve
TSB Revision

~

3. REMOVAL OF NUT Use the special tool to loosen the nut,
MSlSFAE
INSPECTION
l l
M55SGAB
Check the surface of the armature for scoring or bluing. Check the surface of the rotor for scoring or bluing. l Check the sealing surfaces for cracks, scratches and deformation. 0 Check the front housing for cracks or scoring on the sealing surfaces. l Check the compressor shaft for scoring.
Spring Valve ompressor
2OPO286
HIGH PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE CHECK The high pressure relief valve is a safety feature which releases part of the refrigerant inside the system into the atmosphere when the high pressure level exceeds 3,550 kPa (505 psi) during air conditioner operation. Once the pressure inside the system has been reduced to 2,400 kPa (341 psi) or lower, the high pressure relief valve closes, thus allowing continued operation. (1) If a leak is detected at section A, replace the high pressure relief valve. The valve can be used unless there is a leak from that section. (2) If a leak is detected at section B, retighten the valve. If the leak still persists after retightening the valve, replace the packing.
L&J (
THERMOSTAT CHECK (1) Dip the thermostat in engine oil. (2) Check for continuity across terminals @ and @ when the engine oil is heated. Standard value: Continuity at approx. 110C (230F) or less at A point , No continuity at approx. 155C (311F) or more at B point II;
TSB Revision
55-31
REVOLUTION PICK UP SENSOR CHECK Measure the resistance between terminals @ and @ of the connector. Normal resistance: 405 + 35 R when ambient temperature is 20C (68F) If the measurement deviates greatly from the above resistance, replace the revolution pick up sensor assembly.
20N003d
2OFOO96
I E c-3 3 180 ?+I! (25) z z h 3 4
\ * Engine speed rpm

2OPO2S
CONTROL VALVE CHECK The control valve detects a low pressure level during the operation of the air conditioner, and adjusts the amount of refrigerant to be bypassed. (1) Operate the air conditioner under a high temperature load condition (when vehicle interior temperature is high). (2) Connect a low pressure gauge to the air compressor. (3) Operate the air conditioner with the engine running at idle. (4) Gradually increase the engine speed while observing the low pressure gauge. If the valve is normal, the low pressure drops slowly as the engine speed increases until a pressure of 180 kPa (25 psi) is reached, at which point the pressure temporarily ceases to drop. Then, the pressure again starts dropping as the engine speed further increases. If the valve is abnormal, the low pressure drops in direct proportion to the increase in engine speed without a temporary leveling off at the 180 kPa (25 psi) pressure level. If the low pressure drops like this, replace the control valve.
M556HAF
8. INSTALLATION OF CLUTCH COIL Align the pin of the clutch coil with the pin hole in the front housing, and then fit it into the hole.
7. INSTALLATION OF SNAP RING Install the snap ring so that the tapered surface is at the outer side.
\
Crankshaft
Tapered part
20A0157
1 TSB Revision
55-32
HEATERS AND MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER - Comrxessor

4. INSTALLATION OF ARMATURE PLATE Align the mating mark of the crankshaft spline and the mating mark of the armature plate, and then fit them %(J together.
no spline -
3. INSTALLATION OF NUT (I) Use the special tool to tighten the nut.
Feeler gauge
(2) Check whether or not the air gap of the clutch is within the standard value. Standard value: 0.4 - 0.6 mm (.Ol - .02 in.) NOTE If there is a deviation of the air gap from the standard value, make the necessary adjustment by adjusting the d 1 number of shims.
1 TSB Revision
HEATERS AND MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER - ::dE:; and Condenser
55-33
MFSTA-A
CONDENSER AND CONDENSER FAN MOTOR

REMOVAL AND IlilSTALLATlON
id
f
l l
: Piplng connection
Discharge and Charging of the Refrigerant Removal and lnsiallation of the Alternator (Refey to GROUP 16 -Alternator.) @ d-ring 0-ring 20N0089
6
9-11 Nm 7.0 - 8.0 ftlbs.
9
Removal steps
23Nm 17 ft.lbs.
1. Condenser fan motor asset-r 2. Fan 3. Motor assembly 4. Shroud w w 5. Radiator motor assembly (Refer to fan GROUP 14 Radiator.)
4*
9.0 7.0 ft.lbs. Nm
2OFOO28
l *
6. 7. 8. 9.
Insulator installation bolts Liquid pipe A and liquid pipe B Condenser Bushings
M!XTEtAC
7. REMOVAL OF LIQUID PIPE A AND LIQUID HOSE B

(1) Loosen the flare nut by using two wrenches. (2) Plug the disconnected hose and pipes and the openings of the condenser in order to prevent dust, dirt and other foreign material from entering.
TSB Revision
55-34
HEATERS AND MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER - :t%%: and Condenser

8. REMOVAL OF CONDENSER Move the radiator toward the engine, and then remove the condenser upward. d
INSPECTION
l l l
M55TCAK
Check the condenser fan for crushing or other damage. Check the condensers high-pressure hose and pipe installation parts for damage or deformation. Check the condenser fan shroud for damage.
CONDENSER FAN MOTOR CHECK (1) Apply battery voltage to terminal @and ground terminal 8; at this time, check that the condenser fan motor turns. (2) Apply battery voltage to terminal @and ground terminal 0; at this time, check that the condenser fan motor turns.
TSB Revision
HEATERS AND MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER - Rdrigerant Line
55-35
M55UA- -
REFRIGERANT LINE /
L;
l
1
Discharge and Charging of Refrigerant (Refer to P.55-14, 11.)
1
: Piping connection
Removal steps a* 1. High-pressure hose

l *
O-ring O-ring
20N0089
2. High-pressure pipe 3. Liquid pipe A 4. Liquid pipe B 5. Low-pressure hose B 6. Low-pressure hose A 7. Receiver bracket 8. Receiver 9. Dual-pressure switch
13 Nm 9.0 ft.lbs. 9.0- 11 Nm 7.0 - 8.0 ft.lbs. \
TE NUT I 1.111 9.0 ft.lbs.
23 Nm 17 ft.lbs. -
\-
7.0 - 8.0 ft.lbs.
/ q
Ill
2OFOO68

Loosen the flare nut ,by using two wrenches.
MIBUBAC
1. REMOVAL OF HIGH-PRESSURE HOSE / 2. HIGHPRESSURE PIPE
INSPECTION
CHECKING DUAL PRESSURE SWITCH
MHUCAD
For information concerning the checking procedures of the dual pressure switch, refer to Service Adjustment Procedures on P.55-10.
1 TSB Revision
55-36 HEATERS AND MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER VENTILATORS (INSTRUMENT PANEL)

Ventilators (Instrument Panel)
M55YA-
Ij I
-16
I I .I
/4
I
2OFOO55
Removal steps
1. Knee protector (Refer to GROUP 52A-Instrument Panel.) 2. Foot shower duct 3. Lap cooler duct 4. Under cover 5. Belt lock controller 6. Side defroster hoses A 7. Duct (Vehicles without air conditioner) ** l + 8. instrument panel (Refer to GROUP 52Ainstrument Panel.) 9. Center duct 10. Air duct (right side) 11. Air duct (left side)
l * +a
12. Distribution duct (center) 13. Defroster duct 14. Side defroster hoses B 15. Defroster garnishes 16. Photo sensor 17. Center air outlet assembly 18. Side air outlet assembly 19. Distribution duct (foot)
TSB Revision
Ventilators (Instrument Panel)
55-37
M55YBAH
15. REMOVAL OF DEFROSTER GARNISHES Using the trim stick, remove the defroster garnishes from the instrument panel.
16. REMOVAL OF PHOTO SENSOR Using the trim stick, remove the photo sensor from the defroster garnish.
17. REMOVAL OF CENTER AIR OUTLET ASSEMBLY Disengaging the clips (2 positions) of the center air-outlet assembly with a flat tip screwdriver, remove the center air outlet assembly with the trim stick.
2OFOO321
1 TSB Revision
55-38
Ventilators (Air Inlet - and Air Outlet)

M55YD.
VENTILATORS (AIR INLET AND AIR OUTLET)

:LI
I I
d I
inlet garnishes removal steps
1. Windshield wiper arm 2. Front deck garnish 3. Inlet garnish (right) 4. Inlet garnish (left)
Rear ventilation duct removal steps
I I
**
5. Rear ventilation duct A 6. Side air dam (side sill) (Refer to GROUP 51 - Aero Parts.) 7. Rear ventilation duct B
1 TSB Revision
Z!&E%Ltch
55-39
M55xA-
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SWITCH

l
Draining and Refilling of Engine Coolant (Refer to GROUP 00 - Maintenance Service.)
Sealant: 3M Nut Locking Part No. 4171 or equivalent
1. Engine coolant temperature switch
INSPECTION
MSSXCAA
BQQQQQ
20A0199
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SWITCH (ALWAYSCLOSED TYPE CHECK) (1) Immerse the engine coolant temperature switch in oil and heat by a gas stove or similar method so as to increase the oil temperature. (2) Check to be sure that the engine coolant temperature switch is switched OFF when the oil temperature reaches the standard value. Standard value: 112 - 118C (233 - 244F) Caution Use engine oil for this test; stir it well while heating, and do not heat more than necessary.
1 TSB Revision
55-40
FULL AUTO AIR CONDITIONER - Troubleshooting
FULL AUTO AIR CONDITIONER

TROUBLESHOOTING
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE
(1) Check that the air ducts and rods are not off. (2) Check that connectors are properly connected and fuses are not blown. (3) Using an analog voltmeter or multi-use tester, check diagnosis outputs. If failure code is being output, check the failing system and repair as necessary. (Refer to Diagnosis Display Patterns and Codes on P.55-55.) (4) If the diagnosis outputs are normal, check for terminal voltage or continuity with a circuit tester according to the troubleshooting chart by symptom. (Refer to control unit terminal voltages on P.55-45 - 52.) (5) In carrying out the troubleshooting procedure, first look up the Troubleshooting Quick-Reference Chart to know the inspection items and then start the insoection orocedure detailed in the following pages. (6) When checking components, be sure to disconnect the connectors first.
M55ECAF
TROUBLESHOOTING QUICK-REFERENCE CHART - Symptom
z 3 E c-lcm 85 LQ g c . 0 SO 0s E $3 0
Inspection item Air conditioner does not operate when the ignition
I.%? 0 (i; 0 z s 5 -
-z b ij 2 s -? a F & I 0 0 0
5 5 n > F 8 b 5.F .$8 0 : G 0 G is z G-
7 i ; i f
1E 5 z iTI a, I?z :5g .?< 13 t;$ .! zg
Y s 5 76 4 -
4 L? c tE; 2 -
3 a0 -
b 72 5 6 f 5
G E 8 6 E & 3 -0 a 2 1 z 6 : 1 D -
i? i?! b ii z? E 0 -
.k ? alL -0s v, 0 SE 95 an UE ma 0
;(:2 if2:: zzii3 z i; t2% 5;s 5jE 1.0 Td ;g 1 C5E -
T-
- - b 5 E 5 & is * s 0 5 .T B z3 ?? ;i; b E c z 5 -
: ,, ,
252 cn s
k = e E 00 t: 0 +i -
LJ
not raise even the air conditioner is operating (Nowarm air coming out). 3 Interior temperature does not lower even the air conditioner is operating (No cold air coming out). Blower motor does not rotate. Blower motor does not stop rotating.
z G-
- - 0
G 0 -
a G 0
-
4 5
0 0 0
0.
G -
3 -
6 Inside/outside-air selector damper does not operate. 7 8 Outlet selector damper does not operate. Condenser fan does not operate when the air conditioner is activated.
0 G s
0 -
s s -
- - - - - - - - G - - - - - I ~ L/, I
9 Air-conditioner graphic display does not function correctly. IO Set temperature returns to 25C (122F) when the ignition switch is turned ON and OFF.
- - NOTE (1) 0 indicates the component requiring inspection. (Numbers in 0 are the priority order.) (2) Use an analog voltmeter or multi-use tester to check the control unit.
TSB Revision
5 -
FULL AUTO AIR CONDITIONER - Troubleshootina

Symptom 4ir conditioner does lot operate when the gnition switch in the 3N position. nterior temperature lees not raise No warm air coming 1ut). Probable cause Open-circuited power circuit harness Defective control panel Defective air conditioner control unit Defective room-temperature sensor input circuit Defective air mix damper potentiometer input circuit Defective air mix damper drive motor Incorrect engagement of air mix damper drive motor lever and air mix damper Sticking air mix damper Open-circuited harness between air mix damper drive motor and air conditioner control unit Defective control panel Defective air conditioner control unit nterior temperature Aoes not lower No cold air coming ,ut). Defective room-temperature sensor input circuit Defective outside-air-temperature sensor input circuit Defective air therm0 sensor input circuit Defective refrigerant-temperature sensor input circuit Defective air mix damper potentiometer input circuit Defective photo sensor Defective air mix damper drive motor Incorrect engagement of air mix damper drive motor lever and air mix damper Sticking air mix damper Open-circuited harness between air mix damper drive motor and air conditioner control unit Open-circuited harness between photo sensor and air conditioner control unit Defective air-conditioner compressor relay in the relay box Replace photo sensor. Replace air mix damper drive motor. Engage correctly. Replace air mix damper drive motor. Engage correctly. Remedy Correct harness. Replace control panel. Check diagnosis output. Check diagnosis output. Replace defective parts.
55-41
Ref. page
55-56 55-56 55-55
55-58
Correct air mix damper. Correct harness.
Replace control panel. Replace air conditioner control unit. Check diagnosis output. Replace defective parts.
55-56 55-56 55-55
55-60 55-58
Correct air mix damper. Correct harness.
Correct harness.
Replace.
TSB Revision
55-42
d,
Open-circuited harness between ower transistor and air conditioner
Correct harness.
I LA
ective air conditioner control
I
Defective air conditioner control
I I
Id
TSB Revision

JO 6
55-43
Ref. page 55-56 55-56
Symptom Inside/outside-air selector damper does not operate. Outlet selector damper does not operate.
Probable cause Defective control panel Defective air conditioner control unit Defective outlet selector damper potentiometer input circuit Defective outlet selector drive motor Incorrect engagement of outlet selector drive motor and outlet selector damper Malfunctioning DEF., FACE, and FOOT damper Open-circuited harness between outlet selector motor and control unit Defective control panel Defective air conditiner control unit
Remedy Replace control panel. Replace air conditioner control unit. Check diagnosis output. Replace defective parts. Replace outlet selector drive motor. Engage correctly.
Correct DEF., FACE, and FOOT damper. Correct harness. Replace control panel. Replace air conditioner control unit. Replace power relay. Replace water temperature switch. Replace condenser fan motor. Correct harness. I Replace control panel. Replace air conditioner control unit. Correct harness. Replace air conditioner control unit. 55-56 I 55-56 55-56 I I I GROUP 14 55-33 I 55-56 55-56 I I
Condenser fan does not operate when the air conditioner is activated.
Defective condenser fan motor relay Defective water temperature switch Defective condenser fan motor
s Air-conditioner graphic display does not function correctly
Open-circuited harness between control panel and air conditioner control unit Defective control panel Defective air conditioner control unit
IO Set temperature returns to 25C (112F) when the ignition switch is turned ON and OFF. -
Open-circuited power circuit harness Defective air conditioner control unit
TSB Revision
55-44
READING THE CIRCUIT AND UNIT CHECK
3. hvqection Of compartment-temperature sensor, outside-air-temperature sensor, and air thermo sensor circuits
Air condMner compressor relay
- Connectors are keyed by terminal numbers.
Compartment temperatre 93SCN
Fin XSCH
0utsrde.w temperature XSOl
oubleshooting Hints
Dlagnosrs No. 11, 12 [Fix compartment temperature sensor input signal at 25C (77F).] No. 13. 14 [Fix outside-air-temperature sensor input signal at 15C (59F).] No. 21, 22 [Fix fin therm0 sensor input signal at -2C (-356F).] Air conditioner control unit terminal voltages ermrnal No. 5 10 16 17 A Slgnal name Outside-air-temperature sensor Sensor power source Compartment temperature sensor Fin therm0 sensor Conditron Temperature at sensor 25C (77F) (4 kf2) Normally Tkmperature at sensor 25C (77F) (4 k0) Temperature at sensor 25C (77F) (4 k0) when alr conditioner is OFF 1 ITerrmnal voltage 2.2-2.8V 4.8 - 5.2 V 2.3-2.9v 2.3 - 2.9 V 4
Indicates the diagnosis output code nur6be.r and system condition when the code is output.
Indicates the terminal number to be checked.
Indicates the condition at terminal check.
Indicates the specification criteria. Where no condition is given in the Condition column, the normal specification value is given.
TSB Revision
FULL AUTO AIR CONDITIONER - Troubleshooting CIRCUIT AND BENCH CHECK

i
1 1. Inspection of air conditioner control unit power source circuit 1
lgnition swiitch 1 (IG2)
Juncti on block
C :
2:E
I:
Q
, L
~ B27 u
i I
28 6 r - - - 17---. 6- -
r-7\--7
A Y
Power source 1
I I Air-conditioner control unit

2OFOO61
Troubleshooting Hints
l
Air conditioner control unit terminal voltage Terminal No. 3 28, 36 27, 35 Signal name Backup power source Air conditioner control unit power source Air conditioner control unit ground Normally Ignition switch ON Normally Condition Terminal voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage ov
1 TSB Revision
55-46
2. Inspection of potentiometer circuit
Outlet selector
i command c~rcutl ND conversion WCl, \,
a 8 .
Y[ \/ lo
c!
2-
2 4 t 3
Air mix damper potentiometer
1 ~
z=e
4 7 7 4 ;t 1
Comparator & I
A/D conversvm CllCUll 1.y
Outlet selector damper potentiometer
2OFOO57
Troubleshooting Hints l Diagnosis No. 31 (Fix air mix damper at MAX. HOT position, or at MAX. COOL position when it is at MAX. COOL position.) No. 32 (Fix outlet selector damper at FACE position, or at FACE pgsition when it is at FACE position.) l Air conditioner control unit terminal voltages
Sensor power source
Normally
4.8 - 5.2 V
TSB Revision
FULL AUTO AIR CONDITIONER - Troubleshootinn
55-47
3. Inspection of compartment-temperature sensor, outside-air-temperature sensor, and air therm0 sensor circuits
Air conditioner compressor relay Air conditioner control unit
A~rconditlonercompiessor command arllhmew ctrcut c Controlled variable # I Controlled variable
Sensor powersource A/D conversion
I II
J ?
Compartment temperarure sensor Fin sensor Outside air temperature sensor
2OFOO60
Troubleshooting Hints l Diagnosis No. 11, 12 [Fix compartment temperature sensor input signal at 25C (77F). No. 13, 14 [Fix outside-air-temperature sensor input signal at 15C (59Fj.I No. 21, 22 [Fix fin therm0 sensor input signal at -2C (-35.6FJ.l l Air conditioner control unit terminal voltages Terminal No. 5
10 16
Signal name Outside-air-temperature sensor Sensor power source Compartment temperature sensor Fin therm0 sensor
Condition Temperature at sensor 25C (77F) (4 klR) Normally Temperature at sensor 25C (77F) (4 klR) Temperature at sensor 25C (77F) (4 k0) when air conditioner is OFF
Terminal voltage
2.2 - 2.8 V 4.8 - 5.2 V 2.3 - 2.9 V 2.3 - 2.9 V
17
TSB Revision
55-48
[
4. Inspection of water-temperature sensor and photo sensor circuits (
<Water temperature sensor>
<Photo sensor>
Air conditioner control panel A I

Solar radmtmn compensating ClrCit # A/D convertion
Each sensor &
Air control panel .L .
Fin speed arlthmetIC ClrCUlt t ND convemon
{ f*)- Potentiometer > / \/ \, 9 Air conditioner a 7 control unit Water temperature sensor m b Damper drive motor
2010043
I-
Troubleshooting Hints
l
Air conditioner control unit terminal voltages Terminal No.

19
Signal name Photo sensor 0
Condition
Terminal voltage
llluminance 100,000 lux or more llluminance less than 0 Iux
-0.1 to -0.2 v ov ov Battery voltage 0V
20 9
Photo sensor 0 Water-temperature sensor 0
Normally Switch OFF [Engine coolant temperature less than 50C (122F)] Switch ON [Engine coolant temperature 50C (122F) or higher]
1 TSB Revision

5. Inspection of belt lock controller circuit
55-49
Compressor relay t Air conditioner control unit
Air condltloner Air conditioner + , c compressor command . arithmetic circuit control panel
AH condmoner compressor ON
stgnal
Comparator
Air condltloner compressor ON signal

20 FOO58
Revolution pickup sensor
Li
Troubleshooting Hints l Air conditioner control unit terminal voltages

Terminal No. Signal
name
Compressor
Condition ON
Terminal voltage IO V to battery voltage
11
Air conditioner output
TSB Revision
55-50
6. Inspection of air mix damper, outlet selector damper, inside/outside-air selector damper drive motor circuits
<Air mix damper drive motor>
Air conditioner control panel
Air conditioner control panel /h
Outside
air
f :nsor
Damper drive motor \\ 6

20N0048
<Outlet selector damper drive motor> Air conditioner control panel Air conditioner control unit Potentiomet
23
20N0099
1 TSB Revision

<Inside/outside air selector damper drive motor> Air conditioner control unit Air conditioner h control panel
Insideloutslde atr control ClrCUlt
55-51
Comparator
20NO098
Ezz3
1
Inside/outside air selector 2 damper drive motor

Terminal No. 22 Signal name Inside/outside-air selector damper drive motor 0 Condition Inside-air switch ON (Output turns OFF 40 seconds after the damper moved to inside air position.) Outside-air switch ON (Output turns OFF 40 seconds after the damper moved to outside air position.) 23 $ot~kt~lector damper drive FACE switch ON (Output turns OFF 40 seconds after the damper moved to FACE position.) DEF. switch ON (Output turns OFF 40 seconds after the damper moved to DEF. position.) 24 Inside/outside-air selector damper drive motor 0 Inside-air switch ON (Output turns OFF 40 seconds after inside air has been activated.) Outside-air switch ON (Output turns OFF 40 seconds after outside air has been activated.) 25 Air mix damper drive motor 0 Temperature is set at 17C (62.6F). (Output turns OFF 40 seconds after the damper moved to MAX. COOL position.) Temperature is set at 32.5C (90.5F). (Output turns OFF40 seconds after the damper moved to MAX. HOT position.) 31 Air mix damper drive motor 0 Temperature is set at 17C (62.6F). (Output turns OFF 40 seconds after the damper moved to MAX. COOL position.) Temperature is set at 32.5C (90.5F). (Output turns OFF 40 seconds after the damper moved to MAX. HOT position.) 32 PO;:; Elector damper drive Terminal voltage 0.5 v
1ov
iv
0.5 v
1ov
IOV
0.5v
0.5v
1ov
IOV
0.5v
i
TSB Revision
FACE switch ON (Output turns OFF 40 seconds after the damper moved to FACE position.) DEF. switch ON (Output turns OFF 40 seconds after the damper moved to DEF. position.)
IOV
0.5 v
55-52
7. Inspection of power transistor and blower motor relay circuits
Ignition switch IG2
Blower motor relay Air conditioner control unit

)lar diatlon nsor
Air conditioner control panel

Fan speed anthmete circw
llower Potor t ?lay
El
1 2 3 4
I
a. T
WY
/ \
2
2OFOO59
Power transistor base
TSB Revision
FULL AUTO AIR CONDITIONER - Troubleshootina SELF-DIAGNOSIS CHECKING
55-53
Self-diagnosis checking is performed when there has been an automatic cancellation, without cancel switch operation. The following method can be used for checking the diagnosis. Note that the diagnosis check connector is located under the drivers side instrument panel.
When multi-use tester is used (1) Read and record the self-diagnosis outputs. (2) Repair the faulty spots by referring to diagnosis chart. (3) Erase the failure code. (4) Check the system again.
r ---.__- - - - -
When voltmeter is used (1) Connect an analog voltmeter across the self-diagnosis output terminal @ and ground terminal @ of the diagnosis connector. (2) Turn ON the ignition switch. (3) According to the voltmeter pointer deflection, read the self-diagnosis pattern. (4) Referring to the diagnosis chart, repair the faulty spot. (5) Erase the failure code by the following procedure. @ Turn OFF the ignition switch. @ Disconnect the battery cable from a battery terminal and leave it disconnected for 10 seconds or more; then, reconnect the cable. @ Turn ON the ignition switch and read the self-diagnosis code to check that the correct code is being output.
2OFOO8:
1 TSB Revision
FULL AUTO AIR CONDITIONER - Troubleskootina

SERVICE DATA
tern no. Inspection point Criteria Method Normal 11 Room-temper- Measure resistance of ature sensor sensor when room temperature is 25C (77F). Measure voltage across terminal @I of air conditioner control unit and ground when room temperature is 25C (77F). Approx. 4 kS1 Abnormal Largely devrates from approx. 4 kll Probable cause Defective room-temperature sensor Open-circuited harness between room-temperature sensor and air condrtioner control unit Poor connection of air conditioner control unit connector or defective air conditioner control unit Defective outside-air sensor Open-crrcuited harness between outside-airtemperature sensor and air conditioner control unit Poor connection of airconditioner control unit connector or defective air conditioner control unit Defective watertemperature sensor Remedy Replace room-temperature sensor. Correct harness.
In approx. 2.3-2.9v range
Outside approx. 2.3-2.9v range Largely deviates from approx. 4 kf2
Correct connector connection or replace air conditioner control unit. Replace outside-airtemperature sensor. Correct harness.
1 3 Outside-airtemperature sensor
Measure resistance of sensor when ambient temperature is 25C (77F). Measure voltage across terminal @of air control conditioner unrt and ground when ambient temperature is 25C (77F).
Approx. 4 kll
In approx. 2.2-2.8V range
Outside approx. 2.2-2.8V range Nonconductive
Correct connector connection or replace air conditioner control unit. Replace watertemperature sensor.
15 Water-temper- Measure resistance of ature sensor sensor when water temperature is 22.5 to 30.5C (57.6 to 86.9F).
Conductive
Measure voltage across Approx. 12 V terminal @ of air conditioner control unit and ground when water temperature is 22.5 to 30.5C (57.6 to 86.9F). -
Open-circuited harness between water-temperature sensor and air conditioner control unit Poor connection of air conditioner control unit connector or defective air conditioner control unit Defective air therm0 sensor
Correct harness.
Largely deviates from approx. 12 V
Correct connector connection or replace air conditioner control unit. Replace air therm0 sensor.
21 Air therm0 sensor
Measure resistance of sensor when sensors sensing temperature is 25C (77F). Measure voltage across termrnal 0 of air conditioner control unit and ground when sensors sensing temperature is 25C (77F).
Approx. 4 kS2
Largely deviates from approx. 4 kb2
In approx. 2.3 - 2.9 V range
Outside approx. 2.3-2.9v range
Open-circuited harness beCorrect harness. tween air therm0 sensor and air conditioner control unit Poor connection of air conditioner control unit connector or defective air conditioner control unit Defective air mix damper potentiometer Correct connector connection or replace air conditioner control unit. Replace air mix damper potentiometer. Correct harness.
31 Air mrx Refer to P. 55-59. damper potentiometer Measure voltage across terminal @of air conditioner control unit and ground when potentiometer is in MAX. COOL position.
In approx. O.l-0.3v range
Open-circuited harness between air mrx damper potentiometer and arr conditioner control unrt Poor connection of air conditioner control unit connector or defective air conditioner control unit Defective outlet selector damper potentiometer
Outside approx. 0.1 -0.3v range
Correct connector connection or replace air conditioner control unit. Replace outlet selector damper potentiometer. Correct harness.
33 Outlet selector damper potentiometer
Refer to P. 55-59. Measure voltage across terminal @of air conditioner control unit and ground when potentiometer is in FACE position. In approx. 0.1 -0.3v range _ Outside approx. 0.1 -0.3v range
Open-circuited harness between outlet selector damper potentiometer and air conditioner control Poor connection of air conditioner control unit connector or defective air conditioner control unit
Correct connector connection or replace air conditioner control unit.
1 TSB Revision

DIAGNOSIS DISPLAY PAlTERNS AND CODES
55-55
Fail safe
/ L
Code 0
Display pattern (output codes) (use with voltmeter) Normal ON
Cause
OFF
Continuous
Open-circuited room-temperature sensor I1 n Short-circuited room-temperature sensor I2 n Open-circuited outside-air sensor I3 n Short-circuited outside-air sensor I4 n
12A0104
Condition in which 25C (77F) is detected
Condition in which 20C (68F) is detected
Open-circuited air therm0 sensor 21 ii 22 nn Short-circuited and open-circuited J-[-u1 a i r1 m i x d a m p e r p o t e n t i o m e t e r -,llJlL Short-circuited air therm0 sensor
Condition in which -2C (-35.6F) is detected
31
MAX. HOT (or MAX. COOL when it is at MAX. COOL) DEF. (or FACE when it is at FACE)
Short-circuited and open-circuited mode selector damper potentiometer 32 nnn

12A0107
Defective air mix damper motor 41, 42 1uuuI nn

12A0105
nnnn Defective mode selector damper motor
NOTE: (1) If two or more abnormal conditions occur at the same time, the code numbers are alternately displayed, in order, repeatedly. (2) The nature of the malfunction is entered and stored in the memory from the time the malfunction occurs until the ignition switch is next turned to OFF.
TSB Revision
55-56
Safety Precautions I Service Adjustment Procedures I - Air Conditioner Control Panel, Air Condiiioner Control Unit
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Same as those given in HEATERS AND MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER. (Refer to P.55-9.)

Same as those given in HEATERS AND MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER. (Refer to P.55-10.)
M55FEAV
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL PANEL, AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL UNIT

hl!XGA-E
2OFOO69
Removal steps *I) 1. Center air outlet assembly
2. Air conditioner control panel 3. Air conditioner control unit
MWSGBAMZ
1. .REMOVAL OF CENTER AIR OUTLET ASSEMBLY Disengaging the clips (2 positions) of the center air outlet assembly with a flat tip screwdriver, remove the center air outlet assembly with a plastic trim stick.
I ij!
FULL AUTO AIR CONDITIONER -
Power Transistor, Belt Lock Controller
55-57
POWER TRANSISTOR, BELT LOCK CONTROLLER

M55LA- -
J
?n
2OFOO73
Power transistor removal steps
1. Stopper 2. Glove box outer case assembly 3. Power transistor
Belt lock controller removal steps
4. Under cover 5. Belt lock controller
1 TSB Revision
55-58
FULL AUTO AIR CONDITIONER - Damper Control Motor As=W
DAMPER CONTROL MOTOR ASSEMBLY

M55VA-
6 \
2OFOO77
Inside/outside-air selector damper motor assembly removal steps
8. Air conditioner control unit 9. Air mix damper motor assembly

Outlet selector damper motor assembly removal steps
1. Stopper 2. Glove box outer case 3. Inside/outside-air selector damper motor assembly
Air mix damper motor assemblyremoval steps
w *a 4. Floor console (Refer to GROUP 52A- Floor Console.) 5. Air conditioner control unit a* 6. Center outlet assembly 7. Air conditioner control panel
IO. Knee protector 11. Side console cover 12. Shower duct and lap cooler duct 13. Outlet selector damper motor assembly
M55vaAA
6. REMOVAL OF CENTER AIR OUTLET ASSEMBLY Disengaging the clips (2 positions) of the center air outlet assembly with a flat tip screwdriver, remove the center air outlet assembly with a plastic trim tool.
driver , ,
20;003
--t
1
1 TSB Revision
FULL AUTO AIR CONDITIONER INSPECTION
Damper Control Motor Assembly
55-59
INSPECTION OF INSIDE/OUTSIDE-AIR DAMPER MOTOR ASSEMBLY Check that the motor rotates when battery voltage is applied to the connector on the motor assembly side. Check also that the motor rotates in the backward direction when polarity is changed. Caution 1. Cut off the voltage when the damper is in the RECIRCULATION or FRESH position. 2. Cut off the voltage if the motor does not turn when battery voltage is applied. INSPECTION OF AIR MIX DAMPER MOTOR Check that the motor rotates when battery voltage is applied across terminals @ and @ of motor assembly side connector. Check also that the motor turns in the backward direction when polarity is changed. Caution 1. Cut off the voltage when the damper is in the MAX. HOT or MAX. COOL position. 2. Cut off the voltage if the motor does not turn when battery voltage is applied. INSPECTION OF AIR MIX DAMPER POTENTIOMETER Connect a circuit tester across terminals @ and @of the motor assembly connector and check that resistance gradually changes as the damper is moved from MAX. HOT to MAX. COOL position. Standard value MAX. HOT: Approx. 0.2 klR MAX. COOL: Approx. 4.9 kR INSPECTION OF OUTLET SELECTOR DAMPER MOTOR Check that the motor turns when battery voltage is applied across terminals @ and @ of the motor assembly connector. Check also that the motor turns in the backward direction when polarity is changed. Caution 1. Cut off the voltage when the damper is in the DEF. or FACE position. 2. Cut off the voltage if the motor does not turn when battery voltage is applied.
I I
INSPECTION OF OUTLET SELECTOR DAMPER POTENTIOMETER Connect a circuit tester across terminals @and @of the motor assembly connector and check that resistance gradually changes as the damper is moved from DEF. to FACE position. Standard value DEF. position: Approx. 2.0 kR FACE position: Approx. 4.3 kfl
TSB Revision
55-60
SENSORS
I
FULL AUTO AIR CONDITIONER - Sensors
M550A- _
I d I
4*
1. Passenger compartment temperature sensor
2OFOO63
Outside air sensor removal steps
2. Stopper 3. Glove box outer case 4. Photo sensor connector connection 5. Photo sensor
Water temperature sensor removal steps
2. Stopper I3: F/it; box outer case assembly 7. Water temperature sensor
Outside-air-temperature sensor removal steps
2. Stopper 3. Glove box outer case assembly 8. Outside-air-temperature sensor -
8
2OFOO75

Passenger compartment temperature sensor
M5506AE
1. REMOVAL OF PASSENGER COMPARTMENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Using the trim stick, remove the passenger compartment temperature sensor from the headlining.
2OPO164
Ll
TSB Revision
FULL AUTO AIR CONDITIONER - Sensors
55-61
5. REMOVAL OF PHOTO SENSOR Using a trim stick, remove the photo sensor from the defroster garnishes.
Thermometer
INSPECTION
M55OcALl
WATER TEMPERATURE SENSOR (1) Dip the water-temperature sensor in hot water and, using a stove, etc., raise the water temperature. (2) Check that the water-temperature sensor is conductive when the water temperature reaches the specified temperature. Standard value: 26.5 + 4C (79.7 + 7.2Fl
2OAO19: 3
OUTSIDE-AIR-TEMPERATURE SENSOR The condition can be considered normal if the resistances are measured within the ranges of 3.98 - 4.12 kilohms and 2.21 2.35 kilohms, respectively, when the outside-air-temperature sensor is submerged in warm water of 25C (77F) and 40C (104F) for one minute or longer each. NOTE The relationship between the outside-air-temperature and the resistance values is as shown below. &$$nt temperature I-10 / 0
(14) (32)
(50)
10
/ i0 1 25
(68) (77)
30 (86)
40 (104)
Resistance value (reference) k0
1 TSB Revision
55-62
Compressor. Condenser, Condenser Fan Motor, Refrigerant - Line and Engine Coolant Temperature Switch / Other Parts
COMPRESSOR, CONDENSER, CONDENSER FAN MOTOR, REFRIGERANT LINE AND ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SWITCH
M55TA-B
ii
The service procedures are the same as those for manual air conditioner except for those parts described below on turbocharged vehicles.
Compressor, condenser and condenser fan motor, refrigerant line removal steps
l * l +
I. Air hose B
2. Air pipe
Engine coolant temperature switch removal steps

NOTE Torque hose clamps to 4 Nm (2.9 ftlbs.).
l *
*a
3. Air hose A 4. Air intake hose A 5. Air intake hose B

M55iDAF
Air intake hose B
5. INSTALLATION OF AIR INTAKE HOSE B / 4. AIR INTAKE HOSE A Align the cutouts in air intake hose A indicated by arrows with the n markings on air intake hoses B and C and insert hoses B and C all the way into hose A. Insert the other end of air intake hose B all the way into turbocharger side.
OSFOO23
Align7ment marks Hose end: Paint mar Pipe end: Protrusron
2. INSTALLATION OF AIR PIPE / 1. AIR HOSE B When installing the air hoses, make sure that the alignment marks at places indicated by arrows are properly aligned. Insert each air hose until it hits the root of step or it bottoms. Caution Be careful not to allow any foreign matter to get into the hoses, pipes, or the intercooler itself.
OTHER PARTS
Part name Heater Unit Blower Motor Assembly Evaporator - Removal and Installation Ref. page P.55-22 P.55-23 P.55-25 Part name
M55WA- -
Service procedures for other parts are the same as those in HEATERS AND MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER.
Ref. page P.55-26 P.55-29
Evaporator - Disassembly and Reassembly Compressor - Disassembly and Reassembly Ventilators
1 TSB Revision
HY009015-1132

1991 ServiceManual Mitsubishi 3000GT

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

1991 ServiceManual Mitsubishi 3000GT

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

1991 ServiceManual Mitsubishi 3000GT

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Volume lm

Engine, Chassis & Body

Engine .............................................. BackupServiceManual L Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cooling ............................................. Intake and Exhaust ..........................

WE SUPPORT VOLUNTARY TECHNICIAN CERTIFICATION THROUGH

Steering ............................................ 4-Wheel Steering System (4WS) Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..*.............................

AUTOMOTIVE SERVICE EXCELLSNCE

Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..*..........**............. Interior ..*............*......*....................... Su;$emental Restraint System ....

MOTOR SALES OF AMERICA. Inc.

Heater, Air Conditioner *......*........... and Ventilation

NOTE: For Electrical, refer to Volume-2 Electrical I I

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)

Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._............... 37 ........................................................ 37 24

MASTER TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRECAUTIONS BEFORE SERVICE ................

Scope of Maintenance, Repair and Servicing Explanations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . .._.......................................

LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

MAIN SEALANT AND ADHESIVE TABLE MAINTENANCE SERVICE

Fuel Hoses ..__......__............................................ 36

GENERAL - How to Use This Manual

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL c;

SERVICE ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES

INDICATION OF TIGHTENING TORQUE

GENERAL - How to Use This Manual EXPLANATION OF MANUAL CONTENTS

Maintenance and Servicing Procedures

Classifications of Major Maintenance/Service Points

Indicates (by symbols) where lubrication is necessary. In this example,

Symbols for Lubrication, Sealants and Adhesives

GENERAL - How to Use This Manual

POWER STEERING GEAR BOX

Denotes non-reusable part.

SERVICE POINTS OF REMOVALJ6. Ol6CONN6CTtON OF TIE-ROD END

REMOVAL OF GEAR 60X ASSEMBLY

Steering Gwr Box

GENERAL - How to Use This Manual

EXPLANATION OF THE TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

lndrcates connectors terminal number. t

for each sensor nn order 10 convert the smbnen,

Indicates the check to be made. t

sensor wwsr SUPPI Relngeran,.,emwrature

Passenger Compa*me,-tempera. lyre sensor 1 17 j Air-thermostat sensor

GENERAL - How to Use This Manual EXPLANATION OF CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS

The broken (----I line indicates the same connector.

GENERAL - Vehicle Identification

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER LOCATION

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION CODE CHART PLATE

XDriver Air Bag, Fa;;;;ger Seat Belt

D3000GT FWD E3000GT AWD

sPremium 6 Special 7Ultimate

B3.0 liters (181.4 win.)

L:oHC-MPl 3.0 liters 1 (181.4 cu.in.1 [DOHC-MPITurbo]

GENERAL - Vehicle Identification VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER LIST

VEHICLES FOR CALIFORNIA

NOTE AWD marked with * can also be sold in Federal States. *

3.0 liters (181.4 cu.in.1 [DOHC-MPI-Turbo]

GENERAL - Vehicle Identification VEHICLE INFORMATION CODE PLATE

ZllAMNXMLZM L2iie zze[

2. ENGINE 3. EXT 4. TRANSAXLE 5. COLOR, INT

CHASSIS NUMBER CODE CHART ZlOA MY[7000~10

.*: @I @+!j grS,.$ .,: .S?b, <I 1 0 t / ~~~nf k

Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..*..........**............. Interior ....................*....................... Su;$emental Restraint System ....

Heater, Air Conditioner ................. and Ventilation

Fuel Hoses .................................................... 36